3 Com Com Ref

3Com Router Command
Reference Guide
3Com Router 3000 DSL Family

3Com Router 5000 Family
3Com Router 6000 Family
http://www.3com.com/
Part No. 10014369

Published June 2004
3Com Corporation Copyright © 2004, 3Com Corporation. All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be
350 Campus Drive reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work (such as translation,
Marlborough, MA transformation, or adaptation) without written permission from 3Com Corporation.
01752-3064
3Com Corporation reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from
time to time without obligation on the part of 3Com Corporation to provide notification of such revision or
change.
3Com Corporation provides this documentation without warranty, term, or condition of any kind, either
implied or expressed, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties, terms or conditions of
merchantability, satisfactory quality, and fitness for a particular purpose. 3Com may make improvements or
changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this documentation at any time.
If there is any software on removable media described in this documentation, it is furnished under a license
agreement included with the product as a separate document, in the hard copy documentation, or on the
removable media in a directory file named LICENSE.TXT or!LICENSE.TXT. If you are unable to locate a copy,
please contact 3Com and a copy will be provided to you.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGEND
If you are a United States government agency, then this documentation and the software described herein
are provided to you subject to the following:
All technical data and computer software are commercial in nature and developed solely at private expense.
Software is delivered as “Commercial Computer Software” as defined in DFARS 252.227-7014 (June 1995)
or as a “commercial item” as defined in FAR 2.101(a) and as such is provided with only such rights as are
provided in 3Com’s standard commercial license for the Software. Technical data is provided with limited
rights only as provided in DFAR 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995) or FAR 52.227-14 (June 1987), whichever is
applicable. You agree not to remove or deface any portion of any legend provided on any licensed program
or documentation contained in, or delivered to you in conjunction with, this User Guide.
Unless otherwise indicated, 3Com registered trademarks are registered in the United States and may or may
not be registered in other countries.
3Com and the 3Com logo are registered trademarks of 3Com Corporation.
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, and
Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Novell and NetWare are registered
trademarks of Novell, Inc.
All other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are
associated.
CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS GUIDE

Conventions 7
Related Documentation 8
1 CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Basic Configuration Commands 9
2 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE & MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

debugging 23
Information Processing Commands 31
System Operating Management Commands - AR46 Series 48
File Management Commands 55
FTP Server Configuration Commands 65
FTP client module commands 69
TFTP Configuration Commands 79
Configuration Files Management Commands 81
User Interface Configuration Commands 86
debugging ntp-service 102
SNMP Configuration Commands 115
Terminal Service Commands 134
SSH Configuration Commands 136
3 INTERFACE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Interface Management Commands 149
Fundamental Ethernet Interface Configuration Commands 154
Fundamental WAN Interface Configuration Commands 158
Fundamental CE1/PRI Interface Configuration Commands 165
Fundamental CT1/PRI Interface Configuration Commands 172
E1-F Interface Configuration Commands 178
T1-F Interface Configuration Commands 183
Fundamental CE3 Interface Configuration Commands 188
Fundamental CT3 Interface Configuration Commands 196
ATM E3/T3 Interface Configuration Commands 205
ATM 25M Interface Configuration Commands 209
ATM OC-3c/STM-1 Interface Configuration Commands 210
G.SHDSL Interface Configuration Commands 213
ADSL Interface Configuration Commands 219
Fundamental Logical Interface Configuration Commands 227
Logic-Channel Interface 229
Configuration Command of Virtual Template and Virtual Access Interface 230
MP-group Interface Configuration Command 232
Virtual Ethernet Interface Configuration Command 234
Configuration Command of Loopback Interface and Null Interface 236
4 LINK LAYER PROTOCOL

PPP and MP Configuration Commands 239
PPPoE Server Configuration Commands 253
PPPoE Client Configuration Commands 256
VLAN Configuration Commands 260
ISDN Configuration Commands 264
SLIP Configuration Commands 288
HDLC Configuration Commands 289
Frame Relay Configuration Commands 291
ATM Configuration Commands 324
LAPB and X.25 Configuration Commands 350
5 NETWORK PROTOCOL
IP Address Configuration Commands 397
ARP Configuration Commands 401
Static Domain Name Resolution 404
DHCP Public Configuration Commands 405
DHCP Server Configuration Commands 408
DHCP Client Configuration Commands 433
DHCP Relay Configuration Commands 436
IP Performance Configuration Commands 440
NAT Configuration Commands 460
IP Unicast Policy Routing Configuration Commands 467
IP Multicast Policy Routing Configuration Commands 474
IPX Configuration Commands 479
DLSw Configuration Commands 506
6 ROUTING PROTOCOL
Display Commands of the Routing Table 533
Static Route Configuration Commands 543
RIP Configuration Commands 545
OSPF Configuration Commands 560
Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands 599
BGP Configuration Commands 626
MBGP Configuration Commands 664
IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands 667
Route Capacity Configuration Commands 681
7 MULTICAST COMMON CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Multicast Common Configuration Commands 687
IGMP Configuration Commands 697
PIM Configuration Commands 708
MSDP Configuration Commands 725
MBGP Multicast Extension Configuration Commands 740
Multicast Static Route Configuration Commands 753
8 MPLS BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS

LDP Configuration Commands 769
BGP/MPLS VPN Configuration Commands 780
MPLS L2VPN CCC Configuration Commands 802
SVC MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands 807
Martini MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands 808
Kompella MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands 809
MPLS TE Configuration Commands 815
Conventions 7
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
This guide describes the 3Com® Router Commands as implemeted through the
Command Line Interface (CLI) of the router.
This guide is intended for the system or network administrator who is responsible
for configuring, using, and managing the routers. It assumes a working
knowledge of wide area network (WAN) operations and familiarity with
communication protocols that are used to interconnect WANs.
Always download the Release Notes for your product from the 3Com World Wide
Web site for the latest updates to product documentation:
http://www.3com.com
Conventions Table 1 and Table 2 list conventions that are used throughout this guide.
Table 1 Notice Icons
Icon Notice Type Description

Information note Information that describes important features or
instructions.
Caution Information that alerts you to potential loss of data

or potential damage to an application, system, or
device.
Warning Information that alerts you to potential personal

injury.
Table 2 Text Conventions
Convention Description
Screen This typeface represents information as it appears on the screen.

displays
Keyboard key If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are
names linked with a plus sign (+), for example:
Press Ctrl+Alt+Del
The words “enter” When you see the word “enter” in this guide, you must type
and type” something, and then press Return or Enter. Do not press Return or
Enter when an instruction simply says “type.”
8 CHAPTER : ABOUT THIS GUIDE
Words in italics Italics are used to:

Emphasize a point.
Denote a new term at the place where it is defined in the text.
Identify menu names, menu commands, and software button names.
Examples:
From the Help menu, select Contents.
Click OK.
Words in bold Boldface type is used to highlight command names in text. For
example, “Use the display user-interface command to...”
Related The following manuals offer additional information necessary for managing your
Documentation 3Com Router:
■ 3Com Router 3000 DSL, 3Com Router 5000, and 3Com Router 6000 Family
Installation Guides — Provides detailed descriptions of each of the individual
router families and specific information on installing the routers.
■ 3Com Router Configuration Guide— Describes how to configure your Router
6000 using the supported protocols and CLI commands.
■ Release Notes — Contains the latest information about your product. If
information in this guide differs from information in the release notes, use the
information in the Release Notes.
These documents are available in Adobe Acrobat Reader Portable Document

Format (PDF) on the CD-ROM that accompanies your router or on the 3Com
World Wide Web site:
http://www.3com.com/
CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
1
This chapter describes how to use the following commands:
Basic Configuration Commands
■ Clock Summer Times

■ clock datetime
■ clock timezone
■ command-privilege
■ display clipboard
■ display clock
■ display history-command
■ display version
■ header3Com
■ hotkey
■ language-mode
■ lock
■ quit
■ Reboot
■ return
■ super
■ super password
■ sysname
■ system-view
Basic Configuration
Commands
Clock Summer Times Syntax
clock summer-time zone_name { absolute | recurring } HH:MM:SS

YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
undo clock summer-time
View
User view
10 CHAPTER 1: CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter
zone_name: Name of the summer time, which is a character string of 1

to 32 characters.
absolute: Only sets the summer time of some year.
recurring: Sets the summer time of every year starting from some
year.
HH:MM:SS: Time (hour/minute/second).
YYYY/MM/DD: Date (year/month/day).
Description
■ Using the clock summer-time command, you can set the name, starting and
ending time of the summer time. Using the undo clock summer-time
command, you can remove the configuration of the summer time.
■ After the configuration takes effect, you can use the display clock command
to make the verification. Besides, the time of the log or debug information will
be the local time on which the adjustment of the time zone and summer time
has been made.
For related command, see clock timezone.
Example
Add one hour to the clock for the summer time z2 that starts at 06:00:00 on
2002/06/08 and ends at 06:00:00 on 2002/09/01.
<3Com> clock summer-time z2 absolute 06:00:00 2002/06/08 06:00:00

2002/09/01 01:00:00
# Add one hour to the clock each year starting from 2002 for the
summer time z2 that starts at 06:00:00 on 08/06 and ends at 06:00:00
on 01/09.
<3Com> clock summer-time z2 recurring 06:00:00 2002/06/08 06:00:00
2002/09/01 01:00:00
clock datetime Syntax
clock datetime HH:MM:SS YYYY/MM/DD
View
User view
Parameter
YYYY/MM/DD: Date (year/month/day) in the range of 1993 to 2035.
Description
Using the clock datetime command, you can set the time and date.
After the configuration takes effect, you can verify it by executing the display
clock command. The time applied to the log and debug information has been
adjusted.
Example
Set the current system time to 10:20:55 2003/04/05.
<3Com> clock datetime 10:20:55 2003/04/05
clock timezone Syntax

clock timezone zone_name { add | minus } HH:MM:SS
undo clock timezone
View
User view
Parameter
zone_name: Timezone name, which is a string of 1 to 32 characters.
add: Adds the time on the basis of Universal Time Coordinated (UTC)
timezone.
minus: Reduces the time on the basis of UTC timezone.
Description
Using the clock timezone command, you can set information of the local
timezone. Using the undo clock timezone command, you can restore the local
timezone to the default UTC timezone.
After the configuration takes effect, you can view it by executing the display
clock command. The time applied to the log and debug information has been
adjusted according to the involved timezone and summer time.
For related command, see clock summer-time.
Example
Set the local timezone name to Z5 and set Z5 to be five hours faster than UTC
time.
<3Com> clock timezone z5 add 05:00:00
command-privilege Syntax
command-privilege level level view view command-key
undo command-privilege view view command-key
View
System view
Parameter
level level: Command priority ranging from 0 to 3.
view view: View. The command line provides the following views:
1 shell: View of current user level.
2 system: System view
3 Routing protocol view: Include ospf (OSPF view), rip (RIP view), bgp (BGP view),
isis (IS-IS view), etc.
4 Interface view: Include ethernet (FE), gigabitethernet (GE), serial (serial

interface), ce1 (cE1 interface), ce3 (E3 interface), ct1 (cT1 interface), atm (ATM
interface), pos (POS interface), virtual-template (virtual interface template),
virtual-ethernet (virtual Ethernet interface), loopback (Loopback interface), null
(Null interface), tunnel (Tunnel interface).
5 user-interface: User view
6 l2tp-group: System view of L2TP group.
7 route-policy: Route map view
Refer to "Command Line Views" section in the Operation Manual for more
details.
commandkey: Command to be set.
Description
Using the command-privilege command, you can set the command level in the
specified view. Using the undo command-privilege view command, you can
remove current settings.
Command priority fall into such 4 levels as access, monitor, configure and manage
that are identified with 0 to 3. The administrator can grant certain rights to a user
on its demand so that the user can operate in the related view. When the user
logging in, the system can set the command operation rights for it either
according to the rights corresponding to the user name, or based on the rights of
the user-interface. If the two sets of rights conflict, the minimum rights will be
adopted.
By default, the command level of the ping, tracert and telnet commands is
access (level 0), the command level of the display and debugging commands is
monitor (level 1), that of configuration commands is configure (level 2), and the
commands for user key setting, FTP, XMODEM, TFTP and file system operation fit
into commands of manage-level (level 3).
Example
Set the priority of the “interface” command to 0.
[3Com] command-privilege level 0 view system interface
display clipboard Syntax

display clipboard
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display clipboard command, you can display the contents of
clipboard.
Example
Display the contents of clipboard.
<3Com> display clipboard
-----------------clipboard -----------------
ip route 10.1.0.0 255.0.0.0 eth 0
display clock Syntax

display clock
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display clock command, you can display the clock status and the
configuration information.
Example
Display the current time.
<3Com> display clock

19:22:03 UTC Sat 2054/03/07
display Syntax
history-command display history-command
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display history-command command, you can browse the history
commands.
The terminal will automatically save the history commands typed by the user, that
is, completely record the user's input (via keyboard) separated by "Enter".
For the related command, see history-command size.
Example
Display history commands.
<3Com> display history-command

show interface
show interface e 1/0/0

c
in e 1/0/0
display version Syntax

display version
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display version command, you can browse system version information.
Through viewing system version information, you will learn about the software
version in use, rack type and the information related to the main processing board
and interface cards.
Example
Display system version information of a 3Com R1760 router.
<3Com> display version
3Com Versatile Routing Platform Software
VRP(tm) software, Version 3.30
Copyright (c) 2000-2002 3Com Corporation.
3Com Serial Router R1760
System has kept running 0weeks, 0days, 0hours, 15minutes
CPU type Powerpc8241 166Mhz
64M bytes SDRAM
8M bytes Flash Memory
Pcb Version:001
Logic Version:001
BootROM Version:0.0
Slot0: WAN (pcb)001 (software)000 (logic)001
header3Com Syntax
header [ shell | incoming | login ] text
undo header [ shell | incoming | login ]
View
System view
Parameter
login: Greeting information when login.
shell: Greeting information of the creation of a user session.
incoming: Greeting information when login to the user view.

text: Content of greeting information.
Description
Using the header command, you can set the greeting information to be displayed.
Using the undo header command, you can remove the preset greeting
information.
When a user is logging on to a router via a terminal line, the router prompts
related information through setting title attribute. After activating the terminal
connection, the router sends the login title to the terminal. If the user log on to
the router successfully, the shell greeting information will be displayed.
text takes the first English character as the start and end characters. After the end
character is input, the system will quit the interactive process automatically.
If you do not want to start the interactive process, make sure that the first and last
characters of the text are the same English character and press <Enter> directly.
Example
Configure a session creation title.
[3Com] header shell %
Enter TEXT message. End with the character '%'.
SHELL : Hello! Welcome use 3Com R1760.%
# Test the configuration.
[3Com] quit
<3Com> quit
Press RETURN to get started
SHELL : Hello! Welcome use 3Com R1760.

<3Com>
hotkey Syntax
hotkey [ CTRL_G | CTRL_L | CTRL_O | CTRL_T | CTRL_U ] command_text
undo hotkey [ CTRL_G | CTRL_L | CTRL_O | CTRL_T | CTRL_U ]
View
System view
Parameter
CTRL_G: Specify a command for the hotkey <CTRL+G>.
CTRL_L: Specify a command for the hotkey <CTRL+L>.
CTRL_O: Specify a command for the hotkey <CTRL+O>.
CTRL_T: Specify a command for the hotkey <CTRL+T>.
CTRL_U: Specify a command for the hotkey <CTRL+U>.
command_text: The command line correlated with the hotkey.

Description
Using the hotkey command, you can correlate a command line with a hotkey.
Using the undo hotkey command, you can recover the default value of the system.
By default, CTRL_G, CTRL_L and CTRL_O correspond to the following

commands respectively:
display current-configuration (display current configuration);

display ip routing-table (display routing table information);
undo debugging all (disable the overall debugging function, that is,
disable the output of all debugging information).
You can change the definitions on your demand. The default values for the other
hotkeys are null.
Example
Correlate the display tcp status command with the hotkey CTRL_T.
[3Com] hotkey ctrl_t display tcp status
[3Com] display hotkey
----------------- HOTKEY -----------------
=Defined hotkeys=
Hotkeys Command
CTRL_G display current-configuration
CTRL_L display ip routing-table
CTRL_O undo debug all
CTRL_T display tcp status
=Undefined hotkeys=
Hotkeys Command
CTRL_U NULL
=System hotkeys=
Hotkeys Function
CTRL_A Move the cursor to the beginning of the current line.
CTRL_B Move the cursor one character left.
CTRL_C Stop current command function.
CTRL_D Erase current character.
CTRL_E Move the cursor to the end of the current line.
CTRL_F Move the cursor one character right.
CTRL_H Erase the character left of the cursor.
CTRL_K Kill outgoing connection.
CTRL_N Display the next command from the history buffer.
CTRL_P Display the previous command from the history buffer.
CTRL_R Redisplay the current line.
CTRL_V Paste text from the clipboard.
CTRL_W Delete the word left of the cursor.
CTRL_X Delete all characters up to the cursor.
CTRL_Y Delete all characters after the cursor.
CTRL_Z Return to the user view.
CTRL_] Kill incoming connection or redirect connection.
ESC_B Move the cursor one word back.
ESC_D Delete remainder of word.
ESC_F Move the cursor forward one word.
ESC_N Move the cursor down a line.
ESC_P Move the cursor up a line.
ESC_< Specify the beginning of clipboard.

ESC_> Specify the end of clipboard.
language-mode Syntax
language-mode { chinese | english }
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the language-mode command, you can switch between different language
modes of command line interface.
By default, the language mode is English.
The command line interface of the system also supports Chinese mode to fit into
domestic users in China.
Example
Switch from English mode to Chinese mode.
<3Com> language-mode chinese
Change language mode, confirm? [Y/N]y
% Switch to Chinese mode.
lock Syntax
lock
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the lock command, you can lock the active user interface to prevent
unauthorized user from operating the interface.
A user interface includes CON port, AUX port and VTY, etc.
After inputting the lock command, the user is prompted to enter the screensaver's
password and confirm the password. If the two passwords are the same, the
interface will be successfully locked. To enter the system once again, you must
press <Enter> first, and enter the preset password following the prompt.
Example
Log in from the CON port and lock the active user interface.
<3Com> lock
Password:
Again:
quit Syntax
quit
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the quit command, you can quit from the active view to a lower-level view
(if the active view is user view, you will exit the system).
Views fall into three levels that are, in ascending order:
■ User view (with user level as 0)

■ System view (with user level as 3)
■ Configuration view (routing protocol view, interface view, VPDN group view,
etc)
For the related command, see return.
Example
Switch from Ethernet1/0/0 interface view to system view, and then to user view.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] quit
[3Com] quit
<3Com>
Reboot Syntax
reboot
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reboot command, you can reboot the device.
This command produces the same effect as the power is turned on and then on,
but provides the user with a convenient method of rebooting the device from a
remote site.
The operation of this command will render the network unusable for a short
period of time. So it should be used with caution. Before rebooting the Router,
remember to save the configuration file if necessary,
Example
Reboot the device.
<3Com> reboot
System will reboot! Continue?[Y/N]
return Syntax
return
View
Any view, except user view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the return command, you can return to user view from any other views. The
combination key <Ctrl+Z> performs the same function as the return command.
For the related command, see quit.
Example
Return to user view from system view.
[3Com] return
<3Com>
super Syntax
super [ level ]
View
User view
Parameter
Level: User level ranging from 0 to 3.
Description
Using the super command, you can switch from current user level to a specified
level.
User level refers to the class of a login user. There are 4 user levels corresponding
to 4 command levels. After a user of certain level logs in, it can only use the
commands of the same or lower level.
There are 4 command levels, namely access, monitor, configure and manage, as
follows:
■ Access: Include the network diagnosis tool commands (ping, tracert),

commands for accessing an external device from local device (including Telnet
client, SSH client, RLOGIN), etc. Commands of this level cannot perform
configuration file saving operation.
■ Monitor: Commands used for system maintenance, service fault diagnosis and
so on, including the display and debugging commands. Commands of this
level cannot perform configuration file saving operation.
■ Configure: Service configuration commands, including routing commands and
commands of various network layers. Commands of this level provide direct
network services for users.
■ Manage: Commands related to basic system running and system support
modules. These commands provide support for various services. Commands of
this level include file system, FTP, TFTP, Xmodem download and configuration
file switchover commands, power control commands, standby board control
commands, user management commands, level setting commands, system
internal parameter setting commands (not being provided in protocols or RFC
documentation), etc.
To prevent unauthorized users from intruding the system, you must pass the
authentication when you are trying to switch from current user to a higher-level
user. This means that you must enter the password of the higher-level user (if
the super password [ level user-level ] { simple | cipher } line command is
configured). For the sake of security, your entered password is not directly
displayed on the screen. If you enter the correct password within three times,
you will be able to switch to the higher-level user, or you will stay at current
level.
For the related command, see super password.
Example
<3Com> super 3
Password:
User privilege changes to 3 level, just equal or less this level's
commands can be used.
Privilege note: 0-VISIT, 1-MONITOR, 2-SYSTEM, 3-MANAGE
super password Syntax

super password [ level user-level ] { simple | cipher } password
undo super password [ level user-level ]
View
System view
Parameter
user-level: User level ranging from 0 to 3.
simple: Configure simple text password.
cipher: Configure cipher text password.

password: Content of password. A simple text password is a consecutive

character string with the length no more than 16, such as 1234567. A cipher
text password has 24 characters in length, and is in the format of
"_(TT8F]Y\5SQ=^Q`MAF4<1!!".
Description
Using the super password command, you can set the password need to switch
from a lower-level user to a higher-level user. Using the undo super password
command, you can remove the current setting.
By default, simple text password is adopted.
Example
Execute the following command in system view:
[3Com] super password level 3 simple zbr
sysname Syntax
sysname sysname
View
System view
Parameter
sysname: Name of the router. It is a character string containing 1 to 30 characters.
Description
Using the sysname command, you can set the name of a router.
By default, a router is named "3Com".
Modification to a router's name will affect the prompt of the command line
interface. For example, if the router's name is "3Com", the prompt of user view
will be "<3Com>".
Example
Set the name of the router to R1760.
[3Com] sysname R1760
[R1760]
system-view Syntax
system-view
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the system-view command, you can enter system view from current user
view.
For the related command, see quit, return.
Example
<3Com> system-view
Enter system view , return user view with Ctrl+Z.
[3Com]
System Maintenance & Management
2 Commands
Add Chapter introduction here. This information should ONLY be about what the
chapter contains.
Network Test Tool Commands
debugging Syntax
debugging { all | module-name [ debug-option1 ] [ debug-option2 ] …}
undo debugging { all | module-name [ debug-option1 ] [ debug-option2 ] … }
View
User view
Parameter
all: Enables or disables all the debugging switches.
module-name: Module name.
debug-option: Debugging option.
Description
Using the debug command, you can enable system debugging. Using the undo
debug command, you can disable system debugging.
By default, the system disables all the debugging switches.
The router system provides a variety of debugging functions mainly for the
support technicians and senior maintenance engineers to perform network fault
diagnosis.
Enabling debugging will generate a large amount of debugging information that

can result in decrease in system efficiency. This is especially the case when the
command debugging all is executed to enable all the debugging switches. An
extreme aftermath of doing so is the system paralysis. For these reasons, you are
recommended not to use the command debugging all. On the contrary, using
undo debugging all will bring you great convenience because you can disable all
the debugging switches at a time rather than disabling them one by one.
For related command, see display debugging.

24 CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM MAINTENANCE & MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Example
Enable IP packet debugging.
display debugging Syntax
display debugging [ interface interface-type interface-number] [ module-name ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-type: Interface type.
interface-number: Interface number.
Description
Using the display debugging command, you can display the enabled debugging
switches.
By default, no parameters have been defined and all the enabled debugging
switches are displayed.
For related command, see debugging.
Example
Display all the enabled debugging switches.
<3Com> display debugging

IP packet debugging switch is on.
display Syntax
diagnostic-information display diagnostic-information
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display diagnostic-information command, you can display the operating
information of all the active modules of the system and collect all the information
at a time so as to isolate the problem when failure occurs to the system.
debugging 25
In case failures occur to the system, lots of information needs to be collected for
the convenience of isolating the problems. However, it is rather difficult for you to
collect all the information at a time as there are many display commands involved.
In this case, you can use the display diagnostic-information command to collect
the operating information of all the active modules in the system.
Example
Display the technical support information.
<3Com> display diagnostic-information

------------------ display version ------------------
3Com3Com Versatile Routing Platform Software

VRP 3600E Software Version VRPV3R001M06B03D003, DEBUG SOFTWARE
Copyright (c) 2000-2003 by VRP Team Beijing Institute 3Com Tech, Inc
Compiled Mar 24 2003 20:28:31 by zhaomin
------------------ display running-config ------------------

#
sysname 3Com
#
------------------ display history commands ------------------
display diagnostic-information
------------------ display tasks ------------------
ID Name Priority Status CPU Time

1 WEIL 10 Ready 10/20
2 SYST 180 Ready 0/7
3 XMON 140 Event Sem 0/0
4 VMON 140 Event Sem 41/41
5 INFO 100 Event Sem 1/6
6 co0 100 Ready 0/3178
7 LDP 100 Event Sem 1/299
8 LAGT 100 Queue Sem 0/1
9 Clon 100 Event Sem 0/0
10 ROUT 100 Event Sem 0/172
11 FIB 100 Event Sem 0/178
12 SOCK 100 Event Sem 0/47961
13 VTYD 100 Event Sem 0/25
14 IPSP 100 Event Sem 0/537
15 IKE 100 Event Sem 1/20
16 RSA 100 Event Sem 1/94
17 RDUS 100 Delay 1/1574
18 L2TP 100 Event Sem 0/14
19 TNLM 100 Event Sem 0/0
20 AGNT 100 Event Sem 0/4904
21 TRAP 100 Queue Sem 0/0
22 MDMT 100 Queue Sem 0/3
23 NTPT 100 Delay 0/7
24 PIMT 100 Delay 0/7
25 CFM 100 Queue Sem 363/1355
26 LSPM 100 Delay 0/414
27 L2V 100 Delay 0/6
28 VRRP 100 Event Sem 0/0
------------------ display memory ------------------
Slice Memory Usage:
Block Size 32 Free 960 Used 60134 Total 61094

-----------------------------Summary--------------------------------
Used(Byte) 8646848 Free 1317 Used 98927 Total 100244
Total Slice Memory(Include Control Data and Free Slice): 10742144

bytes
Raw Slice Memory Usage:
Total Size: 10501832 bytes Num: 77
Total Raw Slice Memory(Include Control Data and Free Slice):
12606400 bytes
System Total Memory(bytes): 33541536
------------------ display interfaces ------------------
Atm1/0/0 is down , line protocol is down

Description : 3Com, 3Com Series, Atm1/0/0 Interface
The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Internet protocol processing : disabled
AAL enabled: AAL5, Maximum VCs: 32
Current VCs: 0 (0 on main interface)
5 minutes input rate 0.00 bytes/sec, 0.00 packets/sec
5 minutes output rate 0.00 bytes/sec, 0.00 packets/sec
0 packets input, 0 bytes
0 packets output, 0 bytes
0 input errors, 0 CRCs, 0 giants, 0 pads, 0 aborts,0 overflows
0 output errors, 0 underflows, 0 overflows
NULL0 is up , line protocol is up (spoofing)

Description : 3Com, 3Com Series, NULL0 Interface
Serial0/0/0 is down , line protocol is down

Description : 3Com, 3Com Series, Serial0/0/0 Interface
The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500, The keepalive is 10(sec)
Encapsulation is PPP
LCP initial
FIFO queuing: (Outbound queue:Size/Length/Discards)
FIFO: 0/75/0
Physical layer is synchronous,Baudrate is 64000 bps, Interface is no
cable
debugging 27
0 packets input, 0 bytes, 0 no buffers

0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 no buffers
0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame errors
0 overrunners, 0 aborted sequences, 0 input no buffers
DCD=DOWN DTR=DOWN DSR=DOWN RTS=DOWN CTS=DOWN
ping Syntax
ping [ -a X.X.X.X | -c count | -d | -h ttl_value | -i { interface-type interface-number }

| ip | -n | - p pattern | -q | -r | -s packetsize | -t timeout | -v | vpn-instance
vpn-instance-name ] * host
View
Any view
Parameter
-a X.X.X.X: Sets the source IP address where ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packets can be
sent.
-c count: Times that ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packets are sent. It is ranging from 1 to
4294967295.
-d: Sets socket to DEBUG mode.
-h ttl_value: Sets the value of TTL_value, which is ranging from 1 to 255.
-i: Sets the interface for sending ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packets.
interface-type: Interface type
interface-number: Interface number
-n: Directly uses the host parameter as IP address without domain name
resolution.
-p pattern: The filling byte of ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet in hexadecimal format,

with the value ranging from 0 to FFFFFFFF. For example, if the parameter is set to
-p ff, the entire packet will be filled with ff.
-q: Displays statistic figures rather than details.
-r: Records routes.
-s packetsize: The length of ECHO-REQUEST packet (excluding IP and ICMP

headers), which is in the range of 20 to 8100 bytes.
-t timeout: Timeout in milliseconds waiting for ECHO-RESPONSE upon completion

of sending ECHO-REQUEST, in the range from 0 to 65535.
-v: Displays the received ICMP packets other than ECHO-RESPONSE packets.
vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Sets the vpn-instance name of MPLS VPN to

specify the VPN attribute configured in this ping command, that is, name of the
associated vpn-instance created at the local.
host: Domain name or IP address of destination host.
ip: IP protocol is used.
Description
Using the ping command, you can check the IP network connection and whether
the host is reachable.
If the above parameters have not been specified, the following default settings will
be used:
An ECHO-REQUEST packet is sent for 5 times at most.
Socket is non-DEBUG mode.
Host is first regarded as an IP address. If it is not an IP address, domain name

resolution will be performed.
The filling begins at 0x01 and increases gradually until 0x09 and then repeats.
All information including statistics is displayed.
Router is not recorded.
The length of ECHO-REQUEST packet is 56 bytes.
The timeout time waiting for an ECHO-RESPONSE packet is 2000ms.
The ICMP packets other than ECHO-RESPONSE packets are not displayed.
The parameter vpn-instance is not defined.
Following is the process of executing the ping command:
A host sends an ICMP ECHO-REQUEST to a destination. If the connection to the

destination network is working normally, the destination host will be able to
receive the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet and send an ICMP ECHO-REPLY packet
back to the source host.
The ping command can be used to test the network for connection failure or
network line quality problem. The output information includes:
The state of the reply that a destination has made to each ECHO-REQUEST. It will
be “Request time out." if no reply has been received upon the expiration of the
timeout time. Otherwise, the state information will include the bytes of the reply
packet, packet sequence number, TTL, reply time etc.
The last statistic information includes the count of packets sent, the count of reply
packets received, the percentage of the packets that have no reply, and the
minimum, maximum, and average reply time settings.
debugging 29
If the network transmission is slow, you can appropriately prolong the timeout
time waiting for reply.
For related command, see tracert.
Example
Check the reachability of the host at 202.38.160.244.
<3Com> ping 202.38.160.244

ping 202.38.160.244 : 56 data bytes , press CTRL-C to break
Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=1 ttl=255 time = 1ms
--202.38.160.244 ping statistics--
5 packets transmitted
5 packets received
0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 1/2/3 ms
reboot Syntax
reboot
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reboot command, you can reboot the device.
This command produces the same effect as the power is turned off and then on,
but provides the user with a convience method of rebooting the device from a
remote site.
The operation of this command will render the network unusable for a short
period of time. So it should be used with caution. Before rebooting the Router,
remember to save the configuration file if necessary,.
Example
Reboot the device.
<3Com> reboot
System will reboot! Continue?[Y/N]
tracert Syntax
tracert [ -a X.X.X.X | -f first_TTL | -m max_TTL | -p port | -q nqueries | vpn-instance

vpn-instance-name | -w timeout ] * host
View
Any view
Parameter
-a: Specifies source IP address of the tracert packets, which is in the format of
X.X.X.X and must be the address of a local interface.
-f: Tests the correctness of the –f switch with first_TTL specifying an initial TTL in
the range of 0 to the maximum TTL.
-m: Tests the correctness of the –m switch with max_TTL specifying a maximum
TTL which can be any TTL larger than the initial TTL.
-p: Tests the correctness of the –p switch with port being an integer specifying the
port of the destination host. There is no need to change this option in normal
circumstances.
-q: Tests the correctness of the –q switch with nqueries specifying the number of
the query packets sent each time. It can be any integer larger than 0.
vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Sets the vpn-instance name of MPLS VPN to

specify the VPN attribute configured in this tracert command, that is, name of the
associated vpn-instance created at the local.
-w timeout: Tests the correctness of the –w switch with timeout specifying the
timeout time of IP packets. It is in seconds and can be any integer larger than 0.
host: IP address of the destination host.
Description
Using the tracert command, you can test the gateways that a packet sent by the
host will pass by in order to reach the destination for the purpose of testing the
reachability of a network connection and locating the position where faults occur
on the network.
Given no parameters have been specified, by default,
The parameters –a and vpn-instance are omitted;
first_TTL is 1;
max_TTL is 30;
port is 33434;
nqueries is 3;
timeout is 5s.
The tracert command is executed following this procedure: The system first sends
a packet with TTL as 1 and the first hop returns an ICMP error message indicating
that the packet cannot be transmitted due to TTL timeout. and then the system
transmits the packet again with TTL being set to 2 and the second hop returns TTL
timeout message similarly. This process continues until the packet reaches its
destination. The purpose of such a process is to record the source addresses where
these ICMP TTL timeout messages are sent so as to outline the path along which
the IP packet can reach the destination.
When a network fault is detected by using the ping command, tracert can be used
to locate the failure on the network.
The output information of the command tracert includes IP addresses of all the
GWs along the path to the destination. If some GW times out, “***” will be
output.
Example
<3Com> tracert 18.26.0.115
tracert to allspice.lcs.mit.edu (18.26.0.115), 30 hops max
1 helios.ee.lbl.gov (128.3.112.1) 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms
2 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 19 ms 19 ms 19 ms
3 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 39 ms 19 ms 19 ms
4 ccngw-ner-cc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.136.23) 19 ms 39 ms 39 ms
5 ccn-nerif22.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.168.22) 20 ms 39 ms 39 ms
6 128.32.197.4 (128.32.197.4) 59 ms 119 ms 39 ms
7 131.119.2.5 (131.119.2.5) 59 ms 59 ms 39 ms
8 129.140.70.13 (129.140.70.13) 80 ms 79 ms 99 ms
9 129.140.71.6 (129.140.71.6) 139 ms 139 ms 159 ms
10 129.140.81.7 (129.140.81.7) 199 ms 180 ms 300 ms
11 129.140.72.17 (129.140.72.17) 300 ms 239 ms 239 ms
12 * * *
13 128.121.54.72 (128.121.54.72) 259 ms 499 ms 279 ms
14 * * *
15 * * *
16 * * *
17 * * *
18 ALLSPICE.LCS.MIT.EDU (18.26.0.115) 339 ms 279 ms 279 ms
Information
Processing Commands
display channel Syntax
display channel [ channel-number | channel-name ]
View
Any view.
Parameter
channel-number: Channel number, ranging 0 to 9. That is, the system
has 10 channels.
channel-name: Channel name.
Table 1 Channel names and their associated channel numbers
Channel name Information channel number

channel6 6
channel7 7
channel8 8
channel9 9
console 0
logbuffer 4
loghost 2
monitor 1
snmpagent 5
trapbuffer 3
Description
Using the display channel command, you can display the contents of an
information channel.
This command displays the setting states of all channels when executed without
any parameter.
Example
Display the contents of information channel 0.
<3Com> display channel 0

channel number:0, channel name:console
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG LEVEL ENABLE TRAP LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG LEVEL
ffff0000 all Y warning Y debugging Y debugging
display info-center Syntax
display info-center
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display info-center command, you can display all the information
recorded in the info-center.
For related commands, see info-center enable, info-center loghost, info-center

logbuffer, info-center trapbuffer, info-center console channel, and info-center
monitor channel.
Example
Display the information recorded in the info-center.
<3Com> display info-center

Information Center: enabled

Log host:
Console:
channel number : 0, channel name : console
Monitor:
channel number : 1, channel name : monitor
SNMP Agent:
channel number : 5, channel name : snmpagent
Log buffer:
enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 256,
current messages 89, channel number : 4, channel name : logbuffer
dropped messages 0, overwrote messages 0
Trap buffer:
enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 256,
current messages 0, channel number:3, channel name:trapbuffer
dropped messages 0, overwrote messages 0
Information timestamp setting:
log - date, trap - date, debug - boot
Sent messages = 89, Received messages = 89
display logbuffer Syntax
display logbuffer [ size size-value | summary ] [ level level-number ] [ | [ begin |

include | exclude ] string ]
View
Any view
Parameter
size: Displays the number of information entries in the logbuffer.
size-value: The number of displayed information entries.
summary: A summary of the logbuffer.
level: Displays only the count of information entries at a specified level.
level-number: The specified level in the ranging 1 to 8.
|: Uses regular expression to filter the information for display.
begin: Displays the information beginning with the specified characters (string).
include: Displays the information including the specified characters (string).
exclude: Displays the information excluding the specified characters (string).
string: Characters of the regular expression.
Description
Using the display logbuffer command, you can display the information recorded in
the logbuffer.
By default, executing display logbuffer without any parameter displays all the
information in the logbuffer.
If the number of information entries in the current logging buffer is smaller than
the specified size-value, logging information of the actual entries will be displayed.
For related commands, see info-center enable, info-center logbuffer, and display
info-center.
Example
Display the information in the logging buffer.
<3Com> display logbuffer

Logging Buffer Confiuration and contents:enabled
allowed max buffer size : 1024
actual buffer size : 256
channel number : 4 , channel name : logbuf
dropped messages : 0
overwritten messages : 0
current messages : 96
%8/28/2101 5:34:48-IC-7-SYS_RESTART:
System restarted --
3Com Versatile Routing Platform Software
Copyright (c) 2000-2002 by VRP Team Beijing Institute 3Com Tech, Inc
%9/9/2002 15:50:36-SHELL-5-CMD:task:CFM ip:** user:**
command:interface Ethernet
command:interface Aux0

command:controller E1 3/0
%4/1/2003 21:29:47-PHY-2-PHY: Console0: change status to up
display trapbuffer Syntax
display trapbuffer [ size sizeval ]
View
Any view
Parameter
size: Specifies the number of information entries in the logbuffer.
sizeval: The number of displayed information entries.
Description
Using the display trapbuffer command, you can display the information recorded
in the trapbuffer.
By default, executing the command without any parameter displays all the
information in the trapbuffer.
If the number of information entries in the current trapbuffer is smaller than the
specified sizeval, the actual number of traps will be displayed.
For related commands, see info-center enable, info-center trapbuffer, and display
info-center.
Example
Display trapbuffer information.
<3Com> display trapbuffer

Trapping Buffer Confiuration and contents:
enabled
channel number : 3 , channel name : trapbuf
overwrote messages : 0
# Display 23 entries of information in the trapbuffer.
<3Com> display trapbuffer size 23
Trapping Buffer Confiuration and contents:
enabled
channel number : 3 , channel name : trapbuf
overwrote messages : 0
info-center channel Syntax
info-center channel channel-number name channel-name
undo info-center channel channel-number
View
System view
Parameter
channel-number: The channel number, with the value ranging from 0 to 9. That is,
the system has 10 channels.
channel-name is a channel name, with maximum length of 30 characters,

excluding ”-“, ”/” and ”\”..
Description
Using the rename channel command, you can rename the information channel
numbered channel-number as channel-name.
When naming the information channels, please note that no duplicated channel
name is allowed.
Example
Name Channel 0 as "execconsole".
[3Com] info-center channel 0 name execconsole
info-center console Syntax

channel
info-center console channel { channel-number | channel-name }
undo info-center console channel
View
System view
Parameter
channel-number: Channel number, ranging 0 to 9, that is, the system has 10

channels.
Description
Using the info-center console channel command, you can enable outputting
information to the console and set the information output channel. Using the
undo info-center console channel command, you can disable the current settings.
By default, no logging information is output to the console.
This command will not become valid unless the syslog function has been enabled.
For related commands, see info-center enable and display info-center.
Example
Enable outputting information to the console and set the output channel.
[3Com] info-center console channel console
info-center enable Syntax
info-center enable
undo info-center enable
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the info-center enable command, you can enable the info-center. Using the
undo info-center enable command, you can disable the info-center.
By default, the info-center has been enabled.
Only when the info-center has been enabled will the system output information to
the loghost and the console.
For related commands, see info-center loghost, info-center logbuffer, info-center

trapbuffer, info-center console channel, info-center monitor channel, display
info-center.
Example
Enable the info-center.
[3Com] info-center enable

% information center is enabled
info-center logbuffer Syntax
info-center logbuffer [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } | size buffersize

]*
undo info-center logbuffer [ channel | size ]
View
System view
Parameter
channel: Sets the channel for information output to the logbuffer.
channel-number: Channel number ranging 0 to 9. That is, the system has 10

channels.
size: Sets logbuffer size.
buffersize: Size of the logbuffer (the accommodated message entries).
Description
Using the info-center logbuffer command, you can enable the logbuffer and set
the channel number for logging information output as well as the size of the
logging buffer. Using the undo info-center logbuffer command, you can cancel
the current settings.
By default, information outputted to the logbuffer is allowed and the logbuffer

size is 256.
Only when the info-center has been enabled can this command become effective.
By setting channel number after enabling logbuffer, you can specify information
outbound direction..
For related commands, see info-center enable, display info-center, and display
info-center logbuffer.
Example
Enable the router to send information to the logbuffer and set the logbuffer size
to 50.
[3Com] info-center logbuffer size 50
info-center loghost Syntax
info-center loghost X.X.X.X [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } | facility

local-number | language { chinese | english } ] *
undo info-center loghost X.X.X.X
View
System view
Parameter
X.X.X.X: IP address of the loghost.
channel: Information channel for the loghost.

channels.
facility: Sets the recording tool of the loghost.
local-number: Recording tool of the loghost, which is ranging local0 to local7.
language: Sets the logging language.
chinese and english: Logging language which can be Chinese or English.
Description
Using the info-center loghost command, you can enable the router to output
information to the loghost. Using the undo info-center loghost command, you can
cancel the current configuration.
By default, no information is output to the loghost.
If not specified, the information channel for the loghost defaults to channel2 that
is named loghost, the loghost recording tool local-number to local7, and the
language to english.
Only when the information center has been enabled can this command become
effective.
By setting the IP address of loghost, you can specify the information outbound
direction. You can set up to 4 loghosts.
For related command, see info-center enable, and display info-center.
Example
Enable the router to send information to the UNIX workstation at 202.38.160.1.
[3Com] info-center loghost 202.38.160.1
info-center loghost Syntax

source
info-center loghost source interface-type interface-number [ subinterface-type ]
undo info-center loghost source
View
System view
Parameter
interface-type: Interface types.
interface-number: Number of the interface.
subinterface-name: Subinterface types.
Description
The info-center loghost source command is used to specify the source address for
sending packets to the logging host while the undo inforcenter loghost source
command is used to cancel the current configuration.undo info-center loghost
source is for the canceling of the current configuration.
When a logging message is sent out from a router, the default source address is
the IP address of the interface which has sent the logging message. If the user
wants to change the source address, he can use this command to achieve it. You
can judge which router has sent out the message by setting different source
addresses for different routers, accordingly you can also search among the
received messages.
Example
Set the IP address of Loopback0 as the source address of the logging message
packets.
[3Com] interface loopback 0

[3Com-LoopBack0] ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
[3Com-LoopBack0] quit
[3Com] info-center loghost source loopback 0
info-center monitor Syntax

channel
info-center monitor channel { channel-number | channel-name }
undo info-center monitor channel
View
System view
Parameter

channels.
Description
Using the info-center monitor channel command, you can enable the router to
output information to the user terminal and set the output channel. Using the
undo info-center monitor channel command, you can cancel the current
configuration.
By default, no information is output to the user terminal.
Only when the info-center has been enabled, can this command become effective.
For related commands, see info-center enable, and display info-center.
Example
Enable the router to output information to the user terminal and set the output
channel.
[3Com] info-center monitor channel monitor
info-center snmp Syntax

channel
info-center snmp channel { channel-number | channel-name }
undo info-center snmp channel
View
System view
Parameter

channels.

Description
Using the info-center snmp channel command, you can set the information
channel for snmp. Using the undo info-center snmp channel command, you can
cancel the current configuration.
By default, channel 5 is used.
For the related command, see display snmp-agent statistics.
Example
Set snmp information channel to channel 6.
[3Com] info-center snmp channel 6
info-center source Syntax
info-center source { module-name | default } { channel { channel-number |

channel-name} } [ log { state { on | off } | level severity }* | trap { state { on | off } |
level severity } * | debug { state { on | off } | level severity }* ]*
undo info-center source { module-name | default } { channel { channel-number |

channel-name }
View
System view
Parameter
default: Sets the default information record.
channel-number: Information channel number to be set.
channel-name: Information channel name to be set.
log: Log information.
trap: Alarm information.
debug: Debugging information.
on: Enables outputting information.
off: Disables outputting information.
level: Sets information level to disable the output of the information at a level
higher than the specified severity.
severity: Information level. As shown in the following table, the info-center divides
information into eight levels by severity or emergency, with a lower level indicating
a more emergent event. emergencies indicates level 0 and debugging indicates
level 7.
Table 2 Definition of information level
Severity level Description

emergencies Extremely emergent errors
alerts Errors requiring immediate correction
critical Critical errors
errors Errors that is not critical but require your concern
warnings Warning indicating that there may be some errors
notifications Information needs your concern
informational Common prompt information
debugging Debugging information
*: Indicate multiple choices can be selected. At least one choice must be selected
and all the choices can be selected at most.
Description
Using the info-center source command, you can add records to an information
channel. Using the undo info-center source command, you can remove the
records from the information channel.
For a specified module, by default,
The state of logging information output is on and the allowed information level is
informational.
The state of trapping information output is on and the allowed information level is
informational.
The state of debugging information ouput is off.
So far, the system allocates one information channel for each output direction.
They are:
Output directionInformation channel number Default information channel name
Console 0 console
Monitor terminal1 monitor
Loghost 2 loghost
Trapbuffer 3 trapbuffer
Logbuffer 4 logbuffer
snmp 5snmpagent
In addition, each information channel has a default record for which the module
name and number are default and 0xffff0000. But for different channels, the
record may have different default settings for logging information, trapping
information, and debugging information. If a module has no explicit configuration
record in the channel, the default configuration record will be used.
Example
Enable the output of log information of the IP module in the snmp channel and
the allowed highest level of the output information is emergence.
[3Com] info-center source ip channel snmpagent log level emergence

# Remove the setting of the cmd module in the snmp channel.
[3Com] undo info-center source cmd channel snmp
info-center Syntax
timestamp
info-center timestamp { trap | debugging | log } { boot | date | none }
undo info-center timestamp { trap | debugging | log }
View
System view
Parameter
trap: Trap information
debugging: Debugging information.
log: log information.
boot: Post booting time that the system experiences. It is in the format of
xxxxxx.yyyyyy, with xxxxxx being the 32 high bits and yyyyyy the 32 low bits of the
passed milliseconds.
date: Current system date and time, in the form of “yyyy/mm/dd-hh:mm:ss” in

Chinese and “mm/dd/yyyy-hh:mm:ss” in English.
none: No time stamp.
Description
Using the info-center timestamp command, you can set the time stamp format for
the output debugging/trapping/logging information. Using the undo info-center
timestamp command, you can cancel the current configuration.
By default, the date time stamp is used in information of all types.
Example
Set the time stamp format for traps to boot.
[3Com] info-center timestamp trap boot
info-center trapbuffer Syntax
info-center trapbuffer [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } | size

buffersize ] *
undo info-center trapbuffer [ channel | size ]

View
System view
Parameter
channel: Sets the channel for outputting information to the trapbuffer.
channel-number: Channel number ranging 0 to 9. That is, system has 10 channels.
size: Sets trapbuffer size.
buffersize: Size of the trapbuffer (the information entries that can be

accommodated).
Description
Using the info-center trapbuffer command, you can enable the trapbuffer and set
the output channel number and trapbuffer size. Using the undo info-center
trapbuffer command, you can cancel the current configuration.
By default, information output to trapbuffer is allowed and the trapbuffer size is

256.
Only when the info-center has been enabled can this command become effective.
By setting a trapbuffer size, you can make the router output information to the
trapbuffer.
For related commands, see info-center enable, display info-center, and display
info-center trapbuffer.
Example
Enable the router to send information to the trapbuffer, given the trapbuffer size is
30.
[3Com] info-center trapbuffer size 30
reset logbuffer Syntax
reset logbuffer
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reset logbuffer command, you can clear information in the logbuffer.
Example
<3Com> reset logbuffer
reset trapbuffer Syntax
reset trapbuffer
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reset trapbuffer command, you can clear information in the trapbuffer.
Example
<3Com> reset trapbuffer
service Syntax
modem-callback
service modem-callback
undo service modem-callback
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the service modem-callback command, you can enable user callback. Using
the undo service modem-callback command, you can disable user callback.
By default, the callback function is disabled.
Example
Enable the callback function.
[3Com] service modem-callback
terminal debugging Syntax
terminal debugging
undo terminal debugging

View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the terminal debugging command, you can enable the terminal debugging
display function. Using the undo terminal debugging command, you can disable
the function.
By default, terminal display is disabled.
For related command, see debugging.
Example
Enable terminals to display the debugging information.
<3Com> terminal debugging
terminal logging Syntax
terminal logging
undo terminal logging
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the terminal logging command, you can enable the log display function of
terminals. Using the undo terminal logging command, you can disable log display
function of terminals.
By default, the log display function of terminals is enabled.
Example
Disable the log display function of terminals.
<3Com> undo terminal logging
terminal monitor Syntax
terminal monitor
undo terminal monitor
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the terminal monitor command, you can enable terminals to display the
debugging /logging/trapping information sent by the info-center. Using the undo
terminal monitor command, you can disable terminals to display the
debugging/logging/trapping information.
By default, the display function of console users is enabled but the display function
of terminal users is disabled.
The command only affects the current terminal that inputs it. The undo terminal
monitor command is equivalent to the execution of undo terminal debugging,
undo terminal logging, and undo terminal trapping commands, that is, all the
debugging/logging/trapping information will not be displayed at the current
terminal. In the event that terminal monitor has been enabled, the terminal
debugging/undo terminal debugging, terminal logging/undo terminal logging,
and terminal trapping/undo terminal trapping commands can be used to
enable/disable the debugging/logging/trapping information.
Example
Disable terminal monitor.
<3Com> undo terminal monitor
terminal trapping Syntax
terminal trapping
undo terminal trapping
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the terminal trapping command, you can enable the function of trap
information display at terminals. Using the undo terminal trapping command, you
can disable the function of trap information display at terminals.
By default, the system configuration is to enable the display function.

Example
Disable the trapping information display function.
<3Com> terminal trapping
System Operating
Management
Commands - AR46
Series
boot bootldr Syntax
boot bootldr filename
View
System view
Parameter
filename: File name of the booting software package.
Description
Using the boot bootldr command, you can specify the system booting file.
Example
Specify the file ibox.bin stored in the flash as the default system booting file.
[3Com] boot bootldr flash:/ibox.bin
display alarm urgent Syntax
display alarm urgent [ time | slot | id ]
View
Any view
Parameter
time: Displays the alarms in a latest time range.
id: Displays the alarms of an ID.
slot: Displays the alarms involved a slot.
Description
Using the display alarm urgent command, you can display the stored alarms in a
specified way.
Executing the command defined without any parameter will display all the alarms.
Example
Display the stored alarms.
<3Com> display alarm urgent

Alarm ID Slot Date Time Para1 Para2
2 11 00/04/01 23:55:18 2 24
2 10 00/04/01 23:55:18 1 24
0 12 00/04/04 10:00:14 0 1
display bootvar Syntax
display bootvar
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display bootvar command, you can display file name of the boot
software package stored in the flash on RPU.
Example
Display the program configuration information of RPU.
<3Com> display bootvar

Boot file on flash is flash:/ibox.bin.
display environment Syntax
display environment
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display environment command, you can display the current values and
the threshold values of the hardware system environment.
Example
Display the system environment.
<3Com> display environment

GET 3 TEMPERATUREPOINT VALUE SUCCESSFULLY
environment information:
Temperature information:
local CurrentTemperature LowLimit HighLimit
(deg c ) (deg c) (deg c )
RPU 34 0 80
VENT 31 0 80
display device Syntax
display device slot-number
View
Any view
Parameter
slot-number: Slot number.
Description
Using the display device command, you can display the system hardware
configuration information, including the in-position states of MPU, NPU, interface
card, power module, and fan module, the operating state of interface card, power
module, and fan module, as well as the offline information of MPU and NPU.
Executing the command defined without parameters will display the essential
information of all the devices in position. Executing the command defined with
the parameter slot-number will display only the details on the defined slot,
including reset times and history records of the reset causes.
Example
Display the essential information of the router.
<3Com> display device

Slot # Type Online Status
0 RPU Present Normal
6 PWR Present Normal
7 FAN Present Normal
display schedule Syntax

reboot
display schedule reboot
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display schedule reboot command, you can check the configuration of
related parameters of the router schedule reboot terminal service.
For the related command, see reboot, schedule reboot at, schedule reboot delay,
undo schedule reboot.
Example
Display the configuration of the schedule reboot terminal service parameters of

the current router.
<3Com> display schedule reboot

Reboot system at 16:00:00 2002/11/1 (in 2 hours and 5 minutes).
remove slot Syntax
remove slot slotnum
undo remove slot slotnum
View
User view
Parameter
slotnum: Slot number for the interface card
Description
Using the remove slot command, you can run pre-processing before removing an
interface card. You can also cancel a misoperation with the undo remove slot
command if you change your mind to remove the card after executing the remove
slot command. The undo remove slot command is unnecessary when you remove
a card, but insert it immediately.
undo schedule reboot.
Example
Remove the interface card at slot 3.
<3Com>remove slot 3
reset alarm urgent Syntax
reset alarm urgent
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reset alarm urgent command, you can clear all the stored alarms.
Example
Clear the all the stored alarms.
<3Com> reset alarm urgent
reset slot Syntax
reset slot slot-number
View
User view
Parameter
slot-number: The number of the slot to be reset.
Description
Using the reset slot command, you can reset the device in a specified slot.
Example
Reset the device in slot 3.
<3Com> reset slot 3
schedule reboot at Syntax
schedule reboot at hh:mm [ yyyy/mm/dd ]
View
User view
Parameter
hh:mm: Reboot time of the router, in the format of "hour: minute" The hh ranges
from 0 to 23, and the mm ranges from 0 to 59.
yyyy/mm/dd: Reboot date of the router, in the format of "year/month/day. The

yyyy ranges from 2000 to 2099, the mm ranges from 1 to 12, and the value of dd
is related to the specific month.
Description
Using the schedule reboot at command, you can enable the timing reboot
function of the router and set the specific reboot time and date.
By default, the timing reboot router function is disabled.
If the schedule reboot at command sets specified date parameters, which

represents a data in the future, the router will be restarted in specified time, with
error not more than 1 minute.
If no specified date parameters are configured, two cases are involved: If the
configured time is after the current time, the router will be restarted at the time
point of that day; if the configured time is before the current time, the router will
be restarted at the time point of the next day.
It should be noted that the configured date should not exceed the current date
more than 30 days. In addition, after the command is configured, the system will
prompt you to input confirmation information. Only after the "Y" or the "y" is
entered can the configuration be valid. If there is related configuration before, it
will be covered directly.
Moreover, after the schedule reboot at command is configured and the system
time is adjusted by the clock command, the former configured schedule reboot at
parameter will go invalid.
For the related command, see reboot, schedule reboot delay, undo schedule
reboot, display schedule reboot.
Example
Set the router to be restarted at 22:00 that night (the current time is 15:50).
<3Com> schedule reboot at 22:00

Reboot scheduled for 22:00:00 UTC 2002/11/18 (in 6 hours and 10
minutes)
Proceed with reboot? [Y/N]:y
schedule reboot Syntax

delay
schedule reboot delay { hhh:mm | mmm }
View
User view
Parameter
hhh:mm: Waiting time for rebooting a router, in the format of "hour: minute" The
hhh ranges from 0 to 720, and the mm ranges from 0 to 59.
mmm: Waiting delay for rebooting a router, in the format of "absolute minutes" .
Ranging from 0 to 43200,
Description
Using the schedule reboot delay command, you can enable the timing reboot
router function and set the waiting time.
By default, the timing reboot router function is disabled.
Two formats can be used to set the waiting delay of timing reboot router, namely
the format of "hour: minute" and the format of "absolute minutes". But the total
minutes should be no more than 30×24×60 minutes, or 30 days.
After this command is configured, the system will prompt you to input
confirmation information. Only after the "Y" or the "y" is entered can the
configuration be valid. If there is related configuration before, it will be covered
directly.
Moreover, after the schedule reboot at command is configured, and the system
time is adjusted by the clock command, the original schedule reboot at parameter
will become invalid.
For the related command, see reboot, schedule reboot at, undo schedule reboot,
display schedule reboot.
Example
Configure the router to be restarted after 88 minutes (the current time is 21:32).
<3Com> schedule reboot delay 88

Reboot scheduled for 23:00:00 UTC 2002/11/1 (in 1 hours and 28
minutes)
Proceed with reboot? [Y/N]:y
upgrade Syntax
upgrade [ bootrom | pico-code] filename
View
System view
Parameter
bootrom: Upgrades the BootROM on line .
pico-code: Upgrades the pico-code on line.
filename: The file name of the upgrade software package to be used.
Description
Using the upgrade command, you can upgrade the BootRom program, pico-code
or the logic.
Example
Upgrade the pico-code on line, given the file name of the upgrade software
package is filename.
[3Com] upgrade pico-code filename
undo schedule Syntax

reboot
undo schedule reboot
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the undo schedule reboot command, you can cancel the parameter
configuration of the schedule reboot terminal service.
display schedule reboot.
Example
Cancel the timing reboot router function.
<3Com> undo schedule reboot
File Management
Commands
File System Commands Syntax
cd directory
View
User view
Parameter
directory: Name of destination directory.
Description
Using the cd command, you can modify the current operating path of the router
to the specified directory.
By default, the flash memory is the operating path set when the router starts.
Example
Modify the current operating path of the router to test.
<3Com> cd test
<3Com> pwd
flash:/test
clear Syntax
clear filename
View
User view
Parameter
filename: Name of file to be deleted.
Description
Using the clear command, you can delete all files from the recycle bin.
The wildcard “*” is available here. Using the delete command, you can only move
the target files into the recycle bin. If you want to remove them from the recycle
bin, you must use the clear command.
Example
Clear the recycle bin.
<3Com> clear flash:/p1h_logic.out

clear flash:/plh_logic.out?[Y/N]
copy Syntax
copy filename_source filename_dest
View
User view
Parameter
filename_source: Name of the source file.
filename_dest: Name of the destination file or directory.
Description
Using the copy command, you can copy a file.
If the name of the destination file is the same with an existing directory name, the
target file will be copied to the directory. If the name of the destination file is the
same with an existing file name, the user will be prompted whether the existing
file should be overwritten.
Example
<3Com>pwd
Slave#flash:
<3Com> dir
Directory of flash:/
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 4316742 Oct 10 2002 10:10:10
system
drwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup - Jan 01 2001 10:47:14
buckup
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 16 Jan 02 2001 08:53:52
private-data.t
vrpcfg.txt
config
bootromfull
7672832 bytes total (2295808 bytes free)
Copy the file from Flash to buckup..
<3Com> copy vrpcfg.txt buckup

Copy flash:/vrpcfg.txt to flash:/backup/vrpcfg.txt ?[Y/N]:y
% Copied file flash:/vrpcfg.txt to flash:/backup/vrpcfg.txt
<3Com> dir
Directory of flash:/backup/

vrpcfg.txt
delete Syntax
delete /unreserved filename
View
User view
Parameter
/unreserved: Deletes the specified file unreservedly, and the deleted file can never
be restored.
filename: Name of the file to be deleted.
Description
Using the delete command, you can move the specified file, which can be restored
with the undelete command, to the recycle bin. If you want to delete it from the
recycle bin, you can use the reset recycle-bin filename command.
If you delete two files in different directories but with the same filename, only the
last one will be stored in the recycle bin.
If the unreserved parameter is seleted in using the delete command, the target file
cannot be restored.
The dir command does not display the information of deleted files. However, by
using the dir /all command, the information of all files under the directory,
including deleted files, will be displayed.
Example
Delete the file flash:/test/test.txt.
<3Com> delete flash:/test/test.txt

Delete flash:/test/test.txt?[Y/N]
<3Com>
dir Syntax
dir [ /all | /h ] [ filename ]
View
User view
Parameter
/all: Displays all files (including the deleted files).
/h: Displays the information about the private files. This parameter is unavailable if
there is no storage device on the router.
filename: Name of the file or directory displayed.
Description
Using the dir command, you can display the information about the specified file or
directory in the router storage device.
By default, this command displays the file information under the current directory.
This command supports "*" wildcard.
The dir /all command can be used to display the information about all the files,
including the deleted files. The names of the deleted files are denoted with "[]",
for instance, [temp.cfg]. Such deleted files can be restored via the undelete
command. The reset recycle-bin command can be used to delete the file from the
recycle bin permanently.
The dir /h command can be used to display the information about the private file
under the current path. The attribute of the private file is represented by “---h”.
Example
Display the information about the file flash:/test/test.txt.
<3Com> dir flash:

Directory of flash:
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 4316742 Oct 10 2002 10:10:10

system
private-data.t
xt
vrpcfg.txt
execute Syntax
execute filename
View
System view
Parameter
filename: Name of the batch file, ranging from 1 to 256, with a suffix of “.bat”.
Description
Using the execute command, you can execute the specified batch file.
The batch command executes the command lines in the batch file one by one.
There should be no invisible character in the batch file. If invisible characters are
found, the batch command will quit the current execution without back off
operation. The batch command does not guarantee the execution of each
command, nor does it perform hot backup itself. The forms and contents of the
commands are not restricted in the batch file.
Example
Execute the batch file “test.bat” in the directory of “flash:/”.
[3Com] execute test.bat
file prompt Syntax
file prompt {alert | quiet }
View
System view
Parameter
alert: Enables interactive acknowledgement on the condition that data loss or

destruction may happen due to user operation (e.g., deleting a file.).
quiet: No prompt on the condition that data loss or destruction may happen due
to user operation (e.g., deleting a file.).
Description
Using the file prompt command, you can modify the prompt mode of file
operation of the router.
By default, the prompt mode is alert.
When the prompting mode of file operation is set to quiet, for the possible data
loss due to user operation (e.g., deleting a file), the system will have no prompt.
Example
Set the prompt mode of file operation to quiet.
[3Com] file prompt quiet

# Set the prompt mode of file operation to alert.
[3Com] file prompt alert
format Syntax
format device-name
View
User view
Parameter
device-name: Device name.
Description
Using the format command, you can format the storage device.
Formatting will result in loss of all files on a specified storage device and these files
cannot be restored.
Example
Format flash.
<3Com> format flash:

All sectors will be erased, proceed? [Y/N]y
Format flash: completed
mkdir Syntax
mkdir directory
View
User view
Parameter
directory: Name of directory.

Description
Using the mkdir command, you can create a directory under the specified directory
in the specified storage device.
The name of the directory to be created cannot be the same with the names of
other directories or files under the specified directory.
Example
Create a directory dd.
<3Com> mkdir dd
Created dir flash:/dd.
more Syntax
more filename
View
User view
Parameter
filename: File name.
Description
Using the more command, you can display content of a specified file.
By default, the file system displays the file in the form of text, that is, the contents
of the file.
Example
Display the content of the file test.txt.
<3Com> more test.txt

AppWizard has created this test application for you.
This file contains a summary of what you will find in each of the
files that make up your test application.
Test.dsp
This file (the project file) contains information at the project
level and is used to build a single project or subproject. Other
users can share the project (.dsp) file, but they should export the
makefiles locally.
move Syntax
move filename_source filename_dest
View
User view
Parameter
filename_dest: Name of the destination file.
Description
Using the move command, you can move a file.
If the name of the target file is the same with the name of an existing directory,
the target file will be moved into the directory, with the same file name. If the
name of the destination file is the same with an existing file name, the user will be
prompted whether the existing file should be overwritten.
Example
<3Com> dir
Directory of *
0 -rw- 2145123 Jul 12 2001 12:28:08 ne80.bin
1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 10:47:50 vrpcfg.txt
2 drw- 0 Jul 12 2001 19:41:20 test
6477 KBytes total (2144 KBytes free)
<3Com> dir flash:/test/
Directory of flash:/test/
0 drw- - Jul 12 2001 20:23:37 subdir
1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 20:13:19 vrpcfg.txt
2 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:08:32 sample.txt
# Move the file flash:/test/sample.txt to flash:/sample.txt.
<3Com> move flash:/test/sample.txt flash:/sample.txt
Move flash:/test/sample.txt to flash:/sample.txt ?[Y/N]:y
% Moveded file flash:/test/sample.txt flash:/sample.txt
<3Com> dir
Directory of *
0 -rw- 2145123 Jul 12 2001 12:28:08 ne80.bin
1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 10:47:50 vrpcfg.txt
2 drw- 0 Jul 12 2001 19:41:20 test
3 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:26:48 sample.txt
<3Com> dir flash:/test/
Directory of flash:/test/
0 drw- - Jul 12 2001 20:23:37 subdir
1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 20:13:19 vrpcfg.txt
pwd Syntax
pwd
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the pwd command, you can display the current path.
If the current path has not been set, the operation will fail.
Example
Display the current path.
<3Com> pwd
flash:/test
rename Syntax
rename filename_source filename_dest
View
User view
Parameter
filename_dest: Name of the destination file.
Description
Using the rename command, you can rename a file.
If the name of the destination file is the same with the name of an existing
directory, the execution will fail. If the name of the destination file is the same with
an existing file, the operation will fail.
Example
<3Com> dir
Directory of *
0 -rw- 2145123 Jul 12 2001 12:28:08 ne.bin
1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 10:47:50 vrpcfg.txt
2 drw- - Jul 12 2001 19:41:20 test
3 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:26:48 sample.txt
Rename the file sample.txt to sample.bak.
<3Com> rename sample.txt sample.bak

Rename flash:/sample.txt to flash:/sample.bak ?[Y/N]:y
% Renamed file flash:/sample.txt flash:/sample.bak
<3Com> dir
Directory of *
0 -rw- 2145123 Jul 12 2001 12:28:08 ne.bin
1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 10:47:50 vrpcfg.txt
2 drw- - Jul 12 2001 19:41:20 test
3 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:29:55 sample.bak
reset recycle-bin Syntax
reset recycle-bin filename
View
User view
Parameter
filename: Name of the file to be deleted.
Description
Using the reset recycle-bin command, you can delete a file from the recycle bin
permanently.
This command supports "*" wildcard. The delete command only deletes a file to
the recycle bin directory. To delete a file permanently, use the reset recycle-bin
command.
Example
Delete a file from the recycle bin.
<3Com> reset recycle-bin flash:/p1h_logic.out

reset flash:/plh_logic.out?[Y/N]
rmdir Syntax
rmdir directory
View
User view
Parameter
directory: Name of the directory.
Description
Using the rmdir command, you can delete a directory.
The directory to be deleted must be an empty one.
Example
<3Com>dir
Directory of *
0 drw- - Jul 12 2001 20:23:37 subdir
1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 20:13:19 vrpcfg.txt
# Display how to delete the directory subdir.
<3Com> rmdir subdir
Rmdir subdir?[Y/N]:y
% Removed directory subdir
<3Com> dir
Directory of *
0 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 20:13:19 vrpcfg.txt
undelete Syntax
undelete filename
View
User view
Parameter
filename: Name of the file to be restored.
Description
Using the undelete command, you can restore a deleted file.
If the name of the file to be restored is the same with the name of an existing
directory, the execution will fail. If the name of this file is the same with that of an
existing file, the user will be prompted whether the existing file should be
overwritten.
Example
<3Com> dir /all
Directory of *
0 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 20:13:19 vrpcfg.txt
1 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:09:23 [sample.bak]
# Restore the deleted file sample.bak.
<3Com> undelete sample.bak
Undelete flash:/test/sample.bak ?[Y/N]:y
% Undeleted file flash:/test/sample.bak
<3Com> dir /all
Directory of *
0 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:34:19 sample.bak
1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 20:13:19 vrpcfg.txt
FTP Server
Configuration
Commands
display ftp-server Syntax
display ftp-server
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ftp-server command, you can display the parameters of the
current FTP server.
After the FTP parameters are configured, this command can be used to display the
configuration results.
Example
Display the FTP parameters configured.
<3Com> display ftp-server

Ftp server is running
Max user number5
User count2
Timeout(minute)30
The information shown above indicates that the FTP server has started and can
support up to 5 log-on users simultaneously and now there are two log-on users
and the timeout of an FTP user is 30 minutes.
display ftp-user Syntax
display ftp-user
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ftp-user command, you can display the parameters of the
current FTP user.
Example
Display the FTP user parameter configuration.
<3Com> display ftp-user

usernamehost porttopdiridle
3Com 10.110.3.51074c:/3Com2
The information shown above indicates that a connection between an FTP user
named 3Com and the FTP server has been established. the IP address of the
remote host is 10.110.3.5 and the remote port number is 1074. the authorization
directory is flash:/3Com and so far the user has not sent any service request to the
FTP server for 2 minutes.
ftp server enable Syntax
ftp server enable
undo ftp server
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ftp server enable command, you can enable the FTP server and allow the
login of FTP users. Using the undo ftp server command, you can disable the FTP
server and the login of FTP users.
By default, the FTP server is off.
Example
Disable the FTP server.
[3Com] undo ftp server
ftp timeout Syntax
ftp timeout minute
undo ftp timeout
View
System view
Parameter
minute: Connection timeout in minutes, in the range of 1 to 35791. By default,

the connection timeout is 30 minutes.
Description
Using the ftp timeout command, you can set the connection timeout. Using the
undo ftp timeout command, you can restore the default connection timeout.
Once the user logs on the FTP server, he establishes a connection with the FTP
server. If an abnormal disconnection occurs or the user abnormally disrupts the
connection, FTP server is not notified and thus the connection is still on. To avoid
such a problem, the connection timeout should be set. If no command interaction
is conducted during this period, FTP will regard the connection failed and disrupt
the connection.
Example
Set the connection timeout to 36 minutes.
[3Com] ftp timeout 36
ftp update Syntax
ftp update { fast | normal }
undo ftp update{ fast | normal }
View
System view
Parameter
fast: Fast upgrading mode.
normal: Normal upgrading mode.
Description
Using the ftp update command, you can set the upgrading mode. Using the undo
ftp update command, you can restore the default upgrading mode.
By default, the FTP update is in fast mode.
The FTP server updates the data of files in its flash memory in two modes: normal
and fast, when receiving files transfered by the user using the FTP command PUT.
Each of two modes is demonstrated respectively as follows:
Fast mode: The FTP server writes the data to the flash memory after the
completion of the file transfer. This can safeguard that the files in the flash
memory of the Router will not be damaged even on abnormal occasions such as
power failure.
Normal mode: The FTP server writes the data to the flash memory during the file
transfer. This means that the occurence of some abnormal conditions such as
power failure might cause the damage of the files in the flash memory of the
Router. But the normal updating mode consumes fewer memmory.
Example
Set the FTP update mode to normal.
[Router] ftp update normal

FTP client module

commands
ascii Syntax
ascii
View
FTP client view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ascii command, you can set the transmission data type to ASCII.
By default, the data type is set to ASCII.
Example
Set the transmission data type to ASCII.
[ftp] ascii
200 Type set to A.
binary Syntax
binary
View
FTP client view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the binary command, you can set file type to support binary files
transmission.
Example
Set file type to support binary files transmission.
[ftp] binary
200 Type set to B.
bye Syntax
bye
View
FTP client view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the bye command, you can disconnect with remote FTP server and exit to
user view.
Example
Terminate the connection with remote FTP server and exit to user view.
[ftp] bye
<3Com>
cd Syntax
cd pathname
View
FTP client view
Parameter
pathname: Path name.
Description
Using the cd command, you can change the operating path on remote FTP server.
This command can be used to access another directory on FTP server.
Example
Change the operating path to d:/temp.
[ftp] cd d:/temp
cdup Syntax
cdup
View
FTP client view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the cdup command, you can change the operating path to the upper
directory.
This command is used to exit current directory and return to an upper directory.
Example
Change the operating path to an upper directory.
[ftp] cdup
close Syntax
close
View
FTP client view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the close command, you can terminate the connection with remote FTP
server, but remain in FTP client view.
This command will terminate both control connection and data connection with
the remote FTP server simultaneously.
Example
Terminate the connection with the remote FTP server and still keep in FTP client
view.
[ftp] close
[ftp]
debugging Syntax
debugging
undo debugging
View
FTP client view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the debugging command, you can enable the debugging. Using the undo
debugging command, you can disable the debugging.
By default, the debugging of FTP client commands is disabled.
Example
Enable the debugging.
[ftp] debugging
delete Syntax
delete remotefile
View
FTP client view
Parameter
remotefile: File name.
Description
Using the delete command, you can delete a specified file.
Example
Delete temp.c.
[ftp] delete temp.c
dir Syntax
dir [ filename ] [ localfile ]
View
FTP client view
Parameter
filename: File name queried.
localfile: Local file name saved.
Description
Using the dir command, you can query a specified file.
This command displays all the files under the directory or the file queried.
Example
Query temp.c and save the query result in temp1.
[ftp] dir temp.c temp1
disconnect Syntax
disconnect
View
FTP client view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the disconnect command, you can terminate the connection with the
remote FTP server and still keep in FTP client view.
This command will terminate both control connection and data connection with
the remote FTP server.
Example
Terminate the connection with the remote FTP server and still keep in FTP client
view.
[ftp] disconnect
[ftp]
ftp Syntax
ftp [host [ port ] ]
View
User view
Parameter
host: IP address or hostname of the remote FTP server.
port: Port number of the remote FTP server.
Description
Using the ftp command, you can establish control connection with the remote FTP
server and enter FTP client view.
Example
Connect to the remote FTP server with the IP address of 1.1.1.1.

<3Com> ftp 1.1.1.1
get Syntax
get remotefile [ localfile ]
View
FTP client view
Parameter
localfile: Local file name.
remotefile: File name on the remote FTP server.
Description
Using the get command, you can download remote files and save them locally.
By default, if the local file name is not specified, this command will consider that it
is the same with that of the file on the remote FTP server.
Example
Download temp1.c and save it as temp.c.
[ftp] get temp1.c temp.c
lcd Syntax
lcd
View
FTP client view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the lcd command, you can get the local operating path of FTP client.
Example
Display local operating path.
[ftp] lcd
% Local directory now flash:
ls Syntax
ls [ remotefile ] [ localfile ]
View
FTP client view
Parameter
remotefile: Remote file queried.
localfile: Local file name saved.
Description
Using the ls command, you can query a specified file.
By default, all the files will be displayed when there is no parameter.
Example
Query temp.c.
[ftp] ls temp.c
mkdir Syntax
mkdir pathname
View
FTP client view
Parameter
pathname: Directory name.
Description
Using the mkdir command, you can establish a directory at the remote FTP server.
Example
Establish test directory at the remote FTP server.
[ftp] mkdir test
open Syntax
open ipaddr [ port ]
View
FTP client view
Parameter
ipaddr: IP address of the remote FTP server.

port: Port number of the remote FTP server.
Description
Using the open command, you can establish control connection with the remote
FTP server.
Example
Establish FTP connection with the FTP server of the host 10.110.3.1.
[ftp] open 10.110.3.1
passive Syntax
passive
undo passive
View
FTP client view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the passive command, you can set data transmission mode to passive mode.
Using the undo passive command, you can set data transmission mode to active
mode.
By default, the transmission mode is passive.
Example
Set data transmission mode to passive mode.
[ftp] passive
put Syntax
put localfile [ remotefile ]
View
FTP client view
Parameter
localfile: Local file name.
remotefile: File name on the remote FTP server.

Description
Using the put command, you can upload a local file to the remote FTP server.
If no file name on the remote server is specified, this command will consider that it
is the same with that of the local file.
Example
Upload local file temp.c to the remote FTP server and save it as temp1.c.
[ftp] put temp.c temp1.c
pwd Syntax
pwd
View
FTP client view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the pwd command, you can display the working directory on the remote FTP
server.
Example
Display the working directory on the remote FTP server.
[ftp] pwd
"d:/temp" is current directory.
quit Syntax
quit
View
FTP client view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the quit command, you can terminate the connection with the remote FTP
server and exit to user view.
Example
Terminate the connection with the remote FTP server and exit to user view.
[ftp] quit
<3Com>
remotehelp Syntax
remotehelp [ protocol-command ]
View
FTP client view
Parameter
protocol-command: FTP command.
Description
Using the remotehelp command, you can display the help of FTP command.
Example
Display the syntax of the command user.
[ftp] remotehelp user

214 Syntax: USER <sp> <username>
rmdir Syntax
rmdir pathname
View
FTP client view
Parameter
pathname: Directory name on the remote FTP server.
Description
Using the rmdir command, you can delete a specified directory on FTP server.
Example
Delete d:/temp1 directory on FTP server.
[ftp] rmdir d:/temp1
user Syntax
user username [ password ]

TFTP Configuration Commands 79
View
FTP client view
Parameter
username: Logon user name.
password: Logon password.
Description
Using the user command, you can register FTP user.
Example
Log on FTP server with the user name tom and the password bjhw.
[ftp] user tom bjhw
verbose Syntax
verbose
undo verbose
View
FTP client view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the verbose command, you can enable the verbose function to view
information from FTP server. Using the undo verbose command, you can disable
the verbose function.
By default, it is disabled.
Example
Enable the verbose function.
[ftp] verbose
TFTP Configuration
Commands
tftp Syntax
tftp ip_address { get | put } source-filename [ destination-filename ]

View
User view
Parameter
p_address: IP address of TFTP server.
source-filename: Source file name.
destination-filename: Destination file name.
get: Downloads files.
put: Uploads files.
Description
Using the tftp command, you can upload files to a TFTP server or downloads files
to the local.
For related command, see tftp-server acl.
Example
Download the file vrpcfg.txt in the root directory of the TFTP server at 1.1.254.2
to the local hardware and save it as vrpcfg.bak.
<3Com> tftp 1.1.254.2 get vrpcfg.txt flash:/vrpcfg.bak
Upload the file vrpcfg.txt stored in the root directory of the flash onto the default
directory on the TFTP server at 1.1.254.2 and save the file on the server as
vrpcfg.bak.
<3Com> tftp 1.1.254.2 put flash:/vrpcfg.txt vrpcfg.bak
tftp-server acl Syntax
tftp-server acl acl-number
View
System view
Parameter
acl-number: IP ACL number in the range of 1 to 99.
Description
Using the tftp-server acl command, you can set the number of ACL permitting the
access to a TFTP server.
For related command, see tftp.

Example
Set the number of ACL permitting the access to the TFTP Server to 1.
[3Com] tftp-server acl 1
Configuration Files
Management
Commands
display Syntax
current-configuration
display current-configuration [ controller | interface interface-type [
interface-number ] | configuration [ rip | ospf | bgp | post-config | system |
user-interface ] ] [ | [begin | include | exclude ] string ]
View
Any view
Parameter
controller: Displays the configuration of controller.
interface: Displays the configuration of the interface.
configuration: Displays the specified configurations.
rip: Displays the RIP configuration.
ospf: Displays the OSPF configuration.
bgp: Displays the BGP configuration.
post-system: Displays the greeting message configuration.
system: Displays the system configuration.
user-interface: Displays the user interface configuration.
|: Uses regular expression to filter the router configurations.
begin: Displays the configurations beginning with the specified characters (string).
include: Displays the configurations including the specified characters (string).
exclude: Displays the configurations excluding the specified characters (string).
string: Characters of the regular expression.

Description
Using the display current-configuration command, you can display the current
configurations of router.
The current configuration parameters that take the default values will not be
displayed.
After finishing a set of configurations, the user can execute the display
current-configuration command to view the currently effective parameters for the
purpose of verifying the correctness of the configurations. Some parameters that
the user has configured will not be displayed if their functions have not become
valid yet. For example, the user can configure PPP parameters on an interface
encapsulated with X.25 at the link layer, but he will not be able to see the PPP
configuration information on the interface after executing the display
current-configuration command.
For related commands, see save, reset saved-configuration, and display

saved-configuration.
Example
Display the currently effective configuration parameters of the router.
<3Com> display current-configuration
sysname R1760
super password level 3 simple 123456
tcp window 8
#
undo multicast igmp-all-enable
#
interface Aux0
link-protocol ppp
#
interface Ethernet0/0/0
#
interface Serial0/0/0
link-protocol ppp
#
interface NULL0
#
bgp 15535
undo synchronization
#
#
ospf 2 router-id 1.1.1.1
#
rip
#
user-interface con 0
set authentication password simple 123456
history-command max-size 30
user-interface aux 0
user-interface vty 0 4
#
return
display Syntax
saved-configuration
display saved-configuration
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display saved-configuration command, you can display the saved router
configurations, that is, the configurations that the router will apply the next time it
is booted.
For related commands, see save, reset saved-configuration, and display

current-configuration.
Example
Display the router configuration file in the storage device.
<3Com> display saved-configuration

#
sysname 3Com
#
tcp window 8
#
undo multicast igmp-all-enable
#
controller E1 3/0/0
#
interface Aux0
link-protocol ppp
#
interface Ethernet0/0/0
#
interface Serial0/0
link-protocol ppp
#
interface NULL0
#
user-interface con 0
user-interface aux 0
user-interface vty 0 4
#
return
display this Syntax
display this
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display this command, you can display the current configurations under
this view.
Example
Display the current configuration of the view in question.
<3Com> display this

#
sysname 3Com
#
tcp window 8
#
reset Syntax
saved-configuration
reset saved-configuration
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reset saved-configuration command, you can erase the saved router
configuration.
You are recommended to use this command only when necessary and under the
guidance of the support technician.
This command is likely to be used when:
A used router is applied to a new application environment and the existing

configuration file cannot meet the requirements of the new environment. In this
case, you need to erase the existing configuration file and reconfigure the router.
For related commands, see save, display current-configuration, display

saved-configuration.
Example
Erase the saved router configuration.
<3Com> reset saved-configuration

This will erase the configuration in the device.
The Router configurations will be erased to reconfigure!
Are you sure?[Y/N]y
save Syntax
save[file-name ]
View
User view
Parameter
file-name: Filename, whose extension must be cfg
Description
Using the save command, you can save the current configuration information into
the storage device.
After you finish a set of configurations and make their functions valid, you should
save the current configuration file into the storage device.
For related commands, see reset saved-configuration, display

current-configuration, and display saved-configuration.
Example
Save the current configuration information in the default storage device.
<3Com> save
upgrade Syntax
upgrade bootrom [ full ]
View
User view
Parameter
bootrom: Upgrades the BootRom program.
full: Upgrades the entire BootRom.
Description
Using the upgrade command, you can upgrade the bootrom program.
3Com Routers support online BootROM upgrade. You can upgrade the BootROM
online by extracting the BootROM program from the upgrade software package
and writing it into the BootROM.
When executing this command, you should make sure that the upgrade software
package (named bootromfull) has existed in the root directory of the flash.
Example
Upgrade the BootROM program of R1760 Router, given that the upgrade
software package has been stored in the root directory of the flash and the file
name is “bootromfull”.
<3Com> upgrade bootrom full
User Interface
Configuration
Commands
acl Syntax
acl acl-number { inbound | outbound }
undo acl { inbound | outbound }
View
User interface view
Parameter
acl-number: Address access control list number.
inbound: Restricts incoming calls of a user interface.
outbound: Restricts outgoing calls of a user interface.
Description
Using the acl command, you can reference an ACL to restrict the rights of VTY
(Telnet or SSH) and other types of user interfaces in placing incoming and
outgoing calls. Using the undo acl command, you can remove the current settings.
By default, there is no incoming or outgoing call barring.
acl-number can only be the basic ACL.
Example
Remove the restriction on Telnet outgoing calls.
[3Com-ui-vty0] undo acl outbound

authentication-mode Syntax
authentication-mode { local | password | scheme { list | default } }
authentication-mode none
View
User interface view
Parameter
local: Performs local database authentication.
password: Performs local password authentication.
scheme: Performs AAA authorization authentication.
default: Uses the default authentication parameter.
list: Uses the authentication list.
none: Performs no authentication.
Description
Using the authentication-mode command, you can set the mode that a user
interface uses to authenticate the login users. Using the authentication-mode
none command, you can set the authentication mode to none, that is, the login
users need not undergo authentication before they access the user interface.
By default, the authentication mode is set to password for the VTY user interface
and none for other user interfaces.
For related command, see set authentication password.
Example
Enable local password authentication.
[3Com-ui0] authentication-mode password
auto-execute Syntax
command
auto-execute command command
undo auto-execute command
View
User interface view
Parameter
command: Command to be automatically executed.

Description
Using the auto-execute command command, you can set a command to be

automatically executed. Using the undo auto-execute command command, you
can disable the automatic execution of the command.
By default, command auto-execution is disabled.
You should be aware of the following constraints before using the auto-execute
command command:
■ CON does not support auto-execute command.

■ If there is only AUX but no CON on a router (AUX and CON shares the same
port), the AUX will not support auto-execute command as well.
■ These constraints do not apply to other types of user interfaces.
When a user logs on, some command configured using auto-execute command
on the terminal will automatically be executed. The user connection will be
disconnected automatically once the execution of the command is finished.
A common approach is to configure the Telnet command using the auto-execute

command command on the terminal so that the user may automatically connect
to the specified host.
You should use this command with cautions because it will probably make you
unable to make the regular system configurations via this user interface.
CAUTION: Before configuring the auto-execute co mmand command and saving

the configuration (by executing the save command), you should make sure that
you can access the system to remove the configuration by other means.
Example
Execute the telnet 10.110.100.1 command automatically after the user logs on
from the AUX interface.
[3Com-ui-aux0] auto-execute command telnet 10.110.100.1
databits Syntax
databits { 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 }
undo databits
View
User interface view
Parameter
5: Five data bits.

6: Six data bits.
7: Seven data bits.
8: Eight data bits.
Description
Using the databits command, you can set user interface data bit. Using the undo
databits command, you can restore the default data bit setting.
By default, data bit is set to 8.
The configuration can take effect only when the serial interface works in the
asynchronous flow mode.
Example
Set data bit to 5.
[3Com-ui-aux0] databits 5
debugging vty Syntax
debugging vty { fsm | negotiate }
undo debugging vty { fsm | negotiate }
View
User view
Parameter
fsm: Debugging of the Telnet state machine.
negotiate: Debugging of the VTY negotiation.
Description
Using the debugging vty command, you can enable the debugging of the VTY.
Using the undo debugging vty command you can disable the debugging of the
VTY protocol.
Example
Enable the debugging of the VTY negotiation.
<3Com> debugging vty negotiate
display Syntax
user-interface
display user-interface [ type-name ] [ number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
type-name: Name of user interface type.
number: Number of user interface.
Description
Using the display user-interface command, you can display the details of user
interface.
Example
Display information of user interface 0.
<3Com> display user-interface 0

Idx Type Tx/Rx Modem Privi Auth
* 0 CON 0 9600 3 N
* : Current user-interface is active.

I : Current user-interface is active and work in async mode.
Idx : Absolute index of user-interface.
Type : Type and relative index of user-interface.
Privi: The privilege of user-interface.
Auth : The authentication mode of user-interface.
A: Authenticate use AAA.
L: Authenticate use local database.
N: Current user-interface need not authentication.
P: Authenticate use current UI's password.
display users Syntax
display users [ all ]
View
Any view
Parameter
all: Displays the information of all the user interface users.
Description
Using the display users command, you can display the login information of the
users on each user interface.
Example
Execute display users on the console.
<3Com> display users

UI Delay IPaddressUsername
* 0 CON 000:00:00
* 1 VTY 000:00:0910.110.101.39dd
Where,
*: Terminal line in use.
UI: The first number and the second number are respectively the absolute number
and relative number of user interface.
Username: Display the name of the user using this user-interface, namely the
username that the user uses for accessing. As AAA authentication is unavailable
yet, this item is null so far.
Delay: In minutes, it is the interval since the last input made by the user.
IP address: Displays the starting connection location, namely, IP address of the

call-in host.
flow-control Syntax
flow-control { hardware | software | none }
undo flow-control
View
User interface view
Parameter
none: No flow control.
software: Software flow control.
hardware: Hardware flow control , only be effective to AUX port.
Description
Using the flow-control command, you can configure flow control mode. Using the
undo flow-control command, you can restore the default flow control mode.
By default, none mode is used, that is, there is no flow control.
The configuration can become effective only when the involved serial interface
works in the asynchronous flow mode.
When system is outputting, pressing <Ctrl+s> will stop the screen output, and
<Ctrl+q> will resume the screen output.
Example
Configure software flow control in user interface view.
[3Com-ui-console0] flow-control software

free user-interface Syntax
free user-interface [type-name] number
View
User view
Parameter
type-name: User interface type.
number: Absolute/Relative user interface number.
Description
Using the free user-interface number command, you can clear the user interface
with the number defined by the parameter number. Using the free user-interface
type-name number command, you can clear the user interface with the number
defined by number in the user interfaces of the type defined by type-name.
Example
Clear user-interface 0.
<3Com> free user-interface 0
history-command Syntax
max-size
history-command max-size size-value
undo history-command max-size
View
User interface view
Parameter
size-value: History buffer size, which is in the range of 0 to 256 and defaults to 10,
that is, up to ten history commands can be stored.
Description
Using the history-command max-size command, you can set the history command
buffer size. Using the undo history-command max-size command, you can restore
the default history command buffer size.
Example
Set size of the history command buffer to 20.
[3Com-ui-console0] history-command max-size 20

idle-timeout Syntax
idle-timeout minutes [ seconds ]
undo idle-timeout
View
User interface view
Parameter
minutes: Number of minutes, in the range of 0 to 35791.
seconds: Number of seconds, in the range of 0 to 59.
Description
Using the idle-timeout command, you can set time interval for timed
disconnection. Using the undo idle-timeout command, you can restore the default
time value of timed disconnection.
The time interval for timed disconnection defaults to ten minutes.
Setting the time value to 0 will disable the timed disconnection, in which case a
connection will not be cut off upon the expiration of preset time interval..
Example
Set the time interval for timed disconnection to one minute and 30 seconds.
[3Com-ui-console0] idle-timeout 1 30
modem Syntax
modem [ call-in | both ]
undo modem [ call-in | both ]
View
User interface view
Parameter
call-in: Allows incoming calls.
both: Allows both incoming and outgoing calls.
Description
Using the modem command, you can set the incoming/outgoing call attributes
with Modem. Using the undo modem command, you can disable incoming and
outgoing calls.
By default, both incoming and outgoing calls are allowed.

When executed without any parameters, the modem command enables both
incoming and outgoing calls.
When executed without any parameters, the undo modem command disables
both incoming and outgoing calls.
This command is only available for the AUX interface and other asynchronous
interface, but not for Console port.
Example
Set Modem dialup at asynchronous serial ports.
[3Com-ui-tty] modem
modem auto-answer Syntax
modem auto-answer
undo modem auto-answer
View
User interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the modem auto-answer command, you can set the answering mode to
auto-answer. Using the undo modem auto-answer command, you can set the
answering mode to manual answer.
By default, the answering mode is manual answer.
This command is valid for the AUX interface and other asynchronous interfaces
but not for the console interface.
When taking the modem dial-up connection approach, the user should first set
the modem parameters on the involved user interface.
Example
Set the answering mode to auto-answer.
[3Com-ui-aux0] modem auto-answer
modem timer answer Syntax
modem timer answer seconds
undo modem timer answer

View
User interface view
Parameter
seconds: Timeout time in the range of 1 to 60 seconds.
Description
Using the modem timer answer command, you can set the timeout time waiting
for the carrier signal after the off-hook action for setting up an inbound
connection. Using the undo modem timer answer command, you can restore the
default waiting timeout time.
The waiting timeout time defaults to 30 seconds.
This command is valid for the AUX interface and other asynchronous interfaces
but not for the console interface.
Example
None
parity Syntax
parity { none | even | odd | mark | space }
undo parity
View
User interface view
Parameter
none: Implements no check.
even: Implements even parity check.
odd: Implements odd parity check.
mark: Implements mark check.
space: Implements space check.
Description
Using the parity command, you can set the check bit of a user interface. Using the
undo parity command, you can restore the check mode of user interface to none.
By default, no check is performed.
The configuration can become effective only when the involved serial interface
works in the asynchronous flow mode.
Example
Set the transmission check bit on AUX interface to odd parity.
[3Com-ui-aux0] parity odd
redirect Syntax
redirect
undo redirect
View
User interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the redirect command, you can set the redirection function, which is only
valid for the AUX and TTY user interfaces, on an asynchronous port. Using the
undo redirect command, you can disable the rediction function on the involved
port.
By default, the system does not support redirection.
This command is only valid for the AUX and the TTY user interfaces. For example,
executing the redirect command on a TTY user interface will enable the redirection
function of the user interface.
For related commands, see telnet and display tcp status.
Example
Enable the redirection function of user interface TTY7.
[3Com-ui-tty7] redirect
screen-length Syntax
screen-length screen-length
undo screen-length
View
User interface view
Parameter
screen-length: Number of rows displayed in a screen in the event of split screen

display, which is in the range of 0 to 512.
Description
Using the screen-length command, you can set the number of rows displayed in
one screen at the terminal. Using the undo screen-length command, you can
restore the number of rows in a terminal screen to 24.
By default, the number of rows in one screen is 24.
screen-length 0 indicates to disable the split screen function.
Example
Set the number of rows in one screen of the terminal to 30.
[3Com-ui-console0] screen-length 30
send Syntax
send [ number | all | type-name number ]
View
User view
Parameter
all: Sends messages to all user interfaces.
type-name: Name of user interface type.
number: Absolute/Relative user interface number.
Description
Using the send command, you can transfer messages between user interfaces.
Using the send all command, you can send messages to all user-interfaces.
Using the send number command, you can send messages to the user interface
defined by specifying its number.
Using the send type-name number command, you can send messages to the user
interface of type-name with specified number.
Example
Send messages to the console user-interface.
<3Com> send con 0

Enter message, end with CTRL+Z or Enter; abort with CTRL+C:
Hello,good morning!
Send message? [Y/N]
set authentication Syntax

password
set authentication password { simple | cipher } password
undo set authentication password

View
User interface view
Parameter
simple: Plain text password.
cipher: Encrypted password.
password: If password form is set to simple, the parameter password must be in

plain text. If the password form is set to cipher, the password can be either in
encrypted text or in plain text depending on what has been input. A plain-text
password can be a string of no more than 16 consecutive characters, 1234567 for
example. An encrypted password, however, must be of 24 characters in length
and must be in ciphertext, _(TT8F]Y\5SQ=^Q`MAF4<1!! for example.
Description
Using the set authentication password command, you can set a local
authentication password. Using the undo set authentication password command,
you can remove the local authentication password.
Regardless of whether the password format is set to plain text or ciphertext, a user
must input plain text password during the authentication.
When configuring a password, you must specify its format to simple or cipher. If
the former has been specified, the password saved in the configuration file will be
in plain text. If the latter is specified, however, the password will be displayed in
ciphertext regardless of whether the password you enter is a simple password of 1
to 16 bytes or an encrypted password of 24 bytes.
By default, Telnet users is required to undergo login password authentication

(which can be set by using the authentication-mode password command). If no
password has been configured, the following information will be displayed:
password required, but none set
For related command, see authentication-mode.
Example
Set the local authentication password for the user interfaces vtys 0 to 4 to
"3Com".
[3Com-ui-vty0-4] authentication-mode password

[3Com-ui-vty0-4] set authentication password simple 3Com
shell Syntax
shell
undo shell
View
User interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the shell command, you can enable terminal services on a user interface.
Using the undo shell command, you can remove the current setting.
By default, the terminal services are enabled on all the user interfaces.
Some constraints are put on the undo shell command. First, CON does not
support this command. Second, if there is only AUX but no CON on a router (AUX
and CON shares the same port), the AUX will not support this command as well.
These constraints do not apply to other types of user interfaces.
Example
Disable terminal services on the virtual terminals (VTYs) 0 to 4.
[3Com] user-interface vty 0 4

[3Com-ui-vty0-4] undo shell
The following information will be displayed for a login Telnet terminal:
% connection refused by remote host!
speed Syntax
speed speed-value
undo speed
View
User interface view
Parameter
speed-value: Transmission rate in bps.
Description
Using the speed command, you can set the transmission rate of a user interface.
Using the undo speed command, you can restore the default transmission rate of
the user interface.
By default, the transmission rate is 9600bps.
Only when the serial interface works in asynchronous flow mode will the
configuration be effective.
The transmission rates supported by asynchronous serial interfaces include:
■ 300bps
■ 600bps
■ 1200bps
■ 4800bps
■ 9600bps
■ 19200bps
■ 38400bps
■ 57600bps
■ 115200bps
Example
Set the transmission rate of the user interface to 19200bps.
[3Com-ui-vty0] speed 19200
stopbits Syntax
stopbits { 1.5 | 1 | 2 }
undo stopbits
View
User interface view
Parameter
■ 1.5: Sets the stop bit to 1.5.
■ 1: Sets the stop bit to 1.
■ 2: Sets the stop bit to 2.
Description
Using the stopbits command, you can set the stop bit of a user interface. Using
the undo stopbits command, you can restore the default stop bit of the user
interface.
By default, the stop bit is set to 1.
Only when the serial interface works in asynchronous flow mode will the
configuration be effective.
Example
Set the stop bit to 1.5.
[3Com-ui-vty0] stopbits 1.5

3.1.23 user privilege
Syntax
user privilege level level
undo user privilege level
View
User interface view
Parameter
level: Command level in the range of 0 to 3.
Description
Using the user privilege command, you can configure the command accessing
level commensurate with the users accessing the system from the current user
interface. Using the undo user privilege command, you can disable the current
setting.
By default, the default command accessing levels of CON user interface and other
user interfaces have been set to 3 and 0.
If the command accessing level assigned to a user interface conflicts with the
precedence level assigned to the used username in the granted rights, the rights
commensurate with the username will be preferred. For example, the precedence
of the user 007 allows 007 to access level-3 commands and the privilege level
assigned to the user interface VTY 0 only allows the login users to access level-2
commands. If 007 accesses the system from VTY0 in this case, it will be able to
access the commands of level-3 and lower levels.
Example
Assign the users accessing the system from the user interface with the privilege
allowing them to access level-2 commands.
[3Com-ui-vty0] user privilege level 2
After the user accesses the router from vty 0 via Telnet, the terminal will display:
<3Com>
user-interface Syntax
user-interface [ type-keyword ] user-interface-number [

ending-user-interface-number ]
View
System view
Parameter
type-keyword: Type name of user-interface.
user-interface-number: The first user-interface to be configured.
ending- user-interface-number: The last user-interface to be configured.
Description
Using the user-interface command, you can enter the single-user interface view or
multi-user interface view.
Example
Enter the user-interface console 0 view to configure console 0.
[3Com] user-interface console 0

[3Com-ui-console0]
Enter the user-interface vty 0 view to configure vty 0.
[3Com] user-interface vty 0

[3Com-ui-vty0]
Enter the user-interface vty view to configure user-interfaces vtys 0 through 3.

[3Com-ui-vty0-3]
enter the user-interface view to configure user-interfaces 0 through 4, including

of console port type, of AUX interface type and of VTY interface type. The user
interface types will be configured depending on the configuration interface
available on the router.
The following example configures one console user interface and three VTY user
interfaces, which may be right for the case where the router does not provide the
AUX interface.
[3Com] user-interface 0 3
[3Com-ui0-3]
debugging Syntax
ntp-service
debugging ntp-service { access | adjustment | authentication | event | filter | packet
| parameter | refclock | selection | synchronization | validity | all }
undo debugging ntp-service { access | adjustment | authentication | event | filter |

packet | parameter | refclock | selection | synchronization | validity | all }
View
User view
Parameter
access: NTP access control debugging.
adjustment: NTP clock adjustment debugging.
all: All the NTP information debugging.
authentication: NTP identification authentication debugging.
event: NTP event debugging.
filter: NTP filter information debugging.
packet: NTP packet debugging.
parameter: NTP clock parameter debugging.
refclock: NTP reference clock debugging.
selection: NTP clock selection information debugging.
synchronization: NTP clock synchronous information debugging.
validity: Validity debugging of NTP remote host.
Description
Using the debugging ntp-service command, you can enable debugging of all types
of NTP service information. Using the undo debugging ntp-service command, you
can disable NTP service debugging.
By default, all the information debugging is disabled.
Example
Enable the ntp access control debugging.
<3Com> debugging ntp-service access
display ntp-service Syntax

sessions
display ntp-service sessions [ verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
verbose: Displays the detailed information of sessions.
Description
Using the display ntp-service sessions command, you can display the status of all
the sessions maintained by the local device ntp.
By default, the status of all the sessions maintained by the local device NTP is
displayed.
The command without parameter verbose will display the brief information of all
the sessions maintained by the local device NTP.
The command with parameter verbose will display the detailed information of all
the sessions maintained by the local device NTP.
Example
Display the brief information of all the sessions maintained by the local device NTP
<3Com> display ntp-service sessions

sourcerefidstnowpollreachdelayoffsetdis
******************************************************************
[12345]1.0.1.11LOCAL(0)316437726.1199.539.7
note: 1 source(master),2 source(peer),3 selected,4 candidate,5
configured

status
display ntp-service status
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ntp-service status command, you can display the state
information of the NTP service.
Example
<3Com> display ntp-service status
clock status: unsynchronized
clock stratum: 16
reference clock ID: none
nominal frequency: 100.0000 Hz
actual frequency: 100.0000 Hz
clock precision: 2^18
clock offset: 0.0000 ms
root delay: 0.00 ms
root dispersion: 0.00 ms
peer dispersion: 0.00 ms
reference time: 00:00:00.000 UTC Jan 1 1900(00000000.00000000)
Description of the display information is shown in the following table.
Table 3 Stating information of the NTP service
Display information Description

synchronized Indicate that the local system is synchronized to a remote NTP server or a
clock source
unsynchronized Indicate that the local system is not synchronized to any remote NTP server
stratum The NTP stratum of the local system
reference If the local system has been synchronized to a remote NTP server or a clock
source, it indicates the address of the remote server or clock source ID
nominal freq Nominal frequency of the hardware clock of the local system
actual freq Actual frequency of the hardware clock of the local system
precision Precision of the local system clock
reftime Reference timestamp
offset Offset of the NTP server relative to the local clock
root delay Overall delay from the local to the master reference clock
root disper Dispersion of the local master reference clock
peer disper Dispersion of the remote NTP server

trace
display ntp-service trace [ X.X.X.X ]
View
Any view
Parameter
X.X.X.X: The IP address of the NTP server functioning as the reference clock
source.
Description
Using the display ntp-service trace command, you can display the summary
information of each NTP time server from the local device tracing to the reference
clock source.
This command is used to trace to the reference clock source from the local device
along the time synchronous NTP server chain and display the summary
information of each NTP server.
Example
<3Com> display ntp-service trace
server4: stratum 4, offset 0.0019529, synch distance 0.144135
server1: stratum 1, offset 0.0019298, synch distance 0.011993 refid
'GPS Reciever'
The above information displays the synchronous chain of server4. It indicates that
server 4 can be synchronized to server 3, server 3 to server 2 and server 2 to server
1. Server 1 is synchronized from the reference clock source GPS Receiver.
ntp-service access Syntax
ntp-service access { query | synchronization | server | peer } acl-number
undo ntp-service access { query | synchronization | server | peer }

View
System view
Parameter
query: Query authority is limited.
synchronization: Only the server is permitted to access.
server: Allows the server to perform access and query.
peer: Absolute access.
acl-number: IP address access list number in the range of 1 to 99.
Description
Using the ntp-service access command, you can set the access control authority of
the local device services. Using the undo ntp-service access command, you can
remove the access control authority that has been set.
By default, there is no access authority.
This command is used to set the access authority of the NTP service of the local
device. A security approach of minimum authority is provided in this manual. The
more secure approach is to perform ID authentication. When there is an access
request, this command can be used to make the matches in sequence in a way of
from the minimum access authority to the maximum authority. All matches are
based on the first match. The match order is peer, server, synchronization, query.
Example
Enable the peer in No.76 access list to perform time request, query control and
time synchronization on the local device.
[3Com] ntp-service access peer 76
Enable the peer in No.28 access list to perform time request, query control on the
local device.
[3Com] ntp-service access server 28
4.1.6 ntp-service authentication enable
Syntax
ntp-service authentication enable
undo ntp-service authentication enable
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ntp-service authentication enable command, you can set

NTP-service ID authentication. Using the undo ntp-service
authentication enable command, you can remove NTP-service ID
authentication.
By default, no ID authentication is set.
Example
Enable NTP ID authentication.

[3Com] ntp-service authentication enable
ntp-service Syntax
authentication-keyid
ntp-service authentication-keyid number authentication-mode md5 value
undo ntp-service authentication-keyid number
View
System view
Parameter
number: Key number in the range of 1 to 4294967295.
value: Key itself that is represented with 1 to 32 ASCII characters.
Description
Using the ntp-service authentication-keyid command, you can set NTP

authentication key. Using the undo ntp-service authentication-keyid command,
you can remove NTP authentication key.
By default, no authentication key is set.
This command is used to set NTP authentication key, which only supports MD5
authentication.
Example
Set MD5 ID authentication key. The key ID number is 10 and the key is BetterKey.
[3Com] ntp-service authentication-keyid 10 authentication-mode md5

BetterKey
ntp-service Syntax
broadcast-client
ntp-service broadcast-client
undo ntp-service broadcast-client
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ntp-service broadcast-client command, you can configure the NTP
broadcast client mode. Using the undo ntp-service broadcast-client command, you
can remove the NTP broadcast client mode.
By default, no NTP broadcast client service is configured.
This command is used to specify the local interface on the local device to receive
the NTP broadcast packets. The local device is run in client mode. It first listens
discreetly to the broadcast packets from the server. When the first broadcast
packet is received, the local device enables a short client/server mode to exchange
messages with the remote server in order to estimate network delay. Then it enters
the client mode to listen discreetly to the broadcast packets and synchronize the
local clock according to the coming broadcast packets.
Example
Enable the interface Ethernet 1/0/1 to receive NTP broadcast message.
[3Com] interface ethernet 1/0/1

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/1] ntp-service broadcast-client
ntp-service Syntax
broadcast-server
ntp-service broadcast-server [ authentication-keyid keyid | version number ] *
undo ntp-service broadcast-server
View
Interface view
Parameter
authentication-keyid: Defines the ID authentication key.
keyid: Key ID number used to transmit message to broadcast clients, which is in

the range of 1 to 4294967295.
version: Defines the NTP version number.
number: NTP version number in the range of 1 to 3.

Description
Using the ntp-service broadcast-server command, you can configure NTP

broadcast server mode. Using the undo ntp-service broadcast-server command,
you can remove the NTP broadcast server mode.
By default, no broadcast service is configured and the version number is 3.
This command is used to specify an interface on the local device to transmit NTP
broadcast packets. The local device is run in broadcast-server mode, which acts as
the broadcast server to transmit broadcast messages periodically to the broadcast
clients.
Example
Enable Ethernet 1/0/0 to transmit NTP broadcast packets. No.4 key is used for
encryption and NTP version number is set to 3.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] ntp-service broadcast-server authentication-key
4 version 3
ntp-service Syntax
max-dynamic-sessions
ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions number
undo ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions
View
System view
Parameter
number: Number of sessions allowed to be established locally. It is in the range of

0 to (232-1).
Description
Using the ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions command, you can set the number of
sessions allowed to be established locally. Using the undo ntp-service
max-dynamic-sessions command, you can restore the default number of the
sessions.
By default, 100 sessions are allowed to be established.
Example
Set the number of sessions the local allows to establish to 50.
[3Com] ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions 50
ntp-service Syntax
multicast-client
ntp-service multicast-client [ X.X.X.X ]
undo ntp-service multicast-client [ X.X.X.X ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
X.X.X.X: Multicast IP address, which is a Class D address.
Description
Using the ntp-service multicast-client command, you can configure the NTP
multicast client mode. Using the undo ntp-service multicast-client command, you
can remove the NTP multicast client mode.
By default, no multicast client service is configured and the X.X.X.X is 224.0.1.1.
This command is used to specify an interface on the local device to receive the NTP
multicast packets. The local device is run in client mode. It first listens discreetly to
the multicast packets from the server. When the first multicast packet is received,
the local device enables a short client/server mode to exchange messages with the
remote server in order to estimate network delay. Then it enters the client
(multicast-client) mode to listen discreetly to the multicast packets and synchronize
the local clock according to the coming multicast packets.
Example
Configure Ethernet 1/0/0 to receive NTP multicast packets. The multicast address
corresponding to the multicast packets is 244.0.1.1.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] ntp-service multicast-client 224.0.1.1
ntp-service Syntax
multicast-server
ntp-service multicast-server [ X.X.X.X ] [ authentication-keyid keyid | ttl ttl-number
| version number ] *
undo ntp-service multicast-server [ X.X.X.X ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
X.X.X.X: Multicast IP address, which is a Class D address. The default address is

224.0.1.1.
authentication-keyid: Defines the ID authentication key.
keyid: ID number used when transmitting messages to the multicast clients in the
range of 1 to 4294967295.
ttl: Defines the life span of the multicast packet.

ttl-number: Life span of the multicast packet in the range of 1 to 255.
Description
Using the ntp-service multicast-server command, you can configure the NTP
multicast server mode. Using the undo ntp-service multicast-server command, you
can remove the NTP multicast server mode.
By default, no multicast service is configured, the IP address is 224.0.1.1 and the

version number is 3.
This command is used to specify an interface on the local device to transmit NTP
multicast packets. The local device is run in server (multicast-server) mode, which
acts as the multicast server to transmit multicast messages periodically to the
multicast clients.
Example
Configure Ethernet 1/0/0 to transmit NTP multicast messages. The multicast

address is 244.0.1.1, encrypted by No.4 key. The NTP version number is set to 3.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] ntp-service multicast-server 224.0.1.1
authentication-keyid 4 version 3
ntp-service Syntax
refclock-master
ntp-service refclock-master [ X.X.X.X ] [ layers-number ]
undo ntp-service refclock-master [ X.X.X.X ]
View
System view
Parameter
X.X.X.X: IP address of the reference clock 127.127.t.u.
layers-number: Specifies the stratum of the local clock, which is in the range of 1
to 15.
Description
Using the ntp-service refclock-master command, you can set the external
reference clock or the local clock to be the NTP master clock. Using the undo
ntp-service refclock-master command, you can remove the setting of the NTP
master clock.
By default, the X.X.X.X is not specified and the stratum is 1.

Setting the external reference clock or the local clock to be the NTP master clock
provides other devices with synchronous time. The X.X.X.X is the IP address
127.127.t.u of the reference clock. When no IP address is specified, the local clock
is the NTP master clock by default. This command can be used to specify the
stratum of the NTP master clock.
Example
Set the local device to be the NTP master clock to provide synchronous time for
other peers. The stratum is set to 3.
[3Com] ntp-service refclock-master 3
ntp-service reliable Syntax

authentication-keyid
ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid number
undo ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid number
View
System view
Parameter
number: Key number in the range of 1 to 4294967295.
Description
Using the ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid command, you can specify the
key to be reliable. Using the undo ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid
command, you can remove the specified reliable key.
By default, no reliable authentication key is set.
If ID authentication is enabled, this command is used to specify that one or more

keys are reliable. That is, the client can only synchronize the server that provides
the reliable key. The client cannot synchronize the server that provides keys not
being reliable.
Example
Enable NTP ID authentication in MD5 encryption method. The key ID number is

37 and the key is BetterKey. The key is specified to be reliable.
[3Com] ntp-service authentication enable

[3Com] ntp-service authentication-keyid 37 authentication-mode md5
BetterKey
[3Com] ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid 37
ntp-service Syntax
source-interface
ntp-service source-interface {interface-type interface-number }
undo ntp-service source-interface

View
System view
Parameter
interface-type: Interface type, which determines an interface along with the

interface-number.
interface-number: Interface number, which determines an interface along with the

interface-type.
Description
Using the ntp-service source-interface command, you can specify the interface for
the local end to transmit NTP messages. Using the undo ntp-service
source-interface command, you can delete the interface for the local end to
transmit NTP messages.
The source IP address is determined by the output interface.
The source IP address is the specified one when specifying the local to transmit all
the NTP messages. The IP address is obtained from the specified interface. If the
user does not want the IP addresses on other interfaces to become the destination
address responding to the messages, this command can be used to specify one
interface to send all the NTP packets.
Example
Specify the source IP address of all the NTP output packets to use the IP address
on the interface Ethernet 1/0/0.
[3Com] ntp-service source-interface ethernet 1/0/0
ntp-service unicast-peer Syntax
ntp-service unicast-peer X.X.X.X [ version number | authentication-key keyid |

source-interface {interface-type interface-number } | priority ] *
undo ntp-service unicast-peer X.X.X.X
View
System view
Parameter
X.X.X.X: IP address of the remote server.
authentication-keyid: Defines ID authentication key.

keyid: Key ID number in the range of 1 to 4294967295, which is used when

transmitting messages to the remote server.
source-interface: Specifies the interface name.

interface-number.

interface-type. The source IP address for the NTP packets sent from the local end
to the peer is got from this interface.
priority: Specifies the server as the preferred one.
Description
Using the ntp-service unicast-peer command, you can configure the NTP peer
mode. Using the undo ntp-service unicast-peer command, you can remove the
NTP peer mode.
By default, the version number is 3, ID authentication is not supported and the

server is not the preferred one.
This command is used to set the remote server specified by the X.X.X.X as the peer
of the local device. The local device is run in symmetric active mode. The X.X.X.X is
a host address and cannot be the address of the broadcast, multicast or reference
clock. In this configuration, the local device can be synchronized to the remote
server and the remote server can also be synchronized to the local server.
Example
Display the configuration that the peer 128.108.22.44 provides the synchronous
time for the local and the local peer can provide synchronous time for the peer.
The version number is 3. The IP address of the NTP packets is obtained from
Ethernet 1/0/0.
[3Com] ntp-service unicast-peer 128.108.22.44 version 3

source-interface ethernet 1/0/0
ntp-service Syntax
unicast-server
ntp-service unicast-server X.X.X.X [ version number | authentication-keyid keyid |
source-interface {interface-type interface-number } | priority ] *
undo ntp-service unicast-server X.X.X.X
View
System view
Parameter
X.X.X.X: IP address of the remote server.

authentication-keyid: Defines ID authentication key.
keyid: Key ID number in the range of 1 to 4294967295, which is used when

transmitting messages to the remote server.
source-interface: Specifies the interface name.

interface-number.

interface-type. The source IP address for the NTP packets sent from the local end
to the server is got from this interface.
priority: Specifies the server as the preferred one.
Description
Using the ntp-service unicast-server command, you can configure the NTP server
mode. Using the undo ntp-service unicast-server command, you can remove the
NTP server mode.
By default, the version number is 3, ID authentication is enabled and the server is

not the preferred one.
This command is used to set the remote server specified by the X.X.X.X as the
local time server. The X.X.X.X is a host address and cannot be the IP address of the
broadcast, multicast or reference clock. In this configuration, the local client device
can be synchronized to the remote server and the remote server cannot be
synchronized to the local client device.
Example
Configure the local device to be provided with the synchronous time by the server
128.108.22.44. The version number is 3.
[3Com] ntp-service unicast-server 128.108.22.44 version 3
SNMP Configuration
Commands
debugging snmp-agent Syntax
debugging snmp-agent { header | packet | process | trap }
undo debugging snmp-agent { header | packet | process | trap }
View
User view
Parameter
header: Enables the debugging of packet information header.
packet: Enables the packet debugging.
process: Enables the process debugging of SNMP packets.
trap: Enables the debugging of Trap packets.
Description
Using the debugging snmp-agent command, you can enable the SNMP Agent
debugging and specify the debugging information of SNMP module. Using the
undo debugging snmp-agent command, you can remove the current settings.
By default, the SNMP Agent debugging is disabled.
Example
Enable the debugging of SNMP Agent packet information header.
<3Com> debugging snmp-agent header
display snmp-agent Syntax
display snmp-agent { local-engineid | remote-engineid }
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display snmp-agent command, you can display the SNMP engine ID of
local or remote device.
The SNMP engine is the only identification of the SNMP management, and it
uniquely identifies a SNMP entity in one management domain. The SNMP engine
is an important component of the SNMP entity, completing the functions of SNMP
messages such as message dispatching, message processing, security
authentication and access control.
Example
Display the engine ID of the local device.
<3Com> display snmp-agent local-engineid

SNMP local EngineID: 000007DB7F0000013859
in the above information:

SNMP local EngineID indicates the ID of the local SNMP engine.

community
display snmp-agent community [ read | write ]
View
Any view
Parameter
read: Displays the community name information with the read-only authority.
write: Displays the community name information with the authority of read and
write.
Description
Using the display snmp-agent community command, you can display the currently
configured community name of SNMPv1 or SNMPv2.
Example
Display the currently configured community name.
<3Com> display snmp-agent community

Community name:8040zlz
Group name:8040zlz
Storage-type: nonVolatile
Community name:8040core
Group name:8040core

group
display snmp-agent group [ group-name ]
View
Any view
Parameter
group-name: Specifies the group name of the SNMP information to be displayed,

ranging 1 to 32 bytes.
Description
Using the display snmp-agent group command, you can display the group
information based on USM. Without parameters, the command displays the group
information corresponding to all the specified group names, including group
name, security mode, storage types on the router etc.
Example
Display the SNMP group name and security mode.
<3Com> display snmp-agent group

Group name: v3r2
Security model: v3 noAuthnoPriv
Readview: ViewDefault
Writeview: <no specified>
Notifyview :<no specified>
The corresponding fields displayed above are described in the following table:
Table 4 Description of display snmp-agent group fields
Content Description
Groupname Name of SNMP group corresponding to the user
Readview Name of read-only MIB view corresponding to the
group
Writeview Name of writable MIB view corresponding to the
group
Notifyview Name of notifying MIB view corresponding to the
group
Storage-type the type of storage type

mib-view
display snmp-agent mib-view [ exclude | include | viewname view-name ]
View
Any view
Parameter
exclude: Specifies to exclude the SNMP MIB view attributes displayed and set.
include: Specifies to include the SNMP MIB view attributes displayed and set.
viewname: Specifies the view name to be displayed.
Description
Using the display snmp-agent mib-view command, you can display the currently
configured MIB view.
Example
Display the currently configured MIB view.
<3Com> display snmp-agent mib-view

View name:ViewDefault
MIB Subtree:internet
Subtree mask:
View Type:included
View status:active
MIB Subtree:snmpUsmMIB
Subtree mask:
View Type:excluded
View status:active
MIB Subtree:snmpVacmMIB
Subtree mask:
View Type:excluded
View status:active
MIB Subtree:snmpModules.18
Subtree mask:
View Type:excluded
View status:active
The following table describes the parameters displayed above.
Table 5 Description of display snmp-agent mib-view fields
Content Description
View name View name
MIB Subtree MIB subtree
Storage-type Storage type
ViewType: Included/excluded Indicate whether to enable or disable the access to a
MIB object
Active Indicate the state of lines in the list
CAUTION: When the SNMP Agent is disabled, "Snmp Agent disabled" will be
displayed for all the above display commands.

statistics
display snmp-agent statistics
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the diplay snmp-agent statistics command, you can display the state and
statistics of SNMP.
Example
Check the statistics of SNMP communication.
<3Com> display snmp-agent statistics

41 Messages delivered to the SNMP entity
0 Messages which were for an unsupported version
7 Messages which used an unknown community name
0 Messages which represented an illegal operation for the community
supplied
0 ASN.1 or BER errors in the process of decoding
18 MIB objects retrieved successfully
0 MIB objects altered successfully
0 Get-request PDUs accepted and processed
0 Get-next PDUs accepted and processed
0 Set-request PDUs accepted and processed
57 Messages passed from the SNMP entity
0 SNMP PDUs which had a tooBig error (Maximum packet size 1500)
0 SNMP PDUs which had a noSuchName error
0 SNMP PDUs which had a badValue error
0 SNMP PDUs which had a general error
25 Response PDUs accepted and processed
11 Trap PDUs accepted and processed
The following table describes the fields displayed above:
Table 6 Description of diplay snmp-agent statistics fields
Content Description
Messages delivered to the SNMP entity Total number of input SNMP packets
Messages which were for an unsupported Number of packets with version errors
version
Messages which used an unknown community Number of packets with community name errors
name
Messages which represented an illegal operation Number of packets with authority errors
for the community supplied corresponding to community name
ASN.1 or BER errors in the process of decoding Number of SNMP packets with encoding errors
MIB objects retrieved successfully Number of variables requested by NMS
MIB objects altered successfully Number of variables set by NMS
Get-request PDUs accepted and processed Number of get-request packets accepted and
processed (PDU: Protocol Data Unit)
Get-next PDUs accepted and processed Number of received packets that get next
requests
Set-request PDUs accepted and processed Number of received packets that set requests
Messages passed from the SNMP entity Total number of output SNMP packets
SNMP PDUs which had a tooBig error Number of SNMP packets with Too_big errors
(Maximum packet size 1500) Maximum SNMP packet size is 1500.
SNMP PDUs which had a noSuchName error Number of packets with requests of non-existing
MIB object
SNMP PDUs which had a badValue error Number of SNMP packets with Bad_values errors
SNMP PDUs which had a general error Number of SNMP packets with General_errors
Response PDUs accepted and processed Number of response packets accepted and
processed
Trap PDUs accepted and processed Number of Trap packets accepted and processed

sys-info
display snmp-agent sys-info [ contact | location | version ]*
View
Any view
Parameter
contact: Displays the contact information of the local device.
location: Displays the physical location information of the local device.
version: Displays the SNMP version running in the local agent.
Description
Using the display snmp-agent sys-info command, you can display the system
information of the local SNMP device.
Example
Display the system information.
<3Com> display snmp-agent sys-info

usm-user
display snmp-agent usm-user [ engineid engineid | username user-name | group
group-name ] *
View
Any view
Parameter
engineid: Displays the SNMPv3 user information of the specified engine ID.
engineid-string: Character string of the engine ID.
username: Displays the information of the specified SNMPv3 user.
user-name: User name, in the range of 1 to 32 bytes.
group: Displays the user information belonging to the related SNMP group.
group-name: Group name, in the range of 1 to 32 bytes.
Description
Using the display snmp-agent usm-user command, you can display the
information about SNMP users.
An SNMP user is the remote user who executes SNMP management operation.
The snmp-agent usm-user command is used to specify the SNMP user.
Example
Display the information about all the current users.
<3Com> display snmp-agent usm-user

User name: authuser
Engine ID: 8000007DB20000000C025808 active
The following table describes the corresponding fields displayed above.
Table 7 Description of display snmp-agent usm-user fields
Content Description
authuser Modify display information
User name Character string used to identify the SNMP user
Engine ID Character string used to identify the SNMP
device
Active Indicate the state of SNMP USER
snmp-agent Syntax
snmp-agent
undo snmp-agent
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the snmp-agent command, you can enable the SNMP Agent and specify the
SNMP configuration information. Using the undo snmp-agent command, you can
disable SNMP Agent.
By default, the SNMP Agent is disabled.
The snmp-agent command can be used to enable SNMP Agent, and any
configuration command of snmp-agent can also enable SNMP Agent. However,
the undo form of the corresponding command does not have the functions. It will
be invalid configuring the undo form of the command when the SNMP Agent is
not enabled.
The undo snmp-agent command is used to disable the SNMP Agent on the
condition that SNMP Agent has been enabled.
Example
Disable the operating SNMP version.
[3Com] undo snmp-agent

SNMP Agent disabled
snmp-agent community Syntax
snmp-agent community { read | write } community-name [ [ mib-view view-name ]

| [ acl acl-number ] ]*
undo snmp-agent community community-name
View
System view
Parameter
read: Indicates that the community name has the read-only authority in the
specified view.
write: Indicates that the community name has the read and write authority in the
specified view.
community-name: Character string of community name.
mib-view: MIB view available for the specified community name
view-name: Name of MIB view.
acl: Sets the ACL corresponding to the community name.
acl-number: Number of the ACL, range 1 to 99.
Description
Using the snmp-agent community command, you can set the community access
name of SNMPV1 and SNMPV2C and MIB views and ACLs available for the
community name. Using the undo snmp-agent community command, you can
remove the setting.
For the related command, see snmp-agent group, snmp-agent usm-user.
Example
Set the community name to comaccess and allow read-only access with this
community name.
[3Com] snmp-agent community read comaccess
Set the community name to mgr and enable reading and writing access.
[3Com] snmp-agent community write mgr

Delete the community name comaccess.
[3Com] undo snmp-agent community comaccess
snmp-agent group Syntax
snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name { [ read read-view ] | [ write write-view ]

| [ notify notify-view ] } [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name
snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ] { [ read read-view ] |

[ write write-view ] | [ notify notify-view ] } [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ]
View
System view
Parameter
v1: V1 security mode the user uses.
v2c: V2C security mode the user uses.
group-name: Group name, in the range of 1 to 32 bytes.
authentication: Performs authentication of the packet without encryption.
privacy: Performs authentication and encryption of the packet.
read: Enables the setting of read-only view.
read-view: Name of the read-only view, in the range of 1 to 32 bytes.
write: Enables the setting of reading and writing view.
write-view: Name of the reading and writing view, in the range of 1 to 32 bytes.
notify: Enables the setting of notify view.
notify-view: Name of the notify view , in the range of 1 to 32 bytes.
acl: Sets the list of access view.
acl-number: Standard access list, in the range of 1 to 99.
Description
Using the snmp-agent group command, you can configure a new SNMP group,
i.e., to map the SNMP user to the SNMP view. Using the undo snmp-agent group
command, you can delete a specified SNMP group.
By default, the snmp-agent group group-name v3 command adopts the method

of not authenticating and encrypting.
For the related command, see snmp-agent mib-view, snmp-agent usm-user.
Example
Create an SNMPv3 group known as Johngroup.
[3Com] snmp-agent group v3 Johngroup
snmp-agent Syntax
local-engineid
snmp-agent local-engineid engineid
undo snmp-agent local-engineid
View
System view
Parameter
engineid: Character string of engine ID. It must be a hexadecimal number with the
length of 5 to 32.
Description
Using the snmp-agent local-engineid command, you can configure an ID for the
local SNMP engine on the router. Using the undo snmp-agent local-engineid
command, you can remove the current settings.
By default, the engine ID is "enterprise number + equipment information" of the

company. Each device determines the equipment information. It can be either the
IP address, MAC address or the device defined hexadecimal number string.
For the related command, see snmp-agent usm-user.
Example
Configure the name of the local equipment as 12345.
[3Com] snmp-agent local-engineid 12345
snmp-agent mib-view Syntax
snmp-agent mib-view { included | excluded } view-name oid-tree
undo snmp-agent mib-view view-name
View
System view
Parameter
view-name: Name of the view.
oid-tree: OID MIB subtree for the Mib object subtree, which can be a character
string of the variable OID or a character string of variable name. For example, it
can be character strings such as 1.4.5.3.1 and system character strings or use "*"
as wildcard, for example, 1.4.5.*.*.1.
included: Indicates to include the MIB subtree.
excluded: Indicates to exclude the MIB subtree.
Description
Using the snmp-agent mib-view command, you can create or update the
information about a view. Using the undo snmp-agent mib-view command, you
can delete the view information.
By default, the view name is ViewDefault and the OID is 1.3.6.1.
Currently, this command supports not only the input of the character string of the
variable OID as a parameter but also the input of the node name as a parameter.
For the related command, see snmp-agent group.
Example
Create a view that includes all MIB-II objects.
[3Com] snmp-agent mib-view included mib2 1.3.6.1
snmp-agent packet Syntax

max-size
snmp-agent packet max-size byte-count
undo snmp-agent packet max-size
View
System view
Parameter
byte-count: The maximum length of the SNMP packets that Agent can
receive/send, in the range of 484 to 17940 bytes. The default value is 1500 bytes.
Description
Using the snmp-agent packet max-size command, you can set the maximum
length of the SNMP message packets that Agent can receive/forward. Using the
undo snmp-agent packet max-size command, you can remove the current setting.
Example
Set the maximum length of the SNMP packet that Agent can receive/forward to
1042 bytes.
[3Com] snmp-agent packet max-size 1042
snmp-agent sys-info Syntax
snmp-agent sys-info { contact sysContact | location sysLocation | version { { v1 | v2c

| v3 } * | all } }
undo snmp-agent sys-info { contact | location | version { { v1 | v2c | v3 } * | all } }
View
System view
Parameter
contact: Sets the system maintenance contact information.
sysContact: Character sting describing the system maintenance contact

information.
location: Sets the physical location of the device.
sysLocation: Device location information.
version: Sets the SNMP version number used by the system.
v1: SNMP V1.
v2c: SNMP V2C.
v3: SNMP V3.
*: Indicates selecting one to three items from the three options of v1, v2c and v3.
all: SNMP V1, SNMP V2C and SNMP V3.
Description
Using the snmp-agent sys-info command, you can set the system information,
including the system maintenance information, physical location information of
the device and the SNMP version number used. Using the undo snmp-agent
sys-info command, you can remove the current setting.
By default,
By default, the system contact information is "R&D Beijing,3Com Technologies

Co.,Ltd.", the system location character string is "Beijing China" and the version is
SNMPv3
For the related command, see display snmp-agent sys-info.

Example
Set the system maintenance information as call Operator at 010-82882488.
[3Com] snmp-agent sys-info contact call Operator at 010-82882488
snmp-agent target-host Syntax
snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain X.X.X.X [ udp-port port-number

] params securityname security-string [ v1 | v2c | v3 { authentication | privacy } ]
undo snmp-agent target-host X.X.X.X securityname security-string
View
System view
Parameter
trap: Specifies the host as the trap host.
address: Specifies the address of the destination host where the SNMP message
transmits.
udp-domain: Specifies that the transmission domain of the destination host is

based on UDP.
X.X.X.X: IP address of the host.
udp-port: Specifies the port.
port-number: Specifies the port number that receives the trap packet.
params: Specifies the information of the logging host that generates SNMP
messages.
securityname: Specifies the community name of SNMPV1, V2C or the username of

SNMPV3.
security-string: Community name of SNMPV1, V2C or the username of SNMPV3,

in the range of 1 to 32 bytes.
v1: SNMPV1.
v2c: SNMPv2c.
v3: SNMPV3.
authentication: Performs authentication with the packet without encryption.
privacy: Performs both authentication and encryption with the packet.

Description
Using the snmp-agent target-host command, you can set the destination that
receives the SNMP notification. Using the undo snmp-agent target-host
command, you can remove the host that receives the SNMP notification.
■ The snmp-agent target-host command should be used in cooperation with the

snmp-agent trap enable command.
■ The snmp-agent trap enable command is used to enable to forward Trap
packets. If one host is specified to forward notify message, the host should be
configured at least one snmp-agent target-host command and one
snmp-agent trap enable command.
For the related command, see snmp-agent trap enable, snmp-agent trap source,
snmp-agent trap life.
Example
Enable to send SNMP Trap packets to 10.1.1.1, using the community name of
comaccess.
[3Com] snmp-agent trap enable snmp

[3Com] snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 10.1.1.1
params securityname comaccess
Send SNMP Trap packets to 10.1.1.1, using the community name of public.
[3Com] snmp-agent trap enable standard

params securityname public
snmp-agent trap enable Syntax
snmp-agent trap enable [ trap-type [ trap-list ] ]
undo snmp-agent trap enable [ trap-type [ trap-list ] ]
View
System view
Parameter
trap-type: Enables the trap packet of this type.
trap-list: The parameter list corresponding to the trap packets of trap-type.
Description
Using the snmp-agent trap enable command, you can enable the device to send
Trap packets and set the trap or notification parameters. Using the undo
snmp-agent trap enable command, you can remove the current setting.
By default, sending Trap packets is disabled.

The snmp-agent trap enable command indicates to allow sending all types of
SNMP Trap packets of all the modules, when there is no parameter.
The snmp-agent trap enable command should be used in cooperation with the
snmp-agent target-host command. The snmp-agent target-host command is used
to specify the hosts to which the Trap information will be sent. To send Trap
information, the user should configure at least one snmp-agent target-host
command.
The module trap-type forwarding the Trap packets can be snmp, bgp and vrrp
(VRRP Trap packets).
Types of packets that SNMP modules can send include authentication, coldstart,
linkdown, linkup and warmstart.
For the related command, see snmp-agent target-host, snmp-agent trap-source,

snmp-agent trap-timeout.
Example
Allow sending the Trap packets, which fail to perform SNMP authentication, to
10.1.1.1. The trap packets are in the form of V2C with the community name of
public.
[3Com] snmp-agent trap enable snmp authentication

params securityname public v2c
Enable to send all types of BGP Trap packets to 10.1.1.1. The trap packets are in
the form of V3 with the community name of super. The packets are authenticated
but not encrypted.
[3Com] snmp-agent trap enable bgp

params securityname super v3 authentication
snmp-agent trap life Syntax
snmp-agent trap life seconds
undo snmp-agent trap life
View
System view
Parameter
seconds: Timeout in seconds, ranging 1 to 2592000 with the default value as 120
seconds.
Description
Using the snmp-agent trap life command, you can set the conservation time of the
Trap packet and the Trap packets exceeding the time will be dropped. Using the
undo snmp-agent trap life command, you can remove the current setting.
If the conservation time for the Trap packets the system has configured is seconds,
the Trap packets over the conservation time will be discarded without being sent
or conserved.
For the related command, see snmp-agent trap enable, snmp-agent target-host.
Example
Set the timeout of the Trap packet to 60 seconds.
[3Com] snmp-agent trap-life 60
snmp-agent trap Syntax

queue-size
snmp-agent trap queue-size size
undo snmp-agent trap queue-size
View
System view
Parameter
size: Length of the message queue, ranging 1 to 1000.
Description
Using the snmp-agent trap queue-size command, you can set the length of the
message queue of the Trap packet sent to the destination host. Using the undo
snmp-agent trap queue-size command, you can cancel the setting.
By default, the length is 100.
For the related command, see snmp-agent trap enable, snmp-agent target-host,
snmp-agent trap life.
Example
Set the length of the message queue of the host forwarding the Trap packet to
200.
[3Com] snmp-agent trap queue-size 200
snmp-agent trap source Syntax
snmp-agent trap source interface-type interface-number [ subinterface-type ]
undo snmp-agent trap source

View
System view
Parameter
subinterface-name: Subinterface type.
Description
Using the snmp-agent trap source command, you can specify the source address
from which Trap will be sent. Using the undo snmp-agent trap source command,
you can remove the Trap source address.
There is always a Trap address when the SNMP Trap message is being sent from a
server, no matter from which interface it is sent. This command can be used to
trace a special event.
For the related command, see snmp-agent trap enable, snmp-agent target-host.
Example
Specify the IP address of the Ethernet interface 1/0/0 as the source address of Trap
packet.
[3Com] snmp-agent trap source ethernet 1/0/0
snmp-agent usm-user Syntax
snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } user-name group-name [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } user-name group-name
snmp-agent usm-user v3 user-name group-name [ [ authentication-mode { md5 |

sha } auth-password ] [ privacy des56 priv-password ] ] [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent usm-user v3 user-name group-name { local | engineid

engineid-string }
View
System view
Parameter
v2c: V2C security mode the user uses.
user-name: User name, in the range of 1 to 32 bytes.

group-name: Group name the user is corresponding to, in the range of 1 to 32

bytes.
authentication-mode: Specifies the security level as requiring authentication.
md5: Specifies the authentication protocol as HMAC-MD5-96.
sha: Specifies the authentication protocol as HMAC-SHA-96.
auth-password: Authentication password, which is a character string in the range

of 1 to 64 bytes.
privacy: Specifies the security level as encrypted.
des56: Specifies the encryption protocol as DES.
priv-password: Encryption password, which is a character string in the range of 1

to 64 bytes.
acl: Sets the list of access view.
acl-number: Standard access list, in the range of 1 to 99.
local: Indicates the local entity user.
engineid: Specifies the engine ID associated with the user.
engineid-string: Character string of engine ID.
Description
Using the snmp-agent usm-user command, you can add a new user to a SNMP
group. Using the undo snmp-agent usm-user command, you can delete a SNMP
group user.
When the user configures a remote user for a certain Agent, the engine ID is
needed during authentication. If the engine ID changes after the user has been
configured, the user corresponding to the original engine ID will be ineffective.
For SNMPV1 and SNMPV2C, this command adds a new community name. For
SNMPV3, it adds a new user to a SNMP group.
For the related command, see snmp-agent group, snmp-agent community,

snmp-agent local-engineid.
Example
Add a user named "John" to the SNMP group named "Johngroup", with the
security level being "auth", the authentication protocol being HMAC-MD5-96
and the password being "hello".
[3Com] snmp-agent usm-user v3 John Johngroup authentication-mode md5

hello
Terminal Service
Commands
Terminal Service of
Telnet
debugging telnet Syntax
debugging telnet
undo debugging telnet
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the debugging telnet command, you can enable the debugging for Telnet
connection. Using the undo debugging telnet command, you can disable the
debugging for Telnet connection.
By default, the debugging for Telnet connection is disabled.
For the related command, see telnet.
Example
<3Com> debugging telnet
display tcp status Syntax
display tcp status
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display tcp status command, you can display all TCP connections
currently established with the router.
This command is used to display all TCP connections currently established with the
router. Compared with display users, the display tcp status command can display
more information about Telnet clients and servers.
Terminal Service Commands 135
The information that this command can display includes: the local address of TCP
connection, local port number, external address, external port number, and
connection state.
For the related command, see telnet.
Example
<3Com> display tcp status
TCPCB Local Address Foreign Address State
129.102.100.142 23 129.102.001.092 ESTABLISHED
028ca414 0.0.0.0.23 0.0.0.0.0 LISTEN
The above shown information indicates: one TCP connection has been set up. the
local IP address of the TCP connection is 129.102.100.142 with the local port
number as 23, and the remote IP address is 129.102.001.92, and there is also a
local server process monitoring the No. 23 port.
telnet Syntax
telnet [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] host-ip-address [ service-port ]
View
User view
Parameter
vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Sets the vpn-instance name of MPLS VPN.
host-ip-address: Hostname or IP address of the remote router, in dotted decimal

format.
service-port: TCP port number for the remote router to provide Telnet service, in
the range of 0 to 65535.
Description
Using the telnet command, you can log on another device from the current router.
By default, if the service-port is not specified, the Telnet port number is 23.
By executing the telnet command, the user can conveniently log on another device
from a router to achieve remote management.
For the related command, see display tcp status.
Example
Log on another router 3Com2 (the IP address is 129.102.0.1) from the current
router 3Com1.
<3Com>telnet 129.102.0.1
Trying 129.102.0.1...
Service port is 23
Connected to 129.102.0.1
<3Com2>
SSH Configuration
Commands
debugging rsa Syntax
debugging rsa
undo debugging rsa
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the debugging rsa command, you can send the detailed information about
each process and packet structure of RSA algorithm to information center in
debugging form and to debug certain user-interface separately. Using the undo
debugging rsa command, you can disable the debugging.
By default, the debugging is disabled.
For the related command, see rsa local-key-pair create, rsa local-key-pair destroy.
Example
Enable the RSA debugging.
<3Com> debugging rsa
debugging ssh server Syntax
debugging ssh server { VTY index | all }
undo debugging ssh server { VTY index | all }
View
User view
Parameter
index: Debugged SSH channel. In default, its value ranges from 0 to 4 and is
limited by VTY number.
all: All SSH channels.

Description
Using the debugging ssh server command, you can send the information about
negotiation process regulated by SSH1.5 protocol to information center as
debugging formation and to debug certain user-interface separately. Using the
undo debugging ssh server command, you can disable the debugging.
By default, the debugging is disabled.
For the related command, see ssh server authentication-retries, ssh server
rekey-interval, ssh server timeout.
Example
Print debugging information when running SSH.
[3Com] debugging ssh server vty 0

00:23:20: SSH0: starting SSH control process
00:23:20: SSH0: sent protocol version id SSH-1.5-3Com-1.25
00:23:20: SSH0: protocol version id is - SSH-1.5-1.2.26
00:23:20: SSH0: SSH_SMSG_PUBLIC_KEY msg
00:23:21: SSH0: SSH_CMSG_SESSION_KEY msg - length 112, type 0x03
00:23:21: SSH: RSA decrypt started
00:23:21: SSH: RSA decrypt finished
00:23:21: SSH: RSA decrypt started
00:23:21: SSH: RSA decrypt finished
display rsa local-key-pair Syntax

public
display rsa local-key-pair public
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display rsa local-key-pair public command, you can display the public
key of host key pair of server and server key pair. If no key is generated, the system
will prompt that no key is found, e.g., RSA keys not found.
For the related command, see rsa local-key-pair create.
Example
<3Com> display rsa local-key-pair public
% Key pair was generated at: 12:26:33 UTC 2002/4/4
Key name: rtvrp_Host
Usage: Encryption Key
Key Data:
30470240 AF7DB1D0 DA78944F 53B7B59B 40D425D0 DC9C57D2 A60916C2
1F165807 08B84DDB 5F4DB8E7 A115B74E 2D41D96C AC61D276 AA027E41
DD48DE64 696E0934 EB872805 02030100 01
% Key pair was generated at: 12:26:45 UTC 2002/4/4

Key name: rtvrp_Server
Usage: Encryption Key
Key Data:
30670260 C05280D9 BA0D56C8 7BE43379 8634CDE7 83ABA9A2 3F36280E
25995487 4FF6AD7A 0E57871C 761E6D92 9914D8C5 CC577388 5B580B94
C2172C8F 36039EED 160A0478 651DED3A 9CCF1AAD D800AAF2 DF7FBEC4
A13ADA59 9E738319 AF366B8B 519D39F5 02030100 01
display rsa Syntax

peer-public-key
display rsa peer-public-key [ brief | name keyname ]
View
Any view
Parameter
brief: Displays the brief information of all the remote public key.
keyname: Specifies the key name to be displayed. It is the continuous character

string, 0< length value<64.
Description
Using the display rsa peer-public-key command, you can display the specified RSA
public key. If there is no public key specified, all public keys will be displayed.
Example
<3Com> display rsa peer-public-key
Address Bits Name
1023 abcd
1024 hq
1024 wn1
1024 hq_all
[3Com] display rsa peer-public-key name abcd
Key name:abcd
Key address:
Data:
30818602 8180739A 291ABDA7 04F5D93D C8FDF84C 42746319 91C164B0
DF178C55 FA833591 C7D47D53 81D09CE8 2913D7ED F9C08511 D83CA4ED
2B30B809 808EB0D1 F52D045D E40861B7 4A0E1355 23CCD74C AC61F8E5
8C452B2F 3F2DA0DC C48E3306 367FE187 BDD94401 8B3B69F3 CBB0A573
202C16BB 2FC1ACF3 EC8F828D 55A36F1C DDC4BB45 504F0201 25
display ssh server Syntax
display ssh server { status | session }
View
Any view
Parameter
status: Displays the SSH status information.
session: Displays SSH session information.
Description
Using the display ssh server command, you can display the SSH status or session.
For the related command, see ssh server authentication-retries, ssh server
rekey-interval, ssh server timeout.
Example
Display SSH status and configuration parameters.
[3Com]display ssh server status

SSH version : 1.5
SSH connection timeout : 60 seconds
SSH server key generating interval : 1 hours
SSH Authentication retries : 3 times
Display SSH session respectively.
[3Com] display ssh server session
ConnectionVersionEncryptionStateUsername
VTY0 1.5 DESSession started3Com
VTY3 1.5 DESSession startedrouter
peer-public-key end Syntax
peer-public-key end
View
Public key view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the peer-public-key end command, you can return to the system view from
the public key view.
For the related command, see rsa peer-public-key and public-key-code begin.
Example
Exit public view and save the configuration.
[3Com] rsa peer-public-key 3Com003

[3Com-rsa-public-key] peer-public-key end
[3Com]
display ssh Syntax

user-information
display ssh user-information [ username ]
View
Any view
Parameter
username: Valid SSH user name defined by AAA.
Description
Using the display ssh user-information command, you can display the information
about current SSH user including user name, corresponding key name and user
authentication mode. If you specify the username parameter, then the information
about the specified user will be displayed.
For the related command, see ssh user username assign rsa-key, ssh user
username authentication-type.
Example
Display the user information.
[3Com] display ssh user-information

Username user-public-key-name authentication-type
Jin jinrsa
hanqi1 816pubpassword
1024 file3rsa
4000 hq_rsaall
hanqi_rsahq_rsa rsa
hanqi_allhq_all all
protocol inbound Syntax
protocol inbound { all | ssh | telnet | pad }
View
User interface view of VTY type
Parameter
all: Supports all the protocols, including Telnet and SSH.
ssh: Only supports SSH, not support Telnet.
telnet: Only supports Telnet, not support SSH.
pad: Only supports pad protocol.

Description
Using the protocol inbound command, you can specify the protocols supported by
the current user interface.
By default, the system supports all the protocols, that is, Telnet and SSH.
When the command is used to specify the protocols supported by the current user
interface and SSH is enabled, SSH is still unavailable if the rsa key of the local
router is not configured. The configuration result will take effect at the next login
request.
If SSH is configured as the protocols supported by the current user interface, you
should configure the corresponding authentication method as
authentication-mode local or authentication-mode scheme default (using AAA) to
ensure the successful login. If the authentication method is configured as
authentication-mode password and authentication-mode none, the configuration
of protocol inbound ssh will fail.
For the related command, see user-interface vty.
Example
Disable the Telnet function of vty0 to vty4 and only support the SSH function.

[3Com-ui-vty0-4] protocol inbound ssh
Disable the Telnet function of vty0 and only support the SSH
function.
[3Com] user-interface vty 0
[3Com-ui-vty0] protocol inbound ssh
public-key-code begin Syntax
public-key-code begin
View
Public key view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the public-key-code begin command, you can enter the edit view of public
key.
Before using this command, you must use the rsa peer-public-key command to
specify one key name. After the public-key-code begin command is input, the
system enters the edit view of public key and you can input the key data. When
the key data are input, the space can exist between characters and you can press
enter key to continue the data input. The public key configured must be the hex
character ring coded according to public key format. The public key is generated
in stochastic mode by the client software supporting SSH.
For the related command, see rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code end.
Example
Enter the edit view of public key and to input key.

[3Com-rsa-public-key] public-key-code begin
[3Com-key-code] 308186028180739A291ABDA704F5D93DC8FDF84C427463
[3Com-key-code] 1991C164B0DF178C55FA833591C7D47D5381D09CE82913
[3Com-key-code] D7EDF9C08511D83CA4ED2B30B809808EB0D1F52D045DE4
[3Com-key-code] 0861B74A0E135523CCD74CAC61F8E58C452B2F3F2DA0DC
[3Com-key-code] C48E3306367FE187BDD944018B3B69F3CBB0A573202C16
[3Com-key-code] BB2FC1ACF3EC8F828D55A36F1CDDC4BB45504F020125
[3Com-key-code] public-key-code end
public-key-code end Syntax
public-key-code end
View
Public key edit view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the public-key-code end command, you can quit public key edit view to
public key view and to save the public key configured by the user. In addition, to
quit public key view to public key chain view.
After this command is executed, the edit process of public key will be ended.
Before saving the public key, the system will check the validity of key. If there are
illegal characters in the public key character string configured by the user, the
system will display relevant prompt information that illegal characters are input.
The public key configured by the user will be discarded so this configuration fails.
If the public key configured is valid, it will be saved in public key chain table of
client.
For the related command, see rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code begin.
Example
Quit and save the configuration.
[3Com-rsa-key-code] public-key-code end

[3Com-rsa-public-key]
rsa local-key-pair create Syntax
rsa local-key-pair create
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the rsa local-key-pair create command, you can generate the local RSA host
key pair and server key pair.
When this command is used to configure, the system will give alarm and prompt
that former key will be replaced if RSA key has existed. The view of generated key
pair is router name+ server and router name+ host, e.g., 3Com_host and
3Com_server. This command will not be stored in configuration file.
After this command is input, the system will prompt you to enter the digit of host
key. The digit of server key pair should differ from that of host key pair in 128
digits at least. The minimum length of server key pair and host key pair is 512
digits and the maximum length is 2048 digits. If there has been key pair, the user
should confirm whether to change it.
The primary operation to accomplish SSH login is to configure and generate local
RSA key pair. Before performing other SSH configurations, you must accomplish
the configuration of the rsa local-key-pair create command to generate local key
pair. It is necessary to execute this command only once and it is unnecessary to
execute again after the router restarts.
For the related command, see rsa local-key-pair destroy.
Example
Configure and generate local host key pair and server key pair.
[3Com] rsa local-key-pair create

The name for the keys will be: rtvrp_Host
% You already have RSA keys defined for rtvrp_Host
% Do you really want to replace them? [yes/no]:y
Choose the size of the key modulus in the range of 512 to 2048 for
your Keys.
Choosing a key modulus greater than 512 may take a few minutes.
How many bits in the modulus [512]:512
Generating keys...
.....++++++++++++
........................++++++++++++
..........++++++++
............................++++++++
[3Com]
rsa local-key-pair Syntax

destroy
rsa local-key-pair destroy
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the rsa local-key-pair destroy command, you can remove all RSA keys of
server (including host key pair and server key pair).
After this command is input, you should confirm whether to remove all RSA keys
of server. And this command is not stored in configuration file.
Example
Remove all keys of server.
[3Com] rsa local-key-pair destroy

% Keys to be removed are named rtvrp_Host .
% Do you really want to remove these keys? [yes/no]:y
[3Com]
rsa peer-public-key Syntax
rsa peer-public-key key-name
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the rsa peer-public-key command, you can enter the view of public key
view.
After the command is input, the system will enter the view of public key view. This
command can be used to configure the public key of client with the
public-key-code begin command together. The public key of client is generated in
stochastic mode by the client software. Please use the client software supporting
SSH1.5.
For the related command, see public-key-code begin, public-key-code end.

Example
Enter the public key view.

[3Com-rsa-public]
ssh server Syntax

authentication-retries
ssh server authentication-retries times
undo ssh server authentication-retries
View
System view
Parameter
times: Specifies the authentication re-try times, 1<=re-try times<=5.
Description
Using the ssh server authentication-retries command, you can set the SSH
connection authentication re-try times to enable it in next login. Using the undo
ssh server authentication-retries command, you can restore the default value of
SSH connection authentication retry times.
By default, the re-try times are 3.
For the related command, see display ssh sever.
Example
Specify the re-try times for registration authentication as 4.
[3Com] ssh server authentication-retries 4
ssh server rekey-interval Syntax
ssh server rekey-interval hours
undo ssh server rekey-interval
View
System view
Parameter
hours: Updates period. It ranges from 1 to 24 in hour. 0 cannot be input for this
parameter.
Description
Using the ssh server rekey-interval command, you can set the update times of
server key. Using the undo ssh server rekey-interval command, you can cancel the
current settings.
By default, the server key is not updated.
Example
Set the update interval of server key to 3 hours.
[3Com] ssh server rekey-interval 3

[3Com]
ssh server timeout Syntax
ssh server timeout seconds
undo ssh server timeout
View
System view
Parameter
seconds: Specifies the login time-out time. It ranges from 1 to 120 seconds.
Description
Using the ssh server timeout command, you can set the time-out time of SSH
connection authentication to enable it valid in next login. Using the undo ssh
server timeout command, you can restore the default value of time-out time of
SSH connection authentication.
By default, the time-out time is 60 seconds.
Example
Set the login time-out time to 80 seconds.
[3Com] ssh server timeout 80
ssh user assign Syntax
ssh user username assign rsa-key keyname
undo ssh user username assign rsa-key

View
System view
Parameter
keyname: Configured public key name of client. It is the continuous character

string, 0< length value £ 32.
username: Valid SSH user name defined by AAA module.
Description
Using the ssh user assign command, you can assign one existing public key
(keyname) for the user (username). Using the undo ssh user assign command, you
can delete the relationship between the user and its public key.
When the system assigns public key for the user, the system will regard the public
key assigned last if the user has been assign a public key.
AAA module takes charge of the creation and deletion of local system users.
When AAA module creates one user of SSH type, it will notice SSH and SSH will
add the user into user set maintained by it. When AAA module deletes any one
user, it will notice SSH and SSH will match the user in its user name set. SSH will
delete the user from the user set if it finds the match of the user in user name set.
The new configured user public key will be valid in next login.
For the related command, see display ssh user-information.
Example
Assign key key1 for the user smith.
[3Com] ssh user smith assign rsa-key key1

[3Com]
ssh user Syntax

authentication-type
ssh user username authentication-type { password | rsa | all }
undo ssh user username authentication-type { password | rsa | all }
View
System view
Parameter
password: Forces to specify the authentication mode of the user as password.
rsa: Forces to specify the authentication mode of the user as RSA.
all: Specifies the authentication mode of the user as either password or RSA.
Description
Using the ssh user authentication-type command, you can specify the
authentication method for a special user. Using the undo ssh user
authentication-type command, you can restore the default mode that login is
always denied.
By default, the system will always deny the login.
The authentication mode must be specified for the new user, or the user will not
be able to login. The new configured authentication mode will take effect in next
login.
For the related command, see display ssh user-information.
Example
Specify the authentication mode as password for the user smith.
[3Com] ssh user smith authentication-type password

[3Com3Com]
INTERFACE MANAGEMENT
3 COMMANDS
Interface
Management
Commands
debugging physical Syntax
debugging physical { all | error | cell | packet } interface interface-type

interface-number
undo debugging physical { all | error | cell | packet } interface interface-type

interface-number
View
User view
Parameter
all: Enables alarming of all levels.
error: Enables error-level alarming.
cell: Enables cell-level alarming.
packet: Enables packet-level alarming.
interface interface-type interface-number: Specifies interface type and number.
Description
Using the debugging physical command, you can enable alarming for a specified
interface. Using the undo debugging physical command, you can disable alarming
for a specified interface.
Example
None
description Syntax
description interface-description
undo description
150 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
View
Interface view
Parameter
interface-description: Character string describing the router interface, which is

allowed to comprise no more than 80 characters. By default, the description string
is “3Com Router, xxxxxx interface”.
Description
Using the description command, you can set the interface description. Using the
undo description command, you can restore the default interface description.
This command has no special purpose or function other than identifying an

interface.
For related command, see display interface.
Example
Change the description of the Ethernet interface Ethernet 0/0/0 to “3Com Router
Ethernet interface”.
[3com]interface ethernet 0/0/0

[3com-Ethernet0/0/0]description 3Com Router ethernet interface
display interface Syntax
display interface type number [ .sub-number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
type: Interface type which is used along with number to identify an interface.
number: Interface number which is used along with type for identifying an
interface.
sub-number: Subinterface number.
Description
Using the display interface command, you can display the current running state
and other information of an interface.
Executing this command will display the following information:
■ Physical state and protocol state of the interface

■ Physical features of the interface (including operating mode, DTE/DCE, clock
selection, external cable, etc.)
■ IP address of the interface

■ The encapsulated link layer protocol of the interface and the running state of
the link layer protocol and the statistics.
■ Statistics of the incoming and outgoing packets on the interface
For a related command, see reset counters interface.
Example
View the running state and the relevant information of Serial 0/0/0.
[3com]display interface serial 0/0/0

Serial0/0/0 is up , line protocol is up
Description : 3Com Router, Serial0/0/0 Interface
The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500, The keepalive is 10(sec)
Link layer protocol is PPP
LCP opened, MPLSCP stopped
FIFO: 0/75/0
Physical layer is synchronous,Baudrate is 64000 bps
Interface is DCE, Cable type is V35
DCD=UP DTR=UP DSR=UP RTS=UP CTS=UP
Table 1 Description of the displayed interface information

Field Description
Serial0 is up Physical layer state of the interface
line protocol is up Link layer state of the interface
5 minutes input rate The input rate of the interface within the last
five minutes
5 minutes output rate The output rate of the interface within the
last five minutes
FIFO queueing: FIFO Type of the output queue on the interface
51 packets input, 640 bytes, 0 no buffers Packets and bytes received by the interface
and the packets discarded due to the
unavailability of receive-buffer.
55 packets output, 700 bytes, 0 no buffers Packets and bytes sent by the interface and
the packets discarded due to the
unavailability of send-buffer.
input errors:0, CRC:0, frame errors:0 The received packets that contain errors,
including CRC errors and frame errors.
DCD=UP DTR=UP DSR=UP RTS=UP CTS=UP States of the physical electric signals DCD,
DTR, DSR, RTS, and CTS
interface Syntax
interface type number [ .sub-number ]
undo interface type number [ .sub-number ]

View
System view
Parameter
type: Interface type. The following table lists the interfaces that VRP supports so
far.
number: Interface number. VRP numbers the interfaces separately by interface

type, with the numbers of each type of interfaces begin at 0 or 1.
sub-number: Subinterface number, which is separated from the main interface

number by a dot (“.”).
Description
Using the interface command, you can enter the specified interface view or create
a logical interface or subinterface. Using the undo interface command, you can
delete a specified logical interface or subinterface.
Table 2 Interfaces supported by VRP

Interface Description Attribute
ATM ATM interface Physical interface
AUX AUX interface Physical interface
Analogmodem Analog modem interface Physical interface
Async Asynchronous serial interface Physical interface
Bri ISDN BRI interface Physical interface
Bridge-Template Bridge-group virtual interface Logical interface
Dialer Dialer interface Logical interface
Ethernet Ethernet interface Physical interface
Logic-Channel Logic-channel interface Logical interface
Loopback Loopback interface Logical interface
NULL Null interface Logical interface
MFR Multi-link FR (MFR) interface Logical interface
Serial Synchronous serial interface Physical interface
Virtual-Ethernet VE interface Logical interface
Virtual-Template Virtual-template interface Logical interface
Tunnel Tunnel interface Logical interface
An interface name is represented by interface type + interface number. For

example, Ethernet0/0/0 represents the Ethernet interface numbered 0/0/0, and
Serial0/0/0.1 represents the first subinterface on the interface Serial0/0/0, and
interface Serial3/0/0:2 is the second channel set of the CE1/PRI interface (namely
controller interface) numbered 3/0/0.
To simplify input, the type portion of the interface name can be shortened to
several leading letters, given that these letters do not conflict with other interface
types. Therefore, you can input e0/0/0 for Ethernet 0/0/0 and s0/0/0.1 for Serial
0/0/0.1.
You can enter the view of the desired physical interface and creating logical
interfaces or subinterfaces as needed by executing the interface command.
You can create subinterfaces for an Ethernet interface or a serial interface

encapsulated with X.25 or Frame Relay (FR). The subinterface numbered 0
corresponds to the main interface.
Note that executing the undo interface command also deletes the defined logical
interfaces (such as dialer, tunnel, and virtual-template interfaces) and
subinterfaces.
Example
Enter the Ethernet interface view in system view.
[3com]interface ethernet 0/0/0

[3com-Ethernet0/0/0]
Switch from Ethernet0 view to the view of the subinterface Serial0/0/0.1.
[3com-Ethernet0/0/0]interface serial0/0/0.1
[3com-Serial0/0/0.1]
reset counters interface Syntax
reset counters interface [ type number ]
View
User view
Parameter
type: Interface type which is used along with number for identifying an interface.
number: Interface number which is used along with type for identifying an
interface.
Description
Using the reset counters interface command, you can clear the statistics of the
transmitted and received packets on an interface.
If no interface has been specified, the statistics about the transmitted and received
packets on all the interfaces are cleared.
To count the traffic size on an interface within a specific period, you must clear the
existing statistics about the transmitted and received packets on the interface
before taking a new count.
For a related command, see display interface.
Example
Clear the statistics about the transmitted and received packets on Serial 0/0/0.
<3com> reset counters interface serial 0/0/0
shutdown Syntax
shutdown
undo shutdown
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the shutdown command, you can shut down an interface. Using the undo
shutdown command, you can enable an interface.
This command takes effect not only on physical interfaces but also on tunnel and
MFR interfaces.
In some circumstances, such as when you are modifying the operating parameters
of an interface, the modification do not take effect immediately. Rather, you must
shut down the interface and re-enable it.
Example
Shut down Ethernet 0/0/0.
[3com-Ethernet0/0/0]shutdown
% Interface Ethernet0/0/0 is down
% Interface Ethernet0/0/0 changed state to DOWN
% Line protocol ip on interface Ethernet0/0/0, changed state to DOWN
Fundamental Ethernet
Interface
Configuration
Commands

ethernet
display interface ethernet interface-number
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-number: Interface number. If no interface has been specified, the

configuration and state information of all the interfaces will be displayed.
Description
Using the display interface ethernet command, you can view the configuration
parameters, current running state, and some other information of an Ethernet
interface.
Example
View the state information of the Ethernet interface 2/0/0.
<3com> display interface ethernet 2/0/0

Ethernet2/0/0 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Description : 3Com Routers, Ethernet0/0 Interface
The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500, Hold timer is 10(sec)
Internet Address is 172.31.29.103/16
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is
00e0.fc06.3085
Media type is twisted pair, loopback not set, promiscuous mode not
set
100Mb/s-speed mode,Full-duplex mode,link type is autonegotiation
Output flow-control is unsupported, input flow-control is
unsupported
Output queue : (Urgent queue : Size/Length/Discards) 0/500/0
Output queue : (FIFO queuing : Size/Length/Discards) 0/75/0
Last 5 minutes input rate 227.13 bytes/sec, 2.67 packets/sec
Last 5 minutes output rate 0.00 bytes/sec, 0.00 packets/sec
Input: 542665 packets, 47721004 bytes
271460 broadcasts, 271205 multicasts
0 errors, 0 runts, 0 giants,
0 CRC, 0 align errors, 0 overruns,
0 dribbles, 0 aborts, 0 no buffers
Output:0 packets, 0 bytes
0 errors, 0 underruns, 0 collisions
0 deferred
duplex Syntax
duplex { full | half | negotiation }
undo duplex
View
Ethernet interface view
Parameter
full: Sets the Ethernet interface to work in full duplex mode.
half: Sets the Ethernet interface to work in half duplex mode.
negotiation: Sets the Ethernet interface to work in auto-negotiation mode.
Description
Using the duplex command, you can set the operating mode of the 100Base-TX FE
interface. Using the undo duplex command, you can restore the default operating
mode of the Ethernet interface.
By default, the Ethernet interface is working in auto-negotiation mode.

An Ethernet interface on a router that is connected to a hub must work in

half-duplex mode. When an Ethernet interface is connected to a network device
that supports full-duplex, it must work in full-duplex mode, however.
Before setting the FE interface to work in auto-negotiation mode, you must make
sure that the connected remote end has been working in auto-negotiation mode.
If this cannot be guaranteed, the two parties should use the forced setting for the
consistency in operating mode.
For related commands, see speed and display interface.
Example
Set the 100Base-TX FE interface to work in full duplex mode.
[3com-Ethernet0/0/0] duplex full
loopback Syntax
loopback
undo loopback
View
Parameter
None
Description
Using the loopback command, you can enable an Ethernet interface to perform
loopback. Using the undo loopback command, you can disable loopback.
By default, the Ethernet interface is disabled to perform loopback.
You must enable the Ethernet interface to perform loopback only for the purpose
of testing some special functions.
Example
Enable the Ethernet interface to perform loopback.
[3com-Ethernet0/0/0]loopback
mtu Syntax
mtu size
undo mtu
View

Parameter
size: MTU size on the Ethernet interface, which is in bytes. It is in the range of 46
to 1500 if the adopted frame format is Ethernet_II.
Description
Using the mtu command, you can set the maximum transmission unit (MTU) of
the Ethernet interface. Using the undo mtu command, you can restore the default
configuration.
MTU defaults to 1500 if the adopted frame format is Ethernet_II.
The MTU setting of an Ethernet interface can affect the assembly and
fragmentation of IP packets on the interface.
Example
Set MTU of the Ethernet interface to 1492.
[3com-Ethernet0/0/0]mtu 1492
speed Syntax
speed { 10 | 100 | negotiation }
undo speed
View
Parameter
10: Forces the FE interface to work in 10Base-T (at 10Mbps) mode.
100: Forces the FE interface to work in 100Base-TX (100Mbps) mode.
negotiation: Sets the FE interface to work in auto-negotiation mode.
Description
Using the speed command, you can set the operating speed of the FE interface.
Using the undo speed command, you can restore the default operating speed of
the FE interface.
By default, the FE interface operates in auto-negotiation mode.
Before setting the FE interface to work in auto-negotiation mode, you must make
sure that the connected remote end has been working in auto-negotiation mode.
If this cannot be guaranteed, the two parties should use the forced setting for
operating consistency.
For related commands, see duplex and display interface.

Example
Set the FE interface to work in 10Base-T mode.
[3com-Ethernet0/0/0]speed 10
Fundamental WAN
Interface
Configuration
Commands
async mode Syntax
async mode { protocol | flow }
View
Asynchronous serial interface view, AUX interface view
Parameter
protocol: Protocol mode, with which the local end directly adopts the configured
link layer protocol parameters to set up a link with the remote end after setting up
a physical link.
flow: Flow mode, which is also known as interactive mode. With this approach,
the two ends set up a link by interacting with each other upon the setup of a
physical link. Specifically, the calling party sends the configuration commands to
the called party (it is equal to the operation of manually inputting configuration
commands at the remote end), sets the link layer protocol operating parameters of
the called party, and then sets up the link. This approach is normally adopted in
the event of man-machine interaction.
Description
Using the async mode command, you can set the operating mode of an
asynchronous serial interface.
By default, the asynchronous serial interface is working in protocol mode and the
AUX interface in flow mode.
For related command, see modem.
Example
Set the asynchronous serial interface to work in flow mode.
[3com-Serial0/0/0]async mode flow
baudrate Syntax
baudrate baudrate
View
Serial interface view
Parameter
baudrate: Baud rate of serial interface in bps. It is in the range of 300 to 115200
for an asynchronous serial interface and 1200 to 2048000 for a synchronous serial
interface.
Description
Using the baudrate command, you can set the baud rate for a serial interface.
By default, the baud rate is 9600 bps on the asynchronous serial interface and
64000 bps on a synchronous serial interface.
Following are the baud rates available for the asynchronous serial interface.
300 bps, 600 bps, 1200 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400
bps, 57600 bps, 115200 bps.
Following are the baud rates available for the synchronous serial interface.
1200 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps,
64000 bps, 72000 bps, 115200 bps, 128000 bps, 384000 bps, 2048000 bps.
The baud rate range available for the synchronous serial interface depends on the
applied physical electric specifications.
■ V.24 DTE/DCE supports the range of 1200 bps to 64000 bps

■ V.35 DCE/DCE, X.21 DTE/DCE, EIA/TIA-449 DTE/DCE and EIA-530 DTE/DCE
supports the range of 1200 bps to 2048000 bps
After a synchronous/asynchronous serial interface makes the synchronous/

asynchronous switchover, the baud rate of the interface will resume the default
baud rate in the new operating mode.
When setting baud rate for a serial interface, you should take into consideration
the elements, such as operating mode (synchronous/asynchronous mode) and the
electric specifications of the connected external cable. In addition, you should note
that the baud rate of asynchronous serial interface is only significant for the
connection between router and modem. If two modems are concerned, they will
negotiate the baud rate between them. Therefore, different baud rate settings can
be set on the routers at the two ends of a connection, if the routers are working in
asynchronous mode. In synchronous mode, however, the router working as DCE
will determine the baud rate for the line transmission. Therefore, you must set
baud rate at the DCE side.
Example
Set the baudrate of the asynchronous serial interface to 115200bps.
[3com-Serial0/0/0]baudrate 115200
clock Syntax
clock { dceclk | dteclk1 | dteclk2 | dteclk3 | dteclk4 }
View
Parameter
dceclk: Sets the interface clock selection mode to DCE clock.
dteclk1: Sets the interface clock selection mode to DTE clock option 1.
Description
Using the clock command, you can set the clock selection mode for a synchronous
serial interface.
By default, dceclk (providing clock to the DTE device) and dteclk3 are selected for
the synchronous serial interfaces at the DCE side and the DTE side.
Different operating clocks are selected for the synchronous serial interfaces
working as DTE and DCE, as shown in the following figure.
TxClk
DCE RxClk DTE
Figure 1 Selecting a clock for a synchronous serial interface
In the figure, “TxClk” represents transmitting clock and “RxClk” receiving clock.
As a DCE device is required to provide clock for the remote DTE device, you must
select DCEclk as the operating clock for the synchronous serial interface working
as DCE.
Working as DTE, the synchronous serial interface must accept the clock provided
by the remote DCE. As transmitting and receiving clocks of synchronization
devices are independent, the receiving clock of a DTE device can be either the
transmitting or receiving clock of the DCE device. So is the transmitting clock.
Therefore, four clock options are available for a DTE device.
The following table gives the four clock selection options.

Table 3 Clock options available for a synchronous serial interface working as DTE
Clock selection option Description

DTEclk1 TxClk = TxClk, RxClk = RxClk
DTEclk2 TxClk = TxClk, RxClk = TxClk
DTEclk3 TxClk = RxClk, RxClk = TxClk
DTEclk4 TxClk = RxClk, RxClk = RxClk
In the table, the clock ahead of “=” is the DTE clock and the one after is the DCE
clock.
Example
Set the synchronous serial interface working as DTE to use the clock selection
option DTEclk2.
[3com-Serial0/0/0]clock dteclk2
code nrzi Syntax
code nrzi
undo code
View
Synchronous serial interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the code nrzi command, you can set the digital signal coding format to
None-Return-to-Zero-Inverse (NRZI) for a synchronous serial interface. Using the
undo code command, you can restore the digital coding format of the
synchronous serial interface to NRZ.
The digital signal coding format defaults to NRZ on the synchronous serial
interface.
Example
Set the digital signal coding format to NRZI on the synchronous serial interface.
[3com-Serial0/0/0]code nrzi
detect Syntax
1 Asynchronous serial interface
detect dsr-dtr
undo detect dsr-dtr
2 Synchronous serial interface

detect { dcd | dsr-dtr }
undo detect { dcd | dsr-dtr }
View
Synchronous serial interface view, asynchronous serial interface view
Parameter
dsr-dtr: Detects DSR and DTR signals of DSU/CSU.
dcd: Detects the DCD signal of the DSU/CSU on the serial interface.
Description
Using the detect command, you can enable data carrier detection as well as level
detection on a serial interface. Using the undo detect command, you can disable
data carrier detection as well as level detection on the serial interface.
By default, serial interfaces are enabled to make data carrier and level detection.
If this function has been disabled on a serial interface, the system will not detect
the DCD and DSR/DTR signals when determining the state (UP or DOWN) of the
serial interface.
Example
Disable the serial interface to make data carrier detection.
[3com-Serial0/0/0]undo detect dcd
idle-mark Syntax
idle-mark
undo idle-mark
View
Parameter
None
Description
Using the idle-mark command, you can set the line idle-mark of the synchronous
serial interface to “FF”. Using the undo idle-mark command, you can restore the
line idle-mark of the synchronous serial interface to “7E”.
Line idle-mark of synchronous serial interfaces defaults to “7E”.
In normal circumstances, the synchronous serial interface uses the code “7E” to
identify the idle state of the line. However, there are still some devices that use
“FF” (that is, the high level of all “1s”) to make the identification. For the sake of
compatibility in this case, it is necessary to configure the line idle-mark of the
synchronous serial interface.
Example
Set the line idle-mark of the synchronous serial interface to FF.
[3com-Serial0/0/0]idle-mark
invert transmit-clock Syntax
invert transmit-clock
undo invert transmit-clock
View
Parameter
None
Description
Using the invert transmit-clock command, you can enable the inverting of the
transmit-clock signal of the synchronous serial interface at the DTE side. Using the
undo invert transmit-clock command, you can disable inverting the signal.
By default, transmit-clock signal inversion is disabled on the synchronous serial

interface at DTE side.
In some special cases, for the purpose of eliminating the half-period delay of the
clock on the line, you may make the configuration to make the system invert the
transmit-clock signal of the synchronous serial interface at the DTE side. This
command can take effect only on some specific DCE devices. Clock inversion is
unnecessary for general applications.
For related commands, see physical-mode and clock.
Example
Invert the transmit-clock of the synchronous serial interface at DTE side.
[3com-Serial0/0/0]invert transmit-clock
loopback Syntax
loopback
undo loopback
View

Parameter
None
Description
Using the loopback command, you can enable a serial interface to perform
loopback. Using the undo loopback command, you can disable the serial interface
to perform loopback.
By default, loopback of the serial interface is disabled.
It is necessary for you to enable the serial interface to perform loopback only for
the purpose of testing some special functions.
Example
Enable the serial interface to perform loopback.
[3com-Serial0/0/0]loopback
mtu Syntax
mtu size
undo mtu
View
Parameter
size: MTU size on the serial interface, which is in the range of 128 to 1500 bytes
and defaults to 1500.
Description
Using the mtu command, you can set the MTU of a serial interface. Using the
undo mtu command, you can restore the default setting.
The MTU setting of a serial interface can affect the assembly and fragmentation of
IP packets on the interface.
Example
Set MTU of the serial interface to 1200.
[3com-Serial0/0/0]mtu 1200
physical-mode Syntax
physical-mode { sync | async }

View
Parameter
sync: Sets the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface to work in synchronous

mode.
async: Sets the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface to work in asynchronous

mode.
Description
Using the physical-mode command, you can set the operating mode of a
synchronous/asynchronous serial interface.
By default, the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface is working in

synchronous mode.
Example
Set the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface to work in asynchronous mode.
[3com-Serial0/0/0]physical-mode async
Fundamental CE1/PRI
Interface
Configuration
Commands
channel-set Syntax
channel-set set-number timeslot-list range
undo channel-set set-number
View
CE1/PRI interface view
Parameter
set-number: The number of the channel set formed by bundling the timeslots on
the interface, which is in the range of 0 to 30.
range: The number of the timeslots that are bundled, which is in the range of 1 to
31. When specifying the timeslots to be bundled, you can specify a single timeslot
by specifying a number, a range of timeslots by specifying a range between
number1-number2, or several discrete timeslots by specifying number1,
number2-number3.
Description
Using the channel-set command, you can bundle some timeslots of a CE1/PRI
interface into a channel-set. Using the undo channel-set command, you can
remove the specified timeslot bundle.
By default, no timeslots are bundled into channel-sets.
A CE1/PRI interface in CE1/PRI mode is physically divided into 32 timeslots

numbered from 0 through 31.
In actual applications, all the timeslots except timeslot 0 can be bundled into
multiple channel-sets and the system will automatically create a serial interface for
each set. This serial interface has the same logic features of synchronous serial
interface.
The serial interface is numbered in the form of serial interface-number

:set-number. The interface-number starts from the maximum serial interface
number plus 1, and the set-number is the number of the channel-set.
Only one timeslot bundling mode can be supported on one CE1/PRI interface
during a time period. In other words, this command cannot be used together with
the pri-set command.
For related command, see pri-set.
Example
Bundle the timeslots 1, 2, 5, 10-15, and 18 of the CE1/PRI interface into

channel-set 0.
[3com-E1 3/0/0]channel-set 0 timeslot-list 1,2,5,10-15,18
Make the same configuration on the CE1/PRI interface on the remote router.
[3com-E1 3/0/0]channel-set 0 timeslot-list 1,2,5,10-15,18
clock Syntax
clock { master | slave }
undo clock
View
Parameter
master: Adopts the internal clock mode.
slave: Adopts the line clock mode.

Description
Using the clock command, you can set the clock mode on a CE1/PRI interface.
Using the undo clock command, you can restore the default clock mode on the
interface.
By default, the CE1/PRI interface adopts the line clock mode (slave).
When a CE1/PRI interface is working as DCE, chose the internal clock for it, that is,
master clock mode. When it is working as DTE, chose the line clock, that is, slave
clock mode for it.
Example
Set the clock mode of the CE1/PRI interface to internal clock (master) mode.
[3com-E1 3/0/0]clock master
code Syntax
code { ami | hdb3 }
undo code
View
Parameter
ami: Adopts Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) line code format.
hdb3: Adopts High Density Bipolar 3 (HDB3) line code format. This parameter is
only significant for a CE1/PRI interface.
Description
Using the code command, you can set the line code format for a CE1/PRI
interface. Using the undo code command, you can restore the default line code
format of the interface.
The line code format of CE1/PRI interface defaults to hdb3.
You should keep the line code format of the interface in consistency with that
used by the remote device.
Example
Set the line code format of the interface E1 3/0/0 to ami.
[3com-E1 3/0/0]code ami
controller e1 Syntax
controller e1 number
View
System view
Parameter
number: The CE1/PRI interface number.
Description
Using the controller e1 command, you can enter a CE1/PRI interface view.
Example
Enter the view of the interface E1 3/0/0.
[3com]controller E1 3/0/0
[3com-E1 3/0/0]
display controller e1 Syntax
display controller [ e1 number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
number: Interface number.
Description
Using the display controller e1 command, you can display the information related
to a CE1/PRI interface.
■ Physical state of interface

■ Clock mode of interface
■ Frame check mode of interface
■ Line code format of interface
Example
Display the information related to the E1 interface.
[3com]display controller E1 3/0/0

E1 1-0 is down.
Applique type is Channelized E1 - 75 OHM unbalanced
Framing is NO-CRC4, Line Code is HDB3, Source Clock is slave.
Alarm State is Loss of Frame Alignment.
frame-format Syntax
frame-format { crc4 | no-crc4 }
undo frame-format
View
Parameter
crc4: Sets the frame format on the CE1 interface to CRC4.
no-crc4: Sets the frame format on the CE1 interface to no-CRC4.
Description
Using the frame-format command, you can set the frame format of CE1 interface.
Using the undo frame-format command, you can restore the default frame format
of the interface.
By default, the frame format of CE1 interface is no-crc4.
A CE1/PRI interface working in CE1 mode supports both crc4 and no-crc4 frame
formats. Among them, crc4 supports the 4-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) on
physical frames whereas no-crc4 does not.
Example
Set the frame format of the interface E1 3/0/0 to crc4.
[3com-E1 3/0/0]frame-format crc4
loopback Syntax
loopback { local | remote }
undo loopback
View
Parameter
local: Enables the interface to perform local loopback.
remote: Enables the interface to perform remote loopback.
Description
Using the loopback command, you can enable a CE1/PRI interface to perform
loopback. Using the undo loopback command, you can disable the CE1/PRI
interface to perform loopback.
By default, the interface is disabled to perform loopback in any form.
Loopback is used to check the condition of interface or cable. This function should
be disabled when they are in normal operation.
If a serial interface formed by bundling timeslots of the CT1/PRI interface is

encapsulated with PPP and is set to perform loopback, it is normal for the state of
the link layer protocol to be reported as DOWN.
Example
Set the interface E1 3/0/0 to perform local loopback.
[3com-E1 3/0/0]loopback local
pri-set Syntax
pri-set timeslot-list [ range ]
undo pri-set
View
Parameter
number2-number3.
Description
Using the pri-set command, you can bundle the timeslots of a CE1/PRI interface
into a pri-set. Using the undo pri-set command, you can remove the timeslot
bundle.
By default, no timeslots are bundled into pri-set.
When perform pri-set bundling on a CE1/PRI interface, you should note that you
are not allowed to bundle only timeslot 16, as it will be used as the D channel for
transmitting signals. Attempts to bundle only timeslot 16 will fail.
In a pri-set formed by bundling the timeslots of a CE1/PRI interface, timeslot 0 is

used for Frame Synchronization Control (FSC), timeslot 16 as a D channel for
signaling transmission, and other timeslots as B channels for data transmission.
You may bundle the timeslots except for timeslot 0 into a pri-set (as the D channel,
timeslot 16 is automatically bundled). The logic features of this pri-set will be the
same like those of an ISDN PRI interface. If no timeslots are specified for bundling,
all the timeslots except for timeslot 0 will be bundled into an interface similar to an
ISDN PRI interface in the form of 30B+D.
The system will automatically create a serial interface after the operation of
timeslot bundling on the interface. This serial interface has the same logic features
of ISDN PRI interface. The serial interface is numbered in the form of serial
number:15. Where, number is the maximum serial interface number plus 1.
the channel-set command.
For a related command, see channel-set.
Example
Bundle the timeslots 1, 2, and 8-12 of the CE1/PRI interface into a pri-set.
[3com-E1 3/0/0]pri-set timeslot-list 1,2,8-12
using Syntax
using { ce1 | e1 }
undo using
View
Parameter
e1: In E1 mode
ce1: In CE1/PRI mode
Description
Using the using command, you can configure the operating mode for a CE1/PRI
interface. Using the undo using command, you can restore the default operating
mode.
By default, the CE1/PRI interface is working in CE1/PRI mode.
A CE1/PRI interface can work in either E1 mode (also called non-channelized

mode) or CE1/PRI mode (that is, channelized mode).
A CE1/PRI interface in E1 mode equals an interface of 2 Mbps data bandwidth, on

which, no timeslots are divided. Its logic features are the same like those of a
synchronous serial interface. When working in CE1/PRI mode, it is physically
divided into 32 timeslots numbered from 0 to 31. Among them, timeslot 0 is used
for transmitting the Frame Synchronization Control information. This interface can
work as either a CE1 interface or a PRI interface.
After the CE1/PRI interface is enabled to work in E1 mode by using the using e1
command, the system will automatically create a serial interface numbered serial
interface-number:0. The interface-number starts from the maximum serial
interface number plus 1t.
Example
Set the CE1/PRI interface to work in E1 mode.
[3com-E1 3/0/0]using e1
Fundamental CT1/PRI
Interface
Configuration
Commands
cable Syntax
cable { long { 0db | -7.5db | -15db | -22.5db } | short { 133ft | 266ft | 399ft | 533ft |
655ft } }
undo cable
View
CT1/PRI interface view
Parameter
long: Matches a 655-feet and longer transmission line. The options for this
parameter include 0db, -7.5db, -15db and -22.5db. The attenuation parameter is
selected depending on the signal quality received at the receiving end. In this case,
no external CSU is needed.
short: Matches a transmission cable under 655 feet. The options for this
parameter include 133ft, 266ft, 399ft, 533ft and 655ft. The length parameter is
selected depending on the actual length of the transmission line.
Description
Using the cable command, you can set cable attenuation and length on a CT1/PRI
interface to match the distance of the transmission line. Using the undo cable
command, you can restore the default value
The transmission cable attenuation that the CT1/PRI interface matches defaults to
long 0db.
This command is mainly used to configure the signal waveform for transmission to
satisfy various transmitting needs. In practice, the signal quality received by the
receiving end determines whether this command will be used. If the signal quality
is relatively good, use the default setting. In this case, the CT1/PRI interface does
not need an external CSU device.
Example
Set the length of the transmission cable that the CT1/PRI interface matches to 133
feet.
[3com-T1 1/0/0] cable short 133ft

channel-set Syntax
channel-set set-number timeslot-list range [ speed { 56k | 64k } ]
undo channel-set set-number
View
Parameter
set-number: The number of the channel-set formed by bundling the timeslots of

the interface, which is in the range of 0 to 23.
number2-number3.
speed { 56k | 64k }: The speed of the timeslot bundle, which is in Kbps. If 56k is
selected, the timeslots will be bundled into N x 56 Kbps bundles, and if 64k is
selected, the timeslots will be bundled into N x 64 Kbps bundles. By default, the
system uses 64k.
Description
Using the channel-set command, you can bundle some timeslots of a CT1/PRI
interface into a channel-set. Using the undo channel-set command, you can
remove the specified channel-set.
A CT1/PRI interface is physically divided into 24 timeslots numbered from 1

through 24. In actual applications, all the timeslots can be bundled into multiple
channel-sets and the system will automatically create a serial interface for each
set. This serial interface has the same logic features of synchronous serial interface.
The serial interface is numbered in the form of serial interface-number:set-number.

Where, interface-number starts from the maximum serial interface number plus 1,
and set-number is the number of the channel-set.
Only one timeslot bundling mode can be supported on one CT1/PRI interface
the pri-set command.
For a related command, see pri-set.
Example
Bundle the timeslots 1, 2, 5, 10-15and 18 of the CE1/PRI interface into

channel-set 0.
[3com-T1 1/0/0]channel-set 0 timeslot-list 1,2,5,10-15,18

clock Syntax
undo clock
View
Parameter
Description
Using the clock command, you can set the clock mode on a CT1/PRI interface.
Using the undo clock command, you can restore the default clock mode on the
interface.
By default, the CE1/PRI interface adopts the line clock mode (slave).
When a CT1/PRI interface is working as DCE, chose the internal clock for it, that is,
master clock mode. When it is working as DTE, chose the line clock, that is, the
slave clock mode for it.
Example
Set the clock mode of the CT1/PRI interface to internal clock (master) mode.
[3com-T1 1/0/0] clock master
code Syntax
code { ami | b8zs }
undo code
View
Parameter
ami: Adopts the AMI line code format.
b8zs: Adopts the Bipolar with 8-Zero Substitution (b8zs) line code format.
Description
Using the code command, you can set the line code format for a CT1/PRI
interface. Using the undo code command, you can restore the default line code
format of the interface.
The line code format of CT1/PRI interface defaults to b8zs.
You should keep the line code format of the interface consistent with the one
Example
Set the line code format of the interface T1 1/0/0 to ami.
[3com-T1 1/0/0] code ami
controller t1 Syntax
controller t1 number
View
System view
Parameter
number: The CT1/PRI interface number.
Description
Using the controller t1 command, you can enter a CT1/PRI interface view.
Example
Enter the view of the interface T1 1/00.
[3com]controller t1 1/0/0
[3com-T1 1/0/0]
display controller t1 Syntax
display controller t1 number
View
Any view
Parameter
number: Interface number.
Description
Using the display controller t1 command, you can display the information related
to a CT1/PRI interface. All T1 interfaces will be displayed if no parameter is
selected.
■ Physical state of interface

■ Clock mode of interface
■ Frame check mode of interface

■ Line code format of interface
Example
Display the information related to the T1 interface.
[3com]display controller t1 1/0/0
frame-format Syntax
frame-format { sf | esf }
undo frame-format
View
Parameter
sf: Sets the frame format of CT1/PRI interface to Super Frame (SF).
esf: Sets the frame format of CT1/PRI interface to Extended Super Frame (ESF).
Description
Using the frame-format command, you can set the frame format on a CT1/PRI
interface. Using the undo frame-format command, you can restore to the default
frame format on the interface.
The frame format on the CT1/PRI interface defaults to ESF.
A CT1/PRI interface supports two frame formats, that is, SF and ESF. In SF format,
multiple frames can share the same FSC and signaling information, so that more
significant bits can be used for transmitting user data. In practice, a system should
be tested often. The application of ESF makes it possible for the system to provide
the services while it is being tested.
Example
Set the frame format of T1 1/0/0 to SF.
[3com-T1 1/0/0]frame-format sf
loopback Syntax
loopback { local | remote }
undo loopback
View

Parameter
local: Enables the CT1/PRI interface to perform local loopback.
remote: Enables the interface to perform remote loopback.
Description
Using the loopback command, you can enable a CT1/PRI interface to perform
loopback. Using the undo loopback command, you can disable the CT1/PRI
interface to perform loopback.
By default, the interface is disabled to perform loopback in any form.
Loopback is used to check the condition of interface or cable. This function should
be disabled when they are in normal operation.
If a serial interface formed by bundling timeslots of the CT1/PRI interface is

encapsulated with PPP and is set to perform loopback, it is normal for the state of
the link layer protocol to be reported as DOWN.
Example
Set the interface T1 1/0/0 to perform local loopback.
[3com-T1 1/0/0]loopback remote
pri-set Syntax
pri-set [ timeslot-list range ]
undo pri-set
View
Parameter
number2-number3.
Description
Using the pri-set command, you can bundle the timeslots of a CT1/PRI interface
into a pri-set. Using the undo pri-set command, you can remove the timeslot
bundle.
By default, no timeslots are bundled into pri-set.
When performing pri-set bundling on a CT1/PRI interface, you should note that
you are not allowed to bundle only timeslot 24, because it is the D channel for
transmitting signals. Attempts to bundle only timeslot 24 will fail.
In a pri-set formed by bundling the timeslots of a CT1/PRI interface, timeslot 24 is

used as D channel for signaling transmission, and other timeslots as B channels for
data transmission. All the timeslots can be randomly bundled into a pri-set (as a D
channel, timeslot 24 is automatically bundled). The logic features of this pri-set will
be the same as those of an ISDN PRI interface. If no timeslots are specified for
bundling, all the timeslots will be bundled into an interface similar to an ISDN PRI
interface in the form of 23B+D.
The system will automatically create a serial interface after the operation of
timeslot bundling on the interface. This serial interface has the same logic features
as an ISDN PRI interface. The serial interface is numbered in the form of serial
number:23, in which number starts from the maximum serial interface number
plus 1.
the channel-set command.
For a related command, see channel-set.
Example
Bundle the timeslots 1, 2, and 8-12 of the CT1/PRI interface into a pri-set.
[3com-T1 1/0/0]pri-set timeslot-list 1,2,8-12
E1-F Interface
Configuration
Commands
display fe1 serial Syntax
display fe1 [ serial serial-number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
serial serial-number: Interface type and number. If no interface is specified, the

information of all the E1-F interfaces will be displayed.
Description
Using the display fe1 serial command, you can view the configuration and state of
E1-F interface.
If the specified interface is a serial interface rather than an E1-F interface, the
system will display the error prompt “The serial is not a factional interface”.
Example
Display the information of the E1-F interface.

[3com] display fe1

Serial4/0/0
Fractional E1, status is down.
Work mode is FRAMED - 120 OHM balanced.
Framing : NO-CRC4, Line Code is HDB3, Clock : Slave.
Alarm State : Loss-of-Signal.
Table 4 Description of displaying controller FE1 items

Item Description
Framing Frame format (crc4/no-crc4)
Line Code line code format (ami/hdb3)
Clock Clock mode (master/slave)
Alarm State Alarm information
fe1 clock Syntax
fe1 clock { master | slave }
undo fe1 clock
View
E1-F interface view
Parameter
master: Internal clock is used.
slave: Line clock is used.
Description
Using the fe1 clock command, you can configure clock used by an E1-F interface.
Using the undo fe1 clock command, you can restore the default clock of the
interface.
By default, the interfaces use the slave clock.
For an E1-F interface used as DCE, master clock should be used. If the interface is
used as DTE, however, the slave clock should be used.
Example
Set the E1-F interface to use internal clock.
[3com-Serial0/0/0] fe1 clock master
fe1 code Syntax
fe1 code { ami | hdb3 }
undo fe1 code
View
E1-F interface view

Parameter
ami: Adopts AMI line code format.
hdb3: Adopts HDB3 line code format.
Description
Using the fe1 code command, you can configure line code format for an E1-F
interface. Using the undo fe1 code command, you can restore the default line
code format of interface.
By default, E1-F interfaces adopt hdb3.
The line code of an interface should be set consistent with that of the peer.
Example
Set the line code format of the E1-F interface to AMI.
[3com-Serial0/0/0] fe1 code ami
fe1 frame-format Syntax
fe1 frame-format { crc4 | no-crc4 }
undo fe1 frame-format
View
E1-F interface view
Parameter
crc4: Adopts CRC4 as the framing format for the E1-F interface.
no-crc4: Adopts no-CRC4 as the framing format for the E1-F interface..
Description
Using the fe1 frame-format command, you can configure the framing format for
an E1-F interface. Using the undo fe1 frame-format command, you can restore the
default framing format of the interface.
By default, E1-F interfaces use no-crc4.
Example
Set the framing format for the E1-F interface to CRC4.
[3com-Serial0/0/0] fe1 frame-format crc4
fe1 loopback Syntax
fe1 loopback { local | remote }

undo fe1 loopback [ local | remote ]
View
E1-F interface view
Parameter
local: Places the interface in local loopback.
remote: Places the interface in remote loopback.
Description
Using the fe1 loopback command, you can configure an E1-F interface in local or
remote loopback. Using the undo fe1 loopback command, you can disable the
local and remote loopback on the interface.
By default, the interfaces are not placed in local or remote loopback.
Local loopback and remote loopback are used for testing the state of interface or
cable itself. These functions should be disabled in normal cases. On an interface,
using this command, but with different arguments, can enable local loopback and
remote loopback, but these two functions cannot be enabled at the same time.
Example
Place the E1-F interface in local loopback.
[3com-Serial0/0/0] fe1 loopback local
fe1 timeslot-list Syntax
fe1 timeslot-list { all | range }
undo fe1 timeslot-list
View
E1-F interface view
Parameter
all: Binds all the time slots on an interface, the interface rate will become 31 X
64kbps (that is, 1984kbps) after binding.
range: Time slots participating in the binding operation, it is in the range of 1 to

31. When specifying time slots for binding, you can configure a single time slot by
using the form of “number”, the time slots in a range by using the form of
“number1-number2”, or multiple time slots by using the form of “number1,
number2-number3”.
Description
Using the fe1 timeslot-list command, you can configure the time slots that will
participate in the binding operation on an E1-F interface. Using the undo fe1
timeslot-list command, you can restore the default setting of time slot binding.
By default, all the time slots on an E1-F interface are bound. That is, the E1-F
interface rate defaults to 1984kbps.
Time slot binding operation on an E1-F interface will result in changing of

interface rate. For example, after the user binds the time slots 1 through 10, the
interface rate will become 10 X 64kbps.
If an E1-F interface is working in unframed mode, the fe1 timeslot-list command

cannot be configured.
For related commands, see fe1 unframed.
Example
Bind the time slots 1, 2, 5, 10 through 15, and 18 on the E1-F interface.
[3com-Serial0/0/0] fe1 timeslot-list 1,2,5,10-15,18
fe1 unframed Syntax
fe1 unframed
undo fe1 unframed
View
E1-F interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the fe1 unframed command, you can configure an E1-F interface to work in
unframed mode. Using the undo fe1 unframed command, you can configure the
E1-F interface to work in framed mode.
By default, E1-F interfaces work in framed mode.
When it works in unframed mode, it is a non-timeslots interface of 2048kbps data

bandwidth. In this case, it is logically equivalent to a synchronous serial interface.
When it works in framed mode, however, it is physically divided into 32 time slots
numbered in the range of 0 to 31, and time slot 0 is used for transmitting
synchronization information.
For related commands, see fe1 timeslot-list.

Example
Set the E1-F interface to work in unframed mode.
[3com-Serial0/0/0] fe1 unframed
T1-F Interface
Configuration
Commands
ft1 cable Syntax
ft1 cable { long decibel | short length }
undo ft1 cable
View
T1-F interface view
Parameter
long decibel: Matches the transmission line longer than 655 feet. The argument
decibel can take 0db, -7.5db, -15db, or -22.5db, depending on the signal quality
at the receiving end. In this case, no external CSU is required.
short length: Matches transmission line shorter than 655 feet. The argument
length can take 133ft, 266ft, 399ft, 533ft, and 655ft, depending on the length of
transmission line.
Description
Using the ft1 cable command, you can configure attenuation or length of the
transmission line matched a T1-F interface. Using the undo ft1cable command,
you can restore the default setting.
By default, the transmission line attenuation matched T1-F interfaces is long 0db.
This command is mainly used for configuring the signal waveform required for
different types of transmission. In practice, you can decide whether to use this
command according to the signal quality at the receiving end. If the signal quality
is acceptable, the default setting can be used.
Example
Set the length of the transmission line matched the T1-F interface to 133 feet.
[3com-Serial0/0/0] ft1 cable short 133ft
display ft1 serial Syntax
display ft1 [ serial serial-number ]

View
Any view
Parameter
serial serial-number: Interface type and number. If no interface is specified, the

information of all the T1-F interfaces will be displayed.
Description
Using the display ft1 serial command, you can view the configuration and state of
T1-F interface.
If the specified interface is a serial interface rather than a T1-F interface, the
system will display the error prompt “The serial is not a factional interface”.
Example
Display the information of the T1-F interface.
[3com] display ft1

Serial4/0/0
Fractional T1, status is down.
Work mode is framed - 100 OHM balanced.
Framing : ESF, Line Code is B8ZS, Clock : Slave.
Alarm State : Loss-of-Signal.
Table 5 Description of displaying controller FT1 items

Item Description
Framing Frame format (crc4/no-crc4)
Line Code line code format (ami/hdb3)
Clock Clock mode (master/slave)
Alarm State Alarm information
ft1 clock Syntax
ft1 clock { master | slave }
undo ft1 clock
View
T1-F interface view
Parameter
master: Internal clock is used.
slave: Line clock is used.
Description
Using the ft1 clock command, you can configure the clock used by an E1-F or T1-F
interface. Using the undo ft1 clock command, you can restore the default clock of
the interface.
By default, the interfaces use the slave clock.
For a T1-F interface used as DCE, master clock should be used. If the interface is
used as DTE, however, the slave clock should be used.
Example
Set the T1-F interface to use internal clock.
[3com-Serial0/0/0] ft1 clock master
ft1 code Syntax
ft1 code { ami | b8zs }
undo ft1 code
View
T1-F interface view
Parameter
ami: Adopts AMI line code format.
b8zs: Adopts B8ZS line code format.
Description
Using the ft1 code command, you can configure the line code format for a T1-F
interface. Using the undo ft1 code command, you can restore the default line
code format of interface.
By default, T1-F interfaces adopt b8zs.
The line code of an interface should be set in consistency with that of the peer.
Example
Set the line code format of the T1-F interface to AMI.
[3com-Serial0/0/0] ft1 code ami
ft1 frame-format Syntax
ft1 frame-format { sf | esf }
undo ft1 frame-format
View
T1-F interface view
Parameter
sf: Adopts SF as the framing format for the T1-F interface.

esf: Adopts ESF as the framing format for the T1-F interface.
Description
Using the ft1 frame-format command, you can configure the framing format for a
T1-F interface. Using the undo ft1 frame-format command, you can restore the
default framing format of the interface.
By default, T1-F interfaces use esf.
T1-F interfaces support SF and ESF. In SF, multiple frames can share the same frame
synchronization and signaling information, so that more significant bits can be
used for transmitting user data. In practice, the system test is often required. The
application of ESF technology can ensure normal service when system test is being
carried out.
Example
Set the framing format for the T1-F interface to SF.
[3com-Serial0/0/0] ft1 frame-format sf
ft1 loopback Syntax
ft1 loopback { local | remote }
undo ft1 loopback [ local | remote ]
View
T1-F interface view
Parameter
local: Places the interface in local loopback.
remote: Places the interface in remote loopback.
Description
Using the ft1 loopback command, you can configure a T1-F interface in local or
remote loopback. Using the undo ft1 loopback command, you can disable the
local and remote loopback on the interface.
By default, the interfaces are not placed in local or remote loopback.
Local loopback and remote loopback are used for testing the state of interface or
cable itself. These functions should be disabled in normal cases. On an interface,
using this command but with different arguments can respectively enable local
loopback and remote loopback, but these two functions cannot be enabled at the
same time.
Example
Place the T1-F interface in local loopback.

[3com-Serial0/0/0] ft1 loopback local
ft1 timeslot-list Syntax
ft1 timeslot-list { all | range } [ speed { 56 | 64 } ]
undo ft1 timeslot-list
T1-F interface view
Parameter
all: Binds all the time slots on an interface. The interface rate will become 24 X
64kbps (that is, 1536kbps) after binding.
range: Time slots participating in the binding operation. It is in the range of 1 to

24. When specifying time slots for binding, you can configure a single time slot by
using the form of “number”, the time slots in a range by using the form of
“number1-number2”, or multiple time slots by using the form of “number1,
number2-number3”.
speed { 56 | 64 }: Speed in kbps, which is used for time slot binding. If the
argument 56 is used, timeslots will be bound into N X 56kbps. If the argument 64
is used, timeslots will be bound into N X 64kbps.
Description
Using the ft1 timeslot-list command, you can configure the time slots that will
participate in the binding operation on a T1-F interface. Using the undo ft1
timeslot-list command, you can restore the default setting of time slot binding.
By default, all the time slots on a T1-F interface are bound. That is, the T1-F
interface rate defaults to 1536kbps.
When performing time slot binding on a T1-F interface, the speed assigned to a
time slot defaults to 64kbps.
The time slot binding operation on a T1-F interface results in a change of interface
rate. For example, after the user binds the time slots 1 through 10, the interface
rate becomes 10 X 64kbps (or 10 X 56 kbps).
Example
Bind the time slots 1, 2, 5, 10 through 15, and 18 on the T1-F interface.
[3com-Serial0/0/0] ft1 timeslot-list 1,2,5,10-15,18

Fundamental CE3
Interface
Configuration
Commands
clock Syntax
undo clock
View
CE3 interface view
Parameter
Description
Using the clock command, you can set the clock mode on a CE3 interface. Using
the undo clock command, you can restore the default clock mode on the
interface.
By default, the CE3 interface adopts the line clock mode (slave).
The clock is selected depending on the connected remote device. If it is a

transmission device, the local end will use the line clock.
If the CE3 interfaces on the two routers are directly connected, one router should
use the internal clock whereas the other router uses the line clock.
Example
Configure the CE3 interface with internal clock.
[3com-E3 1/0/0] clock master
controller e3 Syntax
controller e3 interface-number
View
System view
Parameter
interface-number: CE3 interface number.

Description
Using the controller e3 command, you can enter the CE3 interface view.
For related command, see display controller e3.
Example
Enter the view of the interface E3 1/0/0.
[3com]controller e3 1/0/0
[3com-E3 1/0/0]
display controller e3 Syntax
display controller e3 interface-number
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-number: CE3 interface number.
Description
Using the display controller e3 command, you can view the state information of a
CE3 interface.
In addition to the state information of the CE3 interface, the command can display
the information of each E1 line on the CE3 interface if the interface is working in
CE3 mode.
Example
Display the information related to the interface E3 1/0/0.
[3com]display controller e3 1/0/0

E3 1/0/0 is up
Description : 3Com Routers, E3 1/0 Interface
Applique type is CE3 - 75 OHM unbalanced Frame-format G751, line
code HDB3, clock slave, national-bit 1,loopback not set
Alarm: none
ERROR: 0 BPV, 0 EXZ, 0 FrmErr, 0 FEBE
E3-0 CE1 1 is up
Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock master, loopback not set
E3-0 CE1 2 is up
Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock slave, loopback local
E3-0 CE1 3 is up
Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock slave, loopback remote
E3-0 CE1 4 is up
Frame-format CRC4, clock slave, loopback not set
E3-0 CE1 5 is up
Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock slave, loopback not set
E3-0 CE1 6 is up
E3-0 CE1 7 is up
E3-0 CE1 8 is up
E3-0 CE1 9 is up
E3-0 CE1 10 is up
E3-0 CE1 11 is up
E3-0 CE1 12 is up
E3-0 CE1 13 is up
E3-0 CE1 14 is up
E3-0 CE1 15 is up
E3-0 CE1 16 is up
e1 channel-set Syntax
e1 line-number channel-set set-number timeslot-list range
undo e1 line-number channel-set set-number
View
CE3 interface view
Parameter
line-number: E1 line number in the range of 1 to 16.

E1 line, which is in the range of 0 to 30.
number2-number3.
Description
Using the e1 channel-set command, you can bundle the timeslots of an E1 line.
Using the undo e1 channel-set command, you can remove the timeslot bundle.
A CE3 interface can be channelized into 64Kbps lines and the timeslots of each E1
line can be bundled up to 31 channels.
When an E1 line operates at framed (CE1) mode, you can bundle the timeslots on
it. The system will automatically create a serial interface numbered serial number /
line-number:set-number. For example, the serial interface created by the

channel-set 0 of the first e1 line on E3 7/0 will be numbered 7/0/1:0. This interface
can operate at N x 64 Kbps and has the same logic features of a synchronous serial
interface on which you make other configurations.
For related command, see e1 unframed.
Example
Bundle a 128Kbps serial interface on the first E1 line on the interface E3 1/0/0.
[3com-E3 1/0/0]e1 1 channel-set 1 timeslot-list 1,2
e1 set clock Syntax
e1 line-number set clock { master | slave }
undo e1 line-number set clock
View
CE3 interface view
Parameter
Description
Using the e1 set clock command, you can set the clock mode for an E1 line on a
CE3 interface. Using the undo e1 clock command, you can restore the default
setting.
By defaults, the E1 lines on a CE3 interface adopt line clock.
The E1 lines on a CE3 interface working in channelized mode are allowed to use
separate clocks.
Example
Configure the first E1 line on the E3 interface to adopt line clock mode.
[3com-E3 1/0/0]e1 1 set clock slave
e1 set frame-format Syntax
e1 line-number set frame-format { crc4 | no-crc4 }
undo e1 line-number set frame-format

View
CE3 interface view
Parameter
crc4: The frame format adopted by an E1 line is crc4.
no-crc4: The frame format adopted by an E1 line is no-crc4.
Description
Using the e1 set frame-format command, you can configure the frame format for
an E1 line. Using the undo e1 set frame-format command, you can restore the
default setting.
By default, the frame format no-crc4 is used for E1 line.
Only if an E1 line is working in framed format (which can be set by using the undo
e1 unframed command) can this command be configured.
For related command, see e1 unframed.
Example
Configure the first E1 line on the E3 interface to adopt the frame format crc4.
[3com-E3 1/0/0]e1 1 set frame-format crc4
e1 set loopback Syntax
e1 line-number set loopback { local | remote }
undo e1 line-number set loopback
View
CE3 interface view
Parameter
local: Enables E1 line to perform local loopback.
remote: Enables E1 line to perform remote loopback.
Description
Using the e1 set loopback command, you can set the loopback mode of an E1 line
on an E3 interface. Using the undo e1 set loopback command, you can disable the
E1 line to loop back.
By default, E1 lines are disabled to loop back.

If an E1 line encapsulated with PPP has been set to perform loopback, it is normal
for the state of the link layer protocol to be reported as DOWN.
Example
Set the loopback mode of the first E1 line on the E3 interface to local.
[3com-E3 1/0/0]e1 1 set loopback local
e1 shutdown Syntax
e1 line-number shutdown
undo e1 line-number shutdown
View
CE3 interface view
Parameter
Description
Using the e1 shutdown command, you can shut down an E1 line on the CE3
interface. Using the undo e1 shutdown command, you can enable the E1 line.
By default, E1 line is enabled.
This command will affect not only the specified E1 line but also the serial
interfaces formed by bundling the timeslots of the E1 line. Executing the e1
shutdown command on the specified E1 line will shut down all these serial
interfaces and the data transmission and receiving will be stopped as a result.
Likewise, executing the undo e1 shutdown command will re-enable all these serial
interfaces.
Example
Shut down the first E1 line on the E3 interface.
[3com-E3 1/0/0]e1 1 shutdown
e1 unframed Syntax
e1 line-number unframed
undo e1 line-number unframed
View
CE3 interface view
Parameter

Description
Using the e1 unframed command, you can set an E1 line on a CE3 interface to
work in unframed mode (E1 mode). Using the undo e1 unframed command, you
can set the E1 line on the CE3 interface to work in framed mode (CE1 mode).
By default, E1 lines are working in framed mode.
An E1 line in unframed mode does not contain the frame control information and
cannot be divided into timeslots. Naturally, no timeslot bundling can be performed
on it. In this case, the system automatically creates a serial interface numbered
serial number / line-number:0 for it. This interface operates at 2048 Kbps and has
the same logic features of a synchronous serial interface on which you can make
other configurations.
For related command, see e1 channel-set.
Example
Set the first E1 line on the E3 interface to work in unframed mode.
[3com-E3 1/0/0]e1 1 unframed
loopback Syntax
loopback { local | payload | remote }
undo loopback
View
CE3 interface view
Parameter
local: Enables the CE3 interface to perform local loopback.
payload: Places the CE3 interface in an remote payload loopback. Data passes the
framer in this case and will be looped back after payload is generated.
remote: Enables the CE3 interface to perform remote loopback. Data does not go
through the framer in this case and will be looped back before the payload has
been generated.
Description
Using the loopback command, you can configure the loopback mode of a CE3
interface. Using the undo loopback command, you can disable the CE3 interface
By default, loopback is disabled on the CE3 interface.
It is necessary for you to enable the CE3 interface to perform loopback only for the
purpose of testing some special functions.
If a CE3 interface encapsulated with PPP has been set to perform loopback, it is
normal for the state of the link layer protocol to be reported as DOWN.
Example
Enable the interface E3 1/0/0 to perform local loopback.
[3com-E3 1/0/0] loopback local
national-bit Syntax
national-bit { 0 | 1 }
undo national-bit
View
CE3 interface view
Parameter
0: Sets the national bit of the CE3 interface to 0.
1: Sets the national bit of the CE3 interface to 1.
Description
Using the national-bit command, you can configure national bit for a CE3
interface. Using the undo national-bit command, you can restore the default
setting.
The national bit of CE3 interface defaults to 1.
It is necessary to set the national bit of an E3 interface to 0 only in some special

circumstances.
For the related command, see controller e3.
Example
Set the national bit of the interface E3 1/0/0 to 0.
[3com-E3 1/0/0] national-bit 0
using Syntax
using { e3 | ce3 }
undo using
View
CE3 interface view

Parameter
e3: Sets the CE3 interface to work in unchannelized mode.
ce3: Sets the CE3 interface to work in channelized mode.
Description
Using the using command, you can configure the operating mode of a CE3
interface. Using the undo using command, you can restore the default setting.
By default, the CE3 interface is working in channelized mode.
Only when the CE3 interface is working in channelized mode can you configure
the E1 lines on it.
When the CE3 interface is working in unchannelized mode, the system

automatically creates a serial interface numbered serial number / 0:0 for it. This
interface operates at 34.368 Mbps and has the same logic features of a
synchronous serial interface on which you can make other configurations.
For related command, see controller e3.
Example
Configure the interface E3 1/0/0 to work in unchannelized mode.
[3com-E3 1/0/0]using e3
Fundamental CT3
Interface
Configuration
Commands
cable Syntax
cable feet
undo cable
View
CT3 interface view
Parameter
feet: Cable length in the range of 0 to 450 feet.
Description
Using the cable command, you can configure the length of the cable with which a
CT3 interface is connected. Using the undo cable command, you can restore the
default length of the cable with which the CT3 interface is connected.
The parameter feet defaults to 49.

The length of the cable for CT3 interface connection refers to the distance
between the router and the cable distribution rack.
Example
Set the cable length to 50 feet for the interface T3 1/0/0.
[3com-T3 1/0/0]cable 50
clock Syntax
undo clock
View
CT3 interface view
Parameter
Description
Using the clock command, you can set the clock mode on a CT3 interface. Using
interface.
By default, the CT3 interface adopts the line clock mode (slave).
The clock is selected depending on the connected remote device. If it is a

transmission device, the local end will use the line clock.
If the CT3 interfaces on the two routers are directly connected, one router should
use the internal clock whereas the other router uses the line clock.
Example
Configure the CT3 interface with internal clock.
[3com-T3 1/0/0]clock master
controller t3 Syntax
controller t3 interface-number
View
System view
Parameter
interface-number: CT3 interface number.

Description
Using the controller t3 command, you can enter the CT3 interface view.
For the related command, see display controller t3.
Example
Enter the view of the interface T3 1/0/0.
[3com]controller t3 1/0/0
[3com-T3 1/0/0]
crc Syntax
crc { 16 | 32 | no-crc}
undo crc
View
Parameter
16: Adopt 16-bit CRC.
32: Adopt 32-bit CRC.
no-crc: Adopt no CRC.
Description
Using the crc command, you can configure CRC mode of the serial interface
formed by CT3. Using the undo crc command, you can restore the default setting.
By default, 16-bit CRC is used.
For the related commands, see t1 channel-set, t1 unframed, and using.
Example
Apply 32-bit CRC to the serial interface formed by the interface T3 1/0/0 in
unchannelized mode.
[3com-Serial1/0/0:0] crc 32
frame-format Syntax
frame-format { c-bit | m23 }
undo frame-format
View
CT3 interface view

Parameter
c-bit: Sets the frame format to C-bit.
m23: Sets the frame format to m23.
Description
Using the frame-format command, you can configure the frame format used by a
CT3 interface. Using the undo frame-format command, you can restore the
default frame format used by the CT3 interface.
By default, the CT3 interface adopts the C-bit frame format.
Example
Set the frame format of the interface T3 1/0/0 to m23.
[3com-T3 1/0/0] frame-format m23
loopback Syntax
loopback { local | payload | remote }
undo loopback
View
CT3 interface view
Parameter
local: Enables the CT3 interface to perform local loopback.
payload: Places the CT3 interface in an external payload loop. Data passes the
framer in this case and will be looped back after payload is generated.
remote: Enables the CT3 interface to perform remote loopback. Data does not go
through the framer in this case and will be looped back before the payload has
been generated.
Description
Using the loopback command, you can configure the loopback mode of a CT3
interface. Using the undo loopback command, you can disable the CT3 interface
By default, loopback is disabled on the CT3 interface.
Loopback is usually used for some special detection. It should not be enabled in
normal working condition.
If a CT3 interface encapsulated with PPP has been set to perform loopback, it is
normal for the state of its link layer protocol to be reported as DOWN.
Example
Enable the interface T3 1/0/0 to perform local loopback.
[3com-T3 1/0/0]loopback local
t1 channel-set Syntax
t1 line-number channel-set set-number timeslot-list range [ speed { 56k | 64k } ]
undo t1 line-number channel-set set-number
View
CT3 interface view
Parameter
line-number: T1 line number in the range of 1 to 28.

T1 line, which is in the range of 0 to 23.
number2-number3.
speed: Timeslot bundling mode. If 56k is selected, the timeslots will be bundled
into N x 56Kbps. If 64k is selected, the timeslots will be bundled into N x 64 Kbps.
Speed defaults to 64k.
Description
Using the t1 channel-set command, you can bundle the timeslots of a T1 line.
Using the undo t1 channel-set command, you can remove the timeslot bundle.
When a T1 line operates at framed (CT1) mode, you can bundle the timeslots on
it. The system will automatically create a serial interface numbered serial number /
line-number:set-number for the channel-set. This interface operates at N x 64
Kbps (or N x 56 Kbps) and has the same logic features of a synchronous serial
interface on which you can make other configurations.
For a related command, see t1 unframed.
Example
Bundle a 128Kbps serial interface on the first T1 line on the interface T3 1/0/0.
[3com-T3 1/0/0]t1 1 set channel-set 1 timeslot-list 1,2

t1 set clock Syntax
t1 line-number set clock { master | slave }
undo t1 line-number set clock
View
CT3 interface view
Parameter
master: Adopts the internal clock.
slave: Adopts the line clock.
Description
Using the t1 set clock command, you can set the clock mode for a T1 line on a
CT3 interface. Using the undo e1 clock command, you can restore the default
setting.
By defaults, the T1 lines on a CT3 interface adopt line clock.
The E1 lines on a CE3 interface working in channelized mode are allowed to use
separate clocks.
Example
Configure the first T1 line on the T3 interface to adopt line clock.
[3com-T3 1/0/0]t1 1 set clock slave
t1 set frame-format Syntax
t1 line-number set frame-format { esf | sf }
undo t1 line-number set frame-format
View
CT3 interface view
Parameter
esf: Set the T1 line to use the Extended Super Frame (ESF) format.
sf: Set the T1 line to use the Super Frame (SF) format.
Description
Using the t1 set frame-format command, you can configure the frame format of
T1 line. Using the undo t1 set frame-format command, you can restore the default
setting.
By default, the frame format of T1 line is esf.
Only if a T1 line is working in framed format (which can be set by using the undo
t1 unframed command) can this command be configured.
For the related commands, see t1 set unframed and using.
Example
Adopt the frame format SF for the first T1 line on the T3 interface.
[3com-T3 1/0/0]t1 1 set frame-format sf
t1 set loopback Syntax
t1 line-number set loopback { local | remote }
undo t1 line-number set loopback
View
CT3 interface view
Parameter
local: Enables the T1 line to perform local loopback.
remote: Enables the T1 line to perform remote loopback.
Description
Using the t1 set loopback command, you can set the loopback mode of a T1 line
on a T3 interface. Using the undo t1 set loopback command, you can disable the
T1 line to loop back.
By default, T1 lines are disabled to loop back.
If a T1 line encapsulated with PPP has been set to perform loopback, it is normal
for the state of its link layer protocol to be reported as DOWN.
Loopback is usually used for some special tests. It should not be enabled in normal
working condition.
Example
Set the loopback mode on the first T1 line on the T3 interface to local.
[3com-T3 1/0/0]t1 1 set loopback local

t1 shutdown Syntax
t1 line-number shutdown
undo t1 line-number shutdown
View
CT3 interface view
Parameter
Description
Using the t1 shutdown command, you can shut down a T1 line on the CT3
interface. Using the undo t1 shutdown command, you can enable the T1 line.
By default, T1 line is enabled.
This command will affect not only the specified T1 line but also the serial
interfaces formed by bundling the timeslots of the T1 line. Executing the t1
shutdown command on the specified T1 line will shut down all these serial
interfaces and the data transmission and receiving will be stopped as a result.
Likewise, executing the undo t1 shutdown command will re-enable all these serial
interfaces.
Example
Shut down the first T1 line on the T3 interface.
[3com-T3 1/0/0]t1 1 shutdown
t1 unframed
Syntax
t1 line-number unframed [ speed { 56k | 64k } ]
undo t1 line-number unframed
View
CT3 interface view
Parameter
speed: Timeslot bundling mode. If 56k is selected, the timeslots will be bundled
into N x 56Kbps. If 64k is selected, the timeslots will be bundled into N x 64 Kbps.
Speed defaults to 64k.
Description
Using the t1 unframed command, you can set a T1 line on a CT3 interface to work
in unframed mode (T1 mode). Using the undo t1 unframed command, you can set
the T1 line on the CT3 interface to work in framed mode (CT1 mode).
By default, T1 lines are working in framed mode.
A T1 line in unframed mode does not contain the frame control information and
cannot be divided into timeslots. Naturally, no timeslot bundling can be performed
on it. In this case, the system automatically creates a serial interface numbered
serial number / line-number:0 for it. This interface operates at 1544 Kbps and has
the same logic features of a synchronous serial interface on which you can make
other configurations.
For the related command, see t1 channel-set.
Example
Set the first T1 line on the T3 interface to work in unframed mode.
[3com-T3 1/0/0]t1 1 unframed
using Syntax
using { t3 | ct3 }
View
CT3 interface view
Parameter
t3: Sets the CT3 interface to work in unchannelized mode.
ct3: Sets the CT3 interface to work in channelized mode.
Description
Using the using command, you can configure the operating mode of a CT3
interface. Using the undo using command, you can restore the default setting.
By default, the CT3 interface is working in channelized mode.
Only when the CT3 interface is working in channelized mode can you configure
the T1 lines on it.
When the CT3 interface is working in unchannelized mode, the system

automatically creates a serial interface numbered serial number / 0:0 for it. This
interface operates at 44.736 Mbps and has the same logic features of a
synchronous serial interface on which you can make other configurations.
Example
Configure the interface T3 1/0/0 to work in unchannelized mode.

[3com-T3 1/0/0]using t3
display controller t3 Syntax
display controller t3 interface-number
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-number: CT3 interface number.
Description
Using the display controller t3 command, you can view the state information of a
CT3 interface.
In addition to the state information of the CT3 interface, the command can display
the information of each T1 line on the CT3 interface if the interface is working in
CT3 mode.
Example
Display the information related to the interface T3 1/0/0.
[3com]display controller t3 1/0/0

T3 1/0/0 is down
Description : 3Com Routers, T3 1/0 Interface
Frame-format C-BIT Parity, line code B3ZS, cable 49 feet, clock
slave, loopback not set
Alarm: none
ERROR: 0 BiPolarViolation, 0 EXcessiveZero, 1 FrameError
0 ParityBitError, 0 C-BitParityBitError, 0 FarEndBlockError
ATM E3/T3 Interface

Configuration
Commands
cable Syntax
cable { long | short }
undo cable
View
ATM T3 Interface view
Parameter
long: Long distance mode. Cable length ranges from 151 to 500 meters.
short: Short distance mode. Cable length ranges from 0 to 150 meters.
Description
Using the cable command, you can configure the cable mode of the ATM T3
cable, to set the distance between the router and the cable distribution frame.
Using the undo cable command, you can restore the default setting.
By default, short distance mode is used.
Example
Set the cable length mode of ATM T3 1/0/0 to long.
<3com> system-view
[3com] interface atm 1/0/0
[3com-Atm1/0/0] cable long
clock Syntax
undo clock
View
ATM E3/T3 interface view.
Parameter
master: Sets the clock mode of ATM E3/T3 to master mode.
slave: Sets the clock mode of ATM E3/T3 to slave mode.
Description
Using the clock command, you can set the clock mode of ATM E3/T3 interface.
Using the undo clock command, you can restore the default setting.
By default, the clock mode of ATM E3/T3 interface is slave mode.
Example
Set clock mode of ATM E3/T3 interface 2/0/0 as master.
<3com> system-view
[3com-Atm2/0/0] clock master
display interface atm Syntax
display interface atm [ interface-number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-number: Interface number of ATM E3/T3.
Description
Using the display interface atm command, you can view the configuration and
status of ATM E3/T3 interface. If no interface-number is specified, the system will
display the configuration and status of all ATM interfaces.
Example
View the configuration and status of ATM E3/T3 interface 1/1/0.
<3com> display interface atm 1/1/0
frame-format Syntax
frame-format { g832-adm | g751-adm | g751-plcp }
frame-format { cbit-adm | cbit-plcp | m23-adm | m23-plcp }
undo frame-format
View
ATM E3/T3 interface view
Parameter
g832-adm: Configures frame format of ATM E3 as G.823 ATM direct mapping.
g751-adm: Configures frame format of ATM E3 as G.751 ATM direct mapping.
g751-plcp: Configures frame format of ATM E3 as G.751 Physical Layer

Convergence Protocol (PLCP).
cbit-adm: Configures frame format of ATM T3 as C-bit ATM direct mapping.
cbit-plcp: Configures frame format of ATM T3 as C-bit PLCP.
m23-adm: Configures frame format of ATM T3 as M23 ATM direct mapping.
m23-plcp: Configures frame format of ATM T3 as M23 PLCP.
Description
Using the frame-format command, you can configure frame format of ATM E3/T3
interface. Using the undo frame-format command, you can restore the default
configuration.
By default, frame format g751-plcp is used for ATM E3 and cbit-plcp used for ATM
T3.
Example
Configure ATM E3 interface 1/0/0 to use frame format G.832 ADM.
<3com> system-view
[3com-Atm1/0/0] frame-format g832-adm
loopback Syntax
loopback { cell | local | payload | remote }
undo loopback
View
Parameter
cell: Internal cell loopback
local: Internal loopback.
payload: External payload loopback.
remote: External line loopback.
Description
Using the loopback command, you can enable the loopback function of the
interface. Using the undo loopback command, you can disable the loopback
function.
By default, loopback is disabled.
Example
Enable external payload loopback of ATM E3/T3 interface 2/0/0.
<3com> system-view
[3com-Atm2/0/0] loopback payload
scramble Syntax
scramble
undo scramble
View

ATM 25M Interface Configuration Commands 209
Parameter
None
Description
Using the scramble command, you can enable scrambling function of ATM E3/T3
interface. Using the undo scramble command, you can disable the scrambling
function.
By default, the scrambling function of ATM E3/T3 interface is enabled.
The scramble command is used to enable the scramble and descramble function
on payload, with no influence on the cell header.
Example
Disable the scramble function of ATM E3/T3 interface 2/0/0.
<3com> system-view
[3com-Atm2/0/0] undo scramble
ATM 25M Interface

Configuration
Commands
clock Syntax
undo clock
View
ATM interface view
Parameter
Description
Using the clock command, you can set the clock mode on an ATM interface. Using
interface.
By default, the ATM interface adopts the slave clock.
When an ATM interface is working as DCE, choose the master clock mode. When
it is working as DTE, choose the slave clock mode for it. When ATM interfaces of
two routers are directly connected by fiber, one end should be configured with the
master clock mode and the other with the slave clock mode.
Example
Adopt the master clock on the ATM interface 4/0/0.
<3com> system-view
ATM OC-3c/STM-1
Interface
Configuration
Commands
clock Syntax
undo clock
View
ATM interface view
Parameter
Description
Using the clock command, you can set the clock mode on an ATM interface. Using
interface.
By default, the ATM interface adopts the slave clock.
When an ATM interface is working as DCE, choose the master clock mode. When
it is working as DTE, choose the slave clock mode for it. When ATM interfaces of
two routers are directly connected by fiber, one end should be configured with the
master clock mode and the other with the slave clock mode.
Example
Adopt the master clock on the ATM interface 4/0/0.
<3com> system-view
display interface atm Syntax
display interface atm [ interface-number ]

ATM OC-3c/STM-1 Interface Configuration Commands 211
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-number: Interface number. If no interface has been specified, the

configuration and state information of all the ATM interfaces will be displayed.
Description
Using the display interface atm command, you can view the configuration and
state information of ATM OC-3c/STM-1 interface(s).
Example
View the configuration and state information of the ATM interface 4/0/0.
<3com> display interface atm 4/0/0
frame-format Syntax
frame-format { sdh | sonet }
undo frame-format
View
ATM interface view
Parameter
sdh: Sets the frame format to SDH STM-1.
sonet: Sets the frame format to SONET OC-3.
Description
Using the frame-format command, you can set the frame format of ATM
OC-3c/STM-1 interface. Using the undo frame-format command, you can restore
the default setting.
The frame format on the ATM OC-3c/STM-1 interface defaults to SONET.
Example
Set the frame format on the ATM OC-3c/STM-1 interface to SDH.
[3com-Atm4/0/0] frame-format sdh
loopback Syntax
loopback { cell | local | remote }
undo loopback
View
ATM interface view
Parameter
cell: Enables the ATM interface to perform cell loopback.
local: Enables the ATM interface to perform local loopback.
remote: Enables the ATM interface to perform the remote loopback.
Description
Using the loopback command, you can enable the loopback function on an ATM
OC-3c/STM-1 interface. Using the undo loopback command, you can disable the
loopback function.
By default, loopback function is disabled.
It is necessary for you to enable the interface to perform loopback only for the
purpose of testing some special functions. You should not enable the loopback
function when the interface is providing normal services.
Example
Enable the ATM interface to perform local loopback.
[3com-Atm4/0/0] loopback local
scramble Syntax
scramble
undo scramble
View
ATM interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the scramble command, you can enable an undo scramble to scramble the
payload on ATM OC-3c/STM-1 interface. Using the undo scramble command, you
can disable the scrambling function.
By default, the ATM OC-3c/STM-1 interface is enabled to scramble the payload.
Executing the scramble command will make an interface to scramble and

descramble the payload but will not affect the cell headers.
Example
Disable the ATM interface to scramble the payload.
[3com-Atm4/0/0] undo scramble
G.SHDSL Interface
Configuration
Commands
activate Syntax
activate
undo activate
View
ATM interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the activate command, you can enable a G.SHDSL interface. Using the undo
activate command, you can disable a G.SHDSL interface.
By default, a G.SHDSL interface is active.
A G.SHDSL interface must be activated before it can transmit services. Activation

refers to the training between the G.SHDSL end and the STU-C end. Based on
such preset items as SHDSL standard, channel mode, upstream and downstream
rates and SNR margin in link template. The training process detects line distance
and performance, negotiates between two ends and determines if the interface
can run normally under such condition. If the training succeeds, a communication
link is set up between two ends and the interface is activated, on which services
can be transferred. When the interface is deactivated, no communication link
exists, so you must activate the interface again,if you want to transmit services
over it.
The commands are mainly used in link testing and fault diagnosis.
The difference between the activate/undo activate command and the

shutdown/undo shutdown command is that the former only functions on the
G.SHDSL interface.
A G.SHDSL interface is always on so it will enter the active state as long as the link
is functional. The router supports timed loop detection, so the G.SHDSL interface
is activated when the link performance has deteriorated.
Example
Deactivate the G.SHDSL interface.
[3com-Atm3/0/0] undo activate
shdsl annex Syntax
shdsl annex { a | b }
undo shdsl annex
View
ATM interface view
Parameter
a: Annex a
b: Annex b
Description
Using the shdsl annex command, you can configure annex standard at an SHDSL
interface. You cannot activate a link with different standard types at both ends.
Using the undo shdsl annex command, you can restore the default standard.
By default, annex b is selected.
Example
Restore the default standard type at the SHDSL interface.
[5680-Atm1/0/0]undo shdsl annex
shdsl rate Syntax
shdsl rate { auto | rate }
undo rate
View
ATM interface view
Parameter
auto: Auto-negotiation mode
rate: Specify maximum rate, in the range of 64~2312.

Description
Using the shdsl rate command, you can specify maximum rate at SHDSL interface
or just select auto-negotiation mode. Using the undo rate command, you can
restore the default setting.
By default, auto is selected.
Example
Restore the auto mode at the interface.
[3com-Atm1/0/0] undo shdsl rate
shdsl snr Syntax
shdsl snr threshold
undo snr
View
ATM interface view
Parameter
threshold: In the range of 5~30. By default, it is 25.
Description
Using the shdsl snr command, you can specify SNR (signal-to-noise ratio) value at
an SHDSL interface. Using the undo snr command, you can restore the default
value.
Example
Restore SNR value to the default value.
[3com-Atm1/0/0] undo shdsl snr
shdsl margin Syntax
shdsl margin { disable | value }
undo margin
View
ATM interface view
Parameter
disable: Ignores target margin in link negotiation.
value: Sets target margin value, in the range of 0~10.

Description
Using the shdsl margin command, you can enable SNR target margin. Using the
undo margin command, you can restore the default value.
By default, the SNR target margin is 3.
Example
Set shdsl margin to 8.
[3com-Atm1/0/0] shdsl margin 8
display dsl configuration Syntax
display dsl configuration interface atm interface-number
View
Any view
Parameter
Description
Using the display dsl configuration command, you can view DSL configuration
information.
Example
Display G.SHDSL configuration information.
[3com-Atm3/0/0]display dsl configuration interface atm 3/0

GSHDSL line parameter and mode Configuration
Mode: CPE
Standard: G991.2
Annex: B
Wire Type: 2
Framing: 3
SNR Threshold: 25 dB
Line Rate: Auto Adaptive
Target Margin: 3 dB
Psd Mode: Sym PSD
Power-Backoff: Disable
--Actual Handshake Status --

00: 0002 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
10: 0000 0008 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0008 0000
20: 0000 0000 0002 0002 0004 0010
--Local Handshake Status --
00: 0002 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0034 003f 003f 003f
10: 003f 003f 0003 0034 003f 003f 003f 003f 003f 0003
20: 0000 0000 0003 0003 000f 0010
--Remote Handshake Status --
00: 0002 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0030 003f 003f 003f
10: 003f 000f 0000 0030 003f 003f 003f 003f 000f 0000
20: 0000 0000 0003 0003 0004 0010
display dsl status Syntax
display dsl status interface atm interface-number
View
Any view
Parameter
Description
Using the display dsl status interface atm command, you can view DSL interface
state.
Example
Display G.SHDSL interface state.
[3com-Atm3/0/0]display dsl status interface atm 3/0/0

Operating Mode: CPE
Standard: G991.2
Wire Type: 2
Phy Op State: Active
Xcvr Op State: Data Mode
LineRate Mode: Adaptive
Target Margin: 3 dB
LOC Detect: 0
Losw Defect: 0
Frm Sync: 1
Tx Cells: 0
Rx Cells: 0
Drop Cells: 0
HecErr Cells: 0
CRCS: 135
SEGAS: 335
LOSWS: 4
Int Count
TX EOC: 0
RX EOC: 4
RX LOSD: 0
RX SEGA: 0
RX PS: 0
RX SEGD: 0
RX LOSWS: 1
Actual Rate(kbps): 2064

Actual Annex: B
Actual SNR (dB): 38
Actual LoopAttn(dB): 0.9
Actual RecvGain(dB): 11.4

Actual TxPower(dBm): 14.5
Actual Wire Type: 2
FrmOH Stat: 0x0f
Rmt Encoder A : 0x6e010000
Rmt Encoder B : 0x31030000
Rmt NSF Cusdata : 0x0000
Rmt NSF CusID : 0x0000
Rmt Country Code : 0x00b5
Rmt Provider Code: 0x4753504e
NPSG
Rmt Vendor Data: 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Table 6 Displaying information of display dsl status
Field Description
Operating Mode CPE stands for customer premises equipment and CO for central
office.
Wire Type The options include 2-line type and 4-line type. Currently only
2-line type is available.
Phy Op State Interface state and the options include activating, active,
startup, deactivated and test mode.
Xcvr Op State Transceiver state and the options include idle, data mode,
handshaking and training.
Actual LoopAttn(dB) Actual loop attenuation
Actual RecvGain(dB) Actual receive gain
Actual TxPower(dBm) Actrual transmit gain
FrmOH Stat FirmWare Over Head state
Rmt NSF Cusdata User data
Rmt NSF CusID User ID
display dsl version Syntax
display dsl version interface atm interface-number
View
Any view
Parameter
Description
Using the display dsl version command, you can display DSL version and functions
available.
Example
Display G.SHDSL version.
[3com-Atm3/0/0] display dsl version interface atm 3/0/0

Dsl Line Type: G.SHDSL
ATM SAR Device: 0x823614f1
ATM SAR Revision: 0x02
Chipset Vendor: GSPN
Firmware Rel-Rev: R2.3.1-0

DSP Version: 1
PCB Version: 0.0
CPLD Version: 0.0
Driver Version: 2.0
Hardware Version: 1.0
ITU G991.2 ANNEX A: Supported
ITU G991.2 ANNEX B: Supported
ADSL Interface
Configuration
Commands
activate Syntax
activate
undo activate
View
ADSL interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the activate command, you can activate an ADSL interface. Using the undo
activate command, you can deactivate an ADSL interface.
By default, the ADSL interface is active.
Before an ADSL port can operate services, you must activate it. “ACTIVATE” in this
particular context refers to the training conducted between an ADSL central office
and a remote ATU-R. The activation procedure will be specified in compliance with
the ADSL standard, channel mode, uplink and downlink speeds, and the noise
tolerance specified in the line configuration template. It will test the line distance
and state, make the central office and the remote device make negotiation, and
confirm whether the normal operation is allowed in the these conditions. If the
training succeeds, the central office and the remote device can set up a
communication connection for transporting services between them. This process is
also called port activation. This connection will disappear upon the deactivation of
the ADSL port. To transport new services, you must re-activate the port.
This command is used to manually activate/deactivate an ADSL line for the

purpose of testing and troubleshooting.
The commands activate/undo activate and shutdown/undo shutdown are different

because the former can only take effect on ADSL lines.
You should note that ADSL is always online, which is different from DCC.
Therefore, after the device is booted, the ADSL interface will automatically enable
the activation task and enter the active state. It will stay active as long as the line is
in good condition. The router tests the line performance at a regular interval and
will automatically deactivate the line and perform a new training and re-activation
once it finds out that the line performance has deteriorated.
Example
Deactivate the ADSL interface.
[3com-Atm1/0]undo activate
adsl standard Syntax
adsl standard { auto | gdmt | glite | t1413 }
undo adsl standard
View
ADSL interface view
Parameter
auto: Auto-sensing mode.
gdmt: Adopts the G.DMT(G992.1) standard.
glite: Adopts the G.Lite (G992.2) standard.
t1413: Adopts the T1.413 standard.
Description
Using the adsl standard command, you can set the standard applied to an ADSL
interface. Using the undo adsl standard command, you can restore the default
standard used by the ADSL interface.
By default, the ADSL standard is set to auto.
You should note that this configuration does not take effect unless you activate
the interface again. If you want to make it take effect immediately, you can
execute the shutdown/undo shutdown command or the activate/undo activate
command.
Example
Set the standard for the interface atm1/0/0 as T1.413.
[3com-Atm1/0/0]adsl stand t1413
[3com -Atm1/0/0]shutdown
Interface Atm1/0/0 has already been shutdown
[3com -Atm1/0/0]undo shutdown

[3com -Atm1/0/0]
%Nov 20 21:17:12 2003 5680 PHY/2/PHY: Atm1/0: change status to up
%Nov 20 21:17:13 2003 5680 IFNET/5/UPDOWN:Line protocol on the

interface Atm1/0/0
turns into UP state
[3com -Atm1/0/0]display dsl configuration int atm 1/0/0
Line Params Set by User
Standard: T1.413
Annex: A
Framing: 3
Coding Gain(dB): Auto
Tx Pow Attn(dB): 0
Bit-Swap: disable
LinkCheck: Enable
Actual Config Near End Far End
Standard: T1.413 T1.413
Trellis Coding: Enable Enable
Framing: 3 3
Vendor ID: 0x0039 0x0004
AS0 (DS) LS0(US)
Rate(Bytes): 238 26
Rate(kbps): 7616 832
Latency: Intlv Intlv
FEC(fast): 0 0
S/D/R(Inlv): 1/64/16 8/8/16

DMT Bits Allocation Per Bin (Up/Down Bits:249/2148)
00: 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 8 a a a a 8 a b c c c b b b b b b 9 9 a a 9 8 8 0
20: 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 a a a a a a a 8 9 a
40: 0 a a a a b b b b b a b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
60: b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b a 9 4 a b b b b b b b b b
80: b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
a0: b b b a b a b a b b a b b b b b a a b a a b b a a a a a a a a a
c0: a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
e0: a 9 9 a 9 9 9 9 9 9 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 8 8 8 8 8 7 7 7 7 6 6 6
adsl tx_attenuation Syntax
adsl tx_attenuation attenuation
undo adsl tx_attenuation
View
ADSL interface view
Parameter
attenuation: Attenuation value, in the range of 0~12. By default, it is 0.
Description
Using the adsl tx_attenuation command, you can set attenuation value for ADSL
transmit power. Using the undo adsl tx_attenuation command, you can restore
the default value.
Example
[3com-Atm1/0/0] adsl tx_attenuation 10
display dsl configuration Syntax
display dsl configuration interface atm interface-number
View
Any view
Parameter

Description
Using the display dsl configuration command, you can display the actual ADSL
Example
Display the actual ADSL configuration information.
[3com-Atm1/0]display dsl configuration interface atm 1/0
Line Params Set by User
Standard: T1.413
Annex: A
Framing: 3
Coding Gain(dB): Auto
Tx Pow Attn(dB): 0
Bit-Swap: disable
LinkCheck: Enable
Actual Config Near End Far End
Standard: T1.413 T1.413
Trellis Coding: Enable Enable
Framing: 3 3
Vendor ID: 0x0039 0x0004
AS0 (DS) LS0(US)
Rate(Bytes): 238 26
Latency: Intlv Intlv
FEC(fast): 0 0
S/D/R(Inlv): 1/64/16 8/8/16

DMT Bits Allocation Per Bin (Up/Down Bits:249/2148)
00: 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 8 a a a a 8 a b c c c b b b b b b 9 9 a a 9 8 8 0
20: 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 a a a a a a a 8 9 a
40: 0 a a a a b b b b b a b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
60: b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b a 9 4 a b b b b b b b b b
80: b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
a0: b b b a b a b a b b a b b b b b a a b a a b b a a a a a a a a a
c0: a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
e0: a 9 9 a 9 9 9 9 9 9 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 8 8 8 8 8 7 7 7 7 6 6 6
Table 7 Displaying information of display dsl configuration

Field Description
Line Params Set by User Line parameters at ATU-R end, for example, standard, DMT mode,
framing, trellis coding or not. You can only modify the standard for special
testing or diagnosis, but not the others.
The following information appears after the link is activated.
Actual Config Actual operating parameters after the link is activated
Rate(kbps) Negotiated rate, AS0 (DS) downlink and LS0 (US) uplink, in units of kbps
Latency Delay mode and the options include fast and interleave.
display dsl status Syntax
display dsl status interface atm interface-number
View
Any view
Parameter
Description
Using the display dsl status command, you can display the DSL state information.
Example
Display the ADSL state information of the interface 1/0/0.
[3com-Atm1/0/0]display dsl status interface atm 1/0/0
State of driver/chipsets
Phy Op State: Active

Xcvr Op State: Data Mode
Active Params Near End Far End
SNR Margin(dB): 16.0 3.0
Attenuation(dB): 1.0 2.0
Coding Gain(dB): 5.5
Tx Power(dBm): 8.3 21.7
Tx Bin Number: 25 219
Adsl Count Near End Far End
SEF(sef): 0 0
LOS(los): 0 0
RSI(fec-I): 0 0
RSF(fec-F): 0 0
CRCI(crc-I): 2 0
CRCF(crc-F): 0 0
ATM Count
NCDI(ncd-I): 0 0
NCDF(ncd-F): 0 0
OCDI(ocd-I): 0
OCDF(ocd-F): 0
HECI(hec-I): 0 0
HECF(hec-F): 0 0
Adsl Defects
Overall: 0
SEF(sef): 0 0
LOS(LOS): 0 0
ATM Defects
NCDI(ncd-I): 0 0
NCDF(ncd-F): 0 0
LCDI(lcd-I): 0 0
LCDF(lcd-F): 0 0
Table 8 Displaying information with display dsl status

Field Description
State of driver/chipsetsInterface state and transceiver state
Phy Interface state and options include activating, active, startup,
deactivated and test mode
Xcvr Transceiver state and options include idle, data mode, handshaking and
training.
The following information appears after the link is activated.
Active Params Link parameters, which include SNR margin, attenuation, Tx Bin
Number etc. The Present rate(kbps) is consistent with the result of the
display dsl configuration command.
Adsl Count Error and correction statistics form the chipset. For their types, refer to
ITU-T G. 992 and ANSI T1.413-1998.
Adsl Defects It shows the current link situation. When the link has deteriorated,
non-zero value may appear. While it turns to normal or is activated
again, those existing statistics are cleared. The Overall failures value is a
aggregate value, but others are not.
display dsl version Syntax
display dsl version interface atm interface-number
View
Any view
Parameter
Description
Using the display dsl version command, you can display the DSL version
information and the supported capabilities.
Example
Display the ADSL version information.
[3com-Atm1/0/0]display dsl version interface atm 1/0/0
Adsl board chipset and version info
Dsl Line Type: Adsl Over Pots

Fundamental Logical Interface Configuration Commands 227
Dsl Line Type: Adsl Over Pots
ATM SAR Device: 0x823614f1
ATM SAR Revision: 0x02
Chipset Vendor: GSPN
FW Release: T7941
Revision: 1
DSP Version: 0
AFE Version: 0
PCB Version: 0.0
CPLD Version: 1.0
Driver Version: 2.0
Hardware Version: 1.0
Adsl Capability
ANSI T1.413 Issue 2: Supported
ITU G992.1 ANNEX A: Supported
ITU G992.2 : Supported
Fundamental Logical This chapter only discusses basic configuration of logical interfaces. For
Interface configuration of link-layer and network-layer protocols, refer to corresponding
Configuration sections in this guide.
Commands
Sub-Interface
Configuration
Commands
interface Syntax
interface interface-type interface-number.subinterface-number [ p2mp | p2p ]
undo interface interface-type interface-number.subinterface-number
View
System view
Parameter
interface-type: Type of interface
interface-number: Number of interface, including slot number, card number, and

port number.
subinterface-number: Number of sub-interface, ranging from 0 to 4096.
p2mp: Configures type of sub-interface as point to multipoint
p2p: Configures type of sub-interface as point to point
Description
Using the interface command, you can create sub-interface of point to multipoint
or point to point types. Using the undo interface command, you can delete
specified sub-interface.
By default, the type of sub-interface is point to multipoint.
Presently, point to multipoint or point to point sub-interface can be configured to

ATM interface, interface with frame relay or X.25 as its link layer protocol type. In
contrast, sub-interface of Ethernet is of broadcast type.
Up to 1024 sub-interfaces can be created for one main-interface.
Example
Create a sub-interface on ATM interface 2/0/0.
<3com> system-view
[3com] interface atm 2/0/0.1
[3com-Atm2/0/0.1]
interface ethernet Syntax
interface ethernet interface-number.subinterface-number
undo interface ethernet interface-number.subinterface-number
View
System view
Parameter
interface-number: Number of interface, including slot number, card number, and

port number.
subinterface-number: Number of sub-interface, ranging from 0 to 4096.

Logic-Channel Interface 229
Description
Using the interface ethernet command, you can create Ethernet sub-interface.
Using the undo interface ethernet command, you can delete specified Ethernet
sub-interface.
Ethernet sub-interface is used for VLAN configuration. For a detailed configuration

procedure for VLAN, refer to the section Link Layer Protocol chapter in the 3Com
Router Configuration Guide.
Up to 256 sub-interfaces can be created for one Ethernet interface.
Example
Create a sub-interface on Ethernet interface 1/0/0.
[3com] interface ethernet 1/0/0.1

[3com-Ethernet1/0/0.1]
Logic-Channel
Interface
interface logic-channel Syntax
interface logic-channel interface-number
undo interface logic-channel interface-number
View
System view
Parameter
interface-number: Number of logic-channel, in range of 0~1023.
Description
Using the interface logic-channel command, you can create logic-channel

interface. Using the undo interface ethernet command, you can delete
logic-channel interface.
Once it is created, a logic-channel interface stays in UP state until it is deleted.
Example
Create the logic-channel interface 100.
[3com] interface logic-channel 100

[3com-Logic-Channel100]
Configuration
Command of Virtual
Template and Virtual
Access Interface
broadcast-limit link Syntax
broadcast-limit link number
undo broadcast-limit link
View
Virtual template view
Parameter
number: Maximum link number that the virtual template supports for sending
multicast or broadcast packets, ranging from 0 to 128. The default value is 30.
Description
Using the broadcast-limit link command, you can configure the maximum link
number that virtual template supports for sending multicast or broadcast packets.
Using the undo broadcast-limit link command, you can restore the default
configuration.
When there are many links on a virtual template, sending multicast or broadcast
packets from each link may influence the function of the system. In this case, the
broadcast-limit link command can be used as a limitation, so that multicast or
broadcast packets are discarded if the link number exceeds the limitation.
Example
Configure maximum link number of virtual template 1 supporting sending

multicast or broadcast packet to be 100.
[3com] interface virtual-template 1

[3com-Virtual-Template1] broadcast-limit link 100

virtual-template
display interface virtual-template [ number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
virtual-template: Virtual template.
number: Number of virtual template, ranging from 0 to 1023. The state of all
virtual template will be displayed, if this parameter is not specified.
Configuration Command of Virtual Template and Virtual Access Interface 231
Description
Using the display interface virtual-template command, you can view the status
information of virtual template.
Example
View the state of specified virtual template.
<3com> display interface virtual-template 1
display virtual-access Syntax
display virtual-access [ slot slot-number | vt vt-number | user user-name | peer

peer-address | va-number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
slot-number: Slot number of virtual access interface.
vt-number: Virtual template number of virtual access interface.
user-name: Login username of virtual access interface.
peer-address: Peer end address of virtual access interface.
va-number: Sequence number of virtual access interface.
State information of all virtual access interfaces will be displayed, if no parameter

is specified.
Description
Using the display virtual-access command, you can view the state information of
virtual access interface.
Example
View state information of all virtual access interfaces.
<3com> display virtual-access
interface Syntax
virtual-template
interface virtual-template number
undo interface virtual-template number
View
System view
Parameter
number: Number of virtual template, ranging from 0 to 1023.
Description
Using the interface virtual-template command, you can create virtual template or
enter existing virtual template view. Using the undo interface virtual-template
command, you can delete specified virtual template.
A virtual template should be created before the creation of a virtual access

interface, and should be closed after the virtual access interface has been closed
and will not be reused.
In deleting the virtual template, make sure that all its derived virtual access
interfaces have been removed and this virtual template is not in use any more.
Example
Create virtual template 10.
[3com] interface virtual-template 10

[3com-Virtual-Template10]
MP-group Interface
Configuration
Command

mp-group
display interface mp-group [ number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
number: Number of MP-group interface. If the number of the interface is not

specified, status information of all MP-group interfaces is displayed.
Description
Using the display interface mp-group command, you can view the status of
MP-group interface.
Example
View status information of MP-group interface.
<3com> display interface mp-group

MP-group Interface Configuration Command 233
interface mp-group Syntax
interface mp-group number
undo interface mp-group number
View
System view
Parameter
number: Number of a MP-group interface. The sequence number ranges from 0 to

1023 so, at most, 1024 MP-group interfaces are supported by one interface card.
Description
Using the interface mp-group command, you can create a MP-group interface.
Using the undo interface mp-group command, you can delete specified MP-group
interface.
This command is used in concert with the ppp mp mp-group command. Either
MP-group interface or interface added in MP group can be configured first.
Example
Create MP-group interface 3/0/0.
[3com] interface mp-group 3/0/0

[3com-mp-group 3/0/0]
ppp mp mp-group Syntax
ppp mp mp-group number
undo ppp mp mp-group number
View
Interface view
Parameter
number: Number of MP-group interface
Description
Using the ppp mp mp-group command, you can add the current interface to a
specified MP group. Using the undo ppp mp mp-group command, you can
remove the current interface from a specified MP group.
This command is used with the interface mp-group command. Either MP-group
interface or interface added in MP group can be configured first.
It should be noted that the interface added to an MP group must be consistent

with the slot of the MP-group interface.
In addition, the interface added to an MP group must be a physical interface.

Tunnel interfaces do not support this command.
Example
Add serial port 3/0/0 to MP group 3.
[3com] interface serial 3/0/0

[3com-Serial3/0/0] ppp mp mp-group 3/0/0
Remove serial port 3/0/0 from MP group 3/0/0.
[3com-Serial3/0/0] undo ppp mp mp-group 3/0/0
Virtual Ethernet
Interface
Configuration
Command

virtual-ethernet
display interface virtual-ethernet [ number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
number: Number of virtual Ethernet interfaces, with sequence number ranging

from 0 to 1023. If the number of interfaces is not specified, the status of all virtual
Ethernet interfaces will be displayed.
Description
Using the display interface virtual-ethernet command, you can view status of a
virtual Ethernet interface.
Example
View the status information of virtual Ethernet interface 1/0/0.
<3com> display interface virtual-ethernet 1/0/0
interface Syntax
virtual-ethernet
interface virtual-ethernet number
undo interface virtual-ethernet number
View
System view
Virtual Ethernet Interface Configuration Command 235
Parameter
number: Number of virtual Ethernet interface, with sequence number ranging

from 0 to 1023.
Description
Using the interface virtual-ethernet command, you can create a virtual Ethernet
interface. Using the undo interface virtual-ethernet command, you can delete the
specified virtual Ethernet interface.
Virtual Ethernet interface is mainly applied to PPPoEoA and IPoEoA.
Example
Create virtual Ethernet interface 12 on interface card 0 of slot 6.
[3com] interface virtual-ethernet 6/0/12

[3com-Virtual-Ethernet6/0/12]
mac-address Syntax
mac-address H-H-H
undo mac-address
View
Virtual Ethernet interface view
Parameter
H-H-H: Mac address of virtual Ethernet interface, in the form of hex character
string.
Description
Using the mac-address command, you can configure the Mac address of a virtual
Ethernet interface. Using the undo mac-address command, you can restore the
default configuration.
By default, for a virtual Ethernet interface created on VIU, its MAC address is the
same as the MAC address of Ethernet interface carried by VIU itself.
For a virtual Ethernet interface created on RSU, its MAC address is 0 by default.
Example
Configure the MAC address of virtual Ethernet interface 10/0/0.
[3com] interface virtual-ethernet 10/0/0

[3com-Virtual-Ethernet10/0/0] mac-address 1000-1000-1000
Configuration
Command of
Loopback Interface
and Null Interface

loopback
display interface loopback [ number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
number: Number of Loopback interface, which must be an existing one. If number

of interface is not specified, status of all created loopback interface will be
displayed.
Description
Using the display interface loopback command, you can view status of the
loopback interface.
For the related command, see interface loopback.
Example
View status information of specified Loopback interface.
<3com> display interface loopback 6

LoopBack6 current state : UP
Line protocol current state :UP
Description : 3Com Routers, LoopBack6 Interface
display interface null Syntax
display interface null [ 0 ]
View
Any view
Parameter
0: Number of Null interface, fixed as 0.
Description
Using the display interface null command, you can view status of Null interface.
The parameter does not affect the execution result.

Configuration Command of Loopback Interface and Null Interface 237
For a related command, see interface null.
Example
View status information of Null0 interface.
<3com> display interface null 0

NULL0 current state : UP
Line protocol current state :UP (spoofing)
Physical is NULL DEV
Description : 3Com Routers, NULL0 Interface
5 minutes input rate 0 bytes/sec, 0 packets/sec
5 minutes output rate 0 bytes/sec, 0 packets/sec
0 packets input, 0 bytes, 0 drops
0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 drops
interface loopback Syntax
interface loopback number
undo interface loopback number
View
System view
Parameter
number: Number of Loopback interface, ranging from 0 to 1023.
Description
Using the interface loopback command, you can create a Loopback interface or
enter Loopback interface view. Using the undo interface loopback command, you
can delete a specified Loopback interface.
After a Loopback interface is created, it always keeps up state, and bears loopback
feature, so it is often used to improve the reliability of configuration.
For the related command, see display interface loopback.
Example
Create Loopback interface 5.
[3com] interface loopback 5

[3com-LoopBack5]
interface null Syntax
interface null 0
View
System view
Parameter
none
Description
Using the interface null command, you can enter the Null interface view.
There is only one Null interface, fixed as null0, which is fixed, and cannot be
deactivated or deleted.
For the related command, see display interface null.
Example
Enter view of Null0 interface.
[3com] interface null 0

[3com-NULL0]
LINK LAYER PROTOCOL
4
PPP and MP
Configuration
Commands
display ppp mp Syntax
display ppp mp [ interface interface-type interface-num ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-type interface-num: Used to specify the interface to be viewed.
Description
Using the display ppp mp command, you can view all the interface information
and statistics of MP.
For the related commands, see link-protocol ppp and ppp mp.
Example
Display the MP interface information.
<3Com> display ppp mp

Template is Virtual-Template1
Bundle, quid0, 1 member, slot 3, Master link is Virtual-Template1:0
0 lost fragments, 0 reordered, 0 unassigned, sequence 0/0 rcvd/sent
The bundled son channels are: Serial3/0/0
Table 1 3ComMP display information description
Field Description
Template is Virtual-Template1 Virtual-template interface
Bundle quid0 Bundle name
1 member The number of bound channels
slot 3 Bundled in slot 3
Master link is Virtual-Template1:0 Master link
0 lost fragments Lost fragments
0 reordered Reordered packet number
0 unassigned Unassigned fragments
sequence 0/0 rcvd/sent Received sequence number/sent sequence
number
The bundled son channels are: The following displays all the bundled son
channels at this logical channel
240 CHAPTER 4: LINK LAYER PROTOCOL
Display PPP configuration and operating state of the interface.
The part in boldface is the relative information of PPP, including the current status
of LCP and IPCP. Users can diagnose some faults according to the information.
ip tcp vjcompress Syntax
ip tcp vjcompress
undo ip tcp vjcompress
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ip tcp vjcompress command, you can enable a PPP interface to compress
the VJ TCP header. Using the undo ip tcp vjcompress command, you can disable
the PPP interface to compress the VJ TCP header.
If the VJ TCP header is permitted to compress at the PPP interface, the interface at
the opposite end shall also permit to compress the VJ TCP header. This command
is only used in the centralized environment.
By default, the VJ TCP header is disabled to compress at the PPP interface.
Example
The VJ TCP header is permitted to compress at the PPP interface
[3Com-dialer0] ip tcp vjcompress
link-protocol ppp Syntax
link-protocol ppp
View
VT view or Dialer view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the link-protocol ppp command, you can configure the link-layer protocol
encapsulated on the interface as PPP.
By default, the link-layer protocol for interface encapsulation is PPP.

PPP is a link-layer protocol bearing network-layer packets over the point-to-point

link. It defines a whole set of protocols including LCP (link control protocol), NCP
(network-layer control protocol), PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) and
CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol). It is widely used for it
supports user authentication, easy scalability and
synchronization/asynchronization.
For the related command, see display interface.
Example
Configure PPP encapsulation on interface Serial 0/0/0.
[3Com--Dialer0] link-protocol ppp
mp binding-mode Syntax
ppp mp binding-mode { authentication | both | descriptor }
undo ppp mp binding-mode
View
System view
Parameter
authentication: Performs the MP binding according to the authentication user

name of PPP.
both: Performs the MP binding based on both the authentication user name of
PPP and the terminal identifier.
descriptor: Performs the MP binding according to the terminal identifier.
Description
Using the ppp mp binding-mode command, you can set the MP binding
condition. Using the undo ppp mp binding-mode command, you can restore the
default value of the MP binding condition.
By default, it performs the MP binding based on both the authentication user

name of PPP and the terminal identifier.
User name is the peer one received by the PPP link performing the PAP or CHAP
authentication, while the terminal identifier, as a unique flag of a Router, is the
peer one received in performing the LCP negotiation. The system can perform the
MP binding base on the received user name and terminal identifier, and then the
interfaces with the identical user name or the same terminal identifier is bound
together.
For the related command, see ppp mp user.

Example
Perform the MP binding only based on the user name of the PPP authentication.
[3Com] ppp mp binding-mode authentication
ppp accounting scheme Syntax
ppp accounting scheme { default | scheme -name }
undo ppp accounting
View
Interface view
Parameter
default: Indicates that the default accounting method list is adopted.
scheme -name: Accounting method list, indicating that which method list is
adopted for accounting.
Description
Using the ppp accounting scheme command, you can set accounting for PPP user.
Using the undo ppp accounting command, you can disable the accounting .
By default, no ppp accounting is performed.
After PPP authentication succeeds, AAA will begin to charge the peer user. The
command is used to configure the accounting method list. Please refer to “AAA
Configuration” for the detailed method list configuration.
For the related commands, see ppp authentication-mode and aaa

authentication-scheme ppp.
Example
Configure to adopt the default accounting method list for accounting on Serial
0/0/0.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] ppp accounting scheme default
ppp Syntax
authentication-mode
ppp authentication-mode { chap | pap } [ call-in ] [ scheme { default | scheme
-name } ]
undo ppp authentication-mode
View
Interface view
Parameter
One of chap and pap should be selected.
call-in: Authenticates the peer only when the remote user calls in.
default and scheme-name: indicates the authentication algorithm lists configured

by user while authenticating. For detailed description, refer to “AAA section”.
Description
Using the ppp authentication-mode command, you can set the local PPP
authentication algorithm for the peer router. Using the undo ppp
authentication-mode command, you can cancel the configuration, i.e. no
authentication.
By default, no authentication is performed.
There are two PPP authentication algorithms:
■ PAP is a 2-way handshake authentication, which sends the password in plain

text.
■ CHAP is a 3-way handshake authentication, which sends the password in
encrypted text.
In addition, the defined AAA authentication algorithm list can be used.
Either CHAP or PAP is just an authentication process. The success of the

authentication is decided by AAA, which can authenticate on the basis of the local
authentication database or AAA server.
For the related commands, see local-user, ppp chap user, ppp pap local-user, aaa
authentication-scheme ppp, ppp pap password, and ppp chap password.
Example
Authenticate the peer router by means of PAP on interface Serial0/0/0.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ppp authentication-mode pap
ppp chap password Syntax
ppp chap password { simple | cipher } password
undo ppp chap password
View
Interface view
Parameter
password: Password.
simple or cipher: Passwords in plain text or in encrypted text.

Description
Using the ppp chap password command, you can configure the default CHAP
password while performing CHAP authentication. Using the undo ppp chap
password command, you can cancel the configuration.
While configuring CHAP authentication, you should configure the local password
to be the same as the user password at the other end.
For the related commands, see ppp authentication-mode chap and local-user.
Example
Set the user password as 3Com in plain text when the local router perform the
authentication via CHAP.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ppp chap password simple 3Com
ppp chap user Syntax
ppp chap user username
undo ppp chap user
View
Interface view
Parameter
username: User name of CHAP authentication, which is the one sent to the peer
equipment to be authenticated.
Description
Using the ppp chap user command, you can configure the user name when
performing the CHAP authentication. Using the undo ppp chap user command,
you can delete the existing configuration.
By default, the user name of the CHAP authentication is blank.
While configuring CHAP authentication, you should configure the username of

each end as the local_user of the peer end, and configure the corresponding
password accordingly.
For the related commands, see ppp authentication-mode and local-user.
Example
Configure the local user name as Root when CHAP authentication is performed on
interface Serial0/0/0.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ppp chap user Root

ppp compression iphc Syntax
ppp compression iphc [ nonstandard | rtp-connections rtp-connections |

tcp-connections tcp-connections ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
nonstandard: uses the nonstandard mode in compressing the IP/UDP/RTP header
rtp-connections rtp-connections: sets the maximum rtp-connections of the iphc

function, its value ranges from 3 to 1000.
tcp-connections tcp-connections: sets the maximum number of tcp-connections of

the iphc function, its value ranges from 3 to 256.
Description
Using the ppp compression iphc command, you can enable the iphc.
For the related command, see link-protocol ppp.
Example
None
ppp compression stac-lzs Syntax
ppp compression stac-lzs
undo ppp compression stac-lzs
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ppp compression stac-lzs command, you can set the PPP protocol to use
the Stac compression algorithm. Using the undo ppp compression stac-lzs
command, you can disable the compression at the relevant interface.
By default, compression is disabled.
When stac-lzs compression is configured on the interface, the data frame size can
be reduced through data compression without losing the data. However, this
configuration will add load to the router. It is recommended that this function be
disabled when the router has already been overloaded. In addition, only when
stac-lzs is configured at both ends of a point-to-point link, will this link support the
stac-lzs compression.
Example
Configure stac-lzs compression on the local router.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] ppp compression stac-lzs
ppp ipcp dns Syntax
ppp ipcp dns { primary-dns-address [ secondary-dns-address ] | admit-any }
undo ppp ipcp dns { primary-dns-address [ secondary-dns-address ] | admit-any }
View
Interface view
Parameter
primary-dns-address: Address of the primary DNS server.
secondary-dns-address: Address of the secondary DNS server.
admit-any: Accepts any DNS address requested by the peer.
Description
Using the ppp dns command, you can enable the Router to provide the DNS
address for the peer. Using the undo ppp dns command, you can disable this
process.
By default, the Router does not provide the DNS address for the peer.
When other devices are connected with the Router (e.g. PC is connected to the
Router by dialing up) via the PPP protocol, the Router can assign the DNS address
to the peer equipment after the negotiation. Thus, the peer equipment can
directly access the network via the domain name.
If you connect the Router with your PC, you can use the command winipcfg or
ipconfig /all on your PC to view the DNS address provided by the Router.
For the related commands, see ppp authentication–mode pap and local-user.
Example
Configure the primary DNS address of the local Router as 100.1.1.1, and the
secondary DNS address as 100.1.1.2.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] ppp ipcp dns 100.1.1.1 100.1.1.2

ppp mp Syntax
ppp mp
undo ppp mp
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ppp mp command, you can enable the interface encapsulated with PPP
to operate in the MP mode. Using the undo ppp mp command, you can enable
the interface to operate in the Single PPP mode.
By default, the interface encapsulated with PPP operates in the Single PPP mode.
To increase the bandwidth, multiple PPP links can be bound to form a logical MP
interface. For this purpose, it is necessary to specify a virtual-template in system
view. MP can be configured and used only at the physical interfaces which can
encapsulate PPP. To enable MP, you must configure the ppp mp command and the
PAP or CHAP authentication at the physical interface.
For the related commands, see link-protocol ppp, ppp mp user, and interface
virtual-template.
Example
Configure the PPP encapsulated interface Serial0/0/0 to work in MP mode.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ppp mp
ppp mp lfi Syntax
ppp mp lfi [ delay-per-frag max-delay ]
undo ppp mp lfi [ delay-per-frag ]
View
Virtual template interface view
Parameter
max-delay: Maximum delay in millisecond, its value ranges from 1 to 1000.
Description
Using the ppp mp lfi command, you can configure the link fragmentation and
interleaving features. Using the undo ppp mp lfi command, you can restore the
By default, the value of number is 10.
Example
Set a maximum delay of 100 milliseconds for per fragmentation.
[3Com-Virtual-Template0] ppp mp lfi delay-per-frag 100
ppp mp max-bind Syntax
ppp mp max-bind max-bind-num
undo ppp mp max-bind
View
Parameter
max-bind-num: Indicates maximum number of links which can be bound, in the

range from 1 to 128.
Description
Using the ppp mp max-bind command, you can configure maximum number of
bound links of MP. Using the undo ppp mp max-bind command, you can restore
the default configuration.
By default, its value is 16.
Normally, it is not necessary to configure the parameter, which should be

performed under the guidance of technical engineers when necessary. Such a
configuration may have impact on the performance of PPP. If it is necessary to bind
more than 16 PPP channels, the parameter max-bind-num can be changed.
If a VIU board reports failure in MP removing links, it is possible that the maximum binding
number is smaller than the actually configured one. Make sure that the maximum binding number
should be larger than the actual one.
For the related command, see ppp mp.
Example
Set the maximum number of bound links to 12.
[3Com-Virtual-Template10] ppp mp max-bind 12
ppp mp min-fragment Syntax
ppp mp min-fragment size
undo ppp mp min-fragment

View
Parameter
size: Minimum packet size for MP outgoing packet fragmentating. When the MP
outgoing packet is smaller than this value, fragmentating is avoided. When the MP
packet is larger than this value, fragment is involved. It is in byte in the range from
128 to 1500.
Description
Using the ppp mp min-fragment command, you can set the minimum packet size
when MP outgoing packets begin to be fragmented in multiple-link binding. Using
the undo ppp mp min-fragment command, you can restore the default setting.
By default, it is 128.
If the small packet fragmentating is not expected, this command can be used to
set larger packet size value of the MP packet fragment.
For the related command, see ppp mp.
Example
Set the minimum packet of the MP packet fragmentating to 500 bytes.
[3Com-Virtual-Template10] ppp mp min-fragment 500
ppp mp user Syntax
ppp mp user username bind virtual-template number
undo ppp mp user username
View
System view
Parameter
username: User name
number: Virtual-template number.
Description
Using the ppp mp user command, you can configure MP binds based on the
username. Using the undo ppp mp user command, you can cancel MP binds.
During the establishment of a PPP connection, after PPP authentication succeeds,

if a virtual-template is specified, MP will be bound on the basis of parameters of
the virtual-template and a new virtual interface will be formed to transfer data.
Operating parameters that could be configured on the virtual-template include:

■ Local IP address and the IP address (or IP address pool) assigned to the peer PPP
PPP working parameter
For the related commands, see ppp mp and ppp mp max-bind.
Example
Specify the corresponding virtual-template as 1 for the username
3Com, and configure the IP address of the virtual-template as
202.38.60.1.
[3Com] ppp mp user 3Com bind virtual-template 1
[3Com] interface virtual-template 1
[3Com-virtual-template1] ip address 202.38.60.1 255.255.255.0
ppp mp virtual-template Syntax
ppp mp virtual-template [ number ]
undo ppp mp
View
Interface view
Parameter
number: Configures the virtual template number to be bound by the interface,

which ranges from 0 to 1023.
Description
Using the ppp mp virtual-template command, you can configure the virtual
template number to be bound by the interface. Using the undo ppp mp
command, you can disable the MP binding of the interface.
By default, the MP binding of the interface is disabled, and the interface works in
ordinary PPP mode.
This command specifies the virtual template number to be bound on the interface.
The interface using this command to perform the MP binding needs not
configuring PAP or CHAP authentication. Two or more interfaces with the same
virtual template number is bound directly together. Moreover, this command is
mutually exclusive with the ppp mp command. That is, only one of the two
commands can be configured on a same interface.
For the related commands, see link-protocol ppp and interface virtual-template.
Example
Configure the PPP encapsulated interface Serial0/0/0 to work in MP view.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] ppp mp virtual-template 1

ppp pap local-user Syntax
ppp pap local-user username password { simple | cipher } password
undo ppp pap local-user
View
Interface view
Parameter
username: Username sent.
password: Password sent.
simple: Password in plain text.
cipher: Password in encrypted text.
Description
Using the ppp pap local-user command, you can configure the username and
password sent by the local router when it is authenticated by the peer router via
the PAP method. Using the undo ppp pap local-user command, you can disable
the configuration.
By default, when the local router is authenticated by the peer router via the PAP
method, both the username and the password sent by the local router are empty.
When the local router is authenticated via the PAP method by the peer router, the
username and password sent by the local router must be the same as the user and
password of the peer router.
For the related commands, see ppp authentication pap-mode and local-user.
Example
Set the username of the local router authenticated by the peer end via the PAP
method as 3Com and the password as 3Com.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ppp pap local-user 3Com password simple 3Com
ppp timer hold Syntax
ppp timer hold seconds
undo ppp timer hold
View

Parameter
seconds: Time interval for the interface to send keepalive packet in second. The
value ranges from 0 to 32767 and defaults to 10.
Description
Using the ppp timer hold command, you can set the timer to send keepalive
packet, while using the undo ppp timer hold command, you can restore the
default value.
For the very slow data links, the seconds parameter must not be set too small.
Because the long datagram can only be transferred totally after a long time, the
transfer of keepalive datagram is delayed. The data link would be regarded to be
broken if the interface has not received the keepalive packet from the other end
for many keepalive periods. So if the keepalive time is set to a very long time, the
datalink would be considered to be broken by the other end, and then be closed.
The keepalive time must be set same at the two end of a ppp link.
Example
Set the PPP timer hold to 20 seconds.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ppp timer hold 20
ppp timer negotiate Syntax
ppp timer negotiate seconds
undo ppp timer negotiate
View
Interface view
Parameter
seconds: Time of negotiation timeout in seconds. During the PPP negotiation, if

the local end does not receive the response packet of the peer end, PPP will resend
the last packet. The time ranges from 1 to 10 seconds.
Description
Using the ppp timer negotiate command, you can set the PPP negotiation timeout,
while using the undo ppp timer negotiate command, you can restore the default
value.
By default, the PPP timeout is 3 seconds.

Example
Set the PPP negotiation timeout to 5 seconds.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ppp timer negotiate 5
PPPoE Server
Configuration
Commands
display pppoe-server Syntax

session
display pppoe-server session { all | packet | statistics interface interface-type
interface-number }
View
Any view
Parameter
all: Displays all information of each PPPoE session.
packet: Displays packet statistics of each PPPoE session.
statistics: Displays the statistics information of PPPoE sessions over an interface.
interface-type interface-number: Specifies an interface.
Description
Using the display pppoe-server session command, you can view the status and
statistics of PPPoE session.
For the related commands, see link-protocol ppp and pppoe-server bind.
Example
View all the session information of PPPoE.
<3Com> display pppoe-server session all

SID Intf State OIntf RemMAC LocMAC
2 Virtual-Template1:0 UP Ethernet0/2/0 0050.ba22.7369
00e0.fc08.f4de
Table 2 Output information description
Field Description
SID Session Identifier
Intf The corresponding Virtual-Template interface
State State of sessions
OIntf corresponding Ethernet interface
RemMAC Remote MAC, MAC address of the other end.
LocMAC Local MAC
View the statistics information of PPPoE session.

<3Com> display pppoe-server session packet

SID RemMAC LocMAC InP InO InD OutP OutO
OutD
1 0050ba1a02ce 0001af02a40f 42 2980 0 16 343 0
Table 3 Description of the output
Field Description
InP In Packets, Packages received
InO In Octets, Bytes received
InD In Discards, Received and then discarded
packages
OutP Out Packets, Packages sent
OutO Out Octets, Bytes sent
OutD Out Discard, Discarded packages that might be
sent.
pppoe-server bind Syntax

virtual-template
pppoe-server bind virtual-template number
undo pppoe-server bind
View
Interface view
Parameter
number: Number of the virtual-template for access to PPPoE, and its value ranges
from 0 to 1023.
Description
Using the pppoe-server bind virtual-template command, you can enable PPPoE on
the virtual-template specified by the Ethernet interface. Using the undo
pppoe-server bind command, you can disable PPPoE protocol on the relevant
interface.
By default, PPPoE protocol is disabled.
Example
Enable PPPoE on virtual-template 1 of Ethernet interface Ethernet1/0/0.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] pppoe-server bind virtual-template 1
pppoe-server Syntax
max-sessions local-mac
pppoe-server max-sessions local-mac number
undo pppoe-server max-sessions local-mac

View
System view
Parameter
number: Maximum number of sessions that can be established at a local MAC

address, which ranges from 1 to 4069.
Description
Using the pppoe-server max-sessions local-mac command, you can set the
maximum number of PPPoE sessions that can be established at a local MAC
address. Using the undo pppoe-server max-sessions local-mac command, you can
restore the default configuration.
For the related commands, see pppoe-server max-sessions remote-mac and

pppoe-server max-sessions total.
Example
Set the maximum number of PPPoE sessions that can be established at a local
MAC address to 50.
[3Com] pppoe-server max-sessions local-mac 50
pppoe-server Syntax
max-sessions
remote-mac pppoe-server max-sessions remote-mac number
undo pppoe-server max-sessions remote-mac
View
System view
Parameter
number: Maximum number of PPPoE sessions that can be established at a peer

MAC address, which ranges from 1 to 4096.
Description
Using the pppoe-server max-sessions remote-mac command, you can set the
maximum number of PPPoE sessions that can be established at a peer MAC
address. Using the undo pppoe-server max-sessions remote-mac command, you
can restore the default configuration.
For the related commands, see pppoe-server max-sessions local-mac and

pppoe-server max-sessions total.
Example
Display how to set the maximum number of PPPoE sessions that can be
established at a remote MAC address to 50.
[3Com] pppoe-server max-sessions remote-mac 50
pppoe-server Syntax
max-sessions total
pppoe-server max-sessions total number
undo pppoe-server max-sessions total
View
System view
Parameter
number: maximum number of PPPoE sessions that the system can establish, which
ranges from 1 to 65535.
Description
Using the pppoe-server max-sessions total command, you can set the maximum
number of PPPoE sessions that the system can establish. Using the undo
pppoe-server max-sessions total command, you can restore the default
configuration.
For the related commands, see pppoe-server max-sessions remote-mac and

pppoe-server max-sessions local-mac.
Example
Set the maximum number of PPPoE sessions established by the system to 3000.
[3Com] pppoe-server max-sessions total 3000
PPPoE Client
Configuration
Commands
debugging pppoe-client Syntax
debugging pppoe-client option [ interface type number ]
View
User view and system view

Parameter
option: PPPoE Client debugging switch type, see the following table for more
details.
interface type number: Interface type and number, used to enable the debugging
switch of the specified interface. If no interface is specified, the system will enable
the debugging switch of all interfaces.
Table 4 PPPoE Client debugging switch type and explanation
Debugging switch type Explanation

all Enable all PPPoE Client debugging switches
data Enable the PPPoE Session phase data packet debugging switch
error Enable PPPoE Client error information debugging switch
event Enable PPPoE Client event debugging switch
packet Enable PPPoE Discovery phase negotiation packet debugging switch
verbose Display the verbose contents of PPPoE data
Description
The command debugging pppoe-client is used to enable PPPoE Client debugging

switch.
Example
None
display pppoe-server Syntax

session
display pppoe-client session { summary | packet } [ dial-bundle-number number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
summary: Displays the summary of PPPoE session.
packet: Displays the statistics of PPPoE session data packet.
dial-bundle-number number: Displays the statistics of the specified PPPoE session.

If PPPoE session is not specified, the system will display the statistics of all PPPoE
sessions.
Description
The command display pppoe-client session is used to display the status and
statistics of PPPoE session.
Example
Display the summary of PPPoE session.
[3Com]display pppoe-client session summary

PPPoE Client Session:
ID Bundle Dialer Intf Client-MAC Server-MAC State
1 1 1 Eth0 00e0fc0254f3 00049a23b050 PPPUP
2 2 2 Eth0 00e0fc0254f3 00049a23b050 PPPUP
For more details of the display information, see the following table.
Table 5 Explanation of display pppoe-client session summary
Field Explanation
ID Session ID, PPPoE session ID
Server-MAC Server MAC, server MAC address
Client-MAC Client MAC, client MAC address
Dialer Corresponding Dialer interface of PPPoE session
Bundle Dialer Bundle containing PPPoE session
Intf Ethernet interface containing PPPoE session
State State of PPPoE session
Display the statistics of PPPoE session data packet
<3Com> display pppoe-server session packet

PPPoE Client Session:
SID InP InO InD OutP OutO OutD
=============================================================
1 164 6126 0 83 1069 0
2 304 9886 0 156 2142 0
For more details of the display information, see the following table.
Table 6 Explanation of the information displayed by pppoe-client session packet
Field Explanation
SID Session ID, PPPoE session ID
InP In Packets: number of received packets
InO In Octets: number of received octets
InD In Discards: number of received illegal and discarded packets
OutP Out Packets: number of sent packets
OutO Out Octets: number of sent octets
OutD Out Discard: number of sent and discarded illegal packets
pppoe-client Syntax
pppoe-client dial-bundle-number number [ no-hostuniq ] [ idle-timeout seconds [

queue-length packets ] ]
undo pppoe-client dial-bundle-number number
View
Ethernet interface view or virtual Ethernet interface view
Parameter
dial-bundle-number number: Dialer Bundle number corresponding to PPPoE

session, and its value ranges from 1 to 255.The parameter number can be used to
identify a PPPoE session, or as a PPPoE session.
no-hostuniq: The call originated from PPPoE Client does not carry the Host-Uniq
field. By default, no no-hostuniq parameter is configured, i.e. PPPoE session works
in permanent online mode by default.
idle-timeout seconds: Idle time of PPPoE session in seconds, and its value ranges
from 1 to 65535. If the parameter is not configured, PPPoE session will work in
permanent online mode. Otherwise, it will works in packet trigger mode.
queue-length packets: packet number cached in the system before PPPoE session
is established, its value ranges from 1 to 100.Only after idle-timeout is configured
will the parameter be enabled. By default, packets is 10.
Description
Using the pppoe-client command, you can establish a PPPoE session and specify
the Dialer Bundle corresponding to the session. Using the undo pppoe-client
command, you can delete a PPPoE session.
By default, no PPPoE session is configured.
Multiple PPPoE sessions can be configured at one Ethernet interface, i.e. one
Ethernet interface might simultaneously belong to multiple Dialer Bundles.
However, one Dialer Bundle only has one Ethernet interface. PPPoE session and
Dialer Bundle are one-to-one. If the Dialer Bundle at a certain Dialer has had one
Ethernet interface used by PPPoE, any other interfaces cannot be added to this
Dialer Bundle. Likewise, if Dialer Bundle has had interfaces other than the PPPoE
Ethernet interface, this Dialer Bundle can also not be added to the Ethernet
interface used by PPPoE Client.
When PPPoE session works in permanent online mode, and the physical lines go
UP, the Router will immediately initiate PPPoE call to establish PPPoE session. This
PPPoE connection will exist constantly unless users use the command undo
pppoe-client to delete PPPoE session. When PPPoE session works in packet trigger
mode, the Router will not initiate PPPoE call to establish PPPoE session unless it has
data to transmit. If there is no data transmission on the PPPoE link within seconds,
the Router will automatically terminate PPPoE session. Only after it has new data
to transmit, PPPoE session will be re-established.
For the related command, see reset pppoe-client.
Example
Create a PPPoE session on the interface Ethernet 0/0/0.
[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0]pppoe-client dial-bundle-number 1
reset pppoe-client Syntax
reset pppoe-client { all | dial-bundle-number number }
View
User view
Parameter
all: Clears all PPPoE sessions.
dial-bundle-number number: Dialer Bundle number, its value ranges from 1 to

255. Used to clear the PPPoE session corresponding to Dialer Bundle.
Description
Using the reset pppoe-client command, you can terminate PPPoE session and
re-initiate the connection later.
If PPPoE session in permanent online mode is terminated using the command reset
pppoe-client, the Router will automatically re-establish PPPoE session in sixteen
seconds. If PPPoE session is terminated in packet trigger mode using the command
reset pppoe-client, the Router will not re-establish PPPoE session unless it has data
to transmit.
For the related command, see pppoe-client.
Example
Clear all PPPoE sessions, and re-initiate PPPoE session later.
<3Com>reset pppoe-client all
VLAN Configuration
Commands
display vlan interface Syntax
display vlan interface interface-type interface-num
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-type interface-num: Specifies the interface. At present, the interface

types supported include Ethernet interface and Gigabit Ethernet interface, and it
only supports sub-interface.
Description
Using the display vlan interface command, you can view VLAN configuration
information on a certain interface (only supporting sub-interface).
Example
Display the VLAN configuration information at the Ethernet interface 2/0/0.1.
<3Com> display vlan interface ethernet 2/0/0.1

encapsulation isl vid 60
display vlan Syntax

max-packet-process
display vlan max-packet-process vid
View
Any view
Parameter
vid: VLAN ID, used to identify a VLAN.
Description
Using the display vlan max-packet-process command, you can view the maximum
number of processed packets configured on a certain VLAN per second.
For the related command, see max-packet-process.
Example
Display the maximum number of processed packets configured on the VLAN 10.
<3Com> display vlan max-packet-process 10

Max Packet Process Count for Vid 10 is 300000
display vlan statistics Syntax

interface
display vlan statistics interface interface-type interface-num protocol { arp | ip }
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-type interface-num: Used to specify the interface. At present, the

interface types supported include Ethernet interface and Gigabit Ethernet
interface, and it only supports sub-interface.
arp: packet type is ARP.
ip: packet type is IP.
Description
Using the display vlan statistics interface command, you can view the packet
statistics on a certain VLAN.
For the related command, see reset vlan statistics interface.
Example
Display the VLAN statistics on Ethernet subinterface 2/0/0.1.

<3Com> display vlan statistics interface ethernet 0/2/0.1

Packets Discarded : 0
Packets forwarded to IP/ARP module : 0
Packets forwarded by VLAN module: 0
display vlan statistics vid Syntax
display vlan statistics vid vid
View
Any view
Parameter
Description
Using the display vlan statistics vid command, you can view the packet statistics on
a certain VLAN, e.g. the received packet number and the sent packet number.
For the related command, see reset vlan statistics interface.
Example
Display the packet statistics on VLAN 10.
<3Com> display vlan statistics vid 10

Packets received: 53
Packets transmitted: 14
max-packet-process Syntax
max-packet-process count vid
undo max-packet-process vid
View
System view
Parameter
count: Maximum number of processed packets.
Description
Using the max-packet-process command, you can set the maximum number of
processed packets per second on a certain VLAN. Using the undo
max-packet-process command, you can restore it to the default setting.
By default, the system has no limitation of the maximum number of processed

packets.
After setting the maximum number of processed packets per second on a certain
VLAN, and the received packet number belonging to this VLAN reaches the
limitation, the subsequently received packets belonging to the VLAN will be
discarded. Through this command, you can perform flow control.
For the related command, see display vlan max-packet-process.
Example
Set the maximum number of processed packets per second on the VLAN 10 as
200000.
[3Com] max-packet-process 200000 10
reset vlan statistics Syntax

interface
reset vlan statistics interface interface-type interface-number
View
User view
Parameter
interface-type interface-num: Used to specify the interface. At present, the

interface types supported include Ethernet interface and Gigabit Ethernet
interface, and it only supports sub-interface.
Description
Using the reset vlan statistics interface command, you can clear VLAN statistics on
a certain interface.
For the related command, see show vlan statistics interface.
Example
Clear the VLAN statistics on Ethernet subinterface 2/0/0.1.
<3Com> reset vlan statistics interface ethernet 2/0/0.1
reset vlan statistics vid Syntax
reset vlan statistics vid vid
View
User view
Parameter
Description
Using the reset vlan statistics vid command, you can clear the VLAN statistics.
For the related command, see display vlan statistics vid.
Example
Clear the statistics with VLAN ID 10.
<3Com> reset vlan statistics vid 10
vlan-type dot1q Syntax
vlan-type dot1q vid vid
View
Interface view
Parameter
vid: VLAN ID, used to identify a VLAN, its value ranges from 1 to 4094.
Description
Using the vlan-type dot1q command, you can set the encapsulation types on the
sub-interface.
By default, there is no encapsulation on the subinterface, nor VLAN ID related to

the subinterface.
For the related command, see display vlan interface.
Example
Set the Ethernet sub-interface 2/0/0.1 to be related to VLAN ID 60, and its
encapsulation format is dot1q.
[3Com-Ethernet2/0/0.1] vlan-type dot1q vid 60
ISDN Configuration
Commands
debugging isdn Syntax
debugging isdn { cc | q921 | q931 | spid } [ interface type number ]
undo debugging isdn { cc | q921 | q931| spid } [ interface type number ]
View
User view
Parameter
cc: Enables ISDN CC module debugging.
q921: Enables Q.921 debugging.
q931: Enables ISDN Q.931 module debugging.

spid: Enables SPID debugging for the BRI interfaces running the NI
protocol.
interface type number: Interface type and number. You can enable
ISDN signaling debugging on an interface by specifying its type and
number. If no interface has been specified, the system will enable
ISDN signaling debugging on all the ISDN interfaces.
Description
Using the debugging isdn command, you can enable ISDN debugging. Using the
undo debugging isdn command, you can disable ISDN debugging.
You must enable terminal debugging first before ISDN debugging can take effect.
Example
Enable CC debugging.
<3Com> debugging isdn cc
Disable CC debugging.
<3Com> undo debugging isdn cc
display isdn Syntax

active-channel
display isdn active-channel [ interface type number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface type number: Interface type and number.
Description
Using the display isdn active-channel command, you can view the active call
information on ISDN interfaces. If no interface has been specified, the system will
display the active call information on all the ISDN interfaces.
The displayed information can help you with ISDN call troubleshooting.
Example
Display the active call information on the interface bri 0/0/0.
[3Com] display isdn active-channel interface bri 0/0/0

Bri0/0/0 :
-------------------------------------------------------------
Channel Call Call Calling Calling Called Called
Info Property Type Number Subaddress Number Subaddress
B1 Digital Out 8810124
B2 Analog In 8810118 380 8810150 2201

-------------------------------------------------------------
display isdn call-info Syntax
display isdn call-info [ interface type number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface type number: Interface type and number.
Description
Using the display isdn call-info command, you can view the current states of ISDN
interfaces. If no interface has been specified, the system will display the current
states of all the ISDN interfaces.
Executing this command will output the state of each layer of the ISDN protocol
on one or all interfaces, including the information of Q.921, Q.931 and CC
modules. You may make troubleshooting based on the output information.
For the related command, see display interfaces.
Example
Display the current states of all ISDN interfaces.
[3Com]display isdn call-info

Bri0/0/0:
Link Layer: TEI = NONE, State = TEI_UNASSIGNED
Network Layer: 0 connection(s)
Serial0/0/0:15:
Link Layer: TEI = 0, State = MULTIPLE_FRAME_ESTABLISHED
Network Layer: 1 connection(s)
Connection 1:
CCIndex: 0x0000, State: Active, CES: 1, Channel: 0x00000002
Calling_Num[:Sub]: 003
Called_Num[:Sub]: 002
Table 7 Description of the information displayed by executing display isdn call-info
Item Description
Bri0/0/0 The interface Bri0/0/0 runs ISDN.
Link Layer: TEI = 0, State = Displays the parameters related to the link layer
MULTIPLE_FRAME_ESTABLISHED protocol Q.921 of ISDN on the interface.
Network Layer: 1 connection(s) There is only one network layer connection on
the interface currently.
CCIndex Call index
State Call state
Channel Channel map
Calling_Num[:Sub] Calling number: calling sub-address
Called_Num[:Sub] Called number: called sub-address
Disabling an interface will clear all the statistic data related to the interface and
new counting will be started.
display isdn call-record Syntax
display isdn call-record [ interface type number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface type number: Displays only the call history of the specified interface.
Description
Using the display isdn call-record command, you can view the information of ISDN
call history.
Executing this command will display information of the calls activated in the last
15 minutes, but the number of retained entries is limited to 100.
Example
Display the information of ISDN call history.
[3Com] display isdn call-record

Call Calling Called Start Stop Seconds
Type Number Number Time Time Used
--------------------------------------------------------------------
In 10660016 10660016 03-07-05 11:23:09 - 0
In 10660022 10660022 03-07-05 11:23:09 - 0
Out - 660016 03-07-05 11:23:01 03-07-05 11:23:04 3
Out - 660022 03-07-05 11:23:01 03-07-05 11:23:04 3
In 10660016 10660016 03-07-05 11:23:01 03-07-05 11:23:04 3
In 10660022 10660022 03-07-05 11:23:01 03-07-05 11:23:04 3
display isdn parameters Syntax
display isdn parameters { protocol | interface type number }
View
Any view
Parameter
protocol: ISDN protocol type, which can be DSS1, NTT, NI, ETSI, ANSI or AT&T.
interface type number: ISDN interface type and number.

Description
Using the display isdn parameters command, you can view the system parameters
at layers 2 and 3 of the ISDN protocol, such as the durations of system timers and
frame size.
If only ISDN protocol is specified, the system will display the default system
parameters of ISDN.
For the related command, see display interfaces.
Example
Display the system parameters of the ISDN protocol DSS1.
[3Com] display isdn parameters dss1

DSS1 ISDN layer 2 system parameters:
T200(sec) T202(sec) T203(sec) N200 K(Bri) K(Pri)
1 2 10 3 1
7
DSS1 ISDN layer 3 system timers:

Timer-Number Value(sec)
T301 240
T302 15
T303 4
T304 30
T305 30
T308 4
T309 90
T310 40
T313 4
T314 4
T316 120
T317 10
T318 4
T319 4
T321 30
T322 4
Table 8 Description of the displayed system parameters of ISDN
Item Description
T200(sec) Retransmit-timer (in seconds) of the L2 protocol of ISDN
T202(sec) Retransmit-timer (in seconds) for the TEI request messages of the ISDN
L2 protocol
T203(sec) The maximum link idle time (in seconds) of the ISDN L2 protocol
N200 The maximum retransmission times
K(Bri) The maximum number of unacknowledged frames (slide window size)
on the ISDN BRI port.
K(Pri) The maximum number of unacknowledged frames (slide window size)
on the ISDN PRI port.
Timer-Number ISDN L3 timer
Value(sec) Duration (in seconds) of each ISDN L3 timer
display isdn spid Syntax
display isdn spid [ interface type number ]

View
Any view
Parameter
interface type number: ISDN interface type and number.
Description
Using the display isdn spid command, you can view the related information of
SPID on the BRI interface running the NI protocol.
You may execute this command to view the SPID type, SPID value and some other
information when ISDN is running. Executing this command without specifying an
interface, you may view the related information of SPI on all the SPID-supported
BRI interfaces. Alternatively, you may view the information only on one interface
by specifying its type and number.
Example
Display the related information of SPID on the NI-supported interface bri 0/0/0.
[3Com] display isdn spid interface bri 0/0/0

Interface bri 0/0/0:
SPID Type : AUTO
SPID B1 :
SPID Num: 124345
Neg State : SPID_ASSIGNED

Init State: INIT_NULL
SPID B2 :
SPID Num: 45645754
Neg State : SPID_ASSIGNED
Init State: INIT_NULL
SPID timer : 30 seconds
SPID resend: 2
Table 9 Description of the SPID parameters
Item Description
SPID Type SPID Type, which can be NIT, STATIC (having only the L3 initialization
process), or AUTO (including both the negotiation and the L3 initialization)
SPID B1 SPID value of the BRI interface B1 channel. It can be a static configuration
or the result of a dynamic negotiation, all depending on the specified SPID
Type.
SPID Num SPID value of the BRI interface.It can be a static configuration or the result
of a dynamic negotiation, all depending on the specified SPID Type.
Neg State Negotiation state of the SPID, which can be SPID_UNASSIGNED,
ASSIGN_AWAITING_SPID, SPID_ASSIGNED,
ASSIGN_AWAITING_CALL_CLEAR.
Init State Initialization state of the SPID, which can be INIT_NULL, INIT_IND,
INIT_PROCEEDING, INIT_END, INIT_AWAITING_CALL_CLEAR.
SPID B2 SPID value of the BRI interface B2 channel. It can be a static configuration
or the result of a dynamic negotiation, all depending on the specified SPID
Type.
SPID timer Duration of the timer TSPID
SPID resend SPID message retransmission times
isdn bch-local-manage Syntax
isdn bch-local-manage
undo isdn bch-local-manage
View
ISDN interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the isdn bch-local-manage command, you can enable local ISDN B channel
management. Using the undo isdn bch-local-manage command, you can disable
the setting.
It is very important to put appropriate control on the B channels used for calls in
process, especially in the PRI mode. Proper channel management can improve call
efficiency and reduce call loss. Normally, the centralized B channel management
provided by exchanges can work well. For this reason, you are recommended to
adopt the management function provided by exchanges in most cases, despite the
ISDN module can provide the channel management function as well.
Example
Enable local ISDN B channel management.
[3Com-Bri2/0/0] isdn bch-local-manage
isdn bch-select-way Syntax
isdn bch-select-way { ascending | descending}
View
ISDN interface view
Parameter
ascending: Selects B channels in ascending order.
descending: Selects B channels in descending order.
Description
Using the isdn bch-select-way command, you can set a B channel selection
method.
By default, B channels are selected in ascending order.

Example
Configure B channel selection method on the interface Bri2/0/0 to descending

order.
[3Com-Bri2/0/0] isdn bch-select-way descending
isdn caller-number Syntax
isdn caller-number caller-number
undo isdn caller-number
View
ISDN interface view
Parameter
caller-number: Caller number that an incoming ISDN call can carry, which is a
character string of 1 to 24 characters.
Description
Using the isdn caller-number command, you can configure the range of the
numbers that the router can receive. Using the undo isdn caller-number
command, you can delete the configured caller number.
Example
Configure the router to receive only the incoming calls from the caller numbers
with 400.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0:15] isdn caller-number 400
isdn calling Syntax
isdn calling calling-number
undo isdn calling
View
ISDN interface view
Parameter
calling-number: Calling number.
Description
Using the isdn calling command, you can have the messages from a calling party
to a called party carry the calling number. Using the undo isdn calling command,
you can delete calling number in the messages that a calling party transmitted.
This command mainly applies on BRI interfaces. If a calling party has configured
this command on its BRI interface, the call party will be able to see the calling
number by viewing the call history information.
Example
Configure the message from a calling party to a called party on interface Bri0/0/0
to carry calling number.
[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn calling 8060170
isdn Syntax
check-called-number
isdn check-called-number check-index called-party-number [ : subaddress ]
undo isdn check-called-number check-index
View
ISDN BRI Interface view, ISDN PRI Interface view
Parameter
check-index: Called number or subaddress checking index, which is in the range of

1 to 3.
called-party-number: Called number, a string comprising 1 to 20 digits.
subaddress: Subaddress, which is a string comprising digits and/or case-insensitive

English letters and is 1 to 20 characters in length.
Description
Using the isdn check-called-number command, you can configure the called
number or subaddress that the system should verify when receiving a digital call.
Using the undo isdn check-called-number command, you can remove the
configuration.
By default, the system does not check the called number or subaddress carried by
incoming digital calls.
This command is used for setting the examined item when a digital call is received.
If a subaddress is specified, the system will deny an incoming digital call if the
calling party sends a wrong subaddress or does not send at all.
Example
Check whether the called number carried by incoming digital calls is 66668888 on
the interface Bri 0/0/0.
[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn check-called-number 1 66668888 : 123
isdn crlength Syntax
isdn crlength call-reference-length

undo isdn crlength
View
ISDN interface view
Parameter
call-reference-length: ISDN call reference length, which can be one or two bytes.
Description
Using the isdn crlength command, you can set length of the call reference used
when a call is placed on an ISDN interface. Using the undo isdn crlength
command, you can restore the default ISDN call reference length on the interface.
Call reference is equal to the sequence number that the protocol assigns to each
call. It is one or two bytes in length and can be used cyclically.
When the router receives a call from a remote device, it can automatically identify
the length of the call reference. However, some devices on the network do not
have such capability. In the event that the router is required to place calls to such a
device connected to it, you must configure the router to use the same call
reference length configured on the connected device.
By default, the call reference length is two bytes for E1 PRI and T1 PRI interfaces
and one byte for BRI interfaces.
You are not allowed to configure this command on an ISDN interface if there is still
a call on it. This command can take effect only if it is configured when there is no
call on the interface. Alternatively, you can manually disable the interface by
executing the shutdown command, configure the command, and then enable the
interface by executing the undo shutdown command. The operations, however,
will lead to the disconnection of the call existing on the interface.
Example
Set the call reference length carried by the ISDN messages on the PRI interface
serial0/0/0:15 to 1 byte.
[3Com-serial0/0/0:15] isdn crlength 1
isdn ignore connect-ack Syntax
isdn ignore connect-ack
undo isdn ignore connect-ack
View
ISDN interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the isdn ignore connect-ack command, you can configure the router to
switch the ISDN protocol state to ACTIVE to start the data and voice service
communications after sending a CONNECT message without having to wait for a
CONNECT ACK message. Using the undo isdn ignore connect-ack command, you
can restore the default setting.
By default, in the event that the router is communicating with an exchange, the
ISDN protocol must wait for the CONNECT ACK message in response to the
CONNECT message before it can switch to the ACTIVE state to start data and
voice service communications.
In the event that the router is communicating with an ISDN exchange, its settings
must be the same as those on the exchange.
Example
Set the call process on the BRI interface 0/0/0 to proceed to the ACTIVE state
without waiting for CONNECT ACK messages.
[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn ignore connect-ack
isdn ignore hlc Syntax
isdn ignore hlc
undo isdn ignore hlc
View
ISDN interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the isdn ignore hlc command, you can disable ISDN to carry the higher layer
compatibility (HLC) information element in the SETUP messages sent when placing
voice calls. Using the undo isdn ignore hlc command, you can configure ISDN to
carry the HLC information element in SETUP messages.
By default, HLC information element is carried in SETUP messages when placing

voice calls.
Example
Configure ISDN to carry the HLC information element in the SETUP messages for
the voice calls placed on the Bri interface 0/0/0.
[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn ignore hlc
isdn ignore llc Syntax
isdn ignore llc
undo isdn ignore llc
View
ISDN interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the isdn ignore llc command, you can disable ISDN to carry the Lower Layer
Compatibility (LLC) information element in the SETUP messages sent when placing
voice calls. Using the undo isdn ignore llc command, you can configure ISDN to
carry the LLC information element in SETUP messages.
By default, LLC information element is carried in SETUP messages when placing

voice calls.
Example
Disable ISDN to carry the LLC information element in the SETUP messages for the
voice calls placed on the interface Bri 0/0/0.
[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn ignore llc
isdn ignore Syntax

sending-complete
isdn ignore sending-complete [ incoming | outgoing ]
undo isdn ignore sending-complete [ incoming | outgoing ]
View
ISDN interface view
Parameter
incoming: Ignores the Sending Complete Information Element in SETUP messages

with respect to incoming calls.
outgoing: Sends SETUP messages without the Sending Complete Information

Element with respect to outgoing calls.
Description
Using the isdn ignore sending-complete command, you can configure the ISDN
protocol to ignore the processing on the Sending Complete Information Element.
Using the undo isdn ignore sending-complete command, you can restore the
default setting.
By default, in the event that the router is communicating with an exchange, the
ISDN protocol checks whether the received SETUP messages carry the Sending
Complete Information Element with respect to incoming calls and carries the
Sending Complete Information Element in SETUP messages with respect to
outgoing calls.
You can configure this command on an interface only when the ISDN protocol
running on the interface is DSS1 or ETSI.
Example
Ignore the Sending Complete Information Element in the received SETUP

messages.
[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn ignore sending-complete incoming
Disable carrying the Sending Complete Information Element in the transmitted

SETUP messages.
[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn ignore sending-complete outgoing
isdn L3-timer Syntax
isdn L3-timer timer-name time-interval
undo isdn L3-timer { timer-name | all }
View
ISDN interface view
Parameter
timer-name: Name of a L3 timer of the ISDN protocol.
time-interval: Timer duration, which can take on one of the values listed in the
following table.
all: Restores the default durations of all the L3 timers.
Table 10 Description of Q931 timers
timer-name Value range (in units) Default (in units)

t301 30 ~ 1200 240
t302 5 ~ 60 15
t303 2 ~ 10 4
t304 10 ~ 60 30
t305 4 ~ 30 30
t308 2 ~ 10 4
t309 10 ~ 180 90
t310 10 ~ 180 40
t313 2 ~ 10 4
t316 2 ~ 180 120
t322 2 ~ 10 4
Description
Using the isdn L3-timer command, you can configure the duration of an ISDN L3
timer. Using the undo isdn L3-timer command, you can restore the default
duration of the ISDN L3 timer on the interface.
You can view the default durations of the L3 timers in the ISDN protocol by
executing the display isdn parameters command.
Example
Set the duration of the L3 timer T301 on the interface Bri 0/0/0 to 160 seconds.
[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn l3-timer t301 160
isdn number-property Syntax
isdn number-property number-property [ calling | called ]
undo isdn number-property [ calling | called ]

View
ISDN interface view
Parameter
number-property: Type and number scheme of ISDN numbers. The argument takes
on a hex value in the range of 0 to FF. When it is expressed in 8 bits, bits 1 through
4 represent the code scheme, bits 5 through 7 represent the code type, and bit 8 is
reserved. The following table lists the possible number type and code schemes. For
more information, see the related protocol for reference.
Table 11 Types and code schemes of ISDN numbers
Field (Bit) value Definition

Type Code scheme
Protocol 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 0 0 User-specified
0 1 0 National network identification
0 1 1 International network identification
0 0 0 0 Unknown/user-specified
0 0 0 1 Carrier identification code
0 0 1 1 Data network identification code (ITU-T
ANSI Recommendation X.121)
0 0 0 Unknown
0 0 1 International number
0 1 0 National number
1 0 0 Subscriber number
0 0 0 0 Unknown
0 0 0 1 ISDN/telephony numbering loan (
Recommendation E.164/E.163)
AT&T 1 0 0 1 Private numbering plan
0 0 0 Unknown
0 1 1 Network specific number
1 1 0 Abbreviated number
1 1 1 Reserved for extension
0 0 0 0 Unknown
0 0 0 1 ISDN/telephony numbering plan(
Recommendation E.164)
0 0 1 1 Data numbering plan( Recommendation X.121)
0 1 0 0 Telex numbering plan( Recommendation F.69)
1 0 0 0 National standard numbering plan
1 0 0 1 Private numbering plan
DSS1 1 1 1 1 Reserved for extension
0 0 0 Unknown
1 1 0 Abbreviated number
1 1 1 Reserved for extension
0 0 0 0 Unknown
0 0 1 1 Data numbering plan( Recommendation X.121)
0 1 0 0 Telex numbering plan( Recommendation F.69)
1 0 0 0 National standard numbering plan
1 0 0 1 Private numbering plan
ETSI 1 1 1 1 Reserved for extension
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Unknown number in Unknown numbering

plan
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 International number in ISDN numbering plan
(Rec. E.164)
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 National number in ISDN numbering plan (Rec.
E.164)
0 1 1 1 0 0 1 Network specific number in private numbering
plan
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Local (directory) number in ISDN numbering
plan (Rec. E.164)
NI 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 Abbreviated number in private numbering plan
0 0 0 Unknown
0 0 0 0 Unknown
NTT 1 0 0 1 Private numbering plan
The undefined bits in all the protocols are reserved for other purposes.
calling: Code scheme of the calling number.
called: Code scheme of the called number.
Description
Using the isdn number-property command, you can set type and code scheme of
ISDN calling numbers or called numbers. Using the undo isdn number-property
command, you can restore the default type and code scheme of ISDN calling
numbers or called numbers.
By default, the number type and code scheme are respectively unknown and ISDN
for both ISDN calling numbers and called numbers, and the number-property
representing them is 01 in hex format.
Example
Set both number type and code scheme of ISDN calling numbers on the interface
Bri 0/0/0 to unknown.
[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn number-property 0 calling
isdn overlap-sending Syntax
isdn overlap-sending [ digits ]
undo isdn overlap-sending

View
ISDN interface view
Parameter
digits: The number of the digits, which is sent each time in overlap-sending mode
and is in the range of 1 to 15.By default, digits are 10.
Description
Using the isdn overlap-sending command, you can set the system to send the
called number information in the overlap mode on the ISDN interface. Using the
undo isdn overlap-sending command, you can set the system to send the called
information in full mode.
In "overlap-sending” mode, the digits of each called number will be sent

separately and the number of the digits sent each time can be set using this
command.
In "full-sending" mode, all the digits of each called number will be collected and
sent at a time.
By default, full-sending mode applies.
Overlap-sending is only suitable for four ISDN protocols: ANSI, DSS1, ETSI, and NI.
Example
Apply the overlap-sending function on the interface Bri0/0/0 and set the number
of digits allowed to be sent each time to 12 digits.
[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn overlap-sending 12
isdn pri-slipwnd-size Syntax
isdn pri-slipwnd-size window-size
isdn pri-slipwnd-size default
View
Interface view
Parameter
window-size: Slide window size in the range of 5 to 14. By default, the slide
window size on PRI interfaces is 7.
Description
Using the isdn pri-slipwnd-size command, you can set the slide window size on a
PRI interface. Using the isdn pri-slipwnd-size default command, you can restore
the default slide window size on the PRI interface.
Example
Configure the slide window size on the interface e1 0/0/0 to 10.
[3Com] controller e1 0/0/0

[3Com-E1 0/0/0] using
[3Com-E1 0/0] pri-set
[3Com-Serial0/0/0:15] isdn pri-slipwnd-size 10
isdn protocol-type Syntax
isdn protocol-type protocol
View
ISDN interface view
Parameter
protocol: ISDN protocol, which can be DSS1, NTT, NI, ETSI, ANSI, or AT&T.
Description
Using the isdn protocol-type command, you can set the ISDN protocol to be run
on an ISDN interface.
By default, both BRI and PRI interfaces run the ISDN protocol DSS1.
You are allowed to configure:
ANSI ISDN on BRI and T1 PRI interfaces;
AT&T ISDN on T1 PRI interfaces;
DSS1 ISDN on BRI, E1 PRI, and T1 PRI interfaces;
ETSI ISDN on BRI, E1 PRI, and T1 PRI interfaces;
NI (National ISDN) on BRI interfaces;
NTT ISDN on BRI and T1 PRI interfaces.

Example
Apply ISDN ETSI on the interface Bri0/0/0.
[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn protocol-type etsi
isdn send-restart Syntax
isdn send-restart
undo isdn send-restart
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the isdn send-restart command, you can set restart mark in a distributed
system (AR 46 series routers), so that the MPU will control the PRI interface to send
RESTART message after re-establishing a link. Using the undo isdn send-restart
command, you can remove the restart mark.
This command is invalid for the MCU in a centralized system, AR 28 Series Routers
for example.
Example
Enable the MCU to automatically send RESTART messages to interface boards

automatically.
[3Com] isdn send-restart
Disable automatic RESTART message sending.
[3Com] undo isdn send-restart
isdn spid auto_trigger Syntax
isdn spid auto_trigger
View
ISDN BRI interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the isdn spid auto_trigger command, you can enable SPID auto-negotiation
once on the BRI interface running the NI protocol.
On a BRI interface compliant with the North American ISDN protocol, the router
can place a call only after SPID negotiation or initialization. SPID information can
be obtained via static configuration or dynamic negotiation. You may manually
trigger a new SPID negotiation request by executing this command if the SPID
negotiation in dynamic negotiation fails or just for the purpose of testing.
By default, a BRI interface does not originate a SPID negotiation request unless
triggered by a call.
This command applies only on the BRI interface running the NI protocol.
Example
Manually trigger a new SPID negotiation request on the interface bri0/0/0.
[3Com-bri0/0/0] isdn spid auto_trigger
isdn spid nit Syntax
isdn spid nit
undo isdn spid nit
View
Parameter
None
Description
Using the isdn spid nit command, you can set the SPID processing mode to NIT
(Not Initial Terminal) on an NI-compliant BRI interface. Using the undo isdn spid nit
command, you can disable the NIT mode on the BRI interface.
By default, NIT mode does not apply on BRI interfaces. Instead, static SPID or
dynamic SPID negotiation is applied.
On an NI-compliant BRI interface, calls can be placed only after the SPID
negotiation or initialization is finished. When the router is communicating with an
NI-compliant exchange that does not support SPID negotiation, you can use this
command to set the SPID processing mode on the router to NIT and the ISDN will
ignore ISPID negotiation and initialization.
This command applies only on NI-compliant BRI interfaces.

Example
Ignore SPID negotiation and initialization on the interface bri0/0/0, i.e., adopting
the NIT mode.
[3Com-bri0/0/0] isdn spid nit
isdn spid timer Syntax
isdn spid timer seconds
undo isdn spid timer
View
Parameter
seconds: Duration of the SPID timer, which is in the range of 1 to 255 seconds,
and defaults to 30 seconds.
Description
Using the isdn spid timer command, you can set the duration of the timer TSPID
for an NI-compliant BRI interface to timer_length. Using the undo isdn spid timer
command, you can restore the default duration of the timer TSPID for the
NI-compliant BRI interface.
On a BRI interface compliant with the ISDN protocol in North America, calls can be
placed only after the SPID negotiation or initialization is finished. SPID information
can be obtained via static configuration or dynamic negotiation. The timer TSPID is
started when the terminal originates a negotiation or initialization request by
sending the INFORMATION message. You can use this command to modify the
duration of TSPID.
Example
Set the duration of TSPID on the interface bri0/0/0 to 50 seconds.
[3Com-bri0/0/0] isdn spid timer 50
isdn spid service Syntax
isdn spid service [audio | data | speech]
undo isdn spid service
View

Parameter
audio: Supports audio service.
data: Supports data service.
speech: Supports voice service.
Description
Using the isdn spid service command, you can configure the service types that
must be supported in SPI negotiation on the BRI interface adopting NI protocol.
Using the undo isdn spid service command, you can delete he service types that
must be supported in SPI negotiation on the BRI interface adopting NI protocol.
There are three types of services. You can select any one or none. None means all
services are supported. By default, SPID needs to support data and voice service
simultaneously.
Generally, as for the BRI interface adopting North America ISDN protocol, you
need to negotiate or initialize SPID before originate a call. During negotiation,
SPCS may send multiple SPIDs and carry the service types supported by the SPID,
therefore, the router needs to choose a proper SPID according to the local service
type.
This command can only be applied on the BRI interface adopting NI protocol.
Example
Set the service type supported by BRI interface to data and voice.
[3Com-bri0] isdn spid service data

[3Com-bri0/0] isdn spid service speech
isdn spid resend Syntax
isdn spid resend times
undo isdn spid resend
View
Parameter
times: An integer in the range of 1 to 255 times, which defaults to 1.
Description
Using the isdn spid resend command, you can set the number of INFORMATION
message retransmission attempts for SPID negotiation or initialization on an
NI-compliant BRI interface. Using the undo isdn spid resend command, you can
restore the default number of INFORMATION message retransmission attempts on
the interface.
placed only after the SPID negotiation or initialization is finished. The timer TSPID
is started when the terminal originates a negotiation or initialization request by
sending the INFORMATION message. If the terminal does not receive any response
upon the expiration of TSPID, it will retransmit the INFORMAITON message. You
can use this command to modify the number of INFORMATION message
retransmission attempts.
Example
Set the allowed number of INFORMATION retransmission attempts to five.
[3Com-bri0/0/0] isdn spid resend 5
isdn spid1 Syntax
isdn spid1 spid
undo isdn spid1
View
Parameter
spid: String comprising 1 to 20 digits.
Description
Using the isdn spid1 command, you can configure SPID information for the B1
channel on an NI-compliant BRI interface. Using the undo isdn spid1 command,
you can remove the SPID information of the B1 channel on the interface.
can be obtained via static configuration or dynamic negotiation. Only after SPID
information is configured for the B1 channel on the BRI interface can the system
makes the L3 initialization to place calls normally.
By default, SPID for the B1 channel on a BRI interface is null.
Example
Set SPID to “012345” for the B1 channel on the interface bri0/0/0.
[3Com-bri0/0/0] isdn spid1 012345
isdn spid2 Syntax
isdn spid2 spid

undo isdn spid2
View
Parameter
spid: String comprising 1 to 20 digits.
Description
Using the isdn spid2 command, you can configure SPID information for the B1
channel on an NI-compliant BRI interface. Using the undo isdn spid2 command,
you can remove the SPID information of the B1 channel on the interface.
can be obtained via static configuration or dynamic negotiation. Only after SPID
information is configured for the B2 channel on the BRI interface can the system
makes the L3 initialization to place calls normally.
By default, SPID for the B2 channel on a BRI interface is null.
Example
Set SPID to “012345” for the B2 channel on the interface bri0/0/0.
[3Com-bri0/0/0] isdn spid2 012345
isdn statistics Syntax
isdn statistics { clear | continue | display [ flow ] | start | stop }
View
ISDN interface view
Parameter
clear: Clears the statistics.
continue: Continues counting.
display: Displays the statistics.
display flow: Displays the statistic information about message flows.
start: Starts counting.
stop: Stops counting.

Description
Using the isdn statistics command, you can have the system make statistics on the
information received and transmitted at an ISDN interface.
By default, no statistics is made on the information transmitted and received at

interfaces.
You can input the isdn statistics start command in the view of an interface to start
making statistics on the messages received and transmitted at the interface, isdn
statistics display command to view the statistic information, isdn statistics continue
to continue the effort in making statistics, isdn statistics display flow to view the
statistics in the form of flow, and isdn statistics stop to stop making statistics.
Example
Display statistics information on the PRI interface.
[3Com-serial0/0/0:15] isdn statistics display

Q.931 message received and sent out on current port:
CALL_PROC Send(0) Recv(6)
SETUP Send(6) Recv(13)
CONN Send(13) Recv(5)
SETUP_ACK Send(0) Recv(6)
CONNECT_ACK Send(5) Recv(13)
DISCONNECT Send(3) Recv(16)
RELEASE Send(1) Recv(18)
RELEASE_COM Send(18) Recv(1)
SLIP Configuration
Commands
debugging slip Syntax
debugging slip { event | error | packet | all }
View
User view
Parameter
packet: Enables packet debugging output switch.
Description
Using the debugging slip command, you can enable the debugging switch of the
SLIP protocol.
Example
None
HDLC Configuration Commands 289
link-protocol slip Syntax
link-protocol slip
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the link-protocol slip command, you can set the link layer protocol of the
interface as SLIP.
By default, the link-layer protocol for interface is PPP.
P2P link can use simpler link layer protocol SLIP(Serial Line IP), which is mainly used
to run TCP/IP on the P2P serial port. SLIP is only used for the asynchronous link.
SLIP only defines the start and end identifiers of frame, so as to intercept IP packet
on the serial line. Compared with PPP, SLIP has no address concept, negotiation
process, differentiation of packet types (so only one network protocol can be
supported at the same time) and error correction function.
The link layer protocol of the interface shall be consistent with that of the peer
interface.
Example
Configure the link layer protocol on the interface Serial0/0/0 as SLIP.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] link-protocol slip
HDLC Configuration
Commands
link-protocol hdlc Syntax
link-protocol hdlc
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the link-protocol hdlc command, you can configure the interface
encapsulation as HDLC. HDLC is a link layer protocol and can bear network layer
protocols, such as IP and IPX.
By default, the interface is encapsulated with PPP.
For the related commands, see timer hold and display interface.
Example
Configure HDLC encapsulation on interface Serial1/0/0.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] link-protocol hdlc
timer hold Syntax
timer hold seconds
undo timer hold
View
Interface view
Parameter
seconds: Value of the polling interval. The value is in the range from 0 to 32767 in
seconds. 0 indicates that the link detection function is disabled.
Description
Using the timer hold command, you can set the polling interval. Using the undo
timer hold command, you can restore the default value of the polling interval.
By default, the value of seconds is 10 seconds.
The polling interval should be set to equal at the two ends of the data link. A zero
polling interval set in both ends will close the polling operation of the data link.
Example
Set the value of polling interval on interface Serial1/0/0 to 100 seconds.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] timer hold 100

Frame Relay
Configuration
Commands
debugging fr Syntax
debugging fr { all | inarp | compress | congestion | de | event | fragment | lmi | mfr

control | packet | transmit-rate } [ interface interface-type interface-number [ dlci
dlci-number ] ]
undo debugging fr { all | inarp | compress | congestion | de | event | fragment | ipc |

lmi | mfr control | packet | transmit-rate } [ interface interface-type
interface-number [ dlci dlci-number ] ]
View
User view
Parameter
all: All frame relay information debugging.
arp: Information debugging of frame relay address resolution protocol. When this
parameter is in use, DLCI can be specified.
compress: Information debugging of frame relay compression.
congestion: Information debugging of frame relay traffic congestion

management.
de: DE information debugging of FRTS.
event: Information debugging of frame relay event. When this parameter is used,
no interface can be specified.
fragment: Information debugging of frame relay fragment. When this parameter

is in use, DLCI must be specified.
lmi: Information debugging of frame relay LMI (Local Management Interface)

protocol.
mfr control: Information debugging of multilink frame relay bundle and bundle
link.
packet: Information debugging of frame relay packet. When this parameter is in

use, DLCI can be specified.
transmit-rate: Information debugging of FRTS transmit rate.
interface-number: Interface number, in 3-dimension form (slot number/card

number/interface number).
dlci dlci-number: DLCI number of virtual circuit, ranging from 16 to 1007.
Description
Using the debugging fr command, you can enable frame relay information
debugging. Using the undo debugging fr command, you can disable frame relay
information debugging.
By default, frame relay information debugging is disabled.
For multilink frame relay, if the information debugging of multilink frame relay
bundle and bundle link (mfr control) are enabled, the sent/received bundle link
controlling information and status change of bundle link will be displayed.
If FRTS function is enabled, the change of frame relay sending rate can be seen
after the transmit rate information debugging (transmit-rate) is enabled.
The enabling of frame relay information debugging greatly affects system

performance, so this command should be used cautiously.
Example
Enable frame relay compression debugging of all interfaces.
<3Com> debugging fr compress
Enable the FRTS congestion management debugging of serial interface 5/0/1.
<3Com> debugging fr congestion interface serial 5/0/1
Enable DE debugging of FRTS on serial interface 5/0/1.
<3Com> debugging fr de interface serial 5/0/1
Enable FRTS transmit rate debugging of serial interface 5/0/1.
<3Com> debugging fr transmit-rate interface serial 5/0/1
Enable debugging of the bundle interface MFR1/0/0, supposing several links have
been bundle on it.
<3Com> debugging fr mfr control interface mfr1/0/0serial3/0/2(Out):

MFR msg=Add_link, Length=28, Link=serial5/1/0, BL state=Add_sent
e1 00 01 01 07 4d 46 52 30 00 02 0c 53 65 72 69 61 6c 32 3a
serial3/0/2(In):
MFR msg=Add_link, Length=30, Link=serial5/1/0, BL state=Add_sent
e1 00 01 01 09 6b 70 6c 6b 70 6c 00 02 0c 53 65 72 69 61 6c
serial3/0/2(Out):
MFR msg=Add_link_ack, Length=28, Link=serial5/1/0, BL state=Add_rx
e1 00 02 01 07 4d 46 52 30 00 02 0c 53 65 72 69 61 6c 32 3a
serial3/0/2(Out):
MFR msg=Hello, Length=9, Link=serial5/1/0, BL state=Up
e1 00 05 03 06 43 4b 01 f6
serial3/0/2(In):
MFR msg=Hello_ack, Length=9, Link=serial5/1/0, BL state=Up
e1 00 05 03 06 2f f7 00 a5
display fr compress Syntax
display fr compress [ interface interface-type interface-number ]
View
Any view.
Parameter
interface-number: Interface number, in 3-dimension form: slot number/card

number/interface number.
Description
Using the display fr compress command, you can view the statistics information of
the frame relay compression. If no interface is specified, the DLCI statistics
information of all the interfaces will be displayed.
For the related command, see fr compression frf9.
Example
View the frame relay compression statistics information of MFR interface 4/0/0.
<3Com> display fr compress interface mfr 4/0/0

MFR4/0/0 -DLCI:25
uncompressed bytes xmt/rcv 0/0 compressed bytes xmt/rcv 0/0
1 min avg ratio xmt/rcv 0.000/0.000 5 min avg ratio xmt/rcv
0.000/0.000
display fr dlci-switch Syntax
display fr dlci-switch [ interface interface-type interface-num ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-type: Type of the interface.
interface-number: Number of the interface, including slot-number/ card-number/

port-number.
The specified interface can only be main interface. Information of all interfaces will
be displayed without specifying interface.
Description
Using the display fr dlci-switch command, you can view the information of the
configured FR switching to check if the frame relay switching of a user is correctly
configured.
For the related command, see fr dlci-switch.
Example
View the information of the configured FR switching.
<3Com> display fr dlci-switch

Status Interface(Dlci) < -----> Interface(Dlci)
Inactive Serial0/1/1:10(100) Serial1/1/0:10(100)
Table 12 Description of the output information of command display fr dlci-switch

Item Description
Status The status of FR switching function
Interface(Dlci) < -- > Interface(Dlci) Input interface and its DLCI, output interface and its DLCI
display fr inarp-info Syntax
display fr inarp-info [ interface interface-type interface-num ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-type interface-num: Used to specify the interface to be viewed. Only the

main interface can be specified here. The information of all interfaces will be
displayed for the command without specifying an interface.
Description
Using the display fr inarp-info command, you can view the packet statistics of the
FR inverse address resolution protocol.
The packets of FR inverse ARP include the address resolution request packet and
address resolution reply packet. According to the output information via this
command, you can diagnose if the inverse ARP operates normally.
For the related command, see fr inarp.
Example
Display the packet statistics of the FR inverse address resolution protocol.
<3Com> display fr inarp-info

interface Serial1/1/1:1:
dlci type size in/out/drop
200 FRF12(ETE) 80 0/0/0
Table 13 Output information description
Item Description
interface Current interface
dlci DLCI number
type Fragment type
size Fragment size
in/out/drop Received/transmitted/dropped fragments
display fr interface Syntax
display fr interface interface-type interface-num
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-type interface-num: Used to specify the interface to be viewed. The

specified interface can be a main interface or a sub-interface. The whole
information will be displayed for the command without specifying an interface.
Description
Using the display fr interface command, you can view the FR status, which is
helpful for you to perform fault diagnosis.
Example
Display the FR protocol status.
<3Com> display fr interface

Serial1/0/0, DTE, physical up, protocol up
Serial1/0/0.1, multi-point, protocol up
Serial1/0/0.2, point-to-point, protocol down
Serial2/0/0, DCE, physical down, protocol down
This command displays the protocol status of each interface encapsulated with FR.
The above information indicates that: Frame Relay interface type of Serial1/0/0 is
DTE. Physical layer protocol and link layer protocol of Serial1/0/0 are activated.
display fr lmi-info Syntax
display fr lmi-info [ interface interface-type interface-num ]
View
Any view
Parameter

whole information will be displayed for the command without specifying an
interface.
Description
Using the display fr lmi-info command, you can view the statistics of LMI protocol
frame.
The LMI protocol is used to maintain the current frame relay link, including the
status enquiry packet and status packet. The displayed information helps you to
diagnose the faults.
For the related command, see fr interface-type.
Example
Display the statistics of LMI protocol frame.
<3Com> display fr lmi-info

Frame relay LMI statistics for interface Serial1/0/0(DTE)
T391DTE = 10 (keepalive 10)
N391DTE = 6, N392DTE = 3, N393DTE = 4
out status enquiry = 96, in status = 85
status timeout = 3, discarded messages = 3
Frame relay LMI statistics for interface Serial2/0/0 (DCE, ANSI)
T391DTE = 0 (no keepalive)
T392DCE = 15, N392DCE = 3, N393DCE = 4
in status enquiry = 0, out status = 0
status enquiry timeout = 0, discarded messages = 0
The above shows various information about the FR LMI protocol.
For example, the Frame Relay interface type of Serial1/0/0 is DTE. LMI protocol
type is Cisco-compatible protocol. T391 parameter on DTE side is 10. N391
parameter on DTE side is 6. N392 parameter on DTE side is 3. N393 parameter on
DTE side is 4. The number Status Enquiry packets sent through Serial1/0/0 is 96.
Received Status Enquiry packets are 85. Timeout packets are 3. Discarded packets
are 3.
display fr map-info Syntax
display fr map-info [ interface interface-type interface-num ]
View
Any view
Parameter

Description
Using the display fr map-info command, you can view the FR address mapping
table.
The displayed information via the command indicates whether the static mapping
configured by a user is correct and whether the dynamic address mapping
operates normally.
For the related commands, see fr map ip and fr inarp.

Example
Display Frame Relay address mapping table.
<3Com> display fr map-info

Map Statistics for interface Serial1/0/2 (DTE)
DLCI = 100, IP INARP 100.100.1.1, Serial1/0/2
create time = 2002/10/21 14:48:44, status = ACTIVE
encapsulation = ietf, vlink = 14, broadcast
DLCI = 200, IP INARP 100.100.1.1, Serial1/0/2
encapsulation = ietf, vlink = 0, broadcast
DLCI = 300, IP 1.1.1.1, Serial1/0/2
encapsulation = ietf, vlink = 15
The above indicates the information of each MAP configured with Frame Relay
protocol.
For example, as for the first address mapping, the mapping indicates that PVC
(DLCI=100) on Serial1/0/2 establishes the address mapping with the peer end (IP
address is 100.100.1.1) through Inverse ARP. The time of creating the mapping is
2002/10/21 14:48:44, and its status is active. Encapsulation format is IETF, and
broadcast packet is available.
display fr pvc-info Syntax
display fr pvc-info [ interface interface-type interface-num ]
View
Any view
Parameter

Description
Using the display fr pvc-info command, you can view the FR PVC table.
This command displays the statistics of the FR PVC status and receiving/sending
data on this VC.
For the related command, see fr dlci.
Example
Display the FR PVC table.
<3Com> display fr pvc-info

PVC statistics for interface Serial1/0/0 (DTE, physical UP)
DLCI = 100, USAGE = UNUSED (0000), INTERFACE = Serial1/0/0
create time = 2000/04/01 23:55:39, status = active
in BECN = 0, in FECN = 0
in packets = 0, in bytes = 0
out packets = 0, out bytes = 0
DLCI = 102, USAGE = LOCAL (0010), INTERFACE = Serial1/0/0.1
create time = 2000/04/01 23:56:14, status = active
in BECN = 0, in FECN = 0
The information listed above shows various information about the FR PVC.
The above information indicates that: The PVC (DLCI=100) is the one (UNUSED)
obtained through negotiating with the peer end via LMI. It is configured on
Serial1/0/0. Establishing time is 2000/04/01 23:55:39. PVC status is active. The
packets received of Forward Explicit Congestion Notifications (FECN) and
Backward Explicit Congestion Notifications (BECN) are both 0. Received/sent
frames are 0. Received/sent bytes are 0.
display fr statistics Syntax
display fr statistics [ interface interface-type interface-num ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-type interface-num: Used to specify the interface to be viewed. Only the

main interface can be specified here. The information of all interfaces will be
displayed for the command without specifying an interface.
Description
Using the display fr statistics command, you can view the current Frame Relay
statistics about receiving and sending packets.
The output information of this command can help the user to perform FR traffic
statistics and fault diagnosis.
Example
Display the Frame Relay statistics about receiving and sending packets.
<3Com> display fr statistics

Frame relay packet statistics for interface Serial1/0/0 (DTE)
discarded in packets = 13, discarded out packets = 0
Frame relay packet statistics for interface Serial1/1/0 (DCE)
discarded in packets = 0, discarded out packets = 0
The above information displays Frame Relay statistics about receiving and sending
packets.
For instance, it is known from the above information that the Frame Relay
interface type of Serial1/0/0 is DTE. Received packets are 84. Received bytes are
1333. Sent packets are 92. Sent bytes are 1217. Discarded packets in received
ones are 13. Discarded packets in sent ones are 0.
display interface mfr Syntax
display interface mfr [interface-number .sub-number]
View
Any view
Parameter

Sub-number: sub-interface number.
Description
This command is used to display the information of FR interface, including the

statistical information.
Example
To view the configuration and status information of MFR interface 4/0/123
<3Com> display interface mfr 4/0/123

MFR4/0/123 current state : UP
Description : 3Com, 3Com Series, MFR4/0/123 Interface
link-protocol is FRAME-RELAY IETF
LMI DLCI is 0, LMI type is Q.933a, frame relay DTE
LMI status enquiry sent 435, LMI status received 435
LMI status timeout 0, LMI message discarded 0
FIFO: 0/75/0
5 minutes input rate 0 bytes/sec, 0 packets/sec
5 minutes output rate 0 bytes/sec, 0 packets/sec
1058 packets input, 832389 bytes, 0 drops
619 packets output, 828190 bytes, 0 drops
display mfr Syntax
display mfr [ interface interface-type interface-number | verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter

verbose: Displays detailed statistics information, including the number of

controlling packets sent and received.
Description
Using the display mfr command, you can view configuration and statistics
information of multilink frame relay bundle and bundle link. If no bundle or
bundle link is specified, information of all bundles and bundle links will be
displayed.
For the related command, see link-protocol fr mfr and interface mfr.
Example
View configuration and state information of all frame relay bundles and frame
relay bundle links.
<3Com-Serial4/1/2>display mfr
Bundle interface:MFR4/1/0, Bundle state = down, Bundle class = A,
fragment disabled
Bundle BID = MFR4/1/0
Number of bundle links = 0, Peer's bundle-id =
Bundle links:

fragment disabled
Bundle links:
Serial4/1/1, PHY state = up, link state : add sent,
LID : Serial4/1/1
View detailed state information of all frame relay bundle links.
<3Com> display mfr verbose

fragment disabled
Bundle links:

fragment disabled
Bundle links:
Serial4/1/1, PHY state = up, link state : add sent,
LID : Serial4/1/1
Bundle Link statistics:
Add_link: sent packets = 112, rcv'd packets = 2,

Add_link_ack: sent packets = 2, rcv'd packets = 2,
Add_link_rej: sent packets = 0, rcv'd packets = 0,
Remove_link: sent packets = 0, rcv'd packets = 0,
Remove_link_ack: sent packets = 0, rcv'd packets = 0,
Hello: sent packets = 2180, rcv'd packets = 2174,
Hello_ack: sent packets = 2174, rcv'd packets = 2174,
outgoing pak dropped = 0, incoming pak dropped = 83
Cause code = ack timer expiry, Ack timer = 4, Hello timer =
10,
Max retry count = 2,
Current count = 0,
Peer LID =
Table 14 Output information description of display mfr command

Item Description
Bundle interface Bundle
Bundle state Running state of bundle interface
Bundle class Class A indicates if there is one bundle link is in up state, the bundle is
flagged as up. Moreover, all bundle links should be flagged as down
before the bundle is down.
fragment disabled Disable fragmentation function
Bundle BID Bundle identifier
Number of bundle links Number of bundle links
Peer's bundle-id Bundle identifier of the peer
Bundle links Physical interface information of each bundle link
PHY state Running state of physical interface
Link state Running state of bundle link line protocol
LID Bundle link identifier
Bundle Link statistics: Packet statistics information of bundle link
Add_link Number of “Add_link” packets sent and received
The “Add_link” packet is used to notify the peer that the local node
has prepared for processing frames.
Add_link_ack Number of “Add_link” acknowledgment packets sent and received
The “Add_link_ack” packet is used to notify the peer that an
“Add_link” packet has been received.
Add_link_rej Number of “Add_link” reject packets sent and received
The “Add_link_rej” packet is used to notify the peer that an
“Add_link” packet has been rejected.
Remove_link Number of “Remove_link” packets sent and received
The “Remove_link” packet is used to notify the peer that the local
node is removing a bundle link from the bundle.
Remove_link_ack Number of “Remove_link” acknowledgement packets sent and
received
The “Remove_link_ack” packet is used to notify the peer that a
“Remove_link” packet has been received.
Hello Number of “Hello” packets sent and received.
The “Hello” packet is used to maintain link state.
Hello_ack Number of “Hello” acknowledgment packets sent and received.
The “Hello_ack” packet is used to notify the peer that a “Hello”
packet has been received.
outgoing pak dropped Number of discarded packets that are sent
incoming pak dropped Number of discarded packets that are received
Cause code The reason for bundle link to be in the current state, possibly being the
following values:
inconsistent bundle: The peer has associated the bundle with another bundle, thus
making inconsistent BID.
none: The link is in normal state.
bundle link idle: The peer bundle link is idle, which generally occurs when the peer
bundle interface is disabled.
ack timer expiry: The current link state is caused by the timeout of the local T-ack
timer.
loopback detected: Loopback is enabled on the physical line of local bundle link.
other: Other reasons, such as LID error.
unexpected Add_link: The “add_link” message is received when the
bundle link is in up state. This case may occur when the line protocol is
ready for being enabled and will disappear once the connection is
created.
Ack timer The time of resending hello message before bundle link receives
acknowledgment message or of waiting for hello acknowledgment
message before resending an “add_link” message used for initial
synchronization.
Hello timer Interval for bundle link to send hello message
Max retry count Maximum retry times for bundle link to resend hello message or
resend “Add_link” that is used for initial synchronization before the
bundle link waits for hello acknowledgement message.
Current count Current retry times
Peer LID Bundle link identifier of the peer link
fr compression frf9 Syntax
fr compression frf9
undo fr compression
View
Frame relay interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the fr compression frf9 command, you can enable frame relay compression
function. Using the undo fr compression command, you can disable frame relay
compression function.
By default, frame relay compression function is disabled.
This command is only valid for point-to-point interfaces. In other words, it is used
for frame relay sub-interfaces of point-to-point type.
Only when the frame relay packets type of the interface is IETF, can frame relay
compression take effect. When this command is configured, the system will
automatically change the packet type of the interface into IETF if the frame relay
packets type of an interface is not IETF.
For the related command, see fr map.
Example
Enable frame relay compression on the point-to-point frame relay sub-interface

Serial4/1/3.1.
[3Com] interface serial 4/1/3.1 p2p

[3Com-Serial4/1/3.1] fr compression frf9
fr compression iphc Syntax
fr compression iphc
undo fr compression iphc
View
Frame Relay interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the fr compression iphc command, you can enable the IP header
compression. Using the undo fr compression iphc command, you can disable the
function.
By default, the Frame Relay compression function is disabled.
For the related command, see fr map.
Example
Configure the Frame Relay interface Serial 4/1/0 to adopt IP header compression.
[3Com-Serial4/1/0] fr compression iphc
fr dlci Syntax
fr dlci dlci
undo fr dlci dlci
View
Interface view
Parameter
dlci: Virtual circuit number allocated for Frame Relay interface. The range of the
number is 16 to 1007. 0 to 15 and 1008 to 1023 are reserved by the protocol for
special purpose.
Description
Using the fr dlci command, you can configure the virtual circuit for Frame Relay
interface. Using the undo fr dlci command, you can cancel the configuration.
When the Frame Relay interface type is DCE or NNI, it is necessary to manually
configure virtual circuit for interface (either main interface or sub-interface). When
the Frame Relay interface type is DTE, if the interface is main interface, the system
will automatically configure the virtual circuit according to the peer device.
Example
Assign a virtual circuit with DLCI 100 to Frame Relay sub-interface Serial1/0/0.1.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0.1] fr dlci 100
fr dlci-switch Syntax
fr dlci-switch in-dlci interface interface-type interface-number dlci out-dlci
undo fr dlci-switch in-dlci
View
Frame relay interface view and MFR interface view
Parameter
in-dlci: DLCI assigned to an interface to receive datagram, ranging from 16 to

1007.

out-dlci: DLCI of the specified interface where the packet is forwarded, ranging
from 16 to 1007.
Description
Using the fr dlci-switch command, you can configure a static route for frame relay
PVC switching. Using the undo fr dlci-switch command, you can delete a static
route for frame relay PVC switching.
By default, no static route for frame relay PVC switching is configured.
Before the static route of frame relay PVC is configured, it is necessary to enable
the frame relay PVC switching first by using the command fr switching.
The type of the interface for forwarding packets can be either a frame relay
interface or an MFR interface. If Tunnel interface is specified as the forwarding
interface, the frame relay packets over IP can be realized.
For the related command, see fr switching.
Example
Configure a static route that allows packets on the link with DLCI of 100 on
Seiral1/0/0 to be forwarded via the link with DLCI of 200 on interface Serial2/0/0.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr dlci-switch 100 interface serial2/0/0 dlci 200
Configure a static route that allows packets on the link with DLCI of 200 on
Seiral4/1/2 to be forwarded via the link with DLCI of 300 on Tunnel interface
Serial4/0/0.
[3Com-Serial4/1/2] fr dlci-switch 200 interface Tunnel4/0/0 dlci 300
fr inarp Syntax
fr inarp [ ip ] [ dlci ]
undo fr inarp [ ip ] [ dlci ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
Ip: Indicates that the inverse address resolution is performed on the ip network
protocol.
dlci: Data link connection identifier number, i.e., virtual circuit number, indicating
that the inverse address resolution is performed for this DLCI number only.
Description
Using the fr inarp command, you can enable the inverse address resolution of
Frame Relay. Using the undo fr inarp command, you can disable this function.
By default, system permits enabling the Frame Relay inverse address resolution.
When the Frame Relay sends data over the interface, it is necessary to map the
network address to the DLCI numbers. Such a map can be specified manually or
can be completed via the function of automatic inverse address resolution.
Automatic inverse address resolution can be started by using the command.
If it is expected to enable the inverse address resolution function of all PVCs, the
command without any parameters is adopted.
If it is expected to enable the inverse address resolution function in the specified

data link, the command with dlci parameter is adopted.
For the related commands, see fr map, reset fr inarp, and display fr map-info.
Example
Enable the inverse address resolution at all PVCs of the Frame Relay interface
Serial1/0/0.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr inarp
fr interface-type Syntax
fr interface-type { dce | dte | nni }
undo fr interface-type
View
Interface view
Parameter
dte, dce and nni: Three types of Frame Relay interfaces.
Description
Using the fr interface-type command, you can set the Frame Relay interface type.
Using the undo fr interface-type command, you can restore the default Frame
Relay interface type.
By default, the frame relay interface type is DTE
In Frame Relay, there are two communicating parties, namely, the user side and
network side. The user side is called Data Terminal Equipment (DTE), and the
network side is called Data Communications Equipment (DCE). In a Frame Relay
network, the interface between the Frame Relay switches is Network-to-Network
Interface (NNI), and the corresponding interface adopts the NNI operating view. If
the device is used as Frame Relay switching, the Frame Relay interface should
operate in the NNI view or DCE mode. NE16E/08E/05 routers support the three
modes.
In NE16E/08E/05 routers, while configuring the Frame Relay interface type as DCE
or NNI, it is unnecessary to perform the fr switching command in the System view.
Please notice that this is different from Cisco.
For the related command, see link-protocol fr.
Example
Set the type of the frame relay interface Serial1/0/0 to DCE.
[3Com] interface Serial1/0/0

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr interface-type dce
fr iphc Syntax
fr iphc { nonstandard | rtp-connections number1 | tcp-connections number2 |

tcp-include }
undo fr iphc { nonstandard | rtp-connections number1 | tcp-connections number2

| tcp-include }
View
Parameter
nonstandard: Nonstandard compatible compression format.
rtp-connections number1: The number of RTP compression connections, ranging

from 3 to 255. By default, the number of RTP compression connections is 256.
tcp-connections number2: The number of TCP compression connections, ranging

from 3 to 255. By default, the number of TCP compression connections is 256.
tcp-include: Includes TCP header compression when performing RTP compression.
Description
Using the fr iphc command, you can enable IP header compression function,
including RTP/TCP header compression. Using the undo fr iphc command, you can
disable this function.
For the related configuration, see fr map ip.
Example
Configure the number of RTP compression connections as 200 on the frame relay
Serial1/0/0.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr iphc rtp-connections 200
fr lmi n391dte Syntax
fr lmi n391dte n391-value
undo fr lmi n391dte
View
Interface view
Parameter
Status counter of the PVC. The range of the value is 1 to 255.
Description
Using the fr lmi n391dte command, you can configure N391 parameter at the DTE
side. Using the undo fr lmi n391dte command, you can restore the default value.
By default, its value is 6.

The DTE sends a Status-Enquiry packet at regular interval set by T391 to the DCE.
There are two types of Status-Enquiry packets: link integrity authentication packet
and link status enquiry packet. The N391 parameter defines the ratio of sending
the two types of packets, that is, link integrity authentication packets: link status
enquiry packets = (N391 - 1): 1.
Example
Set DTE as the operating mode of Frame Relay interface Serial1/0/0, and the
counter value of the PVC status to 10.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] link-protocol fr
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr interface-type dte
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr lmi n391dte 10
fr lmi n392dce Syntax
fr lmi n392dce n392-value
undo fr lmi n392dce
View
Interface view
Parameter
n392-value: Error threshold, which ranges from 1 to 10.
Description
Using the fr lmi n392dce command, you can set N392 parameter at the DCE side.
Using the undo fr lmi n392dce command, you can restore the default
configuration.
By default, the parameter value is 3.
The DCE requires the DTE to send a Status-Enquiry packet at regular interval (set
by T392). If the DCE does not receive the Status-Enquiry packet within a period of
time, it will record the error by adding 1 to the error count. If the errors exceed the
threshold, the DCE would consider the physical channels and all the DLCIs to be
unavailable.
N392 and N393 together define the “error threshold”. N393 defines the event
number observed and N392 defines the error threshold of that number (N393).
That is, if number of errors that occurred to the DCE reaches N392 in N393 events,
DCE will consider the errors have reached the threshold and declare the physical
channels and all DLCIs to be unavailable.
N392 should be less than N393.
For the related commands, see fr interface-type and fr lmi n393dce.

Example
Set the operation of frame relay interface Serial1/0/0 as DCE mode and sets N392
to 5 and N393 to 6.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr lmi n392dce 5
undo fr lmi n392dte
View
Interface view
Parameter
n392-value: Error threshold, which ranges from 1 to 10.
Description
Using the fr lmi n392dte command, you can set N392 parameter at the DTE side.
Using the undo fr lmi n392dte command, you can restore the default
configuration.
By default, the parameter is 3.
The DTE sends a Status-Enquiry packet at a regular interval to the DCE to inquire
the link status. On receiving this packet, the DCE will immediately send a
Status-Response packet. If the DTE does not receive the response packet in the
specified time, it will record the error by adding 1 to the error count. If the errors
exceed the threshold, the DTE will consider that the physical channels and all the
DLCIs to be unavailable.
N392 and N393 together define the “error threshold”. N393 indicates the event
number observed and N392 indicates the error threshold of that number (N393).
That is, if N392 errors occurred in N393 Status-Enquiry packets in the DTE, the DTE
would consider that the error has exceeded the threshold and declare the physical
channels and all DLCIs to be unavailable.
N392 at DTE side should be less than N393 at DTE side.
For the related commands, see fr interface-type and fr lmi n393dte.
Example
Set the operation of frame relay interface Serial1/0/0 as the DTE mode and sets
N392 to 5 and N393 to 6.

fr lmi n393dce Syntax
fr lmi n393dce n393-value
undo fr lmi n393dce
View
Interface view
Parameter
Event counter. The range of the value is 1~10.
Description
Using the fr lmi n393dce command, you can set the N393 parameter at the DCE
side. Using the undo fr lmi n393dce command, you can restore the default
configuration.
The DCE requires the DTE to send a Status-Enquiry packet at a regular interval (set
by T392). If the DCE does not receive the Status-Enquiry packet, it will record the
error by adding 1 to the error count. If the errors exceed the threshold, the DCE
would consider the physical channels and all the DLCIs to be unavailable.
N392 and N393 together define the “error threshold”. N393 defines the event
number observed and N392 defines the error threshold of that number (N393).
That is, if the number of errors that occurred to the DCE reach N392 in N393
events, DCE will consider the errors have reached the threshold and declare the
physical channels and all DLCIs to be unavailable.
N392 at DCE side should be less than N393 at DCE side.
For the related commands, see fr interface-type and fr lmi n392dce.
Example
Set the operation of frame relay interface Serial1/0/0 as DCE mode and sets N392
to 5 and N393 to 6.


undo fr lmi n393dte
View
Interface view
Parameter
Event counter. The range of the value is 1~10.
Description
Using the fr lmi n393dte command, you can set N393 parameter at the DTE side.
Using the undo fr lmi n393dte command, you can restore the default
configuration.
The DTE sends a Status-Enquiry packet at a regular interval to the DCE to inquire
the link status. On receiving this packet, the DCE will immediately send a
Status-Response packet. If the DTE does not receive the response packet in the
specified time, it will record the error by adding 1 to the error count. If the errors
exceed the threshold, the DTE will consider that the physical channels and all the
DLCIs to be unavailable.
N392 and N393 together define the “error threshold”. N393 indicates the event
number observed and N392 indicates the error threshold of that number (N393).
That is, if N392 errors occurred in N393 Status-Enquiry packets in the DTE, the DTE
would consider that the error count has exceeded the threshold and declare the
physical channels and all DLCIs to be unavailable.
N392 at DTE side should be less than N393 at DTE side.
For the related commands, see fr interface-type and fr lmi n392dte.
Example
Set the operation of frame relay interface Serial1/0/0 as the DTE mode and sets
N392 to 5 and N393 to 6.
fr lmi t392dce Syntax
fr lmi t392dce t392-value
undo fr lmi t392dce
View
Interface view
Parameter
t392-value: Value of the polling timer. The range of the value is 5 to 30, in
seconds.
Description
Using the fr lmi t392dce command, you can set T392 parameter at the DCE side.
Using the undo fr lmi t392dce command, you can restore the default
configuration.
By default, the parameter value is 15s.
This parameter defines the maximum time for DCE waiting for a Status-Enquiry.
T392 at DCE side should be greater than T391 at DTE side.
Example
Set the frame relay interface Serial1/0/0 to operate in DCE mode and set T392 to
10s.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr lmi t392dce 10
fr lmi type Syntax
fr lmi type { ansi | nonstandard | q933a }
undo fr lmi type
View
Interface view
Parameter
ansi: Standard LMI protocol type of ANSI T1.617 Appendix D.
nonstandard: Nonstandard compatible LMI protocol type.
q933a: Standard LMI protocol type of Q.933 Appendix A.
Description
Using the fr lmi type command, you can configure the Frame Relay LMI protocol
type. Using the undo fr lmi type command, you can restore to the default value of
LMI protocol type.
By default, the LMI protocol type is q933a.

The NE16E/08E/05 routers usually support three LMI protocols, namely, Q.933
Appendix A, ANSI T1.617 Appendix D and Nonstandard compatible LMI protocol.
Example
Set the FR LIMI type of Serial1/0/0 to nonstandard.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr lmi type nonstandard
fr map ip Syntax
fr map ip { protocol-address [ ip-mask ] | default } dlci [ broadcast ] [ nonstandard |

ietf ]
undo fr map ip { protocol-address | default } dlci
View
Interface view
Parameter
protocol-address: Peer protocol address.
ip-mask: IP mask used to establish a network segment map.
dlci: local virtual circuit number, and the range of the value is 16 to 1007.
default: Indicates that the system establishes one default map.
broadcast: optional, which is used to specify if broadcast packet can be sent in the
mapping.
nonstandard: Indicates that map adopts nonstandard compatible encapsulation

format.
letf: Indicates that map adopts ietf encapsulation format.
Description
Using the fr map ip command, you can add a FR address mapping. Using the undo
fr map ip command, you can cancel the configuration.
By default, no static address mapping existing and inverse address resolution

enabled.
The mapping can be manually established or can be completed via the inverse
address resolution protocol. Manually configure the static mapping when there are
a few peer hosts or there is a default route. When the peer router supports inverse
address resolution protocol and the network is rather complex, the dynamic
address mapping is established via the inverse address resolution protocol.
For the related commands, see display fr map and fr inarp.

Example
The peer router IP address connected to the local interface serial1/0/0 is

202.38.163.252. There is a virtual circuit with DLCI 50 on local Serial1/0/0
connected to this router. Configure the static address mapping as follows:
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr map ip 202.38.163.252 50
fr switch Syntax
fr switch name [ interface interface-type interface-number dlci dlci1 interface

interface-type interface-number dlci dlci2 ]
undo fr switch name
View
System view
Parameter
name: Name of PVC used for frame relay switching, consisting of 30 characters at
most.
interface interface-type interface-number dlci dlci: DLCI number at both ends of

PVC as well as the type and number of its interface. The peer can be specified as
Tunnel interface.
Description
Using the fr switch command, you can create a PVC used for frame relay switching
and enter frame relay switching view. Using the undo fr switch command, you can
delete a specified PVC.
By default, there is no PVC used for frame relay switching.
The interface for forwarding packets can be either a frame relay interface or an
MFR interface. If Tunnel interface is specified as the forwarding interface, frame
relay packets over IP can thus be realized.
In frame relay switching view, the shutdown/undo shutdown operation can be

executed on a PVC.
If a PVC used for switching has been configured, its interface and DLCI cannot be
changed any longer. To change them, you must delete the defined PVC used for
switching first.
For the related commands, see display fr pvc-info, fr dlci-switch, fr switching, and
fr dlci.
Example
Create a PVC named pvc1 on the DCE serving as the switch, which is from the
DCLI 100 of serial interface 0/0/0 to the DLCI 200 of serial interface 1/0/0.
[3Com] fr switching
[3Com] fr switch pvc1 interface serial 0/0/0 dlci 100 interface
serial 1/0/0 dlci 200
[3Com-fr-switching-pvc1]
fr switching Syntax
fr switching
undo fr switching
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the fr switching command, you can enable frame relay PVC switching. Using
the undo fr switching command, you can disable frame relay PVC switching.
By default, no FR switching is enabled.
The command is used to enable Frame Relay PVC switching.
Example
Enable PVC switching on FR interface.
[3Com] fr switching
interface mfr Syntax
interface mfr interface-number [ .subnumber]
undo interface mfr interface-number [ .subnumber ]
View
System view
Parameter
interface-number: Interface number of a multilink frame relay bundle, including

slot number/card number/interface number, in which interface number ranges
from 0 to 1023.
subnumber: Sub-interface number of a multilink frame relay bundle, ranging from

0 to 4095.
Description
Using the interface mfr command, you can create a multilink frame relay bundle
interface or sub-interface and enter the corresponding interface view. Using the
undo interface mfr command, you can delete a specified multilink frame relay
bundle interface or sub-interface.
By default, there is no multilink frame relay interface or sub-interface.
Before using the undo interface mfr command to delete an MFR interface, you
must delete all physical interfaces from the MFR interface.
Before an MFR sub-interface is created, the MFR interface must be created first.
For the related commands, see link-protocol fr mfr and mfr bundle-name.
Example
Create a multilink frame relay bundle interface with a point-to-multipoint

sub-interface.
[3Com] interface mfr 4/0/123

[3Com-MFR4/0/123] quit
[3Com] interface mfr 4/0/123.1
[3Com-MFR4/0/123.1]
link-protocol fr Syntax
link-protocol fr [ nonstandard | ietf ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
nonstandard: Nonstandard compatible encapsulation format.
ietf: Default encapsulation format according to the Internet Engineering Task Force
(IETF) standard.
Description
Using the link-protocol fr command, you can encapsulate interface link layer
protocol as Frame Relay.
By default, the link-layer protocol encapsulated on the interface is PPP, and the
frame relay encapsulation format is IETF.
In VRP, the Frame Relay encapsulation can be either ietf or nonstandard

compatible encapsulation (nonstandard). IETF encapsulation conforms to
RFC1490, that is, it supports the IETF standard.

Example
Configure Frame Relay encapsulation on interface Serial1/0/0 and select the

nonstandard encapsulation compatible format.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] link-protocol fr nonstandard
link-protocol fr mfr Syntax
link-protocol fr mfr interface-number
View
Interface view
Parameter

Description
Using the link-protocol fr mfr command, you can configure the current physical
interface as a multilink frame relay bundle link and bundle it onto a specified MFR
interface.
By default, there is no multilink frame relay bundle link.
When this command is configured, the specified MFR interface must exist. A
maximum of 16 physical interfaces can be bundled onto an MFR interface.
To delete a physical interface from an MFR interface, use the link-protocol

command to apply a link layer protocol of non frame relay MFR to the interface.
For the related commands, see interface mfr and mfr link-name.
Example
Configure the current serial interface as a bundle link and add it onto the frame
relay bundle interface mfr4/0/123.
[3Com-Serial4/1/2] link-protocol fr mfr 4/0/123
mfr bundle-name Syntax
mfr bundle-name [ name ]
undo mfr bundle-name [ name ]
View
MFR interface view

Parameter
name: Bundle identification, in the form of character string, with a length ranging
from 1 to 49.
Description
Using the mfr bundle-name command, you can set frame relay bundle
identification (BID). Using the undo mfr bundle-name command, you can restore
the default value.
By default, BID is in the form of “mfr + frame relay bundle number”, such as
mfr4/0/123.
Each multilink frame relay bundle has a BID, which is only significant at the local.
Therefore, the BIDs at both ends of the link can be the same.
When changing the BID of an interface, you must execute the shutdown/undo
shutdown command on the interface to make the new BID valid.
For the related command, see mfr link-name.
Example
Set the frame relay link BID to bundle1.
[3Com-MFR4/0/123] mfr bundle-name bundle1
mfr fragment Syntax
mfr fragment
undo mfr fragment
View
MFR interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the mfr fragment command, you can enable fragmentation of a multilink
frame relay bundle. Using the undo mfr fragment command, you can disable the
function.
By default, the fragmentation of a multilink frame relay bundle is disabled.
For the related commands, see mfr fragment-size and mfr window-size.
Example
Enable fragmentation on the MFR interface 4/0/123.

[3Com] interface mfr 4/0/123

[3Com-MFR4/0/123] mfr fragment
mfr fragment-size Syntax
mfr fragment-size bytes
undo mfr fragment-size
View
Parameter
bytes: Fragment size, in bytes, ranging from 60 to 1500.
Description
Using the mfr fragment-size command, you can configure the maximum fragment
size allowed on a frame relay bundle link. Using the undo mfr fragment-size
command, you can restore the default setting.
By default, the maximum fragment size allowed on a frame relay bundle link is of
300 bytes.
The priority of the fragment size configured in frame relay interface view is higher
than that of the one configured in MFR interface view.
For the related commands, see mfr fragment and mfr window-size.
Example
Configure the maximum fragment size allowed on the multilink frame relay
bundle link Serial4/1/2 to be 70 bytes.
[3Com-Serial4/1/2] mfr fragment-size 70
mfr link-name Syntax
mfr link-name [ name ]
undo mfr link-name [ name ]
View
Parameter
name: Name of a bundle link identification, in the form of character string,

ranging from 1 to 49.
Description
Using the mfr link-name command, you can set the frame relay bundle link
identification (LID). Using the undo mfr link-name command, you can restore the
default setting.
By default, LID is the name of the corresponding physical interface.
The peer equipment identifies a frame relay bundle link via LID or associates the
bundle link with a frame relay bundle by using LID. LID is locally valid; therefore,
the LIDs at both ends of a link can be the same.
When changing the bundle LID on an interface, you must execute the
shutdown/undo shutdown command on the interface to make the new bundle
LID valid.
For the related command, see mfr bundle-name.
Example
Set the bundle LID of the multilink frame relay bundle link Serial4/1/2 to be bl1.
[3Com-Serial4/1/2] mfr link-name bl1
mfr retry Syntax
mfr retry number
undo mfr retry
View
Parameter
number: The maximum times that a bundle link can resend hello messages,
ranging from 1 to 5. By default, it is twice.
Description
Using the mfr retry command, you can set the maximum times that a frame relay
bundle link can resend hello message when waiting for a hello acknowledgement
message. Using the undo mfr retry command, you can restore the default setting.
If the times that a bundle link resends hello message reach the maximum without
receiving acknowledgement from the peer, the system will regard the link protocol
on the bundle link to be malfunctioning.
Only after the link-protocol fr mfr command is used to associate a frame relay
bundle link interface with a frame relay bundle, can this command be configured.
For the related commands, see mfr timer ack and mfr timer hello.
Example
Set the bundle link Serial4/1/2 to resend hello message for 3 times at most.
[3Com-Serial4/1/2] mfr retry 3
mfr timer ack Syntax
mfr timer ack seconds
undo mfr timer ack
View
Parameter
seconds: Time of waiting for hello acknowledgment message before resending

hello message, in second, ranging from 1 to 10. By default, it is 4 seconds.
Description
Using the mfr timer ack command, you can set the time of waiting for hello
acknowledgment message before frame relay bundle link resends hello message.
Using the undo mfr timer ack command, you can restore the default setting.
For the related commands, see mfr timer hello and mfr retry.
Example
Set the frame relay bundle link Serial4/1/2 to wait for 6 seconds before resending
hello message.
[3Com-Serial4/1/2] link-protocol fr mfr 4/0/123

[3Com-Serial4/1/2] mfr timer ack 6
mfr timer hello Syntax
mfr timer hello [ seconds ]
undo mfr timer hello [ seconds ]
View
Parameter
seconds: Interval for a bundle link to send hello message, in seconds, ranging from
1 to 180. By default, it is 10 seconds.
Description
Using the mfr timer hello command, you can set the interval for a frame relay
bundle link to send hello message. Using the undo mfr timer hello command, you
Both ends of a frame relay bundle link periodically send hello message to the peer
end. After the peer receives the hello message, it will response hello
acknowledgement message.
For the related commands, see mfr timer ack and mfr retry.
Example
Set the bundle link Serial4/1/2 to send hello message once every 15 seconds.
[3Com-Serial4/1/2] mfr timer hello 15
mfr window-size Syntax
mfr window-size number
undo mfr window-size
View
MFR interface view
Parameter
number: Number of fragments, ranging from 1 to 16.
Description
Using the mfr window-size command, you can configure the number of
fragments that can be held by the window used in sliding window algorithm
when multilink frame relay reassembles received fragments.
By default, the size of a sliding window is equal to the number of physical

interfaces of an MFR bundle.
For the related commands, see interface mfr, mfr fragment, and mfr
fragment-size.
Example
Set the size of the sliding window of the MFR bundle interface MFR4/0/123 to be
8.
[3Com-MFR4/0/123] mfr window-size 8
shutdown Syntax
shutdown
undo shutdown
View
Frame relay switching view
Description
Using the shutdown command, you can disable any current switching PVCs. Using
the undo shutdown command, you can enable any current switching PVCs.
By default, switching PVC is enabled.
Example
Disable all the current switching PVCs.
[3Com] fr switch pvc1 interface serial 1/0/0 dlci 100 interface

serial 2/0/0 dlci 200
[3Com-fr-switching-pvc1] shutdown
reset fr inarp Syntax
reset fr inarp
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reset fr inarp command, you can clear the address mapping established
by inverse ARP.
In some special cases, for example, when the network architecture changes, the
dynamic address maps originally established will become invalid. hence it is
necessary to establish them again. Users can use this command to clear all the
dynamic address maps.
For the related command, see fr inarp.
Example
Clear all the Frame Relay dynamic address maps.
[3Com] reset fr inarp
timer hold Syntax
timer hold seconds
undo timer hold

View
Interface view
Parameter
seconds: value of polling timer, which ranges from 0 to 32767 in seconds. 0

indicates that the LMI protocol is disabled.
Description
Using the timer hold command, you can configure the polling timer at the DTE
side. Using the undo timer hold command, you can restore its default value.
By default, the parameter is 10 seconds.
The parameter defines the interval of Status-Enquiry packet sent by DTE.
For the related commands, see fr interface-type and fr lmi t392dce.
Example
Configure that Frame Relay interface serial1/0/0 to work in DTE mode, and set the
value of polling timer to 15 seconds.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] timer hold 15
ATM Configuration
Commands
atm-class Syntax
atm-class atm-class-name
undo atm-class atm-class-name
View
Interface view and PVC view
Parameter
atm-class-name: Name of ATM-Class.
Description
Using the atm-class command, you can apply a set of parameters (which are
defined in ATM-Class) to an ATM interface or a PVC. Using the undo atm-class
command, you can delete the specified ATM-Class.
For the related command, see atm class.

Example
Apply an ATM-Class named "main" to the interface Atm1/0/0.
[3Com-Atm1/0/0] atm-class main
atm class Syntax
atm class atm-class-name
undo atm class atm-class-name
View
System view
Parameter
atm-class-name: Name of ATM-Class.
Description
Using the atm class command, you can create an ATM-Class and enter the
ATM-Class view. Using the undo atm class command, you can delete the specified
ATM-Class.
An ATM-Class is a group of predefined parameters that can be used for ATM

interface or PVC.
For the related command, see atm-class.
Example
Create an ATM-Class named "main".
[3Com] atm class main
clock Syntax
undo clock
View
ATM master interface view
Parameter
master: Specify ATM interface to use the internal transmission clock signal.
slave: Restore the line clock signal.

Description
Using the clock command, you can specify ATM interface to use internal
transmission clock signal. Using the undo clock command, you can restore the
usage of network clock signal.
By default, ATM interface uses the network clock signal. This clock signal is usually
provided by the device which provides ATM interfaces.
When two network devices are directly connected in the back-to-back method
through the ATM interfaces, this command is used to set the internal transmission
clock at the ATM interface of one device.
Although this command is valid on both ATM main interface and sub-interface, it can only be
used in ATM main interface view and there is not this command in ATM sub-interface view.
For the related command, see display atm interface.
Example
Specify ATM interface Atm1/0/0 to use the internal transmission clock.
[3Com-Atm1/0/0] clock master
debugging atm all Syntax
debugging atm all
undo debugging atm all
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the debugging atm all command, you can enable all the debugging
switches of ATM. Using the undo debugging atm all command, you can disable
the debugging.
By default, all the ATM debugging switches are disabled.
Because the use of this command can lead to a mass of output information, this may cause that
users cannot control network devices through terminals and the efficiency of packet transmitting
and receiving may be greatly damaged.
For the related commands, see debugging atm error, debugging atm event, and
debugging atm packet.
debugging atm error Syntax
debugging atm error [ interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num } [

pvc { pvc-name | vpi/vci } ] ]
undo debugging atm error [ interface { interface-name | interface-type

interface-num } [ pvc { pvc-name | vpi/vci } ] ]
View
User view
Parameter
interface-name: ATM interface name. For detailed naming rules, please refer to
the “Interface Configuration” chapter in this manual. If it is not specified, all the
error debugging of ATM are enabled (including global debugging, interface-level
debugging and PVC-level debugging).
interface-type: Interface type, which can determine an ATM interface together

with interface-num.
interface-num: Interface number, which can determine an ATM interface together

with interface-type.
pvc-name: PVC name, optional. If no PVC name and VPI/VCI pair are specified, all
the error debugging of the PVC will be enabled.
vpi/vci: VPI/VCI pair, optional. For more details, please refer to “Parameter
Description” in the pvc command.
Description
Using the debugging atm error command, you can enable the error debugging of
ATM. Using the undo debugging atm error command, you can disable the
debugging.
By default, all the ATM error debugging switches are disabled.
The interface-name parameter is actually composed of interface-type and

interface-num. The difference of using them only lies in the space. In the
command line, there are spaces in interface-type and interface-num, but there is
no space in interface-name.
For the related commands, see display debugging and debugging atm all.
Example
Enable all the error debugging of ATM.
<3Com> debugging atm error

debugging atm event Syntax
debugging atm event [ interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num } [

undo debugging atm event [ interface { interface-name | interface-type

interface-num } [ pvc { pvc-name |[ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci } ] ]
View
User view
Parameter
“Interface Configuration” part of this manual. If it is not specified, all the event
debugging of ATM is enabled by default (including global debugging,
interface-level debugging and PVC-level debugging).

with interface-num.

pvc-name: PVC name, optional. If no PVC name and no VPI/VCI pair are specified,
all the event debugging of PVC will be enabled.
Description
Using the debugging atm event command, you can enable the event debugging
of ATM. Using the undo debugging atm event command, you can disable the
debugging.
By default, all the debugging of ATM event is disabled.

This command is used to enable all the debugging of events that happen at the
ATM interface or a PVC, which can be used to trace some essential events of the
system. Such information may be helpful for detecting network faults.
Example
The example is a case to enable the debugging of ATM events and display the
results.
Enable all the event debugging of ATM.
<3Com> debugging atm event

debugging atm packet Syntax
debugging atm packet [ interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num }

[ pvc { pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci } ] ]
undo debugging atm packet [ interface { interface-name | interface-type

interface-num } [ pvc { pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci } ] ]
View
User view
Parameter
interface-name: ATM interface name, optional. For detailed naming rules, please
refer to “Interface Configuration” part of this manual. If it is not specified, all the
packet debugging of ATM are enabled by default (including global debugging,
interface-level debugging and PVC-level debugging).

with interface-num.

all the packet debugging of PVC will be enabled.
Description
Using the debugging atm packet command, you can enable the packet debugging
of ATM. Using the undo debugging atm packet command, you can disable the
debugging.
By default, all the debugging of ATM packet is disabled.

After the packet switch is enabled, the detailed information about

receiving/sending packets at the ATM interface or PVC will be displayed. This will
be very helpful for system troubleshooting.
The received packets will display all the information about received frames , which
can indicate whether the sending side correctly encapsulates these frames. This
will be greatly helpful for the network device detection.
Packet debug information displays the PDU byte information in hex, through
which technical support personnel or engineers can locate some system errors.
Since the use of this command can lead to a mass of output information during each packet
receiving and transmitting, this may cause that users cannot control network devices through
their terminals, and thus greatly affect the efficiency of packet transmitting and receiving.
Example
The example is a case to enable the debugging of ATM packet and display the
results.
Enable all the packet debugging of ATM.
<3Com> debugging atm packet
After some time, the following messages may appear:
……
*515396.229644-atm-8-debug8: Atm1/0/0 pvc 1/32 out ppp pkt, snap,
22
*515396.229710-atm-8-debug8: FE FE 03 CF FF 03 C0 21 01 22 00 0E
01 04 05 DC
*515396.229812-atm-8-debug8: 05 06 00 00 1F 38
*515396.232644-atm-8-debug8: Atm1/0/0 pvc 1/32 out ppp pkt, snap,
22
*515396.232710-atm-8-debug8: FE FE 03 CF FF 03 C0 21 01 23 00 0E
01 04 05 DC
*515396.232812-atm-8-debug8: 05 06 00 00 1F 38
It indicates that PPP packets are being output from PVC 1/32 of Atm1/0/0.
display atm class Syntax
display atm class [ atm-class-name ]
View
Any view
Parameter
atm-class-name: ATM-Class name.
Description
Using the display atm class command, you can view the information about
ATM-Class. By default, if no ATM-Class name is specified, the information of all
ATM-Class is displayed.
For the related command, see atm class.
Example
Display the information about the ATM-Class named "main" in devices.
<3Com> display atm class main
The following information is displayed:

ATM VC-CLASS: main

Service ubr 8000
encapsulation aal5snap
The explanation on the above messages is:
ATM-Class name is "main", and the following contents are set in the ATM-Class:
the service type is unspecified bit rate and the output peak rate of ATM cells is
8000 and the AAL encapsulation type is SNAP.
display atm interface Syntax
display atm interface [ interface-name | interface-type interface-num ]
View
Any view
Parameter
“Interface Configuration” part of this manual. If it is not specified, all the
information about ATM interface will be displayed by default.

with interface-num.

Description
Using the display atm interface command, you can locate the problems efficiently
and get detailed information related to ATM configuration.

no space in interface-name. When the interface is the main interface, the
information of all interfaces (including sub-interface) at the interface will be
displayed.
For the related command, see display atm.
Example
Display the information about ATM interface atm4/0/0.
<3Com> display atm interface atm 4/0/0
ATM interface Atm4/0/0, State UP

Port Information:
Maximum VCs: 1024,
PVCs: 4, MAPs: 4
input pkts: 0, input bytes: 0, input pkt errors: 0

output pkts: 69, output bytes: 2218, output pkt errors: 8
Sub-interface Information:
PVCs: 4, MAPs: 4
input pkts: 0, input bytes: 0, input pkt errors: 0
output pkts: 69, output bytes: 2218, output pkt errors: 8
The maximum number of PVCs on the ATM interface is 1024. The input packets,
bytes and errors of input packets are all 0; output packets are 69, output bytes are
2218 and output packet errors are 8; there are totally 4 PVCs and 4 MAPs at the
interface and the interface status is active (UP).
display atm map-info Syntax
display atm map-info [ interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num } [

View
Any view
Parameter
information about the higher layer mapping table of ATM interface will be
displayed by default.

with interface-num.

pvc-name: PVC name, optional parameter. If no PVC name and no VPI/VCI pair are
specified, the information of the higher layer protocol mapping table about all
PVCs within specified ATM interface will be displayed by default.
Description
Using the display atm map-info command, you can view the information about
the upper layer protocol mapping table of ATM.

For the related commands, see map ip, map ppp, and map bridge.
Example
Display the information about the upper layer protocol mapping table of all ATM
interfaces.
<3Com> display atm map-info
Atm1/0/0, PVC 1/32, PPP, Virtual-Template10, UP

Atm1/0/0, PVC 1/33, IP & Mask, State UP
100.11.1.1, mask 255.255.0.0, vlink 1
Atm1/0/0, PVC 2/101, ETH, Virtual-Ethernet1/1/1, MAC 00E0.FC01.0203,
UP
PVC 1/32 of Atm 1/0/0 interface uses PPPoA mapping, the VT interface numbered
10 is used and the status is activated (UP);
PVC 1/33 of Atm 1/0/0 interface uses IPoA mapping, the configured mapping
static IP address is 100.11.1.1, the address mask is 255.255.0.0, it occupies No.1
vlink and its status is activated (UP);
PVC 2/101 of Atm 1/0/0 interface uses PPPoEoA mapping or IPoEoA mapping, VE
interface numbered 1/1/1 is adopted, the configured MAC address is
00E0.FC01.0203 and its status is activated (UP).
display atm pvc-group Syntax
display atm pvc-group [ interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num }

[ pvc { pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci } ] ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-name: ATM interface name. The detailed naming rules can be

determined according to the actual-configured network device type. If it is not
specified, all the information about PVC-Group of ATM interface will be displayed
by default.

with interface-num.

the information about all PVC-Groups within the specified ATM interface will be
displayed by default.
description” in the pvc command.
Description
Using the display atm pvc-group command, you can view the information about
PVC-Group.

interface-num. The difference of using them only relies on a space. In the
command line, there is a space in interface-type and interface-num, but there is no
space in interface-name.
For the related command, see pvc-group.
Example
Display the information about PVC-Group of all ATM interfaces.
<3Com> display atm pvc-group
VPI/VCI PVC-NAME STATE ENCAP PROT INTERFACE GROUP

1/32 3Com UP SNAP IP Atm10/1/0(UP) 1/32
1/33 UP SNAP IP Atm10/1/0(UP) 1/32
3/34 UP SNAP IP Atm10/1/0(UP) 1/32
2/32 UP MUX IP Atm10/1/0.1(UP) 2/32
2/33 UP MUX IP Atm10/1/0.1(UP) 2/32
The explanation on the above messages is as follows (Taking the first record as an
example, and the last four records can refer to the following explanation.):
PVC with VPI/VCI pair as 1/32, its has been activated (UP) and the name is
"3Com". The AAL encapsulation type is SNAP. The application type is IPoA. The
interface is ATM main interface: Slot number is 1, adapter number is 1 and the
interface number is 0. The PVC-Group is created based on PVC "1/32".
display atm pvc-info Syntax
display atm pvc-info [ interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num } [

pvc { pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci } ] ]
View
Any view
Parameter
information about PVC of ATM interface will be displayed by default.

with interface-num.

pvc-name: PVC name, optional parameter. If no PVC name and no VPI/VCI pair are
specified, the information about all PVCs within the specified ATM interface will
be displayed by default.
Description
Using the display atm pvc-info command, you can view the information about
PVC.

For the related command, see pvc.
Example
Display the information about PVC of all ATM interfaces.
<3Com> display atm pvc-info
VPI/VCI | STATE | PVC-NAME | INDEX | ENCAP | PROT | INTERFACE

--------|-------|----------|-------|-------|------|----------
1/32 |UP |3Com |1 |SNAP |IP |Atm1/0/0 (UP)
1/33 |UP |3Com |5 |MUX |None |Atm1/0/0 (UP)
1/55 |UP |datacomm |2 |SNAP |PPP |Atm1/0/0.1 (UP)
2/66 |UP | |4 |SNAP |IP |Atm1/0/0.4 (UP)
2/101 |UP |beijing |3 |SNAP |ETH |Atm1/0/0.2 (UP)
The explanation on the above messages is as follows (Taking the first record as an
example, and the last four records can refer to the following explanation.):
PVC with VPI/VCI pair as 1/32, its has been activated (UP) and the name is
"3Com". The index number is 1. The AAL encapsulation type is SNAP. The
application type is IPoA. The interface is ATM main interface: Slot number is 1,
adapter number is 0 and the interface number is 0.
encapsulation Syntax
encapsulation aal5-encap
undo encapsulation
View
PVC view
Parameter
aal5-encap: AAL5 encapsulation type, its possible values are as follows:
■ aal5snap: LLC/SNAP (Logical Link Control / Subnet Access Protocol)

encapsulation type
■ aal5mux: MUX encapsulation type
■ aal5nlpid: RFC1490 encapsulation type
Description
Using the encapsulation command, you can specify ATM AAL5 encapsulation type
for PVC. Using the undo encapsulation command, you can restore the default
encapsulation.
By default, aal5snap encapsulation is adopted.
Only aal5snap encapsulation supports InARP protocol. InARP is not supported

when aal5mux and aal5nlpid encapsulations are adopted.
To change the encapsulation type for PVC to aal5mux or aal5nlpid, InARP must be
deleted first.
In addition, some types of encapsulations may not support some applications

method (one or more of IPoA, IPoEoA, PPPoA and PPPoEoA). When such cases
appear, the system will give a prompt.
Example
The two examples can both specify AAL5 encapsulation type of PVC as aal5snap.
Display how to specify AAL5 encapsulation type of PVC 1/32 as aal5snap.
[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/32] encapsulation aal5snap
Display how to specify AAL5 encapsulation type of PVC 1/33 as aal5snap.
[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/33] undo encapsulation
interface atm Syntax
interface atm interface-num
interface atm interface-number.subinterface-num [ multi-point | point-to-point ]
undo interface atm interface-number.subinterface-num
View
System view
Parameter
Interface number: ATM master interface number. For detailed numbering rules,
please refer to “Interface Configuration” part of this manual.
subinterface number: ATM sub-interface number. For detailed numbering rules,

please refer to “Interface Configuration” part of this manual..
multi-point | point-to-point: Sub-interface connection type.
Description
Using the interface atm command, you can create an ATM sub-interface or enter
an ATM interface view. Using the undo interface atm command, you can delete an
ATM sub-interface.
By default, the connection type of sub-interface is multi-point.
ATM sub-interface has two connection types: multi-point and point-to-point. Multiple PVCs can
be created at the sub-interface of multi-point connection type, but only one PVC can be created
at the sub-interface of point-to-point type.
Example
The two examples display how to enter the ATM main interface or create/enter the
ATM sub-interface.
Enter the main interface Atm1/0/0.
[3Com] interface atm 1/0/0
Create/enter the sub-interface Atm1/0/0.1 and set its connection type as

point-to-point.
[3Com] interface atm 11/1/0.1 p2p
ip-precedence Syntax
ip-precedence{ pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci } { min [ max ] | default }
undo ip-precedence{ pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci }
View
ATM PVC-Group view
Parameter
pvc-name: PVC name, whose maximum length is 16 characters (case insensitive).

It should be unique at ATM interface. And it shouldn't be legal VPI/VCI pair. For
example, "1/20" cannot be a PVC name. The PVC corresponding to pvc-name
must have already been created.
vpi/vci: vpi is ATM Virtual Path Identifier (VPI), which ranges from 0 to 255; vci is
ATM Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) , which ranges from 0 to 2047. Usually, the
vci values from 0 to 31 are reserved for special usage and cannot be used. PVC
corresponding to vpi/vci must have already been created.
min: Minimum preference of IP packets carried by the PVC.

max: Maximum preference of IP packets carried by the PVC.
default: Packets carried by the PVC with default preference.
Description
Using the ip-precedence command, you can set the precedence of IP packets
carried over PVC. Using the undo ip-precedence command, you can delete the
precedence configuration of IP packets carried over PVC.
This command can be only used to set the PVC within the PVC-Group. The
specified minimum preference min must be less than or equal to the specified
maximum preference max.
For the related commands, see pvc-group and pvc.
Example
Display how to set an IP packet named "3Com" whose VPI/VCI is 1/32 and the
PVC carrying preference is 0 to 3.
[3Com-atm-pvc-group-Atm1/0/0-1/32-3Com] ip-precedence 3Com 1/32 0 3
map bridge Syntax
map bridge virtual-ethernet interface-num
undo map bridge
View
PVC view
Parameter
interface-num: Interface number of the VE interface, which is determined by a set

of tri-dimensional indices, i.e., slot number/module number/port number.
Description
Using the map bridge command, you can establish the IPoEoA mapping or
PPPoEoA mapping on the PVC. Using the undo map bridge command, you can
delete the mapping.
By default, no mapping is configured.
Before using this command, make sure that VE has been created.
As the upper layer of the link layer on the VE interface is Ethernet and the lower layer is carried
by AAL5, the MAC address used by VE is not the actual MAC address and it cannot be obtained
from the hardware and must be configured manually. Users need to configure the correct MAC
address by themselves.
Example
The following example shows a complete process of IPoEoA configuration.
Establish a VE interface Virtual-Ethernet2/0/0.
[3Com] interface virtual-ethernet 2
Configure IP address 10.1.1.1/16 for the VE interface.
[3Com-Virtual-Ethernet2/0/0] ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.0.0

[3Com-Virtual-Ethernet2/0/0] quit
Establish PVC 1/102 on the ATM interface Atm2/0/0

[3Com-Atm2/0/0] pvc 1/102
Establish the IPoE mapping using the established VE interface in PVC view.
[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm2/0/0-1/102] map bridge virtual-ethernet2
map ip Syntax
map ip { ip-address [ ip-mask ] | default | inarp [ minutes ] } [ broadcast ]
undo map ip { ip-address | default | inarp }
View
PVC view
Parameter
ip-address: Opposite IP address mapping to PVC.
ip-mask: IP address mask, optional. If a packet cannot find the next hop at the
interface, but the next hop address belongs to the network segment specified by
ip-address and ip-mask, it can be sent over the PVC.
default: A mapping with the default route property is set. If a packet cannot find a
mapping with the same address of next hop at the interface, but one PVC has the
default mapping, the packet can be sent over the PVC.
inarp: Enables Inverse Address Resolution Protocol (InARP) at PVC.
minutes: Time interval to send InARP packets in minutes, optional. The range of
the value is 1 to 600 and the default value is 15.
broadcast: Pseudobroadcast, optional parameter. If a mapping with such property

is configured at PVC, the broadcast packets at the interfaces should be sent a copy
at the PVC.
Description
Using the map ip command, you can create IPoA mapping for PVC. Using the
undo map ip command, you can delete the mapping.
By default, no mapping is configured. If a mapping is set, pseudobroadcast is not

supported by default.
When InARP is used, it must be aal5snap encapsulation type. InARP is not

supported when aal5mux and aal5nlpid encapsulations are adopted.
Example
The two examples are the cases creating IPoA mapping for PVC.
Display how to create a static mapping at PVC 1/32, specify the opposite IP
address to 61.123.30.169 and support pseudobroadcast.
[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/32] map ip 61.123.30.169 broadcast
Display how to enable InARP at PVC 1/33 to automatically obtain the opposite
address and send InARP packets every 10 minutes.
[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0.1-1/33] map ip inarp 10
map ppp Syntax
map ppp virtual-template vt-number
undo map ppp View
View
PVC view
Parameter
Virtual-template (VT) Interface number corresponding to PPPoA. It should be

created previously.
Description
Using the map ppp command, you can create PPPoA mapping at PVC in PVC view.
Using the undo map ppp command, you can delete the mapping.
By default, no mapping is configured.
Before this command is used, the VT must have already been created.
Example
Display a complete PPPoA configuration process.
At first, a VT interface with the number 10 is created and its IP address is

configured.
[3Com] interface virtual-template 10

[3Com-Virtual-Template10] ip address 202.38.160.1 255.255.255.0
[3Com-Virtual-Template10] quit
And then PVC 1/101 at ATM interface Atm1/0/0 is created.

[3Com-Atm1/0/0] pvc 1/101
The newly created VT interface is used to create the PPPoA mapping.
[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/101] map ppp virtual-template 10
mtu Syntax
mtu mtu-number
undo mtu
View
Interface view
Parameter
mtu-number: MTU size of ATM interface in bytes, the range of the value is 128 to
16384.
Description
Using the mtu command, you can set the size of Maximum Transmission Unit
(MTU) of the ATM interface. Using the undo mtu command, you can restore the
default of the value.
By default, 1500 bytes.
MTU of ATM interface only influences the packet assembling and packet
disassembling of IP layer at the ATM interface. Because of the limit of the QoS
queue length (for example, the default length of the FIFO queue is 75), the too
small MTU will lead to too many fragments and will be dropped by the QoS
queue. In this case, the length of the QoS queue can be enlarged appropriately.
FIFO is the queue dispatching mechanism used by PVC by default, and its queue
length can be changed by using the fifo queue-length command in the PVC view.
This command can be used in ATM main interface and sub-interface at the same time.
Example
Display how to set MTU of ATM interface Atm1/0/0 to 1492 bytes.
[3Com-Atm1/0/0] mtu 1492
oam frequency Syntax
oam frequency frequency [ up up-count down down-count retry-frequency

retry-frequency ]
undo oam frequency
View
PVC view, ATM Class view.
Parameter
frequency: Time interval to send OAM F5 Loopback cells in seconds, and the range
of the value is 1 to 600.
up-count: The number of OAM F5 Loopback cells continuously and correctly

received before PVC status changes to UP. The range of the number is 1 to 600.
down-count: The number of OAM F5 Loopback cells continuously and correctly

not received before PVC status changes to DOWN. The range of the number is 1
to 600.
retry-frequency: Before PVC status changes, the sending interval of OAM F5

Loopback cell in retransmission check, in second. The range of the value is 1 to
1000.
Description
Using the oam frequency command, you can enable the transmission of OAM F5
Loopback cell so as to check the PVC status. You can also enable OAM F5
Loopback retransmission check or modify the related parameters of the
retransmission check. Using the undo oam frequency command, you can disable
the transmission and retransmission check of the cell.
By default, OAM F5 Loopback cell transmission is disabled, but if OAM F5

Loopback cell is received, it should be responded. By default, up-count is 3,
down-count is 5 and retry-frequency is 1 second.
Example
Display how to enable OAM F5 Loopback check at PVC 1/32, with the period of
12 seconds. And set the retransmission check up-count as 4, down-count as 4 and
retransmission period as 1 second.
[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/32] oam frequency 12 up 4 down 4

retry-frequency 1
pvc Syntax
pvc { pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci }
undo pvc { pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci }
View
ATM interface view or PVC-Group view

Parameter
pvc-name: PVC name, whose maximum length is 16 characters. It shall be unique

at ATM interface (case insensitive), and can not be legal VPI/VCI pair. For example,
"1/20" cannot be a PVC name.
vpi/vci: vpi is ATM Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) in the range 0 to 255; vci is ATM
Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI). Its value range depends on interface type. See the
following table for reference. Usually, the vci values from 0 to 31 are reserved for
special usage and cannot be used.
Table 15 VCI range for each type of ATM interface
Interface type VCI

ADSL <0-255>
GSHDSL <0-255>
ATMOC3 <0-1023>
ATM25 <0-511>
ATME3 <0-1023>
ATMT3 <0-1023>
1) vpi and vci cannot both be 0.
2) A PVC in certain PVC-Group cannot be deleted at ATM interface.
Description
Using the pvc command, you can create a PVC or enter the PVC view at ATM
interface or in PVC-Group view. Using the undo pvc command, you can delete the
specified PVC.
By default, no PVC is created.
This command is used to create a PVC with specified VPI/VC.
Once pvc-name is specified for one PVC (e.g. "3Com"), it is possible to re-enter
the PVC view by inputting pvc pvc-name (e.g. " pvc 3Com"). The deletion of the
PVC can be done by inputting undo pvc pvc-name (e.g. " undo pvc 3Com") or
through the undo pvc vpi/vci (if the VPI/VCI of this PVC is 1/32, it is " undo pvc
1/32") command.
The VPI/VCI pair of each PVC is unique at an ATM interface (including main
interface and sub-interface).
The actual number of PVCs that can be created is determined by the pvc
max-number command.
For the related commands, see display atm pvc-info and pvc max-number.
Example
Display how to create a PVC named "3Com" with VPI/VCI as 1/101.
[3Com-Atm1/0/0] pvc 3Com 1/101

pvc-group Syntax
pvc-group { pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci }
undo pvc-group { pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci }
View
ATM interface view
Parameter
pvc-name: PVC name, whose maximum length is 16 characters. It is case

insensitive and should be unique at ATM interface. And it shouldn't be legal
VPI/VCI pair. For example, "1/20" cannot be a PVC name. The PVC corresponding
to pvc-name must have already been created.
vpi/vci: vpi is ATM Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) in the range 0 to 255; vci is ATM
Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI). For its value range, refer to VCI range for each
type of ATM interface. Usually, the vci values from 0 to 31 are reserved for special
usage and cannot be used. PVC corresponding to vpi/vci must have already been
created.
Description
Using the pvc-group command, you can create a PVC-Group or enter the
PVC-Group view at ATM interface. Using the undo pvc-group command, you can
delete the specified PVC-Group.
Once pvc-name is specified for some PVC (e.g. "3Com"), it is possible to enter the
PVC-Group view by inputting pvc-group pvc-name (e.g. "pvc-group 3Com"). The
deletion of the PVC-Group can be done by inputting undo pvc-group pvc-name
(e.g. "undo pvc-group 3Com") or through the undo pvc-group vpi/vci (if the
VPI/VCI of this PVC is 1/32, it is " undo pvc-group 1/32") command.
For the related commands, see ip-precedence and pvc.
Example
Display how to create a PVC-Group based on the name "3Com" and the PVC
with VPI/VCI as 1/32.
[3Com-Atm1/0/0] pvc-group 3Com 1/32.
pvc max-number Syntax
pvc max-number max-number
undo pvc max-number
View

Parameter
max-number: Maximum number of supported VCs. Value range of this parameter

depends on interface type, as shown in the following table:
Table 16 The maximum number of VCs allowed for each type of ATM interface
Interface type max-number

ADSL <1-32>
GSHDSL <1-32>
ATMOC3 <1-1024>
ATM25 <1-256>
ATME3 <1-1024>
ATMT3 <1-1024>
Description
Using the pvc max-number command, you can set the maximum number of ATM
interface virtual circuits (VC). Using the undo pvc max-number command, you can
restore the default value.
This command is used to set the maximum number of the total available VCs for
ATM main interfaces and sub-interfaces.
Although this command is valid on both ATM main interface and sub-interface, it can only be
used in ATM main interface view and there is not this command in ATM sub-interface view.
Example
The two examples can both make ATM interface Atm1/0/0 support totally 2048
VCs.
Display how to set ATM interface Atm1/0/0 to totally support maximum 2048
VCs.
[3Com-Atm1/0/0] pvc max-number 2048
Display how to set ATM interface Atm1/0/0 to support the default maximum
number of VCs (2048).
[3Com-Atm1/0/0] undo pvc max-number
pvp limit Syntax
pvp limit vpi peak-rate
undo pvp limit vpi
View

Parameter
vpi: Virtual path identifier of ATM network, its value ranges from 0 to 255.
peak-rate: Normal flow to be held. Value range of this parameter depends on

interface type, as shown in the following table:
Table 17 Value ranges of peak-rate
Interface type peak-rate

ADSL <64-640>
GSHDSL <64-2312>
ATMOC3 <2000-155000>
ATM25 <64-25600>
ATME3 <64-34000>
ATMT3 <64-45000>
Description
Using the pvp limit command, you can set the parameters for VP policing. Using
the undo pvp limit command, you can delete the VP policing.
By default, the VP policing is not performed.
When applying VP policing, the parameters of PVC are still valid. Only when the
parameters of PVC and VP policing are satisfied, will the packets be transmitted.
When calculating the traffic, the LLC/SNAP, MUX and NLPID headers are included,
but the ATM cell head is not included.
For the related commands, see pvc, service cbr, service vbr-nrt, and service vbr-rt,
service ubr.
Example
Set the traffic of VP with vpi 1 to 2M.
[3Com-Atm1/0/0] pvp limit 1 2000
service cbr Syntax
service cbr output-pcr [ cdvt cdvt_value ]
View
PVC view
Parameter
output-pcr: Output peak rate of ATM cell in Kbit/s. Value range of this parameter
depends on interface type, as shown in the following table
Table 18 Value ranges of output-pcr
Interface type output-pcr

ADSL <64-640>
GSHDSL <64-2312>
ATMOC3 <2000-155000>
ATM25 <64-25600>
ATME3 <64-34000>
ATMT3 <64-45000>
cdvt_value: cell delay variation tolerance, in ìs, and the range of the value is 0 to
10000ìs.
Description
Using the service cbr command, you can specify PVC service type as constant bit
rate (CBR).
By default, the service type is UBR after creating a PVC. When the value of cdvt is
not specified, it is 500ìs by default.
This command is used to set the PVC service type and parameter. The newly
specified PVC service type will replace the existing service type. It is recommended
that the PVC with larger bandwidth be created first and then the one with smaller
bandwidth. If the creation fails, the cdvt_value can be adjusted larger to create the
PVC once more. The above case will be prompted in the command line, as follows:
“fail to set service parameter, please adjust cdvt value”
The command does not support ATM E1 interface and ATM E3 interface.
For the related commands, see service vbr-nrt, service vbr-rt, and service ubr.
Example
Create a PVC named "3Com" with VPI/VCI as 1/101.
Specify the service type of the PVC as cbr and the peak rate of ATM cell as
50,000Kbits/s.Cell delay variation tolerance is 1000ìs.
[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/101-3Com] service cbr 50000 cdvt 1000
service ubr Syntax
service ubr output-pcr
View
PVC view
Parameter
output-pcr: Output peak rate of ATM cell in Kbit/s. For the value ranges of this
parameter, see Value ranges of output-pcr.
Description
Using the service ubr command, you can specify the service type of PVC as
Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) and specify the related rate parameters.
By default, the service type is UBR after creating a PVC.
This command as well as the service vbr-nrt, service vbr-rt and service cbr
commands can be used to set the service type and service parameters of PVC. The
newly specified PVC service type will supersede the existing service type.
For the related commands, see service vbr-nrt, service vbr-rt, and service cbr.
Example
[3Com-Atm1/0/0] service pvc 3Com 1/101
Display how to specify the service type of the PVC as ubr and the peak cell rate of
ATM cell as 100,000Kbps.
[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/101-3Com] service ubr 100000
service vbr-nrt Syntax
service vbr-nrt output-pcr output-scr output-mbs
View
PVC view
Parameter
output-pcr: Peak rate of ATM cell output in Kbit/s. For the value ranges of this
parameter, see Value ranges of output-pcr.
output-scr: Sustainable rate of ATM cell output in Kbps. Its value ranges are the
same as those of output-pcr.
output-mbs: Maximum burst size of ATM cell output, i.e., the maximum cache size
of ATM cell output at the interface in cell number.
Description
Using the service vbr-nrt command, you can specify the service type of PVC as
Variable Bit Rate-Non Real Time (VBR-NRT) and specify the related rate
parameters.
This command as well as the service ubr, service vbr-rt and service cbr commands
can be used to set the service type and service parameters of PVC. The newly
specified PVC service type will supercede the existing service type.
For the related commands, see service vbr-rt, service ubr, and service cbr.
Example
Display how to specify the service type of the PVC as VBR-NRT and set the peak
bit rate of ATM cell to 100,000kbit/s, sustainable bit rate to 50,000Kbps, the
maximum burst size to 320 cells.
[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/101-3Com] service vbr-nrt 100000 50000 320
service vbr-rt Syntax
service vbr-rt output-pcr output-scr output-mbs
View
PVC view
Parameter
output-pcr: Peak cell rate of ATM output in Kbit/s. For the value ranges of this
parameter, see .
output-scr: Sustainable cell rate of ATM output in Kbps. Its value ranges are the
same as those of output-pcr.
output-mbs: Maximum burst size of ATM cell output, i.e., the maximum cache size
of ATM cell output at the interface in cell number. The range of the value is 1 to
512. When it is used in ATM E3 interface, the range of the parameter is 1 to 512.
Description
Using the service vbr-rt command, you can set the service type of PVC to Variable
Bit Rate - Real Time (VBR-RT) and specify the related rate parameters in the PVC
view.
This command as well as the service ubr, service cbr and service vbr-nrt commands
can be used to set the service type and service parameters of PVC. The newly
specified PVC service type will supercede the existing service type. The command
does not support ATM E1 interface.
For the related commands, see service cbr, service ubr, and service vbr-nrt.
Example
[3Com-if-Atm1/0/0] pvc 3Com 1/101
Display how to specify the service type of the PVC as VBR-NRT and set the peak
cell rate of ATM to 100,000kbit/s, sustainable cell rate to 50,000Kbps, the
maximum burst size to 320 cells.
[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/101-3Com] service vbr-rt 100000 50000 320
LAPB and X.25

Configuration
Commands
channel Syntax
channel { interface serial interface-number | xot ip-address }
undo channel { interface serial interface-number | xot ip-address }
View
X.25 hunt group view
Parameter
interface-number: Interface number, its value ranges from 0 to 3.
ip-address: IP address of the peer XOT host.
Description
Using the channel command, you can add X.25 interface or XOT channel of one
serial port to the current hunt group. Using the undo channel command, you can
delete the specified interface or XOT channel from the current hunt group.
One interface may belong to six hunt groups at most at the same time.
For the related command, see X25 hunt-group.
Example
Add the serial interface serial0/0/0 to the hunt group hg1.
[3Com] x25 hunt-group hg1 round-robin

[3Com-hg-hg1] channel interface serial0/0/0
debugging pad Syntax
debugging pad { all | error | event | packet }
undo debugging pad { all | error | event | packet }
View
User view
Parameter
all: All debugging switch of PAD.
error: Error debugging switch of PAD.

event: Event debugging switch of PAD.
packet: Packet debugging switch of PAD.
Description
Using the debugging pad command, you can enable the debugging switch of
PAD.
Using the undo debugging pad command, you can disable the debugging switch
of PAD.
Example
None
debugging x25 xot Syntax
debugging x25 xot { all | event | packet }
undo debugging x25 xot { all | event | packet }
View
User view
Parameter
all: All debugging switch of XOT.
event: Event debugging switch of XOT.
packet: Packet debugging switch of XOT
Description
Using the debugging x25 xot command, you can enable the debugging switch of
XOT
Using the undo debugging x25 xot command, you can disable the debugging
switch of XOT
Example
None
display interface serial [ number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
number: Serial interface number.
Description
Using the display interface command, you can view the LAPB or X.25 interface
information. After configuring PVC of X.25, users can use the command to obtain
the status information on one interface.
Example
Encapsulate Serial0/0/0 with LAPB protocol and view the encapsulated interface
information using the following commands.
<3Com> system-view
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] linl-protocol lapb
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] display interface serial 0/0/0
Serial0/0/0 current state : UP
Description : 3Com, 3Com Series, Serial4/0/0 Interface
The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500, Holder timer is 10(sec)
Link-protocol is X.25 DCE Ietf, address is , state R1, modulo 8
input/output: window sizes 7/7, packet sizes 256/256
Channels: Incoming-only 10-20, Two-way 30-40, Outgoing-only 50-60
Timers: T10 60, T11 180, T12 60, T13 60, Idle_Timer 0 (seconds)
New configuration(will be effective after restart): modulo 8
input/output: window sizes 7/7, packet sizes 256/256
Channels: Incoming-only 10-20, Two-way 30-40, Outgoing-only
50-60
Statistic: Restarts 0 (Restart Collisions 0)
Refused Incoming Call 0, Failing Outgoing Call 0
input/output: RESTART 1/1 CALL 9/2 DIAGNOSE 0/0
DATA 119/121 INTERRUPT 0/0 Bytes 2497/2731
RR 6/113 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0
Invalid Pr: 0 Invalid Ps: 0 Unknown: 0
Link-protocol is LAPB
LAPB DCE, module 8, window-size 7, max-frame 12056, retry 10
Timer: T1 3000, T2 1500, T3 0 (milliseconds), x.25-protocol
state CONNECT, VS 6, VR 3, Remote VR 6
IFRAME 147/254, RR 11/6, RNR 0/0, REJ 0/0
FRMR 0/0, SABM 0/1, DM 0/0, UA 1/0
DISC 0/0, invalid ns 0, invalid nr 0, link resets 0
FIFO 0/75/0
Physical layer is synchronous,
Interface is DTE, Cable type is V24
DCD=UP DTR=UP DSR=UP RTS=UP CTS=UP
The above information will be displayed after entering the command series, in
which the contents in boldface are those related to X.25 and LAPB protocols. The
main parameters are described as follows:
■ Link-protocol is X.25 DCE Ietf: Current encapsulation protocol of this interface

is X.25 protocol that works in DCE mode, and the data packet encapsulation
format is IETF.
■ address is: X.121 address of this X.25 interface; this field will be empty if there
is no address.
■ state: Current status of this X.25 interface.
■ modulo: Data packets and traffic control packets sent by this X.25 interface are
numbered in modulo 8 mode.
■ input/output: Window sizes 7/7, packet sizes 256/256: Flow control
parameters of this X.25 interface, including receiving window size, sending
window size, maximum received packet size (in bytes), and maximum sent
packet size (in bytes).
■ Channels: Channel range division of this X.25 interface, sequentially as
incoming-only channel section, two-way channel section, outgoing-only
channel section; if both demarcating values of an section are 0, this section is
disabled.
■ Timers: Delay values of various timers of this X.25 interface, in unit of second.
■ New Configuration: New configuration of this X.25 interface taking effect after
next restart; if this configuration is wrong, the default value will be restored.
■ Restarts 0 ( Restart Collision 0): Statistics of this X.25 interface, including times
of restart (including restart collision).
■ Refused Incoming Call: Statistics information of this X.25 interface: times of
call refusals. times of call failures.
■ Failing Outgoing Call: Statistics information of this X.25 interface:
■ input/output: RESTART 1/1 ... REJ 0/0:Statistics information of this X.25
interface: quantities of received and sent packets, format: received
quantity/sent quantity.
■ Invalid Pr: Error statistics information of this X.25 interface: total of received
data packets and traffic control packets carrying erroneous acknowledgement
numbers.
■ Invalid Ps: Error statistics information of this X.25 interface: total of received
data packets carrying erroneous sequence numbers.
■ Unknown: Error statistics information of this X.25 interface: total of received
irresolvable packets.
■ Link-protocol is LAPB: Current encapsulation protocol of this interface is LAPB
protocol.
■ LAPB DCE: LAPB of this interface works in DCE mode.
■ module 8: Information frame and monitoring frame sent by this interface LAPB
are numbered in the modulo 8 view.
■ window-size 7: Window size of this interface LAPB is 7.
■ max-frame 12056: The maximum length of frame sent by the interface LAPB is
12056 bits.
■ retry 10: Maximum re-sending times of information frame of this interface
LAPB is 10.
■ timer: Delay value of timers of this interface LAPB, in milliseconds. The unit of
T3 is second.
■ state: Current status of this interface LAPB.
■ VS: Sending variable of this interface LAPB.
■ VR: Receiving variable of this interface LAPB.
■ Remote VR: Peer’s last acknowledgment on information frame received by this
interface LAPB.
■ IFRAME 147/254 ... DISC 0/0: Statistics information of frames sent and received
by this interface LAPB, format: received quantity/sent quantity.
■ Invalid ns: Error statistics of this interface LAPB, including total of received
information frames carrying erroneous sequence numbers.
■ Invalid nr: Error statistics of this interface LAPB, including total of received
information frames and monitoring frames carrying erroneous
acknowledgment numbers.
■ Link resets: Restarting times of this interface LAPB link.
display x25 alias-policy Syntax
display x25 alias-policy [ interface interface-type slot-number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
slot-number: Interface number.
Description
Using the display x25 alias-policy command, you can view X.25 alias table.
For the related command, see x25 alias-policy.
Example
Display X.25 alias table.
<3Com> display x25 alias-policy

Alias for Serial0/0/0:
Alias for Serial1/0/0:
Alias- 1:$20112405$strict
Alias- 2:$20112450left
Alias- 3:20112450$right
The above information indicates: the interface Serial0/0/0 is set without alias, and
the interface Serial1/0/0 is set with 3 aliases, which are $20112405$ (in strict
match mode), $20112405 (in left alignment match mode) and 20112405$ (in
right alignment match mode).
display x25 Syntax

hunt-group-info
display x25 hunt-group-info [ hunt-group-name ]
View
Any view
Parameter
hunt-group-name: hunt group name
Description
Using the display x25 hunt-group-info command, you can view the status
information of X.25 hunt group.
You can use this command to learn the hunt group of the Router and the
information about the interfaces and XOT channel inside the hunt group.
For the related command, see x25 hunt-group.
Example
Display the status information of X.25 hunt group hg1.
[3Com] display x25 hunt-group-info hg1

HG_ID : hg1 HG_Type: round-robin
member state vc-used in-pkts out-pkts
Serial0/0/0 Last 2 51 20
Serial1/0/0 Next 1 21 15
1.1.1.1 Normal 1 24 3
The following table introduces the meaning of each field in the displayed
information.
Table 19 Explanation of each field in the command display x25 hunt-group-info
Field Explanation
hg1 Hunt group name
round-robin Hunt group call channel selection policy
member Interfaces or XOT channel contained in hunt group
state The state of the current interface or XOT channel, including:
Last:Last: last used
Next: interfaces or XOT channel selected by rotary selection policy next
Normal: normal state
vc-used Call number on the interface or XOT channel (including call success and call failure)
in-pkts Input flow on the interface or XOT channel in packets
out-pkts Output flow on the interface or XOT channel in packets
display x25 map Syntax
display x25 map
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display x25 map command, you can view the X.25 address mapping
table.
The X.25 address mapping can be configured in two methods: special

configuration (through the x25 map command) or implied configuration (through
the x25 pvc command). The display x25 map command can be used to show all
the address mappings.
For the related commands, see x25 map, x25 pvc, x25 switch pvc, x25 xot pvc,
and x25 fr pvc.
Example
Display the X.25 address map table.
<3Com> display x25 map

Interface:Serial3/0/0(protocol status is up):
ip address:202.38.162.2 X.121 address: 22
map-type: SVC_MAP VC-number: 0
Facility:
ACCEPT_REVERSE;
BROADCAST;
PACKET_SIZE: I 512 O 512 ;
display x25 pad Syntax
display x25 pad [ pad-id ]
View
Any view
Parameter
pad-id: PAD ID, its value ranges from 0 to 255. If it is not specified, all PAD
connection information will be displayed.
Description
Using the display x25 pad command, you can view X.25 PAD connection
information.
PAD is a kind of application similar to telnet. It can establish the connection

between two ends through X121 address, and then, to carry out configuration
operations.
For the related commands, see display x25 vc and x25 xot.
Example
Display X.25 PAD connection information.
[3Com] display x25 pad

UI-INDEX130:
From remote 22 connected to local 11, State: Normal
X.3Parameters(In):
1:1,2:0,3:2,4:1,5:0,6:0,7:21,8:0,9:0,10:0,11:14
12:0,13:0,14:0,15:0,16:127,17:21,18:18,19:0,20:0,21:0,22:0
X.3Parameters(Out):
1:1,2:0,3:2,4:1,5:0,6:0,7:21,8:0,9:0,10:0,11:14
12:0,13:0,14:0,15:0,16:127,17:21,18:18,19:0,20:0,21:0,22:0
Input:
Pkts(total/control): 13/2 bytes:12
queue(size/max) :0/200
Output:
Pkts(total/control): 15/2 bytes:320
display x25 switch-table Syntax

pvc
display x25 switch-table pvc
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display x25 switch-table pvc command, you can view X.25 switching
virtual circuit table.
For the related commands, see x25 pvc, x25 switch pvc, x25 xot pvc, x25 fr pvc,
and x25 switch svc.
Example
Display X.25 switching virtual circuit table.
[3Com] display x25 switch-table pvc

#1 (In: Serial0/0/0-vc1024)<— —>(Out: Serial1/0/0-vc1}
#2 (In: Serial1/0/0-vc1024)<— —>(Out: Serial0/0/0-vc1}
display x25 switch-table Syntax

svc
display x25 switch-table svc { dynamic | static }
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
The command display x25 switch-table svc is used to display X.25 switching
routing table.
For the related command, see x25 switch svc.
Example
Display X.25 switching routing table.
[3Com] display x25 switch-table svc static

Number Destination Substitute- Substitute- CUD SwitchTo(type/name)
src dst
1 11 I/Serial2/0/0
2 22 I/Serial2/1/0
3 133 H/hg1
4 132 T/123.123.123.123
5 133 T/123.123.123.123
T/124.124.124.124
T/125.125.125.125
6 111 222 333 T/4.4.4.4
Total of static svc is 6.
The item type of SwitchTo meaning:
I: interface H: hunt-group T: xot
The following table introduces the meaning of each field in the displayed
information.
Table 20 Explanation of each field in the command display x25 switch-table svc
Field Explanation
Number Sequence number of this route in the routing table
Substitute-src X.121 source address after substitution, if the content is blank, it means no substitution.
Substitute-dst X.121 destination address after substitution, if the content is blank, it means no substitutio
CUD Call User Data
SwitchTo Forwarding address of this route, including interface, XOT channel and hunt group
display x25 vc Syntax
display x25 vc [ lci ]
View
Any view
Parameter
lci: Logical channel identifier, its value ranges from 1 to 4095. If the logical channel
identifier is not specified, all virtual circuits will be displayed.
Description
Using the display x25 vc command, you can view the information about the X.25
virtual circuit.
SVC (Switched Virtual Circuit) is set up temporarily by X.25 through call

connection when data transmission is required. PVC is configured manually and
exists regardless of the data transmission requirement. When the router works in
X.25 switched mode, virtual circuits will be set up in order to transfer the switched
data. The information about these virtual circuits can be shown via this command,
and only some fields in the displayed information differ.
For the related commands, see x25 pvc, x25 switch pvc, x25 xot pvc, and x25 fr
pvc.
Example
Display X.25 virtual circuit.
<3Com> display x25 vc

Interface: Serial2/0/0
SVC 1
State: P4
Map: ip 10.1.1.2 to 130
Window size: input 2 output 2
Packet Size: input 128 output 128
Local PS: 5 Local PR: 5 Remote PS: 5 Remote PR: 4
Local Busy: FALSE Reset times: 0
Input/Output:
DATA 5/5 INTERRUPT 0/0
RR 0/0 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0
Bytes 420/420
Snd Queue(Current/Max): 0/200
SVC 10
State: P4
SVC <--> Serial2/0/0 SVC 60
Input/Output:
RR 0/0 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0
Bytes 420/420
Interface: Serial2/0/0-1.1.1.1
PVC 1
State: P/Inactive
XOT PVC <--> Serial2/0/0 PVC 1 connected

Input/Output:
RR 0/0 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0
Bytes 0/0
Interface: Serial2/0
PVC 1
State: D3
PVC <--> XOT Serial2/0/0-1.1.1.1 PVC 1 connected
Input/Output:
RR 0/0 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0
Bytes 0/0
SVC 59
State: P4
PAD: UI-130 From remote 130 connected to local 220
Input/Output:
RR 6/2 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0
Bytes 53/363
display x25 xot Syntax
display x25 xot
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display x25 xot command, you can view XOT link information.
You can use the command display x25 xot to view the detailed information about
all XOT links, including peer ip and port, local ip and port, keepalive setting of
socket and come/go interface names.
For the related commands, see x25 switch svc xot and x25 xot pvc.
Example
Display XOT link information.
[3Com] display x25 xot

SVC 1024: ( ESTAB )
tcp peer ip: 10.1.1.1, peer port: 1998
tcp local ip: 10.1.1.2, local port: 1024
socket keepalive period: 5, keepalive tries: 3
come interface name: Serial0/0/0-10.1.1.1-1024
go interface name: Serial0/0/0:
The above information indicates: there is one established XOT link via SVC, whose
peer IP is 10.1.1.1, peer port is 1998, local IP is 10.1.1.2, local port is 1024,
keepalive period of socket is 5 seconds, keepalive tries are 3, come interface name
is Serial0/0/0-10.1.1.1-1024 (XOT interface), and go interface name is Serial0/0/0.
lapb max-frame Syntax
lapb max-frame n1-value
undo lapb max-frame
View
Interface view
Parameter
n1-value: The value of the parameter N1 in bits, and its value ranges from 1096 to
12104.By default, the parameter N1 of LAPB is 12032.
Description
Using the lapb max-frame command, you can configure the LAPB parameter N1.
Using the undo lapb max-frame command, you can restore the default value.
N1 shall indicate the maximum bit of I frame that DCE or DTE wish to receive from
DTE or DCE, and its value is maximum transmission unit (MTU) plus the total bytes
of protocol header times 8, which stipulates the maximum length of transmission
frame.
Example
Set the parameter N1 of LAPB on the interface Serial 0/0/0 is 1160.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] lapb max-frame 1160
lapb modulo Syntax
lapb modulo { 128 | 8 }
undo lapb modulo

View
Interface view
Parameter
128: Using modulus 128 numbering view.
8: Using modulus 8 numbering view.
Description
Using the lapb modulo command, you can specify the LAPB frame numbering
view (also called modulo). Using the undo lapb modulo command, you can restore
the default value.
By default, the LAPB frame protocol view is modulo 8.
There are two LAPB frame numbering views: modulo 8 and modulo 128. Each
information frame (I frame) is numbered in sequence, ranging from 0 to the
modulo minus 1. In addition, sequential numbers will cycle within the range of
modulo.
Modulo 8 is a basic view, LAPB can implement all the standards via the view. It is
sufficient for most links.
For the related command, see lapb window-size.
Example
Set the LAPB frame numbering view on Serial0/0/0 to modulo 8.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] lapb modulo 8
lapb retry Syntax
lapb retry n2-value
undo lapb retry
View
Interface view
Parameter
n2-value: The value of N2, its value ranges from 1 to 255.By default, the
parameter N2 of LAPB is 10.
Description
Using the lapb retry command, you can configure LAPB parameter N2. Using the
undo lapb retry command, you can restore the default value.
The value of N2 indicates the maximum retries that DCE or DTE sends one frame
to DTE or DCE.
Example
Set the LAPB parameter N2 on Serial0/0/0 to 20.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] lapb retry 20
lapb timer Syntax
lapb timer { t1 t1-value | t2 t1-value | t3 t3-value }
undo lapb timer { t1 | t2 | t3 }
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ t1-value: The value of timer T1 in ms, its value ranges from 1 to 64000ms.The
default value of T1 is 2000ms.
■ t2-value: Value of the timer T2 in ms, ranging 1 to 32000.The default value of
T2 is 1000ms.
■ t3-value: Value of the timer T3 in ms, its value ranges from 0 to 255. The
default value of T3 is 0ms.
Description
Using the lapb timer command, you can configure the LAPB timers T1, T2 and
T3..Using the undo lapb timer command, you can restore their default values.
T1 is a transmission timer. When T1 expires, DTE (DCE) will start retransmission.

The value of T1 shall be greater than the maximum time between the sending of a
frame and the receiving of its response frame.
T2 is a reception timer. When it expires, the DTE/DCE must send an

acknowledgement frame so that this frame can be received before the peer
DTE/DCE T1 timer expires (T2<T1).
T3 is an idle channel timer, when it expires, the DCE reports to the packet layer
that the channel stays idle for a long time. T3 should be greater than the timer T1
(T3>T1) on a DCE. When T3 is 0, it indicates that it does not function yet.
Example
Set the LAPB timer T1 on Serial0/0/0 to 3000ms.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] lapb timer t1 3000
lapb window-size Syntax
lapb window-size k-value
undo lapb window-size

View
Interface view
Parameter
k-value: Maximum number of I frame of unacknowledged sequence number that

DTE or DCE may send, if the modulus is 8, the value of the window parameter K
ranges 1 to 7. If the modulus is 128, the value of the window parameter K ranges
1 to 127. By default, the window parameter K is 7.
Description
Using the lapb window-size command, you can configure the LAPB window
parameter K. Using the undo lapb window-size command, you can restore the
default value of the LAPB window parameter K.
The value of the window parameter K is determined by the value of modulus.
For the related command, see lapb modulo.
Example
Set the LAPB window parameter K on the interface Serial 0/0/0 to be 5.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] lapb window-size 5
link-protocol lapb Syntax
link-protocol lapb [ dte | dce ] [ ip | multi-protocol ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ dte: Indicates that the interface works in DTE mode of LAPB.
■ dce: Indicates that the interface works in DCE mode of LAPB.
■ ip: Indicates that the network layer protocol borne by LAPB is IP.
Description
Using the link-protocol lapb command, you can specify the link layer protocol of
the interface as LAPB.
By default, DTE is the default LAPB operating mode. IP is the default network layer
protocol.
Though LAPB is a layer-2 protocol of X.25, it can act as an independent link-layer

protocol for simple data transmission. Generally, LAPB can be used when two
routers are directly connected with a dedicated line. At that time one end works in
the DTE mode, and the other in the DCE mode.

Example
Configure LAPB as the link layer protocol of the interface Serial 0/0/0, and enable
it to work in DCE mode.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] link-protocol lapb dce
link-protocol x25 Syntax
link-protocol x25 [ dte | dce ] [ ietf | nonstandard ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ dte: Indicates that the interface works in DTE mode.
■ dce: Indicates that the interface works in DCE mode.
■ letf: Based on the standard stipulation of the IETF RFC 1356, encapsulate IP or
other network protocols on the X.25 network.
■ nonstandard: Encapsulates IP or other network protocols on the X.25 network
with nonstandard.
Description
Using the link-protocol x25 command, you can encapsulate X.25 protocol to the
specified interface.
By default, the link-layer protocol for interface is PPP. When the interface uses
X.25 protocol, it works in DTE IETF mode by default.
If the X.25 switching function is not used, and two Routers are directly connected
back to back via the X.25 protocol, one Router shall work in DTE mode, while the
other shall work in DCE mode. When two Routers are connected via the X.25
public packet network, they shall generally work in DTE mode. If the X.25
switching function is used, the Router shall generally work in DCE mode.
In practice, select the IETF format of datagram if there is no special requirement.
Example
Specify X.25 as the link layer protocol of the interface Serial 0/0/0 that works in
DTE IETF mode.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] link-protocol x25 dte ietf
pad Syntax
pad x121-address
View
User view
Parameter
x121-address: x121 destination address.
Description
Using the pad command, you can establish a PAD connection with the remote site.
PAD is a kind of application similar to telnet. It can establish the connection

between two ends through X121 address, and then, to carry out configuration
operations.
Example
Establish a PAD connection, and the destination x121 address is 2.
<03Com> pad 2
reset xot Syntax
reset xot local local-ip-address local-port remote remote-ip-address remote-port
View
User view
Parameter
■ local-ip-address: Local IP address of the XOT connection.
■ local-port: Local port number of the XOT connection.
■ remote-ip-address: Remote IP address of the XOT connection.
■ remote-port: Remote port number of the XOT connection.
Description
For SVC, using the reset xot command, you can initiatively clear an XOT link.
For PVC, using reset xot command, you can initiatively reset an XOT link.
You can initiatively clear or reset the XOT link using the command reset xot. When
you clear or reset the XOT link, you can obtain the required ports using the
commands display x25 xot or display tcp status.
For the related commands, see display x25 vc, x25 switching, display x25 xot, and
display tcp status.
Example
Clear or reset an XOT link.
[3Com] reset xot local 10.1.1.1 1998 remote 10.1.1.2 1024

x25 alias-policy Syntax
x25 alias-policy match-type alias-string
undo x25 alias-policy match-type alias-string
View
Interface view
Parameter
match-type: Match type of the alias. There are 9 optional match types:
■ free: Free match

■ free-ext: Extended free match
■ left: Left alignment match
■ left-ext: Extended left alignment match
■ right: Right alignment match
■ right-ext: Extended right alignment match
■ strict: Strict match
■ whole: Whole match
■ whole-ext: Extended whole match
alias-string: String of the alias
Description
Using the x25 alias-policy command, you can configure the alias of an X.121
address. Using the undo x25 alias-policy command, you can delete the alias of an
X.121 address.
By default, no x.25 alias is configured.
When an X.25 call is forwarded between networks, different X.25 networks may
perform some operations on the destination addresses (that is, the called DTE
address) carried by this call packet, for example, regularly adding or deleting the
prefix and suffix. In this case, a user needs to set an interface alias for the router to
adapt this change. Please consult your ISP to learn if the network supports this
function before deciding whether the alias function is enabled or not.
For the details about the X.25 alias matching method, please see the chapter LAPB
and X.25 Configurations in Operation Manual.
For the related commands, see display x25 alias-policy and x25 x121-address.
Example
Configure the link-layer protocol on interface Serial0/0/0 as X.25 and its X.121
address to 20112451, and set two aliases with different match types for it.
[3Com] interface serial 0/0/0

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] link-protocol x25

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 x121-address 20112451
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 alias-policy right 20112451$
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 alias-policy left $20112451
With the above configurations, a call whose destination address is 20112451 can
be accepted as long as it can reach the local X.25 interface Serial0/0/0, no matter
whether the network is performing the prefix adding operation or suffix adding
operation.
x25 call-facility Syntax
x25 call-facility facility-option
undo x25 call-facility facility-option
View
Interface view
Parameter
facility-option: User facility option, its value includes:
■ closed-user-group number: Specifies a closed user group (CUG) number for the
X.25 interface. The facility enables DTE to belong to one or more CUGs. CUG
allows the DTEs in it to communicate with each other, but not to communicate
with other DTEs.
■ packet-size input-size output-size: Specifies the maximum packet size
negotiation in initiating call from X.25 interface. Maximum packet size
negotiation is part of flow control parameter negotiation. It needs two
parameters: maximum reception packet size and maximum transmission
packet size, which must range from 16 to 1024 (including 16 and 1024), and
must be the integer power of 2.
■ reverse-charge-request: Specifies reverse charging request while calling from
X.25 interface.
■ roa-list name: Specifies an ROA list name configured by the command X25
roa-list in system view for the X.25 interface.
■ send-delay value: Specifies the maximum network send delay request while
calling from X.25 interface. You can set this request to any value ranging from
0 to 65534 ms (including 0 and 65534).
■ threshold in out: Specifies throughput negotiation while calling from X.25
interface. The values of in/out are defined as 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, and 48000.
■ window-size input-window-size output-window-size: Specifies the window
size negotiation while calling from X.25 interface. Window size negotiation is a
part of flow control parameter negotiation. It needs two parameters: reception
window size and transmission window size, which must be in the range of 1 to
modulo -1 (including 1 and modulo -1).The default values of the two
parameters are 2.
Description
Using the x25 call-facility command, you can set user options for an X.25
interface. After an option is set, all X.25 calls from the X.25 interface will carry the
relevant information field in call packet. Using the undo x25 call-facility command,
you can delete the set option.
By default, no facility is set.
The user facilities set via this command are available for all the calls originating
from this X.25 interface. You can set a user option for an X.25 call from a certain
address mapping through the command x25 map protocol-name protocol-address
x.121-address x.121-address [ option ].
For the related command, see x25 map.
Example
Specify the flow control parameter negotiation with the peer end for the calls
from the X.25 interface serial0/0/0.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 call-facility packet-size 512 512

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 call-facility window-size 5 5
x25 cug-service Syntax
x25 cug-service [ incoming-access ] [ outgoing-access ] [ suppress { all | preferential

}]
undo x25 cug-service
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ incoming-access: Performs the suppress processing of incoming access
■ outgoing-access: Performs the suppress processing of outgoing access
■ all: Suppresses all CUGs configured with preferential suppress
■ preferential: Only processes those CUGs configured with preferential suppress
Description
Using the x25 cug-service command, you can map the local CUG facility to the
network CUG. When the call with CUG facility meets CUG suppress conditions, it
will be processed. Using the undo x25 cug-service command, you can delete CUG
suppress. The command is used on DCE side, and you can use the command
link-protocol x25 dce to set DCE as the working mode of the interface.
By default, no CUG suppress is defined.
For the related commands, see x25 call-facility and x25 local-cug.
Example
Define the suppress processing of incoming access on the interface Serial0/0/0.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 cug-service incoming-access
x25 default-protocol Syntax
x25 default-protocol protocol-type
undo x25 default-protocol
View
Interface view
Parameter
protocol-type: Protocol type, may be IP.
Description
Using the x25 default-protocol command, you can set the default upper-layer
protocol carried over X.25 for the X.25 interface. Using the undo x25
default-protocol command, you can restore the default upper-layer protocol.
By default, IP is carried over X.25.
During X.25 SVC setup, the called device will check the call user data field of X.25
call request packet. If it is an unidentifiable one, the called device will deny the
setup of the call connection. However, a user can specify a default upper-layer
protocol carried over X.25. When X.25 receives a call with unknown CUD, the call
can be treated based on the default upper-layer protocol specified by a user.
Example
Set the default upper-layer protocol over the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 as IP.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 default-protocol ip
x25 hunt-group Syntax
x25 hunt-group hunt-group-name { round-robin | vc-number }
undo x25 hunt-group hunt-group-name
View
System view
Parameter
hunt-group-name: Name of hunt group.

■ round-robin: Select call channel using cyclic selection policy.

■ vc-number: Select call channel using the policy of computing available logical
channel.
Description
Using the x25 hunt-group command, you can create or enter an X.25 hunt group.
Using the undo x25 hunt-group command, you can delete the specified X.25 hunt
group.
X.25 hunt group supports two call channel selection policies: round-robin mode
and vc-number mode, and a hunt group only uses one channel selection policy.
The round-robin mode will select next interface or XOT channel inside hunt group
for each call request using cyclic selection method. The vc-number mode will
select the interface with the most idle-logical channels in hunt group for each call
request.
A hunt group can have 10 interfaces or XOT channels at most, and it may
nondistinctively select the available channels between interface and XOT channel.
XOT channel cannot join the hunt group that adopts the vc-number selection
policy.
For the related command, see display x25 hunt-group.
Example
Create hunt group hg1 which uses cyclic selection policy.
[3Com] x25 hunt-group hg1 round-robin

[3Com-hg-hg1]
x25 ignore Syntax

called-address
x25 ignore called-address
undo x25 ignore called-address
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the x25 ignore called-address command, you can enable it to ignore the
X.121 address of the called DTE when X.25 initiates calls. Using the undo x25
ignore called-address command, you can disable this function.
By default, this function is disabled.

According to X.25, the calling request packet must carry the address bits.
However, on some occasions, the X.25 calling request does not have to carry the
called/calling DTE address in a specific network environment or as is required by
the application. This command enables users to specify whether the call request
packet sent by X.25 in the 3Com series routers carries the called DTE address.
For the related commands, see x25 response called-address, x25 response
calling-address, and x25 ignore calling-address.
Example
Specify the call request packet from the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 not to carry the
called DTE address.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 ignore called-address
x25 ignore Syntax

calling-address
x25 ignore calling-address
undo x25 ignore calling-address
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the x25 ignore calling-address command, you can enable it to ignore the
X.121 address of the calling DTE when X.25 initiates calls. Using the undo x25
ignore calling-address command, you can disable this function.
According to X.25, the calling request packet must carry the address bits.
However, on some occasions, the X.25 calling request does not have to carry the
called/calling DTE address in a specific network environment or as is required by
the application. This command enables users to specify whether the call request
packet sent by X.25 in the 3Com series routers carries the calling DTE address.
For the related commands, see x25 response called-address, x25 response
calling-address, and x25 ignore called-address.
Example
Specify the call request packet from the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 not to carry the
calling DTE address.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 ignore calling-address

x25 local-cug Syntax
x25 local-cug cug-number network-cug cug-number [ no-incoming ] [

no-outgoing ] [ preferential ]
undo x25 local-cug cug-number
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ local-cug cug-number: Number of local cug.
■ network-cug cug-number: Number of network cug.
■ no-incoming: Suppresses incoming access.
■ no-outgoing: Suppresses outgoing access.
■ preferential: Suppresses the CUGs configured with preferential.
Description
Using the x25 local-cug command, you can define CUG suppress rules. Using the
undo x25 local-cug command, you can delete the rules. CUG suppress rules have
two: suppressing all CUG facilities and suppressing the mapping CUG facility
configured with preferential.
By default, no suppress rule is defined.
For the related commands, see x25 call-facility and x25 cug-service.
Example
Define the rule on the serial interface Serial0/0/0: the incoming calls with 100
local CUGs or 200 network CUGs are denied.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 cug-service

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 local-cug 100 network-cug 200 no-incoming
x25 map Syntax
x25 map { ip | compressedtcp } protocol-address x121-address x.121-address [

option ]
undo x25 map { ip | compressedtcp } protocol-address
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ ip: Uses IP protocol.
■ compressedtcp: Uses TCP header compression.
■ protocol-address: Network protocol address of the peer host.
■ x.121-address: X.121 address of the peer host.

■ option: Specifies some attributes or user facilities for the address mapping.
Description
Using the x25 map command, you can set the address mapping between IP
address used by LANs and X.121 address. Using the undo x25 map command, you
can delete one existing mapping.
By default, no address mapping is set.
Since X.25 protocol can multiplex more logical virtual circuits on a physical
interface, you need to manually specify the mapping relation between all network
addresses and X.121 address.
Once you have specified an address mapping, its contents (including protocol
address, X.121 address and all options) cannot be changed. To make
modifications, you can first delete this address mapping via the undo x25 map
command, and then establish one new address mapping.
Two or more address mappings with an identical protocol address shall not exist
on the same X.25 interface.
Detailed explanations are as follows:
■ broadcast: Sends any broadcasts of internetworking protocol and the multicast

of IP to the destination. This option provides powerful support for some routing
protocols (such as Routing Information Protocol).
■ closed-user-group group-number: Number of the closed user group
corresponding to this address mapping.
■ encapsulation-type: Encapsulation type, optional types include nonstandard,
ietf, multi-protocol and snap.
■ idle-timer minutes: Maximum idle time for the VC associated with the address
mapping. 0 means that the idle time is infinite.
■ no-callin: Disables accepting call to the address mapping.
■ no-callout: Disables call originating from the address mapping.
■ packet-size input-packet output-packet: When the address mapping is used to
originate a call, it will negotiate the maximum packet size in bytes with the
peer end. Its value must range from 16 to 4096 (including 16 and 4096), and
must be the integer power of 2.
■ reverse-charge-accept: If a call initiated by the address mapping carries reverse
charging request, to accept the call, this option must be configured in the
address mapping.
■ reverse-charge-request: Specifies reverse charging request while calling from
the address mapping.
■ roa-list name: Specifies an ROA list name configured by the command X25
roa-list in system view for the X.25 interface.
■ send-delay milliseconds: When the address mapping is used to originate a call,
it carries the maximum transmission delay request.
■ threshold in out: When the address mapping is used to originate a call, it

negotiates throughput with the peer end. The values of in/out are defined to
be 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 48000.
■ vc-per-map count: Maximum number of VCs associated with the address
mapping.
■ window-size input-window-size output-window-size: When the address
mapping is used to originate a call, it negotiates the window size with the peer
end. The values of input-window-size and output-window-size range between
1 and the number that is 1 less than the modulus of the X.25 interface where
the address mapping exists (including 1 and modulus minus 1).
For the related commands, see display x25 map, x25 reverse-charge-accept, x25
call-facility, x25 timer idle, and x25 vc-per-map.
Example
Set two address mappings on the X.25 interfaces Serial0/0/0 and Serial1/0/0,
respectively, and the four address mappings have different attributes.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 map ip 202.38.160.11 x121-address 20112451
reverse-charge-request reverse-charge-accept
packet-size 512 512 idle-timer 10
[3Com] interface serial1/0/0
window-size 4 4 broadcast
no-callin
x25 modulo Syntax
x25 modulo modulus
undo x25 modulo
View
Interface view
Parameter
modulus: Modulus, whose value is 8 or 128.
Description
Using the x25 modulo command, you can set the window modulus of an X.25
interface. Using the undo x25 modulo command, you can restore its default
window modulus.
By default, the window modulus of X.25 interface is modulus 8 mode.
The slip window is the basis for X.25 traffic control, and the key about the slip
window is that the sent packets are numbered cyclically in order and are to be
acknowledged by the peer end. The order in numbering refers to the ascending
order, like “…2, 3, 4, 5, 6…” “Cyclically” means that the numbering starts again
from the beginning when a certain number (called modulus) is reached. For
example, when the modulus is 8, the numbering goes “…4, 5, 6, 7, 0, 1…”.
X.25 defines two numbering modulus: 8 (also called the basic numbering) and
128 (also called extended numbering), and the X.25 of the 3Com series routers
supports both views.
For the related commands, see display interface, x25 call-facility, x25 map, x25
pvc, x25 switch pvc, x25 xot pvc, x25 fr pvc, and x25 window-size.
Example
Set the modulus on the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 128.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 modulo 128
x25 packet-size Syntax
x25 packet-size input-packet output-packet
undo packet-size
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ input-packet: Maximum input packet length in bytes, its value ranges from 16
to 1024 (including 16 and 1024) and must be the integer power of 2.By
default, the maximum input packet length of X.25 interface is 128 bytes.
■ output-packet: Maximum output packet length in bytes, its value ranges from
16 to 1024 (including 16 and 1024) and must be the integer power of 2. By
default, the maximum output packet length of X.25 interface is 128 bytes.
Description
Using the x25 packet-size command, you can set the maximum input and output
packet lengths of X.25 interface. Using the undo x25 packet-size command, you
can restore their default values.
Usually, the X.25 packet-switching network has a limitation of the transmission

packet size, and the maximum size of a data packet sent by the DTE shall not
exceed this size (otherwise it will trigger the reset of the VC).In this way, the DTE
devices at sending end and receiving end are required to have datagram
fragmentation and reassembly functions. The DTE device at sending end
fragments the datagram with a length exceeding the maximum transmission
packet length based on the maximum transmission packet length, and sets M bit
in other fragments besides the final fragment. After receiving these fragments, the
DTE at receiving end will reassemble them as a datagram to submit the upper-layer
protocol based on the M bit. Please consult users' ISP about this maximum
receiving packet length.
Normally, the maximum receiving packet length is equivalent to the maximum

send packet. Unless users' ISP allows, please do not set these two parameters to
different values.
For the related commands, see x25 call-facility, x25 pvc, x25 switch pvc, x25 xot
pvc and x25 fr pvc.
Example
Set the maximum receiving packet length and maximum sending packet length
on X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 256 bytes.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 packet-size 256 256
x25 pvc
Syntax x25 pvc pvc-number protocol-type protocol-address x121-address x.121-address [

option ]
undo x25 pvc pvc-number
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ pvc-number: PVC number, which must range from 1 to 4095 (including 1 and
4095), and must be in the PVC channel range.
■ protocol-type: Upper-layer protocol carried over the permanent virtual circuit,
which may be IP or compressedtcp.
■ protocol-address: Network protocol address of the peer end of the PVC.
■ x.121-address: X.121 address of the peer end of this PVC.
■ option: Attribute of the PVC.
Description
Using the x25 pvc command, you can configure one PVC route encapsulated with
datagram. Using the undo x25 pvc command, you can delete this route.
By default, no PVC encapsulated with datagram is created. When creating such a

PVC, you do not set the relevant attributes for the PVC, its flow control
parameters will be the same as that of the X.25 interface on which it resides (the
flow control parameters on an X.25 interface can be set by the x25 packet-size
and x25 window-size commands).
As one corresponding address mapping is impliedly established while establishing

the PVC, it is unnecessary (or impossible) to establish an address mapping first
before establishing PVCs.
Before establishing PVCs, users should first enable the PVC channel section. The
section is between 1 and the latest unprohibited channel section PVC number
minus 1 (including 1 and the lowest PVC number minus 1). Naturally, if the lowest
PVC number is 1, the PVC section will be disabled naturally. The following table
shows some typical PVC sections.
Table 21 PVC channel section of some typical configurations
Incoming-only
channel range Two-way channel range Outgoing-only channel range
[0, 0] [1, 1024] [0, 0]
[0, 0] [10, 24] [0, 0]
[1, 10] [15, 30] [0, 0]
[5, 10] [15, 25] [30, 32]
[0, 0] [0, 0] [20, 45]
[0, 0] [0, 0] [0, 0]
Detailed explanations of PVC options are follows:
■ broadcast: Forward broadcast packet to the peer PVC.

■ encapsulation-type: Encapsulation type, which may be nonstandard, ietf,
multi-protocol and snap.
■ packet-size input-packet output-packet: Specifies the maximum receiving
packet length and maximum sending packet length. The length is counted in
byte, which must range from 16 to 4096 (including 16 and 4096), and must be
the integer power of 2.
■ window-size input-window-size output-window-size: Specifies the receiving
window and transmitting window sizes of the VC, which range between 1 and
the number that is 1 less than the modulus of the X.25 interface where the
address mapping exists (including 1 and modulus minus 1).
For the related commands, see display x25, x25 map.
Example
Configure the link layer protocol on the interface Serial0/0/0 to X.25, enable PVC
channel section, and set two VCs.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 vc-range bi-channel 8,102 4
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 pvc 2 ip 202.38.168.1 x121-address 20112451
broadcast packet-size 512 512
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 pvc 6 ip 202.38.168.3 x121-address 20112453
broadcast window-size 5 5
x25 queue-length Syntax
x25 queue-length queue-length
undo x25 queue-length
View
Interface view
Parameter
queue-length: Length of queue in packets, which ranges from 0 to 9999.By

default, the data queue length on X.25 VC is 500.
Description
Using the x25 queue-length command, you can set the data queue length on X.25
VC. Using the undo x25 queue-length command, you can restore its default value.
When the data traffic is too heavy, you can use this command to extend the
receiving queue and sending queue of the X.25 VC to avoid data loss that may
affect transmission performance. It should be noted here that modifying this
parameter would not affect the existing data queue of VC.
For the related command, see x25 packet-size
Example
Set the VC data queue length of the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 75 datagrams.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 queue-length 75
x25 receive-threshold Syntax
x25 receive-threshold count
undo x25 receive-threshold
View
Interface view
Parameter
count: The number of data packets that can be received before previous
acknowledgement, ranging from 0 to input window size. If it is set to 0 or the
input window size, this function will be disabled. If it is set to 1, X.25 of the 3Com
serial routers will send an acknowledgement for each correct packet received. By
default, the number of data packets that can be received on X.25 before previous
acknowledgement is 0.
Description
Using the x25 receive-threshold command, you can set the number of receivable
maximum packets before X.25 sends the acknowledged packet. Using the undo
x25 receive-threshold command, you can restore its default value.
After enabling this function, the 3Com series routers can send acknowledgement
to the peer router upon the receipt of some correct packets, even if the input
window is not yet full. If there is not much data traffic in users' application
environment and users pay more attention to the response speed, they can
appropriately adjust this parameter to meet the requirement.
For the related command, see x25 window.

Example
Specify that each VC on the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 acknowledges each

correctly received data packet.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 receive-threshold 1
x25 response Syntax

called-address
x25 response called-address
undo x25 response called-address
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the x25 response called-address command, you can enable X.25 to carry the
address information of the called DTE in sending call reception packet. Using the
undo x25 response called-address command, you can disable the above function.
According to X.25, the call receiving packet of a call may or may not carry an
address code group, depending on the specific network requirements. This
command enables users to easily specify whether the call receiving packet of a call
sent by X.25 of the 3Com series routers carries the called DTE address.
For the related commands, see x25 response calling-address, x25 ignore
called-address, and x25 ignore calling-address.
Example
Specify that the call receiving packet of a call sent from the X.25 interface
Serial0/0/0 carries the called DTE address.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 response called-address
x25 response Syntax

calling-address
x25 response calling-address
undo x25 response calling-address
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the x25 response calling-address command, you can enable X.25 to carry
the address information of the calling DTE in sending call reception packet. Using
the undo x25 response calling-address command, you can disable the above
function.
According to X.25, the call receiving packet of a call may or may not carry an
address code group, depending on the specific network requirements. This
command enables users to easily specify whether the call receiving packet of a call
sent by X.25 of the 3Com series routers carries the calling DTE address.
For the related commands, see x25 response called-address, x25 ignore
called-address, and x25 ignore calling-address.
Example
Specify that the call receiving packet of a call sent from the X.25 interface
Serial0/0/0 carries the calling DTE address.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 response calling-address
x25 Syntax
reverse-charge-accept
x25 reverse-charge-accept
undo x25 reverse-charge-accept
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the x25 reverse-charge-accept command, you can enable this interface to
accept the call with “reverse charging request”, the information added by some
certain user facilities. Using the undo x25 reverse-charge-accept command, you
can disable this above function.
This function does not affect any call without “reverse charging request”.
If you enable this function on an X.25 interface, all these calls that reach the
interface will be accepted. If you enable this function for a certain address
mapping by the option reverse-charge-accept in the command x25 map, only such
calls that reach the interface and map this address will be accepted, while other
calls (carrying reverse charging request, and not mapping this address) will be
cleared.
Example
Set the “accepting calls with reverse charging request” function on interface
Serial0/0/0.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 reverse-charge-accept
x25 roa-list Syntax
x25 roa-list roa-name roa-id1 [ , id2, id3.... ]
undo x25 roa-list roa-name id1 [ , id2, id3.... ]
View
System view
Parameter
roa-name: Name of ROA.
id: ID specified for this ROA, and its value ranges from 0 to 9999. You can specify
multiple IDs for the ROA.
Description
Using the x25 roa-list command, you can define ROA list. Using the undo x25
roa-list command, you can delete ROA list items.
By default, no ROA list is defined.
You can configure multiple (0 to 20) ROAs, and each ROA can be specified with
multiple(1 to 10) IDs. After configuring ROA, you can cite it by its name in the
commands x25 call-facility or x25 map.
For the related commands, see x25 call-facility and x25 map.
Example
Define two ROA lists, and cite them on the interfaces Serial 0/0/0 and Serial 1/0/0.
[3Com] x25 roa-list list1 11 23 45

[3Com] x25 roa-list list2 345
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 call-facility roa-size list1
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 call-facility roa-list list2
x25 switch pvc Syntax
x25 switch pvc pvc-number1 interface serial number pvc pvc-number2 [ option ]
undo x25 switch pvc pvc-number1
View
Interface view
Parameter
pvc-number1: PVC number on the input interface, and its value ranges from 1 to
4095.
pvc-number2: PVC number on the output interface, and its value ranges from 1 to
4095.
number: Number of the input interface.
option: Attribute of PVC.
Description
Using the x25 switch pvc (packet switching) command, you can configure one
PVC route. Using the undo x25 switch pvc command, you can delete one PVC
route.
By default, no PVC route is defined.
Based on the X.25 switching configuration, you can use the 3Com series Routers
as a simple X.25 switch. When PVC switching is configured, the link layer
protocols on the input and output interfaces must be X.25. Moreover, the
specified PVCs on the two interfaces have been presented and enabled. Note that
PVC switching cannot be configured on the X.25 sub-interface.
Detailed explanations of PVC options are follows:
■ broadcast: Forwards broadcast packet to the peer PVC.

■ encapsulation-type: Encapsulation type, which may be nonstandard, ietf,
multi-protocol and snap.
■ window-size input-window-size output-window-size: Specifies the input
window and output window sizes of the VC, which range between 1 and the
number that is 1 less that the modulus of the X.25 interface where the address
mapping exists (including 1 and modulus minus 1).
For the related commands, see display x25 vc and x25 switching.
Example
Perform the packet switching between PVC1 on the Serial0/0/0 and PVC1 on the
Serial1/0/0.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] link-protocol x25 dce ietf

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] interface serial1/0/0
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] x25 switch pvc 1 interface serial 0/0/0 pvc 1
x25 switch svc Syntax

hunt-group
x25 switch svc x.121-address [ sub-dest destination-address ] [ sub-source
source-address ] hunt-group hunt-group-name
undo x25 switch svc x.121-address [ sub-dest destination-address ] [ sub-source

source-address ] hunt-group hunt-group-name
View
System view
Parameter
x.121-address: Destination address of X.121.This parameter consists of mode

matching string, and its length ranges from 1 to 15 characters. For the specific
description of mode matching, see the segment Description.
sub-dest destination-address: Substitution destination address.
sub-source source-address: Substitution source address.
hunt-group-name: Name of hunt group.
Description
Using the x25 switch svc hunt-group command, you can add an X.25 switching
route whose forwarding address is a hunt group. Using the undo x25 switch svc
hunt-group command, you can delete the specified X.25 switching route.
By default, no X.25 switching route is configured.
After the X.25 switching route whose forwarding address is a hunt group is
configured, the relevant X.25 call request packet will be forwarded to different
interfaces or XOT channels in the specified hunt group, so as to implement the
load sharing under X.25 protocol.
Table 22 X.121 mode matching rules
Wildcard
characters Matching rules Example
* Matching zero or more previous characters fo*
+ Matching zero or more previous characters fo+
^ Matching the beginning of the entered characters ^hell
$ Matching the end of the entered characters ar$
\char Matching a single character specified by char. b\+
. Matching arbitrary single character l.st

.* Matching arbitrary zero or more characters. fo.*
.+ Matching arbitrary one or more characters. fo.+
Table 23 Input rules of X.121 address mode matching string
Characters Input rules

* Cannot be placed at the beginning of character string
Cannot be placed after the symbol ^
Cannot be placed before and after the symbols + and *.
+ Cannot be placed at the beginning of character string
Cannot be placed after the symbol ^
Cannot be placed before and after the symbols + and *.
\ Cannot be placed at the end of character string
^ Cannot be placed before the symbols + and *.
For the related commands, see display x25 switch-table svc.
Example
Add an X.25 switching route, whose destination address is 8888 and forwarding
address is the hunt group hg1, and substitute the destination address with 9999.
[3Com] x25 switch svc 111 sub-dest 9999 sub-source 8888 hunt-group
hg1
x25 switch svc xot Syntax
x25 switch svc x.121-address [ sub-dest destination-address ] [ sub-source

source-address ] xot ip-address1 [ ip-address2 ] … [ ip-address6 ] [ xot-option ]
undo x25 switch svc x.121-address [ sub-dest destination-address ] [ sub-source

source-address ] [ xot ip-address1 [ ip-address2 ] … [ ip-address6 ] ]
View
System view
Parameter
x.121-address: Destination address of X.121. This parameter consists of mode

matching string, and its length ranges from 1 to 15 characters. For the specific
description of mode matching, see Table 10-4 and Table 10-5.
sub-dest destination-address: Substitution destination address.
sub-source source-address: Substitution source address.
ip-address1 - ip-address6: Destination IP address of XOT connection, up to 6

addresses can be configured.
xot-option: XOT channel parameter option. For the specific configuration, see XOT
channel parameter option.
Description
Using the x25 switch svc xot command, you can add an X.25 switching route
whose forwarding address is XOT channel. Using the undo x25 switch svc xot
command, you can delete the specified X.25 switching route.
By default, no X.25 switching route is configured.
After configuring the XOT switching command of X.25 SVC, a user can cross IP
network from the local X.25 network to implement the interconnection with the
remote X.25 network. If a user configures the keepalive attribute, the link
detection for XOT will be supported.
Table 24 XOT channel parameter option
Option Explanation
timer seconds Keepalive timer delay of XOT connection. The timer sends the keepa
detect the connection availability. Its value ranges from 1 to 3600.
retry times Number of maximum retries of sending keepalive. If the number exc
connection will be disconnected. Its value ranges from 3 to 3600.
source interface-type interface-name Interface name of initiating XOT connection
For the related commands, see x25 switch svc interface, display
x25 switch-table svc, and x25 switching.
Example
Switch SVC 1 to the destination address 10.1.1.1.
[3Com] x25 switch svc 1 xot 10.1.1.1
x25 switching Syntax
x25 switching
undo x25 switching
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the x25 switching command, you can enable the X.25 switching function.
Using the undo x25 switching command, you can disable this function, which will
not affect the established VC switching function.
By default, X.25 packet switching function is disabled.
X.25 packet switching is used to accept packets from an X.25 interface and send
them to a certain interface based on the destination information contained in the
packets. The Router can be used as a small-sized packet switch by the packet layer
switching function.
For the related commands, see x25 pvc, x25 switch pvc, x25 xot pvc, x25 fr pvc,
x25 switch svc, display x25 vc, and display x25 switch-table svc.
Example
Enable X.25 switching function.
[3Com] x25 switching
x25 timer hold Syntax
x25 timer hold minutes
undo x25 timer hold
View
Interface view
Parameter
minutes: Value of delay time in minutes, and its value ranges from 0 to 1000. If
the previous call failed at one destination, the X.25 won’t send calls to such a
destination again within the time set by this command.
By default, the delay time is 0.
Description
Using the x25 timer hold command, you can set the delay to send calls to a
destination with failed calls. Using the undo x25 timer hold command, you can
restore its default value.
Frequently sending call requests to a wrong destination (which does not exist or is
faulty) will deteriorate the operating efficiency of the 3Com series router. The use
of this function can avoid this problem to a certain extent. If this parameter is set
to 0, it is equal to disabling the function. In addition, this function is only effective
to the calls originated from the local. That is to say, this parameter is meaningless
when the X.25 operates in the switching mode.
Example
Set the parameter of the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 5 minutes.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 timer hold 5
x25 timer idle Syntax
x25 timer idle minutes
undo x25 timer idle

View
Interface view
Parameter
minutes: Maximum idle time of SVC in minutes, and its value ranges from 0 to
255.By default, this value is 0.
Description
Using the x25 timer idle command, you can set the maximum idle time of the SVC
on the interface. Using the undo x25 timer idle command, you can restore its
default value.
When a SVC stays idle (no data transmission) for a period (the period length is
decided by the parameter), the router will clear this SVC automatically. If this
parameter is set to 0, this SVC will be reserved no matter how long it stays idle.
The configuration of this parameter will affect all the SVCs on this X.25 interface.
Also users can set the maximum idle time for a SVC attached to this address
mapping through the option in the command x25 map.
For PVC or the established SVC for X.25 switching, the command will be disabled.
Example
Set the maximum idle time of the SVC on the interface Serial 0/0/0 to 10 minutes.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 timer idle 10
x25 timer tx0 Syntax
x25 timer tx0 seconds
undo x25 timer tx0
View
Interface view
Parameter
seconds: Delay time for the X.25 restarting timer in seconds. It ranges 0 to 1000.
By default, the delay on the X.25 DTE restarting timer is 180 seconds and that on
the DCE timer is 60 seconds.
Description
Using the x25 timer tx0 command, you can set the restart/retransmission timer
delay for DTE (or DCE). Using the undo x25 timer tx0 command, you can restore
their default values.
According to X.25, a timer should be started when a DTE sends a restart request
(or a DCE sends a restart indication). If no peer acknowledgement is received after
this timer is timeout, the sending end will take some measures to guarantee the
normal proceeding of the local procedure. This parameter specifies the delay time
of this timer before the timeout.
For the related commands, see x25 timer tx1, x25 timer tx2, and x25 timer tx3.
Example
Set the restarting timer delay on the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 120 seconds.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 timer tx0 120
undo x25 timer tx1
View
Interface view
Parameter
seconds: Delay time of calling request (indication) transmission timer in seconds,

and its value ranges from 0 to 1000. By default, the delay time on a DTE call timer
is 200 seconds; that on a DCE call sending timer is 180 seconds.
Description
Using the x25 timer tx1 command, you can set calling request (indication)
transmission timer delay for DTE (or DCE). Using the undo x25 timer tx1
command, you can restore its default value.
According to X.25, a timer should be started when a DTE sends a call request (or a
DCE sends a call indication). If no peer acknowledgement is received after this
timer is timeout, the sending end will take some measures to guarantee the
Example
Set the timer delay on the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 100 seconds.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 tx1 100
undo x25 timer tx2

View
Interface view
Parameter
seconds: Delay time of resetting request (indication) timer in seconds, and its value
ranges from 0 to 1000. By default, the delay time on a DTE reset timer is 180
seconds; that on a DCE reset timer is 60 seconds.
Description
Using the x25 timer tx2 command, you can set resetting request (indication)
According to X.25, a timer should be started when a DTE sends a reset request (or
a DCE sends a reset indication). If no peer acknowledgement is received after this
Example
Set the reset timer delay on the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 120 seconds.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 tx2 120
undo x25 timer tx3
View
Interface view
Parameter
seconds: Delay time of clearing request (indication) transmission timer in seconds,

and its value ranges from 0 to 1000. By default, the delay time on a DTE clearing
timer is 180 seconds; that on a DCE clearing timer is 60 seconds.
Description
Using the x25 timer tx3 command, you can set clearing request (indication)
According to X.25, a timer should be started when a DTE sends a clear request (or
a DCE sends a clear indication). If no peer acknowledgement is received after this
Example
Set the delay time of clearing timer on the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 100
seconds.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 timer tx3 100
x25 vc-per-map Syntax
x25 vc-per-map count
undo x25 vc-per-map
View
Interface view
Parameter
count: Maximum number of VCs, and its value ranges from 1 to 8.By default, its
value is 1.
Description
Using the x25 vc-per-map command, you can set the maximum number of VCs for
connections with the same destination device. Using the undo x25 vc-per-map
command, you can restore their default values.
If the parameter is greater than 1, and the sending window and the sending
queue of VC are filled full, the system will create a new VC to the same
destination. If the new VC cannot be created, the datagram will be discarded.
For the related commands, see display interface and x25 map.
Example
Set the maximum value of VCs on the X.25 interface Serial 0/0/0 to 3.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 vc-per-map 3
x25 vc-range Syntax
x25 vc-range [ in-channel lic hic ] [ bi-channel ltc htc ] [ out-channel loc hoc ]
undo x25 vc-range
View
Interface view
Parameter
ltc htc: Lowest and highest two-way channels of X.25 VC, and its value ranges
from 0 to 4095. If htc (highest two-way channel) is set to 0, ltc (lowest two-way
channel) must also be set to 0, which indicates that the two-way channel section is
disabled. By default, the htc of X.25 VC is 1024.
lic hic: Lowest and highest incoming-only channels of X.25 VC, and its value
ranges from 0 to 4095.If hic (highest incoming-only channel) is set to 0, lic (lowest
incoming-only channel) must also be set to 0, which indicates that the
incoming-only channel section is disabled. By default, the hic in X.25 VC range is
0.
loc hoc: Lowest and highest outgoing-only channels of X.25 VC, and its value
ranges from 0 to 4095. If hoc (highest outgoing-only channel) is set to 0, loc
(lowest outgoing-only channel) must also be set to 0, which indicates that the
outgoing-only channel section is disabled. By default, the hoc in X.25 VC range is
0.
Description
Using the x25 vc-range command, you can set highest and lowest values of X.25
VC range. Using the undo x25 vc-range command, you can restore their default
values.
By default, VRP X.25 disables incoming-only channel range and outgoing-only

channel, and only the two-way channel range (1-1024) is reserved for use. Please
set the VC range correctly according to the requirements of the ISP.
Example
Configure the link layer protocol on the interface Serial 0/0/0 to X.25, enable
incoming-only channel section and two-way channel section and disable outgoing
–only channel section. After executing a series of commands, the three sections
are [1, 7], [8, 1024] and [0, 0], respectively.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 vc-range in-channel 1 7 bi-channel 8 1024
x25 window-size Syntax
x25 window-size input-window-size output-window-size
undo x25 window-size
View
Interface view
Parameter
input-window-size: Size of input window. When X.25 window modulus is 8, its

value ranges from 1 to 7. When X.25 window modulus is 128, its value ranges
from 1 to 127.By default, its value is 2.
output-window-size: Size of output window. When X.25 window modulus is 8, its

value ranges from 1 to 7. When X.25 window modulus is 128, its value ranges
from 1 to 127. By default, its value is 2.
Description
Using the x25 window-size command, you can set the sizes of input and output
windows on the interface X.25. Using the undo x25 window-size command, you
can restore their default values.
This parameter in-packets determines the maximum number of correctly received

packets before X.25 sends the acknowledgement information. As long as the
bandwidth allows, the greater the window size, the higher the transmission
efficiency.
Out-packets determines the maximum number of data packets sent by X.25

before it receives the correct acknowledgment information. As long as the
bandwidth allows, the greater the window size, the higher the transmission
efficiency.
Please consult users' ISP about the sending and receiving window sizes. Unless
supported by the network, do not set these two parameters to different values.
For the related commands, see display interface, x25 map, x25 pvc, x25 switch
pvc, x25 xot pvc, x25 fr pvc, and x25 receive-threshold.
Example
Set the receiving and sending window sizes on the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 5.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 window-size 5 5
x25 x121-address Syntax
x25 x121-address x.121-address
undo x25 x121-address
View
Interface view
Parameter
x.121-address: X.121 address of an interface. It is formatted using the numerical

string from 1 to 15 bytes.
Description
Using the x25 x121-address command, you can set the X.121 address of an X.25
interface. Using the undo x25 x121-address command, you can delete the
address.
If the Router is accessed to X.25 public packet network, the ISP must assign a valid
X.121 address to it. If two Routers are only directly connected back to back, a user
can randomly specify the valid X.121 address. If you only wants the Router to
work in switching mode, the X.121 address needs not to be configured.
When you reconfigure an X.121 address for an X.25 interface, you need not
delete the original X.121 address, because the new address will overwrite the old
one. After an X.25 interface is re-configured, the original X.121 address will be
deleted. So the X.121 address must be re-configured to work properly.
Note: For the format of the X.121 address and the dynamic conversion between IP
address and X.121 address, please refer to ITU-T Recommendation X.121 and the
relative RFC document.
Example
Configure the link layer protocol on the interface Serial 0/0/0 as X.25, and X.121
address as 20112451.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 x121-address 20112451
x25 xot pvc Syntax
x25 xot pvc pvc-number1 ip-address interface type number pvc pvc-number2 [
xot-option ] [ packet-size input-packet output-packet window-size
input-window-size output-window-size ]
undo x25 pvc pvc-number1
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ pvc-number1: Number of PVC on the local interface, and its value ranges from
1 to 4095.
■ pvc-number2: Number of PVC on the peer interface, and its value ranges from
1 to 4095.
■ ip-address: IP address of the peer destination for connection with XOT.
■ interface type number: Type and number of interface, and the interface type
can only be Serial.
■ xot-option: Option of XOT channel parameter. For the specific configuration,
see XOT channel parameter option.
■ window-size input-window-size output-window-size: Specifies the receiving
window and sending window sizes of the VC, which range between 1 and the
number that is 1 less than the modulus of the X.25 interface where the address
mapping exists (including 1 and modulus minus 1).
Description
Using the x25 xot pvc command, you can add a PVC route of XOT. Using the undo
x25 pvc command, you can delete the specified PVC route of XOT.
By default, no PVC route is configured.
After configuring the XOT switching command of X.25 PVC, a user can cross IP
network from the local X.25 network to implement the interconnection with the
remote X.25 network. If a user configures the keepalive attribute, the link
detection for XOT will be supported.
For the related commands, see display x25 vc and x25 switching.
Example
Connect PVC1 on the interface Serial0/0/0(10.1.1.1) of Router RTA with PVC2 on

the interface Serial1/0/0(10.1.1.2) of Router RTB via XOT tunnel, and then perform
packet switching.
Perform the configurations on the Router RTA.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 xot pvc 1 10.1.1.2 interface serial 1/0/0 pvc
2
Perform the configurations on the Router RTB.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] x25 xot pvc 2 10.1.1.1 interface serial 0/0/0 pvc
1
x29 timer Syntax

inviteclear-time
x29 timer inviteclear-time seconds
View
System view
Parameter
seconds: Delay time in seconds, and its value ranges from 5 to 2147483. The delay
of waiting for response after inviting PAD clear procedure, its default value is 5.
Description
Using the x29 timer inviteclear-time command, you can set the delay of waiting
for response after inviting PAD clear procedure. After exceeding the time, the
system will forcedly exit from the PAC connection and start x.25 clear procedure.
Example
Set the parameter of X.29 to 10 seconds.
[3Com] x29 timer inviteclear-time 10

NETWORK PROTOCOL
5
IP Address
Configuration
Commands
display ip interface Syntax
display ip interface { interface-type interface-number | interface-name }
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-number: Interface sequence number.
interface-name: Interface name.
Description
Using the display ip interface command, you can display the running condition of
all the interfaces.
Example
3Com<3Com> display ip interface Ethernet6/0/0
Ethernet6/0/0 current state : UP

Internet Address : 5.5.5.5/8
Broadcast address : 0.0.0.0
The Maximum Transmit Unit : 1500 bytes
input packets : 1231, bytes : 57557, multicasts : 1177
output packets : 0, bytes : 0, multicasts : 0
The following information is displayed: the current physical link state of Ethernet
6/0/0 is UP, the protocol of link layer is UP, the IP address is 5.5.5.5, the broadcast
address is 0.0.0.0, the maximum transmit unit is 1500 bytes and some other
information about packets receiving/sending via this interface.
ip address Syntax
ip address ip-address net-mask [ sub ]

398 CHAPTER 5: NETWORK PROTOCOL
undo ip address [ ip-address net-mask [sub] ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
ip-address: Interface IP address, in dot delimitated decimal format.
net-mask: The mask of the corresponding subnet, in dot delimitated decimal

format.
sub: To enable communications among different subnets, the configured slave IP

address should be used.
Description
Using the ip address command, you can set an IP address for an interface. Using
the undo ip address command, you can delete an IP address of the interface.
By default, no IP address is configured.
IP address is classified into five types, and users can select proper IP subnet
according to actual conditions. Moreover, in the case that part of the host address
is composed of 0 or the entire host address is composed of 1, the address has
some special use and can not be used as ordinary IP address.
The mask identifies the network number in an IP address.
Under normal conditions, one interface only needs to be configured with one IP
address. However, to enable one interface of a router to connect to several
subnets, one interface can be configured with several IP addresses. Among them,
one is master IP address, and others are slave IP addresses. Following is the
relationship between the master and slave IP addresses:
If a master IP address is configured while there’s already an existing master IP

address, the original one will be deleted and the newly configured will take effect.
The command undo ip address without parameters indicates to delete all the IP
addresses of the interface. The command undo ip address ip-address net-mask
indicates to delete the master IP address and undo ip address ip-address net-mask
sub indicates to delete the slave address. All the slave addresses must be deleted
before the master IP address can be deleted.
In addition, any two IP addresses configured for all interfaces on a router cannot
be located in the same subnet.
For the related commands, see ip route-static, display ip interface, and display
interface.
Example
Configure the interface Serial 0/0/0 with the master IP address as 129.102.0.1, the
slave IP address is 202.38.160.1, and the subnet mask of both is 255.255.255.0.
IP Address Configuration Commands 399

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ip address 202.38.160.1 255.255.255.0 sub
ip address Syntax
ppp-negotiate
ip address ppp-negotiate
undo ip address ppp-negotiate
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ip address ppp-negotiate command, you can allow IP address be

assigned through negotiation at the interface. Using the undo ip address
ppp-negotiate command, you can disable this function.
By default, no interface ip address negotiation is allowed.
As PPP supports IP address negotiation, only when the interface is encapsulated

with the link-layer protocol PPP, can the IP address negotiation at this interface be
configured.
Normally, it is not necessary to configure ip address negotiation. Only in some

special circumstances such as accessing Internet through the ISP, the IP addresses
of the interface that is connected with the ISP are allocated by the ISP through
negotiation.
When IP address negotiation for the interface is configured, it is not necessary to

configure the IP address manually for this interface.
Example
Display how to set IP address of interface Serial 0/0/0 to be allocated by peer

through negotiation.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] ip address ppp-negotiate
ip address unnumbered Syntax
ip address unnumbered { interface interface-type interface-number |

interface-name }
undo ip address unnumbered
View
Interface view
Parameter
interface-type: Name of the unnumbered interface.
interface-number: Serial number of the unnumbered interface.
interface-name: Interface name of the unnumbered interface.
Description
Using the ip address unnumbered command, you can enable an interface to

borrow the IP address of another interface. Using the undo ip address
unnumbered command, you can disable this function on the interface.
By default, an interface does not borrow IP addresses from other interfaces.
This command is used to enable serial interfaces encapsulated with PPP, HDLC,
Frame Relay, SLIP and Tunnel to borrow the IP addresses from the Ethernet
interface or other interfaces.
Example
Display how to make the serial interface 0/0/0 encapsulated with PPP borrow the
unnumbered IP address from Ethernet interface 0/0/0.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] ip address unnumbered Ethernet 0/0/0
remote address Syntax
remote address { ip-address | pool [ pool-number ] }
undo remote address
View
Interface view
Parameter
ip-address: IP address.
pool-number: Address pool number, i.e., assigning one address in the

pool-number to the peer interface. It is a number ranging 0 to 99 with the default
value as 0.
Description
Using the remote address command, you can configure to assign IP address for
the peer interface. Using the undo remote address command, you can disable to
assign IP address for the peer interface.
By default, the interface does not assign address for the peer interface.
When an interface is encapsulated with PPP, but not configured with IP address,
perform the following task to configure the negotiable attribute of IP address for
this interface (configuring the ip address ppp-negotiate command on local router
while configuring the remote address command on the peer router), so that the
local interface can accept the IP address originated from PPP negotiation. This IP
address is assigned by the opposite end. This configuration is mainly used to
obtain IP address assigned by ISP when accessing Internet via ISP.
For the related command, see ip address ppp-negotiate.
Example
The serial interface encapsulated with PPP assigns an IP address 10.0.0.1 for the
peer.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] remote address 10.0.0.1
ARP Configuration
Commands
arp static Syntax
arp static ip-address ethernet-address [ vpn-instance-name ]
undo arp ip-address [ vpn-instance-name ]
View
System view
Parameter
ip-address: IP addresses of the ARP mapping entries in dot deliminated decimal

format.
ethernet-address: Ethernet MAC address of ARP mapping entries. Its format is

H-H-H, in which H is a hexadecimal number with 1 to 4 bits.
vpn-instance-name: The name of VPN instance.
Description
Using the arp static command, you can configure ARP mapping table. And using
the undo arp command, you can delete mapping items corresponding to some
addresses in the ARP mapping table.
By default, the mapping table of the system ARP is empty and the address
mapping can be obtained through dynamic ARP.
Normally, ARP mapping table is maintained by dynamic ARP, only in special

circumstances is manual configuration needed. Besides, ARP mapping table is
used for LAN only, WAN address resolution is accomplished in a different way, for
instance the inverse address resolution of frame relay.
For the related commands, see arp static and display arp.
Example
Configure the Ethernet MAC address e0-fc01-0 corresponding to the IP address

129.102.0.1.
[3Com] arp static 129.102.0.1 e0-fc01-0
Configure the Ethernet MAC address aa-fcc-12 corresponding to the IP address

11.0.0.1.
[3Com] arp static 11.0.0.1 aa-fcc-12
debugging arp packet Syntax
debugging arp packet
undo debugging arp packet
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the debugging arp packet command, you can enable ARP packets
debugging; and using the undo debugging arp packet command, you can disable
the function.
Example
Enable ARP packets debugging.
<3Com> debugging arp packet
display arp Syntax
display arp [ static | dynamic | all ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ static: Indicates to show the static ARP entries.
■ dynamic: Indicates to show the dynamic ARP entries.
■ all: Indicates to show all ARP entries.
Description
Using the display arp command, you can view the ARP mapping table.
By default, all the ARP entries of the RSU are displayed.
For the related commands, see arp static and reset arp.
Example
Display all static ARP entries.
<3Com> display arp static

IP Address MAC AddressType Vrf NameInterface
129.102.0.100e0-fc01-0000S
10.110.28.4400e0-fc07-5b2bIEth0/0
reset arp Syntax
reset arp [ all | dynamic | static | interface { interface-type interface-number |

interface-name } ]
View
User view
Parameter
■ static: Indicates to clear the static ARP entries.
■ dynamic: Indicates to clear the dynamic ARP entries.
■ all: Indicates to clear all ARP entries.
■ interface: Indicates the selected interface.
■ interface-type: Interface type.
■ interface-number: Interface sequence number.
■ interface-name: Interface name.
Description
Using the reset arp command, you can clear the ARP entries in the ARP mapping
table.
By default, if slot-number is not specified, the operation will be performed upon

RSU board.
When operation is performed to the interface with specified interface, the

interface type can only be Ethernet, GE or virtual Ethernet and only the dynamic
entries can be deleted on the interface.
For the related commands, see arp static and display arp.
Example
The following example shows how to delete the dynamic entries in the ARP
mapping table on Ethernet 0/0/0.
<3Com> reset arp interface Ethernet 0/0/0

Static Domain Name

Resolution
display ip host Syntax
display ip host
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ip host command, you can display all the host names and their
corresponding IP addresses.
Example
Display all the host names and their corresponding IP addresses.
<3Com> display ip host

Host Age Flags Address(es)
eth 0 static 6.1.1.1
3Com 0 static 1.1.1.1
ip host Syntax
ip host hostname ip-address
undo ip host hostname [ ip-address ]
View
System view
Parameter
■ hostname: The name of a host, a character string with its length from 1 to 20.
■ ip-address: The IP address corresponding to a host name, whose format can be
A.B.C.D
Description
Using the ip host command, you can configure the IP address corresponding to a
host name; while using the undo ip host command, you can remove the IP address
corresponding to a host name.
By default, the static domain name table is empty, i.e. there’s no host name and IP
address pair.
Example
Configure the IP address corresponding to the host name router1 as 10.110.0.1.
[3Com] ip host router1 10.110.0.1
Configure the IP address corresponding to the host name router2 as 10.110.0.2.
Configure to assign the IP address 10.110.0.3 to the host name router3.
Remove the IP address 10.110.0.2 corresponding to the host name router2.
[3Com] undo ip host router2 10.110.0.2
DHCP Public
Configuration
Commands
dhcp enable Syntax

dhcp enable
undo dhcp enable
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the dhcp enable command, you can enable DHCP services. Using the undo
dhcp enable command, you can disable DHCP services.
By default, DHCP services are enabled.
Before you can configure DHCP, you must enable DHCP services. This
configuration is essential to both DHCP server and DHCP relay.
Example
Enable DHCP services on current router.
[3Com] dhcp enable
dhcp select (in Interface Syntax

View)
dhcp select { global | interface | relay }
undo dhcp select
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ global: The address DHCP client gets is the one selected by the local DHCP
server from a global address pool upon the receipt of the DHCP request from
the client.
■ interface: The address DHCP client gets is the one selected by the local DHCP
server from an interface address pool upon the receipt of the DHCP request
from the client.
■ relay: The address DHCP client gets is allocated by an external DHCP server.
Description
Using the dhcp select command in interface view, you can select a method for
disposing the DHCP packets destined to the local device. Using the undo dhcp
select command in interface view, you can restore the default setting.
By default, DHCP packets destined to the local device will be sent to the internal
server and the clients sending them will be allocated with addresses selected from
a global address pool (in global approach).
For the related command, see dhcp select (in system view).
Example
Allocate addresses selected from an interface address pool on the internal DHCP
server to the clients sending DHCP packets destined to the local device.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] dhcp select interface
dhcp select (in System Syntax

View)
dhcp select { global | interface | relay } { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }
undo dhcp select { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }
View
System view
Parameter
■ global: The address DHCP client gets is the one selected by the local DHCP
server from a global address pool upon the receipt of the DHCP request from
the client.
■ interface: The address DHCP client gets is the one selected by the local DHCP
server from an interface address pool upon the receipt of the DHCP request
from the client.
■ relay: The address DHCP client gets is allocated by an external DHCP server.
■ ethernet-subinterface-range: Includes all the subinterfaces between two

subinterfaces (including these two subinterfaces) by inserting the keyword “to”
between these two interfaces.
■ all: All the interfaces.
Description
Using the dhcp select command in system view, you can select a method for
multiple interfaces in a specified range to dispose the DHCP packets destined to
the local device. Using the undo dhcp select command in system view, you can
By default, DHCP packets destined to the local device will be sent to the internal
server and the clients sending them will be allocated with addresses selected from
a global address pool (in global approach).
For the related command, see dhcp select (in interface view).
Example
Configure the interfaces in the range of Ethernet2/0/0.1 to Ethernet2/0/0.5 to

allocate addresses selected from an interface address pool maintained by the
internal server to the clients sending DHCP packets destined to the local device.
[3Com] dhcp select interface interface ethernet 2/0/0.1 to ethernet

2/0/0.5
dhcp server detect Syntax

dhcp server detect
undo dhcp server detect
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the dhcp server detect command, you can enable pseudo-DHCP-server
detection. Using the undo dhcp server detect command, you can disable the
function.
By default, pseudo-DHCP-server detection is disabled.
Example
Enable pseudo DHCP server detection on the interface Ethernet 2/0/0.
[3Com-Ethernet2/0/0] dhcp server detect
DHCP Server
Configuration
Commands
debugging dhcp server Syntax

debugging dhcp server { all | error | events | packets }
undo debugging dhcp server { all | error | events | packets }
View
User view
Parameter
■ all: All debugging functions of DHCP server.
■ error: Error debugging on the DHCP server, specifically, the debugging on the
errors that occur when the DHCP server processes DHCP packets, allocates
addresses, etc.
■ events: Event debugging on the DHCP server, specifically, the debugging on the
events such as address allocation, ping detection timeout, etc.
■ packet: DHCP packet debugging, specifically, the debugging on the packets
that the DHCP server has received and sent and on the ping packets sent for
the purpose of detection and the received response packets.
Description
Using the debugging dhcp server command, you can enable debugging on the
DHCP server. Using the undo debugging dhcp server command, you can disable
debugging.
By default, debugging is disabled on the DHCP server.
Example
Enable event debugging on the DHCP server.
<3Com> debugging dhcp server events
*0.62496500-DHCP SER-8-DHCPS_DEBUG_COMMON:
DhcpServer: ICMP Timeout
DhcpServer: Still Need to ICMP detect for 1 times
DhcpServer: ICMP Timeout
DhcpServer: All Try finished
DhcpServer: Ack User's Lease
Enable packet debugging on the DHCP server.
<3Com> debugging dhcp server packet

DhcpServer: receive DHCPRELEASE from 00.05.5D.85.D5.45.
DhcpServer: Release Lease for MAC 00.05.5D.85.D5.45. IP is 5.5.5.2
DhcpServer: receive DHCPDISCOVER from 00.05.5D.85.D5.45.

DhcpServer: Sending ICMP ECHO to Target IP: 5.5.5.2
DhcpServer: Sending ICMP ECHO to Target IP: 5.5.5.2
DhcpServer: Send DHCPOFFER to MAC=> 00.05.5D.85.D5.45. Offer IP=>
5.5.5.2
DhcpServer: receive DHCPREQUEST from 00.05.5D.85.D5.45.
DhcpServer: Send DHCPACK to MAC=> 00.05.5D.85.D5.45. Offer IP=>
5.5.5.2
Enable error debugging on the DHCP server.
<3Com> debugging dhcp server error

DhcpServer: Icmp Packet is not EHHOREPLY!
dhcp server dns-list (in Syntax

Interface View) dhcp server dns-list ip-address [ ip-address ]
undo dhcp server dns-list { ip-address | all }
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ ip-address: IP address of DNS. You can configure up to eight IP addresses
separated by spaces in a command.
Description
Using the dhcp server dns-list command in interface view, you can configure DNS
IP addresses for an interface configured with a DHCP address pool. Using the undo
dns-list command in interface view, you can delete the configuration.
By default, no DNS address is configured.
By far, only up to eight DNS server addresses can be set in each DHCP address
pool.
For the related commands, see dhcp server dns-list (in system view), dhcp server
ip-pool, and dns-list.
Example
Configure the DNS server address 1.1.1.254 for the DHCP address pool of the
interface Ethernet1/0/0.
[3Com-Ethernet 1/0/0] dhcp server dns-list 1.1.1.254
dhcp server dns-list (in Syntax

System View) dhcp server dns-list ip-address [ ip-address ] { interface
ethernet-subinterface-range | all }
undo dhcp server dns-list { ip-address | all } { interface ethernet-subinterface-range

| all }
View
System view
Parameter
■ ip-address: IP address of DNS. You can configure up to eight IP addresses
■ ethernet-subinterface-range: Includes any the subinterfaces whose interface
number lies between the two given subinterface number (including these two
subinterfaces) by inserting the keyword “to” between these two interface
numbers.
■ all: In the undo form of the command, the first “all” refers to all the Gateway
(GW) addresses and the second, all the interfaces.
Description
Using the dhcp server dns-list command in system view, you can assign DNS IP
addresses to the DHCP address pool of multiple interfaces in a specified range.
Using the undo dns-list command in system view, you can delete the
configuration.
By default, no DNS address is configured.
Only up to eight DNS server addresses, by far, can be set in each DHCP address
pool.
For the related commands, see dhcp server dns-list (in interface view), dhcp server
ip-pool, and dns-list.
Example
Assign the DNS server address 1.1.1.254 to the DHCP address pool of the
interfaces in the range of Ethernet1/0/0.0 to Ethernet2/0/0.5.
[3Com] dhcp server dns-list 1.1.1.254 interface ethernet 2/0/0.0 to
ethernet 2/0/0.5
dhcp server Syntax

domain-name (in dhcp server domain-name domain-name
Interface View)
undo dhcp server domain-name domain-name
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ domain-name: Domain name that the DHCP server allocates to clients, which is
a string comprising at least three characters and at most 50 characters.
Description
Using the dhcp server domain-name command in interface view, you can
configure the domain name that the DHCP address pool of the current interface
allocates to clients. Using the undo dhcp server domain-name command in

interface view, you can delete the configured domain name.
By default, no domain name has been allocated to DHCP clients and domain name
is null.
For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server domain-name (in
system view), and domain-name.
Example
Configure the domain name eth1_0_0.com.cn in an interface DHCP address pool.

[3Com-Ethernet 1/0/0] dhcp server domain-name eth1_0_0.com.cn
dhcp server Syntax

domain-name (in System dhcp server domain-name domain-name { interface ethernet-subinterface-range |
View) all }
undo dhcp server domain-name domain-name { interface
View
System view
Parameter
■ domain-name: Domain name that the DHCP server allocates to clients, which is
a string comprising 3 to 50 characters.
number lies between two subinterface numbers (including these two
numbers.
Description
Using the dhcp server domain-name command in system view, you can configure
the domain name that the DHCP address pool of the interfaces in a specified
range allocates to DHCP clients. Using the undo dhcp server domain-name
command in system view, you can delete the configured domain name.
By default, no domain name is configured for clients.
After configuring this command, you cannot view the configuration of this
command by executing the display current-configuration command. By executing
the dhcp server domain-name command respectively on the specified interfaces,
you can fulfill the batch configurations of the command.
For the related command, see dhcp server ip-pool.
Example
Configure eth2_1_5.com.cn as the domain name in the interface DHCP address
pool of the interfaces Ethernet2/0/0.1 through Ethernet2/0/0.5.
[3Com] dhcp server domain-name eth1_0_0.com.cn interface ethernet
2/0/0.1 to ethernet 2/0/0.5
dhcp server expired (in Syntax

Interface View) dhcp server expired { day day [ hour hour [ minute minute ] ] | unlimited }
undo dhcp server expired
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ day day: Number of days in the range of 0 to 365.
■ hour hour: Number of hours in the range of 0 to 23.
■ minute minute: Number of hours in the range of 0 to 59.
■ unlimited: The valid period is unlimited.
Description
Using the dhcp server expired command in interface view, you can configure a
valid period allowed for leasing IP addresses in the current interface DHCP address
pool. Using the undo dhcp server expired command in interface view, you can
By default, the leasing valid period is one day.
For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server expired (in system
view), and expired.
Example
Set the valid period for leasing IP addresses in the interface address pool
maintained by Ethernet1/0/0 to unlimited.
[3Com-Ethernet 1/0/0] dhcp server expired unlimited
dhcp server expired (in Syntax

System View) dhcp server expired { day day [ hour hour [ minute minute ] ] | unlimited } {
interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }
undo dhcp server expired { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }
View
System view
Parameter
numbers.
Description
Using the dhcp server expired command in system view, you can configure a valid
period allowed for leasing IP addresses in the interface DHCP address pool of the
interfaces in a specified range. Using the undo dhcp server expired command in
system view, you can restore the default setting.
After configuring this command, you cannot view the configuration by executing
the display current-configuration command. By calling the dhcp server expired
command respectively on the specified interfaces, you can fulfill the batch
configurations of the command.
For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server expired (in
interface view), and expired.
Example
Set the valid period for leasing IP addresses in the interface address pool of the
interfaces in the range of Ethernet2/0/0.1 to Ethernet2/0/0.5 to unlimited.
[3Com] dhcp server expired unlimited interface ethernet 2/0/0.1 to
ethernet 2/0/0.5
dhcp server forbidden-ip Syntax

dhcp server forbidden-ip low-ip-address [ high-ip-address ]
undo dhcp server forbidden-ip low-ip-address [ high-ip-address ]
View
System view
Parameter
■ low-ip-address: The low IP address that does not participate in the
auto-allocation.
■ high-ip-address: The high IP address that does not participate in the
auto-allocation. It must belong to the same segment to which the
low-ip-address belongs as well and must not be smaller than the
low-ip-address. If this parameter is not specified, there will be only one IP
address, i.e., low-ip-address.
Description
Using the dhcp server forbidden-ip command, you can exclude IP addresses in a
specified range to participate in the auto-allocation. Using the undo dhcp server
forbidden-ip command, you can delete the configuration.
By default, all the IP addresses in address pools participate in the auto-allocation.
You can configure multiple IP address ranges that do not participate in the
auto-allocation. Before using the undo dhcp server forbidden-ip command to
delete the setting, you must make sure that you are using exactly the same
parameters that you have configured. In other words, you cannot delete only
some addresses from the configured range.
For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, network, and static-bind
ip-address.
Example
Reserve the IP addresses in the range of 10.110.1.1 to 10.110.1.63 so that these
addresses will not participate in the address auto-allocation.
[3Com] dhcp server forbidden-ip 10.110.1.1 10.110.1.63
3.2.9 dhcp server ip-pool
Syntax
dhcp server ip-pool pool-name
undo dhcp server ip-pool pool-name
View
System view
Parameter
pool-name: Address pool name uniquely identifying an address pool, which is a
string comprising at least one character and 35 characters at most.
Description
Using the dhcp server ip-pool command, you can create a DHCP address pool and
access the DHCP address pool view. Using the undo dhcp server ip-pool
command, you can delete the specified address pool.
By default, no DHCP address pool is created.
If the specified address pool has existed, executing the dhcp server ip-pool
command will directly access the DHCP address pool view. If the address pool does
not exist, the DHCP server will create it before accessing the DHCP address pool
view. Each DHCP server is allowed to configure multiple address pools but no
more than 50.
For the related commands, see dhcp enable, expired, and network.
Example
Create DHCP address pool 0.
[3Com] dhcp server ip-pool 0
[3Com-dhcp-0]
dhcp server nbns-list (in Syntax

Interface View) dhcp server nbns-list ip-address [ ip-address ]
undo dhcp server nbns-list { ip-address | all }
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ ip-address: IP address of NetBIOS server. You can configure up to eight IP
addresses separated by spaces in a command.
■ all: All the NetBIOS server IP addresses.
Description
Using the dhcp server nbns-list command in interface view, you can configure
NetBIOS server addresses in the DHCP address pool of current interface. Using the
undo dns-list command in interface view, you can delete the configuration.
By default, no NetBIOS address is configured.
By far, only up to eight NetBIOS addresses can be configured in each DHCP
address pool.
For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server nbns-list (in
system view), nbns-list, and netbios-type.
Example
In the DHCP address pool of Ethernet1/0/0, allocate the NetBIOS server at
10.12.1.99 to the clients.
[3Com-Ethernet 1/0/0] dhcp server nbns-list 10.12.1.99
dhcp server nbns-list (in Syntax

System View) dhcp server nbns-list ip-address [ ip-address ] { interface
undo dhcp server nbns-list { ip-address | all } { interface
View
System view
Parameter
■ all: In the undo form of the command, the first “all” refers to all the NetBIOS
server addresses and the second, all the interfaces.
numbers.
Description
Using the dhcp server nbns-list command in system view, you can configure
NetBIOS server addresses for the clients that get ip address from the DHCP address
pool of the interfaces in a specified range. Using the undo dhcp server nbns-list
command in system view, you can delete the configuration.
address pool.
the display current-configuration command. By calling the dhcp server nbns-list
command respectively on the specified interfaces, you can fulfill the batch
configurations of the command.
For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server nbns-list (in
interface view), nbns-list, and netbios-type.
Example
In the DHCP address pool of interfaces in the range of Ethernet2/0/0.1 to
Ethernet2/0/0.5, assign the NetBIOS server at 10.12.1.99 to the clients.
[3Com] dhcp server nbns-list 10.12.1.99 interface ethernet 2/0/0.1
to ethernet 2/0/0.5
dhcp server netbios-type Syntax

(in Interface View) dhcp server netbios-type { b-node | h-node | m-node | p-node }
undo dhcp server netbios-type
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ b-node: Broadcast mode, i.e., hostname-IP maps are obtained by means of
broadcast.
■ p-node: Peer-to-peer mode, i.e., maps are obtained by means of
communicating with the NetBIOS server.
■ m-node: Mixed (m) mode, i.e., the mode of type b nodes running
“peer-to-peer” communications mechanism.
■ h-node: Hybrid (h) mode, i.e., the mode of type p nodes possessing some of
the broadcast features.
Description
Using the dhcp server netbios-type command in interface view, you can configure
the NetBIOS node type of the DHCP clients of the current interface. Using the
undo dhcp server netbios-type command in interface view, you can restore the
default setting.
By default, clients adopt type h node (h-node).
Hostname-IP maps are required in the event that DHCP clients use the NetBIOS
protocol on a WAN.
For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, netbios-type, dhcp server
netbios-type (in system view), and nbns-list.
Example
In the DHCP address pool of Ethernet1/0/0, set the NetBIOS node type of its clients
to p-node.
[3Com-Ethernet 1/0/0] dhcp server netbios-type p-node
dhcp server netbios-type Syntax

(in System View) dhcp server netbios-type { b-node | h-node | m-node | p-node } { interface
undo dhcp server netbios-type { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }
View
System view
Parameter
broadcast.
Description
Using the dhcp server netbios-type command in system view, you can configure a
NetBIOS node type for the DHCP clients of the interfaces in a specified range.
Using the undo dhcp server netbios-type command in system view, you can
Hostname-IP maps are required in the event that DHCP clients use the NetBIOS
protocol on a WAN.
the display current-configuration command. By calling dhcp server netbios-type
respectively on the specified interfaces, you can fulfill the batch configurations of
the command.
For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, netbios-type, dhcp server
netbios-type, and nbns-list.
Example
In the DHCP address pool of interfaces in the range of Ethernet2/0/0.1 to
Ethernet2/0/0.5, set the NetBIOS node type of clients to p-node.
[3Com] dhcp server netbios-type p-node interface ethernet 2/0/0.1 to
ethernet 2/0/0.5
dhcp server option (in Syntax

Interface View) dhcp server option code { ascii ascii-string | hex hex-string | ip-address ip-address }
undo dhcp server option code
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ code: Option value that needs to be assigned by the user.
■ ascii ascii-string: ASCII string.

■ hex hex-string: 2-digit or 4-digit hexadecimal string, such as hh or hhhh.
■ ip-address ip-address: IP address.
Description
Using the dhcp server option command in interface view, you can configure a
DHCP self-defined option for the DHCP address pool of the current interface.
Using the undo dhcp server option command in interface view, you can delete the
configuration.
For the related commands, see option and dhcp server option (in system view).
Example
Define the hexadecimal strings of the option code 100 to 0x11 and 0x22 for the
DHCP address pool of the interface Ethernet1/0/0.
[3Com-Ethernet 1/0/0] dhcp server option 100 hex 11 22
dhcp server option (in Syntax

System View) dhcp server option code { ascii ascii-string | hex hex-string | ip-address ip-address }
{ interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }
undo dhcp server option code { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }
View
System view
Parameter
Description
Using the dhcp server option command in system view, you can configure a DHCP
self-defined option for the interfaces in a specified range. Using the undo dhcp
server option command in system view, you can delete the configuration.
the display current-configuration command. By calling dhcp server option
respectively on the specified interfaces, you can fulfill the batch configurations of
the command.
For the related commands, see dhcp server option (in interface view) and option.
Example
Define the hexadecimal strings of the option code 100 to 0x11 and 0x22 for the
interface DHCP address pool of the interfaces in the range of Ethernet2/0/0.1 to
Ethernet2/0/0.5.
[3Com] dhcp server option 100 hex 11 22 interface ethernet 2/0/0.1 to
ethernet 2/0/0.5
dhcp server ping Syntax

dhcp server ping { packets number | timeout milliseconds }
undo dhcp server ping { packets | timeout }
View
System view
Parameter
■ packets number: The maximum number of ping packets allowed to be sent,
which is in the range of 0 to 10 and defaults to 2, with 0 indicating that no
ping operation will be performed.
■ timeout milliseconds: The longest time period that the DHCP server waits for
the response to each ping packet, which is in the range of 0 to 10000
milliseconds and defaults to 500 milliseconds.
Description
Using the dhcp server ping command, you can configure the maximum number of
ping packets that the DHCP server is allowed to send and the longest time period
that the DHCP server should wait for the response to each ping packet. Using the
undo dhcp server ping command, you can restore the default settings.
To prevent the address collision resulted from repeated IP address allocation, DHCP
server sends ping packets to detect that an address is available.
Example
Allow the DHCP server to send up to ten ping packets and wait 500 milliseconds
(the default setting) for the response to each packet.
[3Com] dhcp server ping packets 10
3.2.17 dhcp server static-bind
Syntax
dhcp server static-bind ip-address ip-address mac-address mac-address
undo dhcp server static-bind { ip-address ip-address | mac-address mac-address }
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ ip-address: Statically bound IP address. It must be a valid IP address selected
from the current interface address pool.
■ mac-address: Statically bound MAC address.
Description
Using the dhcp server static-bind command, you can configure a static address
binding in the DHCP address pool of the current interface. Using the undo dhcp
server static-bind command, you can delete the configuration.
By default, static address binding is not configured in any interface address pool.
In all the static address binding operations performed on an interface, the IP

addresses and the MAC addresses must be unique.
Example
Statically bind the MAC address 0000-e03f-0305 with the IP address 10.1.1.1.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] dhcp server static-bind 10.1.1.1 0000-e03f-0305
display dhcp server Syntax

conflict display dhcp server conflict [ ip ip-address | all ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ ip-address: A specified IP address.
■ all: All the IP addresses.
Description
Using the display dhcp server conflict command, you can view the DHCP address
conflict statistics, including the information in conflicted IP address, conflict
detection type, conflict time, etc.
If no optional parameter has been specified, the information displayed will depend
on the current view:
■ In Ethernet interface view, the information displayed is concerned with the
address pool of the current interface.
■ In any other views, the information displayed is concerned with all the address
pools.
For the related command, see reset dhcp server conflict.
Example
View the DHCP address conflict statistics.
<3Com> display dhcp server conflict
Address Discover Time
10.110.1.2 Jan 11 2003 11:57: 7 PM
Table 1 Description of the information displayed by executing display dhcp server conflict
Major item Description

Address The conflicted IP address
Discover Time Time when the conflict is discovered

expired display dhcp server expired [ ip ip-address | pool [ pool-name ] | interface [
interface-name ] all ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ pool-name: Name of a global address pool. All the global address pools will
apply if no address pool has been specified.
■ interface-name: Interface address pool. All the interface address pools will
apply if no interface has been specified.
■ all: All the IP addresses.
Description
Using the display dhcp server expired command, you can view the expired address
leases in a DHCP address pool. In certain conditions, the addresses of the expired
leases will be allocated to other DHCP clients.
Example
View the expired leases in DHCP address pools.
<3Com> display dhcp server expired all
Global pool:
IP address Hardware address Lease expiration Type
Interface pool:
Table 2 Description of the information displayed by executing display dhcp server expired

Global pool: Expired address leases in global address pools.
Interface pool: Expired address leases in interface address pools.
IP address The bound IP address
Hardware address The bound MAC address
Lease expiration The lease expiration time
Type Address binding type

free-ip display dhcp server free-ip
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display dhcp server free-ip command, you can view the ranges of
available addresses in DHCP address pools, i.e., information of the IP addresses
that have not been allocated yet.
Example
View the ranges of the available addresses in DHCP address pools.
<3Com> display dhcp server free-ip
IP Range from 1.0.0.0 to 2.2.2.1
IP Range from 2.2.2.3 to 2.255.255.255
IP Range from 4.0.0.0 to 4.255.255.255
IP Range from 5.5.5.0 to 5.5.5.0
IP Range from 5.5.5.2 to 5.5.5.255

ip-in-use display dhcp server ip-in-use [ ip ip-address | pool [ pool-name ] | interface [
interface-name ] ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ ip-address: Specifies an IP address. If no IP address has been specified,
information of all the bound addresses will be displayed.
■ pool-name: Specifies a global address pool. If no global address pool has been
specified, the bound addresses in all the global address pools will be displayed.
■ interface-name: Specifies an interface address pool. If no interface address pool
has been specified, the bound addresses in all the interface address pools will
be displayed.
Description
Using the display dhcp server ip-in-use command, you can view the address
binding information of DHCP clients, such as the information in hardware address,
IP address, and address lease expiration.
If no optional parameter has been specified, the information output by executing
the command will be:
■ In Ethernet interface view, the information in the address pool of the current
interface.
■ In any other views, the information in all the address pools.
For the related command, see reset dhcp server ip-in-use.
Example
View the DHCP address binding information.
<3Com> display dhcp server ip-in-use all
Global pool:
2.2.2.2 44444-4444-4444 NOT Used Manual
Interface pool:
5.5.5.1 0050-ba28-930a Jun 5 2003 10:56: 7 AM
Auto:COMMITED
Table 3 Description of the information output by executing display dhcp server ip-in-use

Global pool: Address binding information of global address
pools
Interface pool: Address binding information of interface address
pools
IP address The bound IP address
Hardware address The bound MAC address
Lease expiration The lease expiration time
Type Address binding type

statistics display dhcp server statistics
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display dhcp server statistics command, you can view the statistics on
the DHCP server, including such information as number of DHCP address pools,
automatically or manually bound address and expired addresses, number of
unknown packets, number of DHCP request packets, and number of response
packets.
For the related command, see reset dhcp server statistics.
Example
View the statistic information on the DHCP server.
<3Com> display dhcp server statistics
Global Pool:
Pool Number: 5
Binding
Auto: 0
Manual: 1
Expire: 0
Interface Pool:
Pool Number: 1
Binding
Auto: 1
Manual: 0
Expire: 0
Boot Request: 6
Dhcp Discover: 1
Dhcp Request: 4
Dhcp Decline: 0
Dhcp Release: 1
Dhcp Inform: 0
Boot Reply: 4
Dhcp Offer: 1
Dhcp Ack: 3
Dhcp Nak: 0
Bad Messages: 0
Table 4 Description of the information output by executing display dhcp server statistics

Global Pool: Statistics of global address pools
Interface Pool: Statistics of interface address pools
Pool Number Number of address pools
Auto Number of automatically bound IP addresses
Manual Number of manually bound IP addresses
Expire Number of IP addresses of expired leases
Boot Request Number of messages that DHCP clients sent to
the DHCP server
Dhcp Discover, Dhcp Request, Dhcp Decline, Statistics of the received DHCP packets
Dhcp Release, Dhcp Inform
Boot Reply Number of messages that the DHCP server sent
to DHCP clients
Dhcp Offer, Dhcp Ack, Dhcp Nak Statistics of the transmitted DHCP packets
Bad Messages Statistics of packets containing errors
display dhcp server tree Syntax

display dhcp server tree [ pool [ pool-name ] | interface [ interface-name ] | all ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ pool-name: Name of a global address pool. All the global address pools will
■ interface-name: Interface address pool. All the interface address pools will
apply if no interface has been specified.
■ all: All the DHCP address pools.
Description
Using the display dhcp server tree command, you can view the tree-structure
information of DHCP address pools, including the address pool at each node,
option, address lease period, and DNS server information.
If no optional parameter has been specified, the information output by executing
the command will be:
■ In Ethernet interface view, the information displayed is concerned with the
■ In any other views, the information in all the address pools.
Example
View the tree-structure information of DHCP address pools.
<3Com> display dhcp server tree all
Global pool:
Pool name: 5 network 10.10.1.0 255.255.255.0
Child node:6
Sibling node:7
option 1 ip-address 255.0.0.0
expired 1 0 0
option 58 hex 00 00 A8 C0
option 59 hex 00 00 00 3C
Pool name: 6 host 10.10.1.2 255.0.0.0

hardware-address 1111.2222.3333 ethernet
Parent node:5
expired 1 0 0

PrevSibling node:5
Sibling node:8

Child node:9
PrevSibling node:7
gateway-list 2.2.2.2
nbns-list 3.3.3.3
netbios-type m-node
expired 2 0 0
option 58 hex 00 01 51 80

Parent node:8
dns-list 1.1.1.1
domain-name 444444
nbns-list 3.3.3.3
netbios-type m-node
expired 2 0 0
option 58 hex 00 01 51 80
Interface pool:
Pool name: Ethernet11/2/0
network 5.5.5.0 mask 255.255.255.0
expired 1 0 0
Table 5 Description of the information output by executing display dhcp server tree

Global pool: Global address pool information
Interface pool: Interface address pool information
Pool Name: Address pool name
network Address ranges available for allocation
host 10.10.1.2
255.0.0.0
Statically bound IP address and MAC address
hardware-address
1111.2222.3333
ethernet
child node:6 The child node of the current node is address pool 6.
The node in this position can be:
Child node, which is the child node (subnet) address pool of the current address pool
Parent node, which is the father node (natural network segment) address pool of the current
node
Sibling node, which is the next sibling node (another subnet on the same natural network
segment) address pool. The order of sibling nodes depends on the order in which they are
configured.
PrevSibling node, which is the previous sibling node of the current node
option Self-definable DHCP option
expired The address lease period that is indicated by days, hours, and minutes
gateway-list The egress GW router allocated to DHCP clients
dns-list The DNS servers allocated to DHCP clients
domain-name Domain name specified for DHCP clients
nbns-list The NetBIOS server allocated to DHCP clients
netbios-type NetBIOS node type specified for DHCP clients
dns-list Syntax
dns-list ip-address [ ip-address ]
undo dns-list { ip-address | all }
View
DHCP address pool view
Parameter
ip-address: IP address of the DNS. You can configure up to eight IP addresses
Description
Using the dns-list command, you can configure DNS server IP addresses in a global
DHCP address pool. Using the undo dns-list command, you can delete the
configuration.
By default, no DNS server address is configured.
By far, only up to eight DNS server addresses can be set in each DHCP address
pool.
For the related commands, see dhcp server dns-list interface, dhcp server dns-list,
and dhcp server ip-pool.
Example
Specify 1.1.1.254 as a DNS server address for DHCP address pool 0.
[3Com-dhcp-0] dns-list 1.1.1.254
domain-name Syntax
domain-name domain-name
undo domain-name domain-name
View
Parameter
domain-name: Domain name that the DHCP server allocates to clients, which is a
string comprising at least three characters and at most 50 characters.
Description
Using the domain-name command, you can configure the domain name that a
global address pool of the DHCP server allocates to clients. Using the undo
domain-name command, you can delete the configured domain name.
By default, no domain name has been allocated to DHCP clients and domain name
is null.
For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server domain-name
interface, and dhcp server domain-name.
Example
Set the domain name of DHCP address pool 0 to mydomain.com.cn.
[3Com-dhcp-0] domain-name mydomain.com.cn
expired Syntax
expired { day day [ hour hour [ minute minute ] ] | unlimited }
undo expired
View
Parameter
Description
Using the expired command, you can configure a valid period allowed for leasing
IP addresses in a global DHCP address pool. Using the undo expired command,
For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server expired, and dhcp
server expired interface.
Example
Set the IP address lease period of global address pool 0 to three minutes, two
hours, and one day.
[3Com-dhcp-0] expired 1 2 3
gateway-list Syntax
gateway-list ip-address [ ip-address ]
undo gateway-list { ip-address | all }
View
Parameter
■ ip-address: IP address of egress GW router. You can configure up to eight IP
■ all: IP addresses of all the egress GW routers.
Description
Using the gateway-list command, you can configure IP addresses of the egress GW
routers used by DHCP clients. Using the undo gateway-list command, you can
delete the configuration.
By default, no egress GW router is configured.
For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool and network.
Example
Associate the egress GW router at 10.110.1.99 with DHCP address pool 0.
[3Com-dhcp-0] gateway-list 10.110.1.99
nbns-list Syntax
nbns-list ip-address [ ip-address ]
undo nbns-list { ip-address | all }
View
Parameter
■ all: All the NetBIOS server IP addresses.
Description
Using the nbns-list command, you can configure NetBIOS server addresses in a
global DHCP address pool for the clients. Using the undo nbns-list command, you
can remove the configured NetBIOS server addresses.
address pool.
For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server nbns-list, dhcp
server nbns-list interface, and netbios-type.
Example
In the DHCP address pool 0, allocate the NetBIOS server at 10.12.1.99 to the
clients.
[3Com-dhcp-0] nbns-list 10.12.1.99
netbios-type Syntax
netbios-type { b-node | h-node | m-node | p-node }
undo netbios-type
View
Parameter
broadcast.
Description
Using the netbios-type command, you can configure the NetBIOS node type of the
clients of a global DHCP address pool. Using the undo netbios-type command, you
For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server netbios-type (in
interface view), dhcp server netbios-type (in system view), and nbns-list.
Example
Specify b-node as the NetBIOS node type of clients of DHCP address pool 0.
[3Com-dhcp-0] netbios-type b-node
network Syntax
network ip-address [ mask netmask ]
undo network
View
Parameter
■ ip-address: The subnet address of an IP address pool used for dynamic
allocation.
■ mask netmask: Network mask of the IP address pool. Natural mask will be
adopted if the parameter is not specified.
Description
Using the network command, you can configure an IP address range used for
dynamic allocation. Using the undo network command, you can delete the
configuration.
By default, no IP address range has been configured for dynamic allocation.
Each DHCP address pool can be configured with a network segment and the new
configuration will replace the old one. If the system requires several such address
segments, you should configure them in multiple address pools.
For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool and dhcp server forbidden-ip.
Example
Use 192.168.8.0/24 as the address space for DHCP address pool 0.
[3Com-dhcp-0] network 192.168.8.0 mask 255.255.255.0
option Syntax
option code { ascii ascii-string | hex hex-string | ip-address ip-address }
undo option code
View
Parameter
Description
Using the option command, you can configure the self-defined options for a
DHCP global address pool. Using the undo option command, you can delete the
DHCP self-defined options.
New options are emerging along with the development of DHCP. In order to
accommodate these options, manual option addition is supported so that they can
be added into the attribute list maintained by the DHCP server.
For the related commands, see dhcp server option (in interface view) and dhcp
server option interface (in system view).
Example
Define the hexadecimal strings of the option code 100 to 0x11 and 0x22.
[3Com-dhcp-0] option 100 hex 11 22
reset dhcp server Syntax

conflict reset dhcp server conflict [ ip-address | all ]
View
User view
Parameter
■ all: All the address pools.
Description
Using the reset dhcp server conflict command, you can clear the statistics about
DHCP address collision.
In the case that no parameter has been specified when the command is
configured, the scope in which that the command takes effect will depend on the
view in which the command is executed.
■ If the command is executed in Ethernet interface view, it will take effect on the
■ If the command is executed in any other views, it will take effect on all the
address pools.
For the related command, see display dhcp server conflict.
Example
Clear all the address collision statistics.
<3Com> reset dhcp server conflict

ip-in-use reset dhcp server ip-in-use [ ip ip-address | pool [ pool-name ] | interface [
interface-name ] | all ]
View
User view
Parameter
■ ip-address: Binding information of a specified IP address.
■ pool-name: Specifies a global address pool. All the global address pools will
■ interface-name: Specifies an interface address pool. If no interface has been
specified, all the interface address pools will apply.
■ all: All the address pools.
Description
Using the reset dhcp server ip-in-use command, you can clear the DHCP dynamic
address binding information.
In the case that no parameter has been specified when the command is
configured, the scope in which that the command takes effect will depend on the
view in which the command is executed.
■ If the command is executed in Ethernet interface view, it will take effect on the
■ If the command is executed in any other views, it will take effect on all the
address pools.
For the related command, see display dhcp server ip-in-use.
Example
Clear the binding information of the address 10.110.1.1.
<3Com> reset dhcp server ip-in-use ip 10.110.1.1

statistics reset dhcp server statistics
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reset dhcp server statistics command, you can clear the statistics on the
DHCP server, including such information as number of DHCP address pools,
automatically and manually bound addresses and expired addresses, number of
unknown packets, number of DHCP request packets, and number of response
packets.
For the related command, see display dhcp server statistics.
Example
Clear statistic information of the DHCP server.
<3Com> reset dhcp server statistics
static-bind ip-address Syntax

static-bind ip-address ip-address [ mask netmask ]
undo static-bind ip-address
View
Parameter
■ ip-address: IP address to be bound.
■ netmask: Mask of the IP address to be bound. If it is not specified, the natural
mask will be adopted.
Description
Using the static-bind ip-address command, you can bind an IP address statically.
Using the undo static-bind ip-address command, you can delete the statically
bound IP address.
By default, no IP address is bound statically.
The commands static-bind ip-address and static-bind mac-address must be used in

pairs so that an IP address and a MAC address can be bound together.
For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, network, and static-bind
mac-address.
Example
Bind the PC at the MAC address 0000-e03f-0305 with the IP address 10.1.1.1
using the mask 255.255.255.0.
[3Com-dhcp-0] static-bind ip-address 10.1.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0
[3Com-dhcp-0] static-bind mac-address 0000-e03f-0305
static-bind mac-address Syntax

static-bind mac-address mac-address
undo static-bind mac-address
View
Parameter
mac-address: The host MAC address to be bound, which is in the format of
H-H-H.
Description
Using the static-bind mac-address command, you can bind a MAC address
statically. Using the undo static-bind mac-address command, you can delete the
statically bound MAC address.
By default, no MAC address is bound statically.
The commands static-bind mac-address and static-bind ip-address must be used in
pairs so that a MAC address and an IP address can be bound together.
For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, and static-bind ip-address.
Example
Bind the PC at the MAC address 0000-e03f-0305 with the IP address 10.1.1.1
using the mask 255.255.255.0.
[3Com-dhcp-0] static-bind ip-address 10.1.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0
[3Com-dhcp-0] static-bind mac-address 0000-e03f-0305
DHCP Client
Configuration
Commands
debugging dhcp client Syntax

debugging dhcp client { event | packet | error | all }
undo debugging dhcp client { event | packet | error | all }
View
User view
Parameter
■ event: Protocol events of the DHCP client, which include address allocation and
data updating.
■ packet: DHCP packets received and sent by the DHCP client.
■ error: Unknown packet information or error information.
■ all: Enables debugging of the DHCP client in all the information (event, packet,
and error).
Description
Using the debugging dhcp client command, you can enable debugging on the
DHCP client. Using the undo debugging dhcp client command, you can disable
debugging on the DHCP client. By default, DHCP client debugging is disabled.
Example
Enable event debugging on the DHCP client.
<3Com>debugging dhcp client event
display dhcp client Syntax

display dhcp client [ verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
verbose: Statistic details of the DHCP client.
Description
Using the display dhcp client command, you can display the statistic information
of the DHCP client. Executing the command attached without the keyword
parameter verbose will display only the brief address allocation information on the
DHCP client.
Example
Display the statistic details of the DHCP client.
[3Com] display dhcp client verbose
DHCP client statistic infomation:
Ethernet0/0:
Current machine state: BOUND
Alloced IP: 169.254.0.2 255.255.0.0
Alloced lease: 86400 seconds, T1: 43200 seconds, T2: 75600 seconds
Lease from 2002.09.20 01:05:03 to 2002.09.21 01:05:03
Server IP: 169.254.0.1
Transaction ID = 0x3d8a7431
Default router: 2.2.2.2
DNS server: 1.1.1.1
Domain name: 3Com.com
Client ID: 3Com-00e0.fc0a.c3ef-Ethernet0/0
Next timeout will happen after 0 days 11 hours 56 minutes 1 seconds.
Ethernet2/0:
Current machine state: HALT

The statistic information shows that two interfaces, i.e., Ethernet0/0 and
Ethernet2/0, have been configured to be DHCP clients.
Ethernet0/0 has been assigned with the address 169.254.0.2/16 subject to the
lease expiration of 86400 seconds and the current machine state is BOUND. The
renewal timer is set to 43200 seconds, the rebinding timer to 75600 seconds, and
the lease expiration to the period since 2002.09.20 01:05:03 to 2002.09.21
01:05:03. The selected DHCP server is at 169.254.0.1, the GW at 2.2.2.2, and the
DNS server at 1.1.1.1, given the domain name is 3Com.com. In addition, the next
timeout will happen 1 second, 56 minutes, and 11 hours later.
The allocation process has not been started at Ethernet2/0 yet. The current
machine state is HALT, which is normally as a result of the DOWN state of the
interface.
Display more details of the DHCP client.
[3Com]display dhcp client verbose
DHCP client statistic infomation:
Ethernet0/0:
Current machine state: BOUND
Alloced IP: 169.254.0.2 255.255.0.0
Alloced lease: 300 seconds, T1: 150 seconds, T2: 262 seconds
Lease from 2002.09.15 07:11:55 to 2002.09.15 07:16:55
Server IP: 169.254.0.1
Transaction ID = 0x3d8432b1
Client ID: 3Com-00e0.fc0a.c3ef-Ethernet0/0
Next timeout will happen after 0 days 0 hours 1 minutes 36 seconds.
Table 6 Statistic information field description of DHCP client
Item Description
Ethernet0/0 Interface where the client is allowed to dynamically obtain an IP address
Current machine state State of the client state machine
Alloced IP IP address allocated to the client
lease Lease period
T1 Duration of the renewal timer
T2 Duration of the rebinding timer
Lease from….to…. The starting time and the end time of the lease
Server IP The selected DHCP server address
Transaction ID Transaction ID
Client ID User ID
Default router GW address
DNS server DNS server address
Domain name Domain name
Requested IP The requested IP address
Offered IP The provided IP address
ip address dhcp-alloc Syntax

ip address dhcp-alloc
undo ip address dhcp-alloc
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ip address dhcp-alloc command, you can allocate local IP addresses by
making use of DHCP. Using the undo ip address dhcp-alloc command, you can
disable the allocation of local IP addresses via DHCP negotiation. This command
must be configured and executed in Ethernet interface (including subinterface)
view.
By default, DHCP negotiation is not used for the allocation of local IP addresses.
Example
Adopt DHCP negotiation for the allocation of local IP addresses on Ethernet0/0/0.
[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] ip address dhcp-alloc
DHCP Relay
Configuration
Commands
debugging dhcp relay Syntax

debugging dhcp relay
undo debugging dhcp relay
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the debugging dhcp relay command, you can enable debugging on the
DHCP-relay module. Using the undo debugging dhcp relay command, you can
disable DHCP-relay module debugging.
Example
Enable DHCP-relay module debugging.
<3Com>debugging dhcp relay
dhcp relay release Syntax

dhcp relay release { client-ip mac-address } [ server-ip ]
View
Interface view
System view
Parameter
■ client-ip: IP address of the DHCP client.
■ mac-address: MAC address of the DHCP client, which is in the format of
H-H-H.
■ server-ip: IP address of the DHCP server.
Description
Using the dhcp relay release command, you can send an IP address releasing
request to a DHCP server via the DHCP relay.
Given no IP address of DHCP server has been specified, release packets will be sent
either to all the DHCP servers if this command is configured in system view or to all
the relay addresses configured on an interface if this command is configured in the
interface view.
Example
Send a release packet to the DHCP server at 10.110.91.174, requesting to release
the IP address 192.2.2.25, which was offered to the client whose MAC address is
0050-ba34-2000.
[3Com] dhcp relay release 192.2.2.25 0050-ba34-2000 10.110.91.174
display dhcp relay Syntax

address display dhcp relay address [ interface interface-name | all ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ interface-name: Specifies an interface name, which is represented by interface
type plus interface number.
Description
Using the display dhcp relay address command, you can view the DHCP relay
address configuration of an interface.
For the related commands, see ip relay address and ip relay address interface.
Example
View the DHCP relay address configurations of all the interfaces.
<3Com> display dhcp relay address all
** Ethernet11/2/0 DHCP Relay Address **
Relay Address [0] : 3.3.3.3
display dhcp relay Syntax

statistics
display dhcp relay statistics
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display dhcp relay statistics command, you can view the statistics of
DHCP relay in packet errors, DHCP packets received from clients, DHCP packets
received from and sent to servers, and DHCP packets sent to clients (including
unicast and broadcast packets).
Example
View DHCP relay statistics.
<3Com> display dhcp relay statistics
Bad Packets recieved: 0
DHCP packets received from clients: 0
DHCP DISCOVER packets received: 0
DHCP REQUEST packets received: 0
DHCP INFORM packets received: 0
DHCP DECLINE packets received: 0
DHCP packets received from servers: 0
DHCP OFFER packets received: 0
DHCP ACK packets received: 0
DHCP NAK packets received: 0
DHCP packets sent to servers: 0
DHCP packets sent to clients: 0
Unicast packets sent to clients: 0
ip relay address Syntax

ip relay address ip-address
undo ip relay address [ ip-address ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
ip-address: IP relay address in dot-deliminated decimal format.
Description
Using the ip relay address command, you can specify the exact location of a DHCP
server by configuring an IP relay address for it. Using the undo ip relay address
command, you can delete one or all relay IP addresses used by an interface.
By default, no relay IP address has been configured.
Executing undo ip relay address without ip-address will delete all the relay IP
addresses configured on the current interface.
As the packets sent by DHCP client machines in some phases of DHCP are broadcast packets,
the interfaces configured with relay IP addresses must support broadcast. In other words, this
command can be used on the broadcast-supported network interfaces, Ethernet interfaces for
example.
For the related command, see dhcp select interface.
Example
Add two relay IP addresses on Ethernet 0/0/0.
[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] ip relay address 202.38.1.2

[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] ip relay address 202.38.1.3
ip relay address cycle Syntax

ip relay address cycle
undo ip relay address cycle
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ip relay address cycle command, you can adopt the polling approach to
relay packets, ensuring that different clients use different DHCP servers and the
same clients use the same DHCP server so long as it is possible. Using the undo ip
relay address cycle command, you can adopt the broadcast approach to relay
packets so as to broadcast client requests to all the DHCP servers.
By default, the broadcast approach is adopted.
Suppose that there are three clients, i.e., A, B, and C, and the DHCP server has
been configured with three relay addresses, i.e., S1, S2, and S3. If the polling
approach is adopted to relay packets, A, B, and C will respectively use the relay
addresses S1, S2, and S3. If A is shut down and restarted again, it will continue to
use S1. But if a client other than these three clients started, it will use S1. Thus, the
relay addresses will be used cyclically.
For the related command, see ip relay address.
Example
Adopt the polling approach to relay.
[3Com] ip relay address cycle
ip relay address Syntax

interface ip relay address ip-address [ interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all ]
undo ip relay address { ip-address | all } { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all
}
View
System view
Parameter
■ ip-address: IP address of the DHCP server.
■ ethernet-subinterface-range: Includes all the subinterfaces whose interface
numbers.
■ all: In the undo form of the command, the first “all” refers to all the relay
addresses and the second all, the interfaces.
Description
Using the ip relay address interface command, you can configure a relay address
for the Ethernet interfaces in a specified range for the purpose of transparent
forwarding. Using the undo ip relay address interface command, you can delete
the configured relay address.
By default, no relay IP address has been configured on any Ethernet interface.
For the related command, see ip relay address.
Example
Add a relay IP address for the interfaces in the range of Ethernet2/0/0.1 to
Ethernet2/0/0.5.
[3Com] ip relay address 202.38.1.2 interface ethernet 2/0/0.1 to
ethernet 2/0/0.5
reset dhcp relay Syntax

statistics reset dhcp relay statistics
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reset dhcp relay statistics command, you can clear the DHCP relay
statistics.
For the related command, see display dhcp relay statistics.
Example
Clear the DHCP relay statistics.
<3Com> reset dhcp relay statistics
IP Performance
Configuration
Commands
debugging ip Syntax
debugging ip { icmp | packet [ acl { acl-number1 | acl-number2 } ] }
undo debugging ip { icmp | packet }
View
User view
Parameter
■ acl-number1: ACL based on the interface, in the range of 1000 to 1999.
■ acl-number2: ACL in the range of 1 to 199. The ACL in the range of 1 to 99 is
the basic ACL and that in the range of 100 to 199 is the advanced ACL.
Description
Using debugging ip icmp command, you can enable the ICMP debugging. Using
the undo debugging ip icmp command, you can disable the ICMP debugging.
The debugging ip packet command is used to enable the IP packet debugging.
The filtration to the debugging information can be accomplished by filtering the IP
packets via acl. Using the undo debugging ip packet command, you can disable
the IP packet debugging.
Example
Enable the IP debugging.
<3Com> debugging ip packet
*0.129680-IP-8-debug_case:
Delivering, interface = Serial0/0/0, version = 4, headlen = 20, tos =
6,pktlen = 70, pktid = 49, offset = 0, ttl = 1, protocol =
17,checksum = 50, s = 1.1.1.2, d = 224.0.0.2
prompt: IP packet is delivering up!
*0.129680-IP-8-debug_case:
Sending, interface = Serial0/0/0, version = 4, headlen = 20, tos =
6,pktlen = 70, pktid = 49, offset = 0, ttl = 1, protocol =
17,checksum = 55147, s = 1.1.1.2, d = 224.0.0.2
prompt: Sending the packet from local at Serial0/0/0
<3Com> debugging ip icmp
*0.157090-IP-8-debug_icmp:
ICMP Receive: echo(Type=8, Code=0), Src = 127.0.0.1, Dst = 1.1.1.2
ICMP Send: echo-reply(Type=0, Code=0), Src = 1.1.1.2, Dst =
127.0.0.1
ICMP Receive: echo-reply(Type=0, Code=0), Src = 1.1.1.2, Dst =
127.0.0.1
debugging tcp event Syntax

debugging tcp event [ task_id socket_id ]
undo debugging tcp event [ task_id socket_id ]
View
User view
Parameter
■ task_id: The ID of a task.
■ socket_id: The ID of a socket.
Description
Using the debugging tcp event command, you can enable TCP events debugging.
And using the undo debugging tcp event command, you can disable TCP events
debugging.
There is limitation for the number of debugging switches enabled, that is, only a
fixed number of debugging switches can be enabled at one time (combination of
task ID and socket ID). In addition, when TCP is enabled to receive connection
request reactively, a new socket will be created to establish that connection, and
some programs will create a new task to process the connection, like Telnet server.
So to view information about connection, such parameters as task_id and
socket_id cannot be used for filtering.
Example
Enable debugging of TCP events.
<3Com> debugging tcp event
*0.630270-SOCKET-8-TCP EVENT:
1043494683: task = Co0(2), socketid = 0,
TCPCB 0x02c6fd74 created
1043494683: task = Co0(2), socketid = 1,
state CLOSED changed to SYN_SENT
1043494683: task = Co0(2), socketid = 1,
sending SYN, seq = 74249530,
LA = 127.0.0.1:1025, FA = 1.1.1.1:23
1043494683: task = Co0(2), socketid = 1,
advertising MSS = 512,
LA = 127.0.0.1:1025, FA = 1.1.1.1:23
1043494683: task = VTYD(9), socketid = 0,
received MSS = 512,
LA = 1.1.1.1:23, FA = 127.0.0.1:1025
733759463: sending RST to 2.2.2.1:11022
1043495346: task = Co0(2), socketid = 1,
connection refused because remote sent RST!
LA = 1.1.1.1:1026, FA = 1.1.1.2:21
TCP:
TCP event debugging is on for task any socket any
debugging tcp md5 Syntax

debugging tcp md5
undo debugging tcp md5
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the debugging tcp md5 command, you can enable the MD5 authentication
debugging of the TCP connection. Using the undo debugging tcp md5 command,
you can disable the MD5 authentication debugging of the TCP connection.
Example
Enable the MD5 authentication debugging of the TCP connection.
<3Com> debugging tcp md5
debugging tcp packet Syntax

■ debugging tcp packet [ task_id socket_id ]
■ undo debugging tcp packet [ task_id socket_id ]
View
User view
Parameter
Description
Using the debugging tcp packet command, you can enable the debugging of TCP
connection. The number of debugging switches users can enable is limited, that is,
at the same time only a fixed number of debugging switches can be enabled
(combination of task ID and socket ID). Using the undo debugging tcp packet
command, you can disable the debugging of TCP connection.
Example
Enable the debugging of TCP connection.
<3Com> debugging tcp packet
*0.100070-SOCKET-8-TCP PACKET:
1043204051: Input: Co0(5) socketId = 2, state = SYN_SENT,
src = 127.0.0.1:1025, dst = 2.2.2.2:23,
seq = 11084380, ack = 0, optlen = 4, flag = SYN ,
window = 8192
1043204051: Output: Co0(5) SocketId = 2, State = SYN_SENT,
src = 127.0.0.1:1025, Dst = 2.2.2.2:23,
Seq = 11084380, Ack = 0, Datalen = 4, Flag = ACK PSH ,
Window = 8192
1043204051: Retrans: Co0(5) SocketId = 2, State = SYN_SENT,
Src = 127.0.0.1:1025, Dst = 2.2.2.2:23,
Seq = 11084380, Ack = 0, Optlen = 4, Flag = SYN ,
Window = 8192
4.1.5 debugging udp packet
Syntax
debugging udp packet [ task_id socket_id ]

undo debugging udp packet [ task_id socket_id ]
View
User view
Parameter
Description
Using the debugging udp packet command, you can enable the debugging of
UDP connection. The number of debugging switches users can enable is limited,
that is, at the same time only a fixed number of debugging switches can be
enabled (combination of task ID and socket ID). Using the undo debugging udp
packet command, you can disable the debugging of UDP connection.
Example
Enable the debugging of UDP connection.
<3Com> debugging udp packet
*0.377770-SOCKET-8-UDP:
1043494431: Output: task = ROUT(6), socketid = 3,
src = 1.1.1.1:520, dst = 255.255.255.255:520, datalen = 24,
display fib Syntax

display fib
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display fib command, you can view the summary of the Forwarding
Information Base.
This command outputs the Forwarding Information Base in a list, in which each
line represents one route. The following points are included:
■ Destination address/mask length
■ Next hop
■ The current flag, which is expressed in the combination of G, H and U. G
represents Gateway, H is Host (host route), and U is UP (available).
■ Time stamp
■ Outbound interface
Example
Display the summary of the forwarding information base.
<3Com> display fib
Destination/MaskNexthopFlagTimeStampIInterface
80.10.0.2/3280.10.0.2GHUt[0]Serial2/0/0
80.10.255.255/32127.0.0.1HUt[0]InLoopBack0
80.10.0.0/1680.10.0.1Ut[0]Serial2/0/0
80.50.0.2/3280.50.0.2GHUt[0]Serial2/0/0
80.50.255.255/32127.0.0.1HUt[0]InLoopBack0
4.1.7 display fib acl
Syntax
display fib acl { listnumber | listname }
View
Any view
Parameter
■ listnumber: The ACL rules expressed in number, ranging from 1 to 99.
■ listname: The ACL rules expressed in name.
Description
Using the display fib acl command, you can filter and display FIB information.
According to ACL number or name entered, you can display the FIB table entries
matching the filtering rules in a format.
A standard ACL name must be input if the ACL is expressed in name; otherwise,
the system will prompt an abnormal entering. When the ACL name or number
ranging from 1 to 99 is entered, the corresponding ACL will be searched. If no
ACL is found, all FIB table entries information will be displayed; and if such an ACL
is found, the FIB table entries information will be output in a format.
If the number of FIB table entries matching the filtering rules is 0, the following
information will be output:
Route entry matched by access-list 2:
Summary count: 0
If the number of FIB table entries matching the filtering rules is not 0, the FIB table
entry information will be output in the following format:

Summary count: 1
Destination/MaskNexthopFlagTimeStampInterface
127.0.0.0/8127.0.0.1Ut[0]InLoopBack0
Example
Display the FIB table entries matched by the ACL.
<3Com> display fib acl 10
Summary counts: 1
127.0.0.0/8127.0.0.1Ut[0]InLoopBack0
display fib begin Syntax

display fib | [ { begin | include | exclude } text ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ text: Character.
Description
■ Using the display fib command, you can output the lines related to the line
containing the character string text in the buffer according to the regular
expression.
■ Using the display fib | begin text command, you can view the lines beginning
from the line containing the character string text to the end line of the buffer.
■ Using the display fib | include text command, you can just view the lines
containing the character string text.
■ Using the display fib | exclude text command, you can view the lines not
containing the character string text.
Example
Display the lines beginning from the line containing the character string
“169.254.0.0” to the end line of the buffer:
<3Com> display fib | begin 169.254.0.0
169.254.0.0/162.1.1.1Ut[0]Ethernet0/0/0
2.0.0.0/162.1.1.1Ut[0]Ethernet0/0/0
127.0.0.0/8127.0.0.1Ut[0]InLoopBack0
Display all the lines containing the character string “Ethernet0”:
<3Com> display fib | include ethernet0/0/0

169.254.0.0/162.1.1.1Ut[0]Ethernet0/0/0
2.0.0.0/162.1.1.1Ut[0]Ethernet0/0/0
Display all the lines not containing the character string ”169.254.0.0”:
<3Com> display fib | exclude 169.254.0.0

2.0.0.0/162.1.1.1Ut[0]Ethernet0/0/0
127.0.0.0/8127.0.0.1Ut[0]InLoopBack0
display fib ip-prefix Syntax

display fib ip-prefix listname
View
Any view
Parameter
■ listname: The name of the prefix list.
Description
Using the display fib ip-prefix command, you can filter and display FIB information.
According to the name of prefix-list entered, you can display the FIB entries
matching the filtering rules in the prefix list in a format.
If no FIB table entry matching the prefix list, the prompt information will be
displayed that the number of FIB entry matched by the prefix list is 0; if the name
of ip-prefix cannot be found, all FIB table entries will be displayed; if the FIB table
entries after filtering is not 0, they will be output in a format.
If no FIB table entry matching the prefix list, the following information will be
output:
Route entry matched by prefix-list abc1:
Summary count: 0
If the number of FIB table entries after filtering is not 0, FIB table entry information
will be output in the following format:
Route entry matched by prefix-list abc2:

Summary count: 1
Destination/Mask Nexthop Flag TimeStamp Interface
127.0.0.0/8 127.0.0.1 U t[0] InLoopBack0
Example
Display the FIB table entries matched by the prefix list abc0.
<3Com> display fib ip-prefix abc0
Route Entry matched by prefix-list abc0:
Summary count: 4
127.0.0.0/8127.0.0.1Ut[0]InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32127.0.0.1Ut[0]InLoopBack0
169.0.0.0/82.1.1.1SUt[0]Ethernet 0/0/0
169.0.0.0/152.1.1.1SUt[0]Ethernet 0/0/0
display fib longer Syntax

display fib dest-addr1 [ dest-mask2 ] [ longer ]
1. Using the above command, you can display the FIB table entries matching the
destination address. Different parameters selected leads to different matching
methods.
display fibdest-addr1 dest-mask1 dest-addr2 dest-mask2
2. Using the above command, you can display the FIB table entries whose
destination address ranges from dest-addr1 dest-mask1 to dest-addr2
dest-mask2, including the FIB entries exactly matching dest-addr1 dest-mask1 and
dest-addr2 dest-mask2.
View
Any view
Parameter
■ dest-addr1: The destination IP address 1, which is expressed in dot-deliminated
decimal format.
■ dest-mask1: The subnet mask 1 corresponding to the destination IP address 1,
which is the mask in dot-deliminated decimal format or the mask length in
integer format.
■ dest-addr2: The destination IP address 2, which is expressed in dot-deliminated
decimal format.
■ dest-mask2: The subnet mask 2 corresponding to the destination IP address 2,
which is the mask in dot-deliminated decimal format or the mask length in
integer format.
Description
Different parameters selected leads to different matching methods.
■ display fib dest-addr: According to the destination address, if FIB table entries
can be found within the range of natural mask, all the subnets will be
displayed. Otherwise, only the FIB table entries found by operating the longest
match will be displayed.
■ display fib dest-addr dest-mask: The FIB table entries exactly matching the
destination address and mask are displayed.
■ display fib dest-addr longer: The FIB table entries matching the destination
addresses within the range of natural mask.
■ display fib dest-addr dest-mask longer: The FIB table entries matching the
destination IP addresses within the entered mask range.
■ The display fib dest-addr1 dest-mask1 dest-addr2 dest-mask2 command is
used to display FIB table entries whose destination address is within the range
from dest-addr1 dest-mask1 to dest-addr2 dest-mask2.
Example
Display the FIB table entries whose destination address matches169.253.0.0
longest with the natural mask range.
<3Com> display fib 169.253.0.0
169.0.0.0/162.1.1.1 Ut[0]Ethernet0/0/0
Display the FIB entries whose destination address is within the range from
69.254.0.0/16 to 169.254.0.6/16.
<3Com> display fib 169.254.0.0 255.255.0.0 169.254.0.6 255.255.0.0

169.254.0.1/162.1.1.1Ut[0]Ethernet0/0/0
display fib statistics Syntax

display fib statistics
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display fib statistics command, you can display the total numbers of FIB
table entries.
Example
Display the total numbers of FIB table entries.
<3Com> display fib statistics
Route Entry Count : 30
display ip Syntax
fast-forwarding cache display ip fast-forwarding cache
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ip fast-forwarding cache command, you can view the
information on the fast-forwarding table.
Example
Display the information of the fast-forwarding table.
[Router] display ip fast-forwarding cache
Fast-Forwarding cache:
Index SrIP SrPort DsIP DsPort Pro Input_If Output_If
FLAG
600:0 1.1.3.149 1463 10.10.26.30 23 6 Ethernet0/0/0
Ethernet1/0/0 81
The above information indicates that the latest cache contains the data flow from
port 1463 at 1.1.3.149 to port 23 at 10.10.26.30, with a protocol number 6, i.e.
the TCP data, ingress is Ethernet0/0/0 and the egress is Ethernet1/0/0.
display ip interface Syntax

display ip interface [ interface-type interface-number | interface-name ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ interface-number: Interface number.

Description
Using the display ip interface command, you can view the information of IP
interfaces.
By default, if no interface is specified, the information about all IP interfaces will
be displayed.
This command is used to display all the information related to IP on the interface.
The information is helpful for fault diagnosis. For the related command, see
display interface.
Example
Display IP-related information at the interface Serial 0/0/0.
<3Com> display ip interface Serial 0/0/0
Serial 0/0/0 current state : UP
Internet Address : 10.10.10.10/16
Broadcast address : 10.10.255.255
The Maximum Transmit Unit : 1500 bytes
input packets : 1231, bytes : 57557, multicasts : 1177
output packets : 0, bytes : 0, multicasts : 0
The above information shows that the physical link state of the interface serial
0/0/0 is UP, link-layer protocol state is UP, the maximum transmit unit is 1500
bytes, the IP address is 10.10.10.10, the broadcast subnet is 10.10.255.255 and
the packet receiving/sending conditions at this interface.
display ip socket Syntax

display ip socket [ socktype sock_type ] [ task_id socket_id ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ sock_type: The type of a socket: (tcp:1, udp 2, raw ip 3)
Description
Using the display ip socket command, you can display the information about all
sockets in the current system.
Example
Display the information about the socket of TCP type.
<3Com> display ip socket socktype 1
SOCK_STREAM:
Task = VTYD(9), socketid = 1, Proto = 6,
LA = 0.0.0.0:23, FA = 0.0.0.0:0,
sndbuf = 4096, rcvbuf = 4096, sb_cc = 0, rb_cc = 0,

socket option = SO_ACCEPTCONN
socket state = SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC
SOCK_DGRAM:
Task = ROUT(6), socketid = 1, Proto = 17,
LA = 0.0.0.0:0, FA = 0.0.0.0:0,
socket option = SO_UDPCHECKSUM
SOCK_RAW:
Task = ROUT(6), socketid = 2, Proto = 2,
LA = 0.0.0.0, FA = 0.0.0.0,
socket option = 0,
socket state = SS_PRIV SS_NBIO SS_ASYNC
Explanations of the display information:
■ SOCK_STREAM: the socket type.

■ Proto: the protocol number used by the socket.
■ sndbuf: the sending buffer size of the socket.
■ rcvbuf: the receiving buffer size of the socket.
■ sb_cc: the current data size in the sending buffer. The value makes sense only
for the socket of TCP type, because only TCP is able to cache data.
■ rb_cc: the current data size in the receiving buffer.
■ socket option: the option of the socket.
■ socket state: the state of the socket.
Display the information about the socket with socket ID as 4 and task ID as 8.
<3Com> display ip socket 8 4

Task = VTYD(8), socketid = 4, Proto = 6,
LA = 0.0.0.0:23, FA = 0.0.0.0:0,
socket option = SO_ACCEPTCONN
display ip statistics Syntax

display ip statistics
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ip statistics command, you can view IP traffic statistics
information. This command is used to display such statistics information as IP
packet transmit/receive, packet assembly/disassembly, which is helpful to fault
diagnosis.
For the related commands, see display interface, display ip interface, and reset ip
statistics.
Example
Display the IP traffic statistic information.
<3Com> display ip statistics
IP Protocol:
Sent packets:
sent out: 67, forwarded: 0, raw packets: 0
discarded: 0, routing failed: 98
Received packets:
total:782477, local host: 6500, format error: 0
checksum error: 0, option error: 0, protocol error: 18
Fragmented packets:total: 0, fragmented: 0, reassembled: 0
timeout: 0, error: 0, failed: 0 sent: 0
ICMP protocol:
Sent packets:
redirected: 0, unreached: 67, echoed: 0 echo replied: 0, mask
requested: 0, mask replied: 0 src quenched: 0, parameter req: 0,
timestamp req: 0
Received packets:
format error: 0, checksum error: 0, redirected: 0 unreached: 0,
echoed: 0, echo replied: 0 mask req: 0, mask replied: 0, src
quenched: 0 parameter req: 0, timestamp req: 0
display tcp statistics Syntax

display tcp statistics
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display tcp statistics command, you can view TCP traffic statistic
information.
The command is used to display the traffic statistic information of all the active
TCP connections. Statistics information is classified into two parts: receiving and
sending, and each part is further classified according to different types of packets.
For example, for receiving packets, there are retransmission packets number,
keep-alive detection packets number, etc. Also the statistics closely related to
connection are displayed, such as connection number received, retransmission
packets number and keep-alive detection packets number. The unit of statistics
results is packet, and sometimes is byte.
For the related command, see display tcp status.
Example
Display the TCP traffic statistic information.
<3Com> display tcp statistics
Received packets:
Total: 0
packets in sequence: 0 (0 bytes)
window probe packets: 0, window update packets: 0
checksum error: 0, bad offset : 0, too short : 0
duplicate packets : 0 (0 bytes), partially duplicate packets : 0(0
bytes)
out-of-order packets : 0 (0 bytes)
packets with data after window : 0 (0 bytes)
packets after close : 0
ack packets:0 (0 bytes), duplicate ack packets:0, ack packets with
unsend data:0
Sent packets:
Total: 0
urgent packets: 0
control packets: 0 ( 0 RST)
window probe packets: 0, window update packets: 0
data packets : 0 (0 bytes), data packets retransmitted: 0 (0 bytes)
ack only packets : 0(0 delayed)
Total retransmit timeout: 0, connections dropped in retransmit
timeout: 0
Keepalive timeout: 0, keepalive probe: 0, dropped connections in
keepalive: 0
Initiated connections: 0, accepted connections: 0,established
connections: 0
Closed connections: 0,( dropped: 0, embryonic dropped: 0)
Dropped packets with MD5 authentication : 0
Permitted packets with MD5 authentication : 0
The above information means:
■ Receiving statistics:
■ Total number of packets received: 0
■ The number of packets reaching as the order (total bytes: 0): 0
■ Window detection packets number: 0, window upgrading packets number: 0.
■ The number of packet verification errors: 0, the number of packet length
errors: 0.
■ The number of totally repeated packets: 0 (the total bytes: 0), the number of
partial repeated packets: 0 (the total bytes: 0).
■ The number of packets with confusing order: 0 (the total bytes: 0).
■ The number of packets reaching outside of the receiving window: 0 (the total
bytes: 0).
■ The number of packets reaching after connection being closed: 0.
■ The confirmed packets number: 0 (the bytes of the confirmed data: 0), the
repeated confirmed packets number: 0, ACK packets number already being
confirmed but not being sent yet: 0.
■ Sending statistics:
■ Total number of packets sent: 0.
■ The urgent packets number: 0.
■ The control packets number: 0. (RST packets number: 0).
■ The window detection packets number: 0, the window upgrading packets

number: 0.
■ The data packets number: 0 (the total bytes: 0) he retransmission packets
number: 0 (the total bytes: 0).
■ ACK packets number: 0 (delay ACK packets number: 0)
■ The time-out times of retransmission timer: 0, the connection number
discarded due to retransmission times beyond limitation: 0.
■ The time-out times of keep-alive timer: 0, the times of sending keep-alive
detection packets: 0.
■ The number of connections initiated: 0, the number of connections received: 0,
the number of connections established: 0.
■ The number of connections closed already: 0, the number of connections
discarded accidentally (after SYN is received):0, the times of connections
actively failed to establish (before SYN is received): 0.
■ The packets number discarded after MD5 verification: 0.
■ The packets number passing MD5 verification: 0.
display tcp status Syntax

display tcp status
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display tcp status command, you can monitor TCP connection any time.
For the related command, see display local-user.
Example
Display the TCP connection status.
<3Com> display tcp status
TCPCB Local AddressForeign AddressState
0442c394 10.110.93.146.2310.110.93.175.1538ESTAB
045d8074 0.0.0.0.210.0.0.0.0 LISTEN
display udp statistics Syntax

display udp statistics
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display udp statistics command, you can view TCP traffic statistic
information.
The command is used to display the traffic statistic information of all the active
TCP connections. Statistics information is classified into two parts: receiving and
sending, and each part can be further classified according to different types of
packets, as checksum packets and error packets, for example. Moreover there are
statistics closely related to connection, such as the number of broadcast packets.
The statistics information is organized in terms of packet.
For relate configuration, please refer to the reset udp statistics command.
Example
Display the UDP traffic statistic information.
<3Com> display udp statistics
Received packet:
Total:0
checksum error:0
shorter than header:0, data length larger than packet:0
no socket on port:0
broadcast:0
not delivered, input socket full:0
input packets missing pcb cache:0
Sent packet:
Total:0
The displayed information is explained as below:
UDP packet is received, 0 packet has checksum error. And there is 0 packet whose
packet length is shorter than the packet header, 0 packet whose data length is
bigger than the packet length, 0 packet whose socket uses this port No. 0 packet
being broadcast packet, 0 packet not being delivered due to full socket buffer, 0
packet not finding pcb and 0 UDP packet being sent.
ip fast-forwarding Syntax
ip fast-forwarding [ inbound | outbound ]
undo ip fast-forwarding
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ inbound: Allows fast-forwarding only on the inbound interface.
■ outbound: Allows fast-forwarding only on the outbound interface.
Description
Using the ip fast-forwarding command, you can enable fast packet forwarding on
the outbound interface. Using the undo ip fast-forwarding command, you can
disable fast-forwarding on the outbound interface.
By default, fast-forwarding is allowed on both inbound and outbound interfaces.
Fast-forwarding is well-suited to high-speed links (such as Ethernet and FR). Its

function will be render useless, however, on a low-speed link, due to the low
transmission rate such a link can provide.
3Com Series Routers support fast-forwarding on the links of various high-speed
interfaces such as Ethernet, synchronous PPP, FR, and HDLC, on the interfaces
configured with firewall and NAT features, and on the virtual tunnel interface of
GRE as well. However, it should be noted that the interface configured with the
function of fast-forwarding will be unable to send ICMP redirection packets.
Example
Disable the interface to fast forward packets.
[3Com-Ethernet/0/0] undo ip fast-forwarding
Enable the interface to fast forward packets on ingress.
[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] ip fast-forwarding inbound
reset ip fast-forwarding Syntax

cache reset ip fast-forwarding cache
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reset ip fast-forwarding cache command, you can reset the
fast-forwarding cache.
This command is used to clear the fast-forwarding cache. The fast-forwarding
table will not contain any fast-forwarding entry after having been cleared.
Example
Clear the fast-forwarding cache.
<3Com> reset ip fast-forwarding cache
reset ip statistics Syntax

reset ip statistics
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reset ip statistics command, you can clear the IP statistics information. In
some special cases, it is necessary to clear the IP statistics information and perform
new statistics.
For the related commands, see display ip interface and display ip statistics.
Example
Clear IP statistics information.
<3Com> reset ip statistics
reset tcp statistics Syntax

reset tcp statistics
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reset tcp statistics command, you can clear TCP traffic statistic
information. After the execution of this command, there’s no prompt information
on the screen, and the existing statistics are cleared.
For the related command, see display tcp statistics.
Example
Display the TCP traffic statistic information.
<3Com> reset tcp statistics
reset udp statistics Syntax

reset udp statistics
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reset udp statistics command, you can clear the UDP statistics
information. After the execution of this command, there’s no prompt information
on the screen, and the existing statistics are cleared.
Example
Clear UDP traffic statistics information.
<3Com> reset udp statistics
tcp mss Syntax

tcp mss value
undo tcp mss
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ Value: The threshold for the TCP packet to be fragmented, with the value
Description
Using the tcp mss command, you can designate a value as a threshold for TCP
packets to be fragmented. The undo tcp mss command is used to prevent TCP
packets from being fragmented. As the default MTU of the interface being 1500
bytes, this restricts the total length of encryption packet head + data link
expenditure + IP packet head + TCP packet to 1500 bytes. So the dear length of
TCP packets to fragment may be about 1200 bytes.
By default, TCP packets are not fragmented.
Example
Configure the threshold of TCP packet fragmentation to be 300.
3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] tcp mss 300
tcp timer fin-timeout Syntax

tcp timer fin-timeout time-value
undo tcp timer fin-timeout
View
System view
Parameter
■ time-value: TCP finwait timer value, in second, with the value range of 76 to
3600.
Description
Using the tcp timer fin-timeout command, you can configure the TCP finwait
timer. Using the undo tcp timer fin-timeout command, you can restore the default
value of the timer.
By default, TCP finwait timer value is 675 seconds.
When the TCP connection status changes from FIN_WATI_1 to FIN_WAIT_2, the
finwait timer is enabled. If FIN packet is not received before the timeout of finwait
timer, the TCP connection will be closed.
The configuration of this parameter needs to be implemented under the guidance
of the technical support engineers.
For the related commands, see tcp timer syn-timeout and tcp window.
Example
Configure the TCP finwait timer value as 675 seconds.
[3Com] tcp timer fin-timeout 675
tcp timer syn-timeout Syntax

tcp timer syn-timeout time-value
undo tcp timer syn-timeout
View
System view
Parameter
■ time-value: TCP synwait timer value in second, with the value range of 2 to
600.
Description
Using the tcp timer syn-timeout command, you can configure the TCP synwait
timer. Using the undo tcp timer syn-timeout command, you can restore the default
value of the timer.
By default, TCP synwai timer value is 75 seconds.
When a syn packet is sent, TCP enables the synwait timer. If the response packet is
not received before synwait timeout, the TCP connection will be disabled.
For the related commands, see tcp timer fin-timeout and tcp window.
Example
Configure the TCP synwait timer value as 75 seconds.
[3Com] tcp timer syn-timeout 75
tcp window Syntax

tcp window-size window
undo tcp window
View
System view
Parameter
■ window-size: The size of the transceiving buffer of the connection-oriented
Socket in kilobytes (KB), with the value ranging 1 to 32.
Description
Using the tcp window command, you can configure the size of the transceiving
buffer of the connection-oriented Socket. Using the undo tcp window command,
you can restore the default size of the buffer.
By default, the size of the connection-oriented transceiving buffer is 4K bytes.
For the related commands, see tcp timer fin-timeout and tcp timer syn-timeout.
Example
Configure the size of the transceiving buffer of the connection-oriented Socket as
4 KB.
[3Com] tcp window 4
NAT Configuration
Commands
debugging nat Syntax

debugging nat { alg | event | packet [ interface { interface-type interface-number |
interface-name } ] }
undo debugging nat { alg | event | packet [ interface { interface-type
interface-number | interface-name } ] }
View
User view
Parameter
■ alg: Enables the application level gateway NAT debugging information.
■ event: Enables NAT event debugging information.
■ packet: Enables NAT data packet debugging information.
■ Interface: Enables NAT packet debugging for a special interface.
Description
Using the debugging nat command, you can enable the NAT debugging function.
Using the undo debugging nat command, you can disable the NAT debugging
function.
display nat Syntax

display nat { address-group | aging-time | all | outbound | server | statistics | session
[ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] [ slot slot-number ] [ destination ip-addr ]
[source global global-addr | source inside inside-addr ] }
View
Any view
Parameter
■ address-group: Displays the information of the address pool.
■ aging-time: Displays the effective time for NAT connection.
■ all: Displays all the information about NAT.
■ outbound: Displays the information of the outbound NAT.
■ server: Displays the information of the internal server.
■ statistics: Displays the statistics of current NAT records.
■ session: Displays the information of the currently activated connection.
■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Displays the NAT table items of a special VPN.

The omittance of this parameter means that NAT items for all VPNs will be
listed out.
■ slot slot-number: Designates the slot number of an interface. This parameter is
reserved especially for distributed environment use.
■ destination ip-addr: Displays the NAT table items of a special IP destination.
■ source global global-addr: Only displays the NAT entry with address as
global-addr after NAT.
■ source inside inside-addr: Only displays the NAT entry with internal address as
inside-addr.
Description
Using the display nat command, you can display the configuration of address
translation. Users can verify if the configuration of address translation is correct
according to the output information after execution of this command. When
address translation connection information is displayed, the parameters of
global-addr and inside-addr can be specified for the display nat session command
simultaneously.
Example
Display all the information about address translation.
<3Com> display nat all
NAT address-group Information:
1: from 11.1.1.1to11.1.1.20
2: from 22.1.1.1to22.1.1.20
NAT outbound information:
Serial0/0/0: acl(11)-NAT address-group(1) [no-pat]
Serial0/0/0: acl(22)-NAT address-group(2) [no-pat]
Server in private network information:
InterfaceGlobalAddrGlobalPort InsideAddr InsidePort Pro
Serial0/0/0201.119.11.380805.5.5.580(www)6(tcp)
Serial0/0/0201.119.11.32121 5.5.5.521(ftp)6(tcp)
NAT aging-time value information:
tcp------aging-time value is 240(seconds)
udp------aging-time value is 40(seconds)
icmp-----aging-time value is 20(seconds)
The information above indicates:
Two address pools are configured: Address pool 1 ranges from 11.1.1.1 to
11.1.1.20, and address tool 2 ranges from 22.1.1.1 to 22.1.1.20.
Two address translation associations are configured at Serial0/0/0: ACL 11 is

associated with address pool 1 and one-to-one address translation is performed;
and ACL 22 is associated with address pool 2, and one-to-one address translation
is performed.
Serial0/0/0 is configured with 2 internal servers: the www server of

http://202.119.11.3:8080, whose internal address is 5.5.5.5; and the ftp server of
ftp://202.119.11.3:2121, whose internal address is 5.5.5.5.
nat address-group Syntax

nat address-group group-number start-addr end-addr
undo nat address-group group-number
View
System view
Parameter
■ group-number: defined Address pool ID, it is an integer ranging from 0 to 31.
■ start-addr: Starting IP address in the address pool.
■ end-addr: Ending IP address in the address pool.
Description
Using the nat address-group command, you can configure an address pool. Using
the undo nat address-group command, you can delete an IP address pool.
Address pool indicates the cluster of some outside IP addresses. If start-addr and
end-addr are the same, it means that there is only one address.
CAUTION: The length of an address pool (numbers of all addresses contained in an address
pool) cannot exceed 256.
The address pool cannot be deleted, if it has been correlated to some certain access control list
to perform the address translation.
Example
Configure an address pool from 202.110.10.10 to 202.110.10.15, with its NAT
pool ID being 1.
[3Com] nat address-group 1 202.110.10.10 202.110.10.15
nat aging-time Syntax

nat aging-time { | default | { tcp | udp | icmp } time-value} }
View
System view
Parameter
■ time-value: A time value, expressed in second and ranging from 10 to 600..
■ tcp: The timeout of TCP connection.
■ udp: The timeout of UDP connection.
■ icmp: The time-out time of the protocol ICMP.
■ default: Sets to the default value.
Description
Using the nat aging-time command, you can set the valid time of nat connection.
By default, the valid time for tcp address translation is 240 seconds, for udp it is 40
seconds, and for icmp it is 20 seconds.
This command is used to set the valid time of address translation connection, and
different time values are set for different types of protocols. The time value is in
second.
Example
Set the valid connection time of TCP to 240 seconds.
[3Com] nat aging-time tcp 240
nat outbound Syntax

nat outbound acl-number [ address-group group-number [ no-pat ] ]
undo nat outbound acl-number [ address-group group-number [ no-pat ] ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ address-group: Configures address translation by means of address pool. If the
address pool is not specified, use the IP address of the interface as the
translated address, i.e., the "easy ip" feature.
■ no-pat: Uses simple address translation, which means only to translate the
address of the packet but not use port information.
■ acl-number: ACL index in the range of 1 to 199 (the advanced ACL can be
used).
■ group-number: The number of a defined address pool.
Description
Using the nat outbound command, you can associate an ACL with an address
pool, indicating that the address specified in the acl-number can be translated by
using address pool group-number. Using the undo nat outbound command, you
can remove the corresponding address translation.
Translation of the source address of the packet that conforms to the ACL is
accomplished by configuring the association between the ACL and the address
pool. The system performs address translation by selecting one address in the
address pool or by directly using the IP address of the interface. Users can
configure different address translation associations at the same interface. The
corresponding undo form of the command can be used to delete the related
address translation association. Normally, this interface is connected to ISP, and
serves as the exit interface of the inside network.
The command without the address-group parameter implements the "easy-ip"
feature. When performing address translation, the IP address of the interface is
used as the translated address and the ACL can be used to control which
addresses can be translated.
Example
Enable the hosts of the 10.110.10.0/24 network segment to perform address
translation by selecting the addresses from 202.110.10.10 to 202.110.10.12 as
the translated address. Suppose that the interface Serial0/0/0 connects to ISP.
[3Com] acl number 1
[3Com-acl-basic-1] rule permit source 10.110.10.0 0.0.0.255

[3Com-acl-basic-1] rule deny
Configure the address pool.
[3Com] nat address-group 1 202.110.10.10 202.110.10.12
Allow address translation and use the addresses of address pool 1 for address
translation. During translation, the information of TCP/UDP port is used.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] nat outbound 1 address-group 1
Delete the corresponding configuration.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] undo outbound 1 address-group 1
Configuration of simple address translation (not using the TCP/UDP port

information to perform the address translation)
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] nat outbound 1 address-group 1 no-pat

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] undo nat outbound 1 address-group 1 no-pat
The configuration that can be used when performing address translation by using
the IP address of interface Serial0/0/0 directly.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] nat outbound 1
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] undo nat outbound 1
nat server Syntax

nat server [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] protocol pro-type global global-addr
global-port1 global-port2 inside host-addr1 host-addr2 host-port
nat server [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] protocol pro-type global global-addr
[ global-port ] inside host-addr [ host-port ]
undo nat server [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] protocol pro-type global
global-addr global-port1 global-port2 inside host-addr1 host-addr2 host-port
undo nat server [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] protocol pro-type global
global-addr [ global-port ] inside host-addr [ host-port ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ vpn-instance-name: The virtual route forwarding instance of the VPN the
internal server belongs to. If the parameter is not configured, it represents that
the internal server belongs to an ordinary private network, other than one
MPLS VPN.
■ global-addr: An IP address provided for the outside to access (a legal IP

address).
■ global-port: A service port number provided for the outside to access. If
ignored, its value shall be the same with the host-port’s value.
■ host-addr: IP address of the server in internal LAN.
■ host-port: Service port number provided for a server in the range of 0 to
65535, and the common used port numbers are replaced by key words. For
example, www service port number is 80, which can also be represented by
www. ftp service port number is 21, and ftp can also stands for it. If the
inside-port is 0, it indicates that all the types of services can be provided and
the key word any can be used to stand for it in this situation. If the parameter is
not configured, it is considered as the case of any, which is the same as that
there is a static connection between global-addr and host-addr. When the
host-port is configured as any, the global-port also should be any, otherwise
the configuration is illegal.
■ global-port1, global-port2: Specifies a port range through two port numbers,
forming a corresponding relation with the internal host address range.
global-port2 must be larger than global-port1.
■ host-addr1, host-addr2: Defines a group of consecutive address ranges, which
respectively one-to-one matches the port ranges defined above. host-addr2
must be bigger than host-addr1. The number of the address ranges should be
the same as the number of ports defined by global-port1 and global-port2.
■ pro-type: The protocol type carried by IP, possibly being a protocol ID, or a key
word as a substitution. For example: icmp (its protocol ID is 1), tcp (its protocol
ID is 6), udp (its protocol ID is 7).
Description
Using the nat server command, you can define the mapping table of an internal
server. Users can access the internal server with the address and port as host-addr
and host-port respectively through the address port defined by global-addr and
global-port. Using the undo nat server command, you can remove the mapping
table.
Through this command, you can configure some internal network servers for
outside use. The internal server can locate in the ordinary private network or in
MPLS VPN. For example, www, ftp, telnet, kpop3, dns and so on.
Up to 256 internal server conversion commands can be configured on one
interface and at most 4096 internal servers can be configured on one interface.
Up to 1024 internal server conversion commands can be configured in one
system. If the nat servers are configured in the form of port range (i.e., specify a
port range through configuring global-port1 and global-port2, forming a
corresponding relation with the address range of the internal hosts), then the
number of internal servers will be the same as that of the ports configured, and
the max number of them are also 4096.
The interface on which this command is configured is interconnected with ISP and
serves as the gateway of the internal network.
Example
Specify the IP address of the interior www server of the LAN as 10.110.10.10, the
IP address of the interior ftp server as 10.110.10.11. It is expected that the outside
can access WEB through http:// 202.110.10.10:8080 and connect FTP web site
through ftp://202.110.10.10. Suppose that Serial0/0/0 is connected to ISP.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] nat server protocol tcp global 202.110.10.10 8080
inside 10.110.10.10 www
[3Com] ip vpn-instance vrf10
[3Com-vpn-instance] route-distinguisher 100:001
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] nat server protocol tcp global 202.110.10.10
inside 10.110.10.11 ftp
Specify one interior host 10.110.10.12, expecting that the host of the exterior
network can ping it with ping 202.110.10.11 command.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] nat server protocol icmp global 202.110.10.11

inside 10.110.10.12
Delete the www server.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] undo nat server protocol tcp global 202.110.10.10

8070 inside 10.110.10.10 www
By the command below, the internal ftp server of VPN vrf10 can be removed.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] undo nat server protocol tcp global 202.110.10.11

8070 inside 10.110.10.11 ftp
Specify an outside address as 202.110.10.10, and map the ports ranging from
1001 to 1100 to the addresses of 10.110.10.1 to 10.110.10.100 respectively to
access ftp service inside VPN vrf10. 202.110.10.10:1001 accesses 10.110.10.1
and 202.110.10:1002 accesses 10.110.10.2, etc.
[3Com-Serial0/0/0] nat server protocol tcp global 202.110.10.10 1001

1100 inside 10.110.10.1 10.110.10.100 telnet
reset nat Syntax

reset nat { log-entry | session slot slot-number }
View
User view
Parameter
■ log-entry: Clears NAT log buffer.
■ slot slot-number: Number of the interface card, which only exists in the
distributed environment.
■ session: Clears the information of the address translation table.
Description
This command is used to clear up the mapping tables of address translation in the
memory and release all the memory dynamically allocated to store the mapping
tables.
Example
In the central environment, clear NAT log buffer.
<3Com> reset nat log-entry
In the distributed environment, clear NAT log buffer.
<3Com> reset nat log-entry slot 10
In the central environment, clear information of the address translation table.
<3Com> reset nat session
In the distributed environment, clear information of the address translation table.
<3Com> reset nat session slot 10
IP Unicast Policy
Routing Configuration
Commands
apply default Syntax

output-interface apply default output-interface interface-type interface-number [ ... interface-type
interface-number ]
undo apply default output-interface interface-type interface-number [ ...
interface-type interface-number ]
View
Route-policy view
Parameter
Description
Using the apply default output-interface command, you can set default
forwarding interface for packets. Using the undo apply default output-interface
command, you can cancel the configuration of the default forwarding interface of
packets.
This command is used to set forwarding interface for the matched IP packet, and
the clause is valid for the packet whose route has not been found.
For the related commands, see apply ip-precedence, apply ip-address next-hop,
apply output-interface, and apply ip-address default next-hop.
Example
Set the default forwarding interface of packets as serial 0/0/0.
[3Com-route-policy] apply default output-interface serial 0/0/0
apply ip-address default Syntax

next-hop apply ip-address default next-hop ip-address [...ip address ]
undo apply ip-address default next-hop ip-address [...ip address ]
View
Route-policy view
Parameter
■ ip-address: IP address of default next hop.
Description
Using the apply ip-address default next-hop command, you can set the default
next hop of a packet. Using the undo apply ip-address default next-hop
command, you can cancel the configured default packet next hop.
This command is only valid for the packet whose route has not been found.
For the related commands, see apply ip-precedence, apply output-interface, apply
default output-interface, and apply ip-address next-hop.
Example
Set the default next hop of a packet to 1.1.1.1.
[3Com-route-policy] apply ip-address default next-hop 1.1.1.1
apply ip-address Syntax

next-hop apply ip-address next-hop ip-address [ ip-address ]
undo apply ip-address next-hop ip-address [ ip-address ]
View
Route-policy view
Parameter
■ ip-address: IP address of next hop.
Description
Using the apply ip-address next-hop command, you can set the packet next hop.
Using the undo apply ip-address next-hop command, you can cancel the
configuration about the next hop.
This command is used to set the next hop for the matched IP packet and at most
two next hops can be specified. The next hop should be adjacent to this device.
For the related commands, see apply ip-precedence, apply output-interface, apply
default output-interface, and apply ip-address default next-hop.
Example
Set the packet next hop to 1.1.1.1.
[3Com-route-policy] apply ip-address next-hop 1.1.1.1
apply ip-precedence Syntax

apply ip-precedence value
undo apply ip-precedence
View
Route-policy view
Parameter
■ value: The preference value. There are totally 8 (in the range 0 to 7)
preferences:
0 routine
1 priority
2 immediate
3 flash
4 flash-override
5 critical
6 internet
7 network
Description
Using the apply ip-precedence command, you can set precedence of IP packets.
Using the undo apply ip-precedence command, you can remove the precedence of
IP packets. This command is used to configure the set clause of route-policy and
the preference for the matched IP packets.
For the related commands, see apply output-interface, apply ip-address next-hop,
apply default output-interface, and apply ip-address default next-hop.
Example
Set the preference of IP packet to 5 (critical).
[3Com-route-policy] apply ip-precedence critical
apply output-interface Syntax

apply output-interface interface-type interface-number [ interface-type
interface-number ]
undo apply output-interface interface-type interface-number [ interface-type
interface-number ]
View
Route-policy view
Parameter
Description
Using the apply output-interface command, you can set a packet forwarding
interface. Using the undo apply output-interface command, you can cancel the
configuration on a forwarding interface.
This command is used to set the packet forwarding interface for the matched IP
packet. At most two forwarding interfaces can be specified.
For the related commands, see apply ip-precedence, apply ip-address next-hop,
apply default output-interface, and apply ip-address default next-hop.
Example
Specify forwarding interface as serial0/0/0 for the matched IP packet.
[3Com-route-policy] apply output-interface Serial 0/0/0
display ip policy Syntax

display ip policy
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ip policy command, you can view the routing policies of local
and configured interface policy routings. This command is used to display the
routing policies of local and configured interface policy routings.
Example
Display the routing policies of the local and configured interface policy routings.
<3Com> display ip policy
Route-policyInterface
pr02 Local
pr02 Virtual-Template0
pr01 Ethernet 0/0/0
The first line is prompt information. The first row shows where is used the routing
policy indicated in the second row. Take the first line as an example, "local"
indicates that the policy routing is used on the local router, i.e., all packets sent
from the local router (not forward through it) using the policy routing "pr02". The
second and third lines represent that the interfaces virtual-template0 and
Ethernet0/0/0 use route policy pr02 and pr01 respectively.
display ip policy setup Syntax

display ip policy setup { policy-tag | local | interface interface-type
interface-number }
View
Any view
Parameter
■ policy-tag: Displays the setting information of policy routings identified by
map-tag.
■ local: Displays the setting information of local policy routings.
■ interface: Displays the setting information of interface policy routings.
Description
Using the display ip policy setup command, you can view the setting information
of policy routings.
The display output of the display ip policy setup local command is the same as that
with policy-tag which will be shown soon, except that it displays the policy routing
enabled on the local router but not the configuration of a certain specified
route-policy.
The display ip policy setup interface command displays the configuration of the
policy routing enabled on the interface.
Example
Display the specific configurations of the specified policy routing, enabled or
disabled.
<3Com> display ip policy setup pr01
route-policy pr01 permit node 0
if-match acl 11
apply ip-address next-hop 3.3.3.3
This command displays the specific configuration of the policy routing named
pr01. As shown above, the policy routing has one 0 node and includes an if-match
clause and an apply clause. For the accurate meanings of the if-match clause and
the apply clause, you can refer to the configuration guide of the command. The
example shows how the option map-tag is used.
display ip policy statistic Syntax

display ip policy statistic { { policy-tag | local | interface interface-type
interface-number } [ verbose ] }
View
Any view
Parameter
■ policy-tag: Displays the statistics of the policy identified by policy-tag
performing policy routing process on packets.
■ local: Displays the statistics of local policy routing packets.
■ interface: Displays the statistics of interface policy routings.
■ verbose: Displays the detailed information.
Description
Using the display ip policy statistic command, you can view the statistics of policy
routings.
Example
Display the matching statistics of the specified policy routing.
<3Com> display ip policy statistic local
local policy pr02 summary information:
Main board
Total success packet number: 0
Total failure packet number: 0
The above information shows the forwarding success and failure times for all the
forwarding policy (i.e., the apply clause) of the local router policy routing.
To display the more detail statistics classified according to each apply clause, the
option verbose should be added.
<3Com> display ip policy statistic local verbose

local policy pr02 detail information:
Main board
apply output-interface: NULL0
Fail for interface not exists: 0
Fail for interface down: 0
apply ip-address next-hop: 5.5.5.5
Fail for error next-hop: 0
Fail for interface not exists: 0
Fail for interface down: 0
If the optional field verbose is added, the more detail statistics of each apply clause
in the policy routing will be displayed separately and the statistics of the
forwarding errors has been classified.
if-match acl Syntax

if-match acl acl-number
undo if-match acl acl-number
View
Route-policy view
Parameter
■ acl-number: Address access control list number.
Description
Using the if-match acl command, you can set the match condition for IP address.
Using the undo if-match acl command, you can delete the IP address match
condition.
An acl-number can be basic standard access-list or advanced access-list.
For the related command, see if-match packet-length.
Example
Set packets that accord with the access list 10 to be matched.
[3Com] route-policy map1 permit node 10
[3Com-route-policy] if-match acl 10
if-match packet-length Syntax

if-match packet-length min-len max-len
undo if-match packet-length
View
Route-policy view
Parameter
■ min-len: Minimum packet length of network layer.
■ max-len: Maximum packet length of network layer.
Description
Using the if-match packet-length command, you can set length match conditions
of IP packets. Using the undo if-match packet-length command, you can delete
the configuration about IP packet length match conditions.
For the related command, see if-match acl.
Example
Set the packet in the range 100 to 200 to be matched.
[3Com-route-policy] if-match packet-length 100 200
ip local policy Syntax

route-policy
ip local policy route-policy policy-tag
undo ip local policy route-policy policy-tag
View
System view
Parameter
policy-tag: Policy name.
Description
Using the ip local policy route-policy command, you can enable local policy
routing. Using the undo ip local policy route-policy command, you can delete the
existing setting of the policy routing.
By default, interface local policy routing is disabled.
This command is used to enable or disable the local policy routing for the packets
sent by the local device. If there is no special demand, it is recommended that
users do not configure local policy routing.
For the related command, see ip policy route-policy.
Example
Enable a local policy routing at system view. The policy routing is specified by
route-policy AAA.
[3Com] ip local policy route-policy AAA
ip policy route-policy Syntax

ip policy route-policy policy-name
undo ip policy route-policy policy-name
View
Interface view
Parameter
policy-name: Policy name.
Description
Using the ip policy route-policy command, you can enable policy routing at an
interface. Using the undo ip policy route-policy command, you can delete the
existing policy routing at an interface.
By default, interface policy routing is disabled.
For the related command, see ip local policy route-policy.
Example
Enable the policy routing specified by route-policy AAA at the interface Ethernet
0/0/0.
[3Com-ethernet0/0/0] ip policy route-policy AAA
IP Multicast Policy
Routing Configuration
Commands

next-hop apply ip-address next-hop { acl acl-number | ip-address [ ip-address ] }
undo apply ip-address next-hop [ acl acl-number | ip-address [ ip-address ] ]
View
Route-policy view
Parameter
■ acl-number: Standard ACL number ranging from 1 to 99.
■ ip-address: Specifies the next hop address. Multiple next hop addresses can be
specified.
Description
Using the apply ip-address command, you can configure the next hop IP address
list in a route-node. Using the undo apply ip-address command, you can remove
the configuration.
By default, no apply clause is defined.
This command specifies the next hop address for packets that match the if-match
acl command. It specifies the next hop IP address list for multicast policy routing
through the ACL. This command is in juxtaposition relation with the apply
output-interface command. If both apply clauses are configured at the same time,
in multicast policy routing, the packets will be replicated and forwarded to all the
interfaces and next hops specified by the ACLs respectively. This is different from
that only one apply clause works in unicast policy routing.
For the next hop IP address, the specified ACL is the standard ACL.
For the related commands, see if-match acl, apply output-interface, and display ip
multicast-policy.
apply output-interface Syntax

apply output-interface acl acl-number
undo apply output-interface [ acl acl-number ]
View
Route-policy view
Parameter
acl-number: ID of interface-based ACL, ranging from 1000 to 1999.
Description
Using the apply output-interface command, you can configure an outgoing
interface list in a route-node. Using the undo apply output-interface command,
you can remove the configuration.
This command specifies outgoing interfaces for packets that match the if-match
command. It specifies outgoing interfaces for multicast policy routing through the
ACL. The action executed to packets that meet the if-match conditions defined by
the match clause is as follows: If outgoing forwarding interfaces are set in the
route-node through the ACL, the packets will be replicated and forwarded to all
interfaces specified by the ACL.
For an outgoing interface, the specified ACL is the one based on interface.
This command is in juxtaposition relation with the apply ip-address next-hop
command. If both apply clauses are configured at the same time, in multicast
policy routing, the packets will be replicated and forwarded to all the interfaces
and next hops specified by the ACLs respectively. This is different from that only
one apply clause works in unicast policy routing.
For the related commands, see apply ip-address next-hop, if-match acl, and display
ip multicast-policy.
debugging ip Syntax
multicast-policy debugging ip multicast-policy [ acl-number ]
undo debugging ip multicast-policy
View
User view
Parameter
■ acl-number: ID of interface-based ACL ranging 1000 to 1999.
Description
Using the debugging ip multicast-policy command, you can enable the debugging
of IP multicast policy routing. Using the undo debugging ip multicast-policy
command, you can disable the debugging of multicast policy routing.
The contents of the debugging information contain the route-node that the
packets match and the next hop/outgoing interface to which the packets are
forwarded. The debugging information output can be filtered with the
interface-based ACL.
It should be noted that enabling the debugging would affect the performance of
the system. You should disable the debugging when the system is running
normally.
For the related command, see route-policy.
display ip Syntax
multicast-policy display ip multicast-policy [ setup interface interface-name | statistic interface
interface-name ]
View
Any view
Parameter
Description
Using the display ip multicast-policy command, you can view the multicast policy
routing information.
Example
Display the information about the multicast policy routing configured on interface
Ethernet2/0/0.
[3Com] display ip multicast-policy setup interface ethernet2/0/0
route-policy cc permit node 10
if-match acl 110
apply ip-address next-hop acl 50
route-policy cc permit node 20
if-match acl 120
apply output-interface acl 1005
Display the statistic information about the multicast policy routing configured on
interface Ethernet2/0/0.
[3Com] display ip multicast-policy statistic interface ethernet2/0/0

interface Ethernet2/0/0 multicast-policy routing summary
information:
Total packets matched: 5
Total packets forward : 20
if-match acl Syntax

if-match { acl acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name }
undo if-match { acl acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name }
View
Route-policy view
Parameter
■ acl-number: Standard or extended ACL number ranging from 1 to 199.
■ ip-prefix-name: Specifies the name of an address prefix list used for filtering.
Description
Using the if-match acl command, you can set conditions that multicast packets
should meet in each policy node. Using the undo if-match acl command, you can
remove the match conditions set.
By default, no if-match clause is defined.
If a packet meets the if-match conditions specified in a policy node, actions
specified by the node will be performed. If a packet does not meet the if-match
conditions specified in a policy node, the next node will be detected. If a packet
does not meet the conditions of all policy nodes, the packet will return to the
normal forwarding flow. The configuration and use of this command are the same
as those of the same command in the unicast policy routing.
ip multicast-policy Syntax
route-policy ip multicast-policy route-policy policy-name
undo ip multicast-policy route-policy policy-name
View
Interface view
Parameter
policy-name: Specifies the name of a route-policy, which uniquely identifies one
route-policy.
Description
Using the ip multicast-policy route-policy command, you can enable a multicast
policy routing on an interface. Using the undo ip multicast-policy route-policy
command, you can remove a multicast policy route applied on the interface.
By default, no multicast route policy is enabled.
Using this command can enable multicast policy routing defined by the
route-policy named policy-name on an interface.
When multicast policy routing is configured on an interface of a router, all
multicast packets entering the router on the interface will be filtered.
The filter method is that all policy nodes of the route-policy specified by the policy
routing are tried in the order of the ascending sequence of the numbers. If a
packet meets the if-match conditions specified in a policy node, actions specified
by the node will be performed. If a packet does not meet the if-match conditions
specified in a policy node, the next node will be detected. If a packet does not
meet the conditions of any policy nodes, the packet will return to the normal
forwarding flow.
Example
Enable multicast policy routing named map1 on interface Ethernet 2/0/0.
[3Com-Ethernet2/0/0] ip multicast-policy route-policy map1
route-policy Syntax
route-policy policy-name { permit | deny } node sequence-number
undo route-policy policy-name [ permit | deny ] [ node sequence-number ]
View
System view
Parameter
■ policy-name: Specifies the name of a route-policy, which uniquely identifies
one route-policy.
■ permit: Specifies the match mode of the route-policy node defined as permit.
When a route entry meets the if-match clause of the node, the entry is
permitted to pass the filter of the node and the apply clause of the node will be
performed. If a route entry does not meet the if-match clause of the node, the
next node of the route-policy will be tested. For multicast policy routing
configuration, all the if-match clauses except the if-match acl clause are invalid.
■ deny: Specifies the match mode of the route-policy node defined as deny.
When a route entry meets the if-match clause of the node, the entry is denied
to pass the filter of the node and the next node will not be tested. For multicast
policy routing configuration, all the if-match clauses except the if-match acl
clause are invalid.
■ sequence-number: Identifies a node in the route-policy. When the route-policy
is used for routing information filtering, the node with a smaller
sequence-number is tested first. This parameter ranges from 0 to 65535.
Description
Using the route-policy command, you can configure a route-policy node and enter
the route-policy view. Using the undo route-policy command, you can remove a
route-policy or a node.
By default, no route-policy is defined.
The policy of IP multicast policy routing is implemented by configuring
route-policies. Multiple route-policies can be configured on a router. Each
route-policy may contain multiple route-nodes. Different route-nodes in a
route-policy are identified by different integer sequence-numbers. In each
route-node, set the conditions that packets should match (i.e., the match rule)
with the if-match command and configure the forwarding actions to be executed
to packets that meet the match conditions with the apply command.
The logical relation that filter the if-match clauses is “and”. This means that any
if-match clause passing the filter will cause others to be ignored.
Only the if-match acl clause is effective for multicast policy routing. The logical
relation between route-policy nodes is “or”. That is, one packet forwarded in one
policy node results in all the following nodes being ignored. If all permit nodes can
not succeed in matching with the features of packet or any deny node is matched,
the packet will then be forwarded or discarded normally, up to the route table.
When multicast policy routing is configured on an interface of a router, all
multicast packets entering the router on the interface will be filtered. The filter
method is that all policy nodes of the route-policy are applied in the ascending
sequence of their ID(a number).
For the related commands, see if-match, apply output-interface, apply ip-address
next-hop, and display ip multicast-policy.
Example
Configure a route-policy named map1 with the node ID of 10 and with the match
mode of permit and enter the route-policy view.
[3Com-route-policy]
IPX Configuration
Commands
debugging ipx packet Syntax

debugging ipx packet [ interface-type interface-num | interface-name ]
undo debugging ipx packet [ interface-type interface-num | interface-name ]
View
User view
Parameter
■ interface-num: Interface number.
Description
Using the debugging ipx packet command, you can enable IPX packet debugging
switch to view the contents of IPX packet received and transmitted. Using the
undo debugging ipx packet command, you can disable the debugging switch. By
default, IPX packet debugging switch is disabled.
Example
Enable IPX packet debugging switch.
<3Com> debugging ipx packet
*0.8942310-IPX-8-IPXPKT:
Sending, interface = Serial3/0/0,
pktlen = 40, hops = 0, pkttype = 0x1,
dstnet = 0xb, dstnode = ffff-ffff-ffff, dstsocket = 0x453,
srcnet = 0xb, srcnode = 00e0-fc01-5517, srcsocket = 0x453
prompt: Sending the packet.
*0.8942610-IPX-8-IPXPKT:
Delivering, interface = Serial3/0/0,
pktlen = 480, hops = 0, pkttype = 0x4,

dstnet = 0xb, dstnode = ffff-ffff-ffff, dstsocket = 0x452,
srcnet = 0xb, srcnode = 00e0-fc01-54f6, srcsocket = 0x452
prompt: IPX packet is delivering up!
Table 7 Description of display information of the debugging ipx packet command
Item Description
pktlen = Length of packet in decimal format (not including MAC address header).
hops = How many routers the packet has passed through.
pkttype = Packet type in hexadecimal format.
dstnet = Destination network number of the packet.
dstnode = Destination node address of the packet.
dstsocket = Destination socket of the packet.
srcnet = Source network number of the packet.
srcnode = Source node address of the packet.
srcsocket = Source socket of the packet.
promt: Prompt of how router processes the packet and reasons of discarding packet.
debugging ipx ping Syntax

debugging ipx ping
undo debugging ipx ping
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the debugging ipx ping command, you can enable IPX Ping packet
debugging switch to view the contents of Ping packet received and transmitted.
Using the undo debugging ipx ping command, you can disable the debugging
switch.
By default, IPX Ping packet debugging switch is disabled.
Example
Enable IPX Ping packet debugging switch.
<3Com> debugging ipx ping
*0.15396012-IPX-8-IPXPING:
Ping receiving: Request, Src = a.00e0-fc04-8859, Dst =
a.00e0-fc01-54f6
*0.15396130-IPX-8-IPXPING:
Ping sending: Response, Src = a.00e0-fc01-54f6, Dst =
a.00e0-fc04-8859
Table 8 Description of display information of the debugging ipx ping command
Item Description
Src = Source address of Ping packet.
Dst = Destination address of Ping packet.
debugging ipx rip Syntax

debugging ipx rip { packet [ verbose ] | event }
undo debugging ipx rip { packet [ verbose ] | event }
View
User view
Parameter
■ packet: Debugging information of packet received and transmitted.
■ verbose: Displays detailed information about packet received and transmitted.
■ event: Event debugging information, such as Up/Down of an interface and
related timer events.
Description
Using the debugging ipx rip command, you can enable RIP debugging switch to
view information on RIP packet received and transmitted, routing changes and
timer expiry. Using the undo debugging ipx rip command, you can disable RIP
debugging switch.
By default, IPX RIP debugging switch is disabled.
Example
Enable IPX RIP packet debugging switch.
<3Com> debugging ipx rip packet
Send RIP Response to Ethernet0/0, length 96
src:a.00e0-fc01-5517(453), dst:a.ffff-ffff-ffff(453)
Number of Entries in Pkt: 8
Enable IPX RIP packet verbose debugging switch.
<3Com> debugging ipx rip packet verbose
Send RIP Response to Ethernet0/0, length 96
src:a.00e0-fc01-5517(453), dst:a.ffff-ffff-ffff(453)
Number of Entries in Pkt: 8
Network 0x1, hops 2, delay 2
Network 0xa, hops 1, delay 2
Enable IPX RIP event debugging switch.
<3Com> debugging ipx rip event

*0.274181351-IPXRIP-8-IPXRIP_Event:
The number 1 equal route nexthop: 00e0-fc04-8859
*0.274181450-IPXRIP-8-IPXRIP_Event:
The network 8 totally have 1 equal route
debugging ipx Syntax

rtpro-flash debugging ipx rtpro-flash
undo debugging ipx rtpro-flash
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the debugging ipx rtpro-flash command, you can turn on the debugging
switch of route refreshing in the IPXRM module. Using the command, you can
turn off the debugging switch of route refreshing in the IPXRM module.
This kind of debugging information is generated when routes are refreshed for the
sake of route change.
Example
Switch on route refreshing debugging for IPXRM module.
<3Com>debugging ipx rtpro-flash
<3Com>
Remove an IPX static route.
[3Com]undo ipx route-static b2 Serial 1
*0.18537610 3Com RMX/8/DBG:
IPXRM set a Rth on the flash list, ulRthDest = 0xb2 .
[3Com]
*0.18537820 3Com RMX/8/DBG:
IPXRM finish a flash, reset a Rth on the flash list, ulRthDest = 0xb2 .
[3Com]

rtpro-interface debugging ipx rtpro-interface
undo debugging ipx rtpro-interface
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the debugging ipx rtpro-interface command, you can turn on the
debugging switch of interface change in the IPXRM module. Using the undo
debugging ipx rtpro-interface command, you can turn off the debugging switch
of interface change in the IPXRM module.
Such debugging information is generated whenever IPXRM module receives
interface change messages. These messages are generated when interface status
changes between up and down, or interface is added or removed.
Example
Enable IPX RIP packet debugging switch
<3Com> debugging ipx rip packet
Switch on interface change debugging for IPXRM module.
<3Com>debugging ipx rtpro-interface

<3Com>
Trigger interface change by using shut/undo shut command.
[3Com-Serial1] shut
[3Com-Serial1]
%Oct 24 14:11:27 2003 3Com PHY/2/PHY: Serial1: change status to down
%Oct 24 14:11:27 2003 3Com IFNET/5/UPDOWN:Line protocol on the interface

Serial1 turns into DOWN state
%Oct 24 14:11:27 2003 3Com IFNET/5/UPDOWN:Protocol IPX on the interface

Serial1 turns into DOWN state
*0.19023320 3Com RMX/8/DBG:IPXRM recieve interface change msg, msg type

IPX_IF_DOWN .if_index is 0x286 .Interface name is Serial1 .
[3Com-Serial1]
[3Com-Serial1]undo shut
[3Com-Serial1]
%Oct 24 14:11:34 2003 3Com PHY/2/PHY: Serial1: change status to up
%Oct 24 14:11:34 2003 3Com IFNET/5/UPDOWN:Line protocol on the interface

Serial1 turns into UP state
%Oct 24 14:11:34 2003 3Com IFNET/5/UPDOWN:Protocol IPX on the interface

Serial1 turns into UP state
*0.19032220 3Com RMX/8/DBG:IPXRM recieve interface change msg, msg type

IPX_IF_UP .if_index is 0x286 .Interface name is Serial1 .
[3Com-Serial1]

rtpro-routing debugging ipx rtpro-routing
undo debugging ipx rtpro-routing
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the debugging ipx rtpro-routing command, you can turn on the debugging
switch of route change in the IPXRM module. Using the command, you can turn
off the debugging switch of route change in the IPXRM module.
This kind of debugging information is generated when route changes as addition,
deletion or attribute adjustment occur.
Example
Switch on route change debugging for IPXRM module.
<3Com>debugging ipx rtpro-routing
<3Com>
Add a static route
3Com]ipx route-static d10 Serial 1
*0.19579120 3Com RMX/8/DBG:IPXRM ADD route !
Dest: d10 Nexthop: 0.0000-0000-0000
Interface: a.00e0-fcfb-3a00(Serial1)
Protocol: Static Preference: 60
Ticks: 6 Hops: 1
*0.19579230 3Com RMX/8/DBG:IPXRM route change to ACTIVE !
Dest: d10 Nexthop: 0.0000-0000-0000
Interface: a.00e0-fcfb-3a00(Serial1)
Ticks: 6 Hops: 1
debugging ipx sap Syntax

packet debugging ipx sap [ packet [ verbose ] | event ]
undo debugging ipx sap [ packet [ verbose ] | event ]
View
User view
Parameter
■ packet: Debugging information of packet received and transmitted.
■ verbose: Displays detailed information about packet received and transmitted.
■ event: Event debugging information, such as Up/Down of an interface and
related timer events.
Description
Using the debugging ipx sap command, you can enable IPX SAP debugging switch
to view information on SAP packet received and transmitted, routing changes and
timer expiry. Using the undo debugging ipx sap command, you can disable IPX
SAP debugging switch.
Enabling IPX SAP debugging switch, you can confirm whether SAP packet is
received. Normally, a router or server sends out an SAP update packet every
minute. By default, each SAP packet includes up to seven service information
items at most. If a lot service information needs advertising on the network, the
router sends out multiple packets per update. For example, if a router has 20
service information items in SIT, it sends three SAP packets per update. The first
SAP includes the first seven items, the second SAP includes the next seven items,
and the last update includes the last six items.
The debugging ipx sap command generates significant amount of output, use it
with caution on networks that have many interfaces and a great deal of service
information. Disable debugging switch immediately after debugging to reduce
effect to normal services as possible.
Example
Enable SAP packet verbose debugging switch.
<3Com> debugging ipx sap packet verbose
*0.20909856-IPXSAP-8-IPX SAP: MSG: Receive Response Packet From
Eth0,Length 480
Src: 000a.0000-0104-8f02 (0452) Dest: 000a.ffff-ffff-ffff (0452)
Number of entries in pkt: 7
Server type 2000 "PS1" 0008.000a-000a-000a (0452) hop 3
Server type 2345 "kkkkk" 000d.0005-0005-0005 (0452) hop 6
Server type 9000 "kiran-temp" 000d.0006-0006-0006 (0452) hop 16
Server type 6000 "kiran3" 000d.0003-0003-0003 (0452) hop 6
Server type 1000 "FS2" 000d.000a-000a-000a (0452) hop 2
Enable SAP packet debugging switch.
<3Com> debugging ipx sap packet

*0.20909856-IPXSAP-8-IPX SAP : MSG:Recieve Response Packet From
Eth0,Length 480
Src: 000a.0000-0104-8f01 (0452) Dest: 000a.ffff-ffff-ffff (0452)
Number of entries in pkt: 4
Enable SAP event debugging switch.
<3Com> debugging ipx sap Event

*0.20776625-IPXSAP-8-IPX SAP: MSG:
IPXSAP: Route UP Event Received: N
display ipx interface Syntax

display ipx interface [ interface- type interface-num | interface-name ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ Interface-type: Interface type.
■ Interface-num: Interface number.

■ Interface-name: Interface name.
Description
Using the display ipx interface command, you can view IPX interface configuration
information and interface parameters in communication devices.
Example
Display IPX configuration and statistics of the interface Ethernet1/0/0.
<3Com> display ipx interface ethernet 1/0/0
Ethernet1/0/0 is up
IPX address is 2.00E0-FC01-0000 [up]
SAP is enabled
Split horizon is enabled
Update change only is disabled
Forwarding of IPX type 20 propagation packet is enabled
Delay of this IPX interface, in ticks is 1
SAP GNS response is enabled
RIP packet maximum size is 432 bytes
SAP packet maximum size is 480 bytes
IPX encapsulation is Netware 802.3
0 received, 0 sent
0 bytes received, 0 bytes sent
0 RIP received, 0 RIP sent, 0 RIP discarded
0 RIP specific requests received, 0 RIP specific responses sent
0 RIP general requests received, 0 RIP general responses sent
0 SAP received, 0 SAP sent, 0 SAP discarded
0 SAP requests received, 0 SAP responses sent
Table 9 Description of display information of the display ipx interface command
Item Description
Ethernet1/0/0 is ... In terms of physical layer and link layer status, the current interface is UP, DOWN or a
IPX address is ... IPX network ID and node value of the current interface. Refer to the comm
ipx enable for details of network ID and node value.
[up] IPX protocol status of the current interface.
SAP is … Whether SAP is enabled on the current interface.
Split horizon is … Whether split horizon is enabled on the current interface. The related com
split-horizon.
Update change only is … Whether trigger update is enabled on the current interface. The related co
update-change-only.
Forwarding of IPX type 20 Whether IPX type 20 propagation packet is permitted to be forwarded on t
propagation packet is ... related command is ipx netbios-propagation.
Delay of this IPX interface, in ticks is Delay value of the current interface. The value is configured by the ipx tic
...
SAP GNS response is ... Whether SAP GNS reply is enabled on the current interface. The related co
gns-disable-reply.
RIP packet maximum size is ... bytes Maximum size of RIP updating packet on the current interface. The related
mtu.
SAP packet maximum size is ... bytesMaximum size of SAP updating packet on the current interface. The relate
mtu.
received Total number of packets received on the current interface.
sent Total number of packets sent on the current interface.
bytes received Total number of bytes received on the current interface.
bytes sent Total number of bytes sent on the current interface.
RIP received Total number of IPX RIP packets received on the current interface.
RIP sent Total number of IPX RIP packets sent on the current interface.
RIP discarded Total number of IPX RIP packets discarded on the current interface.
RIP specific requests received Total number of IPX RIP specific requests received on the current interface
RIP specific responses sent Total number of IPX RIP specific responses sent on the current interface.
RIP general requests received Total number of IPX RIP general requests received on the current interface
RIP general responses sent Total number of IPX RIP general responses sent on the current interfa
SAP received Total number of SAP packets received on the current interface.
SAP sent Total number of SAP packets sent on the current interface.
SAP discarded Total number of SAP packets discarded on the current interface.
SAP requests received Total number of SAP requests received on the current interface.
SAP responses sent Total number of SAP responses sent on the current interface.
display ipx routing-table Syntax

display ipx routing-table [ network ] [ verbose ]
display ipx routing-table protocol { default | direct | rip | static } [ inactive | verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ network: Destination network ID of IPX static route. It is an 8-bit hexadecimal
number, ranging from 1 to 0xFFFFFFFE. Display IPX routing information to
specified destination network ID.
■ verbose: Displays detailed route information, including active and inactive
routes.
■ default: Displays all the default routing information.
■ direct: Displays all the directly connected routing information.
■ rip: Displays all IPX RIP routing information.
■ static: Displays all IPX static routing information.
■ inactive: Only displays inactive routing information.
Description
■ Using the display ipx routing-table command, you can view active IPX routing
information.
■ Using the display ipx routing-table verbose command, you can view detailed
IPX routing information, including active and inactive routes.
■ Using the display ipx routing-table network command, you can view active IPX
routing information to specified destination network ID.
■ Using the display ipx routing-table network verbose command, you can view
detailed IPX routing information to specified destination network ID, including
active and inactive routes.
■ Using the display ipx routing-table protocol { rip | static | default | direct }
command, you can view IPX routing information for specified destination type,
including active and inactive routes.
■ Using the display ipx routing-table protocol { rip | static | default | direct }
verbose command, you can view detailed IPX routing information for specified
destination type, including active and inactive routes.
Example
Display active IPX routing information.
[3Com] display ipx routing-table
Routing tables:
Summary count: 4
Dest_Ntwk_ID Proto Pre Ticks Hops Nexthop

Interface
0x11 Direct 0 6 0 0.0000-0000-0000
Serial0/0/0
0x22 RIP 100 7 1 11.0000-0165-6401
Serial0/0/0
0x33 Direct 0 1 0 0.0000-0000-0000
Ethernet0/0/0
0x100 Static 60 6 1 0.0000-0000-0000
Serial0/0/0
The following table explains the contents in the above displayed information:
Description of display information of the display ipx routing-table command
Item Description
Dest_Ntwk_ID Destination network ID of the route
Proto Protocol type of the route
Pre Preference of the route
Ticks Ticks value of the route
Hops Hops value of the route
Nexthop The next hop of the route
Interface Outgoing interface of the route
Display detailed IPX routing information, including active and inactive routes.
<3Com> display ipx routing-table verbose

Routing tables:
Destinations: 103 Routes: 103
Destination Network ID: 0x11
Protocol: Direct Preference: 0
Ticks: 6 Hops: 0
Nexthop: 0.0000-0000-0000 Time: 0
Interface: 11.0000-0165-6400(Serial0)
State: <Active>
Protocol: RIP Preference: 100
Ticks: 7 Hops: 1
Nexthop: 11.0000-0165-6401Time: 15
State: <Active>
Ticks: 1 Hops: 0
Nexthop: 0.0000-0000-0000Time: 0
Interface: 33.0000-0165-6400(Ethernet0)
State: <Active>
Ticks: 6 Hops: 1
Nexthop: 0.0000-0000-0000Time: 0
State: <Active>
Table 10 Description of display information of the display ipx routing-table verbose
command
Item Description
Aging time value of the route. Without aging, the value of interface route and static
Time route is 0.
State can be <Active>, <Inactive> or <Delete>. <Active> indicates active route, <Ina
State indicates inactive route and <Delete> indicates the route is being deleted.
display ipx routing-table Syntax

statistics display ipx routing-table statistics
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ipx routing-table statistics command, you can view IPX routing
statistics.
Example
Display IPX routing statistics.
<3Com> display ipx routing-table statistics
Routing tables:
Proto/State route active added deleted freed
Direct 2 2 2 0 0
Static 1 1 2 1 1
RIP 1 1 1 0 0
Default 0 0 0 0 0
Total 4 4 5 1 1
display ipx service table Syntax

display ipx service-table [ [ type service-type | name name | network network |
order { network | type } ] | [ inactive ] ] [ verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ type: Displays information for specified service type ID.
■ service-type: The type of service.
■ name: Displays information for specified server name.
■ name: Name of the server.
■ network: Displays service information of the server on specified network
segment.
■ network: The network ID of the network segment.
■ order: Displays service information after classified by the type.
■ network: Classified by the network ID.
■ type: Classified by the service type.
■ inactive: Displays inactive service information.
■ verbose: Displays details about service information.
Description
Using the display ipx service-table command, you can view contents of IPX service
information table. The output information of the command helps users with IPX
SAP troubleshooting.
Example
Display contents of IPX service information table.
[3Com] display ipx service-table
Abbreviation: S - Static, Pref - Preference(Decimal), NetId -
Network number,
NodeId - Node address, hop - Hops(Decimal), Recv-If - Interface from
which the service is receieved
Name Type NetId NodeId Sock Pref Hops Recv-If
FS2 1000 000d 000a-000a-000a 0452 500 02 Eth1/0/0
PS1 2000 0008 000a-000a-000a 0452 500 03 Eth1/0/0
kkkkk 2345 000d 0005-0005-0005 0452 500 06 Eth1/0/0
Hello3 6000 000d 0003-0003-0003 0452 500 06 Eth1/0/0
Display contents of service information table of type 5.
[3Com] display ipx service-table type 5
Abbreviation: S - Static, Pref - Preference(Decimal), NetId -
Network number,
NodeId - Node address, hop - Hops(Decimal), Recv-If - Interface from
which the service is receieved
Name Type NetId NodeId Sock Pref Hops
Recv-If
Prn1 0005 000d 000a-000a-000a 0452 500 02
Eth1/0/0
Prn2 0005 0008 000a-000a-000a 0452 500 03
Eth1/0/0
Prn3 0005 000d 0005-0005-0005 0452 500 06
Eth1/0/0
Prn4 0005 000d 0006-006-0006 0452 500 06
Eth1/0/0
display ipx statistics Syntax

display ipx statistics
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ipx statistics command, you can view statistics and type of IPX
packet transmitted and received.
Example
Display IPX statistics.
<3Com> display ipx statistics
Received: 0 total, 0 packets pitched
0 packets size errors, 0 format errors
0 bad hops(>16), 0 discarded(hops=16)

0 other errors, 0 local destination
0 can not be dealed
Sent: 0 forwarded, 0 generated
0 no route, 0 discarded
RIP: 0 sent, 0 received
0 responses sent, 0 responses received
0 requests received, 0 requests dealed
0 requests sent, 0 periodic updates
SAP: 0 general requests received
0 specific requests received
0 GNS requests received
0 general responses sent
0 specific responses sent
0 GNS responses sent
0 periodic updates, 0 errors
Table 11 Description of display information of the display ipx statistics command
Item Description
Received Statistics for received messages
0 total Total number of received messages
0 packets pitched Total number of messages whose headers are re-pitched
0 packets size errors Total number of discarded messages due to packet size errors
0 format errors Total number of discarded messages due to encapsulation format err
0 bad hops Total number of messages whose hop field values exceed 16
0 discarded(hop=16) Total number of messages whose hop field values are 16
0 other errors Total number of discarded messages due to other errors
0 local destination Total number of messages which have local destinations
0 can not be dealt Total number of messages that can not be dealt with
Sent: Statistics for sent messages
0 forwarded Number of messages which need to be forwarded
0 generated Number of messages which are sent by router itself
0 no route Number of messages which do not find routes
0 discarded Number of messages discarded during sending
RIP: Statistics for RIP messages
0 sent Number of RIP messages sent by router
0 received Number of RIP messages received
0 responses sent Number of RIP response messages sent by router
0 responses received Number of RIP response messages received
0 requests received Number of RIP request messages received
0 requests dealt Number of RIP request messages dealt
0 requests sent Number of RIP request messages sent by router
0 periodic updates Number of RIP periodic update messages sent by router
SAP: Statistics for SAP messages
0 general requests received Number of received SAP general request messages
0 specific requests received Number of received SAP specific request messages
0 GNS requests received Number of received SAP GNS request messages
0 general responses sent Number of sent SAP general response messages
0 specific responses sent Number of sent SAP specific response messages
0 GNS responses sent Number of sent SAP GNS response messages
0 periodic updates Number of SAP periodic update messages sent by router
0 errors Number of error SAP messages
ipx enable Syntax

ipx enable [ node node ]
undo ipx enable
View
System view
Parameter
■ node: node value of the router. It is a 48-bit value represented by a triplet of
four-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by “-“. It is neither a broadcasting
address nor a multicast address. If the parameter is not configured, the router
will assign MAC address of the first Ethernet interface as its node value.
If there is no Ethernet interface in the router, the system will assign a random node
value based on the system clock.
Description
Using the ipx enable command, you can activate IPX. Using the undo ipx enable
command, you can deactivate IPX and remove all IPX configurations
simultaneously.
Activating IPX again after executing the undo ipx enable command, you can not
restore any IPX configuration.
Example
Enable IPX.
[3Com] ipx enable
Disable IPX.
[3Com] undo ipx enable
ipx encapsulation Syntax

ipx encapsulation [ dot2 | dot3 | ethernet-2 | snap ]
undo ipx encapsulation
View
Ethernet Interface view
Parameter
■ dot2: Encapsulation format is Ethernet_802.2.
■ dot3: Encapsulation format is Ethernet_802.3.
■ ethernet-2: Encapsulation format is Ethernet_II.
■ snap: Encapsulation format is Ethernet_SNAP.
Description
Using the ipx encapsulation command, you can set IPX frame encapsulation
format on Ethernet interface. Using the undo ipx encapsulation command, you
can restore the default IPX frame encapsulation format.
By default, IPX frame encapsulation format on Ethernet interface is dot3
(Ethernet_802.3).
In WAN interfaces, IPX frame only supports PPP encapsulation.
Example
Configure IPX frame encapsulation format on the interface Ethernet0/1/0 as
Ethernet_II.
[3Com-Ethernet 0/1/0] ipx encapsulation ethernet-2
Restore the default IPX frame encapsulation format on the interface

Ethernet0/1/0.
[3Com-Ethernet 0/1/0] undo ipx encapsulation
ipx netbios-propagation Syntax

ipx netbios-propagation
undo ipx netbios-propagation
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ipx netbios-propagation command, you can configure the router to
forward type 20 broadcast packets on the current interface. Using the undo ipx
netbios-propagation command, you can disable the forwarding of type 20
packets.
By default, type 20 broadcast packets will be discarded by the router rather than
forwarded.
IPX type 20 packet is a packet for NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System)
defined by Novell NetWare.
Example
Enable the receipt and forwarding of type 20 broadcast packets.
[3Com-Ethernet 0/1/0] ipx netbios-propagation
Disable the receipt and forwarding of type 20 broadcast packets.
[3Com-Ethernet 0/1/0] undo ipx netbios-propagation
ipx network Syntax

ipx network network-number
undo ipx network
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ network: Network ID of IPX interface in hex. It ranges from 0x1 to FFFFFFFD.
Description
Using the ipx network command, you can configure a network ID for an interface.
Using the undo ipx network command, you can delete IPX network ID of an
interface.
By default, IPX is disabled on all interfaces after it is activated. There is no IPX
network ID on the interface.
Example
Configure the interface Ethernet0/1/0 as IPX interface and assign it with a network
ID.
[3Com-Ethernet 0/1/0] ipx network 675
Cancel the configuration of the interface Ethernet0/1/0 as IPX interface.
[3Com-Ethernet 0/1/0] undo ipx network
ipx rip import-route Syntax

ipx rip import-route static
undo ipx rip import-route static
View
System view
Parameter
■ static: Imported static route.
Description
Using the ipx rip import-route static command, you can import static routes into
RIP. RIP adds them in their route updates. Using the undo ipx rip import-route
static command, you can disable the importation of static routes.
Example
Import a static route to RIP.
[3Com] ipx rip import-route static
ipx rip mtu Syntax

ipx rip mtu bytes
undo ipx rip mtu
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ bytes: Maximum RIP updating packet size in byte, ranging from 432 to 1500.
By default, it is 432.
Description
Using the ipx rip mtu command, you can configure RIP updating packet size. Using
the undo ipx rip mtu command, you can restore the default configuration.
By default, the maximum size of RIP updating packets is 432 bytes. In RIP updating
packets, the size of each routing information item is 8 bytes and the size of IPX
header and RIP header is 32 bytes. So an updating packet can carry up to 50
routing information items at most.
Example
Configure the maximum size of RIP updating packets on the interface
Ethernet1/0/0 to 500 bytes.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] ipx rip mtu 500
ipx rip multiplier Syntax

ipx rip multiplier multiplier
undo ipx rip multiplier
View
System view
Parameter
■ multiplier: It is used to calculate the aging period of RIP routing information
table items, ranging from 1 to 1000. By default, the value is 3. The actual aging
time is the value of multiplier multiplied by the RIP updating interval.
Description
Using the ipx rip multiplier command, you can configure the aging period of RIP
routing information table items. Using the undo ipx rip multiplier command, you
can restore the default configuration.
By default, RIP aging period is 3 times of updating interval.
Routers may contain a timer for each item in their routing information table,
which keeps track of elapsed time since the route was received. Every time the
updating packet containing the routing information is received, the timer is reset
to zero. If RIP route is not updated in a period of time, the system will regard the
route is no longer valid and delete it from the routing table.
For the related command, see ipx rip timer update.
Example
Configure RIP aging period of routing information table items is 5 times of
updating interval.
[3Com] ipx rip multiplier 5
ipx rip timer update Syntax

ipx rip timer update seconds
undo ipx rip timer update
View
System view
Parameter
■ seconds: RIP updating interval in second, ranging from 10 to 60000.
Description
Using the ipx rip timer update command, you can configure RIP updating interval.
Using the undo ipx rip timer update command, you can restore the default value
of RIP updating interval.
By default, the RIP updating interval is 60 seconds.
On a network, routers need constantly exchange routing information with each
other to keep routing information consistent with actual network topology. In RIP,
directly connected routers periodically send updating packets to each other.
The changes of RIP updating interval will affect aging period. For the related
command, see ipx rip multiplier.
Example
Configure RIP updating interval to 30 seconds.
[3Com] ipx rip timer update 30
ipx route Syntax

ipx route-static network [ network.node | interface-type interface-num |
interface-name ] [ preference value ] [ tick ticks hop hops ]
undo ipx route-static { network [ network.node | interface-type interface-num |
interface-name ] | all }
View
System view
Parameter
■ network: Destination network ID of IPX static route. It is an 8-bit hexadecimal
number, ranging from 1 to 0xFFFFFFFE.
■ network.node: The next hop address of IPX static route. network is the
network ID of the next hop. node is a triplet of four-bit hexadecimal numbers
separated by “-“, each ranging from 1 to 0xFFFF.
■ interface-type: Outgoing interface type, only supporting the interface with PPP
encapsulation. It can be Serial or POS interface.
■ interface-num: Outgoing interface number.
■ interface-name: Outgoing interface name.
■ preference: Route preference. The preference of directly connected routes is
fixed to 0 and cannot be changed. By default, the preference of active IPX
static route is 60 and can be configured. The preference of dynamic IPX routes
is fixed to 100 and cannot be changed.
■ value: Route preference value, ranging from 0 to 255. The less the value, the
higher the preference.
■ ticks: It indicates the necessary time to destination network (1 tick = 1/18
second). By default, it is the tick value of outgoing interface. Interfaces of
different types have different default tick values. The tick value of Ethernet
interface is 1 and that of Serial interface is 6. When the tick value of an
interface is modified, the tick value of the corresponding static route will also
be changed.
■ hops: Number of routers which are passed by to destination network. By

default, the value is 1.
■ all: All IPX static routes.
Description
Using the ipx route-static command, you can configure IPX static route. Using the
undo ipx route-static command, you can delete static route.
The system regards the IPX static route with destination network ID being -2
(0xFFFFFFFE) as the default route.
Example
Configure an IPX static route with destination network ID being 0x5a, the next
hop being 1000.0-0c91-f61f, ticks 10 and hops 2.
[3Com] ipx enable
[3Com] ipx route-static 5a 1000.0-0c91-f61f 10 2
Configure the default IPX route with the next hop being 3.4a-60-7, ticks 10, hops
2 and preference 20.
[3Com] ipx enable

[3Com] ipx route-static -2 3.4a.60.7 tick 10 hop 2 preference 20
Configure an IPX static route with destination network ID being 3a, outgoing
interface being Serial1/0/0, ticks 10, hops 2 and preference 30.
[3Com] ipx enable

[3Com] ipx route-static 3a serial 0/0/0 tick 10 hop 2 preference 30
ipx route Syntax

load-balance-path ipx route load-balance-path paths
undo ipx route load-balance-path
View
System view
Parameter
■ paths: The maximum equivalent route number to the same destination address,
ranging from 1 to 64. By default, the value is 1.
Description
Using the ipx route load-balance-path command, you can configure the equivalent
route number to the same destination address. Using the undo ipx route
load-balance-path command, you can restore the default configuration.
The equivalent route number to the same destination address is the maximum
number of active equivalent routes in the current system. If the newly configured
value is less than the current active route number, the system will change the
excessive active routes to inactive status.
Example
Configure the equivalent route number to the same destination address to 30.
[3Com] ipx route load-balance-path 30
ipx route Syntax

max-reserve-path ipx route max-reserve-path paths
undo ipx route max-reserve-path
View
System view
Parameter
■ paths: The maximum dynamic route number to the same destination address,
Description
Using the ipx route max-reserve-path command, you can configure the maximum
dynamic route number to the same destination address. Using the undo ipx route
max-reserve-path command, you can restore the default configuration.
When the dynamic route number to the same destination address exceeds the
maximum value configured, the newly found dynamic routes will not be added
into the routing table, discarded directly. If the newly configured value is less than
the original one, the excessive routes in the current routing table will not be
deleted until they get aging themselves or are deleted manually.
Example
Configure the maximum dynamic route number to the same destination address
to 200.
[3Com] ipx route max-reserve-path 200
ipx sap disable Syntax

ipx sap disable
undo ipx sap disable
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ipx sap disable command, you can disable SAP on the current interface.
Using the undo ipx sap disable command, you can enable SAP on the current
interface.
By default, the interface SAP is enabled as soon as IPX is enabled.
Example
Disable SAP on the interface Ethernet0/0/0.
[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] ipx sap disable
Re-enable SAP on the interface Ethernet0/0/0.
[3Com-Ethernet0/0] undo ipx sap disable
ipx sap gns-disable-reply Syntax

ipx sap gns-disable-reply
undo ipx sap gns-disable-reply
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ipx sap gns-disable-reply command, you can disable IPX GNS reply on
the current interface. Using the undo ipx sap gns-disable-reply command, you can
enable IPX GNS reply on the current interface.
By default, GNS reply is enabled on an interface.
Example
Disable GNS reply on the interface Ethernet0/0/0.
[Ethernet0/0/0] ipx sap gns-disable-reply
Re-enable GNS reply on the interface Ethernet0/0/0.
[Ethernet0/0/0] undo ipx sap gns-disable-reply
ipx sap gns-load-balance Syntax

ipx sap gns-load-balance
undo ipx sap gns-load-balance
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ipx sap gns-load-balance command, you can configure the router to
respond GNS request in Round-robin method, i.e., all servers respond GNS request
in turn. Using the undo ipx sap gns-load-balance command, you can configure the
nearest server to respond GNS request.
By default, for GNS request, a router will inform all servers it knows to respond in
Round-robin method to avoid overload of one server.
For the related command, see ipx sap gns-disable-reply.
Example
Configure the nearest server to respond GNS request.
[3Com] undo ipx sap gns-load-balance
Configure all servers to respond GNS request in Round-robin method.
[3Com] ipx sap gns-load-balance
ipx sap Syntax

max-reserve-servers ipx sap max-reserve-servers length
undo ipx sap max-reserve-servers
View
System view
Parameter
■ length: The length of the dynamic service information reserve queue, ranges
from1 to 2048. By default, the value is 2048.
Description
Using the ipx sap max-reserve-servers command, you can configure the length of
the service information reserve queue. Using the undo ipx sap max-reserve-servers
command, you can restore the default configuration.
If the newly configured service information queue length is less than the present
one, the items in SIT will not be deleted. If the service information item number for
the same service type exceeds the maximum value configured, the new service
information will not be added.
Example
Set the maximum length of service information reserve queue to 1024.
[3Com] ipx sap max-reserve-servers 1024
ipx sap mtu Syntax

ipx sap mtu bytes
undo ipx sap mtu
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ bytes: The maximum SAP packet size in byte, ranging from 480 to 1500. By
Description
Using the ipx sap mtu command, you can configure the maximum size of SAP
updating packet. Using the undo ipx sap mtu command, you can restore the
By default, the maximum size of SAP updating packet is 480 bytes. The size of IPX
header and SAP header is 32 bytes, so a 480-byte SAP updating packet contains 7
service information items (64 bytes each).
Example
Set the maximum size of SAP updating packet on the interface Ethernet1/0/0 to
674 bytes (carrying 10 service information items at most).
[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] ipx sap mtu 674
ipx sap multiplier Syntax

ipx sap multiplier multiplier
undo ipx sap multiplier
View
System view
Parameter
■ multiplier: It is used to calculate the aging period of SAP service information
table items, ranging from 1 to 1000. By default, the value is 3. When the
updating interval is 60 seconds, the aging period is 60*3 = 180 seconds.
Description
Using the ipx sap multiplier command, you can configure the aging period of SAP
service information table items. Using the undo ipx sap multiplier command, you
can restore the default value of SAP aging period.
By default, the aging period of SAP service information table items is 3 times of
SAP updating interval.
For the related command, see ipx sap timer update.
Example
Set the aging period of SAP service information table items is 5 times of updating
interval.
[3Com] ipx sap multiplier 5
ipx sap timer update Syntax

ipx sap timer update seconds
undo ipx sap timer update
View
System view
Parameter
■ seconds: SAP updating interval, ranging from 10 to 60000 seconds. By default,
the value is 60 seconds.
Description
Using the ipx sap timer update command, you can configure SAP updating
interval. Using the undo ipx sap timer update command, you can restore the
default value of SAP updating interval.
When an interface adopts trigger update method, the command configuration
does not take effect.
For the related commands, see ipx sap multiplier and ipx update-change-only.
Example
Configure SAP updating interval to 300 seconds.
[3Com] ipx sap timer update 300
ipx service Syntax

ipx service service-type name network.node socket hop hopcount preference
preference
undo ipx service { { service-type [ name [ network.node ] ] [ preference preference ]
} | all }
View
System view
Parameter
■ service-type: Service type is a 4-byte hexadecimal number. 0 indicates all service
types.
■ name: The server name which provides the service, in character string with the
maximum length being 48 bytes.
■ network.node: Network ID and node value of a server. Network ID is
represented by an 8-bit hexadecimal number, ranging from 0x1 to 0xFFFFFFFD.
The 0s in front can be omitted when inputting. Node value is used to identify a
node in the network, with the length of 48 bits, represented by a triplet of
4-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by “-“.
■ socket: It is represented by a 4-bit hexadecimal number, ranging from 0x1 to
0xFFFF.
■ hop-count: The number of hops to the server in decimal, ranging from 1 to 15.
Note that hop count more than or equal to 16 implies the service is
unreachable.
■ preference: The preference of service information, ranging from 1 to 255. The
less the value, the higher the preference. By default, the preference of the
static service information table items is 60 and the preference of the dynamic
one is 500.
Description
Using the ipx service command, you can add a static service information item to
SIT. Using the undo ipx service command, you can delete a static service
information item from SIT.
The NetWare server uses SAP to advertise service information and stores the
service information to SIT which is dynamically updated by SAP. Adding a service
information item to SIT, users can access the service.
Example
Add a static service information item with service type 4, service name
“FileServer”, server network ID 130, node value 0000-0a0b-abcd, server hops 1
and server preference 60.
[3Com] ipx service 4 FileServer 130.0000-0a0b-abcd 451 hop 1

preference 60
[3Com] ipx service 4 FileServer 130.0000-0a0b-abcd 451 hop 1
[3Com] ipx service 114 MyServer 199.0000-0a0b-abcd 451 hop 10
Service information with server type 114 will not be advertised if there is no active
route to the network 199.
ipx split-horizon Syntax

ipx split-horizon
undo ipx split-horizon
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ipx split-horizon command, you can enable split horizon on the current
interface. Using the undo ipx split-horizon command, you can disable split horizon
on the current interface.
By default, split horizon is enabled on the interface.
Split horizon is a way to avoid routing loops, i.e., routing information received
from an interface is not permitted to be sent from the interface. The function does
not take effect to point-to-point connection links.
Example
Enable split horizon on the interface Ethernet1/1/0.
[3Com-Ethernet1/1/0] ipx split-horizon
Disable split horizon on the interface Ehernet1/1/0.
[3Com-Ethernet1/1/0] undo ipx split-horizon
ipx tick Syntax

ipx tick ticks
undo ipx tick
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ ticks: Delay time in tick, ranging from 0 to 30000. One tick is 1/18 second
(approximately 55 ms). By default, the delay of Ethernet interface is 1 tick, that
of the asynchronous serial port is 30 ticks and that of WAN port is 6 ticks.
Description
Using the ipx tick command, you can configure the delay of interface sending IPX
packets. Using the undo ipx tick command, you can restore the default value of
interface delay.
As the IPX RIP delay field, the delay value configured by the ipx tick command is a
basis for the optimal routing selection.
Example
Configure the delay is 5 ticks on the interface Ethernet1/0/0.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] ipx tick 5
ipx update-change-only Syntax

ipx update-change-only
undo ipx update-change-only
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ipx update-change-only command, you can enable trigger update on
the current interface. Using the undo ipx update-change-only command, you can
disable trigger update on the current interface.
By default, trigger update is disabled on the interface.
IPX RIP and SAP periodically advertise updating broadcast packets. Users can
configure trigger update to avoid broadcast flood.
Example
Enable trigger update on the interface Ethernet1/1/0.
[3Com-Ethernet 1/1/0] ipx update-change-only
Disable trigger update on the interface Ethernet1/1/0.
[3Com-Ethernet 1/1/0] undo ipx update-change-only
ping ipx Syntax

ping ipx network.node [ -c count ] [ -t timeout ] [ -s size ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ network.node: Ping destination address. The parameter network can be an
eight-bit hexadecimal number ranging from 0x1 to 0xFFFFFFFD. The 0s in front
can be omitted when inputting. The parameter node is a 48-bit value
represented by a triplet of four-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by “-“.
The 0s in front of node value cannot be omitted.

■ count: Number of Ping packets that are sent. By default, the value is 5.
■ timout: The period of time to wait for Ping response. By default, the value is 2
seconds.
■ size: Ping packet size. By default, the value is 100 bytes.
Description
Using the ping ipx command, you can check host reachability and network
connectivity in IPX network.
Example
Ping system whose destination address is 675.0000-a0b0-fefe with default
parameters.
<3Com> ping ipx 675.0000-a0b0-fefe
reset ipx statistics Syntax

reset ipx statistics
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reset ipx statistics command, you can clear IPX statistics by the system.
Example
Clear IPX statistics.
<3Com> reset ipx statistics
reset ipx routing-table Syntax

statistics reset ipx routing-table statistics protocol [all | default | direct | rip | static]
View
User view
Parameter
■ all: Clears statistical information of all types IPX route.
■ default: Clears the statistical information of the default IPX route type.
■ direct: Clears the statistical information of the IPX route directly connected.
■ rip: Clears the statistical information of the IPX RIP route.
■ static: Clears the statistical information of the static IPX route.
Description
The reset ipx routing-table statistics command is used to clear the statistical
information of a specified type of IPX route. Such information can be shown upon
the terminal using the display ipx routing-table statistics command.
Example
Add 5 IPX static routes to the router, then delete them, and then add anther 9 IPX
static routes. The IPX route statistical information would be as follows:
[3Com]dis ipx routing-table statistics
Routing tables:
Proto/State route active added deleted freed
Direct 1 1 1 0
0
Static 9 9 14 5
5
RIP 0 0 0 0
0
Default 0 0 0 0
0
Total 10 10 15 5
5
[3Com]
Clear the IPX static route.
<3Com>reset ipx routing-table statistics protocol static
This will erase the specific routing counters information.
Are you sure?[Y/N]y
<3Com>
The displayed statistical information shows that all three items (add, delete, freed)
of static route have changed to 0, and the below Total item has also changed
accordingly.
<3Com>dis ipx routing-table statistics
DLSw Configuration
Commands
bridge-set (in Syntax

synchronous serial bridge-set bridge-set-number
interface view)
undo bridge-set bridge-set-number
View
Parameter
■ bridge-set-number: The bridge group number the synchronous serial port is to
be added into, ranging from 1 to 63.
Description
Using the bridge-set (in Synchronous serial interface system view) command, you
can add the synchronous serial interface encapsulated into SDLC into the bridge
group. Using the undo bridge-set (in synchronous serial interface view) command,
you can delete the interface from the DLSw bridge group.
By default, no synchronous serial port is added into the bridge group.
In order for the SDLC encapsulated synchronous serial port to join the DLSw
forwarding, the SDLC interface is needed to added into a bridge group by using
this command. What is different is that the bridge group on the Ethernet interface
joins the local forwarding, while the bridge group configured on the SDLC only
joins the DLSw forwarding, that is, all the data on it will be forwarded onto the
TCP tunnel. If it is configured in the Ethernet Interface view, the Ethernet interface
of the same group number on the router can forward packets transparently. But
packets cannot be transferred transparently between the serial ports. Each serial
port only exchanges packet with the remote end.
Example
Add the Serial1/0/0 into the DLSw bridge group numbered 20.
[3Com] dlsw bridge-group 20
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] bridge-set 20
bridge-set (in the Syntax

Ethernet Interface view) bridge-set bridge-set-number
undo bridge-set bridge-set-number
View
Parameter
■ bridge-set-number: The bridge group number that the Ethernet interface is
added into, ranging from 1 to 63.
Description
Using the bridge-set (in the Ethernet Interface view) command, you can add the
Ethernet interface into the bridge. Using the undo bridge-set (in the Ethernet
Interface view) command, you can delete the interface from the DLSw bridge
group.
By default, no Ethernet interface is added into the bridge group.
After an Ethernet interface is added into the bridge group, the LLC2 packets on
the Ethernet interface can be sent to the remote peer through the related TCP
tunnel.
Example
Add the Ethernet1/0/0 interface into the DLSw bridge group numbered 20.

[3Com] interface Ethernet1/0/0
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] bridge-set 20
code nrzi Syntax

code nrzi
undo code
View
Synchronous serial interface system view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the code nrzi command, you can configure the NRZI encoding of the
synchronous serial port. Using the undo code nrzi command, you can remove the
NRZI encoding of the synchronous serial port.
By default, the NRZ encoding is configured on the synchronous serial port.
There are two coding schemes, NRZI and NRZ, available on the synchronous serial
port. The NRZ coding scheme is generally used in our router. The serial port coding
scheme of some SNA devices is the NRZI coding scheme. Therefore the coding
scheme of the router needs to be changed according to the encoding of the
connected device.
Example
Configure the NRZI encoding on the Serial1/0/0.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] code nrzi
debugging dlsw Syntax

debugging dlsw { circuit [ correlator ] | tcp [ ip-address ] }
undo debugging dlsw { circuit [ correlator ] | tcp [ ip-address ] }
View
User view
Parameter
■ circuit: Enables the DLSw circuit debugging.
■ correlator: Distinguishes different IDs of the circuits.
■ tcp: Enables the debugging of the DLSw peers.
■ ip-address: IP address.
Description
Using the debugging dlsw command, you can enable the DLSw debugging. Using
the undo debugging dlsw command, you can disable the DLSw debugging.
debugging llc2 Syntax

debugging llc2 circuit [ correlator ]
undo debugging llc2 circuit [ correlator ]
View
User view
Parameter
■ correlator: Distinguishes different IDs of the circuits.
Description
Using the debugging llc2 command, you can enable the LLC2 debugging. Using
the undo debugging llc2 command, you can disable the LLC2 debugging.
debugging sdlc Syntax

debugging sdlc [ all | event | packet ]
undo debugging sdlc { all | event | packet }
View
User view
Parameter
■ all: Enables all debuggings of the SDLC.
■ event: Enables the SDLC event debugging.
■ packet: Enables the SDLC packet debugging.
Description
Using the debugging sdlc command, you can enable the SDLC debugging. Using
the undo debugging sdlc command, you can disable the SDLC debugging.
display dlsw Syntax

bridge-entry display dlsw bridge-entry [ interface-name | interface-type interface-number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display dlsw bridge-entry command, you can view the bridge group
information.
Example
Display the bridge group information.
<3Com> display dlsw bridge-entry
Mac_entry Port group hashIndex
0000.e81c.b6bf Ethernet0/0/0 1 79
display dlsw circuits Syntax

display dlsw circuits [ circuit-id ] [ verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ circuit-id: Displays the virtual circuit number of the specified DLSw.
■ verbose: Displays the detail information of the virtual circuits.
Description
Using the display dlsw circuits command, you can view the DLSw virtual circuits.
The output information of the command helps the user understand the
information regarding DLSw virtual circuits.
Example
Display the general information of the virtual circuits.
<3Com> display dlsw circuits
Correlator Local addr(LSAP) Remote addr(RSAP) State
2ce0005 0020.357b.e065 (4) 0000.1738.6dfd (4) CONNECTED
Syntax description:
Correlator: Distinguish different IDs of the circuits
Local addr(LSAP) Local MAC address, with the “lsap” being the last SAP used
by the local device.
Remote addr(RSAP) Remote MAC address, with the “rsap” being the last SAP
State: State of the links.
Display the detail information of the virtual circuits.
<3Com> display dlsw circuits verbose
Correlator Local addr(LSAP) Remote addr(RSAP) State
2ce0005 0020.357b.e065 (4) 0000.1738.6dfd (4) CONNECTED
Port Ethernet 0/0/0
Direction:ORIGIN
Connection Time: 14:19:49
Flow Control: Transmit CW:40 GT:0 Receive CW:40 GT:0
Info-Frame: Transmit:0 Receive:0 Drop:0
display dlsw Syntax

information display dlsw information [ local ] [ ip-address ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ local: Displays the local exchange capability information.
■ ip-address: Displays the exchange capability information of specified IP address.
Description
Using the display dlsw information command, you can view the DLSw exchange
capability information. The output information of the command facilitates the user
to understand the status of the DLSw virtual circuit and perform fault diagnosis.
Example
Display the general information of exchange capability.
<3Com> display dlsw information
DLSw: Capabilities for peer 10.10.20.1:
Vendor ID (OUI) : '00000c' (3Com)
Version number : 01
Release number : 00
Init Pacing Window : 40
Num of TCP sessions : 01
Mac address exclusive : no
NetBIOS Name exclusive : no
Mac address List : none
NetBIOS Name List : none
Configured IP address : 14.0.0.1
Version string :
Copyright (c) 1997-2002 3Com TECH CO., LTD.
■ Syntax description:
■ Version number: RFC 1795
■ Release number: Release version of RFC 1795
■ Init Pacing Window: Size of the initiated window
■ Num of TCP sessions: Number of TCP sessions
■ Mac address exclusive: Reachable MAC address registered in the router
■ NetBIOS Name exclusive: Reachable NetBIOS address registered in the router
■ Mac address List: Reachable MAC address list
■ NetBIOS Name List: Reachable NetBIOS address
■ Configured IP address: Local IP address
■ Version string: Version number of 3Com’s router operation system
Display the local exchange capability information.
<3Com> display dlsw information local

DLSw: Capabilities for local:
Vendor ID (OUI) : '00e0fc' (3Com)
Version number : 1
Release number : 0
Init Pacing Window : 40
Num of TCP sessions : 1
Mac address exclusive : no
NetBIOS Name exclusive : no
Mac address List : none
NetBIOS Name List : none
Configured IP address : 12.0.0.1
Version string :
Copyright (c) 1997-2002 3Com TECH CO., LTD.
display dlsw remote Syntax

display dlsw remote [ ip-address ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ ip-address: Displays the information of the remote peer with specified IP
address or of all the remote peers.
Description
Using the display dlsw remote command, you can view the information of the
remote peers. The output information helps the user to understand the
connection state between the DLSw and the remote peers.
Example
Display the information of the remote peers.
<3Com> display dlsw remote
Peers: State pkts_rx pkts_tx drops uptime
*TCP 11.0.0.1 DISCONNECT 0 0 0 00:00:00
*TCP 13.0.0.1 DISCONNECT 0 0 0 00:00:00
*TCP 14.0.0.1 CONNECT 1897 1899 0 14:26:22
Syntax description:
*TCP: The * mark indicates the connection can be created on the peer. If there is
no this mark before the TCP, it indicates it is an inactivated backup peer.
■ Peers: The IP address used by PEER.

■ State: The PEER state.
■ pkts_rx: The number of packets received by PEER.
■ pkts_tx: The number of packets sent by PEER.
■ drops: The number of packets dropped by PEER.
■ uptime: The connecting time.
display llc2 Syntax

display llc2 [ circuit correlator ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ correlator: ID used to distinguish different circuits.
Description
The display interface command is used to display statistical information of LLC2.
Example
Display the statistical information of LLC2
<3Com> display llc2 circuit 46465025

llc2 circuit index 46465025
Local MAC 0.20.35.7b.e0.65
Remote MAC 0. 0.84.25.1e.e9
Local Sap 4
Remote Sap 4
Role secondary
State : NORMAL
dlsw bridge-set Syntax

dlsw bridge-set bridge-set-number
undo dlsw bridge-set bridge-set-number
View
System view
Parameter
■ bridge-set-number: ID of bridge group, ranging from 1 to 63, local valid.
Description
Using the dlsw bridge-set command, you can configure the bridge group to
connect DLSw . Using the undo dlsw bridge-set command, you can delete the
bridge.
In order to forward packets of specified bridge group to the remote end through
the TCP connection, a local bridge group needs to be connected with the DLSw by
using this command, that is, packets of the local bridge group can be sent to the
remote end through the TCP tunnel. This command can be used many times to
connect many bridge groups with the DLSw, and make them all capable of joining
the forwarding through the TCP tunnel.
Example
Configure the bridge group connected with the DLSw, with the ID of the bridge
group being 20.
dlsw enable Syntax

dlsw enable
undo dlsw enable
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the dlsw enable command, you can enable the DLSw performance. Using
the undo dlsw enable command, you can suspend the DLSw performance.
By default, the DLSw performance is enabled.
After this command is performed, the system will release all dynamic resources,
but retain the original configuration.
Example
Suspend the DLSw performance.
[3Com] undo dlsw enable
Enable the DLSw performance.
[3Com] dlsw enable
dlsw local Syntax

dlsw local ip-address [ init-window init-window-size ] [ keepalive keepalive-interval
] [ max-frame max-frame-size ] [ max-window max-window-size ] [ permit-dynamic
]
undo dlsw local ip-address [ init-window ] [ keepalive ] [ max-frame ] [
max-window ] [ permit-dynamic ]
View
System view
Parameter
■ ip-address: IP address of the created local peer.
■ init-window-size: Size of the initialized local response window, ranging from 1
to 2000.
■ keepalive-interval: Time interval for sending the “keepalive”, ranging from 0 to
1200 seconds.
■ max-frame-size: Maximum length of the packet, which can be 516, 1470,
1500, 2052, 4472, 8144, 11407, 11454, or 17800 bytes.
■ max-window-size: Size of the maximum local response window, ranging from
1 to 2000.
■ permit-dynamic: Permits unpreconfigured remote router to initiate connections
and dynamically create peers. The remote peer is unnecessarily be configured
on the local end using this parameter, and the local peer waits for the
connection initiated by the remote peer.
Description
Using the dlsw local command, you can create the DLSw local peer. Using the
undo dlsw local command, you can delete the local peer or restore the default
values of the parameters.
The default init-window-size is 40. The default keepalive-interval is 30 seconds.
The default max-frame-size is 1500 bytes. The default max-window-size is 50.
To create the TCP tunnel is the first step for establishing the DLSw connection. In
order to create the TCP tunnel, the DLSw local peer is to be first configured to
specify the local IP address that creates the TCP connection before receiving the
TCP connection request initiated by the remote router. A router can only have one
local peer.
Example
Create the DLSw local peer, with the IP address being 1.1.1.1, the size of the local
response window being 50, time interval for sending the “keepalive” being 40
seconds, both the maximum length of the packet max-frame-size and the size of
the maximum local response window being the default value.
[3Com] dlsw local 1.1.1.1 init-window 50 keepalive 40
dlsw remote Syntax

dlsw remote ip-address [ backup backup-address ] [ priority priority] [ keepalive
keepalive-interval ] [ max-frame max-frame-size ] [ max-queue max-queue-length ]
[ linger minutes ]
display dlsw remote ip-address
View
System view
Parameter
■ ip-address: Specifies the IP address of the remote peer.
■ backup backup-address: the backup IP address of the remote peer.
■ priority priority: Transmission cost, ranging from 1 to 5.
■ keepalive keepalive-interval: Time interval for sending the “keepalive” packet,
ranging from 0 to 1200 seconds.
■ max-frame max-frame-size: Maximum length of the packet, which can be 516,
1470, 1500, 2052, 4472, 8144, 11407, 11454, or 17800 bytes.
■ max-queue max-queue-length: Size of the TCP sending/receiving queue,
■ linger minutes: Linger time of the backup connection after the primary peer
being disconnected, ranging from 0 to 1440 minutes.
Description
Using the dlsw remote command, you can create the DLSw remote peer. Using the
undo dlsw remote command, you can delete the remote peer.
The default priority is 3. The default keepalive-interval is 30 seconds. The default
max-frame-size is 1500 bytes. The default max-queue-length is 200. The default
seconds is 90 seconds. The default minutes are 5 minutes.
After the local peer is configured, the remote peer needs to be configured to
create the TCP tunnel. The router will keep attempting to create the TCP
connection with the remote router. A router can be configured with several
remote peers so as to create the TCP tunnel with several remote routers.
The following deserves special attention on creating the remote backup-address:
1 In order to create the remote backup-address, the ip-address should be the IP
address of the backup peer end, and the backup backup-address should be
the IP address of the remote primary peer with the TCP connection already
being created. In other words, before creating the remote backup peer
connection, the user should ensure that the local end has created the TCP
connection with a remote primary peer. If the peer end backup peer is created
the same time the remote peer being first created, the system will prompt the
following information:
Primary peer ip address does not exist
This prompt indicates that the user should first create a remote primary peer
before creating the backup peer.
2 If the backup link still exists after the TCP connection of the primary link is
interrupted, the TCP link can be retained (use the display dlsw remote
command and a TCP connection can be found still exist) till the backup link
linger minutes is also timeout.
Example
Create the DLSw remote peer, with the IP address being 2.2.2.2, the transmission
cost being 2, the time interval for sending the “keepalive” being 40 seconds, the
maximum length lf-size of the packet being the default value, and the size of the
TCP sending/receiving queue being 300.
[3Com] dlsw remote 2.2.2.2 priority 2 keepalive 40 max-queue 300
dlsw timer Syntax

dlsw timer [ connect seconds ] [ explorer-wait seconds ] [ local-pending seconds ] [
remote-pending seconds ] [ cache seconds ] [ explorer seconds ]
undo dlsw timer
View
System view
Parameter
■ connect seconds: The holding time of a connection, ranging from 1 second to
65535 seconds. The default value is 300 seconds.
■ explorer-wait seconds: The waiting time of local explorer frames, ranging from
1 second to 65535 seconds. The default value is 30 seconds.
■ local-pending seconds: The local pending time, ranging from 1 second to
■ remote-pending seconds: The remote pending time, ranging from 1 second to
■ cache seconds: Address saving time in SNA cache, ranging from 1 second to
■ explorer seconds: The waiting time of remote explorer frames, ranging from 1
second to 65535 seconds. The default value is 30 seconds.
Description
Using the dlsw timer command, you can configure the DLSw timer parameters.
Using the undo dlsw timer command, you can restore the default value of the
DLSw timer parameters.
By configuring the DLSw timer, the various kinds of timers used for the DLSw to
create the virtual circuit can be revised. But the user is suggested not to revise the
DLSw timer parameters randomly.
Example
Configure the DLSw timer parameters, with the connected timeout being 200
seconds, the waiting timeout of the local explorer frame being 15 seconds, the
local waiting timeout being 15 seconds, the remote peer waiting timeout being 25
seconds, the SNA cache address timeout being the default value and the waiting
timeout of the remote explorer frame being the default value.
[3Com] dlsw timer connect 20 explorer-wait 15 local-pending 15
remote-pending 25
idle-mark Syntax
idle-mark
undo idle-mark
View
Parameter
None
Description
Using the idle-mark command, you can configure the idle coding scheme of the
synchronous serial port. Using the undo idle-mark command, you can restore the
default idle coding scheme of the synchronous serial port.
By default, the synchronous serial port adopts the “7E” coding scheme.
3Com series routers encapsulate “7E” in the packets to identify the free time of
the SDLC serial interface, but some SDLC devices adopt full “1” high level instead.
In order to be better compatible to this kind devices, the idle coding scheme of the
router needs to be changed.
Sometimes when connecting with the AS/400, this command needs to be
configured to change the idle coding scheme and accelerate the AS/400 polling
speed.
Example
Configure the idle coding scheme of the synchronous serial port on the Serial1/0/0
as idle-mark.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] idle-mark
link-protocol sdlc Syntax

link-protocol sdlc
View
Parameter
None
Description
Using the link-protocol sdlc command, you can change the link layer
encapsulation protocol of the synchronous serial interface into SDLC.
By default, the encapsulated link layer protocol of the synchronous serial interface
is PPP.
The SDLC is a kind of link layer protocol relative to the SNA, with working principal
similar to that of the HDLC. In order for the DLSw to work normally, the link layer
encapsulation protocol of the synchronous serial interface should be changed into
SDLC.
Note all the IP related commands on the interface should be removed before
encapsulating the SDLC, as the SDLC link protocol cannot be used to carry the IP
protocol, for example, to delete the IP address on the interface, etc.
Example
Configure the encapsulation protocol on the Serial1/0/0 as SDLC.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] link-protocol sdlc
llc2 max-ack Syntax

llc2 max-ack length
llc2 max-ack
View
Parameter
■ length: Length of the LLC2 advanced response window, ranging from 1 to 127.
Description
Using the llc2 max-ack command, you can configure the length of the advance
response window before the LLC2 sending the acknowledgement frame. Using
the undo llc2 max-ack command, you can restore the default length of the
advance response window before the LLC2 sending the acknowledgement frame.
By default, the length of the LLC2 advance response window is 3.
The LLC2 advance response window refers to the maximum receivable information
frames before sending the acknowledgement frame, that is, to send the response
packet in advance on receiving the packet n.
Example
Configure the length of the advanced response window before the LLC2 sends
the acknowledgement frame as 5.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 max-ack 5
llc2 max-send-queue Syntax

llc2 max-send-queue length
undo llc2 max-send-queue
View
Parameter
■ length: The queue length sending the LLC2 packet, ranging from 20 to 200.
Description
Using the llc2 max-send-queue command, you can configure the queue length
sending the LLC2 packet. Using the undo llc2 max-send-queue command, you can
restore the default queue length sending the LLC2 packet.
By default, the queue length sending the LLC2 packet is 100. Example
Example
Configure the queue length sending the LLC2 packet as 30.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 max-send-queue 30
llc2 max-transmission Syntax

llc2 max-transmission retries
undo llc2 max-transmission
View
Parameter
■ retries: LLC2 retransmission times, ranging form 1 to 255.
Description
Using the llc2 max-transmission command, you can configure the retransmission
times of the LLC2. Using the undo llc2 max-transmission command, you can
restore the default retransmission times of the LLC2.
By default, the LLC2 retransmission times are 20 times.
The LLC2 retransmission times refers to the times of resending information frames
before the acknowledgement frame is received from the peer end.
Example
Configure the LLC2 retransmission times as 10 times.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 max-transmission 10
llc2 modulo Syntax

llc2 modulo n
undo llc2 modulo
View
Parameter
■ n: The modulus of the LLC2, with the available values of 8 or 128.
Description
Using the llc2 modulo command, you can configure the modulus of the LLC2.
Using the undo llc2 modulo command, you can restore the default modulus of the
LLC2.
By default, the modulus of the LLC2 is 128.
LLC2, like X25, adopts modulus mode to number information packets, and the
modulus of LLC2 is 8 or 128. Ethernet generally uses modulus 128.
Example
Restore the default modulus of the LLC2.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] undo llc2 modulo
llc2 receive-window Syntax

llc2 receive-window length
undo llc2 receive-window
View
Parameter
■ length: Length of the local response window, ranging from 1 to 127.
Description
Using the llc2 receive-window command, you can configure the maximum packets
that can be sent before the LLC2 receives the acknowledgement frame. Using the
undo llc2 receive-window command, you can restore the default value of the
maximum packets that can be sent before the acknowledgement frame is
received.
By default, the length of the LLC2 local response window is 7.
The LLC2 local response window refers to the maximum packets that can be sent
continuously before the acknowledgement frame is received.
Example
Configure the maximum packets that can be sent before the LLC2 receives the
acknowledgement frame as 10.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 receive-window 10
llc2 timer ack Syntax

llc2 timer ack mseconds
undo llc2 timer ack
View
Parameter
■ mseconds: LLC2 local response time, ranging from 1 to 60000ms.
Description
Using the llc2 timer ack command, you can configure the LLC2 local response
time. Using the undo llc2 timer ack command, you can restore the default value of
the LLC2 local response time.
By default, the LLC2 local response time is 200ms.
The LLC2 local response time refers to the maximum waiting time for the response
from the peer end after an LLC2 data packet is sent.
Example
Configure the LLC2 local response time as 10ms.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 timer ack 10
llc2 timer ack-delay Syntax

llc2 timer ack-delay mseconds
undo llc2 timer ack-delay
View
Parameter
■ mseconds: Local acknowledgement delay time on receiving the information
frames, ranging from 1 to 60000ms.
Description
Using the llc2 timer ack-delay command, you can configure the local
acknowledgement delay time when the LLC2 receives information frames. Using
the undo llc2 timer ack-delay command, you can restore the default value of the
local acknowledgement delay time when the LLC2 receives information frame.
By default, the LLC2 local acknowledgement delay time is 100ms.
The LLC2 local acknowledgement delay time refers to the maximum waiting time
for delayed acknowledgement on receiving an LLC2 data packet.
Example
Configure the local acknowledgement delay time for received information frames
as 200 milliseconds.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 timer ack-delay 200
llc2 timer busy Syntax

llc2 timer busy mseconds
undo llc2 timer busy
View
Parameter
■ mseconds: The LLC2 BUSY time, ranging from 1 to 60000ms.
Description
Using the llc2 timer busy command, you can configure the LLC2 BUSY time. Using
the undo llc2 timer busy command, you can restore the default value of the LLC2
BUSY time.
By default, the LLC2 BUSY time is 300ms.
The LLC2 BUSY time refers to the waiting time before repolling a busy station.
Example
Configure the LLC2 BUSY time as 200ms.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 timer busy 200
llc2 timer poll Syntax

llc2 timer poll mseconds
undo llc2 timer poll
View
Parameter
■ mseconds: LLC2 P/F waiting time, ranging from 1 to 60000ms.
Description
Using the llc2 timer poll command, you can configure the P/F waiting time of the
LLC2. Using the undo llc2 timer poll command, you can restore the default value
of the LLC2 P/F waiting time.
By default, the LLC2 P/F waiting time is 5000ms.
The LLC2 P/F waiting time refers to the time of waiting for the acknowledgement
frame after the frame P is sent.
Example
Configure the LLC2 P/F waiting time as 2000ms.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 timer poll 2000
llc2 timer reject Syntax

llc2 timer reject mseconds
undo llc2 timer reject
View
Parameter
■ mseconds: The LLC2 REJ time, ranging from 1 to 60000ms.
Description
Using the llc2 timer reject command, you can configure the REJ time of the LLC2.
Using the undo llc2 timer reject command, you can restore the default value of the
LLC2 REJ time.
By default, the LLC2 REJ time is 500ms.

The LLC2 REJ time refers to the waiting time for the acknowledgement frame to
come after a deny frame is sent.
Example
Configure the LLC2 REJ time as 2000ms.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 timer reject 2000
reset dlsw bridge-entry Syntax

reset dlsw bridge-entry
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reset dlsw bridge-entry command, you can clear the entry cache
information in the DLSw bridge group.
Example
Clear the entry cache information in the DLSw bridge group.
<3Com> reset dlsw bridge-entry
reset dlsw circuits Syntax

reset dlsw circuits [ circuit-id ]
View
User view
Parameter
■ circuit-id: The virtual circuit ID of DLSw, ranging from 0 to 4294967295.
Description
Using the reset dlsw circuits command, you can clear the DLSw virtual circuit
information.
Example
Clear the virtual circuit information with the virtual circuit number of 100.
<3Com> reset dlsw circuits 100
sdlc controller Syntax

sdlc controller sdlc-address
undo sdlc controller sdlc-address
View
Parameter
■ sdlc-address: The secondary station address of the SDLC.
Description
Using the sdlc controller command, you can configure the secondary station
address of the SDLC. Using the undo sdlc controller command, you can delete the
secondary station address of the SDLC.
By default, the secondary station address of the SDLC is not configured.
The SDLC protocol permits several virtual circuits running on a single SDLC
physical link, with one end connected with the primary station and the other end
connected with the secondary station. In order to distinguish each virtual circuit,
their SDLC addresses need to be designated. Because the SDLC is in unbalanced
mode, a primary device can connects with several secondary devices through the
medium of shared machine or SDLC switch, while the secondary devices cannot
be connected with each other. And there can exist one and only primary device if
any. In this sense, the SDLC devices in the same group can be guaranteed to
communicate with each other normally only if the addresses of the secondary
devices are specified. This command specifies the SDLC address, which is unique
on a physical interface, for the virtual circuit. The configured SDLC address on
synchronous serial interface is virtually the address of the SDLC secondary station.
The SDLC address ranges from 0x01 to 0xFE. The SDLC address of a router is only
valid on one physical interface, that is, the SDLC addresses configured on different
interfaces can be same.
Example
Configure the secondary station address of the SDLC on the Serial1/0/0 as 0x05.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc controller 05
sdlc mac-map local Syntax

sdlc mac-map local mac-address
undo sdlc mac-map local
View
Parameter
■ mac-address: The virtual MAC address of the SDLC.
Description
Using the sdlc mac-map local command, you can configure the virtual MAC
address of the SDLC. Using the undo sdlc mac-map local command, you can
delete the virtual MAC address of the SDLC.
By default, the SDLC has no virtual MAC address.
Example
Configure the virtual MAC address of the SDLC.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc mac-map local 0000-e81c-b6bf
sdlc mac-map remote Syntax

sdlc mac-map remote mac-addr sdlc-addr
undo sdlc mac-map remote mac-addr sdlc-addr
View
Parameter
■ mac-addr: The MAC address of the SDLC peer.
■ sdlc-addr: The SDLC address of the SDLC peer.
Description
Using the sdlc mac-map remote command, you can configure the SDLC peer.
Using the undo sdlc mac-map remote command, you can delete the SDLC peer.
By default, the synchronous serial interface has no peer.
This command is used to specify the MAC address of a peer end for an SDLC
virtual circuit so as to provide the destination MAC address on the transformation
from the SDLC to the LLC2. When configuring the DLSw, an SDLC address should
be configured a related partner (peer). The MAC address of the partner (peer)
should be the MAC address of the remote SNA device (physical addresses of such
devices as the Ethernet and the Token-Ring), or the MAC address of the peer end
compounded by the SDLC.
Example
Configure the SDLC peer.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc mac-map remote 00E0-FC00-0010 0x05
sdlc max-pdu Syntax

sdlc max-pdu n
undo sdlc max-pdu
View
Parameter
■ n: The maximum receivable frame length of the SDLC, ranging from 1 to
17600 bytes.
Description
Using the sdlc max-pdu command, you can configure the maximum receivable
frame length of the SDLC. Using the undo sdlc max-pdu command, you can
restore the default value of the SDLC maximum receivable frame length.
By default, the maximum receivable frame length of the SDLC is of 265 bytes.
The SDLC maximum frame length refers to the bytes of the largest packet that can
be received and sent, excluding the parity bit and the start/stop bit.
The maximum receivable frame length of some PU2.0 devices is of 265 bytes, and
that of IBM AS/400 is generally of 521 bytes. Usually we need to configure it the
same value as the connected SDLC device.
Example
Configure the maximum receivable frame length of the SDLC as 512.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc max-pdu 521
sdlc max-send-queue Syntax

sdlc max-send-queue length
undo sdlc max-send-queue
View
Parameter
■ length: The queue length sending the SDLC packet, ranging from 20 to 255.
Description
Using the sdlc max-send-queue command, you can configure the queue length
sending the SDLC packet. Using the undo sdlc max-send-queue command, you
can restore the default value of the queue length sending the SDLC packet.
By default, the queue length sending the SDLC packet is 50.
Example
Configure the queue length sending the SDLC packet on the Serial1/0/0 as 30.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc max-send-queue 30
sdlc max-transmission Syntax

sdlc max-transmission retries
undo sdlc max-transmission
View
Parameter
■ retries: The SDLC timeout retransmission times, ranging from 1 to 255 times.
Description
Using the sdlc max-transmission command, you can configure the SDLC timeout
retransmission times. Using the undo sdlc max-transmission command, you can
restore the default value of the SDLC timeout retransmission times.
By default, the SDLC timeout retransmission times are 20.
The SDLC timeout retransmission times (N2) refers to the retransmission times
before receiving the acknowledgement packet from the peer end.
Example
Configure the SDLC timeout retransmission times as 30.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc max-transmission 30
sdlc modulo Syntax

sdlc modulo n
undo sdlc modulo
View
Parameter
■ n: SDLC modulus, with available value of 8 or 128.
Description
Using the sdlc modulo command, you can configure the modulus of the SDLC.
Using the undo sdlc modulo command, you can restore the default modulus of
the SDLC.
By default, the SDLC modulus is 8.
SDLC, like X25, adopts modulus mode to number information packets, and the
modulus of SDLC is 8 or 128. Generally modulus 8 is selected.
Example
Restore the default modulus of the SDLC.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] undo sdlc modulo
sdlc sap-map local Syntax

sdlc sap-map local lsap sdlc-addr
undo sdlc sap-map local lsap sdlc-addr
View
Parameter
■ lsap: The virtual SAP address set by the device connected with the local
interface.
■ sdlc-addr: The SDLC address.
Description
Using the sdlc sap-map local command, you can configure the SAP address on
transforming the SDLC into the LLC2. Using the undo sdlc sap-map local
command, you can restore the default value of the LLC2 SAP address.
By default, lsap is 04.
When the SDLC packet is translated into the LLC2 packet, the SAP address is
needed besides the MAC address.
Generally speaking, the SAP address of the SNA protocol is 0x04 or 0x08 or 0x0C.
For related configuration, please see the sdlc sap-map remote command.
Example
Configure the SAP address on translating the SDLC into the LLC2.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc sap-map local 08 05
sdlc sap-map remote Syntax

sdlc sap-map remote dsap sdlc-addr
undo sdlc sap-map remote dsap sdlc-addr
View
Parameter
■ dsap: The SAP address of the DLSw peer device. By default, dsap is 04.
■ sdlc-addr: The SDLC address.
Description
Using the sdlc sap-map remote command, you can configure the remote DLSw
device SAP address when SDLC is translated into LLC2. And using the undo sdlc
sap-map remote command, you can restore the default value.
When the SDLC packet is translated into the LLC2 packet, the SAP address is
needed besides the MAC address.
Generally speaking, the SAP address of the SNA protocol is 0x04 or 0x08 or 0x0C.
For related configuration, please see sdlc sap-map local.
Example
Configure the remote DLSw device SAP address when SDLC is translated into
LLC2.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc sap-map remote 0C 05
sdlc simultaneous Syntax

sdlc simultaneous
undo sdlc simultaneous
View
Parameter
None
Description
Using the sdlc simultaneous command, you can configure the SDLC data to use
the bidirectional transmission mode. Using the undo sdlc simultaneous command,
you can stop the SDLC data to use the bidirectional transmission mode.
By default, the SDLC data are transmitted in bidirectional mode.
This command configures the synchronous serial interface to work in bidirectional

data simultaneous transmission mode. That is, the SDLC primary station can send
data to the secondary station and receive data at the same time.
Example
Configure the SDLC data to use the bidirectional transmission mode.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc simultaneous
sdlc status Syntax

sdlc status { primary | secondary }
undo sdlc status
View
Parameter
■ primary: The primary station of the end, controlling the whole connection
process.
■ secondary: The secondary station of the end, controlled by the primary station.
Description
Using the sdlc role command, you can configure the SDLC role the device acts.
Using the undo sdlc role command, you can restore the default SDLC role.
By default, the device has no role.
The SDLC is a kind of link layer protocol in unbalanced mode. That is, the statuses
of the devices on the two connected ends are unequal: one is primary and the
other is secondary. The primary side, being the primary station, whose role is
primary, plays the dominant role and controls the whole connection process. While
the other side, being the secondary station, whose role is secondary, receives
control passively.
Therefore, the user needs to configure the role for the interface encapsulated with
SDLC protocol. On the SDLC role configuration, the roles should be decided by the
status of the SDLC device connected with the local router. If the SDLC device
connected with the local interface is primary, the local interface is to be set
secondary, and vice versa.
In general, the central IBM mainframe is primary, whereas terminal devices,
including UNIX hosts and ATM, are secondary.
Example
Configure the SDLC device connected with the Serial1/0/0 as primary, and the
local interface as secondary.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc role secondary
sdlc timer ack Syntax

sdlc timer ack mseconds
undo sdlc timer ack
View
Parameter
■ mseconds: The SDLC primary station response waiting time, ranging from 1 to
60000ms.
Description
Using the sdlc timer ack command, you can configure the SDLC primary station
response waiting time (mseconds). Using the undo sdlc timer ack command, you
can restore the default value of the SDLC primary station response waiting time.
By default, the configured SDLC primary station response waiting time is 3000ms.
The primary station response waiting time (mseconds) refers to the waiting time
for the response from the secondary station after the primary station sends
information frames.
Example
Configure the SDLC primary station response waiting time (mseconds) as 2000ms.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc timer ack 2000
sdlc timer lifetime Syntax

sdlc timer lifetime mseconds
undo sdlc timer lifetime
View
Parameter
■ mseconds: The SDLC secondary station response waiting time, ranging from 1
to 60000ms.
Description
Using the sdlc timer lifetime command, you can configure the SDLC secondary
station response waiting time (mseconds). Using the undo sdlc timer lifetime
command, you can restore the default value of the SDLC secondary station
response waiting time.
By default, the SDLC secondary station response waiting time (mseconds) is
500ms.
The secondary station response waiting time (mseconds) refers to the waiting time
for the response from the primary station after the secondary station sends
information frames.
Example
Configure the SDLC secondary station response waiting time (mseconds) as
1000ms.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc timer lifetime 1000
sdlc timer poll Syntax

sdlc timer poll mseconds
undo sdlc timer poll
View
Parameter
■ mseconds: SDLC poll pause timer, ranging from 1 to 10000ms.
Description
Using the sdlc timer poll command, you can configure the SDLC poll pause timer.
Using the undo sdlc timer poll command, you can restore the default value of the
SDLC poll pause timer.
By default, the SDLC poll pause timer is 1000ms.
The SDLC poll pause timer refers to the waiting interval between the two SDLC
nodes polled by the SDLC primary station.
Example
Configure the SDLC poll pause timer as 200ms.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc timer poll 200
sdlc window Syntax

sdlc window length
undo sdlc window
View
Parameter
■ length: Length of the SDLC local response window, ranging from 1 to 7.
Description
Using the sdlc window command, you can configure the length of the SDLC local
response window. Using the undo sdlc window command, you can restore the
default length of the SDLC local response window.
By default, the default length of the SDLC local response window is 7.
The SDLC local response window refers to the maximum packets number that can
be sent continuously without waiting for the response from the peer end.
Example
Configure the length of the SDLC local response window on the Serial1/0/0 as 5.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc window 5
sdlc xid Syntax

sdlc xid sdlc-address xid-number
undo sdlc xid sdlc-address
View
Parameter
■ sdlc-address: The SDLC address of the XID, which should be configured
beforehand.
■ xid-number: An integer with a length of 4 bytes, ranging from 1 to 0xFFFFFFFF.
The first 12 bits are network numbers, and the last 20 bytes are node numbers.
Description
Using the sdlc xid command, you can configure the XID of the SDLC. Using the
undo sdlc xid command, you can delete the XID of the SDLC.
By default, the synchronous serial interface has no XID of the SDLC.
The XID is the ID of a device in the SNA world. Generally speaking, there are two
kinds of devices: PU2.0 and PU2.1. The XID has been automatically configured on
the PU2.1 devices and they can announce their IDs by exchanging the XID. The
PU2.0 devices did not exchange the ID, so they can not get ID automatically.
Therefore, this command needs not to be configured on PU2.1 typed devices,
whereas it is needed to specify an XID for PU2.0 typed devices.
Example
Configure the XID of the SDLC, in which the xid-number is 0x2000.
[3Com3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc xid 05 2000
ROUTING PROTOCOL
6
For the specific examples and parameter explanation of VPN instance, refer to the
“MPLS” module of this manual.
Display Commands of
the Routing Table
display ip routing-table Syntax

display ip routing-table
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ip routing-table command, you can view the routing table
summary.
This command views routing table information in summary form. Each line
represents one route. The contents include destination address/mask length,
protocol, preference, cost, next hop and output interface.
Only current used route, i.e., best route, is displayed via the display ip
routing-table command.
Example
View the summary of current routing table.
<3Com>3Com display ip routing-table
Routing Table: public net
Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
1.1.1.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 1.1.1.1 Interface
serial1/0/0
1.1.1.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
serial2/0/0
ethernet1/0/0
4.4.4.0/24 DIRECT0 0 4.4.4.1 Interface
ethernet2/0/0
534 CHAPTER 6: ROUTING PROTOCOL

127.0.0.0/8 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0. 1 InLoopBack0

acl display ip routing-table acl { acl-number | acl-name } [ verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ acl_number: Number of basic ACL, ranging from 1 to 99.
■ acl-name: Name of basic ACL.
■ verbose: With the parameter, this command displays the verbose information
of both the active and inactive routes that passed filtering rules. Without the
parameter, this command only displays the summary of the active routes that
passed filtering rules.
Description
Using the display ip routing-table acl command, you can view the route filtered
through specified basic access control list (ACL).
The command is used in tracking route policy to display the route that passed the
filtering rule according to the input basic ACL number or name.
The command is only applicable to view the route that passed basic ACL filtering
rules.
Example
View the summary of active routes that are filtered through basic ACL 1.
<3Com> display ip routing-table acl 1
Routes matched by access-list 1:
Summary count: 4
Destination/MaskProtoPreCost NexthopInterface
127.0.0.0/8Direct00127.0.0.1InLoopBack0
169.0.0.0/8Static60 02.1.1.1LoopBack1
169.0.0.0/15Static6002.1.1.1LoopBack1
Display the verbose information of the active and inactive routes
that are filtered through basic ACL1.
<3Com> display ip routing-table acl 1 verbose
Routes matched by access-list 1:
Generate Default: no
+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, = Both* = Next hop in use
Summary count:5
**Destination: 127.0.0.0Mask: 255.0.0.0
Protocol: DirectPreference: 0
*NextHop: 127.0.0.1Interface: 127.0.0.1(InLoopBack0)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Multicast Unicast>
Age: 3:47Metric: 0/0
**Destination: 127.0.0.1Mask: 255. 255. 255. 255
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <NotInstall NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Gateway Multicast
Unicast>
Protocol: StaticPreference: 60
*NextHop: 4.1.1.1
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <Int Hidden Static Unicast>
*NextHop: 2.1.1.1Interface: 2.1.1.1(LoopBack1)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <Int ActiveU Static Unicast>
Vlinkindex: 0

ip_address display ip routing-table ip_address [ mask ] [ longer-match ] [ verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ ip_address: Destination IP address in dotted decimal format.
■ mask: IP address mask, which can be in dotted decimal notation or represented
by an integer in the range of 0 to 32.
■ longer-match: Indicates all route destination addresses are matched in the
natural mask range.
■ verbose: With the verbose parameter, this command displays the verbose
information of both the active and inactive routes. Without the parameter, this
command only displays the summary of active routes.
Description
Using the display ip routing-table ip_address command, you can view the routing
information of the specified destination address.
With different optional parameters, the output of the command is different. The
following is the output description for different forms of this command:
■ display ip routing-table ip_address
If destination address, ip_address, has corresponding routes in natural mask
range, this command will display all subnet routes. Or, only the route best
matching the destination address, ip_address, is displayed. And only the active
matching route is displayed.
■ display ip routing-table ip_address mask,
This command only displays the route fully matching with specified destination
address and mask.
■ display ip routing-table ip_address longer-match
This command displays all route destination addresses matching with
destination addresses in natural mask range.
Example
There is corresponding route in natural mask range. View the summary.
<3Com> display ip routing-table 169.0.0.0
Routing Tables:
Summary count:1
169.0.0.0/16Static6002.1.1.1LoopBack1
There is no corresponding route (only the longest matching route is
displayed) in natural mask range and summary is viewed.
<3Com> display ip routing-table 169.253.0.0
Routing Tables:
Summary count:1
169.0.0.0/8Static6002.1.1.1LoopBack1
There are corresponding routes in the natural mask range. View the
detailed information.
<3Com> display ip routing-table 169.0.0.0 verbose
Routing Tables:
Summary count:2
Vlinkindex: 0
Vlinkindex: 0
There are no corresponding routes in the natural mask range (only
display the longest matching route). View the detailed information.
<3Com> display ip routing-table 169.253.0.0 verbose
Routing Tables:
Summary count:1
Protocol: StaticPreference: -60
*NextHop: 2.1.1.1
Vlinkindex: 0

ip_address1 ip_address2 display ip routing-table ip_address1 mask1 ip_address2 mask2 [ verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ ip_address1, ip_address2: Destination IP address in dotted decimal notation.
ip_address1 and ip_address2 determine one address range together to display
the route in this address range.
■ mask1, mask2: IP address mask, length in dotted decimal notation or integer
form.
information of both the active and inactive routes. Without the parameter, this
command only displays the summary of active routes.
Description
Using the display ip routing-table ip_address1 ip_address2 command, you can
view the routing information in the specified destination address range.
Example
View the routing information of destination addresses ranging from 1.1.1.0 to
2.2.2.0.
<3Com> display ip routing-table 1.1.1.0 24 2.2.2.0 24
Routing tables:
Summary count: 3
serial1/0/0
serial2/0/0

ip-prefix display ip routing-table ip-prefix ip-prefix-name [ verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ ip-prefix-name: Prefix list name.
■ verbose: With the parameter, this command displays the verbose information
of both the active and inactive routes that passed filtering rules. Without the
parameter, this command displays the summary of the active routes that
passed filtering rules.
Description
Using the display ip routing-table ip-prefix command, you can view the route that
passed the filtering rule according to the specified ip prefix list.
If there is no specified prefix list, this command will display the verbose
information of all active and inactive routes with the parameter verbose and it will
display the summary of all active routes without the parameter verbose.
Example
Display the summary of the active route that is filtered through ip prefix list abc2.
<3Com> display ip routing-table ip-prefix abc2
Routes matched by ip-prefix abc2:
Summary count: 4
169.0.0.0/8Static6002.1.1.1LoopBack1
169.0.0.0/15Static6002.1.1.1LoopBack1
Display the verbose information of the active and inactive routes
that are filtered through ip prefix list abc2.
<3Com> display ip routing-table ip-prefix abc2 verbose
Routes matched by ip-prefix abc2:
Summary count:4
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Multicast Unicast>
**Destination: 127.0.0.1Mask: 255. 255. 255. 255
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <NotInstall NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Gateway Multicast
Unicast>
Protocol: StaticPreference:-60
*NextHop: 4.1.1.1
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <Int Hidden Static Unicast>
Vlinkindex: 0
Age: 3:47 Metric: 0/0
Vlinkindex: 0
Age: 3:47 Metric: 0/0

protocol display ip routing-table protocol protocol [ inactive | verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ protocol: Has multiple selectable values:
■ direct: Displays direct connection route information
■ static: Displays static route information.
■ bgp: Displays BGP route information.
■ isis: Displays IS-IS route information.
■ ospf: Displays OSPF route information.
■ ospf-ase: Displays OSPF ASE route information.
■ ospf-nssa: Displays OSPF NSSA route information.
■ rip: Displays RIP route information.
■ inactive: With the parameter, this command displays the inactive route
information. Without the parameter, this command displays the active and
inactive route information.
routing information. Without the parameter, this command displays the route
summary.
Description
Using the display ip routing-table protocol command, you can view the routing
information of specified protocol.
Example
Display all direct connection routes summary.
<3Com> display ip routing-table protocol direct
DIRECT Routing tables:
Summary count: 4
DIRECT Routing tables status:<active>:
Summary count: 3
Destination/MaskProto Pre Cost NexthopInterface:
20.1.1.1/32DIRECT 00127.0.0.1InLoopBack0
DIRECT Routing tables status:<inactive>:
Summary count: 1
Destination/MaskProto PreCostNexthopInterface
210.0.0.1/32DIRECT 0 0127.0.0.1InLoopBack0
Display the static routing table.
<3Com> display ip routing-table protocol static
STATIC Routing tables:
Summary count: 1
STATIC Routing tables status:<active>:
Summary count: 0
STATIC Routing tables status:<inactive>:
Summary count: 1
1.2.3.0/24 STATIC 60 0 1.2.4.5 Ethernet
2/0/0

radix display ip routing-table radix
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ip routing-table radix command, you can view the routing table
information in a tree structure.
Example
View the routing table information in a tree structure.
<3Com> display ip routing-table radix
Radix tree for INET (2) inodes 7 routes 5:
+-32+--{210.0.0.1
+--0+
| | +--8+--{127.0.0.0
| | | +-32+--{127.0.0.1
| +--1+
| +--8+--{20.0.0.0
| +-32+--{20.1.1.1

statistics display ip routing-table statistics
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ip routing-table statistics command, you can view the integrated
The integrated routing information includes total route amount, the route amount
added or deleted by protocol, amount of the routes that are labeled deleted but
not deleted, the active route amount and inactive route amount.
Example
Display the integrated routing information.
<3Com> display ip routing-table statistics
Routing tables:
Protorouteactiveaddeddeletedfreed
BGP 0 0 000
DIRECT5 4 5 00
RIP 0 0 000
STATIC0 0 0 00
IS-IS0 0 0 00
OSPF 0 0 000
O_ASE0 0 0 00
O_NSSA0 0 0 00
Total 5 4 500

verbose display ip routing-table verbose
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ip routing-table verbose command, you can view the verbose
routing table information.
With the verbose parameter, this command displays the verbose routing table
information. The descriptor describing the route state will be displayed first, then
the statistics of the entire routing table will be output and finally the verbose
description of each route will be output.
All current routes, including inactive routes and invalid routes, can be displayed
using the display ip routing-table verbose command.
Example
Display the verbose routing table information.
<3Com> display ip routing-table verbose
Routing Tables:
Destinations: 4 Routes: 4
Holddown: 0 Delete: 9 Hidden: 0
**Destination: 127.0.0.0 Mask: 255.0.0.0
*NextHop: 127.0.0.1 Interface: 127.0.0.1(LO0)
State: <NoAdv Int Active Retain Rej>
Age: 19:31:06 Metric: 0/0
*NextHop: 127.0.0.1 Interface: 127.0.0.1(LO0)
State: <NoAdv Int Active Retain>
Age: 114:03:05 Metric: 0/0
The statistics of the entire routing table is displayed first, then the verbose
description of each route is output. The meanings of route state parameters are
explained in the following table:
Table 1 Description of the output information of the display ip routing-table verbose

command
Main field Description

Holddown Number of currently hold down routes – Holddown refers to a route
advertising policy used by some distance vector (D-V) routing protocols (such
as RIP) in order to avoid expansion of error routes and improve fast and correct
transmission of unreachable routing information. It usually advertises a route
fixedly at an interval no matter what changes have happened to the routes to
the same destination, which have been learned actually. For details, refer to
the specific routing protocol.
Delete Number of routes that have been deleted currently.
Hidden Number of currently hidden routes -- Some routes are not available at present
for some reason (e.g., the interface is Down) but are not expected to be
deleted. They can be hidden for future restoration.

vpn-instance display ip routing-table vpn-instance vpn-instance-name [ ip-address ] [ verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ vpn-instance-name: VPN instance name.
■ ip-address: Destination IP address in dotted decimal format.
■ verbose: With the parameter, the command displays the verbose routing
information. Without the parameter, the command displays the route
summary.
Description
Using the display ip routing-table vpn-instance command, you can view RIP
information associated with vpn instance address family.
Given that both ip-address and verbose are configured in the command, you can
view all routes to the specified IP address in the VPN-instance, including the local
routes as well as the routes learned from the remote.
Example
Display details of the routes to 10.1.1.1 in the VPN-instance vpn1.
<3Com> display ip routing-table vpn-instance vpn1 10.1.1.1 verbose
Routing tables:
+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, = Both * = Next hop in use
Summary count: 2
Protocol: DIRECT Preference: 0
*NextHop: 127.0.0.1 Interface: 127.0.0.1(InLoopBack0)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Gateway Unicast>
Age: 54 Cost: 0/0
Protocol: DIRECT Preference: 0
*NextHop: 10.1.1.1 Interface: 10.1.1.1(LoopBack0)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <Int ActiveU Retain Unicast>
Age: 54 Cost: 0/0
Static Route Configuration Commands 543
Display the summary of the routes to 10.1.1.1 in the VPN-instance vpn1.
<3Com> display ip routing-table vpn-instance vpn1 10.1.1.1

Routing tables: vpn1 Route-Distinguisher: 100:1
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
10.1.1.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 10.1.1.1 LoopBack0
Static Route
Configuration
Commands
delete static-routes all Syntax

delete static-routes all
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the delete static-routes all command, you can cancel all the static routes.
When this command is used to cancel static routes, the user should confirm the
settings before all the configured static routes are canceled.
For the related command, see display ip routing-table and ip route-static.
Example
Delete all the static routes configured on router.
[3Com] delete static-routes all
This will erase all unicast static routes and their configurations,
you must reconfigure all static routes
Are you sure to delete all the static routes?[Y/N]y
ip route-static Syntax
■ ip route-static ip-address { mask | mask-length } { interface-name |
nexthop-address } [ preference preference-value ] [ reject | blackhole ]
■ undo ip route-static ip-address { mask | mask-length } [ interface-name |
nexthop-address ] [ preference preference-value ]
■ ip route-static vpn-instance vpn-instance-name1 vpn-instance-name2 …
ip-address { mask | mask-length } { interface-name | [ vpn-instance
vpn-nexthop-name nexthop-address ] } [ public ] [ preference preference-value ]
[ reject | blackhole ]
■ undo ip route-static vpn-instance vpn-instance-name1 vpn-instance-name2 …
ip-address { mask | mask-length } { interface-name [ vpn-instance
vpn-nexthop-name | nexthop-address ] } [ public ] [ preference preference-value
]
View
System view
Parameter
■ ip-address: Destination IP address, in dotted decimal notation.
■ mask: Mask.
■ mask-length: Mask length. Since "1" s in the 32-bit mask are required to be
consecutive, the mask in dotted decimal notation can be replaced by
mask-length, which is the number of the consecutive "1" s in the mask.
■ interface-name: Specifies the outbound interface name of the static route. The
interfaces of the public network or under other vpn-instances can be taken as
the outbound interface of the static route.
■ vpn-instance-name: Indicates a name of VPN instance. It can take a maximum
of 6 values.
■ vpn-nexthop-name: Specifies the vpn-instance of the static route next hop.
■ nexthop-address: Specifies the next hop IP address (in dotted decimal notation)
of the static route.
■ preference-value: Preference level of the static route in the range from 1 to
255.
■ reject: Indicates an unreachable route.
■ blackhole: Indicates a blackhole route.
Description
Using the ip route-static command, you can configure a static route. Using the
undo ip route-static command, you can cancel the configured static route.
Using the ip route-static vpn-instance command, you can configure a static route.
In the application of multi-role host, you can configure a static route on a private
network to specify the interface of another private network or public network as
its outbound interface. Using the undo ip route-static vpn-instance command, you
can remove the static route configuration.
By default, the system can obtain the sub-net route directly connected with the
router. When configuring a static route, the default preference is 60 if it is not
specified. If it is not specified as reject or blackhole, the route will be reachable by
default.
Precautions when configuring static route:
■ When the destination IP address and the mask are both 0.0.0.0, it is the default
route. If it is failed to detect the routing table, a packet will be forwarded along
the default route.
■ For different configuration of preference level, flexible routing management
policy can be adopted. For example, configure multiple routes to the same
destination. Load sharing can be fulfilled by specifying the same preference for
the routes. Route backup can be realized by specifying different preferences.
■ To configure static route, either transmission interface or next hop address can
be specified, which one is adopted in practice depends on actual condition. For
the interfaces supporting the resolution from network address to link layer
address or point-to-point interface, transmission interface or next hop address
can be specified. But for NBMA interfaces, such as the interface or dialing
interface encapsulated with X.25 or frame-relay, they support
point-to-multi-point. Except IP route is configured, secondary route, i.e. the
map from IP address to link layer address should be established on link layer. In
such condition, transmission interface cannot be specified and the next hop IP
address should be configured when configuring static route.
■ VT interface cannot be configured as outbound interface.
In some conditions (for example, the link layer is encapsulated with PPP),
transmission interface can be specified when opposite address cannot be learned
in router configuration. After specifying transmission interface, the configuration
of this router is unnecessary to be modified as opposite address changes.
For the related command, see display ip routing-table.
Example
Configure the next hop of the default route as 129.102.0.2.
[3Com] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 129.102.0.2
Configure the static route, whose destination address is 100.1.1.1
and whose next-hop address is 1.1.1.2.
[3Com] ip route-static vpn-instance vpn1 100.1.1.1 16 vpn-instance
vpn1 1.1.1.2
RIP Configuration For the specific examples and parameter explanation of VPN instance, refer to
Commands “MPLS” module of this manual.
checkzero Syntax
checkzero
undo checkzero
View
RIP view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the checkzero command, you can check the zero field of RIP-1 packet. Using
the undo checkzero command, you can cancel the check of the zero fields.
By default, RIP-1 performs the zero field check.
According to the protocol (RFC1058) specifications, some fields in RIP-1 packets
must be zero, called zero fields. With the checkzero command, the zero check
operation for RIP-1 packet can be enabled or disabled. During the zero check
operation, if the RIP-1 packet in which the zero fields are not zeros is received, it
will be rejected.
This command is ineffective to RIP-2 since RIP-2 packets have no zero fields.
Example
Configure not to perform zero check for RIP-1 packet.
[3Com-rip] undo checkzero
debugging rip
Syntax
debugging rip { packet | receive | send }
View
User view
Parameter
■ packet: Enables the RIP packets debugging.
■ receive: Enables the RIP receiving packets debugging.
■ send: Enables the RIP sending packets debugging.
Description
Using the debugging rip command, you can enable the RIP packet debugging.
Using the undo debugging rip command, you can disable the RIP packet
debugging.
Users can learn the current information of receiving and sending RIP packets on
each interface by using this command.
Example
Enable the RIP packets debugging.
<3Com> debugging rip packet
default cost Syntax

default cost value
undo default cost
View
RIP view
Parameter
■ value: Default routing cost to be set, ranging from 1 to 16.The default value is
1.
Description
Using the default cost command, you can configure the default routing cost of an
imported route. Using the undo default cost command, you can restore the
default value.
If no specific routing cost is specified when importing other protocol routes with
the import-route command, the importing will be performed with the default
routing cost specified by the default cost command.
For the related command, see import-route.
Example
Set the default routing cost of importing other route protocol routes as 3.
[3Com-rip] default cost 3
display rip Syntax

display rip
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display rip command, you can view the current RIP running state and its
Example
Display the current running state and configuration information of the RIP
protocol.
<3Com> display rip
RIP is turned on
public net VPN-Instance
Checkzero is on Default cost : 1
Summary is on Preference : 100
Period update timer : 30
Timeout timer : 180
Garbage-collection timer : 120
No peer router
Table 2 Description of the output information of the display rip command
Item Description
RIP is turned on RIP is enabled.
public net VPN-Instance Public networks in the VPN-instance
Checkzero is on Enables checkzero of RIP.
Default cost : 1 The default cost of the imported route is 1.
Summary is on Enables route summary of RIP.
Preference : 100 The preference of RIP is 100.
Period update timer : 30 Setting on the three timers of RIP
Timeout timer : 180
Garbage-collection timer : 120
No peer router RIP has no peer router.
display rip vpn-instance Syntax

display rip vpn-instance vpn-instance-name
View
Any view
Parameter
■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: VPN instance name.
Description
Using the display rip vpn-instance command, you can view the related
configuration of VPN instance of RIP.
Example
None
filter-policy export Syntax

filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ routing-protocol ]
undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ routing-protocol
]
View
RIP view
Parameter
■ acl-number: Access control list number used for filtering the destination
addresses of the routing information.
■ ip-prefix-name: Name of address prefix list used for filtering the destination
■ routing-protocol: Routing protocol whose routing information is to be filtered,
including direct, isis, bgp, ospf, ospf-ase, ospf-nssa, and static at present.
Description
Using the filter-policy export command, you can configure to filter the advertised
routing information by RIP. Using the undo filter-policy export command, you can
configure not to filter the advertised routing information.
By default, RIP does not filter the advertised routing information.
For the related commands, see acl, filter-policy import, and ip ip-prefix.
Example
Filter the advertised route information according to acl 3.
[3Com-rip] filter-policy 3 export
filter-policy import Syntax

filter-policy gateway ip-prefix-name import
undo filter-policy gateway ip-prefix-name import
filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name [ gateway ip-prefix-name ] }
import
undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name [ gateway ip-prefix-name ]
} import
View
RIP view
Parameter
■ gateway ip-prefix-name: Name of address prefix list used for filtering the
addresses of the neighboring routers advertising the routing information.
Description
Using the filter-policy gateway command, you can configure to filter the received
routing information distributed from the specified address. Using the undo
filter-policy gateway command, you can configure not to filter the received routing
information distributed from the specified address.
Using the filter-policy import command, you can configure the filtering to the
received global routing information. Using the undo filter-policy import command,
you can disable filtering to the received global routing information
By default, RIP does not filter the received routing information.
The range of the routes received by RIP can be controlled by specifying the access
control list and the address prefix list.
For the related command, see acl, filter-policy export, and ip ip-prefix.
Example
Configure the filtering of the global routing information according to acl 3.
[3Com-rip] filter-policy 3 import
host-route Syntax
host-route
undo host-route
View
RIP view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the host-route command, you can control the RIP to accept the host route.
Using the undo host-route command, you can reject the host route.
By default, router accepts the host route.
In some special cases, RIP receives a great number of host routes in the same
network segment. These routes cannot help the path searching much but occupy
a lot of resources. In this case, the undo host-route command can be used to
reject host routes.
Example
Configure RIP to reject a host route.
[3Com-rip] undo host-route
import-route Syntax
import-route protocol [ cost value ] [ route-policy route-policy-name ]
undo import-route protocol
View
RIP view
Parameter
■ protocol: Specifies the source routing protocol to be imported by RIP. At
present, RIP can import the following routes: direct, ospf, ospf-ase, ospf-nssa,
static, and bgp and isis.
■ value: Cost value of the route to be imported, ranging from 1 to 16..
■ route-policy route-policy-name: Configured to import the route matching the
condition of the specified Route-policy only.
Description
Using the import-route command, you can import the routes of other protocols
into RIP. Using the undo import-route command, you can cancel the routes
imported from other protocols.
By default, RIP does not import any other routes.
The import-route command is used to import the route of another protocol by
using a certain value. RIP regards the imported route as its own route and
transmits it with the specified value. This command can greatly enhance the RIP
capability of obtaining routes, thus increasing the RIP performance.
If the cost value is not specified, routes will be imported according to the default
cost. It is in the range of 1 to 16. If it is larger than or equal to 16, it indicates an
unreachable route and the transmission will be stopped in 120 seconds.
For the related command, see default cost.
Example
Import a static route with cost being 4.
[3Com-rip] import-route static cost 4
Set the default cost and import an OSPF route with the default cost.
[3Com-rip] default cost 3
[3Com-rip] import-route ospf
ipv4-family vpn-instance Syntax

ipv4-family [ unicast ] vpn-instance vpn-instance-name
undo ipv4-family [ unicast ] vpn-instance vpn-instance-name
View
RIP view
Parameter
■ unicast: Unicast address.
■ vpn-instance-name: Associates the specified VPN instance with the IPv4
address family. Enter the MBGP address family view of RIP with this parameter.
Description
Using the ipv4-family command, you can enter MBGP address family view of RIP.
Using the undo ipv4-family command, you can cancel all configurations in
extended address family view.
ipv4-family command is used to enter the MBGP address family view. In this view,
parameters related to address family can be configured for RIP.
undo ipv4-family command is only used in RIP view.
The ipv4-family vpn-instance command is used for BGP/MPLS VPN. For related
description, refer to “MPLS VPN“ section in module “MPLS” chapter of this
manual.
For the related command, see display rip vpn-instance.
Example
None
network Syntax
network network-address
undo network network-address
View
RIP view
Parameter
network-address: Address of the network enabled/disabled. It can be the IP
network address of any interface.
Description
Using the network command, you can enable Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
on the interface. Using the undo network command, you can cancel the RIP on
the interface.
By default, RIP is disabled on any interface.
After enabling a RIP routing process, it is disabled on any interface by default. RIP
at a certain interface must be enabled with the network command.
The undo network command is similar to the interface undo rip work command in
terms of function. But they are not identical. Their similarity is that the interface
using either command will not receive/transmit RIP routes. The difference between
them is that, in the case of undo rip work , other interfaces will still forward the
routes of the interface using the undo rip work command. In the case of undo
network, it is like to perform undo rip work command on the interface, and the
routes of corresponding interfaces cannot be transmitted by RIP. Therefore, the
packets transmitted to this interface cannot be forwarded.
When the network command is used on an address, the effect is that the interface
on the network segment at this address is enabled. For example, the results of
viewing the network 129.102.1.1 with both the display current-configuration
command and the display rip command are shown as the network 129.102.0.0.
For the related command, see rip work.
Example
Enable the RIP on the interface with the network address as 129.102.0.0.
[3Com-rip] network 129.102.0.0
peer Syntax
peer ip-address
undo peer ip-address
View
RIP view
Parameter
■ ip-address: IP address of the peer router with which information will be
exchanged in unicast mode, represented in the format of dotted decimal.
Description
Using the peer command, you can configure the destination address of the peer to
which information is sent in unicast mode. Using the undo peer command, you
can cancel the set destination address.
By default, do not send RIP packet to any destination.
This command specifies the sending destination address to fit some non-broadcast
networks. Usually, it is not recommended to use this command.
Example
Specify the sending destination address 202.38.165.1.
[3Com-rip] peer 202.38.165.1
preference Syntax
preference value
undo preference
View
RIP view
Parameter
value: Preference level, ranging from 1 to 255. By default, the value is 100.
Description
Using the preference command, you can configure the route preference of RIP.
Using the undo preference command, you can restore the default preference.
Every routing protocol has its own preference. Its default value is determined by
the specific routing policy. The preference will finally determine the routing
algorithm to obtain the optimal route in the IP routing table. This command can
be used to modify the RIP preference manually.
Example
Specify the RIP preference as 20.
[3Com-rip] preference 20
reset Syntax
reset
View
RIP view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reset command, you can reset the system parameters of RIP.
When you need to re-configure parameters of RIP, this command can be used to
Example
Reset the RIP system.
[3Com-rip] reset
rip Syntax
rip
undo rip
View
system view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the rip command, you can enable the RIP and enter the RIP view. Using the
undo rip command, you can cancel RIP.
By default, the system does not run RIP.
To enter the RIP view to configure various RIP global parameters, RIP should be
enabled first. Whereas the configuration of parameters related to the interfaces is
not restricted by enabling/disabling RIP.
The interface parameters configured previously would be invalid when RIP is disabled.
Example
Enable the RIP and enter the RIP view.
[3Com] rip
[3Com-rip]
rip authentication-mode Syntax

rip authentication-mode { { simple password } | { md5 { key-string key-string |
key-id key-id } } }
undo rip authentication-mode
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ simple: Simple text authentication mode.
■ password: Simple text authentication key, in character string format with 1 to
16 characters in simple text mode or 24 characters in cipher text mode.
■ md5: MD5 cipher text authentication mode.
■ key-string: MD5 cipher text authentication key, in character string format with
1 to 16 characters in simple text mode or 24 characters in cipher text mode.
■ key-id: MD5 cipher text authentication identifier, ranging from 1 to 255.
Description
Using the rip authentication-mode command, you can configure RIP-2
authentication mode and corresponding parameters. Using the undo rip
authentication-mode command, you can cancel the RIP-2 authentication.
RIP-1 does not support authentication. There are two RIP authentication modes:
simple text authentication and MD5 cipher text authentication. When MD5 cipher
text authentication mode is used, there are two types of packet formats. One of
them is described in RFC 1723, which was brought forward earlier. The other
format is the one described specially in RFC 2082. The router supports both of the
packet formats and the user can select either of them on demands.
For the related command, see rip version.
Example
Specify Interface serial1/0/0 to use the simple text authentication with the key as
aaa.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] rip version 2
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] rip authentication-mode simple aaa
rip authentication-mode Syntax

rip authentication-mode md5 type { usual | nonstandard }
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ usual: Specifies the MD5 cipher text authentication packet to use the general
packet format (RFC1723 standard format).
■ nonstandard: Specifies the MD5 cipher text authentication packet to use a
nonstandard packet format described in RFC2082.
Description
Using the rip authentication-mode md5 type command, you can configure md5
type of RIP-2 authentication
By default, use nonstandard type.
RIP-2 packets can be in the following two formats when MD5 authentication is
adopted: The earlier raised format is described in RFC1723, which is adopted by
Gated. Another format fits into RFC2082 standard, which is adopted by part of
the routers in the industry.
For the related commands, see rip authentication-mode and rip version.
Example
Set MD5 authentication at Serial0, and the packet type is "nonstandard".
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] rip version 2
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] rip authentication-mode md5 type nonstandard
rip input Syntax

rip input
undo rip input
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the rip input command, you can allow an interface to receive RIP packets.
Using the undo rip input command, you can cancel an interface to receive RIP
packets.
By default, RIP packets at all interfaces (except loopback interface) can be
received..
This command is used in cooperation with the other two commands: rip output
and rip work. Functionally, rip work is equivalent to rip input & rip output. The
latter two control the receipt and the transmission of RIP packets respectively on
an interface. The former command equals the functional combination of the latter
two commands.
For the related command, see rip output and rip work.
Example
Specify the interface serial1/0/0 not to receive RIP packets.
[3Com-serial1/0/0] undo rip input
rip metricin Syntax

rip metricin value
undo rip metricin
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ value: Additional route metric added when receiving a packet, ranging from 0
to 16. By default, the value is 1.
Description
Using the rip metricin command, you can configure the additional route metric
added to the route when an interface receives RIP packets. Using the undo rip
metricin command, you can restore the default value of this additional route
metric.
This command is valid for the routes distributed by the local network and other
routes imported by other routes. This command is invalid for the routes imported
by the local router.
For the related command, see rip metricout.
Example
Specify the additional route metric to 2 when the interface serial1/0/0 receives RIP
packets.
[3Com-serial1/0/0] rip metricin 2
rip metricout Syntax

rip metricout value
undo rip metricout
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ value: Additional route metric added when transmitting a packet, ranging from
1 to 16. By default, the value is 1.
Description
Using the rip metricout command, you can configure the additional route metric
to the route when an interface transmits RIP packets. Using the undo rip metricout
command, you can restore the default value of this additional route metric.
This command is valid for the routes distributed by the local network and other
routes imported by other routes. This command is invalid for the routes imported
by the local router.
For the related command, see rip metricin.
Example
Set the additional route metric to 2 when the interface serial1/0/0 transmits RIP
packets.
[3Com-serial1/0/0] rip metricout 2
rip output Syntax

rip output
undo rip output
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the rip output command, you can configure an interface to transmit RIP
packets to the external. Using the undo rip output command, you can cancel an
interface to transmit RIP packets to the external.
By default, RIP packets at all interfaces (except loopback interface) can be
transmitted.
This command is used in cooperation with the other two commands: rip input and
rip work. Functionally, rip work is equivalent to rip input & rip output. The latter
two control the receipt and the transmission of RIP packets respectively on an
interface. The former command equals the functional combination of the latter
two commands.
For the related command, see rip input and rip work.
Example
Disable the interface serial1/0/0 to transmit RIP packets.
[3Com-serial1/0/0] undo rip output
rip split-horizon Syntax

rip split-horizon
undo rip split-horizon
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the rip split-horizon command, you can configure an interface to use split
horizon when transmitting RIP packets. Using the undo rip split-horizon
command, you can configure an interface not to use split horizon when
transmitting RIP packets.
By default, an interface is enabled to use split horizon when transmitting RIP
packets.
Normally, split horizon is necessary for reducing route loop. Only in some special
cases, split horizon should be disabled to ensure the correct execution of
protocols.
Example
Specify the interface serial1/0/0 not to use split horizon when processing RIP
packets.
[3Com-serial1/0/0] undo rip split-horizon
rip version Syntax

rip version { 1| { 2 [ broadcast | multicast ] } }
undo rip version
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ 1: Interface version is RIP-1.
■ 2: Interface version is RIP-2. By default, multicast is used.
■ broadcast: Transmission mode of RIP-2 packet is broadcast.
■ multicast: Transmission mode of RIP-2 packet is multicast.
Description
Using the rip version command, you can configure the version of RIP packets on
an interface. Using the undo rip version command, you can restore the default
value of RIP packet version on the interface.
By default, the interface RIP version is RIP-1.
RIP-2 has 2 transmission modes: broadcast and multicast. Multicast is the default
mode. The multicast address in RIP-2 is 224.0.0.9. One of the advantages of
multicast mode is that the hosts that do not run RIP in this network will not receive
the broadcast packets. Additionally, hosts running RIP-1 will be prevented from
receiving and processing the RIP-2 routes with subnet masks.
When the interface specifies the use of RIP-1, only RIP-1 and RIP-2 broadcast
packets will be received. In this case, RIP-2 multicast packets will be rejected.
When the interface is specified to use RIP-2 multicast, only RIP-2 multicast packets
and RIP-2 broadcast packets will be received. In this case, RIP-1 packets will be
rejected.
Example
Configure the interface serial1/0/0 as RIP-2 broadcast mode.
[3Com-serial1/0/0] rip version 2 broadcast
rip work Syntax

rip work
undo rip work
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the rip work command, you can enable the running of RIP on an interface.
Using the undo rip work command, you can disable the running of RIP on an
interface.
By default, RIP is run on an interface.
This command is used in cooperation with rip input, rip output and network
commands.
For the related commands, see network, rip input, and rip output.
Example
Disable the interface serial1/0/0 to run the RIP.
[3Com-serial1/0/0] undo rip work
summary Syntax
summary
undo summary
View
RIP view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the summary command, you can enable RIP-2 automatic route
summarization. Using the undo summary command, you can disable RIP-2
automatic route summarization.
By default, RIP-2 route summarization is enabled.
Route aggregation can be performed to reduce the routing traffic on the network
as well as to reduce the size of the routing table. If RIP-2 is used, route
summarization function can be disabled with the undo summary command, when
it is necessary to broadcast the subnet route.
RIP-1 does not support subnet mask. Forwarding subnet route may cause
ambiguity. Therefore, RIP-1 uses route summarization all the time. The undo
summary command is invalid for RIP-1.
For the related command, see rip version.
Example
Set RIP version on the interface serial1/0/0 as RIP-2 and disable the route
summarization function.

[3Com-serial1/0/0] rip version 2
[3Com-serial1/0/0] quit
[3Com] rip
[3Com-rip] undo summary
timers Syntax
timers { update update-timer-length | timeout timeout-timer-length } *
undo timers { update | timeout } *
View
RIP view
Parameters
■ update-timer-length: Period update value, measured in seconds ranging from 1
to 3600. The default value is 30 seconds.
■ timeout-timer-length: Timeout value, measured in seconds ranging from 1 to
3600. The default value is 180 seconds.
Description
Using the timers command, you can modify value for the three timers, Period
update, Timeout and Garbage-collection, of RIP. Using the undo timers command,
The default values of timer Period update, Timeout and Garbage-collection are
respectively 30s, 180s and 120s.
Usually, the timing length of timer Garbage-collection is fixedly 3 times longer
than that of timer Period update. However, in practice, an unreachable route will
not be completely deleted until the fourth update packet sent from the same
neighbor is received. So the actual timing length of timer Garbage-collection is as
3 to 4 times as that of timer Period update. Additionally, the modification on timer
Period update will affect timer Garbage-collection.
The modified value of RIP timers will take effect immediately.
For the related command, see display rip.
Example
Set timer Period update to 10 seconds and timer Timeout to 30 seconds.
[3Com] rip
[3Com-rip] timers update 10 timeout 30
OSPF Configuration
Commands
abr-summary Syntax
abr-summary ip-address mask [ advertise | not-advertise ]
undo abr-summary ip-address mask
View
OSPF area view
Parameter
■ ip-address: Network segment address.
■ mask: Network mask.
■ Advertise: Advertises only the summarized route.
■ Notadvertise: Suppresses the advertisement of the routes in the matched
range.
Description
Using the abr-summary command, you can configure the route aggregation on
the area border router (ABR). Using the undo abr-summary command, you can
cancel the function of route aggregation on the area border router.
By default, the area border router doesn’t aggregate routes.
This command is applicable only to the ABR and is used for the route aggregation
in an area. The ABR only transmits an aggregated route to other areas. Route
aggregation refers to that the routing information is processed in the ABR and for
each network segment configured with route aggregation, there is only one route
transmitted to other areas. An area can configure multiple aggregation network
segments. Thus OSPF can aggregate various network segments together.
Example
Aggregate the routes in the two network segments, 36.42.10.0 and 36.42.110.0,
of OSPF area 1 into one route 36.42.0.0 and transmit it to other areas.
[3Com-ospf-1] area 1
[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] network 36.42.10.0 0.0.0.255
[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] abr-summary 36.42.0.0 255.255.0.0
area Syntax
area area-id
undo area area-id
View
OSPF view, OSPF area view
Parameter
■ area-id: ID of the OSPF area, which can be a decimal integer (ranging from 0 to
4294967295) or in IP address format.
Description
Using the area command, you can enter OSPF area view. Using the undo area
command, you can cancel the designated area.
Example
Enter area 0 view.
[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0]
asbr-summary Syntax
asbr-summary ip-address mask [ not-advertise | tag value ]
undo asbr-summary ip-address mask [ not-advertise | tag value ]
View
OSPF view
Parameter
■ ip-address: Matched IP address in dotted decimal notation.
■ mask: IP address mask in dotted decimal notation.
■ not-advertise: Not advertises routes matching the specified IP address and
mask. Aggregated route will be advertised without this parameter.
■ tag-value: Control advertisement of routes via Route-policy. It is in the range
from 0 to 4294967295. If it is not specified, it is 1 by default.
Description
Using the asbr-summary command, you can configure summarization of imported
routes by OSPF. Using the undo asbr-summary command, you can cancel the
summarization.
By default, summarization of imported routes is disabled.
After the summarization of imported routes is configured, if the local router is an
autonomous system border router (ASBR), this command summarizes the
imported Type-5 LSAs in the summary address range. When NSSA is configured,
this command will also summarize the imported Type-7 LSAs in the summary
address range.
If the local router acts as both an ABR and a switch router in the NSSA, this
command summarizes Type-5 LSAs transformed from Type-7 LSAs. If the router is
not the router in the NSSA, the summarization is disabled.
For the related command, see display ospf asbr-summary.
Example
Set summarization of 3Com imported routes.
[3Com-ospf-1] asbr-summary 10.2.0.0 255.255.0.0 not-advertise
authentication-mode Syntax
authentication-mode [ simple | md5 ]
undo authentication-mode
View
OSPF area view
Parameter
■ simple: Simple text authentication mode.
■ md5: MD5 cipher text authentication mode.
Description
Using the authentication-mode command, you can configure one area of OSPF to
support the authentication attribute. Using the undo authentication-mode
command, you can cancel the authentication attribute of this area.
By default, an area does not support authentication attribute.
All the routers in one area must use the same authentication mode (no
authentication, supporting simple text authentication or MD5 cipher text
authentication). If the mode of supporting authentication is configured, all routers
on the same segment must use the same authentication key. To configure a simple
text authentication key, use the ospf authentication-mode simple command. And,
use the ospf authentication-mode md5 command to configure the MD5 cipher
text authentication key if the area is configured to support MD5 cipher text
authentication mode.
For the related command, see ospf authentication-mode.
Example
Enter area 0 view.
Specify the OSPF area 0 to support MD5 cipher text authentication.
[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] authentication-mode md5
debugging ospf Syntax

debugging ospf [ process-id ] { event | { packet [ ack | dd | hello | request | update ]
} | lsa-generate | spf | te }
undo debugging ospf [ process-id ] { event | { packet [ ack | dd | hello | request |
update ] } | lsa-generate | spf | te }
View
User view
Parameter
■ process-id: OSPF process number. If no process number is specified, all the
process debugging is enabled or disabled.
■ event: Enables OSPF event information debugging.
■ packet: Enables OSPF packet information debugging. There are five sorts of
packets in OSPF as follows:
■ ack: LSAck packet.
■ dd: Database Description packet.
■ hello: Hello message.
■ request: Link State Request packet.
■ update: Link State Update packet.
■ Lsa-generate: Enables OSPF LSA packet information debugging.
■ spf: Enables the debugging of the calculation of the OSPF shortest-path tree.
■ te: Enables the debugging of OSPF TE.
Description
Using the debugging ospf command, you can enable OSPF debugging. Using the
undo debugging ospf command, you can disable the function.
In OSPF multi-process, using debugging command, you can enable the debugging
of all the process simultaneously or one of the processes only.
If no process number is specified in the debugging command, the command is
valid to all the processes. And it keeps the state during the router running period
no matter OSPF process exits or not. In this way, the execution of this command
will enable/disable each enabled OSPF debugging. At the same time, the
debugging specified by this command will be enabled automatically when new
OSPF is enabled.
If there is a specified process number in the debugging command, only the
specified process is debugged. The configuration command is invalid if OSPF is not
enabled. And the debugging state will not be kept after exiting the process, either.
For the related command, see display debugging ospf.
Example
Enable the information debugging of OSPF packets.
<3Com> debugging ospf packet
default cost Syntax

default cost value
undo default cost
View
OSPF view
Parameter
■ value: Default routing cost of external route imported by OSPF, ranging from 0
to 16777214. By default, its value is 1.
Description
Using the default cost command, you can configure the default cost for OSPF to
import external routes. Using the undo default cost command, you can restore the
default value of the default routing cost configured for OSPF to import external
routes.
Since OSPF can import external routing information and propagate it to the entire
autonomous system, it is necessary to specify the default routing cost for the
protocol to import external routes.
If multiple OSPFs are enabled, the command is valid to this process only.
Example
Specify the default routing cost for OSPF to import external routes as 10.
[3Com-ospf-1] default cost 10
default interval Syntax

default interval seconds
undo default interval
View
OSPF view
Parameter
■ seconds: Default interval for importing external routes. Its unit is second and
the value ranges from 1 to 2147483647. By default, the interval for OSPF to
import external routes is 1 second.
Description
Using the default interval command, you can configure the default interval for
OSPF to import external routes. Using the undo default interval command, you can
restore the default value of the default interval of importing external routes.
Because OSPF can import the external routing information and broadcast it to the
entire autonomous system, it is necessary to specify the default interval for the
protocol to import external routes.
Example
Specify the default interval for OSPF to import external routes as 10 seconds.
[3Com-ospf-1] default interval 10
default limit Syntax

default limit routes
undo default limit
View
OSPF view
Parameter
■ routes: Default value to the imported external routes in a unit time, ranging
from 200 to 2147483647. By default, the value is 1000.
Description
Using the default limit command, you can configure default value of maximum
number of imported routes. Using the undo default limit command, you can
restore the default value.
OSPF can import external route information and broadcast them to the whole
autonomous system, so it is necessary to regulate the default value of external
route information imported in one process.
For the related command, see default interval.
Example
Specify the default value of OSPF importing external routes as 200.
[3Com-ospf-1] default limit 200
default tag Syntax

default tag tag
undo default tag
View
OSPF view
Parameter
■ tag: Default tag, ranging from 0 to 4294967295.
Description
Using the default tag command, you can configure the default tag of OSPF when
it redistributes an external route. Using the undo default tag command, you can
restore the default tag of OSPF when it redistributes the external route.
When OSPF redistributes a route found by other routing protocols in the router
and uses it as the external routing information of its own autonomous system,
some additional parameters are required, including the default cost and the
default tag of the route.
For the related command, see default type.
Example
Set the default tag of OSPF imported external route of the autonomous system as
10.
[3Com-ospf-1] default tag 10
default type Syntax

default type { 1 | 2 }
undo default type
View
OSPF view
Parameter
■ type 1: External routes of type 1.
■ type 2: External routes of type 2.
Description
Using the default type command, you can configure the default type when OSPF
redistributes external routes. Using the undo default type command, you can
restore the default type when OSPF redistributes external routes.
By default, the external routes of type 2 are imported.
OSPF specifies the two types of external routing information. The command
described in this section can be used to specify the default type when external
routes are imported.
For the related command, see default tag.
Example
Specify the default type as type 1 when OSPF imports an external route.
[3Com-ospf-1] default type 1
default-cost Syntax
default-cost value
undo default-cost
View
OSPF area view
Parameter
■ value: Specifies the cost value of the default route transmitted by OSPF to the
STUB or NSSA area, ranging from 0 to 16777214. The default value is 1.
Description
Using the default-cost command, you can configure the cost of the default route
transmitted by OSPF to the STUB or NSSA area. Using the undo default-cost
command, you can restore the cost of the default route transmitted by OSPF to
the STUB or NSSA area to the default value.
This command is applicable for the border routers connected to STUB or NSSA
area.
The stub and default-cost commands are necessary in configuring STUB area. All
the routers connected to STUB area must use stub command to configure the stub
attribute to this area. Using the default-cost command, you can specify the cost of
the default route transmitted by ABR to STUB or NSSA area.
This command is only valid for this process if multiple OSPF processes are enabled.
For the related commands, see stub and nssa.
Example
Set the area 1 as the STUB area and the cost of the default route transmitted to
this STUB area to 60.
[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] stub
[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] default-cost 60
default-route-advertise Syntax
default-route-advertise [ always ] [ cost cost-value ] [ type type-value ] [
route-policy route-policy-name ]
undo default-route-advertise [ always ] [ cost ] [ type ] [ route-policy ]
View
OSPF view
Parameter
■ always: Only available for the ASBR. If the parameter is selected, a default route
which is advertised via LSAs will be generated no matter whether there is a
default route in the routing table. For the ASBR in an general area, the default
route is advertised via Type-5 LSA, while in NSSA, the default route is advertised
via Type-7 LSA.
■ cost-value: Cost value of this LSA. The cost-value ranges from 0 to 16777214.
The default value is 1.
■ type-value: Cost type of this LSA. It ranges from 1 to 2. The default value is 2.
■ route-policy-name: If the default route matches the route-policy specified by
route-policy-name, route-policy will affect the value in LSA. The length of
route-policy-name parameter ranges from 1 to 19 character.
Description
Using the default-route-advertise command, you can make the system generate a
default route to OSPF area. Using the undo default-route-advertise command, you
can cancel the generating of default route.
By default, OSPF does not generate default route.
Using the default-route-advertise command at ABR, you can generate a default
route which is advertised via the Type-5 LSA or Type-7 LSA no matter whether
there is a default route in the routing table.
An OSPF router after the default-route-advertise command is executed will
become an ASBR, as is similar to executing the import-route command on an OSPF
router. But you cannot import the default route into the OSPF area with the
import-route command.
In addition, the default-route-advertise command is not available for the Stub
area. For the ABR or ASBR in NSSA, the default-route-advertise command is
equivalent to the nssa default-route-advertise command in terms of effect.
This command is valid for the current process only if multiple OSPF processes are
enabled.
For the related commands, see import-route and nssa.
Example
If local route has default route, the LSA of default route will be generated,
otherwise it won’t be generated.
[3Com-ospf-1] default-route-advertise
The LSA of default route will be generated and advertised to OSPF
route area even the local router has no default route.
[3Com-ospf-1] default-route-advertise always
display debugging ospf Syntax

display debugging ospf
View
Any view
Description
Using the display debugging ospf command, you can view the global OSPF
debugging state and each process debugging state.
For the related command, see debugging ospf.
Example
View the global OSPF debugging state and each process debugging state.
<3Com> display debugging ospf

OSPF global debugging state:
OSPF SPF debugging is on
OSPF LSA debugging is on
OSPF process 100 debugging state:

OSPF process 200 debugging state:
OSPF LSA debugging is on
display ospf abr-asbr Syntax

display ospf abr-asbr
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ospf abr-asbr command, you can view the information about the
Area Border Router (ABR) and Autonomous System Border Router (ASBR) of OSPF.
Example
Display the information of the OSPF ABR and ASBR.
<3Com> display ospf abr-asbr
Routing Table to ABR and ASBR
Destination Area Cost Type Nexthop
Interface
Intra 1.2.3.9 0.0.0.0 1 ASBR 1.2.3.9
Ethernet2/0/0
display ospf Syntax

asbr-summary display ospf asbr-summary [ ip-address mask ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ ip-address: Matched IP address, in dotted decimal notation.
■ mask: IP address mask in dotted decimal notation.
Description
Using the display ospf asbr-summary command, you can view the summary
information of OSPF imported routes.
If the parameters are not configured, the summary information of all imported
routes will be viewed.
For the related command, see asbr-summary.
Example
Display the summary information of all OSPF imported routes.
<3Com> display ospf asbr-summary
Total summary address count: 2
Summary Address
net : 168.10.0.0
mask : 255.254.0.0
tag : 1
status : Advertise
The Count of Route is 0
Summary Address
net : 1.1.0.0
mask : 255.255.0.0
tag : 100
status : DoNotAdvertise
The Count of Route is 0
display ospf brief Syntax

display ospf [ process-id ] brief
View
Any view
Parameter
■ process-id: Process number of OSPF. If no process number is specified, this
command displays the main information of all OSPF processes in configuration
sequence.
Description
Using the display ospf brief command, you can view the summary of OSPF.
Example
Display the OSPF summary.
<3Com> display ospf brief
RouterID: 3.3.3.3 Border Router: Area
spf-schedule-interval: 5
Routing preference: Inter/Intra: 10 External: 150
Default ASE parameters: Metric: 1 Tag: 0.0.0.1 Type: 2
SPF computation count: 13
Area Count: 2 Nssa Area Count: 0
Area 0.0.0.0:
Authtype: none Flags: <>
SPF scheduled: <>
Interface: 20.0.0.2 (Ethernet1/0/0)
Cost: 1 State: BackupDR Type: Broadcast
Priority: 1
Designated Router: 20.0.0.1
Backup Designated Router: 20.0.0.2
Timers: Hello 10, Dead 40, Poll 0, Retransmit 5, Transmit Delay
1

Cost: 1 State: DR Type: Broadcast
Priority: 1
1
Area 0.0.0.1:
Authtype: none Flags: <Transit>
SPF scheduled: <>
Interface: 40.0.0.1 (LoopBack0) --> 40.0.0.1
Cost: 1562 State: P To P Type: PointToPoint
Priority: 1
1
Display the routing information of OSPF 100.
<3Com> display ospf 100
OSPF Process 100 with Router ID 1.2.3.4
OSPF Protocol Information
RouterID: 1.2.3.4
Spf-schedule-interval: 5
Routing preference: Inter/Intra: 10 External: 150
Default ASE parameters: Metric: 1 Tag: 0.0.0.1 Type: 2
SPF computation count: 0
Area Count: 0 Nssa Area Count: 0
display ospf cumulative Syntax

display ospf cumulative
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ospf cumulative command, you can view the OSPF cumulative
information.
Example
Display the OSPF cumulative information.
<3Com> display ospf cumulative
IO Statistics
Type InputOutput
Hello 225 437
DB Description7886
Link-State Req1818
Link-State Update 4853
Link-State Ack2521
ASE: 1 Checksum Sum: FCAF
LSAs originated by this router
Router: 50SumNet: 40SumASB: 2
LSAs Originated: 92 LSAs Received: 33
Area 0.0.00.0:
Neighbors: 1 Interfaces: 1
Spf: 54 Checksum Sum F020
rtr: 2 net: 0 sumasb: 0 sumnet: 1
Area 0.0.0.1:
Neighbors: 0 Interfaces: 1
Spf: 19 Checksum Sum 14EAD
rtr: 1 net: 0sumasb: 1sumnet: 1
Routing Table:
Intra Area: 2 Inter Area: 0ASE: 1
display ospf error Syntax

display ospf error
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ospf error command, you can view the statistics of error
information which OSPF received.
Example
Display the statistics of error information which OSPF received .
<3Com> display ospf error
OSPF packet error statistics:
0: IP: received my own packet0: OSPF: bad packet type
0: OSPF: bad version0: OSPF: bad checksum
0: OSPF: bad area id0: OSPF: area mismatch
0: OSPF: bad virtual link0: OSPF: bad authentication type
0: OSPF: bad authentication key 0: OSPF: packet too small
0: OSPF: packet size > ip length 0: OSPF: transmit error
0: OSPF: interface down0: OSPF: unknown neighbor
0: HELLO: netmask mismatch0: HELLO: hello timer mismatch
0: HELLO: dead timer mismatch0: HELLO: extern option mismatch
0: HELLO: router id confusion0: HELLO: virtual neighbor unknown
0: HELLO: NBMA neighbor unknown 0: DD: neighbor state low
0: DD: router id confusion0: DD: extern option mismatch
0: DD: unknown LSA type 0: LS ACK: neighbor state low
0: LS ACK: bad ack0: LS ACK: duplicate ack
0: LS ACK: unknown LSA type 0: LS REQ: neighbor state low
0: LS REQ: empty request0: LS REQ: bad request
0: LS UPD: neighbor state low0: LS UPD: newer self-generate LSA
0: LS UPD: LSA checksum bad0: LS UPD:received less recent LSA
0: LS UPD: unknown LSA type 0: OSPF routing: next hop not exist
0: DD: MTU option mismatch
display ospf interface Syntax

display ospf interface [ interface-type port-number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ interface-type: Interface type
■ port-number: Interface number.
Description
Using the display ospf interface command, you can view the OSPF interface
information.
Example
Display the OSPF ethernet2/0/0 interface information.
<3Com> display ospf interface ethernet2/0/0
Cost: 1 State: BackupDR Type: Broadcast
Priority: 1
Backup Designated Router: 10.110.0.2
Timers: Hello 10, Dead 40, Poll 0, Retransmit 5, Transmit Delay 1
display ospf lsdb Syntax

display ospf [ area-id ] lsdb [ brief ] [ asbr | ase | network | nssa | opaque | router |
summary ] [ ip-address ] [ originate-router ip-address ] [ self-originate ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ area-id: ID of the OSPF area, represented by decimal integer ranging from 0 to
4294967295 or in IP address format.
■ brief: Brief database information.
■ asbr: Database information of Type-4 LSA (summary-Asbr-LSA).
■ ase: Database information of Type-5 LSA (AS-external-LSA).
■ network: Database information of Type-2 LSA (Network-LSA).
■ nssa: Database information of Type-7 LSA (NSSA-external-LSA)
■ opaque: Database information of Opaque LSA.
■ router: Database information of Type-1 LSA (Router-LSA)
■ summary: Database information of Type-3 LSA (Summary-Net-LSA)
■ ip-address: Link state ID in IP address format.
■ originate-router ip-address: IP address of the router advertising LSA packet.
■ self-originate: Database information of self-originated LSA generated by local
router..
Description
Using the display ospf lsdb command, you can view the database
information about OSPF connecting state.
Example
Display the database information about OSPF connecting state.
<3Com> display ospf lsdb
Link State Database
Area: 0.0.0.0
Type LinkState ID AdvRouter Age Len Sequence Metric Where
Rtr 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 563 36 80000008 0
SpfTree
Net 1.1.1.2 123.1.1.1 595 32 80000001 0
SpfTree
AS External Database:
ASE 1.1.0.0 1.1.1.1 561 36 80000001 1
Uninitialized
ASE 123.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 561 36 80000001 1
Uninitialized
Display the brief database information about OSPF connecting state.
<3Com> display ospf lsdb brief

LS Database Statistics:
Area ID Stub Router Network S-Net S-ASBR Type-7
Subtotal??
0.0.0.0 0 2 1 1 0 0 4
0.0.0.1 0 2 1 1 0 4 8
AS External 4
Total 0 4 2 2 0 4 16
Display the database information of Type-7 LSA.
<3Com> display ospf lsdb nssa

Link State Database
Area: 0.0.0.1
type : NSSA
ls id : 1.1.0.0
adv rtr : 1.1.1.1
ls age : 93
len : 36
seq : 80000002
chksum : 0x3c66
options : (No Type 7/5 translation, DC)
Net mask : 255.255.0.0
Tos 0 metric: 1
E type : 2
Forwarding Address :2.2.2.1
Tag: 1
Display database information of summary route.
<3Com> display ospf lsdb summary

Link State Database
Area: 0.0.0.0
Type : SumNet
Ls id : 2.2.0.0
Adv rtr : 1.1.1.1
Ls age : 304
Len : 28
seq : 80000001
chksum : 0x61d4
Options : (DC)
Net mask : 255.255.0.0
Tos 0 metric: 1
Display database information of Type-1 LSA.
<3Com> display ospf lsdb router

Link State Data Base
Area: 0.0.0.0
Type : Router
Ls id : 20.0.0.1
Adv rtr : 20.0.0.1
Ls age : 988
Len : 36
seq : 80000006
chksum : 0x428c
Options : (DC) ASBR
Link count: 1
Link ID: 20.0.0.1
Data : 20.0.0.1
Type : TransNet
Metric : 10
<3Com> display ospf lsdb network

Link State Database
Area: 0.0.0.0
Type : Net
Ls id : 1.1.1.2
Adv rtr : 123.1.1.1
Ls age : 515
Len : 32
seq : 80000002
chksum : 0xc470
Options : (DC)
Net mask : 255.255.0.0
Attached Router 123.1.1.1
Attached Router 1.1.1.1

<3Com> display ospf lsdb asbr

Link State Database
Area: 0.0.0.1
Type : SumASB
Ls id : 123.1.1.1
Adv rtr : 1.1.1.1
Ls age : 20
Len : 28
seq : 80000001
chksum : 0x1f9b
Options : (DC)
Tos 0 metric: 1
<3Com> display ospf lsdb ase

Link State Database
type : ASE
ls id : 1.1.0.0
adv rtr : 1.1.1.1
ls age : 15
len : 36
seq : 80000001
chksum : 0x4a8
options : (DC)
Net mask : 255.255.0.0
Tos 0 metric: 1
E type : 2
Forwarding Address :0.0.0.0
Tag: 1
Display the LSA packets advertised from the router at 3.3.3.3.
<3Com> display ospf lsdb originate-router 3.3.3.3
Link State Database

Area: 0.0.0.0
Stub 30.0.0.0 3.3.3.3 -1 24 0 0 SpfTree
SNet 40.0.0.0 3.3.3.3 1524 28 80000006 1562 Inter
List
Area: 0.0.0.1
Stub 40.0.0.0 3.3.3.3 -1 24 0 0 SpfTree
ASB 20.0.0.1 3.3.3.3 1524 28 80000003 1 SumAsb
List
Display database information of the LSA packets generated by local router.
<3Com> display ospf lsdb self-originate

Link State Database
Area: 0.0.0.0
Rtr 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 539 36 80000016 0

SpfTree
SNet 2.2.0.0 1.1.1.1 445 28 80000008 1 Inter
List
Area: 0.0.0.1
Rtr 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 539 36 8000000e 0
SpfTree
SNet 1.1.0.0 1.1.1.1 445 28 8000000a 1 Inter
List
ASB 123.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 445 28 80000007 1 SumAsb
List
AS External Database:
ASE 100.0.0.0 1.1.1.1 849 36 8000000a 2 Ase
List
ASE 1.1.0.0 1.1.1.1 737 36 8000000e 1 Ase
List
display ospf nexthop Syntax

display ospf nexthop
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ospf nexthop command, you can view the information about the
next-hop
Example
Display the OSPF next-hop information.
<3Com> display ospf nexthop
Address Type Refcount Intf Addr Intf Name
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-
202.38.160.1Direct 3202.38.160.1 Interface serial2/0/0
202.38.160.2Neighbor 1202.38.160.1 Interface serial2/0/0
display ospf peer Syntax

display ospf peer [ brief ]
View
Any view
Parameter
brief: Brief information of neighbors in areas.
Description
Using the display ospf peer command, you can view the information about the
neighbors in OSPF areas.
Using the display ospf peer brief command, you can view the brief information of
neighbors in OSPF, mainly the neighbor number at all states in every area.
The display format of OSPF neighbor valid time is different according to the length
of time. Description is as follows:
XXYXXMXXD: More than a year, namely year: month: day
XXXdXXhXXm: More than a day but less than a year, that is, day: hour: minute
XX: XX: XX: Less than a day, namely hour: minute: second
Example
View the information of OSPF peer.
<3Com> display ospf peer
Area 0.0.0.0 interface 1.1.1.1(Serial2/0/0)'s neighbor(s)
RouterID: 1.1.1.3 Address: 1.1.1.3
State: Full Mode: Nbr is Master Priority: 1
DR: 1.1.1.3 BDR: 1.1.1.1
Dead timer expires in 31s
Neighbor is comes for 00:08:24
View the brief information of neighbors in areas.
<3Com> display ospf peer brief

Neighbor Statistics
Area ID Down Attempt Init 2-Way ExStart Exchange Loading
Full Total
0.0.0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0.0.0.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2
display ospf Syntax

request-queue display ospf request-queue
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ospf request-queue command, you can view the information
about the OSPF request-queue.
Example
View the information about the OSPF request-queue.
<3Com> display ospf request-queue
The Router's Neighbors is
Interface: 103.169.2.2 Area: 0.0.0.1

LSID:129.11.25.0 AdvRouter:103.160.1.1 Sequence:80000001
Age:201
Age:201
Age:201
display ospf Syntax

retrans-queue display ospf retrans-queue
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ospf retrans-queue command, you can view the information
about the OSPF retransmission queue.
Example
View the information about the OSPF retransmission queue.
<3Com> display ospf retrans-queue
Retransmit List
The Router's Neighbors is

Interface: 103.169.2.5 Area: 0.0.0.1
Retrans list:
Type: ASE LSID:129.11.77.0 AdvRouter:103.160.1.1
Type: ASE LSID:129.11.108.0 AdvRouter:103.160.1.1
display ospf routing Syntax

display ospf routing
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ospf routing command, you can view the information about
OSPF routing table.
Example
View the routing table information related to OSPF.
<3Com> display ospf routing
Routing for Network
Destination Cost Type NextHop AdvRouter Area

10.110.0.0/16 1 Net 10.110.0.1 10.110.0.1
0
30.110.0.0/16 1 Stub 30.110.0.1 3.3.3.3
0
Total Nets: 2
Intra Area: 2 Inter Area: 0 ASE: 0 NSSA: 0
display ospf vlink Syntax

display ospf vlink
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ospf vlink command, you can view the information about OSPF
virtual links.
Example
View OSPF virtual links information.
<3Com> display ospf vlink
Virtual-link Neighbor-id -> 1.1.1.1, State: Down
Cost: 0 State: Down Type: Virtual
Transit Area: 0.0.0.1

filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ routing-protocol ]
undo filter-policy {acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name} export [ routing-protocol ]
View
OSPF view
Parameter
■ acl-number: Access control list number.
■ ip-prefix-name Name of the address prefix list.
■ routing-protocol: Protocol advertising the routing information, including direct,
isis, bgp, rip and static at present.
Description
Using the filter-policy export command, you can configure the rule of OSPF
filtering the advertised routing information. Using the undo filter-policy export
command, you can cancel the filtering rules that have been set.
By default, no filtering of the distributed routing information is performed.
In some cases, it may be required that only the routing information meeting some
conditions can be advertised. Then, the filter-policy command can be used to
configure the filtering conditions for the routing information to be advertised.
Only the routing information passing the filtration can be advertised.
For the related commands, see acl and ip ip-prefix
Example
Configure OSPF that only advertises the routing information permitted by acl 1.
[3Com] acl number 1
[3Com-acl-basic-1] rule deny source any
[3Com-ospf] filter-policy 1 export

filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name | gateway prefix-list-name }
import
undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name | gateway ip-prefix-name }
import
View
OSPF view
Parameter
■ gateway ip-prefix-name: Name of address prefix list used for filtering the
addresses of the neighboring routers advertising the routing information.
Description
Using the filter-policy import command, you can configure the OSPF rules of
filtering the routing information received. Using the undo filter-policy import
command, you can cancel the filtering of the routing information received.
By default, no filtering of the received routing information is performed.
conditions can be received. Then, the filter-policy command can be used to set the
filtering conditions for the routing information to be advertised. Only the routing
information passed the filtration can be received.
Using the filter-policy import command, you can filter the routes calculated by
OSPF. Only the filtered routes can be added to the routing table. The filtering can
be performed according to the next hop and destination of the route.
Since OSPF is a dynamic routing protocol based on link state, its routing
information hides in the link state, this command cannot filter the
advertised/received routing information in link state. There is more limitation when
using this command in OSPF than using it in distance vector routing protocol.
This command is valid for this process only if multiple OSPF processes are enabled.
Example
Filter the received routing information according to the rule defined by the access
control list 2.
[3Com] acl number 2
[3Com-acl-basic-2] rule deny source any
[3Com-ospf-1] filter-policy 2 import
import-route Syntax
import-route protocol [ cost value ] [ type value ] [ tag value ] [ route-policy
route-policy-name ]
View
OSPF view
Parameter
■ protocol: Specifies the source routing protocol that can be imported. At
present, it includes direct, rip, bgp, isis, static, ospf, ospf-ase, and ospf-nssa.
■ ospf process-id: Imports only the internal routes found by OSPF process-id as
external routing information. If no process number is specified, the OSPF
default process number 1 is used.
■ ospf-ase process-id: Imports only the ASE external routes found by OSPF
process-id as external routing information. If no process number is specified,
the OSPF default process number 1 is used.
■ ospf-nssa process-id: Imports only the NSSA external routes found by OSPF
process-id as external routing information. If no process number is specified,
the OSPF default process number 1 is used.
■ route-policy route-policy-name: Imports only the routes matching the specified
Route-policy.
Description
Using the import-route command, you can import the information of another
routing protocol. Using the undo import-route command, you can cancel the
imported external routing information.
By default, the routing information of other protocols is not imported.
Example
Specify an imported RIP route as the route of type 2, with the route tag as 33 and
the route cost as 50.
[3Com-ospf-1] import-route rip type 2 tag 33 cost 50
Specify OSPF process 100 to import the route found by OSPF 160.
[3Com-ospf-160] import-route ospf 160
network Syntax
network ip-address wildcard
undo network ip-address wildcard
View
OSPF area view
Parameter
■ ip-address: Address of the network segment where the interface locates.
■ wildcard: IP address wildcard mask, which is similar to the reversed form of the
mask of IP address. But when configure this parameter, you can type it as mask
of IP address, it could be translated as wildcard mask by VRP system.
Description
Using the network command, you can configure the interface running OSPF. Using
the undo network command, you can cancel the interface running OSPF.
By default, the interface does not belong to any area.
To run the OSPF protocol on one interface, the master IP address of this interface
must be in the range of the network segment specified by this command. If only
the slave IP address of the interface is in the range of the network segment
specified by this command, this interface will not run OSPF protocol.
After OSPF multi-instance is configured, different OSPF processes are bound with
different VPN instances. The network addresses between different processes can
be the same or included. But for the same VPN instance, the network addresses
between different OSPF processes cannot be the same or included. Otherwise, the
later configured command cannot be valid and the following will be displayed:
Network already set in OSPF process xx, that is, if network 10.1.0.0 0.0.255.255 is
enabled in process 100, network 10.1.0.0 0.0.255.255, network 10.1.1.0
0.0.0.255 or network 10.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 will fail to be enabled in other
OSPF processes.
CAUTION: OSPF configuration can only enable the interfaces that belong to the
same VPN instance.
After OSPF is configured multi-instance, if different VPN instances are bound in

the OSPF process, the network addresses between different processes can be the
same or included. But for the same VPN instance, the network addresses between
different OSPF processes cannot be the same or included.
For the related command, see ospf.
Example
Specify the interfaces whose master IP addresses are in the segment range of
10.110.36.0 to run the OSPF protocol and specify the number of the OSPF area
(where these interfaces are located) as 6.
[3Com-ospf] area 6
[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.6] network 10.110.36.0.0 0.0.0.255
Enable OSPF process 100 on the router and specify the number of the
area where the interface is located as 2.
[3Com] router id 10.110.1.9
[3Com] ospf 100
[3Com] ospf 200 vpn-instance vpn1

[3Com] ospf 300 vpn-instance vpn1
Network already set in OSPF process 200
nssa Syntax
nssa [ default-route-advertise ] [ no-import-route ] [ no-summary ]
undo nssa
View
OSPF area view
Parameter
■ default-route-advertise: Only available for the NSSA ABR or ASBR. When using
the parameter at NSSA ABR, you can generate Type-7 LSAs for the default
route no matter whether there exists the default route 0.0.0.0 in the routing
table. When using the parameter at NSSA ASBR, you can generate Type-7 LSAs
for the default route only if there exists the default route 0.0.0.0 in the routing
table.
■ no-import-route: Forbids AS external routes to be imported in to the NSSA as
Type-7 LSAs. This parameters is available for the NSSA ABR and for the ASBR in
OSPF AS, to ensure all external route information is imported into the OSPF
areas.
■ no-summary: Only available for the NSSA ABR. When the parameter is
selected, the NSSA ABR advertises a default route via the Summary-LSAs
(Type-3) in the area, but no other Summary-LSAs to other areas.
Description
Using the nssa command, you can configure an area as NSSA area. Using the
undo nssa command, you can cancel the function.
By default, NSSA area is not configured.
For all the routers in the NSSA area, the command nssa must be used to configure
the area as NSSA .
Example
Configure area 1 as NSSA.
[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] nssa
opaque-capability Syntax
opaque-capability enable
undo opaque-capability
View
OSPF view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the opaque-capability enable command, you can enable the Opaque
capability of OSPF. Using the undo opaque-capability command, you can disable
the Opaque capability of OSPF.
CAUTION: By default, Opaque capability of OSPF is enabled.
If the application based on Opaque LSA is enabled, for example, the area TE
capability is enabled, the Opaque capability cannot be disabled.
Example
Enable Opaque capability.
[3Com-ospf-100] opaque-capability enable
ospf Syntax
ospf [ process-id ]
undo ospf [ process-id ]
View
System view
Parameter
■ process-id: Number of OSPF. If no process number is specified, the default
number 1 is used.
Description
Using the ospf command, you can enable the OSPF protocol. Using the undo ospf
command, you can disable the OSPF protocol.
After enabling OSPF protocol, the user can make the corresponding configuration
in OSPF view.
By default, the system does not run the OSPF protocol.
VRP supports OSPF multi-process. Multiple OSPF processes can be enabled by
specifying different process numbers on a router.
It is suggested that user should specify router-id with parameter router-id when
enabling OSPF. Different router-ids should be specified for different processes if
multiple processes are enabled on the router.
For the related command, see network.
Example
Enable the running of the OSPF protocol.
[3Com] ospf
Enable OSPF process 120 to run OSPF.

[3Com] ospf 120
[3Com-ospf-120]
ospf Syntax
authentication-mode ospf authentication-mode { simple password | md5 key-id key }
undo ospf authentication-mode { simple | md5 }
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ simple password: Character string not exceeding 8 characters using simple text
authentication.
■ key-id: ID of the authentication key in MD5 cipher text authentication mode in
the range from 1 to 255.
■ key: MD5 authentication key. If it is input in a simple form, MD5 key is a
character string of 1 to 16 characters. And it will be displayed in a cipher text
form in a length of 24 characters when display current-configuration command
is executed. Inputting the 24-character MD5 key in a cipher text form is also
supported.
Description
Using the ospf authentication-mode command, you can configure the
authentication mode and key between adjacent routers. Using the undo ospf
authentication-mode command, you can cancel the authentication key that has
been set.
By default, the interface does not authenticate the OSPF packets.
The passwords for authentication keys of the routers on the same network
segment must be identical. In addition, using authentication-mode command, you
can set the authentication type of the area authentication key so as to validate the
configuration.
For the related command, see authentication-mode.
Example
Set the area 1 where the network segment 131.119.0.0 of Interface serial1/0/0 is
located to support MD5 cipher text authentication. The authentication key
identifier is set to 15 and the authentication key is 3Com.
[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] authentication-mode md5
[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] interface serial 1/0/0
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ospf authentication-mode md5 15 3Com
ospf cost Syntax

ospf cost value
undo ospf cost
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ value: Cost for running OSPF protocol, ranging from 1 to 65535.
Description
Using the ospf cost command, you can configure different packet sending costs so
as to send packets from different interfaces. Using the undo ospf cost command,
you can restore the default costs.
By default, the interface automatically calculates the costs required for running
OSPF protocol according to the current Baud rate.
Example
Specify the cost spent when an interface runs OSPF as 33.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ospf cost 33
ospf dr-priority Syntax

ospf dr-priority value
undo ospf dr-priority
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ value: Interface priority for electing the "designated router", ranging from 0 to
255. By default, the value is 1.
Description
Using the ospf dr-priority command, you can configure the priority for electing the
"designated router" on an interface. Using the undo ospf dr-priority command,
you can restore the default value.
Interface priority determines the interface qualification when electing the
“designated router”. The interface with high priority is considered first when there
is collision in election.
Example
Set the priority of the interface Ethernet1/0/0 to 8, when electing the DR.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] ospf dr-priority 8
ospf mib-binding Syntax

ospf mib-binding process-id
undo ospf mib-binding
View
System view
Parameter
■ process-id: Number of OSPF process.
Description
Using the ospf mib-binding command, MIB operation can be bound on the
specified OSPF process. Using the undo ospf mib-binding command, you can
MIB operation is always bound on the first process enabled by OSPF protocol.
Using the this command, MIB operation can be bound on other OSPF processes.
Using the undo ospf mib-binding command, you can cancel the binding
configuration. MIB operation is rebound automatically by OSPF protocol on the
first enabled process.
By default, MIB operation is bound on the first enabled OSPF process.
Example
Bind MIB operation on OSPF process 100.
[3Com] ospf mib-binding 100
Cancel MIB operation binding
[3Com] undo ospf mib-binding
ospf mtu-enable Syntax

ospf mtu-enable
undo ospf mtu-enable
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ospf mtu-enable command, you can enable the interface to write MTU
value when sending DD packets. Using the undo ospf mtu-enable command, you
can restore the default settings.
By default, the MTU value is 0 when sending DD packets, i.e. the actual MTU value
of the interface is not written.
Database Description Packets (DD packets) are used to describe its own LSDB
when the router running OSPF protocol is synchronizing the database.
The default MTU value of DD packet is 0. With this command, the specified
interface can be set manually to write the MTU value area in DD packets when
sending DD packets, i.e. the actual MTU value of the interface is written in.
Example
Set interface Ethernet1/0/0 to write MTU value area when sending DD packets.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] ospf mtu-enable
ospf network-type Syntax

ospf network-type { broadcast | nbma | p2mp | p2p }
undo ospf network-type
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ broadcast: Changes the interface network type to broadcast.
■ nbma: Changes the interface network type to Non-Broadcast Multicast Access.
■ p2mp: Changes the interface network type to point-to-multipoint.
■ p2p: Changes the interface network type to point-to-point.
Description
Using the ospf network-type command, you can configure the network type of
OSPF interface. Using the undo ospf network-type command, you can restore the
default network type of the OSPF interface.
OSPF divides networks into four types by link layer protocol:
■ Broadcast: If Ethernet is adopted, OSFP defaults the network type to broadcast.
■ Non-Broadcast Multi-access (nbma): If Frame Relay, ATM, HDLC or X.25 is
adopted, OSPF defaults the network type to NBMA.
■ Point-to-Multipoint (p2mp): OSPF will not default the network type of any link
layer protocol to p2mp. The general undertaking is to change a partially
connected NBMA network to p2mp network if the NBMA network is not
fully-meshed.
■ Point-to-point (p2p): If PPP or LAPB is adopted, OSPF defaults the network type
to p2p.
If there is a router not supporting multicast address on the broadcast network, the
interface network type can be changed to NBMA. The interface network type can
also be changed from NBMA to broadcast.
A network that can be called an NBMA network or can be changed to a broadcast

network should satisfy the following condition: there is a virtual circuit directly
connects any two routers on the network. In other words, the network is
full-meshed. If the network cannot satisfy this condition, the interface network
type must be changed to point-to-multipoint. In this way, these two routers can
exchange routing information via a router directly connected with the two routers.
If there are only two routers running OSPF protocol on the same network
segment, the interface network type can be changed to point-to-point.
Note: When the network type of an interface is NBMA or it is changed to NBMA

manually, the peer command must be used to configure the neighboring point.
For the related command, see ospf dr-priority.
Example
Set the interface serial1/0/0 to NBMA type.

[3Com-serial1/0/0] ospf network-type nbma
ospf timer dead Syntax

ospf timer dead seconds
undo ospf timer dead
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ seconds: Dead interval of the OSPF neighbor. It is in second and ranges from 1
to 65535.
Description
Using the ospf timer dead command, you can configure the dead interval of the
OSPF neighbor. Using the undo ospf timer dead command, you can restore the
default value of the dead interval of the neighbor.
By default, the dead interval for the OSPF neighbors of p2p and broadcast
interfaces is 40 seconds, and for those of p2mp and nbma interfaces is 120
seconds.
The dead interval of OSPF neighbors means that within this interval, if no Hello
message is received from the neighbor, the neighbor will be considered to be
invalid. The value of dead seconds should be at least 4 times of that of the Hello
seconds. The dead seconds for the routers on the same network segment must be
identical.
For the related command, see ospf timer hello.
Example
Set the neighbor dead interval on the interface serial1/0/0 to 80 seconds.
[3Com-serial1/0/0] ospf timer dead 80
ospf timer hello Syntax

ospf timer hello seconds
undo ospf timer hello
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ seconds: Interval in seconds for an interface to transmit hello message. It
Description
Using the ospf timer hello command, you can configure the interval for
transmitting Hello messages on an interface. Using the undo ospf timer hello
command, you can restore the default value.
By default, the interval is 10 seconds for an interface of p2p or broadcast type to

transmit Hello messages, and 30 seconds for an interface of nbma or p2mp type.
For the related command, see ospf timer dead.
Example
Configure the interval of transmitting Hello packets on the interface serial1/0/0 to
20 seconds.
[3Com-serial1/0/0] ospf timer hello 20
ospf timer poll Syntax

ospf timer poll seconds
undo ospf timer poll
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ seconds: Specifies the poll Hello messages interval, ranging from 1 to 65535
and measured in seconds. By default, the value is 120 seconds.
Description
Using the ospf timer poll command, you can configure the poll Hello message
interval on nbma and p2mp network. Using the undo ospf timer poll command,
you can restore the default value.
On the nbma and p2mp network, if a neighbor is invalid, the Hello message will
be transmitted regularly according to the poll seconds. You can configure the poll
seconds to specify how often the interface transmits Hello message before it
establishes adjacency with the adjacent router. The value of poll seconds should be
no less than 3 times of that of Hello seconds.
Example
Configure to transmit poll Hello message from interface serial2/0/0 every 130
seconds.
[3Com-serial2/0/0] ospf timer poll 130
ospf timer retransmit Syntax

ospf timer retransmit interval
undo ospf timer retransmit
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ interval: Interval in seconds for re-transmitting LSA on an interface. It ranges
from 1 to 65535.The default value is 5 seconds.
Description
Using the ospf timer retransmit command, you can configure the interval for LSA
re-transmitting on an interface. Using the undo ospf timer retransmit command,
you can restore the default interval value for LSA re-transmitting on the interface.
If a router running OSPF transmits a "link state advertisement"(LSA) to the peer, it
needs to wait for the acknowledgement packet from the peer. If no
acknowledgement is received from the peer within the LSA retransmission, this
LSA will be re-transmitted. According to RFC2328, the LSA retransmission
between adjacent routers should not be set too short. Otherwise, unexpected
retransmission will be caused.
Example
Specify the retransmission for LSA transmitting between the interface serial1/0/0
and the adjacent routers to 12 seconds.
[3Com-serial1/0/0] ospf timer retransmit 12
ospf trans-delay Syntax

ospf trans-delay seconds
undo ospf trans-delay
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ seconds: Transmitting delay of LSA on an interface. It is in seconds and ranges
from 1 to 3600. By default, the value is 1 second.
Description
Using the ospf trans-delay command, you can configure the LSA transmitting
delay on an interface. Using the undo ospf trans-delay command, you can restore
the default value of the LSA transmitting delay on an interface.
LSA will age in the "link state database" (LSDB) of the router as time goes by (add
1 for every second), but it will not age during network transmission. Therefore, it is
necessary to add a period of time set by this command to the aging time of LSA
before transmitting it.
Example
Specify the trans-delay of transmitting LSA on the interface serial1/0/0 as 3
seconds.
[3Com-serial1/0/0] ospf trans-delay 3
peer Syntax
peer ip-address [ dr-priority dr-priority-number ]
undo peer ip-address
View
OSPF view
Parameter
■ ip-address: IP address of the neighboring point.
■ dr-priority-number: Represents the corresponding value of the network
neighbor priority, being an integer ranging from 0 to 255. The default value is
1.
Description
Using the peer command, you can configure the IP address of adjacent routers
and specify a DR priority on an NBMA network. Using the undo peer command,
you can cancel the configuration.
On the frame relay network, a full-meshed network (i.e. there is a VC directly
connecting any two routers on the network) can be implemented by configuring
map. Thus OSPF can perform in the same way in the frame relay network as in the
broadcast network (such as electing DR and BDR). However, the IP address of
adjacent routers and their election rights must be configured manually for the
interface because adjacent routers cannot be found dynamically by advertising
Hello messages.
Example
Configure the IP address of peer router as 10.1.1.1.
[3Com-ospf-1] peer 10.1.1.1
preference Syntax
preference [ ase ] value
undo preference [ ase ]
View
OSPF view
Parameter
■ value: OSPF protocol route preference, ranging from 1 to 255.
■ ase: Preference of an imported external route of the AS.
Description
Using the preference command, you can configure the preference of an OSPF
protocol route. Using the undo preference command, you can restore the default
value of the OSPF protocol route.
By default, the preference of an OSPF protocol internal route is 10 and the
preference of an external route is 150.
Because multiple dynamic routing protocols could be running on a router, there is
the problem of routing information sharing among routing protocols and
selection. Therefore, a default preference is specified for each routing protocol.
When multiple routes to the same destination are found by different routing
protocols, the route found by high preference routing protocol will be selected to
forward IP packets.
Example
Specify the preference of an external imported route of the AS as 160.
[3Com-ospf-1] preference ase 160
reset ospf Syntax

reset ospf [ statistics ] { all | process-id }
View
User view
Parameter
■ statistics: Resets statistics of the OSPF process.
■ process-id: OSPF process number. If no OSPF process number is specified, all
the OSPF processes should be reset.
■ all: Resets all the OSPF processes.
Description
Using the reset ospf all command, you can reset all the OSPF processes. Using the
parameter of statistics to reset statistics about OSPF.
The reset ospf process-id command can be used to reset the specified process and
clear statistics data. Using the parameter of statistics to reset statistics about OSPF.
Using the reset ospf command to reset the OSPF process, the following results are
expected:
■ Clear invalid LSA immediately without waiting for LSA timeout.
■ If the Router ID changes, a new Router ID will take effect by executing the
command.
■ Re-elect DR and BDR conveniently.
■ OSPF configuration will not be lost if the system is restarted.
■ Delete the original OSPF routes.
■ After OSPF process is restarted, new routes and LSA will be generated
correspondingly and LSA will be advertised.
The system will require the user to confirm whether to re-enable the OSPF
protocol after execution of the command.
Example
Reset all the OSPF processes
<3Com> reset ospf all
Reset the OSPF process 200
<3Com> reset ospf 200
router id Syntax
router id router-id
undo router id
View
System view
Parameter
■ router-id: Router ID that is a 32-bit unsigned integer.
Description
Using the router id command, you can configure the ID of a router running the
OSPF protocol. Using the undo router id command, you can cancel the router ID
that has been configured.
By default, no router ID is configured.
Router ID is a 32-bit unsigned integer that uniquely identifies a router in an OSPF
autonomous system. If the router ID specified, the configurations of OSPF can not
be set.
When the router ID is configured manually, the IDs of any two routers cannot be
identical in the autonomous system. So, the IP address of certain interface might
as well be selected as the ID of this router.
The modified router ID will not be valid unless OSPF is re-enabled.
For the related command, see ospf.
Example
Set the router ID to 10.1.1.3.
silent-interface Syntax
silent-interface interface-type interface-number
undo silent-interface interface-type interface-number
View
OSPF view
Parameter
■ interface-type: Specifies the interface type
■ interface-number: Specifies the interface number.
Description
Using the silent-interface command, you can disable an interface to transmit OSPF
packet. Using the undo silent-interface command, you can restore the default
setting.
By default, the interface is enabled to transmit OSPF packet.
You can use this command to disable an interface to transmit OSPF packet, so as
to prevent the router on some network from receiving the OSPF routing
information.
Different processes can disable the same interface to transmit OSPF packet. While
silent-interface command only takes effect on the interface enabled with OSPF by
this process, being invalid for the interface enabled by other processes.
Example
Disable interface serial2/0/0 to transmit OSPF packet.
[3Com-ospf-1] silent-interface serial2/0/0
Disable interface Ethernet2/0/0 to transmit OSPF packet in both OSPF
process 100 and OSPF process 200.
[3Com] ospf 100
[3Com-ospf-100] silent-interface ethernet 2/0/0
[3Com-ospf-100] quit
[3Com] ospf 200
[3Com-ospf-200] silent-interface ethernet 2/0/0

ospf snmp-agent trap enable ospf [ process-id ] [ trap-type ]
undo snmp-agent trap enable ospf [ trap-type ]
View
System view
Parameter
■ process-id: OSPF process number. If no OSPF process number is specified, this
command is valid for all the current OSPF processes.
■ trap-type: Type of SNMP TRAP packet transmitted by OSPF. It can be the
keyword in the following table.
Table 3 SNMP TRAP type keywords
keyword description
ifauthfail Enables the InterfaceAuthenticationFailure trap packets
ifcfgerror Enables the InterfaceConfigError trap packets
ifrxbadpkt Enables the InterfaceRecieveBadPacket trap packets
ifstatechange Enables the InterfaceStateChange trap packets
iftxretransmit Enables the InterfaceTxRetransmitPacket trap packets
lsdbapproachoverflo Enables the LsdbApproachOverflow trap packets
w
lsdboverflow Enables the LsdbOverflow trap packets
maxagelsa Enables the MaxAgeLsa trap packets
nbrstatechange Enables the NeighborStateChange trap packets
originatelsa Enables the OriginateLsa trap packets
virifauthfail Enables the VirtualInterfaceAuthenticationFailure trap
packets
virifcfgerror Enables the VirtualInterfaceConfigError trap packets
virifrxbadpkt Enables the VirtualInterfaceRecieveBadPacket trap packets
virifstatechange Enables the VirtualInterfaceStateChange trap packets
viriftxretransmit Enables the VirtualInterfaceTxRetransmitPacket trap packets
virnbrstatechange Enables the VirtualNeighborStateChange trap packets
Description
Using the snmp-agent trap enable ospf command, you can enable the TRAP
function of OSPF. Using the undo snmp-agent trap enable ospf command, you can
disable the TRAP function.
This command takes no effect on the OSPF process enabled after its execution.
By default, no OSPF process is enabled to transmit TRAP packets.
For detailed configuration of SNMP TRAP, refer to “system management” section
in this manual.
Example
Enable TRAP function of OSPF process 100.
<3Com> snmp-agent trap enable ospf 100
spf-schedule-interval Syntax
spf-schedule-interval interval
undo spf-schedule-interval
View
OSPF view
Parameter
■ Interval: SPF calculation interval of OSPF, which is in seconds in the range of 1
Description
Using the spf-schedule-interval command, you can configure the route calculation
interval of OSPF. Using the undo spf-schedule-interval command, you can restore
According to the Link State Database (LSDB), the router running OSPF can
calculate the shortest path tree taking itself as the root and determine the next
hop to the destination network according to the shortest path tree. By adjusting
SPF calculation interval, network frequently changing can be restrained, which
may lead to that too many bandwidth resources and router resources will be used.
Example
Set the OSPF route calculation interval of 3Com to 6 seconds.
[3Com-ospf-1] spf-schedule-interval 6
stub Syntax
stub [ no-summary ]
undo stub
View
OSPF area view
Parameter
■ no-summary: Only available for the ABR in Stub area. When this parameter is
selected, the ABR only advertises the Summary-LSA for the default route, but
no other Summary-LSAs. The area is also called totally stub area.
Description
Using the stub command, you can configure the type of an OSPF area as the STUB
area. Using the undo stub command, you can cancel the settings.
By default, no area is set to be the STUB area.
All the routers in a Stub area must be configured with the corresponding attribute.
For the related command, see default-cost.
Example
Set the type of OSPF area 1 to the STUB area.
[3Com-ospf] area 1
[3Com-ospf-area-0.0.0.1] stub
vlink-peer Syntax
vlink-peer router-id [ hello seconds] [ retransmit seconds ] [ trans-delay seconds ] [
dead seconds ] [ simple password | md5 keyid key ]
undo vlink-peer router-id
View
OSPF area view
Parameter
■ router-id: Router ID of virtual link neighbor.
■ hello seconds: Interval that router transmits hello message. It ranges from 1 to
8192 seconds. This value must equal the hello seconds value of the router
virtually linked to the interface. By default, the value is 10 seconds,
■ retransmit seconds: Specifes the interval for re-transmitting the LSA packets on
an interface. It ranges from 1 to 8192 seconds. By default, the value is 5
seconds.
■ trans-delay seconds: Specifes the interval for delaying transmitting LSA packets
on an interface. It ranges from 1 to 8192 seconds. By default, the value is 1
second.
■ dead seconds: Specifies the interval of death timer. It ranges from 1 to 8192
seconds. This value must equal the dead seconds of the router virtually linked
to it and must be at least 4 times of the hello seconds. By default, the value is
40 seconds.
■ simple password: Specifies the simple text authentication key, not exceeding 8
characters, of the interface. This value must equal the authentication key of the
virtually linked neighbor.
■ keyid: Specifies the MD5 authentication key ID. Its value ranges from 1 to 255.
It must be equal to the authentication key ID of the virtually linked neighbor.
■ key: Specifies the authentication key on an interface. It is a character string not

exceeding 16 characters. This value must equal the authentication key of the
virtually linked neighbor. And the key will be displayed in a cipher text form in a
length of 24 characters when display current-configuration command is
executed. Inputting the key in a cipher text form with 24 characters long is also
supported.
Description
Using the vlink-peer command, you can create and configure a virtual link. Using
the undo vlink-peer command, you can cancel an existing virtual link.
According to RFC2328, the OSPF area should be connected with the backbone
network. You can use vlink-peer command to keep the connectivity. Virtual link
somewhat can be regarded as a common ospf enabled interface so that you can
easily understand how to configure the parameters such as hello, retransmit, and
trans-delay on it.
One thing should be mentioned. When configuring virtual link authentication,
authentication-mode command is used to set the authentication mode as MD5
cipher text or simple text on the backbone network.
For the related command, see authentication-mode, and display ospf.
Example
Create a virtual link to 10.110.0.3 and use the MD5 cipher text authentication
mode.
[3Com-ospf] area 10.0.0.0
[3Com-ospf-area-10.0.0.0] vlink-peer 10.110.0.3 md5 3 345
Integrated IS-IS
Configuration
Commands
area-authentication-mo Syntax
de area-authentication-mode { simple | md5 } password [ ip | osi ]
undo area-authentication-mode { simple | md5 } [ ip | osi ]
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ simple: Transmits the password in simple text.
■ md5: Transmits the password encrypted with MD5.
■ password: Specifies the password to be configured, in the range of 1~24 bits.
■ ip: Specifies the IP authentication password.
■ osi: Specifies the OSI authentication password.
■ The configuration of ip or osi authentication password is independent of the
real network environment.
Description
Using the area-authentication-mode command, you can configure IS-IS to
authenticate the received Level-1 routing information packets (LSP, CSNP and
PSNP), according to the pre-defined mode and password. Using the undo
area-authentication-mode command, you can configure IS-IS not to authenticate
the said packets.
In default configuration, the system will not authenticate the received Level-1
routing information packets, and there is no password. By using this command,
you can clear all the Level-1 routing packets, whose area authentication passwords
are not consistent with the one set via this command. At the same time, this
command will let IS-IS insert the area authentication password into all the Level-1
routing packets sent by this node, in a certain mode.
For the related commands, see reset isis all, domain-authentication-mode, and isis
authentication-mode.
Example
Set the area authentication password as "hello" and the authentication type as
simple.
[3Com] isis
[3Com-isis] area-authentication-mode simple hello
cost-style Syntax
cost-style { narrow | wide | compatible | narrow-compatible | wide-compatible } [
relax-spf-limit ]
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ narrow: Only receives/sends packets whose cost type is narrow.
■ wide: Only receives/sends packets whose cost type is wide.
■ compatible: Receives/sends packets whose cost type is narrow or wide.
■ narrow-compatible: Receives packets whose cost type is narrow or wide, but
only send packets whose cost type is narrow.
■ wide-compatible: Receives packets whose cost type is narrow or wide, but only
send packets whose cost type is wide.
■ relax-spf-metric: Permits to receive routes whose cost value is larger than 1024.
If this item is not set, the route whose metrics value is larger than 1024 will be
discarded. This setting is only valid for compatible, narrow-compatible, and
wide-compatible.
Description
Using the cost-style command, you can set the cost type of an IS-IS packet
received/sent by the router. Using the undo cost-style command, you can restore
By default, IS-IS only receives/sends packets whose cost type is narrow.
For the related command, see isis cost.
Example
Set IS-IS to receive packets whose cost type is narrow or wide, but only send
packets whose cost type is narrow.
[3Com] isis
[3Com-isis] cost-style narrow-compatible
debugging isis Syntax

debugging isis { adjacency | all | authentication-error | checksum-error |
circuit-information | configuration-error | datalink-receiving-packet |
datalink-sending-packet | general-error | interface-information | memory-allocating
| receiving-packet-content | self-originate-update | sending-packet-content |
snp-packet | spf-event | spf-summary | spf-timer | task-error | timer | update-packet
}
undo debugging isis { adjacency | all | authentication-error | checksum-error |
circuit-information | configuration-error | datalink-receiving-packet |
datalink-sending-packet | general-error | interface-information | memory-allocating
| receiving-packet-content | self-originate-update | sending-packet-content |
snp-packet | spf-event | spf-summary | spf-timer | task-error | timer | update-packet
}
View
User view
Parameter
■ adjacency: IS-IS adjacency related packets.
■ all: All IS-IS related debugging information.
■ authentication-error: IS-IS authentication errors.
■ checksum-error: IS-IS checksum errors.
■ circuit-information: Information about IS-IS enabled interface.
■ configuration-error: IS-IS configuration errors.
■ datalink-receiving-packet: Data link layer's packets-receiving status.
■ datalink-sending-packet: Data link layer's packets-sending status.
■ general-error: IS-IS error information.
■ interface-information: Information about IS-IS enabled data link layer.
■ memory-allocating: IS-IS memory allocating status.
■ receiving-packet-content: Packets received through IS-IS protocol.
■ self-originate-update: Packets locally updated through IS-IS protocol.
■ sending-packet-content: Packets sent through IS-IS protocol.
■ snp-packet: CSNP/PSNP packet of IS-IS.
■ spf-event: IS-IS SPF events.
■ spf-summary: Statistics about IS-IS performing SPF calculation.
■ spf-timer: IS-IS SPF trigger events.
■ task-error: IS-IS events status.
■ timer: IS-IS timer.

■ update-packet: Updated packets through IS-IS protocol.
Description
Using the debugging isis command, you can enable IS-IS debugging. Using the
undo debugging isis command, you can disable the function.
Example
Enable all the information debugging of IS-IS.
<3Com> debugging isis all
default-route-advertise Syntax
default-route-advertise [ route-policy [ route-policy-name ] ]
undo default-route-advertise [ route-policy [ route-policy-name ] ]
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ route-policy-name: Name of the specified route-policy.
Description
Using the default-route-advertise command, you can configure the default route
of Level-1 and Level-2 routers. Using the undo default-route-advertise command,
you can cancel this configuration.
By default, Level-2 router generates the default route.
This command can be set on Level-1 router or Level-2 router. By default, the
default route is generated on L2 LSP. If apply isis level-1 is set in route-policy view,
the default route will be generated on L1 LSP. If apply isis level-2 command is used
in route-policy view, the default route will be generated on L2 LSP. If apply isis
level-1-2 is set in route-policy view, the default route will be generated on both L1
LSP and L2 LSP.
Example
Set the current router to generate the default route on the LSP of corresponding
level.
[3Com-isis] default-route-advertise
display isis interface Syntax

display isis interface [ verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ verbose: If this parameter is used, the details of the interface will be displayed.
Description
Using the display isis interface command, you can view the information of the IS-IS
enabled interface.
This command views the information of the IS-IS enabled interface, including
interface name, IP address, link state of the interface and so on. Besides displaying
all the information shown by the display isis interface command, the display isis
interface verbose command displays such information about the IS-IS parameters
of the interface as CSNP packet broadcast interval, Hello message broadcast
interval and number of invalid Hello messages.
Example
Display the information about the IS-IS enabled interface.
<3Com> display isis interface
Interface IP Address Id Link.Sta IP.Sta MTU Type DR
Ethernet1/0/0 2.1.1.12 001 Up Up 1497 L12 No/No
Display the details of the IS-IS enabled interface.
<3Com> display isis interface verbose

Interface IP Address Id Link.Sta IP.Sta MTU Type DR
Ethernet1/0/0 2.1.1.12 001 Up Up 1497 L12 No/No
Secondary IP Address(es):
Csnp-Interval: L110L210
Hello-Interval: L110L210
Hold Time : L1 30 L2 30
Lsp Interval: 1
Cost : L110L210
Priority : L164L264
Retransmit Interval:5
display isis lsdb Syntax

display isis lsdb [ l1 ] [ l2 ] [ level-1 ] [ local ] [ level-2 ] [ verbose ] [ LSPID ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ l1 and Level-1: Both refer to the link state database of Level-1.
■ l2 and level-2: Both refer to the link state database of Level-2.
■ local: Displays the Contents of the Local LSP Database
■ verbose: Displays the verbose information of the link state database.
■ LSPID: Specifies the LSPID of the network-entity-title.
Description
Using the display isis lsdb command, you can view the link state database of the
IS-IS.
Example
Display the output information of display isis lsdb command.
<3Com> display isis lsdb
IS-IS Level-1 Link State Database

LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum LSP-Holdtime ATT/P/OL
0050.0500.5004.00-00 0x0000000e 0x3670 1084 0/0/0
0050.0500.5005.00-00 0x00000010 0xf94 333 0/0/0
IS-IS Level-2 Link State Database
LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum LSP-Holdtime ATT/P/OL
0050.0500.5004.00-00* 0x0000001d 0x3e8 1089 0/0/0
0050.0500.5005.00-00 0x00000023 0x676e 343 0/0/0
display isis mesh-group Syntax

display isis mesh-group
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display isis mesh-group command, you can view the IS-IS mesh group.
This command is used for displaying the configurations of the mesh-group of the
current router interface.
Example
Add Interface serial1/0/0 and Interface serial2/0/0 running IS-IS into mesh group
100.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis mesh-group 100
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] interface Interface serial2/0/0
Display the information of IS-IS mesh-group.
[3Com-serial2/0/0] display isis mesh-group
Serial1/0/0 100
Serial2/0/0 100
display isis peer Syntax

display isis peer [ verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ verbose: When this parameter is configured, the area address carried in the
Hello message from the peer will be displayed. Otherwise, only the summary
information will be displayed.
Description
Using the display isis peer command, you can view IS-IS peer information.
The display isis peer verbose command yields not only all the outputs of the display
isis peer command, but also the area address, Up time and IP address of the
directly connected interface of the peer.
Example
Display the output information of display isis peer command.
<3Com> display isis peer
NET Interface Id State HoldTime Type
Pri
0001.0002.0002 Ethernet2/0/0 0001.0002.0008.01 Up 26s L1(L12)
64
0001.0002.0002 Ethernet1/0/0 002 Up 29s L1
0
Output more information by using the verbose parameter.
<3Com> display isis peer verbose
NET Interface Id State HoldTime
Type Pri
0001.0002.0002 Ethernet2/0/0 0001.0002.0008.01 Up 24s L1
64
Area Address: 01 02 IP Address: 175.1.19.36 Period: 00:25:30
0001.0002.0002 Ethernet1/0/0 002 Up 27s L1
0
Area Address: 01 02 IP Address: 175.1.19.22 Period: 00:00:51
display isis route Syntax

display isis route
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display isis route command, you can view IS-IS routing information.
Example
View the output information of display isis route command.
<3Com> display isis route
ISIS Level - 1 Forwarding Table :
Type - D -Direct, C -Connected, I -ISIS, S -Static, O -OSPF

B -BGP, R -RIP
Flags: R-Added to RM, L-Advertised in LSPs, U-Up/Down Bit Set
Destination/Mask In.Met Ex.Met NextHop Interface

Flags
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
D 4.0.0.0/8 10 NULL Direct Ethernet2/0/0
R/L/-
I 55.55.0.0/16 20 NULL 4.0.0.2 Ethernet2/0/0
R/L/-
3.0.0.2 Ethernet1/0/0
I 0.0.0.0/0 10 NULL 4.0.0.2 Ethernet2/0/0
R/-/-
3.0.0.2 Ethernet1/0/0
ISIS Level - 2 Forwarding Table :

Type - D -Direct, C -Connected, I -ISIS, S -Static, O -OSPF
B -BGP, R -RIP
Flags: R-Added to RM, L-Advertised in LSPs, U-Up/Down Bit Set
Destination/Mask In.Met Ex.Met NextHop Interface

Flags
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
D 4.0.0.0/8 10 NULL Direct Ethernet2/0/0
R/L/-
D 99.99.0.0/16 10 NULL Direct LoopBack3
R/L/-
display isis spf-log Syntax

display isis spf-log
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display isis spf-log command, you can view the SPF calculation log of the
IS-IS.
Example
View the output information of display isis spf-log command.
<3Com> display isis spf-log
Details of Level 1 SPF Run:
-------------------------------
Trig.Event No.Of NodesDurationStartTime
IS_SPFTRIG_ADJDOWN2023:10:54
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ3023:10:54
IS_SPFTRIG_LSPCHANGE3023:10:54
IS_SPFTRIG_PERIODIC2023:10:37
IS_SPFTRIG_CIRC_UP3023:10:53
Details of Level 2 SPF Run:
-------------------------------
Trig.Event No.Of NodesDurationStartTime
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ4023:10:54
domain-authentication- Syntax
mode domain-authentication-mode { simple | md5 } password [ ip | osi ]
undo domain-authentication-mode { simple | md5 } [ ip | osi ]
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ simple: Transmits the password in simple text.
■ md5: Transmits the password in MD5 encryption.
■ password: Specifies the password to be configured.
■ The configuration of ip or osi authentication password is independent of the
real network environment.
Description
Using the domain-authentication-mode command, you can configure IS-IS route
area to authenticate the received Level-2 routing packets (LSP, CSNP, PSNP),
according to the pre-defined mode and password. Using the undo
domain-authentication-mode command, you can configure IS-IS not to
authenticate the said packets.
In default configuration, the system will not authenticate the received Level-2
routing packets, and there is no password. By using this command, you can
discard all the Layer 2 routing packets, whose area authentication passwords do
not consist with the one set via this command. At the same time, this command
will let IS-IS insert the area authentication password into all the Layer 2 routing
packets sent by this node, in a certain mode.
For the related commands, see area-authentication-mode and isis
authentication-mode.
Example
When you need to authenticate the layer 2 routing packets, you can select the
simple mode, and the password is "3Com".
[3Com] isis
[3Com-isis] domain-authentication-mode simple

filter-policy acl-number export [ protocol ]
undo filter-policy acl-number export [ protocol ]
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ acl-number: Specifies the number of the access control list, ranging from 1 to
199.
■ protocol: Specifies the protocols that distribute routing information, including
direct, static, rip, bgp, ospf, ospf-nssa and ospf-ase at present. Without this
parameter, all the distributed routes will be filtered.
Description
Using the filter-policy export command, you can configure to filter the routes
distributed by IS-IS. Using the undo filter-policy export command, you can cancel
the filtering for the exporting routes.
By default, IS-IS does not filter any distributed routing information.
conditions can be advertised. Then, the filter-policy command can be used to set
the filtering conditions for the routing information to be advertised. Only the
routing information passing the filtering can be advertised.
For the related command, see filter-policy import.
Example
Use acl 6 to filter the routes distributed by IS-IS.
[3Com-isis] filter-policy 6 export

filter-policy acl-number import
undo filter-policy acl-number import
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ acl-number: Specifies the number of the access control list, ranging from 1 to
199.
Description
Using the filter-policy import command, you can configure to filter the routes
received by IS-IS. Using the undo filter-policy import command, you can configure
not to filter the received routes.
By default, IS-IS does not filter the received routing information.
In some cases, only the routing information meeting the specified conditions will
be accepted. You can configure thefilter-policy to specify the filter conditions so as
to accept the desired routing information only.
For the related command, see filter-policy export.
Example
Filter the received routes by using acl 3.
[3Com-isis] filter-policy 3 import
ignore-lsp-checksum-err Syntax
or ignore-lsp-checksum-error
undo ignore-lsp-checksum-error
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ignore-lsp-checksum-error command, you can configure the IS-IS to
ignore the checksum error of LSP. Using the undo ignore-lsp-checksum-error
command, you can configure the IS-IS not to ignore the checksum error of LSP.
By default, the checksum error of LSP is not ignored.
After receiving an LSP packet, the local IS-IS will calculate its checksum and
compares the result with the checksum in the LSP packet. This process is the
checksum authentication over the received LSP. By default, if the checksum in the
packet is found not in consistent with the calculated result, the LSP will be
discarded without being processed. Moreover, if ignoring checksum error is set
with the ignore-lsp-checksum-error command, the packet will be processed as a
normal one even if the checksum error is found.
Example
Configure to ignore the checksum error of LSP.
[3Com-isis] ignore-lsp-checksum-error
import-route Syntax
import-route protocol [ cost value ] [ type { external | internal } ] [ level-1 ] [
level-1-2 ] [ level-2 ] [ route-policy route-policy-name ]
undo import-route protocol [ cost value ] [ type { external | internal } ] [ level-1 ] [
level-1-2 ] [ level-2 ] [ route-policy route-policy-name ]
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ protocol: Specifies source routing protocols which can be imported, including
direct, bgp, ospf, ospf-nssa , ospf-ase, rip and static at present.
■ cost value: Specifies the route cost of the imported route, ranging from 0 to
63.
■ level-1: Imports the route into Level-1 routing table.
■ level-2: Imports the route into Level-2 routing table.
■ level-1-2: Imports the route into Level-1-2 routing table.

■ If the level for importing the route is not specified in the command, it defaults
to import the routes into Level-1 and Level-2, i.e. Level-1-2 routing table.
■ route-policy route-policy-name: Imports only the routes matching the specified
route-policy.
Description
Using the import-route command, you can configure IS-IS to filter the imported
routes. Using the undo import-route command, you can configure IS-IS not to
import the routing information of other protocols.
By default, IS-IS does not import routing information from any other protocols.
For IS-IS, the routes discovered by other routing protocols are processed as the
routes outside the routing domain. When importing the routes of other protocols,
you can specify the default cost for them. If OSPF routes are imported, you can
also specify the cost type for them.
When IS-IS imports routes, you can specify to import the routes to Level-1, Level-2
or Level-1-2.
IS-IS regards all the routes imported into the routing domain as the external
routes, which describe the way how to select the routes to the destination outside
the routing domain.
Example
Import a static route with cost 15.
[3Com-isis] import-route static cost 15
import-route isis Syntax

import-route isis level-2 into level-1 [acl acl-list ]
undo import-route isis level-2 into level-1 [ acl acl-list ]
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ acl-list: ACL number. When configuring routing leak from Level-2 to Level-1,
only the routes that are permitted by ACL can be imported to Level-1 area if an
ACL has been specified.
Description
Using the import-route isis level-2 into level-1 command, you can enable routing
information in a Level-2 area to be imported to a Level-1 area. Using the undo
import-route isis level-2 into level-1 command, you can remove the function.
By default, routing information in a Level-2 area is not imported to a Level-1 area.
Example
Import routing information of a router from a Level-2 area to a Level-1 area.
[3Com] acl number 100 permit any
[3Com] isis
[3Com-isis] import-route isis level2 into level1 acl 100
isis Syntax
isis [ tag ]
undo isis [ tag ]
View
System view
Parameter
■ tag: Name given to the IS-IS process. The name length should be no longer
than 128 characters. It can be 0, which means null.
Description
Using the isis command, you can enable the corresponding IS-IS routing process
and enter the IS-IS view. Using the undo isis command, you can cancel the
specified IS-IS routing process.
By default, IS-IS routing process is not started
For the normal operation of the IS-IS protocol, the isis command must be used to
enable the IS-IS process. Then the network-entity command is used to set a
Network Entity Title (NET) for the router. And, at last, the isis enable command is
used to enable each interface on which the IS-IS process runs. The IS-IS protocol is
actually enabled upon the completion of these configurations.
Only one IS-IS routing process can be started on one router.
For the related commands, see isis enable and network-entity.
Example
Start an IS-IS routing process, in which the system ID is 0000.0000.0002 and the
area ID is 01.0001.
[3Com] isis
[3Com-isis] network-entity 01.0001.0000.0000.0002.00
isis authentication-mode Syntax

isis authentication-mode { simple | md5 } password [ { level-1 | level-2 } [ ip | osi ] ]
undo isis authentication-mode { simple | md5 } password [ { level-1 | level-2 } [ ip |
osi ] ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ simple: Transmit the authentication password in simple text.
■ md5: Transmit the authentication password in MD5 encryption.
■ password: Specifies the authentication password.
■ level-1: Configures authentication password for Level-1.
■ level-2: Configures authentication password for Level-2.

The configuration of ip or osi authentication password is independent of the real

network environment.
Description
Using the isis authentication-mode command, you can configure the IS-IS to
authenticate the hello messages of the corresponding level, in the specified mode
and with the specified password on the IS-IS interface. Using the undo isis
authentication-mode command, you can cancel the authentication and delete the
password at the same time.
By default, the password is not set and no authentication is executed.
If the password is set, but no parameter is specified, the default settings are
Level-1, simple and osi.
For the related commands, see area-authentication-mode and
domain-authentication-mode.
Example
Set the authentication password "tangshi" in simple text for the Level-1
neighboring relationship onInterface serial1/0/0.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis authentication-mode simple tangshi level-1
isis circuit-level Syntax

isis circuit-level [ level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 ]
undo isis circuit-level
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ level-1: Configures only Level-1 adjacency instead of Level-2 one on the current
interface.
■ level-1-2: Configures both Level-1 and Level-2 adjacency on the current
interface.
■ level-2: Configures only Level-2 adjacency on the current interface.
Description
Using the isis circuit-level command, you can configure the link adjacency
relationship. Using the undo isis circuit-level command, you can restore the default
setting.
By default, you can configure both Level-1 and Level-2 adjacency on the interface.
If the local router is a Level-1-2 router and it is required to establish a correlation
with the peer router on a certain level (Level-1 or Level-2), this command can
specify the interface to send and receive hello messages of this level. Certainly,
only one type of hello message is sent and received on the point-to-point link. In
this way, excessive processing is avoided, and the bandwidth is saved.
Only when system type of IS-IS is Level-1-2, can the circuit level take effect.
Otherwise, take the level defined via is-level command as the standard.
For the related command, see is-level.
Example
When interface serial1/0/0 is connected with a non-backbone router in the same
area, you can set this interface as Level-1, prohibiting the sending and receiving of
Level-2 hello messages.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis enable
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis circuit-level level-1
isis cost Syntax

isis cost value [ level-1 | level-2 ]
undo isis cost [ level-1 | level-2 ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ value: Specifies the link cost used in the SPF calculation of corresponding level.
By default, the value is 10. When the cost type is “narrow”, its range is 1
through 63; when the cost type is wide, its range is 1 to 16777215.
■ level-1: Indicates that the link cost corresponds to Level-1
■ level-2: Indicates that the link cost corresponds to Level-2
Description
Using the isis cost command, you can configure the link cost of this interface
when performing SPF calculation. Using the undo isis cost command, you can
restore the default link cost.
If neither Level-1 nor Level-2 is specified in the configuration, Level-1 will be the
default value.
The link cost for interfaces will effect the calculation of IS-IS routes.
For the related command, see cost-style.
Example
Set the link cost of the Level-2 link on Interface serial1/0/0 to 5.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis cost 5 level-2
isis dis-priority Syntax

isis dis-priority value [ level-1 | level-2 ]
undo isis dis-priority [ level-1 | level-2 ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ value: Specifies the priority when selecting DIS, ranging from 0 to 127.By
■ level-1: Specifies the priority when selecting Level-1 DIS.
■ level-2: Specifies the priority when selecting Level-2 DIS.
Description
Using the isis dis-priority command, you can configure the priority of an interface
for the corresponding level DIS election. Using the undo isis dis-priority command,
you can restore the default priority.
If the level is not specified, it defaults to set the Level-2 priority.
The IS-IS does not concern the concept of backup DIS. The router with the priority
0 can also run for the DIS, which is different from the DR election of OSPF.
Example
Set the priority of Interface serial1/0/0 to 127.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis dis-priority127 level-2
isis enable Syntax

isis enable [ tag ]
undo isis enable [ tag ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ tag: Name given to an IS-IS routing process, when executing isis command in
the system view. If not specified, it is null.
Description
Using the isis enable command, you can configure this interface to activate the
corresponding IS-IS routing process. Using the undo isis enable command, you can
cancel this designation.
By default, the IS-IS routing process is not enabled on an interface.
For the normal operation of the IS-IS protocol, the isis command must be used to
enable the IS-IS process. Then the network-entity command is used to set a
Network Entity Title (NET) for the router. And, at last, the isis enable command is
used to enable each interface on which the IS-IS process runs. The IS-IS protocol
will be enabled upon the completion of these configurations.
For the related commands, see isis and network-entity.
So far, a router can enable the IS-IS process on 255 interfaces at most, including
logic interfaces such as subinterfaces.
Example
Create an IS-IS routing process named "3Com", and activate this routing process
on interface serial1/0/0.
[3Com] isis 3Com
[3Com-isis] quit
[3Com-serial1/0/0] isis enable 3Com
isis mesh-group Syntax

isis mesh-group [ mesh-group-number | mesh-blocked ]
undo isis mesh-group
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ mesh-group-number: Specifies the mesh group number, ranging from 1 to
4294967295.
■ mesh-blocked: Blocks a specified interface, so that it will not flood the received
LSP to other interfaces.
Description
Using the isis mesh-group command, you can add an interface to a specified
mesh group. Using the undo isis mesh-group command, you can cancel this
interface from the mesh group.
By default, the interface does not belong to any mesh group and floods LSP
normally.
The interface beyond the mesh group floods the received LSP to other interfaces,
following the normal procedure. This processing method applied to an NBMA
network with higher connectivity and several point-to-point links will cause
repeated LSP flooding and waste bandwidth.
The interface joining a mesh group only floods the received LSP to the interfaces
beyond the local mesh group.
Be sure to provide some redundancy when adding an interface to a mesh group or
blocking it, for avoiding the effect on the normal flooding of the LSP due to link
failure.
Example
Add interface serial1/0/0 to mesh group 3.
isis timer csnp Syntax

isis timer csnp seconds [ level-1 | level-2 ]
undo isis timer csnp [ level-1 | level-2 ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ seconds: Specifies the CSNP packet interval on the broadcast network, ranging
from 1 to 65535 and measured in seconds. By default, the value is 10 seconds.
■ level-1: Specifies the Level-1 CSNP packet interval.
■ level-2: Specifies the Level-2 CSNP packet interval.
■ If neither Level-1 nor Level-2 is specified, it defaults to set Level-1-2 Hello
message interval, that is, both Level-1 and Level-2 take effect.
Description
Using the isis timer csnp command, you can configure the interval of sending
CSNP packets on the broadcast network. Using the undo isis timer csnp
command, you can restore the default value, that is, 10 seconds.
Only DIS can periodically send CSNP packets, therefore, this command is valid only
for the router that is selected as the DIS. Furthermore, DIS is divided into Level-1
and Level-2, and their intervals of sending CSNP packets must be set respectively.
Example
Set the Level-2 CSNP packet to be transmitted every 15 seconds on the interface
Serial1/0/0.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis timer csnp 15 level-2
isis timer dead Syntax

isis timer dead seconds [ level-1 | level-2 ]
undo isis timer dead [ level-1 | level-2 ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ seconds: Specifies the dead interval, ranging from 9 to 65535 and measured in
seconds. The default value is 30 seconds.
■ level-1: Specifies the Level-1 dead interval.
■ level-2: Specifies the Level-2 dead interval.
■ If neither Level-1 nor Level-2 is specified, it is defaulted to Level-2 dead interval.
Description
Using the isis timer dead command, you can configure the interval of determining
the neighbor router is dead (or invalid). Using the undo isis timer dead command,
you can restore the default value, that is, 10 seconds.
If the router does not receive hello message from its neighbor in specified time,
the router will determine that the neighbor is dead (or invalid). Usually, user set
this time 3 times of hello interval. That is to say, if the router does not receive hello
message from its neighbor 3 times, it would determine that the neighbor is dead.
User can adjust this parameter according to the network.
For the related command, see isis timer hello.
Example
Set the dead interval of Level-2 to 60 seconds on Interface serial1/0/0.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis timer dead 20 level-2
isis timer hello Syntax

isis timer hello seconds [ level-1 | level-2 ]
undo isis timer hello [ level-1 | level-2 ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ seconds: Specifies the Hello message interval, ranging from 3 to 255 and
measured in seconds. The default value is 10 seconds.
■ level-1: Specifies the Level-1 Hello interval.
■ level-2: Specifies the Level-2 Hello interval.
■ If neither Level-1 nor Level-2 is specified, it is defaulted to Level-1-2 Hello
message interval, that is, both Level-1 and Level-2 take effect.
Description
Using the isis timer hello command, you can configure the interval of sending
hello message of corresponding level. Using the undo isis timer hello command,
you can restore the default value, that is, 10 seconds.
On a broadcast link, Level-1 and Level-2 hello messages will be sent respectively
and their intervals should also be set respectively. Such settings are unnecessary on
point-to-point links. The shorter the sending interval is, the more system resources
are occupied to send hello messages. Therefore, the interval should be set
according to actual conditions.
For the related command, see isis timer dead.
Example
Set the Hello message of Level-1 to be transmitted every 20 seconds on Interface
serial1/0/0.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis timer hello 20 level-1
isis timer lsp Syntax

isis timer lsp time
undo isis timer lsp
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ time: Specifies the LSP interval, ranging from 1 to 1000 and measured in
milliseconds. The default value is 33 milliseconds.
Description
Using the isis timer lsp command, you can configure minimum IS-IS LSP interval on
the interface. Using the undo isis timer lsp command, you can restore the default
setting.
For the related command, see isis timer retransmit.
Example
Set the LSP interval on Interface serial1/0/0 to 500 milliseconds.
[3Com] interface Interface serial1/0/0
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis timer lsp 500
isis timer retransmit Syntax

isis timer retransmit seconds
undo isis timer retransmit
View
Interface view
Parameter
■ seconds: Specifies the retransmission interval of LSP packets, with the range
from 0 to 300 and the default value is 5 seconds.
Description
Using the isis timer retransmit command, you can configure the LSP retransmission
interval over the point-to-point link. Using the undo isis timer retransmit
command, you can restore the default setting.
Use this parameter cautiously when setting this parameter to avoid unnecessary
retransmission.
The response is required when sending LSP packets on the p2p link, not the
broadcast link, and therefore this command is unnecessary for the broadcast link.
For the related command, see isis timer lsp.
Example
Set the LSP retransmission interval to 10 seconds on Interface serial1/0/0.
[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis timer retransmit 10
is-level Syntax
is-level { level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 }
undo is-level
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ level-1: Configures the router to operate at Level-1, only calculate the
intra-area routes and maintain the LSDB of L1.
■ level-1-2: Configures the router to operate at Level-1-2, calculate both the L1
and L2 routes and maintain the LSDB of Level-1 and Level-2.
■ level-2: Configures the router to operate at Level-2, only switch Level-2 LSP and
calculate the Level-2 routes and maintain the LSDB of Level-2.
Description
Using the is-level command, you can configure the IS-IS level. Using the undo
is-level command, you can restore the default setting.
By default, the value is level-1-2.
You are recommended to set the system level when configuring IS-IS.
If there is only one area, you are recommended to set the level of all the routers as
Level-1 or Level-2, because it is not necessary for all the routers to maintain two
identical databases. You are recommended to set all the routers to Level-2 for
convenient future extension, when applying them to IP network.
For the related command, see isis circuit-level.
Example
Set the current router to operate on Level-1.
[3Com] isis
[3Com-isis] is-level level-1
log-peer-change Syntax
log-peer-change
undo log-peer-change
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the log-peer-change command, you can configure to log the IS-IS adjacency
changes. Using the undo log-peer-change command, you can configure not to log
the IS-IS adjacency changes.
By default, IS-IS adjacency changes log is disabled.
After IS-IS adjacency changes log is enabled, the IS-IS adjacency changes will be
output on the configuration terminal until the log is disabled.
Example
Configure to log the IS-IS adjacency changes on the current router.
[3Com-isis] log-peer-change
network-entity Syntax
network-entity net
undo network-entity net
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ net: Specifies the NET (Network Entity Title ) in the X…X.XXXX....XXXX.00
format, in which the first "X…X" is the area address, the twelve Xs in the
middle is the System ID of the router, and the 00 in the end is SEL.
Description
Using the network-entity command, you can configure the name of Network
Entity Title (NET) of the IS-IS routing process. Using the undo network-entity
command, you can cancel a NET.
By default, the value is No NET.
NET means the Network Service Access Point (NSAP). The NET field of IS-IS is 8 to
20 bytes.
It consists of three parts. Part one is area ID, which is variable (1 to 13 bytes), and
the area IDs of the routers in the same area are identical. Part two is system ID (6
bytes) of this router, which must be unique in the whole area and backbone area.
Part three, the last byte "SEL", whose value must be "00". Usually, one router can
be configured with one NET. When the area is redesigned by combination or
separation, after reconfiguration, the correctness and continuity of the routes
must be ensured.
For the related commands, see isis and isis enable.
Example
Specify NET as “10.0001.1010.1020.1030.00”, in which the system ID is
“1010.1020.1030”, area ID is “10.0001”.
[3Com] isis
preference Syntax
preference value
undo preference
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ value: Specifies the preference, ranging from1 to 255. By default, the value is
15.
Description
Using the preference command, you can configure the preference of IS-IS
protocol. Using the undo preference command, you can restore the default value.
Several dynamic routing protocols could run simultaneously on a router. In this
case, there is an issue of sharing and selecting the routing information among all
the routing protocols. The system sets a preference for each routing protocol.
When various routing protocols find the route to the same destination, the
protocol with the higher preference will take effect.
Example
Configure the preference of IS-IS as 25.
[3Com-isis] preference 25
reset isis all Syntax

reset isis all
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reset isis all command, you can reset all the IS-IS data.
This command is used when LSPs need refreshing immediately. For example, after
area-authentication-mode and domain-authentication-mode commands are
executed, the old LSP still remain on the router.
Example
Clear all the IS-IS data.
<3Com> reset isis all
reset isis peer Syntax

reset isis peer system-id
View
User view
Parameter
■ system-id: Specifiesy the system ID of IS-IS neighbor.
Description
Using the reset isis peer command, you can reset the IS-IS data of specified IS-IS
neighbor.
This command is used when you want to reconfigure a certain neighbor.
Example
Clear the IS-IS data of neighbor whose system ID is 0000.0c11.1111.
<3Com> reset isis peer 0000.0c11.1111
set-overload Syntax
set-overload
undo set-overload
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the set-overload command, you can configure overload flag bit for the
current router. Using the undo set-overload command, you can reset the overload
flag bit.
By default, no overload bit is set.
If a router is configured with the overload bit, it will be ignored by other routers in
SPF calculation. (However the directly connected routes will not be ignored.)
When the overload threshold is set, other routers should not send this router the
packets which should be forwarded by it.
Example
Set overload flag bit on the current router.
[3Com-isis] set-overload
silent-interface Syntax
silent-interface interface-type interface-number
undo silent-interface interface-type interface-number
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ interface-type: Specifies the interface type.
■ interface-number: Specifies the interface number.
Description
Using the silent-interface command, you can disable a specified interface to
transmit IS-IS packet. Using the undo silent-interface command, you can enable
the interface to transmit IS-IS packet.
By default, all the interface are allowed to transmit/receive IS-IS packets.
The silent-interface command is only used to restrain the IS-IS packets not to be
sent on the interface, but the interface routes still can be sent from other
interfaces.
Example
Prohibit the IS-IS packets to be transmitted via Interface Ethernet1/0/0.
[3Com-isis] silent-interface Ethernet1/0/0
spf-delay-interval Syntax
spf-delay-interval number
undo spf-delay-interval
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ number: Interval for actively releasing CPU in route calculation. It is in pieces,
Description
Using the spf-delay-interval command, you can configure the interval for actively
releasing CPU in the SPF calculation. Using the undo spf-delay-interval command,
When there are a large number of routes in the routing table, this command can
be used to set that CPU resources are released automatically after a certain
number of routes are processed. The unprocessed routes will be processed in one
second.
The value of the parameter number can be adjusted according to the capacity of
the routing table. If the spf-slice-size command is also configured, the SPF
calculation will be paused when any setting item is met.
By default, CPU is released once when every 5000 pieces of routes are processed.
For the related command, see spf-slice-size.
Example
Set IS-IS to release CPU once after processing every 3000 pieces of routes.
[3Com-isis] spf-delay-interval 3000
spf-slice-size Syntax
spf-slice-size seconds
undo spf-slice-size
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ seconds: Duration time in seconds for SPF calculation each time in the range
from 0 to 120. When the calculation duration time reaches or exceeds the set
value, the calculation of this time ends. If seconds is set to 0, it indicates that
SPF calculation is not divided into slices and it will operate until the end. By
Description
Using the spf-slice-size command, you can configure whether to set slice and the
duration time each time when IS-IS performs SPF route calculation. Using the undo
spf-slice-size command, you can restore the default setting.
When there are a large number of routes in the routing table, this command can
be used to enable the SPF calculation in slices to prevent it from occupying the
system resources for a long time. Each time the router processes some route
information, it will free CPU to process other things, and process route
information after 1 second.
The user is recommended to use the command when the number of routes
reaches 150,000 or 200,000 and the value of seconds is recommended as 1. In
other cases, the default setting should be used, that is, SPF runs to the end with
no slice.
If the spf-delay-interval command is also configured, when SPF calculation is run,
the SPF calculation will be paused if any setting item is met.
For the related command, see spf-delay-interval.
Example
Set the SPF duration time to 1 second.
[3Com-isis] spf-slice-size 1
summary Syntax
summary ip-address mask [ level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 ]
undo summary ip-address mask [ level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 ]
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ ip-address: Address segment of the routes to be aggregated.
■ mask: Aggregated route mask.
■ level-1: Aggregates the routes imported into Level-1.
■ level-1-2: Aggregates the routes imported to both areas and backbone
network.
■ level-2: Aggregates the routes imported to backbone network only.
Description
Using the summary command, you can configure IS-IS route summary. Using the
undo summary command, you can cancel the summary.
By default, no routes will be summarized.
Similarly, the routes with the same next hops can be aggregated into one route. In
this way, the sizes of the routing table, LSP packets and LSDB are reduced. Among
them, the aggregated route can be either a route found by IS-IS protocol, or an
imported route. Furthermore, the cost value of the aggregated route adopts the
smallest cost of the routes aggregated.
Example
Set a route summary of 202.0.0.0/8.
[3Com-isis] summary 202.0.0.0 255.0.0.0
timer lsp-max-age Syntax

timer lsp-max-age seconds
undo timer lsp-max-age
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ seconds: Specifies the maximum lifetime of LSP, measured in seconds. The
range is 1 to 65535. The default value is 1200 seconds.
Description
Using the timer lsp-max-age command, you can configure the maximum lifetime
of an LSP generated by the current router. Using the undo timer lsp-max-age
When a router generates the LSP of the system, it will fill in the maximum lifetime
of this LSP. When other routers receive this LSP, its lifetime will be reduced
continuously as the time goes by. If updated LSP has not been received before the
old one times out, this LSP will be deleted from the LSDB.
For the related command, see timer lsp-refresh.
Example
Set the lifetime of an LSP generated by the current system to 25 minutes, i.e.,
1500 seconds.
[3Com-isis] timer lsp-max-age 1500
timer lsp-refresh Syntax

timer lsp-refresh seconds
undo timer lsp-refresh
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ seconds: Specifies the LSP refresh interval, measured in seconds. The range is 1
Description
Using the timer lsp-refresh command, you can configure the refresh interval of LSP.
Using the undo timer lsp-refresh command, you can restore the default value.
By this mechanism, synchronization of the LSPs within the entire area can be
maintained.
For the related command, see timer lsp-max-age.
Example
Set the LSP refresh interval of the current system to 1500 seconds.
[3Com-isis] timer lsp-refresh 1500
timer spf Syntax

timer spf seconds [ level-1 | level-2 ]
undo timer spf [ level-1 | level-2 ]
View
IS-IS view
Parameter
■ seconds: Specifies the SPF calculation interval, ranging from 1 to 120 and
measured in seconds. The default value is 5 seconds.
■ level-1: Sets Level-1 SPF calculation interval only.
■ level-2: Sets Level-2 SPF calculation interval only.
■ If the level is not specified, it defaults to SPF interval of Level-1.
Description
Using the timer spf command, you can configure the interval for the SPF
calculation.Using the undo timer spf command, you can restore the default
setting.
In IS-IS protocol, when the LSDB of the corresponding level is changed, SPF
calculation is required. However, if the SPF calculation is performed too frequently,
the system efficiency will be lowered and a great number of resources on the
network will be occupied. SPF calculation interval can improve its calculation
efficiency to some degree. This setting can be made according to actual
conditions.
Example
Set the SPF calculation interval of the router to 3 seconds.
[3Com-isis] timer spf 3
BGP Configuration For the commands defining routing policies in BGP, refer to the "IP Routing Policy Configuration
Commands Commands" of the next chapter.
For the configuration examples and parameter explanation of VPNv4 and VPN
instance in BGP, refer to the "Multicast" module and "MPLS" module of this
manual.
aggregate Syntax
aggregate address mask [ as-set ] [ detail-suppressed ] [ suppress-policy
route-policy-name ] [ origin-policy route-policy-name ] [ attribute-policy
route-policy-name ]
undo aggregate address mask [ as-set ] [ detail-suppressed ] [ suppress-policy
route-policy-name ] [ origin-policy route-policy-name ] [ attribute-policy
route-policy-name ]
View
BGP view
Parameter
■ address: Address of the aggregated route, in dotted decimal notation.
■ mask: Network mask of the aggregated route, in dotted decimal notation.
■ as-set: Creates a route with AS segment.
■ detail-suppressed: Only advertise the aggregated route.
■ suppress-policy route-policy-name: Suppresses the specific route selected,
some of which are not advertised.
■ origin-policy route-policy-name: Selects the originating routes used for
aggregation.
■ attribute-policy route-policy-name: Sets the attributes of the aggregated route.
Description
Using the aggregate command, you can establish an aggregated record in the BGP
routing table. Using the undo aggregate command, you can cancel the function.
By default, there is no route aggregation.
The keywords are explained as follows:
Table 4 Functions of the keywords
Keywords Function
Used to create an aggregated route, whose AS path information
includes detailed routes. Use this keyword carefully when many AS
paths need to be aggregated, for the frequent change of routes may
as-set lead to route vibration.
This keyword does not establish any aggregated route, but it restrains
the advertisement of all the specific routes. If only some specific routes
detail-suppressed are to be restrained, use the peer filter-policy command carefully.
Create an aggregated route with this keyword, at the same time, the
advertisement of the specified route is restrained. If you want to restrain
some specific routes selectively and leaves other routes still being
suppress-policy advertised, use the if-match clause of the route-policy command.
Select only the specific routes that are in accordance with route-policy
origin-policy to create an aggregated route.
Set aggregated route attributes. The same work can be done by using
attribute-policy peer route-policy, etc.
Example
Establish an aggregated record in the BGP routing table.
[3Com-bgp] aggregate 192.213.0.0 255.255.0.0
balance Syntax
balance num
undo balance
View
BGP view
Parameter
■ num: Number of BGP load sharing routes. Their ranges are defined according
to the router types. You can get prompt information by inputting “?” at its
location to confirm the current product range.When num is 1, it indicates there
is no route to perform load sharing.
Description
Using the balance command, you can configure the number of routes performing
BGP load sharing. Using the undo balance command, you can restore the default
value.
By default, no load sharing is performed.
Different from IGP protocol, there is no specific indication for BGP to perform load
sharing. The load sharing of BGP is implemented by changing its routing rules.
For the related command, see display ip routing-table.
Example
Configure 2 routes to perform load sharing.
[3Com] bgp 100
[3Com-bgp] balance 2
bgp Syntax
bgp as-number
undo bgp [ as-number ]
View
System view
Parameter
as-number: Specifies local AS number, ranging from 1 to 65535.
Description
Using the bgp command, you can enable BGP and enter the BGP view. Using the
undo bgp command, you can disable BGP.
By default, BGP is not enabled.
This command is used to enable and disable BGP as well as to specify the local AS
number of BGP.
Example
Enable BGP.
[3Com] bgp 100
[3Com-bgp]
compare-different-as-me Syntax
d compare-different-as-med
undo compare-different-as-med
View
BGP unicast view, BGP multicast view, VPNv4 view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the compare-different-as-med command, you can enable comparison of
MED values from different AS neighboring routes when determining the best
route. Using the undo compare-different-as-med command, you can disable the
comparison.
By default, it is disabled to compare the MED attribute values from the routing
paths of different AS peers.
If there are several routes available to one destination address, the route with
smaller MED parameter can be selected as the final route item.
You are not recommended to use this command unless you can make sure that
the ASs adopt the same IGP and routing method.
Example
Enable the comparison of the MED attribute values from different AS neighboring
route paths.
[3Com-bgp] compare-different-as-med
confederation id Syntax
confederation id as-number
undo confederation id
View
BGP view
Parameter
■ as-number: Number of the AS which contains multiple sub-ASs. The range is
from 1 to 65535.
Description
Using the confederation id command, you can configure confederation identifier.
Using the undo confederation id command, you can cancel the BGP confederation
specified by parameter as-number.
By default, the confederation ID is not configured.
Confederation can be adopted to solve the problem of too many IBGP full
connections in a large AS domain. The solution is, first dividing the AS domain into
several smaller sub-ASs, and each sub-ASs remains full-connected. These sub-ASs
form a confederation. Key IGP attributes of the route, such as next hop, MED,
local preference, are not discarded across each sub-ASs. The sub-ASs still look like
a whole from the point of view of a confederation although these sub-ASs have
EBGP relations. This can assure the integrality of the former AS domain, and ease
the problem of too many connections in the domain
For the related commands, see confederation nonstandard and confederation
peer-as.
Example
Confederation 9 consists of four sub-ASs, namely, 38, 39, 40 and 41. Here, the
peer 10.1.1.1 is an internal member of the AS confederation while the peer
200.1.1.1 is an external member of the AS confederation. For external members,
Confederation 9 is a unified AS domain.
[3Com] bgp 41
[3Com-bgp] confederation id 9
[3Com-bgp] confederation peer-as 38 39 40
[3Com-bgp] peer 10.1.1.1 as-number 38
confederation Syntax
nonstandard confederation nonstandard
undo confederation nonstandard
View
BGP view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the confederation nonstandard command, the router can be compatible
with the AS confederation not adopting RFC1965. Using the undo confederation
nonstandard command, you can cancel this function.
By default, the configured confederation is consistent with RFC1965.
All the 3Com routers in the confederation should be configured with this
command for interworking with those nonstandard devices.
For the related commands, see confederation id and confederation peer-as.
Example
AS100 contains routers following nonstandard, which is composed of two
sub-ASs, 64000 and 65000.
[3Com] bgp 64000
[3Com-bgp] confederation id 100
[3Com-bgp] confederation peer-as 65000
[3Com-bgp] confederation nonstandard
confederation peer-as Syntax

confederation peer-as as-number-1 [ ......as-number-n ]
undo confederation peer-as [ as-number-1 ] [......as-number-n ]
View
BGP view
Parameter
■ as-number-1...as-number-n: Sub-AS number, ranging from 1 to 65535. This
command can configure a maximum of 32 sub-Ass belonging to the
confederation.
Description
Using the confederation peer-as command, you can configure a confederation
consisting of which sub-ASs. Using the undo confederation peer-as command, you
can cancel the specified sub-AS in the confederation.
By default, no autonomous system is configured as a member of the
confederation.
The configured sub-ASs in this command is inside a confederation and each
sub-AS uses fully meshed network. The confederation id command is used to
specify the confederation to which each sub-AS belongs. This configuration is
invalid before this command is performed.
For the related commands, see confederation nonstandard and confederation id.
Example
Configure the confederation that contains AS 2000 and 2001.
[3Com-bgp] confederation peer-as 2000 2001
dampening Syntax
dampening [ half-life-reachable half-life-unreachable reuse suppress ceiling ] [
route-policy policy-name ]
undo dampening
View
BGP view
Parameter
■ half-life-reachable: Specifies the half-life when the route is reachable. The
range is 1 to 45 minutes. By default, the value is 15 minutes.
■ half-life-unreachable: Specifies the half-life when the route is unreachable. The
range is 1 to 45 minutes. By default, the value is 15 minutes.
■ reuse: Penalty value of a route when it starts to be reused. The range is 1 to
20000. By default, its value is 750 .
■ suppress: Penalty threshold of a route when it starts to be suppressed. The
range is 1 to 20000. By default, its value is 2000.
■ ceiling: Upper threshold of the penalty. The range is 1001 to 20000. By default,
its value is 16000.
■ policy-name: Route policy name.
Description
Using the dampening command, you can make BGP route attenuation valid or
modify various BGP route attenuation parameters. Using the undo dampening
command, you can make the characteristics invalid.
By default, no route attenuation is configured.
If the parameters are not set, the BGP route attenuation is valid and each
parameter is taken as the default value. half-life-reachable, half-life-unreachable
,reuse, suppress and ceiling are mutually dependent. Once any parameter is
configured, all other parameters should also be specified.
For the related command, see reset dampening, reset bgp flap-info, display bgp
routing-table dampened, and display bgp routing-table flap-info.
Example
Modify various BGP route attenuation parameters.
[3Com-bgp] dampening 15 15 1000 2000 10000
debugging bgp Syntax

debugging bgp { all | event | keepalive | open | packet | route-refresh | update } [
receive | send ] [ verbose ]
View
User view
Parameter
■ all: Enables all BGP information debugging.
■ event: Enables BGP event information debugging.
■ keepalive: Enables BGP Keepalive packet information debugging.
■ open: Enables BGP Open packet information debugging.
■ packet: Enables BGP packet information debugging.
■ route-refresh: Enables BGP route-refresh packet information debugging.
■ update: Enables BGP Update packet information debugging.
Description
Using the debugging bgp all command, you can enable all the information
debugging of BGP packets and events.
Using the debugging bgp event command, you can enable the information
debugging of BGP events.
Using the debugging bgp keepalive command, you can enable the information
debugging of BGP Keepalive packets.
Using the debugging bgp packet command, you can enable the information
debugging of BGP packets.
System performance is influenced when information debugging is enabled.
Therefore, this command should be used cautiously. You should disable it after
debugging.
Example
Enable the information debugging of BGP packets.
<3Com> debugging bgp packet
default local-preference Syntax

default local-preference value
undo default local-preference
View
Parameter
■ value: Default local preference to be configured. The range is 0 to
4294967295, the larger the value is, the higher the preference is. By default, its
value is 100.
Description
Using the default local-preference command, you can configure the default local
preference. Using the undo default local-preference command, you can restore
the default value.
Configuring different local preferences will affect BGP routing selection.
Example
The two routers RTA and RTB in the same autonomous area use X.25 and Frame
Relay protocols separately to connect with external autonomous areas. The
command can be used to configure the default local preference of RTB as 180 so
that the route via RTB is selected first when the same route goes through RTA and
RTB at the same time.
[3Com-bgp] default local-preference 180
default med Syntax

default med med-value
undo default med
View
BGP unicast view, BGP multicast view, VPNv4 view, VPN instance view
Parameter
■ med-value: MED value to be specified. The range is 0 to 4294967295. By
default, the med-value is 0.
Description
Using the default med command, you can configure the system MED value. Using
the undo default med command, you can restore the default value of metric.
Multi-Exit Distinguish (MED) is the external metric of a route. Different from local
preference, MED is exchanged between ASs and will stay in the AS. MED indicates
the attribute of a route. The smaller an MED is, the better a route is. So the route
with a low MED is preferred.When a router running BGP obtains several routes
with identical destination address and different next-hops from various external
peers, it will select the best route depending on the MED value. In the case that all
other conditions are the same, the system first selects the route with the smaller
MED value as the external route of the autonomous system.
Example
Routers RTA and RTB belong to AS100 and router RTC belongs to AS200. RTC is
the peer of RTA and RTB. The network between RTA and RTC is X.25 network and
the network between RTB and RTC is Ethernet. So the MED of RTA can be
configured as 25 to allow RTC to select the route transmitted by RTB first.
[3Com-bgp] default med 25
display bgp group Syntax

display bgp [ multicast | [ vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher route-distinguisher |
vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } ] ] group [ group-name ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ group-name: A specified peer group.
■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Name of vpn instance.
Description
Using the display bgp group command, you can view the information of peer
groups.
Example
View the information of the peer group "aaa".
<3Com> display bgp group aaa
group : aaa no as-number still
members in this group :
Description : aaa
route-policy specified in export policy : aaa
filter-policy specified in export policy : list no.30304410
acl specified in export policy : list no.30304410
ip-prefix specified in export policy : aaa
route-policy specified in import policy : aaa
filter-policy specified in import policy : list no.30304410
acl specified in import policy : list no.30304410
ip-prefix specified in import policy : aaa
with Route-policy aaa
display bgp network Syntax

display bgp [ multicast | [ vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher route-distinguisher |
vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } ] ] network
View
Any view
Parameter
vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Name of VPN instance.
route-distinguisher route-distinguisher: Name of route-distinguisher.
Description
Using the display bgp network command, you can view the routing information
that has been configured.
Example
View the routing information that has been configured.
<3Com> display bgp network
NetworkMask Route-policy
133.1.1.0255.255.255.0None
112.1.0.0255.255.0.0None
display bgp paths Syntax

display bgp paths as-regular-expression
View
Any view
Parameter
■ as-regular-expression: Matched AS path regular expression.
Description
Using the display bgp paths command, you can view the information about AS
paths
Example
Display the information about the AS paths.
<3Com> display bgp paths ^600$
Flags: - valid, ^ - best,
D - damped, H - history,
I - internal, S – aggregate suppressed
Id Hash-Index References Aggregator Origin As-Path
--------------------------------------------------------------------
6 90 15 <null> IGP 600
display bgp peer Syntax

display bgp [ multicast ] peer peer-address verbose
display bgp [ multicast ] peer [ verbose ]
display bgp vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher route-distinguisher | vpn-instance
vpn-instance-name } peer
View
Any view
Parameter
■ peer-address: Specifies the peer to be displayed.
■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Name of VPN instance.

■ route-distinguisher route-distinguisher: Name of route-distinguisher.
■ verbose: Displays the detailed information of the peer.
Description
Using the display bgp peer command, you can view the information of peer.
Using the display bgp multicast peer command, you can view the information of
MBGP peer.
Using the display bgp vpnv4 peer command, you can view the information of VPN
peer.
Example
Display the information of the peer 10.110.25.20.
<3Com> display bgp peer 10.110.25.20
Peer AS-number Version Queued-Tx Msg-Rx Msg-Tx Up/Down
State
--------------------------------------------------------------------
10.110.25.20 100 4 0 0 0
00:33:43 Active
View the details of peer 133.1.1.2.
<3Com> display bgp peer 133.1.1.2 verbose
Peer: 133.1.1.2 Local: Unspecified
Type: External
State: Idle Flags: <Idled>
Last State: NoState Last Event: NoEvent
Last Error: None
Options: <>
Configuration within the peer :

no export policy route-policy
no export policy ip-prefix
no export policy filter-policy
no export policy acl
no import policy route-policy
no import policy ip-prefix
no import policy filter-policy
no import policy acl
no default route produce
display bgp Syntax

routing-table display bgp [ multicast | vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher route-distinguisher |
vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } ] routing-table [ ip-address mask ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ multicast: Displays the MBGP routing information in BGP routing table.
■ all: Displays all VPNv4 routing information.
■ route-distinguisher route-distinguisher: Displays Network Layer Reachable
Information (NLRI) matching Routing Distinguisher (RD).
■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Displays NLRI associated with the specified

VPN instance.
■ ip-address: Displays the destination network address.
Description
Using the display bgp multicast routing-table command, you can view the BGP
routing information of the specified IP address in the BGP routing table.
Using the display bgp multicast routing-table command, you can view the MBGP
Using the display bgp vpnv4 routing-table command, you can view the VPN
Example
View all the BGP routing information.
<3Com> display bgp routing-table
Dest/Mask Pref Next-Hop Med Local-Pref Origin

As-Path
--------------------------------------------------------------------
*> 1.1.1.0/24 10.10.10.1 IGP 200
*> 1.1.2.0/24 10.10.10.1 IGP 200
*> 1.1.3.0/24 10.10.10.1 IGP 200
*> 2.2.3.0/24 10.10.10.1 INC 200
*> 4.4.4.0/24 10.10.10.1 IGP 200
*> 9.9.9.0/24 10.10.10.1 INC 200
*> 10.10.10.0/24 0.0.0.0 IGP
* 10.10.10.1 IGP 200
View one BGP routing information.
<3Com> display bgp routing-table 22.1.0.0

BGP route 22.1.0.0/16
Nexthop : 200.1.7.2
Origin : Incompelte,
As-path: 200
Local-pref: 100,
Status: valid, internal, best
From : 200.1.7.2(200.1.7.2)
display bgp Syntax

routing-table as-path-acl display bgp [ multicast | [ vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher route-distinguisher |
vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } ] ] routing-table as-path-acl acl-number
View
Any view
Parameter
■ acl-number: Number of the specified AS path to be matched, ranging 1 to 199.
Description
Using the display bgp routing-table as-path-acl command, you can view routes
that match an as-path acl
Example
Display routes that match filtering list.
<3Com> display bgp routing-table as-path-acl 1
Dest/Mask Pref Next-Hop Med Local-pref Origin

As-path
--------------------------------------------------------------------
^ 1.1.1.0/24 170 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
^ 1.1.2.0/24 170 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
^ 1.1.3.0/24 170 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
^ 2.2.3.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200
^ 4.4.4.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200
^ 9.9.9.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200
^ 10.10.10.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
^ 22.1.0.0/16 256 200.1.7.2 100 INC 200
88.1.0.0/16 60 0.0.0.0 IGP
display bgp Syntax

routing-table cidr display bgp [ multicast | [ vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher route-distinguisher |
vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } ] ] routing-table cidr
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display bgp routing-table cidr command, you can view the routing
information about the non-natural mask (namely the classless inter-domain
routing, CIDR).
Example
<3Com> display bgp routing-table cidr

As-path
--------------------------------------------------------------------
^ 22.1.0.0/16 256 200.1.7.2 100 INC

200
88.1.0.0/16 60 0.0.0.0 IGP
display bgp Syntax

routing-table display bgp [ multicast | [ vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher route-distinguisher |
community vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } ] ] routing-table community [ aa:nn |
no-export-subconfed | no-advertise | no-export ] [ whole-match ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ aa:nn: Specifies a community number.
■ no-export-subconfed: Not sends the matched routes outside the AS.
■ no-advertise: Not sends the matched routes to any peer.
■ no-export: Not exports routes outside the AS but advertise to other sub Ass.
■ whole-match: Displays the exactly matched routes.
Description
Using the display bgp routing-table community command, you can view the
routing information related to the specified BGP community number in the routing
table.
Example
Display the routing information matching the specified BGP community number.
<3Com> display bgp routing-table community 11:22

As-path
--------------------------------------------------------------------
^ 1.0.0.0/8 170 172.10.0.2 100 IGP
^ 2.0.0.0/8 256 172.10.0.2 100 IGP
display bgp Syntax

community-list vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } ] ] routing-table community-list
community-list-number [ whole-match ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ community-list-number: Specifies a community-list number.
■ whole-match: Displays the exactly matched routes.
Description
Using the display bgp routing-table community-list command, you can view the
routing information matching the specified BGP community list.
Example
View the routing information matching BGP community list 1.
[3Com] display bgp routing-table community-list 1
Destination/Mask Pref Next-hop Med Local-Pref Origin

As-Path
--------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.1.0/24 170 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
1.1.2.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
1.1.3.0/24 170 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
2.2.3.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200
4.4.4.0/24 170 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200
9.9.9.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200
10.10.10.0/24 0 10.10.10.2 0 IGP
10.10.10.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
display bgp Syntax

routing-table dampened display bgp routing-table dampened
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display bgp routing-table dampened command, you can view BGP
dampened routes.
Example
View BGP dampened routes.
<3Com> display bgp routing-table dampened
Dest/Mask Source Damping-limit Origin As-path
-----------------------------------------------------------------
D 11.1.0.0 133.1.1.2 1:20:00 IGP 200
display bgp Syntax

routing-table display bgp [ multicast ] routing-table different-origin-as
different-origin-as
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display bgp routing-table different-origin-as command, you can view
routes that have different source autonomous systems
Example
View the routes that have different source ASs.
<3Com> display bgp routing-table different-origin-as

As-Path
------------------------------------------------------------------
10.10.10.0/24 0 10.10.10.2 0 IGP
10.10.10.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
display bgp Syntax

routing-table flap-info display bgp routing-table flap-info [ { regular-expression as-regular-expression } | {
as-path-acl acl-number } | { network-address [ mask [ longer-match ] ] } ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ as-regular-expression: Displays the route flap-info matching AS path regular
expression.
■ acl-number: Number of the specified AS path to be matched, ranging from 1
to 199.
■ network-address: Network IP address related to the flag information to be
displayed
■ longer-match: Displays the route flap information that is more specific than
<network-address, mask>.
Description
Using the display bgp routing-table flap-info command, you can view BGP flap
information. When <network-address mask> is <0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0>, this command
will view the flap information of all BGP routes.
Example
Display BGP flap information.
<3Com> display bgp routing-table flap-info
Dest/Mask Source Keepup-time Damping-limit Flap-times

Origin As-path
--------------------------------------------------------------------
D 11.1.0.0/16 133.1.1.2 48 1:20:30 4 IGP
200
display bgp Syntax

routing-table peer display bgp routing-table peer peer-address { advertised | received }
View
Any view
Parameter
■ peer-address: Specifies the peer to be displayed.
■ advertised: Routing information advertised by the specified peer.
■ received: Routing information the specified peer received.
Description
Using the display bgp routing-table peer command, you can view the routing
information the specified BGP peer advertised or received.
For the related command, see display bgp peer.
Example
View the routing information advertised by BGP peer 10.10.10.1.
<3Com> display bgp routing table peer 10.10.10.1 advertised
Dest/mask Next -Hop Med Local-pref Origin As-path
-----------------------------------------------------------------
*> 10.10.10.0/24 0.0.0.0 INC
display bgp Syntax

regular-expression vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } ] ] routing-table regular-expression
as-regular-expression
View
Any view
Parameter
■ as-regular-expression: Matched AS regular expression.
Description
Using the display bgp routing-table regular-expression command, you can view
the routing information matching the specified AS regular expression
Example
Display the routing information matching with AS regular expression ^600$.
<3Com> display bgp routing-table regular-expression ^600$


As-Path
--------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.1.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
1.1.2.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
1.1.3.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
2.2.3.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200
4.4.4.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
9.9.9.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200
10.10.10.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200

filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ protocol ]
undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ protocol ]
View
BGP unicast view, multicast view, VPNv4 view, VPN instance view
Parameter
■ acl-number: Specifies the number of access control list matching the
destination address field of routing information, ranging from 1 to 199.
■ ip-prefix-name: Specifies the name of the address prefix list matching the
■ protocol: Routing information of which kind of route protocol to be filtered. It
includes direct, ospf, ospf-ase, ospf-nssa, isis, rip, and static at present.
Description
Using the filter-policy export command, you can filter the advertised routes and
only the routes passing the filter can be advertised by BGP. Using the undo
filter-policy export command, you can cancel the filtering to the advertised routes.
By default, the advertised routing information is not filtered.
If the parameter protocol is specified, only the imported route generated by the
specified protocol is filtered and the imported routes generated by other protocols
are not affected. If the parameter protocol is not specified, the imported route
generated by any protocol will be filtered.
Example
Use acl 3 to filter the routing information advertised by all BGPs.
[3Com-bgp] filter-policy 3 export

filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } import
undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } import
View
Parameter
■ acl-number: Specifies the number of access control list matching the
■ ip-prefix ip-prefix-name: Address prefix list name. The matched object is the
destination address domain of the routing information, ranging from 1 to 19.
■ gateway ip-prefix-name: Address prefix list name of the neighboring router.
The matched object is the routing information distributed by the specified
neighboring router, ranging from 1 to 19.
Description
Using the filter-policy gateway import command, you can filter the learned routing
information advertised by the specified address. Using the undo filter-policy
gateway import command, you can remove the filtering to the routing
information advertised by the specified address.
Using the filter-policy import command, you can filter the received global routing
information. Using the undo filter-policy import command, you can remove the
filtering to the received global routing information.
By default, the received routing information is not filtered.
This command can be used to filter the routes received by BGP and determines
whether to add the routes to the BGP routing table.
Example
Display how to use acl 3 to filter the routing information received by BGP.
[3Com-bgp] filter-policy 3 import
group Syntax
group group-name { [ internal ] | external }
undo group group-name
View
BGP view
Parameter
■ group-name: Specifies the name of peer group. It can be described in character
and numeral with the length being 1 to 47.
■ internal: Creates an internal peer group.
■ external: Creates an external peer group, including other sub AS groups in the
confederation.
Description
Using the group command, you can establish a peer group. Using the undo group
command, you can delete the configured peer group.
The use of BGP peer group is for the convenience of the user’s configuration.
When the user starts several peers with the same configuration, a peer group can
be established first and be configured. Then add all the peers to the peer group so
that they have the same configuration as this peer group.
The default IBGP peer will be added to the default peer group without any
configuration. The configuration of the route update policy for any IBGP peer is
valid for the other IBGP peers in its group. To be specific, if the router is not a
route reflector, all the IBGP peers are in the same group. If the router is a route
reflector, all the route reflection clients are in a group, while non-clients are in
another group.
The external peer group members must be in the same network segment.
Otherwise, some EBGP peers may discard the transmitted route update.
The peer group members cannot be configured with the route update policy
which is different from that of the peer group, but can be configured with
different ingress policies.
Example
Establish a peer group "test".
[3Com-bgp] group test
import-route Syntax
import-route protocol [ med med-value ] [ route-policy route-policy-name ]
View
BGP view
Parameter
■ protocol: Specifies source routing protocols which can be imported, which
includes direct, ospf, ospf-nssa , ospf-ase, rip, bgp, and static at present.
■ med med-value: Specifies the MED value loaded by a redistributed route,
■ route-policy route-policy-name: Specifies a route-policy to filter the
redistributed protocol route. It can be described in character and numeral with
the length being 1 to 19.
Description
Using the import-route command, you can import routes of other protocols. Using
the undo import-route command, you can remove importing routes of other
protocols.
By default, BGP does not import the routes of other protocols.
Example
Import routes of RIP.
[3Com-bgp] import-route rip
ip as-path acl Syntax

ip as-path acl acl-number { permit | deny } as-regular-expression
undo ip as-path acl acl-number
View
System view
Parameter
■ acl-number: Number of AS path list ranging from 1 to 199.
■ as-regular-expression: AS path regular expression.
Description
Using the ip as-path acl command, you can configure an AS path regular
expression. Using the undo ip as-path acl command, you can disable the defined
regular expression.
The configured AS path list can be used in BGP policy.
For the related command, see peer as-path-acl, and display bgp routing-table
as-path-acl.
Example
Configure an AS path list.
[3Com] ip as-path acl 10 permit 200,300
ip community-list Syntax
ip community-list stand-comm-list-number { permit | deny } { aa:nn | internet |
no-export-subconfed | no-advertise | no-export }
ip community-list ext-comm-list-number { permit | deny } as-regular-expression
undo ip community-list { stand-comm-list-number | ext-comm-list-number }
View
System view
Parameter
■ stand-comm-list-number: Number of the standard community list ranging from
1 to 99.
■ ext-comm-list-number: Number of the extended community list ranging from
100 to 199.
■ permit: Permits those that match conditions to access.
■ deny: Denies those that match conditions to access.
■ aa:nn: Community number.
■ internet: Advertises all routes.
■ no-export-subconfed: Used not to advertise the matched route beyond the
confederation.
■ no-advertise: Used not to send the matched route to any peer.
■ no-export: Used not to pass routes outside the AS but advertise to other sub
ASs.
■ as-regular-expression: Community attribute of the regular expression.
Description
Using the ip community-list command, you can configure a BGP community list.
Using the undo ip community-list command, you can delete the configured BGP
community list.
The configured community list can be used in BGP policy.
For the related command, see apply community, and display bgp routing-table
community-list.
Example
Define a community attribute list which does not advertise routes with the
community attribute beyond the confederation.
[3Com] ip community-list 6 permit no-export-subconfed
network Syntax
network ip-address [ address-mask ] [ route-policy route-policy-name ]
undo network ip-address [ address-mask ] [ route-policy route-policy-name ]
View
BGP view
Parameter
■ ip-address: Network address that BGP advertises.
■ address-mask: Mask of the network address.
■ route-policy-name: Route-policy applied to advertised routes.
Description
Using the network command, you can configure the network routes advertised by
the local BGP. Using the undo network command, you can delete the existing
configuration.
By default, there is no network sent through BGP.
Example
Advertise routes to network segment 10.0.0.0/16.
[3Com-bgp] network 10.0.0.1 255.255.0.0
peer Syntax
advertise-community peer { group-name } advertise-community
undo peer { group-name } advertise-community
View
BGP view, VPNv4 view, VPN instance view
Parameter
■ group-name: Specifies the name of peer group.
Description
Using the peer advertise-community command, you can enable the transmission
of the community attribute to a peer/peer group. Using the undo peer
advertise-community command, you can cancel the existing configuration.
By default, the community attribute is not transmitted to any peer/peer group.
For the related commands, see if-match community-list and apply community.
Example
Enable the transmission of the community attribute to a peer group "test".
[3Com-bgp] peer test advertise-community
peer allow-as-loop Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } allow-as-loop [ number ]
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } allow-as-loop
View
Parameter
■ peer-address: Specifies the IP address of the peer.
■ number: Specifies the repeating times of local AS number. The range is 1 to 10.
Description
Using the peer allow-as-loop command, you can configure the repeating time of
local AS. Using the undo peer allow-as-loop command, you can remove the
repeating time of local AS.
For the related command, see display current-configuration, display bgp
routing-table peer, and display bgp routing-table group.
Example
Specify to configure the repeating times of local AS to 2.
[3Com-bgp] peer 1.1.1.1 allow-as-loop 2
peer as-number Syntax

peer { group-name } as-number as-number
undo peer { group-name } as-number as-number
View
BGP view
Parameter
■ as-number: Peer AS number of the peer/peer group. The range is 1 to 65535.
Description
Using the peer as-number command, you can specify the peer AS number of peer
group. Using the undo peer as-number command, you can delete the AS number
of peer group.
By default, no AS number is configured.
Example
Specify the peer AS number for the peer test as 100.
[3Com-bgp] peer test as-number 100
peer as-path-acl Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } as-path-acl acl-number { import | export }
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } as-path-acl acl-number { import | export }
View
Parameter
■ acl-number: Specifies the filter list number of an AS regular expression. The
range is 1 to 199.
■ import: Import distribution list.
■ export: Export distribution list.
Description
Using the peer as-path-acl command, you can specify BGP route filtering policy
based on AS path list. Using the undo peer as-path-acl command, you can cancel
the existing configuration.
By default, the peer group has no AS path list.
Example
Set the AS path ACL of the peer group test.
[3Com-bgp] peer test as-path-acl 3 export
peer connect-interface Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } connect-interface interface-name
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } connect-interface interface-name
View
BGP view
Parameter
■ group-name: Specifies the name of the peer group.
■ interface-name: Specifies interface name.
Description
Using the peer connect-interface command, you can specify the source interface
of a route update packet. Using the undo peer connect-interface command, you
can restore the best source interface.
By default, BGP uses the best source interface.
Usually, BGP uses the optimal route to update the source interface of the packets.
However, you can set the mode of the interface to Loopback in order to send
route updates even if the interface does not work normally.
Example
None
peer Syntax
default-route-advertise peer { group-name } default-route-advertise
undo peer { group-name } default-route-advertise
View
BGP view
Parameter
Description
Using the peer default-route-advertise command, you can configure a peer/peer
group to import a default route for a peer. Using the undo peer
default-route-advertise command, you can cancel the existing configuration.
By default, a peer/peer group does not import the default route.
For this command, no default route is required in the routing table. A default
route is sent unconditionally to a peer with the next hop as itself.
Example
Specify a peer group "test" to import the default route.
[3Com-bgp] peer test default-route-advertise
peer description Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } description description-line
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } description
View
BGP view
Parameter
■ description-line: Description information configured, which can be described in

characters or numerals with the length not exceeding 79.
Description
Using the peer description command, you can configure the description information of the
peer/peer group. Using the undo peer description command, you can remove the
description information of the peer/peer group.
By default, description information of peers/peer group is not configured.
For the related command, see display current-configuration, display bgp peer, and
display bgp routing-table group.
Example
Configure the description information of the peer named group1 as beijing1.
[3Com-bgp] peer group1 description beijing1
peer ebgp-max-hop Syntax

peer group-name ebgp-max-hop [ ttl ]
undo peer group-name ebgp-max-hop
View
BGP view
Parameter
■ ttl: Specifies the maximum hop value. The range is 1 to 255. By default, the
value is 64.
Description
Using the peer ebgp-max-hop command, you can allow establishing EBGP
connection with the peer on indirectly connected network. Using the undo peer
ebgp-max-hop command, you can cancel the existing configuration.
By default, this feature is disabled.
Example
Establish EBGP connection with the peer group "test" on the indirectly connected
network.
[3Com-bgp] peer test ebgp-max-hop
peer enable Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } enable
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } enable
View
BGP unicast address family view, IPv4 multicast address family view, VPNv4 address
family view, L2VPN address family view
Parameter
■ group-name: Specifies the name of the peer group, which specifies the entire
peer group.
■ peer-address: IP address of the peer, which specifies a certain peer.
Description
Using the peer enable command, you can enable the specified peer (group) and
can exchange information with a peer. Using the undo peer enable command, you
can disable the specified peer (group).
Here,
The peer peer-address enable command can be configured in unicast address
family only. Using this command, you can disable the unicast function of the peer.
You can delete the peer from the group in the corresponding address to disable its
multicast function or VPNv4 function.
By default, BGP peer (group) is enabled in unicast address family, but disabled in
VPN and MBP address families.
If the specified peer/peer group is disabled, the router will not exchange routing
information with the specified peer (group).
Example
Deactivate the specified peer.
[3Com] bgp 180
[3Com-bgp] undo peer 18.10.0.9 enable
peer filter-policy Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } filter-policy list-number { import | export }
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } filter-policy list-number { import | export }
View
BGP view, IPv4 multicast sub-address family view
Parameter
■ peer-address: IP address of the peer.
■ list-number: Specifies the IP acl number.
■ import: Peer filter-policy used for imported routes
■ export: Peer filter-policy used for exported routes
Description
Using the peer filter-policy command, you can set the filter-policy list of a peer
group. Using the undo peer filter-policy command, you can cancel the existing
configuration.
By default, a peer group has no access control list (acl).
For the related commands, see ip as-path acl and peer as-path-acl.
Example
Set the filter-policy list of a peer group test.
[3Com-bgp] peer test filter-policy 3 import
peer group Syntax

For multicast address family or VPNv4 address family:
■ peer peer-address group group-name
■ undo peer peer-address group
■ For unicast address family or VPN-INSTANCE address family:
■ peer peer-address group group-name [ as-number as-number ]
■ undo peer peer-address group
View
BGP view
Parameter
■ group-name: Specifies the name of peer group. It can be described in character
and numeral with the length being 1 to 47.
■ as-number: Specifies AS number for the peer.
Description
Using the peer group command, you can add a peer to the peer group. Using the
undo peer group command, you can delete the specified peer in the peer group.
In the unicast/VPN-INSTANCE address family view, when adding a peer to an
external peer group without specified AS number, you should specify the peer AS
number at the same time. While it is unnecessary when adding the peer to an
internal peer group or an external peer group with specified AS number.
In the multicast/VPNv4 address family view, it is required that the peer to be added
should exist and has been added to a peer group in the unicast address family
view (The peer can be disabled).
In different address family views, a peer can be added to different peer groups and
a peer group can have different members.
Example
Add the peer with IP address being 10.1.1.1 to the peer group TEST.
[3Com-bgp] group TEST
[3Com-bgp] peer 10.1.1.1 group TEST
peer ip-prefix Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } ip-prefix prefixname { import | export }
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } ip-prefix prefixname { import | export }
View
Parameter
■ group-name: Name of peer group.
■ prefixname: Name of the specified ip-prefix.
■ import: Applies the filtering policy on the route received by the specified
peer/peer group.
■ export: Applies the filtering policy on the route transmitted to the specified
peer/peer group.
Description
Using the peer ip-prefix command, you can configure the route filtering policy of
the peer/peer group based on the ip-prefix. Using the undo peer ip-prefix
command, you can cancel the route filtering policy of the peer/peer group based
on the ip-prefix.
By default, the route filtering policy of the peer/peer group is not specified.
For the related command, see ip ip-prefix.
Example
Configure the route filtering policy of the peer group based on the ip-prefix 1.
[3Com-bgp] peer group1 ip-prefix list1 import
peer next-hop-local Syntax

peer { group-name } next-hop-local
undo peer { group-name } next-hop-local
View
BGP view
Parameter
Description
Using the peer next-hop-local command, you can perform the process of the next
hop in the route to be advertised to the peer/peer group and take the address of
itself as the next hop. Using the undo peer next-hop-local command, you can
cancel the existing configuration.
Example
When BGP distributes the route to the peer group "test", it will take its own
address as the next hop.
[3Com-bgp] peer test next-hop-local
peer password Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } password { cipher | simple } password
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } password
View
BGP view, MBGP VPN-instance address family view
Parameter
■ group-name: Name of the peer group.
■ peer-address: IP address of the peer, in dotted decimal format.
■ cipher: Displays the configured password in cipher text mode.
■ simple: Displays the configured password in simple text mode.
■ password: Password in character string form with 1 to 16 characters when
parameter simple is configured in the command or in the event of inputting the
password in simple text mode but parameter cipher is configured in the
command; with 24 characters in the event of inputting the password in cipher
text mode when parameter cipher is configured in the command.
Description
Using the peer password command, you can configure MD5 authentication for
BGP during TCP connection setup. Using the undo peer password command, you
can cancel the configuration.
By default, BGP does not perform MD5 authentication when TCP connection is set
up.
Once MD5 authentication is enabled, both parties involved in the authentication
must be configured with identical authentication modes and passwords.
Otherwise, TCP connection will not be set up because of the failed authentication.
This command is used to configure MD5 authentication for the specific peer only
when the peer group to which the peer belongs is not configured with MD5
authentication. Otherwise, the peer should be consistent with the peer group.
Example
Adopt MD5 authentication on the TCP connection set up between the local
router at 10.1.100.1 and the peer router at 10.1.100.2.
[3Com-bgp] peer 10.1.100.2 password simple 3Com
Perform the similar configuration on the peer.
[3Com-bgp] peer 10.1.100.2 password simple 3Com
peer public-as-only Syntax

peer { group-name } public-as-only
undo peer { group-name } public-as-only
View
BGP view
Parameter
■ group-name: Specifies the name of a peer group.
■ peer-address: Specifies IP address of a peer.
Description
Using the peer public-as-only command, you can configure not to carry the AS
number when transmitting BGP update packets. Using the undo peer
public-as-only command, you can configure to carry the AS number when
transmitting BGP update packets.
By default, private AS number is carried when transmitting BGP update packets.
Generally, BGP transmits BGP update packets with the AS number (either public
AS number or private AS number). To enable some outbound routers to ignore the
AS number when transmitting update packets, you can configure not to carry the
AS number when transmitting BGP update packets.
Example
Configure not to carry the private AS number when transmitting BGP update
packets to the peer named test.
[3Com-bgp] peer test public-as-only
peer reflect-client Syntax

peer { group-name } reflect-client
undo peer { group-name } reflect-client
View
BGP view or VPNv4 view
Parameter
Description
Using the peer reflect-client command, you can configure a peer/peer group as the
route reflector client. Using the undo peer reflect-client command, you can cancel
the existing configuration.
By default, no route reflector is in AS.
Generally speaking, it is not necessary to configure this command for the peer
group, because IBGP peers are in its default group. A single peer peer-address
reflect-client command should be used to configure the route reflector clients.
For the related commands, see reflect between-clients and reflect cluster-id.
Example
Configure the peer group "test" as the route reflector client.
[3Com-bgp] peer test reflect-client
peer route-policy Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } route-policy route-policy-name { import |
export }
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } route-policy route-policy-name { import |
export }
View
Parameter
■ peer-address: Specifies IP address of a peer.
■ route-policy-name: Specifies route-policy.
■ import: Applies the route-policy to the routes coming from the peer (group).
■ export: Applies the route-policy to the routes advertised to the peer (group).
Description
Using the peer route-policy command, you can assign the route-policy to the route
coming from the peer (group) or the route advertised to the peer (group). Using
the undo peer route-policy command, you can delete the specified route-policy.
By default, the peer (group) has no route-policy association.
Example
Apply the route-policy named test-policy to the route coming from the peer
group "test".
[3Com-bgp] peer test route-policy test-policy import
peer Syntax
route-update-interval peer { group-name } route-update-interval seconds
undo peer { group-name } route-update-interval
View
Parameter
■ seconds: The minimum interval of sending UPDATE message. The range is 0 to
600. By default, the advertisement interval is: 5 seconds for internal peer
(group), and 30 seconds for external peer (group).
Description
Using the peer route-update-interval command, you can configure the interval for
the transmission route of a peer (group). Using the undo peer
route-update-interval command, you can restore the default value.
Example
Configure the interval of the BGP peer 172.168.10.1 sending the route update
packet as 10 seconds.
[3Com-bgp] peer 172.168.10.1 route-update-interval 10
peer timer Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } timer keep-alive keepalive-interval hold
holdtime-interval
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } timer
View
BGP view
Parameter
■ keepalive-interval: Keepalive interval to be specified. The range is 1 to
4294967295 seconds. By default, its value is 60 seconds.
■ holdtime-interval: Holdtime interval to be specified. The range is 3 to
4294967295 seconds. By default, its value is 180 seconds.
Description
Using the peer timer command, you can configure Keepalive and Keepalive
interval for a peer (group). Using the undo peer timer command, you can restore
the interval default value.
The timer configured by using this command has a higher priority than the one
configured by using the timer command.
Example
Configure Keepalive and Holdtime intervals of the peer group "test".
[3Com-bgp] peer test timer keep-alive 60 hold 180
policy vpn-target Syntax

policy vpn-target
undo policy vpn-target
View
VPN instance view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the policy vpn-target command, you can configure whether to perform the
filtering on the vpn-target extended community of the received routing
information. Using the undo policy vpn-target command, you can cancel the filter
function.
By default, the system performs the filtering on the vpn-target extended
community of the received routing information.
Example
Perform the filtering on the vpn-target extended community of the received
[3Com-bgp] policy vpn-target
preference Syntax
preference value
undo preference
View
BGP protocol view, BGP multicast address family view
Parameter
■ value: Specifies the preference, ranging from 1 to 256. By default, the value is
170.
Description
Using the preference command, you can configure the preference of BGP
protocol. Using the undo preference command, you can restore the default
preference.
Each kind of routing protocol has its own preference, by which the routing policy
will select the optimal one from the routes of different protocols. The greater the
preference value is, the lower the preference is. BGP defines two kinds of routes:
One is learned from external peer. The other is learned from internal peer. The
preferences of the two routes can be different, which can be set manually.
The system supports to configure different preferences for different sub-address
families, including unicast address family and multicast address family at present.
Example
Configure the preference of BGP protocol to 150.
[3Com-bgp] preference 150
reflect between-clients Syntax

reflect between-clients
undo reflect between-clients
View
Parameter
None
Description
Using the reflect between-clients command, you can set the between-client
reflection of a route. Using the undo reflect between-clients command, you can
disable this function.
By default, the reflection between clients is disabled.
After route reflector is configured, it reflects the routes of a client to other clients.
For the related commands, see reflector cluster-id and peer reflect-client.
Example
Disable the reflection between clients.
[3Com-bgp] undo reflect between-clients
reflector cluster-id Syntax

reflector cluster-id { cluster-id | address }
undo reflector cluster-id
View
Parameter
■ cluster-id: Specifies the cluster ID of the route reflector, in integer or IP address
format, with the range from 1 to 4294967295.
■ address: Interface address of the route reflector’s cluster ID.
Description
Using the reflector cluster-id command, you can configure the cluster ID of the
route reflector. Using the undo reflector cluster-id command, you can remove the
cluster ID of the route reflector.
By default, each route reflector uses its Router ID as the cluster ID.
Usually, there is only one route reflector in a cluster. It is the router ID of the
reflector to identify the cluster. You can configure multiple route reflectors to
improve the stability of the network. If a cluster is configured multiple route
reflectors, you can use this command to configure identical cluster ID for all the
reflectors.
For the related commands, see reflect between-clients and peer reflect-client.
Example
Set cluster ID for local router to identify the cluster.
[3Com-bgp] reflector cluster-id 80
[3Com-bgp] peer 11.128.160.10 reflect-client
refresh bgp Syntax

refresh bgp { all | peer-address | { group group-name } } [ multicast | vpnv4 |
vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] { import | export }
View
User view
Parameter
■ all: Refreshes all the peers.
■ peer-address: Refreshes the peer specified address.
■ group-name: Refreshes all the members in the specified peer group.

■ vpnv4: Refreshes routes of VPNv4 address family for the peer.
■ multicast: Refreshes routes of multicast address family for the peer.
■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Refreshes VPN routes for the peer in the
specified VPN-INSTANCE.
■ import: Sends ROUTE-REFRESH packet to the peer to require retransmission of
all the routes.
■ export: Retransmits all the routes to the peer.
Description
Using the refresh bgp command, you can request the peer for route
retransmission or retransmit routes to the peer.
After BGP connection is created, only incremental routes are transmitted. But in
some cases, for example, when routing policy is changed, retransmission of routes
is required on both ends. And the routes should be filtered again according to the
new policy.
Example
Request all the peers to retransmit multicast routes.
<3Com> refresh bgp all multicast import
Retransmit all the routes to the CE peer 10.1.1.1 in VPN-INSTANCE vpn1.
<3Com> refresh bgp 10.1.1.1 vpn-instance vpn1 export
reset bgp Syntax

reset bgp { all | peer-address } [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]
View
User view
Parameter
■ all: Resets all the connections with BGP.
■ peer-address: Resets connection with a specified BGP peer.
■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Name of specified VPN-INSTANCE. The
range is 1 to 19.
Description
Using the reset bgp peer-address command, you can reset the connection of BGP
with a specified BGP peer.
Using the reset bgp all command, you can reset all the connections with BGP.
After changing the BGP policy or protocol configuration, resetting BGP connection
can make the newly configured policy in effect immediately.
Example
Reset all the BGP connections to enable the new configuration (after configuring
the new Keepalive interval and Holdtime interval using the timer command).
<3Com> reset bgp all
reset bgp flap-info Syntax

reset bgp flap-info [ regular-expression as-regular-expression | as-path-acl
acl-number | network-address [ mask ] } ]
reset bgp network-address [ flap-info ]
View
User view
Parameter
■ regular-expression as-regular-expression: Clears the flap information matching
the AS path regular expression.
■ as-path-acl acl-number: Clears the flap information in consistency with a
specified filter list. The range of the parameter acl-number is 1 to 199.
■ network-address: Clears the flap information of a record at this IP address. If
this parameter is put before flap-info, the router clears the flap information of
all the routes from this address.
Description
Using the reset bgp flap-info command, you can reset the flap information of a
route.
For the related command, see dampening.
Example
Clear the flap information of all the routes that go through filter list 10.
<3Com> reset bgp flap-info as-path-acl 10
reset bgp group Syntax

reset bgp group group-name [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]
View
User view
Parameter
■ group-name: Specifies the name of the peer group, in characters ranging from
1 to 47.
■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Name of specified VPN-INSTANCE.The range
is 1 to 19.
Description
Using the reset bgp group command, you can reset the connections between the
BGP and all the members of a group.
For the related command, see peer group.
Example
Reset BGP connections of all members from group1.
<3Com> reset bgp group group1
reset dampening Syntax

reset dampening [ network-address [ mask ] ]
View
User view
Parameter
■ network-address: Network IP address related to the clearing attenuation
information.
Description
Using the reset dampening command, you can clear the attenuation information
of a route and release the suppression of a suppressed route.
For the related commands, see dampening and display bgp routing-table
dampened.
Example
Clear the attenuation information of the route to the network 20.1.0.0, and
release the suppression of a suppressed route.
<3Com> reset dampening 20.1.0.0 255.255.0.0
summary automatic Syntax

summary automatic
undo summary automatic
View
BGP unicast view, BGP multicast view, VPN instance view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the summary automatic command, you can make automatic aggregation of
sub-network routes and disable it by using undo summary automatic command.
By default, no automatic aggregation of sub-network routes is executed.
After the summary automatic is configured, BGP cannot receive the sub-network
routes imported from the IGP, so the amount of the routing information can be
reduced.
Example
Make the automatic aggregation of the sub-network routes.
[3Com-bgp] summary automatic
timer keep-alive hold Syntax

timer keep-alive keepalive-interval hold holdtime-interval
undo timer
View
Parameter
■ keepalive-interval: Interval for sending Keepalive, ranging from 1 to
4294967295. By default, its value is 60 seconds.
■ holdtime-interval: Keepalive time of BGP, ranging from 3 to 4294967295. By
default, its value is 180 seconds.
Description
Using the timer keep-alive hold command, you can configure the Keepalive and
Holdtime timer of BGP. Using the undo timer keep-alive hold command, you can
restore the default value of the Keepalive and Holdtime timer.
Example
Configure the Keep-alive and Hold-time timer as 30 seconds and 60 seconds.
[3Com-bgp] timer keep-alive 30 hold 60
undo synchronization Syntax

undo synchronization
View
BGP view, VPN instance view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the undo synchronization command, you can remove the synchronization
between BGP and IBGP.
Example
[3Com-bgp] undo synchronization
MBGP Configuration
Commands
In the following command description, BGP unicast view indicates the common BGP view.
For the specific configuration of MBGP multicast extension, refer to the "Multicast" module of this
manual.
For the specific configuration of VPN instance and VPNv4, refer to "MPLS" module in this
manual.
ipv4-family Syntax
ipv4-family { multicast | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name }
undo ipv4-family [ multicast | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]
MBGP Configuration Commands 665
View
BGP view, VPN instance view
Parameter
■ multicast: Enters the BGP multicast extended address family view with the
parameter.
■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Associates the specified VPN instance with
the IPv4 address family. Enter the MBGP address family view of BGP with this
parameter.
Description
Using the ipv4-family command, you can enter IPv4 extended address family view
of BGP. Using the undo ipv4-family command, you can remove all configurations
in extended address family view and return to IPv4 unicast address view of BGP.
This command is used to enter the IPv4 extended address family view. In this view,
parameters related to the address family can be configured for BGP.
The undo ipv4-family multicast command can exit the multicast extended address
family view, remove all configurations in the address family view and return to BGP
unicast view.
The undo ipv4-family vpn-instance vpn-instance-name command is used to
remove the association between the specified VPN instance and IPv4 address
family and delete all configurations in the address family and return to BGP unicast
view.
The ipv4-family multicast command is used for multicast. For relevant contents,
refer to "MBGP Multicast Extended" chapter in module "Multicast" of this
manual.
The ipv4-family vpn-instance command is used for BGP/MPLS VPN. For related
description, refer to "MPLS VPN" chapter in module "MPLS" module of this
manual.
For the related commands, see ipv4-family vpnv4 and peer enable.
Example
None
ipv4-family vpnv4 Syntax

ipv4-family vpnv4 [ unicast ]
undo ipv4-family vpnv4 [ unicast ]
View
BGP view
Parameter
■ unicast: Enters VPN-IPv4 unicast address family view with this parameter.
Description
Using the ipv4-family vpnv4 command, you can enter VPNv4 address family view
of BGP. Using the undo ipv4-family vpnv4 command, you can delete all
configurations in VPNv4 address family view and return to IPv4 unicast address
family view of BGP.
The ipv4-family vpnv4 command is used for BGP/MPLS VPN. For related
description, refer to "MPLS VPN" chapter in module "MPLS" of this manual.
The present VRP software platform only supports IPv4 unicast address of VPN.
Execution of the ipv4-family vpnv4 command will enter VPN-IPv4 unicast address
family view even if the unicast parameter is not specified.
For the related commands, see ipv4-family and peer enable.
Example
None
peer enable Syntax

View
Parameter
■ group-name: Specifies the name of the peer group, which specifies the entire
peer group.
■ peer-address: IP address of the peer, which specifies a certain peer.
Description
Using the peer enable command, you can enable the specified peer/peer group
and disable it by using undo peer enable command.
By default, the unicast peer/peer group of IPv4 address family is enabled and other
peers/peer groups are disabled.
Using this command, you can enable/disable the routing exchange between the
peers (peer groups).
By default, the peer (group) of IPv4 unicast is enabled. The undo command is used
to disable them. When a connection is used in both unicast and multicast, you can
configure to disable unicast peer to delete unicast connection only.
By default, the peer (group) in other address families is disabled. It cannot
exchange routing information normally until it is enabled.
Example
Configure and enable the specified peer of VPNv4 unicast address family.
[3Com] bgp 100
[3Com-bgp] ipv4-family vpnv4 unicast
[3Com-bgp-af-vpn] peer 10.15.0.15 enable
Configure and enable the specified peer of IPv4 multicast address
family.
[3Com] bgp 200
[3Com-bgp] ipv4-family multicast
[3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer 20.10.0.1 enable
IP Routing Policy
Configuration
Commands
apply as-path Syntax

apply as-path as-number-1 [ as-number-2 [ as-number-3 ... ] ]
undo apply as-path
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
■ as-number-1... as-number-n: AS number to be added.
Description
Using the apply as-path command, you can specify AS number to be added in
front of the original AS path in route-policy. Using the undo apply as-path
command, you can cancel the AS sequence number added in front of the original
AS path.
By default, no AS number is set.
If the match condition of route-policy is matched, the AS attribute of the
transmitting route will be changed. At least 10 AS numbers can be added.
Example
Add AS 200 in front of the original AS path in route-policy.
[3Com-route-policy] apply as-path 200
apply community Syntax

apply community { { {aa:nn | no-export-sunconfed | no-export | no-advertise} … [
additive ] } | additive | none }
undo apply community
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
■ aa:nn: Community number.
■ no-export-subconfed: Not sends the matched route outside AS.
■ no-advertise: Not sends the matched route to any peer.
■ no-export: Not passes route through AS but advertise to other sub Ass.
■ additive: Community attributes of additional routes.
■ none: Community attributes of deleted routes.
Description
Using the apply community command, you can specify the set BGP community
attribute of route-policy. Using the undo apply community command, you can
cancel the set BGP community attribute.
By default, BGP community attribute is not set.
Configure BGP community attribute after matching the route-policy conditions.
For the related command, see ip community-list, if-match community-list,
route-policy, and display bgp routing-table community.
Example
Display how to configure one route-policy named setcommunity, whose node
serial number is 16 and match mode is permit, and enter route policy view to set
match conditions and attribute modification actions to be executed.
[3Com] route-policy setcommunity permit node 16
[3Com-route-policy] if-match as-path 8
[3Com-route-policy] apply community no-export
apply cost Syntax

apply cost value
undo apply cost
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
■ value: Specifies the route cost value of route information.
Description
Using the apply cost command, you can set the route cost value of route
information. Using the undo apply cost command, you can cancel the apply
clause.
For the related commands, see if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix,
if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip-address,
apply local-preference, apply origin, and apply tag.
Example
Display how to define one apply clause. When it is used for setting route
information attribute, it sets the route cost value of route information as 120.
[3Com-route-policy] apply cost 120
apply cost-type Syntax

apply cost-type [ internal | external ]
undo apply cost-type
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
■ internal: Uses the cost type of IGP as MED value of BGP to advertise route to
EBGP peer.
■ external: External cost type value of IS-IS.
Description
Using the apply cost-type command, you can set the route cost type of route
information. Using the undo apply cost-type command, you can cancel the apply
clause.
By default, route cost type is not set.
Example
Set the cost type of IGP as MED value of BGP
[3Com-route-policy] apply cost-type internal

apply ip-address { ip-address [ ip-address ] | acl acl-number }
undo apply ip-address [ ip-address [ ip-address ] | acl acl-number ]
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
■ ip-address: Next-hop address. Two next-hop addresses can be specified at
most.
■ acl-number: Specifies the number of the access control list used for filtering,
ranging from 1 to 99
Description
Using the apply ip-address command, you can set the next hop address of route
information. Using the undo apply ip-address command, you can cancel the apply
clause.
One of the apply clauses of the route-policy: When this command is used for
setting routing information attribute, it sets the next hop address of the packets
passed filtering.
If multiple next hop addresses are set through apply ip-address command, other
next hop addresses will be tried by turn when the first next hop address is invalid.
if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply
local-preference, apply cost, apply origin, and apply tag.
Example
Define an apply clause to set the next hop address of routing information as
193.1.1.8 when it is used for setting routing information attribute.
[3Com-route-policy] apply ip-address 193.1.1.8
apply isis apply isis [ level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2 ]

undo apply isis
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
■ level-1: Imports the matched route to Level-1 area.
■ level-2: Imports the matched route to Level-2 area.
■ level-1-2: Imports the matched route to both Level-1 and Level-2 area.
Description
Using the apply isis command, you can apply the level of a matched route to be
imported to Level-1, Level-2 or Level-1-2. Using the undo apply isis command, you
can remove the setting clause.
apply cost, apply origin, and apply tag.
Example
Define an apply clause to set the imported route to Level-2.
[3Com-route-policy] apply isis level-2
apply local-preference Syntax

apply local-preference local-preference
undo apply local-preference
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
■ local-preference: Newly set local preference.
Description
Using the apply local-preference command, you can apply the local preference of
route information. Using the undo apply local-preference command, you can
cancel the apply clause.
Example
Apply the local preference level of route information as 130 when this apply
clause is used for setting route information attribute.
[3Com-route-policy] apply local-preference 130
apply origin Syntax

apply origin { igp | egp as-number | incomplete }
undo apply origin
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
■ igp: Sets the BGP route information source as internal route
■ egp: Sets the BGP route information source as external route
■ as-number: Specifies AS number of external route.
■ incomplete: Sets the BGP route information source as unknown source.
Description
Using the apply origin command, you can set the routing source of BGP routing
information. Using the undo apply origin command, you can cancel the apply
clause.
apply local-preference, apply cost, and apply tag.
Example
Display how to define one apply clause. When it is used for setting routing
information attribute, it sets the routing source of the routing information as igp.
[3Com-route-policy] apply origin igp
apply tag Syntax

apply tag value
undo apply tag
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
■ value: Specifies the tag value of route information.
Description
Using the apply tag command, you can set the tag area of OSPF route
information. Using the undo apply tag command, you can cancel the apply clause.
apply local-preference, apply cost, and apply origin.
Example
Display how to define one apply clause. When it is used for setting route
information attribute, it sets the tag area of route information as 100.
[3Com-route-policy] apply tag 100
display ip ip-prefix Syntax

display ip ip-prefix [ ip-prefix-name ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ ip-prefix-name: Specifies displayed address prefix list name.
Description
Using the display ip ip-prefix command, you can view the address prefix list.
Display all the configured address prefix lists when no ip-prefix-name is specified.
Example
Display the information of the address prefix list named p1.
<3Com> display ip ip-prefix p1
ip-prefix p1
index 10: permit 192.168.10.10/16 greater-equal 17 less-equel 18
display route-policy Syntax

display route-policy [ route-policy-name ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■ route-policy-name: Specifies displayed route-policy name.
Description
Using the display route-policy command, you can view the configured route-policy
Display all the configured route-policy when no route-policy-name is specified.
Example
Display the information of route-policy named policy1.
<3Com> display route-policy policy1
Route-policy : policy1
Permit 10 : if-match (prefixlist) p1
apply cost 100
matched : 0 denied : 0

filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ protocol ]
undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ protocol ]
View
Routing protocol view
Parameter
■ acl-number: Number of the access control list used for matching the
destination address field of the routing information.
■ ip-prefix-name: Address prefix list used for matching the routing information
destination address field.
■ protocol: Routing information of which kind of route protocol to be filtered.
Description
Using the filter-policy export command, you can configure the filtering conditions
of the routing information advertised by a certain type of routing protocols. Using
the undo filter-policy export command, you can cancel the filtering conditions set.
By default, the advertised routing information is not filtered.
conditions can be advertised. Then, the filter-policy command can be used to set
the filtering conditions for the routing information to be advertised. Only the
routing information passing the filtering can be advertised.
For the related command, see filter-policy import.
Example
Define the filtering rules for advertising the routing information of RIP. Only the
routing information passing the filtering of address prefix list p1 will be advertised
by RIP.
[3Com-rip] filter-policy ip-prefix p1 export

filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } import
undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } import
View
Routing protocol view
Parameter
■ acl-number: Access control list number used for matching the destination
address field of the routing information.
■ ip-prefix ip-prefix-name: Prefix address list name. Its matching object is the
destination address field of the routing information.
■ gateway ip-prefix-name: Prefix address list name of the neighbor router
address. Its matching object is the routing information advertised by the
specified neighbor router.
Description
Using the filter-policy gateway import command, you can filter the routing
information advertised by a specified router. Using the undo filter-policy gateway
import command, you can cancel the setting of the filtering condition.
Using the filter-policy import command, you can configure the condition for
filtering the routing information. Using the undo filter-policy import command,
you can cancel the setting of filter condition.
By default, the received routing information is not filtered.
conditions can be received. Then, the filter-policy command can be used to set the
filtering conditions. acl-number is the access control list number used for filtering
the destination addresses of the routing information and ip-prefix parameter is
used to filter the routing information specified destination address.
For the related command, see filter-policy export.
Example
Define the filtering rule for receiving routing information of RIP. Only the routing
information filtered through the address prefix list p1 can be received by RIP.
[3Com-rip] filter-policy ip-prefix p1 import
if-match acl Syntax

if-match acl acl-number
undo if-match acl acl-number
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
■ acl-number: Specifies the number of the access control list used for filtering.
■ ip-prefix-name: Specifies the name of the prefix address list used for filtering.
Description
Using the if-match acl command, you can configure the IP address range to
match the route-policy. Using the undo if-match acl command, you can cancel the
setting of the match rule.
Filtering is performed by quoting an ACL.
For the related command, see if-match ip-prefix, if-match interface, if-match ip
next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip-address, apply cost,
Example
Display how to define one if-match clause. When the clause is used for filtering
route information, the route information filtered by route destination address
through address ACL 10 is enabled to pass the if-match clause.
[3Com-route-policy] if-match acl 10
if-match as-path Syntax

if-match as-path acl-number
undo if-match as-path
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
■ acl-number: AS path based access list number, ranging from 1 to 199.
Description
if-match as-path acl-number
undo if-match as-path
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
■ acl-number: AS path list number. The range is 1 to 199.
Description
Using the if-match as-path command, you can configure the matched AS path list
number of route-policy. Using the undo if-match as-path command, you can
cancel the matched path list number.
By default, AS path list number is not matched.
This if-match clause of route-policy is used to filter BGP routing information. The
match condition is specified according to the AS path attributes of the routing
information.
Example
Define an as-path numbered as 2 and allow the autonomous system number to
contain the routing information of 200 and 300. Then, define a route-policy
named test. The node No.10 of this route-policy defines a if-match clause, which
quotes the definition of as-path.
[3Com] ip as-path acl 2 permit 200:300
[3Com] route-policy test permit node 10
[3Com-route-policy] if-match as-path 2
if-match community Syntax

if-match community { standard-community-list-number [ whole-match ] |
extended-community-list-number }
undo if-match community
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
■ standard-community-list-number: Standard community list number, ranging
from 1 to 99.
■ extended-community-list-number: Extended community list number, ranging
from 100 to 199.
■ whole-match: Fully matching, i.e., all the communities must appear.
Description
Using the if-match community command, you can configure the community list
number to be matched in route-policy. Using the undo if-match community
command, you can cancel the configuration of the matched community list
number.
By default, community list is not matched.
The if-match clause of route-policy is used to filter BGP routing information. The
match condition is specified according to the community attributes of the routing
information.
For the related commands, see route-policy and ip community-list.
Example
Define a community-list numbered as 1, and allow the autonomous system
number to contain the routing information of 100 and 200. Then, the
route-policy named test is defined. The node No.10 of the route-policy defines a
if-match clause, which quotes the definition of the community-list.
[3Com] ip community-list 1 permit 100:200
[3Com] route-policy test permit node 10
[3Com-route-policy] if-match community 1
if-match cost Syntax

if-match cost value
undo if-match cost
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
■ value: Specifies the required route cost value, ranging from 0 to 4294967295.
Description
Using the if-match cost command, you can configure one of the matching rules of
route-policy to match the cost of the routing information. Using the undo if-match
cost command, you can cancel the configuration of the matching rule.
This if-match clause of route-policy is used to specify the route cost value of the
matched routing information.
For the related command, see if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix,
if-match ip next-hop, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip-address, apply
Example
Define an if-match clause, which allows the routing information with routing cost
8 to pass this if-match clause.
[3Com-route-policy] if-match cost 8
if-match interface Syntax

if-match interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-number }
undo if-match interface
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
■ interface-type: Specifies interface type.
■ interface-number: Specifies interface number.
■ interface-name: Specifies interface name.
Description
Using the if-match interface command, you can match the route whose next hop
is designated interface. Using the undo if-match interface command, you can
cancel the setting of match condition.
This if-match clause of the route-policy is used to match the corresponding
interface of the route next hop when it filters the route.
For the related command, see if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix, if-match ip
Example
Display how to define one if-match clause to match the route whose next hop
interface is ethernet 1/0/2.
[3Com-route-policy] if-match interface Ethernet1/0/2
if-match ip next-hop Syntax

if-match ip next-hop { acl acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name }
undo if-match ip next-hop [ ip-prefix ]
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
■ acl-number: Specifies the number of the access control list used for filtering.
The range is 1 to 99.
The range is 1 to 19.
Description
Using the if-match ip next-hop command, you can configure one of the match
rules of route-policy on the next hop address of the routing information. Using the
undo if-match ip next-hop command, you can cancel the setting of match
condition.
This if-match clause of the route-policy is used to specify the next hop address
field matching the routing information when it filters the routing information and
implement its filtering function by referring to an ACL or address prefix list.
if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip-address, apply cost, apply
local-preference, apply origin, and apply tag.
Example
Define an if-match clause. It permits the routing information, whose route next
hop address passes the filtering of the prefix address list p1, to pass this if-match
clause.
[3Com-route-policy] if-match ip next-hop ip-prefix p1
if-match ip-prefix Syntax

if-match ip-prefix ip-prefix-name
undo if-match [ ip-prefix ip-prefix-name ]
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
Description
Using the if-match ip-prefix command, you can configure one of the match rules
of route-policy on the IP address range of the routing information. Using the undo
if-match ip next-hop command, you can cancel the setting of match condition.
The filtering is achieved through importing an IP address prefix name.
For the related command, see if-match acl, if-match interface, if-match ip
Example
Define an if-match sub-statement in which the IP address prefix list p1 is used in
routing information filtering.
[3Com-route-policy] if-match ip-prefix p1
if-match tag Syntax

if-match tag value
undo if-match tag
View
Routing policy view
Parameter
■ value: Specifies the required tag value.
Description
Using the if-match tag command, you can match the tag field of OSPF route
information. Using the undo if-match tag command, you can cancel the existing
matching rules.
if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, route-policy, apply ip-address, apply cost,
Example
Display how to define one if-match clause and enable the OSPF route information
whose tag field is 8 to pass the if-match clause.
[3Com-route-policy] if-match tag 8
ip ip-prefix Syntax
ip ip-prefix ip-prefix-name [ index index-number ] { permit | deny } network len [
greater-equal greater-equal | less-equal less-equal ]
undo ip ip-prefix ip-prefix-name [ index index-number | permit | deny ]
View
System view
Parameter
■ ip-prefix-name: Specifies an address prefix list name. It identifies one address
prefix list uniquely.
■ index-number: Identifies an item in the prefix address list. The item with smaller
index-number will be tested first.
■ permit: Specifies the match mode of the defined address prefix list items as
permit mode. In the permit mode, if the IP address to be filtered is in the
defined range, it will not be tested by the next node. Otherwise, it has to go on
with the test.
■ deny: Specifies the match mode of the defined address prefix list items as deny
mode. In the deny mode, the IP address in the defined range cannot pass the
filtering and is refused to go on with the next test. Otherwise, it will have the
next test.
■ network: IP address prefix range (IP address). If it is 0.0.0.0 0, all the IP
addresses are matched.
■ len: IP address prefix range (mask length). If it is 0.0.0.0 0, all the IP addresses
are matched.
■ greater-equal, less-equal: Specifies the address prefix range [greater-equal,
less-equal] to be matched after the address prefix network len has been
matched. The meaning of greater-equal is "greater than or equal to" , and the
meaning of less-equal is "less than or equal to". The range is len <=
greater-equal <= less-equal <= 32. When only greater-equal is used, it indicates
the prefix range [greater-equal, 32]. When only less-equal is used, it indicates
the prefix range [len, less-equal].
Description
Using the ip ip-prefix command, you can configure an address prefix list or one of
its items. Using the undo ip ip-prefix command, you can delete an address prefix
list or one of its items.
The address prefix list is used for IP address filtering. An address prefix list may
contain several items, and each item specifies one address prefix range. The
inter-item filtering relation is "OR", i.e. passing an item means passing the filtering
of this address prefix list. Not passing the filtering of all items means not passing
the filtering of this prefix address list.
The address prefix range may contain two parts, which are determined by len and
[greater-equal, less-equal] respectively. If the prefix ranges of these two parts are
both specified, the IP to be filtered must match the prefix ranges of these two
parts.
If you specify network len as 0.0.0.0 0, it only matches the default route.
Specify network len as 0.0.0.0 0 less-equal 32 to match all the routes.
Example
Configure an address prefix list named p1. It permits the routes with the mask of
17 or 18 bits long and in network segment 10.0.192.0.8 to pass.
[3Com] ip ip-prefix p1 permit 10.0.192.0 8 greater-equal 17
less-equal 18
route-policy Syntax
route-policy route-policy-name { permit | deny } node { node-number }
undo route-policy route-policy-name [ permit | deny | node node-number ]
View
System view
Parameter
■ route-policy-name: Specifies the route-policy name to identify one route-policy
uniquely.
■ permit: Specifies the match mode of the defined route-policy node as permit
mode. If a route matches all the if-match clauses, it is permitted to pass the
filtering and execute the apply clauses of this node. If not, it will take the test
of next node of this route-policy.
■ deny: Specifies the match mode of the defined route-policy node as deny
mode. When a route matches all the if-match clauses of this node, it will be
refused to pass the filtering and will not take the next test.
■ node: Node of the route policy.
■ node-number: Index of the node in the route-policy. When this route-policy is
used for routing information filtering, the node with smaller node-number will
be tested first.
Description
Using the route-policy command, you can create and enter route-policy view.
Using the undo route-policy command, you can cancel the established
route-policy.
By default, no route-policy is defined.
Route-policy is used for route information filtering or route policy. One
route-policy comprises of some nodes and each node comprises of some if-match
and apply clauses. The if-match clause defines the match rules of this node and
the apply clause defines the actions after passing the filtering of this node. The
filtering relationship between the if-match clauses of the node is "and", i.e., all
if-match clauses that meet the node. The filtering relation between route-policy
nodes is "OR", i.e. passing the filtering of one node means passing the filtering of
this route-policy. If the information does not pass the filtering of any nodes, it
cannot pass the filtering of this route-policy.
if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, apply ip-address, apply
Example
Display how to configure one route-policy policy1, whose node number is 10 and
the match mode is permit, and enter route policy view.
[3Com] route-policy policy1 permit node 10
[3Com-route-policy]
Route Capacity
Configuration
Commands
display memory limit Syntax

dispaly memory limit
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display memory limit command, you can view the memory setting and
state information related to the router capacity.
It includes available memory and state information about connections such as
times for disconnecting connections, times for reestablishing connections and
whether the current system is in the emergent state or not.
Example
Display the current memory setting and state information.
<3Com> display memory limit
Current memory limit configuration information:

memory safety: 30
memory limit: 20
memory auto-establish enabled
Free Memory: 73855332 (Byte)
The state information about connection:

The times of disconnect: 0
The times of reconnect: 0
The current state: Normal
The information displayed by this command includes the router memory limit, the
size of the idle memory, the times of connection disconnecting, the times of
connection reestablishment and the current state.
The displayed information is described specifically in the following table:
Table 5 Description of the information displayed by the display memory limit command
Item Description
memory safety: 30 The safety value of the router memory is 30Mbytes.
memory limit: 20 The lower limit of the router memory is 20Mbytes.
memory auto-establish enabled The system allows recovering the connection automatically.
(If the automatic recover is disabled, the "auto-establish
disabled" will be displayed.)
Free Memory: 73855332 (Byte) The size of the current idle memory is 73855332 bytes, that
is, 73.855M.
The times of disconnect: 0 The times of the connection disconnecting of the router is 0.
The times of reconnect: 0 The times of the connection re-establishment of the router is
0.
The current state: Normal The current state is normal. (If entering the emergent state,
the system will display "Exigency" .)
memory auto-establish Syntax

disable memory auto-establish disable
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the memory auto-establish disable command, you can disable the function
of restoring the connections of all the routing protocols (even if the idle memory
reduces to a safety value).
By default, when the idle memory of the router recovers to a safety value,
connections of all the routing protocols will always recover (when the idle memory
of the router reduces to a lower limit, the connection will be disconnected
forcibly).
Using the memory auto-establish disable command, you can disable the above
function. Thus, connections of all the routing protocols will not recover when the
idle memory of the router recovers to a safety value. In this case, you need to
restart the routing protocol to recover the connections.
You shall use the command cautiously.

For the related commands, see memory auto-establish enable, memory { safety |
limit }, and display memory limit.
Example
Disable to recover the connections of all the protocols automatically when the
current router memory resumes.
[3Com] memory auto-establish disable
[3Com]
%3/13/2003 15:47:2-RM-5-S1-RTLOG:You have changed the model of
connection
memory auto-establish Syntax

enable memory auto-establish enable
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the memory auto-establish enable command, you can resume connections of all the
routing protocols when the idle memory of the router recovers to a safety value.
By default, when the idle memory of the router recovers to a safety value, connections of all
the routing protocols will always recover (when the idle memory of the router reduces to a
lower limit, the connection will be disconnected forcibly).
Using the memory auto-establish disable command, you can disable the above function.
Using the memory auto-establish enable command, you can enable the above function
again. By default, the function is always enabled.
For the related command, see memory auto-establish disable, memory { safety | limit },
and display memory limit.
Example
Enable memory resume of the current router and recover connections of all the
protocols automatically.
[3Com] memory auto-establish enable
[3Com]
%3/13/2003 15:48:2-RM-5-S1-RTLOG:You have changed the model of
connection
memory limit Syntax

memory limit limit-value
undo memory limit
View
System view
Parameter
■ limit-value: Lower limit of the router idle memory, in the unit of Mbytes. Its
value range depends on the idle memory of the current router. The default
value is 20Mbytes.
Description
Using the memory limit command, you can configure the lower limit of the router
idle memory. When the idle memory of the router is less than this limit, all the
routing protocol connections will be disconnected forcibly. Using the undo
memory limit command, you can configure the safety value and the lower limit of
the router idle memory to the default configuration.
The limit-value in the command must be less than the current idle memory safety
value, and otherwise the configuration will fail.
This command can be used with memory safety command to change the safety
value and lower limit of the router idle memory. The safety-value must be more
than the limit-value in the command, and otherwise the configuration will fail.
For the related commands, see memory auto-establish disable, memory
auto-establish enable, memory safety, and display memory limit.
Example
Set the lower limit of the router idle memory to 25Mbytes.
[3Com] memory limit 25
[3Com]
%8/19/2002 16:35:41-RM-5-RTLOG:You have changed the memory
limit/safety value
Set the lower limit of the router idle memory to 25Mbytes and the
safety value to 30Mbytes.
[3Com] memory safety 35 limit 25
[3Com]
%8/19/1995 15:45:58-RM-5-RTLOG:Changed the system memory
limit(20->25)/ safety(30->35) successfully
memory safety Syntax

memory safety safety-value
undo memory safety
View
System view
Parameter
■ safety-value: Safety value of the router idle memory, in the unit of Mbytes. Its
value range depends on the idle memory of the active router. The default value
is 30Mbytes.
Description
Using the memory safety command, you can configure the safety value of the
router idle memory. Using the undo memory safety command, you can configure
the safety value and the lower limit of the router idle memory to the default
configuration.
The safety-value in the command must be more than the current idle memory
lower limit, and otherwise the configuration will fail.
This command can be used with memory limit command to change the safety
value and lower limit of the router idle memory. The safety-value must be more
than the limit-value in the command, and otherwise the configuration will fail.
For the related commands, see memory auto-establish disable, memory
auto-establish enable, memory limit, and display memory limit.
Example
Set the safety value of the router to 35Mbytes.
[3Com] memory safety 35
[3Com]
%8/19/2002 16:35:41-RM-5-RTLOG:You have changed the memory
limit/safety value
Set the lower limit of the router idle memory to 25Mbytes and the
safety value to 30Mbytes.
[3Com] memory safety 35 limit 25
[3Com3Com]
%8/19/1995 15:45:58-RM-5-RTLOG:Changed the system memory
limit(20->25)/ safety(30->35) successfully
Multicast Common Configuration
7 Commands
This chapter covers the following commands:

■ Multicast Common Configuration Commands
■ IGMP Configuration Commands
■ PIM Configuration Commands
■ MSDP Configuration Commands
■ MBGP Multicast Extension Configuration Commands
■ Multicast Static Route Configuration Commands
Multicast Common
Configuration
Commands
debugging multicast Syntax

forwarding debugging multicast forwarding
undo debugging multicast forwarding
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the debugging multicast forwarding command, you can enable multicast
packet forwarding debugging functions. Using the undo debugging multicast
forwarding command, you can disable the debugging functions.
By default, the debugging function is disabled.
Example
Enable multicast packet forwarding debugging functions.
<3Com> debugging multicast forwarding

kernel-routing debugging multicast kernel-routing
undo debugging multicast kernel-routing

688 CHAPTER 7: MULTICAST COMMON CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the debugging multicast kernel-routing command, you can enable multicast
kernel routing debugging functions. Using the undo debugging multicast
kernel-routing command, you can disable the debugging functions.
By default, the multicast kernel routing debugging function is disabled.
Example
Enable multicast kernel routing debugging functions.
<3Com> debugging multicast kernel-routing

status-forwarding debugging multicast status-forwarding
undo debugging multicast status-forwarding
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the debugging multicast status-forwarding command, you can enable
multicast forwarding status debugging functions. Using the undo debugging
multicast status-forwarding command, you can disable the debugging functions.
By default, the multicast status debugging function is disabled.
Example
Enable multicast forwarding status debugging functions.
<3Com> debugging multicast status-forwarding
display multicast Syntax

forwarding-table display multicast forwarding-table [ group-address [ mask { mask | mask-length } ] |
source-address [ mask { mask | mask-length } ] | incoming-interface { interface-type
interface-number | register } ] *
View
Any view
Parameter
group-address: Multicast group address, used to specify a multicast group,
ranging from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
mask: Mask.
mask-length: Length of mask. Because “1”s in 32-bit mask are required to be

continuous, the mask in dotted decimal notation format can be replaced by
mask-length (mask-length is the number of continuous “1”s in the mask).
source-address: Unicast IP address of the multicast source.
incoming-interface: Incoming interface of the multicast forwarding entry.
register: Register interface of PIM-SM.
Description
Using the display multicast forwarding-table command, you can view the
information of multicast forwarding table.
source-address and group-address of multicast forwarding table are displayed in

hexadecimal notation format and its incoming and outgoing port numbers are
displayed by virtual port number. This information can be viewed via display pim
interface command.
For the related command, see display multicast routing-table.
Example
Display the multicast forwarding table information.
<3Com> display multicast forwarding-table

routing-table display multicast routing-table [ group-address [ mask { mask | mask-length } ] |
source-address [ mask { mask | mask-length } ] | incoming-interface { interface-type
interface-number | register } ]*
View
Any view
Parameter
group-address: Multicast group address, used to specify a multicast group and
display the corresponding routing table information of the group. The value
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
source-address: Unicast IP address of the multicast source.
mask: Mask.
mask-length: Length of mask. Because “1” in 32-bit mask is required to be
incoming-interface: Incoming interface of the multicast route entry.
register: Register interface of PIM-SM.
Description
Using the display multicast routing-table command, you can view the information
of IP multicast routing table.
This command displays the multicast routing table information, while the display
multicast forwarding-table command displays the multicast forwarding table
information.
The entry (S, G) in the multicast routing table, i.e., (multicast source, multicast
group) acts as the independent entry in the table. Each entry has an unique
Upstream, indicating the interface through which RPF goes to the multicast
source. Each entry has also a Downstream List, indicating which interfaces need
multicast forwarding. The related information about (S, G) includes:
■ proto - The multicast protocol number which possesses the (S, G) (in
hexadecimal notation format).
■ Flags - All kinds of flags, such as RPT 0x1, WC 0x2, SPT 0x4, NEG CACHE 0x8
and JOIN SUPP 0x10. All the flags are marked by binary “bit”. In which, RPT
indicates the (S, G) is in the shared tree status. WC is the abbreviation of
wildcard. SPT indicates the shortest path tree. NEG CACHE indicates the cache
record that the downstream interface list is null. JOIN SUPP indicates the prune
suppression status.
Example
Display the corresponding route entry information of multicast group in the
multicast routing table.
<3Com> display multicast routing-table
Multicast Routing Table
Total 1 entry
(10.10.1.2, 225.1.1.1)
UpTime: 00:01:28, Timeout in 278 sec
Upstream interface: Ethernet0/0/0(10.10.1.20)
Downstream interface list:
LoopBack0(20.20.20.30), Protocol 0x1: IGMP

routing-table static display multicast routing-table static [ config ] [ source-address [ mask |
mask-length ] ]
View
Any view
Parameter
config: When this parameter is chosen, all the routing information configured will
be displayed. If this parameter is not chosen, only effective routing information is
displayed.
source-address: IP address of the multicast source.
mask: Mask.
mask-length: Length of mask. Because “1”s in 32-bit mask are required to be

Description
Using the display multicast routing-table static command, you can view the
configuration information of static multicast route.
Example
Display the configuration information of static multicast route.
<3Com>display multicast routing-table static
100.10.0.0/16
RPF interface = 10.10.1.20(Ethernet0/0/0), RPF neighbor =
10.10.1.20
Matched routing protocol = <none>, route-policy = <none>,
preference = 1
Running config = ip rpf-route-static 100.10.0.0 16 Ethernet0/0/0
preference 1

rpf-info display multicast rpf-info source-address
View
Any view
Parameter
Description
Using the display multicast rpf-info command, you can view the Reverse Path
Forwarding (RPF) routing information for specified multicast source.
Example
Display all the RPF routing information.
<3Com> display multicast rpf-info 192.193.194.192
Multicast source's RPF route information about 192.193.194.192
RPF interface: InLoopBack0, RPF neighbor: 127.0.0.1
Referenced route/mask: 192.193.194.192/32
Referenced route type: unicast (DIRECT)
RPF-route selecting rule: preference-preferred
mtracert Syntax
mtracert { source-address } [ last-hop-address ] [ group-address ]
View
Any view
Parameter
source-address: Address of the multicast source.
last-hop-address: Unicast address, which is the starting address of path tracing.

This address must be an interface address of a hop router. By default, it is a
physical interface address of the local router.
group-address: Address of multicast group. By default, the value is 0.0.0.0.
Description
Using the mtracert command, you can trace the network path from the multicast
source to the destination receiver along Multicast Distribution Tree, according to
either the multicast kernel routing table or RPF rule to the source. This command
can help to locate the faults, such as information loss and configuration error.
The trace mode to the group address of 0.0.0.0 is called weak trace mode.
Example
Trace the path reversely from the local hop router 18.110.0.1 to the
multicast source 10.10.1.2 in weak trace mode.
<3Com> mtracert 10.10.1.2
Type Ctrl+C to abort
Mtrace from 10.10.1.2 to 18.110.0.1 via RPF
Querying full reverse path...
-1 18.110.0.1
Incoming Interface Address: 18.110.0.1
Previous-Hop Router Address: 18.110.0.2
Input packet count on incoming interface: 0
Output packet count on outgoing interface: 0
Total number of packets for this source-group pair: 0
Protocol: PIM
Forwarding TTL: 0
Forwarding Code: No error
-2 18.110.0.2
Protocol: PIM
Forwarding TTL: 0
-3 11.110.0.4
Protocol: PIM
Forwarding TTL: 0
Trace reversely the path information of multicast group 225.1.1.1 from the
multicast source 10.10.1.3 to the destination address 12.110.0.2.
<3Com>mtracert 10.10.1.3 12.110.0.2 225.1.1.1

Type Ctrl+C to abort
Mtrace from 10.10.1.3 to 12.110.0.2 via group 225.1.1.1
Querying full reverse path...
-1 12.110.0.2
Protocol: PIM
Forwarding TTL: 0
-2 11.110.0.4
Protocol: Unknown
Forwarding TTL: 0
multicast minimum-ttl Syntax

multicast minimum-ttl ttl-value
undo multicast minimum-ttl
View
Interface view
Parameter
ttl-value: The minimum TTL value, ranging from 0 to 255.
Description
Using the multicast minimum-ttl command, you can configure the minimum TTL
value for multicast forwarding. Using the undo multicast minimum-ttl command,
you can remove the minimum TTL value configured.
By default, no minimum TTL value for multicast forwarding is configured.
Example
Configure the minimum TTL value for multicast forwarding to 8.
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/1] multicast minimum-ttl 8
multicast Syntax
packet-boundary multicast packet-boundary acl-number
undo multicast packet-boundary
View
Interface view
Parameter
acl-number: Number of basic or advanced ACL, ranging from 1 to 199.
Description
Using the multicast packet-boundary command, you can configure a multicast
forwarding boundary. Using the undo multicast packet-boundary command, you
can remove the multicast forwarding boundary configured.
By default, no multicast forwarding boundary is configured.
You can set boundary conditions for multicast packets on an interface via basic or
advanced Access Control List (ACL). Packets denied by the ACL will be discarded.
The source address of a multicast packet can be filtered through the basic ACL.
Both the source address and the destination address (source group address) of a
multicast packet can be filtered through the advanced ACL.
Example
Set boundary conditions for multicast packets through the basic ACL 1.
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/1] multicast packet-boundary 1
multicast route-limit Syntax

multicast route-limit limit
View
System view
Parameter
limit: Limit of multicast routing table capacity, ranging from 0 to
MAX_MROUTE_LIMIT. In which, MAX_MROUTE_LIMIT differs with the different
router types.
Description
Using the multicast route-limit command, you can limit the multicast routing table
capacity. If the capacity exceeds the limit, the router will discard protocols and data
packets of the newly-added (S, G).
By default, the limit of multicast routing table capacity is MAX_MROUTE_LIMIT.
If the number of route entries in the routing table has exceeded the configured
number when configuring the command, the previous route entry in the routing
table will not be deleted. The system will prompt “The number of current route
entries is more than that configured.”
If this command is executed repeatedly, the new configuration will overwrite the
previous one.
Example
Limit the multicast routing table capacity to 1000.
<3Com] multicast route-limit 1000
multicast routing-enable Syntax

multicast routing-enable
undo multicast routing-enable
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the multicast routing-enable command, you can enable IP multicast routing.
Using the undo multicast routing-enable command, you can disable IP multicast
routing.
By default, IP multicast routing is disabled.
the system will not forward any multicast packet when IP multicast routing is
disabled.
For the related commands, see pim dm and pim sm.
Example
Enable IP multicast routing.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] multicast routing-enable
reset multicast Syntax

forwarding-table reset multicast forwarding-table [ statistics ] { all | { group-address [ mask {
group-mask | group-mask-length } ] | source-address [ mask { source-mask |
source-mask-length } ] | { incoming-interface interface-type interface-number } | {
slot slot-number } } * }
View
User view
Parameter
statistics: If this parameter is used, the statistics of MFC forwarding entries will be
cleared. Otherwise, the MFC forwarding entries will be cleared.
all: All the MFC forwarding entries.
group-address: Address of the specified group.
group-mask: Address mask of the specified group.
group-mask-length: Address mask length of the specified group.
source-address: Address of the specified source.
source-mask: Address mask of the specified source.
source-mask-length: Address mask length of the specified source.

incoming-interface: Incoming interface of the specified forwarding entry.
interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.
slot-number: Number of the slot where the interface board resides. This parameter
is only present in the distributed router.
Description
Using the reset multicast forwarding-table command, you can clear MFC
forwarding entries or the statistics of MFC forwarding entries.
The sequence of group-address and source-address can be reversed, but the input
group-address and source-address must be valid. Otherwise, the system will
prompt input error.
For the related commands, see reset pim routing-table, reset multicast
routing-table, and display multicast forwarding-table.
Example
Clear the forwarding entry whose group address is 225.5.4.3 from the MFC
forwarding table.
<3Com> reset multicast forwarding-table 225.5.4.3
Clear the statistics of the forwarding entry whose group address is 225.5.4.3 from
MFC forwarding table.
<3Com> reset multicast forwarding-table statistics 225.5.4.3
reset multicast Syntax

routing-table reset multicast routing-table { all | { group-address [ mask { group-mask |
group-mask-length } ] | source-address [ mask { source-mask | source-mask-length
} ] | { incoming-interface interface-type interface-number } } * }
View
User view
Parameter
all: All the route entries in multicast kernel routing table.
group-address: Address of the specified group.
group-mask: Address mask of the specified group.
group-mask-length: Address mask length of the specified group.
source-address: Address of the specified source.
source-mask: Address mask of the specified source.
source-mask-length: Address mask length of multicast source.
incoming-interface: Incoming interface of the specified route entry.

Description
Using the reset multicast routing-table command, you can clear the route entry in
the multicast kernel routing table and remove the corresponding forwarding entry
in MFC.
prompt input error.
For the related commands, see reset pim routing-table, reset multicast
forwarding-table. and display multicast forwarding-table.
Example
Clear the route entry whose group address is 225.5.4.3 from the multicast kernel
routing table.
<3Com> reset multicast routing-table 225.5.4.3
IGMP Configuration
Commands
debugging igmp Syntax

debugging igmp { all | event | host | packet | timer }
undo debugging igmp { all | event | host | packet | timer }
View
User view
Parameter
all: All the debugging information of IGMP.
event: Debugging information of IGMP event.
host: Debugging information of IGMP host.
packet: Debugging information of IGMP packets.
timer: Debugging information of IGMP timers.
Description
Using the debugging igmp command, you can enable IGMP debugging functions.
Using the undo debugging igmp command, you can disable the debugging
functions.
By default, IGMP debugging functions are disabled.

Example
Enable all IGMP debugging functions
<3Com> debugging igmp all
display igmp group Syntax

display igmp group [ group-address | interface interface-type interface-number |
local ]
View
Any view
Parameter
group-address: Multicast group address.
interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number of the

router, used to specify the interface.
local: Information of the local interface which receives and sends multicast data.
Description
Using the display igmp group command, you can view the member information of
the IGMP multicast group.
You can specify to view the information of a group or the member information of
the multicast group on an interface. The information displayed includes the
multicast groups joined through IGMP and those joined statically through
command lines by the downstream host.
For the related command, see igmp host-join.
Example
Display the member information of the directly connected sub-network.
<3Com> display igmp group
LoopBack0 (20.20.20.20): Total 3 IGMP Groups reported:
Group Address Last Reporter Uptime Expires
225.1.1.1 20.20.20.20 00:02:04 00:01:15
225.1.1.3 20.20.20.20 00:02:04 00:01:15
225.1.1.2 20.20.20.20 00:02:04 00:01:17
Table 1 Description of Output Information of Display IP IGRMP Group Command
Item Description
Group address Multicast group address
Last Reporter Report the last host which becomes the multicast group member
Uptime The time since the multicast group is found (hour, minute, second)
Expires The predicted time when the record will be removed from the IGMP
group table (hour, minute, second)
display igmp interface Syntax

display igmp interface [ interface-type interface-number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number of the
router, used to specify the interface. If the parameters are not specified,
information about all the interfaces running IGMP will be displayed.
Description
Using the display igmp interface command, you can view the IGMP configuration
and running information on an interface.
The information displayed through display igmp interface will be different

according to the configuration of IGMP proxy on an interface.
■ If the interface is neither a proxy nor a client, the configuration of IGMP Proxy
will not be displayed.
■ If the interface is a proxy, all the clients will be displayed.
■ If the interface is a client, the proxy will be displayed.
Example
Display the IGMP configuration and running information on an interface.
<3Com> display igmp interface
Ethernet0/0/0 (10.10.1.20):
IGMP is enabled
Current IGMP version is 2
Value of query interval for IGMP(in seconds): 60
Value of other querier time out for IGMP(in seconds): 120
Value of maximum query response time for IGMP(in seconds): 10
Policy to accept IGMP reports: none
Querier for IGMP: 10.10.1.10
Total 2 IGMP groups reported
LoopBack0 (20.20.20.30):
IGMP is enabled
Value of query interval for IGMP(in seconds): 60
Value of other querier time out for IGMP(in seconds): 120
Value of maximum query response time for IGMP(in seconds): 10
Policy to accept IGMP reports: none
Querier for IGMP: 20.20.20.30 (this router)
No IGMP group reported
display igmp local Syntax

display igmp local
View
Any view
Parameter
local: Information of the local interface which receives and sends multicast data.
Description
Using the display igmp local command, you can view the IGMP configuration and
running information of the local interface which receives and sends multicast data.
Example
Display the IGMP configuration and running information of the local interface
which receives and sends multicast data.
<3Com> display igmp local
Mcast_Out_IF (127.0.0.6):
IGMP is enabled on interface
No IGMP group reported
Mcast_In_IF (127.0.0.5):
IGMP is disabled on interface
igmp enable Syntax

igmp enable
undo igmp enable
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the igmp enable command, you can enable IGMP on an interface. Using the
undo igmp enable command, you can disable IGMP on an interface.
By default, IGMP is disabled on an interface.
Only after multicast is enabled, can this command take effect. After this command
is configured, the configuration of other attributes of IGMP can be performed.
For the related command, see multicast routing-enable.
Example
Enable IGMP on the interface Ethernet0/0/0.
<3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] igmp enable
igmp group-limit Syntax

igmp group-limit limit
undo igmp group-limit
View
Interface view
Parameter
limit: Number of IGMP groups, ranging from 0 to MAX_IF_IGMP_GROUP_LIMIT.
The value of MAX_IF_IGMP_GROUP_LIMIT on routers is MAX_MROUTE_LIMIT,
which differs with the different router types.
Description
Using the igmp group-limit command, you can limit the number of IGMP groups
joined on the interface. If the number exceeds the limit, the router will not process
the joined IGMP packet any more. Using the undo igmp group-limit command,
you can restore the default configuration.
By default, the maximum number of IGMP groups joined on the interface is 1024.
If the number of IGMP groups joined on the interface has exceeded the
configuration value during configuration, the previously joined IGMP groups will
not be deleted.
previous one.
Example
Limit the maximum number of IGMP groups joined on the interface Ethernet1/0/0
to 100.
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp group-limit 100
igmp group-policy Syntax

igmp group-policy acl-number [ 1 | 2 ]
undo igmp group-policy
View
Interface view
Parameter
acl-number: Number of basic IP ACL, defining the range of a multicast group. The
value ranges from 1 to 99.
1: IGMP Version 1.
2: IGMP Version 2. If IGMP version is not specified, IGMP Version 2 is used by

default.
Description
Using the igmp group-policy command, you can set the filter of multicast groups
on an interface to control the accessing to the IP multicast groups. Using the undo
igmp group-policy command, you can remove the filter configured.
By default, no filter is configured, that is, a host can join any multicast group.
If you do not want the hosts on the network that the interface is on to join some
multicast groups and receive the packets from the multicast groups, you can use
this command to limit the range of the multicast groups served by the interface.
For the related command, see igmp host-join.
Example
Permit the hosts on the interface Ethernet1/0/0 to join multicast group 225.1.1.1
only.
<3Com] acl number 5
<3Com-acl-basci-5] rule permit source 225.1.1.1 0
<3Com-acl-basci-5] quit
<3Com] interface ethernet 1/0/0
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp group-policy 5
igmp host-join Syntax

igmp host-join group-address
undo igmp host-join group-address
View
Interface view
Parameter
group-address: Multicast address of the multicast group that an interface will join.
Description
Using the igmp host-join command, you can enable an interface of a router to join
a multicast group. Using the undo igmp host-join command, you can disable the
configuration.
By default, an interface does not join any multicast group.
On one router, up to 1024 interfaces can be configured with igmp host-join

command at best.
For the related command, see igmp group-policy.
Example
Configure Ethernet1/0/0 to join the multicast group 255.0.0.1.
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp host-join 225.0.0.1
igmp Syntax
lastmember-queryinterv igmp lastmember-queryinterval seconds
al
undo igmp lastmember-queryinterval
View
Interface view
Parameter
seconds: Interval at which IGMP querier sends the IGMP specified group query
packet when it receives IGMP Leave packet from the host, in second. The value
ranges from 1 to 5 seconds. By default, the value is 1 second.
Description
Using the igmp lastmember-queryinterval command, you can set the interval at
which IGMP querier sends the IGMP specified group query packet when it receives
IGMP Leave packet from the host. Using the undo igmp lastmember-queryinterval
On a shared network, that is, when there are multiple hosts and multicast routers
on a network segment, the query router (querier for short) takes charge of
maintaining IGMP group membership on an interface. When the host in IGMP
Version 2 leaves a group, the host should send IGMP Leave packet. If IGMP querier
receives the packet, it must send the IGMP specified group query packet for
robust-value times according to the interval seconds configured via igmp
lastmember-queryinterval command (if the command is not configured, seconds is
1) and the robust coefficient robust-value configured via igmp robust-count (if the
command is not configured, robust-value is 2). If another host receives the IGMP
specified group query packet from IGMP querier and is interested in the group, it
will send IGMP Membership Report packet within the maximum response time
regulated by the packet. If IGMP querier receives IGMP Membership Report packet
from another host within the time robust-value x seconds, it will go on
maintaining the group membership. If not, it will regard the group is timeout and
stop maintaining the group membership.
The command is only valid when IGMP query router is running in IGMP Version 2.
If the host runs in IGMP Version 1, it may not send IGMP Leave packet when it
leaves a group. At that time, the command is invalid to the host.
For the related commands, see igmp robust-count and display igmp interface.
Example
Configure the query interval of the querier for the last group member on the
interface Ethernet1/0/0 to 3 seconds.
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp lastmember-queryinterval 3
igmp max-response-time Syntax

igmp max-response-time seconds
undo igmp max-response-time
View
Interface view
Parameter
seconds: The maximum response time in the IGMP query packet in second,
ranging from 1 to 25. By default, the value is 10 seconds.
Description
Using the igmp max-response-time command, you can configure the maximum
response time contained in the IGMP query packet. Using the undo igmp
max-response-time command, you can restore the default value.
The maximum query response time determines the period for a router to quickly
detect that there are no more directly connected group members in a LAN.
For the related command, see display igmp group.
Example
Configure the maximum response time to 8 seconds.
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp max-response-time 8
igmp proxy Syntax

igmp proxy interface-type interface-number
undo igmp proxy
View
Interface view
Parameter
interface-type: Proxy interface type.
interface-number: Proxy interface number.
Description
Using the igmp proxy command, you can specify an interface of a leaf network
router as the IGMP proxy of another interface. Using the undo igmp proxy
command, you can remove the configuration.
By default, IGMP proxy function is disabled.
An interface cannot act as the IGMP proxy of two or more other interfaces at the
same time.
If an interface is configured with IGMP proxy for multiple times, the last one
overrides all the previous configurations.
For the related command, see pim neighbor-policy.
Example
Configure the IGMP proxy of router Ethernet0/0/0 to Ethernet1/0/0.
<3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] igmp proxy ethernet 1/0/0
igmp robust-count Syntax

igmp robust-count robust-value
undo igmp robust-count
View
Interface view
Parameter
robust-value: IGMP robust coefficient, indicating the times IGMP querier sends the
IGMP specified group query packet when it receives IGMP Leave packet from the
host. The value ranges from 2 to 5. By default, the value is 2.
Description
Using the igmp robust-count command, you can set the times IGMP querier sends
the IGMP specified group query packet when it receives IGMP Leave packet from
the host. Using the undo igmp robust-count command, you can restore the
default value.
On a shared network, with multiple hosts and multicast routers on a network

segment, the query router (querier for short) takes charge of maintaining IGMP
group membership on an interface. When the host in IGMP Version 2 leaves a
group, the host should send IGMP Leave packet. If IGMP querier receives the
packet, it must send the IGMP specified group query packet for robust-value times
according to the interval seconds configured via igmp lastmember-queryinterval
command (if the command is not configured, seconds is 1) and the robust
coefficient robust-value configured via igmp robust-count (if the command is not
configured, robust-value is 2).
If another host receives the IGMP specified group query packet from IGMP querier
and is interested in the group, it will send IGMP Membership Report packet within
the maximum response time regulated by the packet. If IGMP querier receives
IGMP Membership Report packet from another host within the time robust-value x
seconds, it will go on maintaining the group membership. If not, it will regard the
group is overtime and stop maintaining the group membership.
The command is only valid when IGMP query router is running in IGMP Version 2.
If the host runs in IGMP Version 1, it may not send IGMP Leave packet when it
leaves a group. At that time, the command is invalid to the host.
For the related commands, see igmp lastmember-queryinterval and display igmp
interface.
Example
Configure the robust-value of querier on the interface Ethernet1/0/0 to 3.
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp robust-count 3
igmp timer Syntax

other-querier-present igmp timer other-querier-present seconds
undo igmp timer other-querier-present
View
Interface view
Parameter
seconds: IGMP querier present time, in second. The value ranges from 60 to 300
seconds. By default, the value is twice of IGMP query messages interval. It is 120
seconds in general.
Description
Using the igmp timer other-querier-present command, you can configure the
overtime value of presence of IGMP querier. Using the undo igmp timer
other-querier-present command, you can restore the default value.
On a shared network, i.e., there are multiple multicast routers on the same
network segment, the query router (querier for short) takes charge of sending
query messages periodically on the interface. If other non-queriers receive no
query messages within the valid period, the router will consider the previous query
to be invalid and the router itself becomes a querier.
In IGMP Version 1, the selection of a querier is determined by the multicast routing

protocol. In IGMP Version 2, the router with the lowest IP address on the shared
network segment acts as the querier.
For the related commands, see igmp timer query and display igmp interface.
CAUTION: If the querier present time configured is less than the twice of query
interval, it may lead to the repeated changes of queriers in the network.
Example
Configure the querier present time on the interface Ethernet1/0/0 to 200 seconds.
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp timer other-querier-present 200
igmp timer query Syntax

igmp timer query seconds
undo igmp timer query
View
Interface view
Parameter
seconds: Interval at which the router sends the IGMP query messages, in second. It
ranges from 1 to 18000. By default, the value is 60 seconds.
Description
Using the igmp timer query command, you can configure the interval at which a
router interface sends IGMP query messages. Using the undo igmp timer query
A multicast router sends IGMP query messages at intervals to find out whether
there are multicast group members on the network. The query interval can be
modified according to the practical conditions of the network.
For the related command, see igmp timer other-querier-present.
Example
Configure the interval at which multicast router Ethernet1/0/0 sends IGMP query
packet to 125 seconds.
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp timer query 125
igmp version Syntax

igmp version { 1 | 2 }
undo igmp version
View
Interface view
Parameter
1: IGMP Version 1.
2: IGMP Version 2. By default, IGMP Version 2 is used.
Description
Using the igmp version command, you can specify the version of IGMP that a
router uses. Using the undo igmp version command, you can restore the default
value.
All systems running in the same sub-network must support the same version of
IGMP. When a router finds the system of Version 1, it cannot switch to Version 1
by itself.
Example
Specify Ethernet1/0/0 to use IGMP Version 1.
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp version 1
reset igmp group Syntax

reset igmp group { all | interface interface-type interface-number { all |
group-address [ group-mask ] } }
View
User view
Parameter
all: All IGMP groups.
interface interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.
group-address: IGMP group address.
group-mask: Network segment mask of group address.
Description
Using the reset igmp group command, you can delete the IGMP group joined on
the interface. The deletion of the group does not affect its joining again.
Example
Delete all the IGMP groups on all interfaces.
<3Com> reset igmp group all
Delete all the IGMP groups on the interface Ethernet0/0/0.

<3Com> reset igmp group interface ethernet0/0/0 all
Delete the group 225.0.0.1 on the interface Ethernet0/0/0.
<3Com> reset igmp group interface ethernet0/0/0 225.0.0.1
Delete the IGMP groups ranging between the network segment 225.1.1.0 and
225.1.1.255 on the interface Ethernet0/0/0.
<3Com> reset igmp group interface ethernet0/0/0 225.1.1.0

255.255.255.0
PIM Configuration
Commands
bsr-policy Syntax
bsr-policy acl-number
undo bsr-policy
View
PIM view
Parameter
acl-number: ACL number used by BSR filter policy , ranging from 1 to 99.
Description
Using the bsr-policy command, you can restrict the range for valid BSR so as to
prevent BSR spoofing. Using the undo bsr-policy command, you can restore the
normal state without any range restriction and regard all the messages received
are valid.
In PIM SM network which uses BSR mechanism, any router can set itself as C-BSR
and will take charge of the authority of advertising BP information in the network
if it succeeds in competition. To prevent the valid BSR in the network from being
maliciously replaced, the following two measures should be taken:
■ Change RP mapping relationship to prevent the host from spoofing the router
by counterfeiting valid BSR packet. BSR packet is multicast packet with TTL of
1, so this kind of attack usually takes place on the edge router. BSR is in the
internal network and the host is in the external network, therefore, performing
neighbor check and RPF check to BSR packet can prevent this kind of attack.
■ If a router in the network is controlled by an attacker or an illegal router
accesses the network, the attacker can set the router to C-BSR and make it
succeed in competition and control the authority of advertising RP information
in the network. The router, after being configured as C-BSR, will automatically
advertise BSR information to the whole network. BSR packet is the multicast
packet which is forwarded hop by hop with TTL of 1. The whole network will
not be affected if the neighbor router does not receive the BSR information.
The solution is to configure bsr-policy on each router in the whole network to
restrict the range for legal BSR. For example, if only 1.1.1.1/32 and 1.1.1.2/32
are permitted as BSR, the router will not receive and forward other BSR
information and legal BSR will not compete with it.
The above two points can partially protect the security of BSR in the network.
However, if a legal BSR router is controlled by an attacker, it will also lead to the
above problem.
The source parameter in the related rule command is translated as BSR address in
bsr-policy command.
For the related commands, see acl and rule.
Example
Configure BSR filter policy on a router. Only permit 1.1.1.1/32 to act as BSR and
regard others are invalid.
<3Com-pim] bsr-policy 1
<3Com-pim] quit
<3Com] acl number 1
<3Com-acl-basic-1] rule 0 permit source 1.1.1.1 0
c-bsr Syntax
c-bsr interface-type interface-number hash-mask-len [ priority ]
undo c-bsr
View
PIM view
Parameter
interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number of a router.
A candidate BSR is configured on this interface. PIM-SM must be enabled on this
interface, the configuration can take effect.
hash-mask-len: Mask length. The mask performs “And” operation with multicast
address at first and then performs the operation of searching for RP. The value
priority: Priority of the candidate BSR. The larger the value is, the higher the
priority of candidate BSR is. The value ranges from 0 to 255. By default, the
priority is 0.
Description
Using the c-bsr command, you can configure a candidate BSR. Using the undo
c-bsr command, you can remove the candidate BSR configuration.
By default, no candidate BSR is set.
Since BSR and other devices in PIM domain need to exchange a great deal of
information during candidate BSR configuration, a relatively large bandwidth must
be guaranteed.
For the related command, see pim sm.
Example
Configure the IP address of the router on Ethernet1/0/0 as a candidate BSR with
the priority 2.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] pim
<3Com-pim] c-bsr ethernet1/0/0 30 2
c-rp Syntax
c-rp interface-type interface-number [ group-policy acl-number ] [ priority
priority-value ]
undo c-rp interface-type interface-number
View
PIM view
Parameter
interface-type interface-number: Specified interface with the IP address advertised
as a candidate RP address.
acl-number: Number of basic ACL that defines a group range, which is the service
range of the advertised RP. The value ranges from 1 to 99.
priority-value: Priority of a candidate RP. The larger the value is, the lower the
priority is. The value ranges from 0 to 255. By default, the value is 0.
Description
Using the c-rp command, you can configure the router to advertise itself as a
candidate RP to BSR. Using the undo c-rp command, you can remove the
configuration.
By default, no candidate RP is configured.
When configuring a candidate RP, a relatively large bandwidth should be reserved

for the router and other devices in PIM domain.
For the related command, see c-bsr.
Example
Configure the interface Ethernet1/0/0 as the candidate RP for all groups.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] pim
<3Com-pim] c-rp ethernet 1/0/0
crp-policy Syntax
crp-policy acl-number
undo crp-policy
View
PIM view
Parameter
acl-number: ACL number used by C-RP filter policy, ranging from 100 to 199.
Description
Using the crp-policy command, you can restrict the range for valid C-RP and the
group range served by each C-RP so as to prevent C-RP cheating. Using the undo
crp-policy command, you can restore the normal state without any range
restriction and regard all the messages received are valid.
In PIM SM network which uses BSR mechanism, any router can set itself as a C-RP
serving the specific group range. If it is elected in RP election, it will become an RP
serving in the group range.
In BSR mechanism C-RP router unicasts C-RP information to BSR router which is
responsible for advertising all C-RP information to the whole network by using BRP
information.
To prevent C-RP cheating, crp-policy is needed to be configured on BSR router to

restrict the range for valid C-RP and the group address range it serves. Each C-BSR
may become a BSR possibly, so the same filter policy should be configured on each
C-BSR.
This command uses the ACL numbered from 100 to 199. The parameter source in
the related rule command indicates C-RP address and destination indicates the
group range the C-RP serves. Upon matching the received C-RP message, only
when the C-RP address in the packet matches source address and the group
address range in the packet is the subset of that in ACL, can this configuration be
regarded successful.
For the related commands, see acl and rule.
Example
Configure C-RP policy on C-BSR router. Only permit 1.1.1.1/32 to act as C-RP
which only serves the group range 225.1.0.0/16.
<3Com-pim] crp-policy 100
<3Com-pim] quit
<3Com] acl number 100
<3Com-acl-adv-100] rule 0 permit ip source 1.1.1.1 0 destination
225.1.0.0 0.0.255.255
debugging pim common Syntax

debugging pim common { all | event | packet | timer }
undo debugging pim common { all | event | packet | timer }
View
User view
Parameter
all: All the common debugging information of PIM.
event: Debugging information of common PIM event.
packet: Debugging information of PIM Hello message.
timer: Debugging information of common PIM timer.
Description
Using the debugging pim common command, you can enable common PIM
debugging functions. Using the undo debugging pim common command, you
can disable the debugging functions.
By default, common PIM debugging functions are disabled.
Example
Enable all common PIM debugging functions.
<3Com> debugging pim common all
debugging pim dm Syntax

debugging pim dm { alert | all | mrt | timer | warning | { recv | send } { all | assert |
graft | graft-ack | join | prune } }
undo debugging pim dm { alert | all | mrt | timer | warning | { recv | send } { all |
assert | graft | graft-ack | join | prune } }
View
User view
Parameter
all: All the debugging information of PIM-DM.
alert: Debugging information of PIM-DM interoperation event.
mrt: Debugging information of PIM-DM multicast routing table.
timer: Debugging information of PIM-DM timer.
warning: Debugging information of PIM-DM warning message.
recv: Debugging information of PIM-DM receiving packets.
send: Debugging information of PIM-DM sending packets.
all: All packet types.
assert: Packet type, assert packet.
graft: Packet type, graft packet.
graft-ack: Packet type, graft acknowledgment packet.

join: Packet type, join packet.
prune: Packet type, prune packet.
Description
Using the debugging pim dm command, you can enable PIM-DM debugging
functions. Using the undo debugging pim dm command, you can disable the
debugging functions.
By default, PIM-DM debugging functions are disabled.
Example
Enable all PIM-DM debugging functions
<3Com> debugging pim dm all
debugging pim sm Syntax

debugging pim sm { all | mbr | mrt | timer | msdp | verbose | warning | { recv | send
} { assert | bootstrap | crpadv | jp | reg | regstop } }
undo debugging pim sm { all | mbr | mrt | msdp | timer | verbose | warning | { recv |
send } { assert | bootstrap | crpadv | jp | reg | regstop } }
View
User view
Parameter
mbr: Debugging information of PIM-SM multicast boundary router event.
mrt: Debugging information of PIM-SM multicast routing table.
msdp: Functions between PIM-SM and MSDP.
timer: Debugging information of PIM-SM timer.
warning: Debugging information of PIM-SM warning message.
recv: Debugging information of PIM-SM receiving packets.
send: Debugging information of PIM-SM sending packets.
assert | bootstrap | crpadv | jp | reg | regstop: Packet type.
Description
Using the debugging pim sm command, you can enable PIM-SM debugging
functions. Using the undo debugging pim sm command, you can disable the
By default, PIM-SM debugging functions are disabled.
The command debugging pim sm register-proxy is only suitable for the distributed
router. This command can enable the debugging when an interface board acts as
a proxy of main control board to send register packets.
Example
Enable all PIM-SM debugging functions
<3Com> debugging pim sm all
display pim bsr-info Syntax

display pim bsr-info
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display pim bsr-info command, you can view Bootstrap Router (BSR)
information.
For the related commands, see c-bsr and c-rp.
Example
Execute this command on a router running PIM-SM and display the current BSR
information.
<3Com> display pim bsr-info
Current BSR Address: 20.20.20.30
Priority: 0
Mask Length: 30
Expires: 00:01:55
Local host is BSR
display pim interface Syntax

display pim interface [ interface-type interface-number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
Description
Using the display pim interface command, you can view the PIM interface
information.
Example
Display the PIM information about the interface Ethernet1/0/0.
<3Com> display pim interface ethernet 1/0/0
PIM information of interface Ethernet1/0/0:
IP address of the interface is 10.10.1.20
PIM is enabled on interface
PIM version is 2
PIM mode is Sparse

PIM query interval is 30 seconds
Total 1 PIM neighbor on interface
PIM DR(designated router) is 10.10.1.20
Table 2 Description of output information of display pim interface command
Item Description
PIM is enabled on interface PIM SM is enabled on the interface Ethernet1/0/0.
PIM query interval is 30 seconds The sending interval of Hello message is 30
seconds.
PIM DR (designated router) is 10.10.1.20 IP address of DR is 10.10.1.20.
display pim neighbor Syntax

display pim neighbor [ interface interface-type interface-number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
Description
Using the display pim neighbor command, you can view the PIM neighbor
information.
Example
Display the PIM neighbor information of the interface Ethernet1/0/0 on the router.
<3Com> display pim neighbor ethernet 1/0/0
Neighbor's Address Interface Name Uptime Expires
10.10.1.10 Ethernet1/0/0 00:41:59 00:01:16
display pim Syntax

routing-table display pim routing-table [ *g [ group-address [ mask { mask-length | mask } ] ] [
incoming-interface { interface-name | null } ] [ dense-mode | sparse-mode ]
display pim routing-table [ **rp [ rp-address [ mask { mask-length | mask } ] ] [

incoming-interface { interface-name | null } ] [ dense-mode | sparse-mode]
display pim routing-table [ source-address [ mask { mask-length | mask } ] [

group-address [ mask { mask-length | mask } ] ] [ incoming-interface {
interface-name | null } ] [ dense-mode | sparse-mode ]
View
Any view
Parameter
**rp: (*, *, RP) route entry.
*g: (*, G) route entry.
group-address: Address of the multicast group.

incoming-address: Route entry of the specified incoming interface.
Description
Using the display pim routing-table command, you can view the contents of the
PIM multicast routing table.
For the related command, see display multicast routing-table.
Example
Display the contents of the PIM multicast routing table on the router.
<3Com> display pim routing-table
PIM-SM Routing Table
Total 0 (S,G) entry, 2 (*,G) entries, 0 (*,*,RP) entry
(*, 224.0.1.40), RP 20.20.20.30

Protocol 0x20: PIMSM, Flag 0x2003: RPT WC NULL_IIF
UpTime: 00:17:25, never timeout
Upstream interface: Null, RPF neighbor: 0.0.0.0
Ethernet0/0/0, Protocol 0x1: IGMP, never timeout
(*, 225.1.1.1), RP 20.20.20.30

Protocol 0x20: PIMSM, Flag 0x2003: RPT WC NULL_IIF
UpTime: 00:08:45, never timeout
Upstream interface: Null, RPF neighbor: 0.0.0.0
Ethernet0/0/0, Protocol 0x1: IGMP, never timeout
Matched 0 (S,G) entry, 2 (*,G) entries, 0 (*,*,RP) entry
display pim rp-info Syntax

display pim rp-info [ group-address ]
View
Any view
Parameter
group-address: Group address.
Description
Using the display pim rp-info command, you can view the corresponding RP
information of multicast group, BSR and static RP information.
If no group address is specified in this command, the corresponding RP

information of all groups will be displayed.
Example
Display the currently corresponding RP of 224.0.0.0.
<3Com> display pim rp-info 224.0.0.0
PIM-SM RP-SET information:
BSR is: 20.20.20.20
Group/MaskLen: 224.0.0.0/4
RP 20.20.20.20
Version: 2
Priority: 0
Uptime: 00:00:05
Expires: 00:02:25
pim Syntax
pim
undo pim
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the pim command, you can enter PIM view. Using the undo pim command,
you can clear the configuration in PIM view.
The global parameter which is related with the PIM must be configured in PIM
view.
Example
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] pim
<3Com-pim]
pim bsr-boundary Syntax

pim bsr-boundary
undo pim bsr-boundary
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the pim bsr-boundary command, you can configure an interface to become
the PIM domain boundary. Using the undo pim bsr-boundary command, you can
remove the boundary.
By default, no domain boundary is set.

After this command is configured on an interface, Bootstrap messages cannot

pass the boundary, whereas other PIM packets can. This command can effectively
divide the network to domains which use different BSRs.
For the related command, see c-bsr.
Example
Configure a domain boundary on the interface Pos1/0/0.
<3Com-Pos1/0/0] pim bsr-boundary
pim dm Syntax
pim dm
undo pim dm
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the pim dm command, you can enable PIM-DM. Using the undo pim dm
command, you can disable PIM-DM.
By default, PIM-DM is disabled.
Once PIM-DM is enabled on an interface, PIM-SM cannot be enabled on the same

interface and vice versa.
Example
Enable PIM-DM on the interface Ethernet1/0/0.
<3Com] interface ethernet1/0/0
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] pim dm
pim neighbor-limit Syntax

pim neighbor-limit limit
undo pim neighbor-limit
View
Interface view
Parameter
limit: Upper limit of PIM neighbor number on an interface, ranging from 0 to 128.
Description
Using the pim neighbor-limit command, you can limit PIM neighbor number on an
router interface. If the number exceeds the limit configured, no new neighbor can
be added to the router. Using the undo pim neighbor-limit command, you can
By default, the upper limit of PIM neighbor number on an interface is 128.
If the PIM neighbor number on an interface has exceeded the value configured
during configuration, the previous PIM neighbor will not be deleted.
Example
Limit the upper limit of PIM neighbor number on the interface Ethernet1/0/0/ to
50.
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] pim neighbor-limit 50
pim neighbor-policy Syntax

pim neighbor-policy acl-number
undo pim neighbor-policy
View
Interface view
Parameter
acl-number: Number of basic ACL. The value ranges from 1 to 99.
Description
Using the pim neighbor-policy command, you can configure a router to filter the
PIM neighbor of the current interface. Using the undo pim neighbor-policy
command, you can cancel the filtering.
Only the router which is permitted by ACL can act as PIM neighbor of the current
interface, while other routers cannot.
If this command is configured repeatedly, the new configuration will overwrite the
previous one.
Example
Configure 10.10.1.2 rather than 10.10.1.1 as the PIM neighbor of Ethernet1/0/0.
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] pim neighbor-policy 1
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] quit
<3Com] acl number 1
<3Com-acl-basic-1] rule permit source 10.10.1.2 0
<3Com-acl-basic-1] rule deny source 10.10.1.1 0
pim sm Syntax
pim sm
undo pim sm
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the pim sm command, you can enable PIM-SM protocol on an interface.
Using the undo pim sm command, you can disable PIM-SM protocol.
By default, PIM-SM is disabled.
Once PIM-SM is enabled on an interface, PIM-DM cannot be enabled on the same

interface and vice versa.
Example
Enable PIM-SM on the interface Ethernet1/0/0.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] interface ethernet 1/0/0
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] pim sm
pim timer hello Syntax

pim timer hello seconds
undo pim timer hello
View
Interface view
Parameter
seconds: Interval of sending Hello message in second, ranging from 1 to 18000.
By default, the value is 30 seconds.
Description
Using the pim timer hello command, you can configure the interval of sending PIM
router Hello message. Using the undo pim timer hello command, you can restore
the default value.
Example
Configure the interval of sending Hello message on the interface Ethernet1/0/0 on
the PIM router to 40 seconds.
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] pim sm
<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] pim timer hello 40
register-policy Syntax
register-policy acl-number
undo register-policy
View
PIM view
Parameter
acl-number: Number of advanced IP ACL, defining the rule of filtering the source
and group addresses. The value ranges from 100 to 199.
Description
Using the register-policy command, you can configure a RP to filter the register
packet sent by the DR in the PIM-SM network and to accept the specific packet
only. Using the undo register-policy command, you can remove the configured
packet filtering.
Example
If the local device is the RP in the network, using the following command can only
accept the multicast data register packets sent by the source on the network
segment 10.10.0.0/16 to the multicast address in the range of 225.1.0.0/16.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com-acl-adv-110] rule permit ip source 10.10.0.0 255.255.0.0
destination 225.1.0.0 255.255.0.0
<3Com-acl-adv-110] quit
<3Com] pim
<3Com-pim] register-policy 110
reset pim neighbor Syntax

reset pim neighbor { all | { neighbor-address | interface interface-type
interface-number } * }
View
User view
Parameter
all: All PIM neighbors.
neighbor-address: Specifies neighbor address.
interface: Specifies the interface.
Description
Using the reset pim neighbor command, you can clear PIM neighbor.
For the related command, see display pim neighbor.
Example
Clear the PIM neighbor of the interface addressed with 25.5.4.3.
<3Com> reset pim neighbor 25.5.4.3
reset pim routing-table Syntax

reset pim routing-table all
reset pim routing-table { group-address [ mask group-mask | group-mask-length ] [

source-address [ mask source-mask | source-mask-length ] [ incoming-interface {
interface-type interface-number | null } ] } *
View
User view
Parameter
all: All PIM route entries.
mask group-mask: Address mask of multicast group.
group-mask-length: Address mask length of multicast group.
source-address: Multicast source address.
mask source-mask: Address mask of multicast source.
source-mask-length: Address mask length of multicast source.
null: Route entry with null incoming interface.
incoming-interface: Incoming interface of the route entry in PIM routing table.
Description
Using the reset pim routing-table command, you can clear PIM route entry.
prompt input error.
If group-address is configured to 244.0.0.0/24 and source-address to RP address

(in which, group address may have mask but the calculation result of the two must
be 224.0.0.0, while source address has no mask), it indicates only (*, *, RP) entry is
deleted.
If group-address is configured to a group address and source-address to 0 (in

which, group address may have mask while source address has no mask), it
indicates only (*, G) entry is deleted.
After this command is executed, not only the multicast route entry is deleted from
PIM, but also the corresponding route entry or forwarding entry in the multicast
kernel routing table and MFC is deleted.
For the related commands, see reset multicast routing-table, reset multicast
forwarding-table, and display pim routing-table.
Example
Clear the route entry with group address of 225.5.4.3 in PIM routing table.
<3Com> reset pim routing-table 225.5.4.3
source-policy Syntax
source-policy acl-number
undo source-policy
View
PIM view
Parameter
acl-number: Number of basic or advanced ACL. The value ranges from 1 to 199.
Description
Using the source-policy command, you can configure a router to filter the
multicast data packet received according to source (group) address. Using the
undo source-policy command, you can remove the configuration.
If source address filtering and basic ACL are configured, all the multicast data
packets received will be matched with source addresses. The packet which does
not pass the matching will be discarded.
If source address filtering and advanced ACL are configured, all the multicast data
packets received will be matched with source and group addresses. The packet
which does not pass the matching will be discarded.
This command filters not only multicast data, but also the multicast data
encapsulated in register packet.
previous one.
Example
Configure to accept the multicast data packets with source address of 10.10.1.2
and discard the multicast data packets with source address of 10.10.1.1.
<3Com] pim
<3Com-pim] source-policy 1
<3Com-pim] quit
<3Com] acl number 1
<3Com-acl-basic-1] rule permit source 10.10.1.2 0
<3Com-acl-basic-1] rule deny source 10.10.1.1 0
spt-switch-threshold Syntax
spt-switch-threshold { traffic-rate | infinity } [ group-policy acl-number ]
undo spt-switch-threshold { traffic-rate | infinity } [ group-policy acl-number ]
View
PIM view
Parameter
traffic-rate: Switch rate threshold from the RPT to the SPT in Kbps, ranging from 0
to 65535. By default, the switch threshold value is 0, i.e., switching starts when
the RPT receives the first data packet.
infinity: Indicates never to switch to SPT.
acl-number: Number of basic IP ACL, defining the range of a multicast group. The
value ranges from 1 to 99.
Description
Using the spt-switch-threshold command, you can set the packet rate threshold
when the PIM leaf router switches from the RPT to the SPT. Using the undo
spt-switch-threshold command, you can restore the default setting.
Example
Set the threshold value to 4Kbps. If the transmission rate from the source to the
multicast group is higher than it, the router will switch to the SPT toward the
source.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] pim
<3Com-pim] spt-switch-threshold 4
static-rp Syntax
static-rp rp-address [ acl-number ]
undo static-rp
View
PIM view
Parameter
rp-address: Static RP address. This address must be valid unicast IP address and
cannot be configured as the address in 127 network segment.
acl-number: Number of basic ACL, used in controlling the multicast group range
that static RP serves. The value ranges from 1 to 99.
Description
Using the static-rp command, you can configure static RP. Using the undo static-rp
RP is the kernel router in multicast routing. If the dynamic RP elected through BSR
mechanism is invalid for some reason, static RP can be configured as backup of
the dynamic RP to improve robusticity of the network and operation management
capability of the multicast network.
All routers in the PIM domain should be configured with this command and be
specified with the same RP address. If the configured static RP address is the
address of an UP interface on the local device, the local device will act as static RP.
PIM is not necessarily enabled on the interface which acts as static RP.
If this command is configured but ACL is not specified, the static RP configured
will serve all the multicast groups. If ACL is specified, the static RP configured will
only serve the multicast group permitted by the ACL.
In the case that the RP elected through BSR mechanism is valid, static RP does not
take effect.
previous one.
For the related command, see display pim rp-info.
Example
Configure 10.110.0.6 as a static RP.
<3Com] pim
<3Com-pim] static-rp 10.110.0.6
MSDP Configuration
Commands
cache-sa-enable Syntax
cache-sa-enable
undo cache-sa-enable
View
MSDP view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the cache-sa-enable command, you can enable the router to cache SA state.
Using the undo cache-sa-enable command, you can remove the cache from the
router.
By default, the router caches the SA state, i.e., (S, G) entry after it receives SA
messages.
If the router is in cache state, it will not send SA request message to the specified
MSDP peer when it receives a new group join message.
Example
Configure the router to cache all the SA states.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] msdp
<3Com-msdp] cache-sa-enable
debugging msdp Syntax

debugging msdp { all | connect | event | packet | source-active }
undo debugging msdp { all | connect | event | packet | source-active }
View
User view
Parameter
all: All the debugging information of MSDP.
connect: Debugging information of MSDP peer connection reset.
event: Debugging information of MSDP event.
packet: Debugging information of MSDP packet.
source-active: Debugging information of active MSDP source.
Description
Using the debugging msdp command, you can enable MSDP debugging
functions. Using the undo debugging msdp command, you can disable MSDP
By default, MSDP debugging functions are disabled.
Example
Enable all common MSDP debugging functions.
<3Com> debugging msdp all
display msdp brief Syntax

display msdp brief
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display msdp brief command, you can view the state of MSDP peer.
Example
Display the state of MSDP peer.
<3Com> display msdp brief
MSDP Peer Brief Information
Peer's Address State Up/Down time AS SA Count Reset
Count
20.20.20.20 Up 00:00:13 100 0 0
display msdp peer-status Syntax

display msdp peer-status [ peer-address ]
View
Any view
Parameter
peer-address: Address of MSDP peer.
Description
Using the display msdp peer-status command, you can view the detailed
information of MSDP peer.
For the related command, see peer.
Example
Display the detailed information of the MSDP peer 10.110.11.11.
<3Com> display msdp peer-status 10.110.11.11
MSDP Peer 20.20.20.20, AS 100
Description:
Information about connection status:
State: Up
Up/down time: 14:41:08
Resets: 0
Connection interface: LoopBack0 (20.20.20.30)
Number of sent/received messages: 867/947
Number of discarded output messages: 0
Elapsed time since last connection or counters clear: 14:42:40
Information about (Source, Group)-based SA filtering policy:
Import policy: none
Export policy: none
Information about SA-Requests:
Policy to accept SA-Request messages: none
Sending SA-Requests status: disable
Minimum TTL to forward SA with encapsulated data: 0
SAs learned from this peer: 0, SA-cache maximum for the peer: none
Input queue size: 0, Output queue size: 0
Counters for MSDP message:
Count of RPF check failure: 0
Incoming/outgoing SA messages: 0/0
Incoming/outgoing SA requests: 0/0
Incoming/outgoing SA responses: 0/0
Incoming/outgoing data packets: 0/0
display msdp sa-cache Syntax

display msdp sa-cache [ group-address ] [ source-address ] [
autonomous-system-number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
group-address: Group address of (S, G) entry.
source-address: Source address of (S, G) entry. With no source address specified,

all the source information of the specified group will be displayed.
If neither group address nor source address is determined, all SA caches will be
displayed.
autonomous-system-number: Displays (S, G) entries from specified autonomous

system.
Description
Using the display msdp sa-cache command, you can view (S, G) state learnt from
MSDP peer.
Only cache-sa-enable command is configured, can cache state be displayed.
Example
<3Com> display msdp sa-cache
MSDP Total Source-Active Cache - 5 entries
(Source, Group) Origin RP Pro AS Uptime Expires

(10.10.1.2, 225.1.1.1) 10.10.10.10 BGP 100 00:00:10 00:05:50
(10.10.1.3, 225.1.1.1) 10.10.10.10 BGP 100 00:00:11 00:05:49
(10.10.1.2, 225.1.1.2) 10.10.10.10 BGP 100 00:00:11 00:05:49
(10.10.2.1, 225.1.1.2) 10.10.10.10 BGP 100 00:00:11 00:05:49
(10.10.1.2, 225.1.2.2) 10.10.10.10 BGP 100 00:00:11 00:05:49
MSDP matched 5 entries
display msdp sa-count Syntax

display msdp sa-count [ autonomous-system-number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
autonomous-system-number: Number of sources and groups from the specified
autonomous system.
Description
Using the display msdp sa-count command, you can view the number of sources
and groups in MSDP cache.
The cache-sa-enable command must be configured before the configuration of

this command.
Example
<3Com> display msdp sa-count
Number of cached Source-Active entries, counted by Peer
Peer's Address Number of SA
10.10.10.10 5
Number of source and group, counted by AS

AS Number of source Number of group
? 3 3
Total Source-Active entries: 5
import-source Syntax
import-source [ acl acl-number ]
undo import-source
View
MSDP view
Parameter
acl-number: Number of basic or advanced IP ACL, ranging from 1 to 199,
controlling which sources SA messages will advertise and to which groups it will
be sent in the domain. Basic ACL performs filtering to source and advanced ACL
performs filtering to source/group. If no ACL is specified, no multicast source will
be advertised.
Description
Using the import-source command, you can configure which (S, G) entries in the
domain need to be advertised when a MSDP originates an SA message. Using the
undo import-source command, you can remove the configuration.
By default, all the (S, G) entries in the domain are advertised by the SA message.
Besides controlling SA messages creation, you can filter the forwarded SA

messages by the commands peer sa-policy import and peer sa-policy export.
Example
Configure which (S, G) entries from the multicast routing table will be advertised
in SA messages originated by the MSDP peer.
<3Com> system-view
destination 225.1.0.0 0.0.255.255
<3Com] msdp
<3Com-msdp] import-source acl 101
msdp Syntax
msdp
undo msdp
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the msdp command, you can enable MSDP and enter the MSDP view. Using
the undo msdp command, you can clear all configurations of MSDP, release all
resources that MSDP occupies, and restore the initial state.
Example
Clear all configurations of MSDP.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] undo msdp
msdp-tracert Syntax
msdp-tracert source-address group-address rp-address [ max-hops max-hops ] [
next-hop-info ] [ sa-info ] [ peer-info ] [ skip-hops skip-hops ]
View
Any view
Parameter
source-address: Multicast address address.
rp-address: IP address of RP.
max-hops: The maximum number of hops that are traced, ranging from 1 to 255.
By default, the value is 16.
next-hop-info: Flag bit for collecting the next hop information.
sa-info: Flag bit for collecting SA entity information.
peer-info: Flag bit for collecting MSDP peer information.
skip-hops: Number of hops that are skipped before collecting detailed

information, ranging from 0 to 255. By default, the value is 0.
Description
Using the msdp-tracert command, you can trace the transmission path of SA
messages in the network, which helps to locate the faults such as information loss
and configuration error. After the transmission path of SA messages is
determined, correct configuration can avoid the overflow of SA messages.
Example
Trace (10.10.1.1, 225.2.2.2, 20.20.20.20) path information.
<3Com> msdp-tracert 10.10.1.1 225.2.2.2 20.20.20.20
Specify the maximum number of hops that are traced and collect detailed
information of SA and MSDP peer.
<3Com> msdp-tracert 10.10.1.1 225.2.2.2 20.20.20.20 max-hops 10

sa-info peer-info
MSDP tracert: press CTRL_C to break
D-bit: set if have this (S,G) in cache but with a different RP
RP-bit: set if this router is an RP
NC-bit: set if this router is not caching SA's
C-bit: set if this (S,G,RP) tuple is in the cache
MSDP Traceroute path information:
Router Address: 20.20.1.1
Fixed-length response info:
Peer Uptime: 10 minutes, Cache Entry Uptime: 30 minutes
D-bit: 0, RP-bit: 1, NC-bit: 0, C-bit: 1
Return Code: Reached-max-hops
Next Hop info:
Next-Hop Router Address: 0.0.0.0
SA info:
Count of SA messages received for this (S,G,RP): 0
Count of encapsulated data packets received for this
(S,G,RP):0
SA cache entry uptime: 00:30:00 , SA cache entry expiry time:
00:03:32
Peering info:
Peering Uptime: 10 minutes, Count of Peering Resets: 3
Table 3 Description of msdp-tracert Command Domain
Item Description
Router Address Address where the local router creates Peering session with Peer-RPF
neighbor.
Peer Uptime Time for which the local router performs Peering session with
Peer-RPF neighbor in minute, with the maximum value of 255.
Cache Entry Uptime Present time of (S, G, RP) entry in SA cache of the local router, in
minute, with the maximum value of 255.
D-bit: 1 (S, G, RP) entry existing in SA cache of the local router.
But the RP is different from the RP specified in the request message.
RP-bit: 1 The local router is an RP, but it is not necessarily the source RP in (S,
G, RP) entry.
NC-bit: 0 The local router enables SA cache.
C-bit: 1 (S, G, RP) entry exists in SA cache of the local router.
Return Code: Return reason is the reached maximum hops and other possible
Reached-max-hops value includes:
Hit-src-RP: The local hop router is the source RP in (S, G, RP) entry.
Next-Hop Router If the parameter next-hop-info is used, Peer-RPF neighbor address
Address: 0.0.0.0 will be displayed.
Count of SA messages Number of SA messages received for tracing this (S, G, RP) entry.
received for this (S,G,RP)
Count of encapsulated Number of encapsulated data packets received for tracing this (S, G,
data packets received for RP) entry.
this (S,G,RP)
SA cache entry uptime Present time of SA cache entry.
SA cache entry expiry Expiry time of SA cache entry.
time
Peering Uptime: 10 Time for which the local router performs Peering session with
minutes Peer-RPF neighbor.
Count of Peering Resets Number of Peering session resets.
originating-rp Syntax
originating-rp interface-type interface-number
undo originating-rp
View
MSDP view
Parameter
Description
Using the originating-rp command, you can allow a MSDP to use the IP address of
specified interface as the RP address in the SA message originated. Using the undo
originating-rp command, you can remove the configuration.
By default, the RP address in the SA message is the RP address configured by PIM.
Configure logical RP by using this command.
Example
Configure IP address of the interface Ethernet1/0/0 as the RP address in the SA
message originated.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] msdp
<3Com-msdp] originating-rp ethernet 1/0/0
peer Syntax
peer peer-address connect-interface interface-type interface-number
undo peer peer-address
View
MSDP view
Parameter
connect-interface interface-type interface-number: Interface type and number

whose primary address is used by the local router as the source IP address to
establish TCP connection with remote MSDP peers.
Description
Using the peer command, you can configure an MSDP peer. Using the undo peer
command, you can remove the MSDP peer configured.
If the local router is also in BGP peer relation with a MSDP peer, the MSDP peer
and the BGP peer should use the same IP address.
For the related command, see static-rpf-peer.
Example
Configure the router using IP address 125.10.7.6 as an MSDP peer of the local
router.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] msdp
<3Com-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 connect-interface ethernet 0/1/0
peer description Syntax

peer peer-address description text
undo peer peer-address description
View
MSDP view
Parameter
text: Descriptive text, being case sensitive. The maximum length is 80 characters.
Description
Using the peer description command, you can configure descriptive text to MSDP
peer. Using the undo peer description command, you can remove the descriptive
text configured.
By default, an MSDP peer has no descriptive text.
Administrator can conveniently differentiate MSDP peers by configuring

descriptive text.
For the related command, see display msdp peer-status.
Example
Add descriptive text CstmrA to router 125.10.7.6 to specify that the router is
Client A.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] msdp
<3Com-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 description router CstmrA
peer mesh-group Syntax

peer peer-address mesh-group name
undo peer peer-address mesh-group name
View
MSDP view
Parameter
name: Name of an Mesh Group, being case sensitive. The maximum length is 32
characters.
peer-address: Address of an MSDP peer to be a member of the Mesh Group.

Description
Using the peer mesh-group command, you can configure an MSDP peer to join an
Mesh Group. Using the undo peer mesh-group command, you can remove the
configuration.
By default, an MSDP peer is not a member of any Mesh Group.
Example
Configure the MSDP peer with address 125.10.7.6 to be a member of the Mesh
Group Grp1.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] msdp
<3Com-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 mesh-group Grp1
peer minimum-ttl Syntax

peer peer-address minimum-ttl ttl
undo peer peer-address minimum-ttl
View
MSDP view
Parameter
peer-address: Address of the MSDP peer to which the TTL limitation applies.
ttl: TTL threshold, ranging from 0 to 255.
Description
Using the peer minimum-ttl command, you can configure the minimum TTL
(Time-to-Live) value of the multicast data packets encapsulated in SA messages to
be sent to specified MSDP peer. Using the undo peer minimum-ttl command, you
can restore the default TTL threshold.
By default, the value of TTL threshold is 0.
Example
Configure the TTL threshold value to 10, i.e., only those multicast data packets
with a TTL value greater than or equal to 10 can be forwarded to the MSDP peer
110.10.10.1.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] msdp
<3Com-msdp] peer 110.10.10.1 minimum-ttl 10
peer request-sa-enable Syntax

peer peer-address request-sa-enable
undo peer peer-address request-sa-enable

View
MSDP view
Parameter
Description
Using the peer request-sa-enable command, you can enable the router to send SA
request message to the specified MSDP peer when receiving a new group join
message. Using the undo peer request-sa-enable command, you can remove the
configuration.
By default, when receiving a new group join message, the router sends no SA
request messages to MSDP peers but waits to receive the next SA message.
For the related command, see cache-sa-enable.
Example
Configure to send SA request message to the MSDP peer 125.10.7.6.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] msdp
<3Com-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 request-sa-enable
peer sa-cache-maximum Syntax

peer peer-address sa-cache-maximum sa-limit
undo peer peer-address sa-cache-maximum
View
MSDP view
Parameter
sa-limit: Maximum value that the SA cache allows, ranging from 1 to 2048.
Description
Using the peer sa-cache-maximum command, you can limit the number of caches
originated when the router receives SA messages from an MSDP peer. Using the
undo peer sa-cache-maximum command, you can restore the default
configuration.
By default, the maximum number of SA caches is 2048.
This configuration is recommended for all MSDP peers in the networks possibly
attacked by DoS.
For the related commands, see display msdp, sa-count, display msdp peer-status
and display msdp brief.
Example
Limit the number of caches originated to 100 when the router receives SA
messages from the MSDP peer 125.10.7.6.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] msdp
<3Com-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 sa-cache-maximum 100
peer sa-policy Syntax

peer peer-address sa-policy { import | export } [ acl acl-number ]
undo peer peer-address sa-policy { import | export }
View
MSDP view
Parameter
import: Receives SA messages from the specified MSDP peer.
export: Forwards SA messages from the specified MSDP peer.
peer-address: Address of the MSDP peer whose SA messages need to be filtered.
acl acl-number: Number of advanced IP ACL, ranging from 100 to 199. If no ACL
is specified, all (S, G) entries are filtered.
Description
Using the peer sa-policy command, you can configure a filter list for SA messages
received or forwarded from the specified MSDP peer. Using the undo peer
sa-policy command, you can remove the configuration.
By default, messages received or forwarded will not be filtered. All SA messages

are received or forwarded from an MSDP peer.
Example
Forward only those SA messages that passed the advanced IP ACL.
<3Com> system-view
destination 225.1.0.0 0.0.255.255
<3Com] msdp
<3Com-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 sa-policy export acl 100
peer sa-request-policy Syntax

peer peer-address sa-request-policy [ acl acl-number ]
undo peer peer-address sa-request-policy

View
MSDP view
Parameter
peer-address: Address from which the local router receives SA request messages
sent by the specified MSDP peer.
acl acl-number: Number of basic IP ACL, describing multicast group address,

ranging from 1 to 99. If no ACL is specified, all SA request messages will be
ignored.
Description
Using the peer sa-request-policy command, you can limit SA request messages
that the router receives from MSDP peers. Using the undo peer sa-request-policy
command, you can remove the limitation.
By default, the router receives all SA request messages from the MSDP peer.
If no ACL is specified, all SA requests will be ignored. If ACL is specified, only those
SA request messages from the groups permitted by the ACL will be processed and
all the others will be ignored.
Example
Configure the ACL for filtering SA request messages from the MSDP peer
175.58.6.5. The SA request messages from group address range 225.1.1.0/8 will
be received and all the others will be ignored.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] acl number 1
<3Com-acl-basic-1] rule permit source 225.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
<3Com-acl-basic-1] quit
<3Com] msdp
<3Com-msdp] peer 175.58.6.5 sa-request-policy acl 1
reset msdp peer Syntax

reset msdp peer peer-address
View
User view
Parameter
Description
Using the reset msdp peer command, you can reset TCP connection with the
specified MSDP peer, and clear all the statistics of the specified MSDP peer.

Example
Clear TCP connection and statistics of the MSDP peer 125.10.7.6.
<3Com> reset msdp peer 125.10.7.6
reset msdp sa-cache Syntax

reset msdp sa-cache [ group-address ]
View
User view
Parameter
group-address: Address of the group, (S, G) entries matching which are cleared
from the SA cache. If no multicast group address is specified, all SA cache entries
will be cleared.
Description
Using the reset msdp sa-cache command, you can clear SMDP SA cache entries.
For the related commands, see cache-sa-enable and display msdp sa-cache.
Example
Clear the cache entries with group address 225.5.4.3 from the SA cache.
<3Com> reset msdp sa-cache 225.5.4.3
reset msdp statistics Syntax

reset msdp statistics [ peer-address ]
View
User view
Parameter
peer-address: Address of the MSDP peer whose statistics, resetting information
and input/output information will be cleared. If no MSDP peer address is specified,
all MSDP peers statistics will be cleared.
Description
Using the reset msdp statistics command, you can clear statistics of one or more
MSDP peers without resetting the MSDP peer.
Example
Clear the statistics of the MSDP peer 25.10.7.6.
<3Com> reset msdp statistics 125.10.7.6
shutdown Syntax
shutdown peer-address
undo shutdown peer-address

View
MSDP view
Parameter
peer-address: IP address of MSDP peer.
Description
Using the shutdown command, you can disable the MSDP peer specified. Using
the undo shutdown command, you can remove the configuration.
By default, no MSDP peer is disabled.
Example
Disable the MSDP peer 125.10.7.6.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] msdp
<3Com-msdp] shutdown 125.10.7.6
static-rpf-peer Syntax
static-rpf-peer peer-address [ rp-policy list ]
undo static-rpf-peer peer-address
View
MSDP view
Parameter
peer-address: Address of the static RPF peer to receive SA messages.
rp-policy list: Filter policy based on RP address, which filters the RP in SA messages.
If the parameter is not specified, all SA messages from static RPF peer will be
accepted. If the parameter rp-policy list is specified and filter policy is configured,
the router will only accept SA messages from the RP which passes filtering. If no
filter policy is configured, the router will still accept all SA messages from the static
RPF peer.
Description
Using the static-rpf-peer command, you can configure static RPF peer.. Using the
undo static-rpf-peer command, you can remove the static RPF peer.
By default, no static RPF peer is configured.
You must configure the peer command before using the static-rpf-peer command.
If you do not want to perform RPF check to SA messages from a same MSDP peer.
If only an MSDP peer is configured on a router, this MSDP peer will be regarded as
static RPF peer.
For the related commands, see peer and ip prefix-list.

Example
Configure two static RPF peers.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] ip ip-prefix list1 permit 130.10.0.0 16
<3Com] ip ip-prefix list2 permit 130.10.0.0 16
<3Com] msdp
<3Com-msdp] static-rpf-peer 130.10.7.6 rp-policy list1
<3Com-msdp] static-rpf-peer 130.10.7.5 rp-policy list2
timer retry Syntax

timer retry seconds
undo timer retry
View
MSDP view
Parameter
seconds: Value of connection request re-try period in second, ranging from 1 to
60.
Description
Using the timer retry command, you can configure the value of connection request
re-try period. Using the undo timer retry command, you can restore the default
value.
By default, the value of connection request re-try period is 30 seconds.
Example
Configure the connection request re-try period to 60 seconds.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] msdp
<3Com-msdp] timer retry 60
MBGP Multicast
Extension
Configuration
Commands
aggregate Syntax
aggregate address mask [ as-set ] [ attribute-policy route-policy-name ] [
detail-suppressed ] [ origin-policy route-policy-name ] [ suppress-policy
route-policy-name ]
undo aggregate address mask [ as-set ] [ attribute-policy route-policy-name ] [

detail-suppressed ] [ origin-policy route-policy-name ] [ suppress-policy
route-policy-name ]
View
IPv4 multicast sub-address family view
Parameter
address: Address of the aggregated route.
mask: Network mask of the aggregated route.
as-set: Generates a route with AS_SET segment. This parameter is not

recommended to use when many AS paths are aggregated.
attribute-policy: Attributes of the aggregated route.
detail-suppressed: No detailed route but the aggregated route is advertised.
origin-policy: Filters the detailed route involved in aggregation.
suppress-policy: Detailed route determined is not advertised.
Description
Using the aggregate command, you can create a multicast aggregated record in
the BGP routing table. Using the undo aggregate command, you can remove the
aggregation.
By default, no route is aggregated.
Using the aggregate command without parameters, you can create one local
aggregated route and set atomic aggregation attributes.
Example
Create a multicast aggregated record in the BGP routing table and set the address
of aggregated route is 192.213.0.0.
<3Com-bgp-af-mul] aggregate 192.213.0.0 255.255.0.0

mp-update debugging bgp mp-update
undo debugging bgp mp-update
View
User view
Parameter
updates: Debug information of MBGP update packets.
Description
Using the debugging bgp mp-update command, you can enable the MBGP packet
debugging functions. Using the undo debugging bgp mp-update command, you
can disable the functions.
Example
Enable MBGP packet information debugging function.
<3Com> debugging bgp mp-update
display bgp multicast Syntax

group display bgp multicast group [ group-name ]
View
Any view
Parameter
group-name: Name of peer group. If no peer group is specified, the information
about all peer groups will be displayed.
Description
Using the display bgp multicast group command, you can view the information
about peer groups.
Example
Display the information about the peer group named my_peer.
<3Com> display bgp multicast group my_peer

network display bgp multicast network
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display bgp multicast network command, you can view the routing
information that MBGP advertises.
Example
Display the network segment routing information that MBGP advertises.
<3Com> display bgp multicast network

routing-table display bgp multicast routing-table ip-address [ mask ]
View
Any view
Parameter
ip-address: MBGP routing information whose IP address is specified in the BGP
routing table.
Description
Using the display bgp multicast routing-table command, you can view the MBGP
routing information whose IP address is specified in the BGP routing table.
Example
Display the MBGP routing information with destination network segment
14.1.0.0.
<3Com> display bgp multicast routing-table 14.1.0.0

routing-table cidr display bgp multicast routing-table cidr
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display bgp multicast routing-table cidr command, you can view the
routing information with non-natural network mask (i.e., classless inter-domain
routing, CIDR).
Example
Display CIDR routing information.
<3Com> display bgp multicast routing-table cidr

routing-table display bgp multicast routing-table community [ community-number |
community no-export-subconfed | no-advertise | no-export | whole-match ]
View
Any view
Parameter
community-number: Specifies community number.
no-export-subconfed: Not advertises matched routes outside the local

autonomous system.
no-advertise: Not advertises matched routes to any peer.

no-export: Not advertises routes outside the local autonomous system but
advertise routes to other sub-autonomous systems.
whole-match: Exact match.
Description
Using the display bgp multicast routing-table community command, you can view
the routing information that belongs to the specified MBGP community.
Example
Display the routing information that belongs to the specified MBGP community.
<3Com> display bgp multicast routing-table community 600:1
<3Com> display bgp multicast routing-table community no-export

routing-table display bgp multicast routing-table community-list list-number [ whole-match ]
community-list
View
Any view
Parameter
list-number: Number of community list.
whole-match: Exact match.
Description
Using the display bgp multicast routing-table community-list command, you can
view the routing information that is permitted by the MBGP community list.
Example
Display the routing information that is permitted by the MBGP community list.
<3Com> display bgp multicast routing-table community-list

routing-table display bgp multicast routing-table different-origin-as
different-origin-as
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display bgp multicast routing-table different-origin-as command, you
can view AS routes with different origins.
Example
Display AS routes with different origins.
<3Com> display bgp multicast routing-table different-origin-as

routing-table peer display bgp multicast routing-table peer peer-address { received | advertised }
View
Any view
Parameter
peer-address: Address of multicast neighbor, in dotted decimal notation format.
received: Routing information received from the specified neighbor.
advertised: Routing information sent to the specified neighbor.
Description
Using the display multicast routing-table peer command, you can view the route
received from or sent to the specified multicast neighbor.
Example
Display the routing information sent to the multicast neighbor 10.10.1.11.
<3Com> display multicast routing-table peer 10.10.1.11 advertised

routing-table display bgp multicast routing-table [ regular-expression as-regular-expression ]
regular-expression
View
Any view
Parameter
as-regular-expression: AS regular expression matched.
Description
Using the display bgp multicast routing-table regular-expression command, you
can view the routing information matching the specified AS regular expression.
Example
Display the MBGP routing information matching the regular expression ^600$.
<3Com> display bgp multicast routing-table regular-expression ^600$

routing-table statistic display bgp multicast routing-table statistic
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display bgp multicast routing-table statistic command, you can view
statistics of MBGP route information.
Example
Display statistics of MBGP route information.
<3Com> display bgp multicast routing-table statistic
import-route Syntax
import-route protocol [ route-policy policy-name ] [ med metric ]
View
Parameter
protocol: Source routing protocols that can be imported, which can be direct,
ospf, ospf-ase, ospf-nssa, rip, isis and static at present.
metric: Metric value loaded by an imported route.
policy-name: Route policy used by an imported route.
Description
Using the import-route command, you can import routing information from other
protocols to BGP. Using the undo import-route command, you can cancel the
importing of routing information from other protocols.
By default, BGP will not import routing information from other protocols.
Example
Configure to import a static route.
<3Com-bgp-af-mul] import-route static
ipv4-family multicast Syntax

ipv4-family multicast
undo ipv4-family multicast
View
BGP view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ipv4-family multicast command, you can enter the IPv4 multicast
sub-address family view. Using the undo ipv4-family multicast command, you can
remove all the configurations in the IPv4 multicast sub-address family view.
Example
Enter the IPv4 multicast sub-address family view.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] bgp 100
<3Com-bgp] ipv4-family multicast
<3Com-bgp-af-mul]
network Syntax
network ip-address [ address-mask ] [ route-policy policy-name ]
undo network ip-address [ address-mask ] [ route-policy policy-name ]
View
Parameter
ip-address: Network address that BGP advertises.
address-mask: Mask of the network address.
route-policy policy-name: Route policy applied to the routes advertised.
Description
Using the network command, you can configure the network addresses to be sent
by the local BGP. Using the undo network command, you can remove the existing
configuration.
By default, the local BGP does not advertise any route.
Example
Advertise routes to the network segment 10.0.0.0/16.
<3Com-bgp-af-mul] network 10.0.0.1 255.255.0.0
peer Syntax
advertise-community peer { group-name | peer-address } advertise-community
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } advertise-community
View
Parameter
group-name: Name of the peer group.
peer-address: IP address of the peer.
Description
Using the peer advertise-community command, you can configure to advertise
community attributes to a peer (group). Using the undo peer advertise-community
command, you can remove the existing configuration.
By default, no community attribute is advertised to any peer (group).
Example
Advertise community attributes to the peer group named test.
<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test advertise-community

peer { group-name | peer-address } allow-as-loop asn_limit
undo peer ip-address allow-as-loop asn_limit
View
Parameter
group-name: Peer group name
peer-address: Peer IP address
asn_limit: Acceptable maximum of local AS number in the route update messages

received.
Description
Using the peer allow-as-loop command, you can specify to Using the undo peer
allow-as-loop command, you can specify not to contain the local AS number in
the AS-PATH attributes received, for routing loop should be removed in the route
update messages received in Hub&Spoke networking mode.
By default, the local AS number is unacceptable in the route update messages

received.
For the standard BGP, routing loop test is based on AS numbers. But in
Hub&Spoke networking mode, if EBGP runs between a PE and a CE, the local AS
number is contained in the PE's advertising routing information to the CE. Then
the PE will not be able to receive the update messages for this route.
The peer allow-as-loop command can solve this problem, for it enables to contain
the local AS number in the route update messages received from the CE. The
acceptable maximum of the local AS number is defined via the asn_limit
parameter.
Example
Specify to contain the local AS number in the AS_PATH attributes received.
<3Com-bgp-af-vpn] peer 1.1.1.1 allow-as-loop 1
peer as-path-acl Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } as-path-acl number { import | export }
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } as-path-acl number { import |

export }
View
Parameter
as-path-acl number: Number of AS path list matched, ranging from 1 to 199.
import: Filter list applied to incoming routes.
export: Filter list applied to outgoing routes.
Description
Using the peer as-path-acl command, you can configure BGP filter policy based on
AS path list for the peer (group). Using the undo peer as-path-acl command, you
can remove the configuration.
By default, the peer (group) has no filter policy based on AS path list.
Example
Set BGP filter policy based on AS path list for the peer (group).
<3Com-bgp] peer test as-number 100
<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test enable
<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test as-path-acl 3 export
peer enable Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address} enable
undo peer { group-name | peer-address} enable
View
Parameter
peer-address: IP address of the multicast peer.
group-name: Name of the multicast peer group.
Description
Using the peer enable command, you can enable the multicast peer or peer group.
Using the undo peer enable command, you can disable the multicast peer or peer
group.
By default, the multicast peer (or peer group) is disabled.
Only after the peer (peer group) is enabled, can it establish connection with the
multicast peer.
Example
Enable the multicast peer 1.1.11.1.
<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer 1.1.11.1 enable
<3Com-bgp] peer test enable
peer filter-policy Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } filter-policy acl-number { import | export }
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } filter-policy acl-number { import | export }
View
Parameter
acl-number: IP ACL number, ranging from 1 to 199.
import: Specifies an import policy.
export: Specifies an export policy.
Description
Using the peer filter-policy command, you can set the filter policy list for a peer
(group). Using the undo peer filter-policy command, you can remove the existing
setting.
By default, the peer (group) has no ACL.
For the related command, see peer as-path-acl.
Example
Set the filter policy list for a peer.
<3Com-bgp] peer test as-number 100
<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test enable
<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test filter-policy 3 import
peer ip-prefix Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } ip-prefix prefixname { import | export }
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } ip-prefix prefixname { import | export }
View
Parameter
ip-prefix prefixname: Specifies ip-prefix name, ranging from 1 to 19 characters.
import: Applies the filter policy to routes accepted by the specified peer (group).
export: Applies the filter policy to routes sent by the specified peer (group).
Description
Using the peer ip-prefix command, you can configure the route filter policy based
on the address prefix-list for the peer (group). Using the undo peer ip-prefix
By default, no route filter policy is configured for the peer (group).
Example
Configure the route filter policy based on the address prefix-list for the peer.
<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer group1 ip-prefix list1 import

peer { group-name | peer-address } next-hop-local
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } next-hop-local
View
Parameter
Description
Using the peer next-hop-local command, you can remove the processing of the
next hop in routes which BGP will advertise to the peer (group) and set the local
address as the next hop. Using the undo peer next-hop-local command, you can
remove the existing setting.
Example
Set the local address as the next hop when advertising routes to peer group
named test.
<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test next-hop-local

peer { group-name | peer-address } public-as-only
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } public-as-only

View
Parameter
Description
Using the peer public-as-only command, you can configure only to carry public AS
number rather than private AS number when BGP sends update packets. Using
the undo peer public-as-only command, you can configure to carry private AS
number when BGP sends update packets.
By default, the private AS number is carried when BGP sends update packets.
Generally, BGP sends update packets with the AS number (which can be either the
public AS number or private AS number). To enable some external routers to
ignore the private AS number when sending update packets, you can configure
not to carry the private AS number when BGP sends update packets.
Example
Configure not to carry private AS number when BGP sends update packets to peer
group named test.
<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test public-as-only
peer reflect-client Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } reflect-client
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } reflect-client
View
Parameter
Description
Using the peer reflect-client command, you can configure a peer (group) as a
client of the route reflector. Using the undo peer reflect-client command, you can
remove the existing configuration.
By default, there is no route reflector in the autonomous system.
Example
Configure peer group named test to be client of the route reflector.
<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test reflect-client
peer route-policy Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } route-policy policy-name { import | export }
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } route-policy policy-name { import | export

}
View
Parameter
route-policy policy-name: Route policy specified.
import: Applies route policy to the routes received from the peer (group).
export: Applies route policy to the routes advertised to the peer (group).
Description
Using the peer route-policy command, you can configure route policy for the
specified peer (group). Using the undo peer route-policy command, you can
remove the route policy of the peer (group).
By default, no route policy is specified for the peer (group).
Example
Apply route policy policy 1 to the routes received from the peer group named test.
<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test route-policy policy1 import
Multicast Static Route

Configuration
Commands
delete rpf-route-static all Syntax

delete rpf-route-static all
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the delete rpf-route-static all command, you can delete all the static
multicast routes.
When using this command, the system will prompt you to acknowledge. All static
multicast routes will be deleted after your acknowledgement.
For the related command, see ip rpf-route-static and display multicast

routing-table static.
Example
Delete all the static multicast routes.
<3Com] delete rpf-route-static all

routing-table static display multicast routing-table static [ source mask ]
View
Any view
Parameter
source: IP address of multicast source (unicast address).
mask: IP address mask of multicast source.
Description
Using the display multicast routing-table static command, you can view the active
multicast static routes.
If no multicast source address is specified, all active multicast static routes will be
displayed.
For the related command, see display multicast routing-table static config.
Example
Display all active multicast static routes.
<3Com> display multicast routing-table static
22.22.0.0/16 [inactive]
RPF interface = serial0/0/0, RPF neighbor = 66.55.99.88
Matched routing protocol = = <none>, route-policy = <none>,
preference = 1
Running config = ip mroute 22.22.0.0 16 66.55.99.88 preference 1
Display the multicast static routes that exactly match the address 10.10.0.0/16.
<3Com> display multicast routing-table static 10.10.0.0 255.255.0.0

routing-table static display multicast routing-table static config [ source mask ]
config
View
Any view
Parameter
Description
Using the display multicast routing-table static config command, you can view
multicast static routes configured.
If no multicast source address is specified, all configured multicast static routes will
be displayed.
For the related command, see display multicast routing-table static.
Example
Display all the configured multicast static routes.
<3Com> display multicast routing-table static config
Display the multicast static routes that exactly match the address 1.0.0.0/8.
<3Com> display multicast routing-table static config 1.0.0.0

255.0.0.0
ip rpf-longest-match Syntax
ip rpf-longest-match
undo ip rpf-longest-match
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ip rpf-longest-match command, you can configure the longest-match
rule to be the multicast RPF route selecting policy. Using the undo ip
rpf-longest-match command, you can restore the default configuration.
By default, routes are selected according to the preference-preferred rule.
Example
Set the longest-match rule to be the multicast RPF route selecting policy.
<3Com] ip rpf-longest-match
ip rpf-route-static Syntax
ip rpf-route-static source { mask | mask-length } [ protocol ] [ route-policy
policyname ] { rpf-nbr | interface-name } [ order order-num | preference preference
]
undo ip rpf-route-static source { mask | mask-length } [ protocol ] [ route-policy

policyname ]
View
System view
Parameter
mask-length: IP address mask length of multicast source.
protocol: Indicates that matched routes must appear in the specified unicast
routing protocol. Protocol can be such unicast routing protocols as bgp, isis, ospf,
rip and static.
route-policy: Match rule for static multicast routes.
rpf-nbr: IP address of RPF neighbor router.
interface-name Interface name which is connect to the RPF neighbor router,

including interface type and interface number.
order-num: Changes the configuration location of routes on the same network

segment. The value ranges from 1 to 100.
preference: Route preference, ranging from 1 to 255. By default, the value is 1.
Description
Using the ip rpf-route-static command, you can configure multicast static routes.
Using the undo ip rpf-route-static command, you can remove the multicast static
routes from the multicast static routing table.
For the related commands, see display multicast routing-table static config and
display multicast routing-table static.
Example
Configure a multicast static route.
<3Com> system-view
<3Com] ip rpf-route-static 1.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 rip route-policy map1
11.0.0.1
Display the multicast static route configured.

<3Com] display multicast routing-table static config
Continue to configure the multicast static route.

<3Com] ip rpf-route-static 1.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 rip route-policy map1
13.1.1.2

Continue to configure the multicast static route.

<3Com] ip rpf-route-static 1.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 null0

MPLS Basic Configuration Commands
8
This chapter describes the following types of commands:
■ Basic Configuration Commands
■ LDP Configuration Commands
■ BGP/MPLS VPN Configuration Commands
■ MPLS L2VPN CCC Configuration Commands
■ SVC MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands
■ Martini MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands
■ Kompella MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands
■ MPLS TE Configuration Commands
Basic Configuration
Commands
debugging mpls lspm Syntax

debugging mpls lspm { all | packet | event | ftn | process | agent | interface | policy |
vpn }
undo debugging mpls lspm { all | packet | event | ftn | process | agent | interface |
policy | vpn }
View
User view
Parameter
agent: Enables all MPLS Agent information debugging.
all: Enables all MPLS-related information debugging.
event: Enables information debugging of various MPLS events.
ftn: Enables MPLS ftn debugging.
interface: Enables the MPLS information debugging on the message

sending/receiving interface.
packet: Enables MPLS packet debugging.
policy: Enables MPLS information debugging.

760 CHAPTER 8: MPLS BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
process: Enables internal processing of MPLS information debugging.
vpn: Enables all MPLS VPN information debugging.
Description
Using the debugging mpls lspm command, you can enable various LSP
information debugging. Using the undo debugging mpls lspm command, you can
disable corresponding debugging.
By default, all debugging is disabled.
This command is used for the debugging of the problem occurred while using
MPLS LSPM. Enabling the debugging will affect the performance of the router, so
it is recommended that the command be used with caution.
Example
Enable all relevant debugging of MPLS VPN.
<3Com> debugging mpls lspm vpn
display mpls interface Syntax

display mpls interface
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display mpls interface command, you can view all MPLS-enabled
interfaces.
For the related commands, see display mpls lsp, display mpls statistics, display
static-lsp.
Example
Display all MPLS-enabled interfaces.
[3Com] display mpls interface
display mpls lsp Syntax

display mpls lsp { verbose | include text }
View
Any view
Parameter
include text: Displays the information with the specified string included.
verbose: Displays detailed information.

Description
Using the display mpls lsp command, you can view LSP information.
By default, the display mpls lsp command displays all LSP information.
For the related commands, see display mpls interface, display mpls statistics, and
display static-lsp.
Example
Display all LSPs whose incoming interfaces are Serial 3/0/0.
[3Com] display mpls lsp include incoming-interface serial3/0/0
display mpls static-lsp
Syntax
display mpls static-lsp { verbose | include text }
View
Any view
Parameter
include text: Displays the information with the specified string included.
Description
Using the display mpls static-lsp command, you can display the information of all
or single static LSP(s).
For the related commands, see display mpls interface, display mpls lsp, and display
mpls statistics.
Example
Display information of the static LSP named “marlborough”.
[3Com] display mpls static-lsp include marlborough
display mpls statistics Syntax

display mpls statistics { interface { all | interface-type interface-num } } | { lsp [
lsp-Index | all | name ] } }
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-type: Type of network interface.
Interface-num: Number of network interface.
lsp-Index: LSP index
all: All LSPs

name lsp-name: LSP name
Description
Using the display mpls statistics command, you can display statistics of all or single
LSP(s) and LSP statistics on all or single interface(s).
Specifically, the displayed information includes the bytes, packets, errors and
discarded packets processed on each LSP ingress and each LSP egress, and those
received and transmitted on each MPLS-enabled interface.
For the related commands, see display mpls interface and display mpls lsp.
Example
Display MPLS statistics.
[3Com] display mpls statistics lsp all
Building the information...
LSP Index/LSP Name : 1/lsp1
InSegment Octets of LSP is: 0 Bytes processed on each
LSP ingress
InSegment Packets of LSP is: 0 Packets processed on each
LSP ingress
InSegment Errors of LSP is: 0 Errors processed on each LSP
ingress
InSegment Discard Packets of LSP is: 0 Discarded packets
processed on each LSP ingress
LSP Index/LSP Name : 1/lsp1
OutSegment Octets of LSP is: 0 Bytes processed on
each LSP egress
OutSegment Packets of LSP is: 0 Packets processed on
each LSP egress
OutSegment Errors of LSP is: 0 Errors processed on each
LSP egress
OutSegment Discard Packets of LSP is: 0 Discarded packets
processed on each LSP egress
LSP Index/LSP Name : 17416/dynamic-lsp
InSegment Octets of LSP is: 0
InSegment Packets of LSP is: 0
InSegment Errors of LSP is: 0
InSegment Discard Packets of LSP is: 0
LSP Index/LSP Name : 17416/dynamic-lsp
OutSegment Octets of LSP is: 0
OutSegment Packets of LSP is: 0
OutSegment Errors of LSP is: 0
OutSegment Discard Packets of LSP is: 0
Display MPLS statistics on all interfaces.

[3Com] display mpls statistics interface all
Showing statistics about all MPLS interface:
The statistics of interface : Serial6/0/0
The statistics of interface in :
In Octets of Mpls interface is: 0
In Packets of Mpls interface is: 0
In Errors of Mpls interface is: 0
In Discard Packets of Mpls interface is: 0
The statistics of interface out :
Out Octets of Mpls interface is: 0

Out Packets of Mpls interface is: 0
Out Errors of Mpls interface is: 0
Out Discard Packets of Mpls interface is: 0
The statistics of interface : Serial6/0/1
The statistics of interface in :
In Octets of Mpls interface is: 0
In Packets of Mpls interface is: 0
In Errors of Mpls interface is: 0
In Discard Packets of Mpls interface is: 0
The statistics of interface out :
Out Octets of Mpls interface is: 0
Out Packets of Mpls interface is: 0
Out Errors of Mpls interface is: 0
Out Discard Packets of Mpls interface is: 0
Table 1 Description of the Output Information of the Display mpls statistics interface all
Command
Field Description
In Octets of Mpls interface is: 0 Bytes coming from the interface
In Packets of Mpls interface is: 0 Packets coming from the interface
In Errors of Mpls interface is: 0 Packet processing errors coming from the
interface
In Discard Packets of Mpls interface is: 0 Discarded packets coming from the interface
Out Octets of Mpls interface is: 0 Bytes sent from the interface
Out Packets of Mpls interface is: 0 Packets sent from the interface
Out Errors of Mpls interface is: 0 Packet processing errors sent from the
interface
Out Discard Packets of Mpls interface is: 0 Discarded packets sent from the interface
lsp-trigger Syntax
lsp-trigger { all | ip-prefix ip-prefix }
undo lsp-trigger { all | ip-prefix ip-prefix }
View
MPLS view
Parameter
all: Sets up LSPs at any routes.
ip-prefix: Sets up LSPs only at those routes with the specified IP prefix.
ip-prefix: IP address prefix list, in the range of 1~19.
Description
Using the lsp-trigger command, you can configure topology-triggered LSP creation
policy. Using the undo lsp-trigger command, you can remove the filtering
conditions specified by parameters and enable no route to trigger LSP creation.
By default, all kinds of routing protocols are filtered out.
If no topology-triggered policy is configured, LSPs can be established at all host

routes with 32-bit masks.
If you import an IP-prefix rule without contents, LSPs can be established at all host
routes according to the IP-prefix usage convention in VRP.
Example
Allow to set up LSPs at all routes.
[3Com-mpls] lsp-trigger all
mpls Syntax
mpls
View
System view, routing protocol view, interface view, virtual interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the mpls command in system view, you can enter MPLS view.
Using the mpls command in interface view, you can enable MPLS on the interface.
By default, MPLS view is not to be entered.
After executing the command, the user can enter MPLS view. Only after entering
MPLS view, can the user configure other MPLS commands.
To enter MPLS view, the user should configure the mpls lsr-id command first.
For the related command, see mpls enable | disable.
Example
Enter MPLS view in system view.
[3Com] mpls
[3Com-mpls]
Execute MPLS in interface view.
[3Com-Ethernet6/0/0] mpls
Mpls starting, please wait... OK!
mpls lsr-id Syntax

mpls lsr-id ip-address
undo mpls lsr-id
View
System view
Parameter
ip-address: LSR ID, with a form like IP address, used to identify an LSR.
Description
Using the mpls lsr-id command, you can configure an LSR ID. Using the undo mpls
lsr-id command, you can delete an LSR ID.
By default, an LSR has no ID.
As a premise for configuring other MPLS commands, this command you can
configure an LSR ID.
The form of an LSR ID resembles that of an IP address. It is recommended to use a

loopback address of LSR.
For the related command, see display mpls interface.
Example
Configure the ID of the LSR as 202.17.41.246.
[3Com] mpls lsr-id 202.17.41.246
% Mpls lsr-id changed.
reset mpls statistics Syntax

reset mpls statistics { { interface { all | interface-type interface-num } } | { lsp
lsp-index | all | name lsp-name } }
View
MPLS view
Parameter
all: All interfaces or all LSPs
interface-type: Type of a network interface.
Interface-num: Number of a network interface.
lsp-Index: LSP index
name lsp-name: Name of LSP.
Description
Using the reset mpls statistics command, you can clear MPLS statistics.
This command clears statistics on all or single interface(s) or on all or single LSP(s).
For the related command, see display mpls statistics.
Example
Clear statistics on the LSP named “Marlborough”.
[3Com] reset mpls statistics lsp name marlborough

ldp snmp-agent trap enable ldp
undo snmp-agent trap enable ldp
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the snmp-agent trap enable ldp command, you can enable Trap function in
MPLS LDP creation. Using the snmp-agent trap enable ldp command, you can
disable Trap function in MPLS LDP creation.
By default, TRAP function is not enabled during MPLS LDP creation.
Example
Enable TRAP function during MPLS LDP creation.
[3Com] snmp-agent trap enable lDp

lsp snmp-agent trap enable lsp
undo snmp-agent trap enable lsp
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the snmp-agent trap enable lsp command, you can enable Trap function in
MPLS LSP creation. Using the snmp-agent trap enable lsp command, you can
disable Trap function in MPLS LSP creation.
By default, TRAP function is not enabled during MPLS LSP creation.
Example
Enable TRAP function during MPLS LSP creation.
[3Com] snmp-agent trap enable lsp
static-lsp egress Syntax

static-lsp egress lsp-name incoming-interface { interface-type interface-num
in-label in-label-value
undo static-lsp egress lsp-name

View
MPLS view
Parameter
lsp-name: Name of LSP.
in-label-value: Value of inbound label, ranging from 16 to 1024.
Description
Using the static-lsp egress command, you can configure a static LSP for an egress
LSR. Using the undo static-lsp egress command, you can delete an LSP for an
egress LSR.
By default, this command can be used to configure a static LSP for an egress LSR.
For the related commands, see static-lsp ingress and debugging mpls.
Example
Configure a static LSP named “bj-sh” on the egress LSR.
[3Com-mpls] static-lsp egress bj-sh incoming-interface serial8/0/0
in-label 233
static-lsp ingress Syntax

static-lsp ingress lsp-name destination dest-addr { addr-mask | mask-length } { {
nexthop next-hop-addr } | { outgoing-interface interface-type interface-num } } }
out-label out-label-value
undo static-lsp ingress lsp-name
View
MPLS view
Parameter
dest-addr: Destination IP address.
addr-mask: Destination IP address mask.
mask-length: Mask length of destination IP address
next-hop-addr: Next-hop address.
out-label-value: Value of outbound label, ranging from 16 to 1024.

Description
Using the static-lsp ingress command, you can configure a static LSP for an ingress
LSR. Using the undo static-lsp ingress command, you can delete an LSP for an
ingress LSR.
This command can be used to configure a static LSP for ingress LSR and
simultaneously set precedence value and metric value for the LSP.
For the related commands, see static-lsp egress, static-lsp transit, and debugging
mpls.
Example
Configure a static LSP for the ingress LSR heading for the destination address
202.25.38.1.
[3Com-mpls] static-lsp ingress bj-sh destination 202.25.38.1 24
nexthop 202.55.25.33 out-label 237
static-lsp transit Syntax

static-lsp transit lsp-name incoming-interface interface-type interface-num
in-label in-label-value { nexthop next-hop-addr | outgoing-interface interface-type
interface-num } out-label out-label-value
undo static-lsp transit lsp-name
View
MPLS view
Parameter
interface-type: Type of an incoming or outgoing interface.
Interface-num: Number of an incoming or outgoing interface.
next-hop-addr: Next-hop address.
in-label-value: Value of inbound label, ranging from 16 to 1024.
out-label-value: Value of outbound label, ranging from 16 to 1024.
Description
Using the static-lsp transit command, you can configure a static LSP for transit LSR.
Using the undo static-lsp transit command, you can delete an LSP for transit LSR.
This command can be used to configure a static LSP for transmit LSR.
For the related commands, see static-lsp egress and static-lsp ingress.
Example
Configure a static LSP for the serial interface Serial3/0/0 on transit LSR, with an
inbound label of 123 and an outbound label of 253.
[3Com-mpls] static-lsp transit bj-sh incoming-interface serial3/0/0

in-label 123 nexthop 202.34.114.7 out-label 253
statistic interval Syntax

statistics interval interval-time
undo statistics interval
View
MPLS view
Parameter
interval-time: Time interval in seconds. It ranges from 30 to 65535.
Description
Using the statistic interval command, you can configure the time interval for
reporting statistics. Using the undo statistic interval command, you can restore the
default value.
By default, the interval is 0 seconds, that is, not to report statistics.
Example
Configure the time interval as 30 seconds, that is, to report statistics every 30
seconds.
[3Com-mpls] statistics interval 30
LDP Configuration
Commands
debugging mpls ldp Syntax

debugging mpls ldp { all | main | advertisement | session | pdu | notification |
remote } [ interface interface-type interface-num ]
undo debugging mpls ldp { all | main | advertisement | session | pdu | notification |
remote } [ interface interface-type interface-num ]
View
User view
Parameter
all: displays all debugging information related to LDP.
main: displays the debugging information of main LDP task.
advertisement: Displays the debugging information during processing LDP

advertisement.
session: Displays debugging information during processing LDP session.
pdu: Displays the debugging information during processing PDU data packets.
notification: displays the debugging information while handling notification

messages.
remote: Displays debugging information of all remote peers.
interface interface-type interface-num: Displays all the debugging information of a

specified interface.
Description
Using the debugging ldp command, you can enable the debugging of various LDP
messages. Using the undo debugging ldp command, you can disable the
debugging of various LDP messages.
This command displays various LDP debugging information. You are

recommended to use the command cautiously.
Example
Enable LDP debugging.
<3Com> debugging mpls ldp all
display mpls ldp Syntax

display mpls ldp
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display mpls ldp command, you can view LDP and LSR information.
By default, the command displays LDP and LSR information.
For the related command, see mpls ldp.
Example
Display LDP and LSR information.
[3Com] display mpls ldp

buffer-info display mpls ldp buffer-info
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display mpls ldp buffer-info command, you can view the buffer
information of LDP.
Example
Display LDP buffer information.
[3Com] display mpls ldp buffer-info
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Buffer-Name Buffer-ID Buffer-Size Total-Count Free-Count
-----------------------------------------------------------------
ENTITY 0 292 199 195
LOCAL-IF 1 36 200 196
PEER-IF 2 40 201 195
PDU 3 204 249 249
ADJACENCY 4 56 201 198
PEER-INF 5 116 201 198
SESSION 6 176 201 198
US-BLK 7 264 1052 1028
DS-BLK 8 240 1052 1042
FEC 9 40 1042 1032
US-LIST 10 16 1052 1028
TRIG-BLK 11 56 2076 2071
LABEL-RANGE 12 20 198 198
CR-TUNNEL 13 124 128 128
ER-HOP 14 40 4096 4096
IF-MSG 15 24 9999 9999
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Buffer no error.

interface display mpls ldp interface
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display mpls ldp interface command, you can view the information of an
LDP-enabled interface.
For the related commands, see mpls ldp enable and display mpls ldp session.
Example
Display the information of an LDP-enabled interface.
[3Com-Ethernet3/0/0] display mpls ldp interface
display mpls ldp lsp Syntax

display mpls ldp lsp
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display mpls ldp lsp command, you can view relevant LSP information
created via LDP.
For the related command, see display mpls lsp.
Example
Display LSP.
[3Com-Ethernet3/0/0] display mpls ldp lsp
display mpls ldp peer Syntax

display mpls ldp peer
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display mpls ldp peer command, you can display peer information.
By default, all peer information is displayed.
Example
Display peer information.
[3Com] display mpls ldp peer
display mpls ldp remote Syntax

display mpls ldp remote
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display mpls ldp remote command, you can display the configured
remote peer information.
By default, all configured remote-peer information is displayed.

For the related commands, see mpls ldp remote and remote-peer.
Example
Display the configured remote-peer information.
[3Com] display mpls ldp remote
display mpls ldp session Syntax

display mpls ldp session
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display mpls ldp session command, you can display the session between
peers.
By default, the session between peers is displayed.
For the related command, see mpls ldp enable.
Example
Display the session between peers.
[3Com] display mpls ldp session
mpls ldp Syntax

mpls ldp
undo mpls ldp
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the mpls ldp command, you can enable LDP. Using the undo mpls ldp
command, you can disable LDP.
By default, LDP is disabled.
Before enabling LDP, you must enable MPLS and configure LSR ID first.
For the related command, see mpls lsr-id.
Example
Enable LDP.
[3Com] mpls ldp
mpls ldp advertise Syntax

mpls ldp advertise { implicit-null | explicit-null | non-null }
undo mpls ldp advertise { implicit-null | explicit-null | non-null }
View
System view
Parameter
explicit-null: Specifies to assign explicit null label to the penultimate hop at egress.
implicit-null: Specifies to assign implicit null label to the penultimate hop at egress.
non-nul: Specifies to assign normal label to the penultimate hop at egress.
■ Label value 0 stands for IPv4 Explicit NULL Label, which is valid only at the
bottom of label stack. That is, the label stack must be popped and forwarded
as IPv4 header.
■ Label value 1 stands for Router Alert Label, which is valid except at the bottom
of label stack. When receiving messages with label value 1 at the top of the
label stack, the system forwards them into local software module for further
processing. If a lower-layer label is to be forwarded, it must be put with Router
Alert Label.
■ Label value 2 stands for IPv6 Explicit NULL Label, which is valid only at the
bottom of label stack. That is, the label stack must be popped and forwarded
as IPv4 header.
■ Label value 3 stands for Implicit NULL Label, which can be distributed and
forwarded, but cannot be placed in encapsulation. When LSR switches
top-layer labels, it only need to pop the labels, but cannot replace them when
using label 3 to replace the original label.
■ Labels 4~15 are reserved.
Description
Using the mpls label advertise command, you can specify what label is to be
assigned to the penultimate hop at egress node. Using the undo mpls label
advertise command, you can restore the default value.
When the keyword explicit-null is selected, the m-layer label of a packet with
m-layer label parameter will be popped at the penultimate LSR of the LSP, but not
the egress LSR. This can lower operation restriction at egress node and mitigate
the traffic at the egress node to a degree.
By default, implicit label is assigned to the penultimate hop at egress node.
If explicit null label is assigned to the penultimate hop, it can only reside at the
bottom of the label stack.
Example
Specify at the egress to allocate general labels to the penultimate hop.
[3Com-mpls] mpls label advertise non-null
mpls ldp enable Syntax

mpls ldp enable
mpls ldp disable
View
Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the mpls ldp enable command, you can enable LDP on an interface. Using
the undo mpls ldp enable command, you can disable LDP on an interface.
By default, LDP is not enabled on an interface.
To enable an interface, you must enable LDP first. After LDP is enabled on an
interface, peer discovery and session creation proceed.
Example
Enable LDP on the interface.
[3Com-Ethernet3/0/0] mpls ldp disable
mpls ldp hops-count Syntax

mpls ldp hops-count hop-number
undo mpls ldp hops-count
View
System view
Parameter
hop-number: The maximum hops of loop detection, ranging from 1 to 32.
Description
Using the mpls ldp hops-count command, you can set the maximum hops of loop
detection. Using the undo mpls ldp hops-count command, you can restore the
default value.
By default, the maximum hops of loop detection is 32.
This command should be configured before enabling LDP on all interfaces. Its
value, which depends on actual networking situation, decides the loop detection
speed during LSP creation
For the related commands, see mpls ldp loop-detection and mpls ldp path-vector.
Example
Set the maximum hops of loop detection to be 22.
[3Com] mpls ldp hops-count 22
Set the maximum hops of loop detection as 32, the default value.
[3Com] undo mpls ldp hops-count
mpls ldp loop-detect Syntax

mpls ldp loop-detect
undo mpls ldp loop-detect
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the mpls ldp loop-detect command, you can enable loop detection. Using
the undo mpls ldp loop-detect command, you can disable loop detection.
By default, loop detection is disabled in the system.
This command should be configured before enabling LDP on all interfaces.
For the related commands, see mpls ldp hops-count, mpls ldp path-vectors.
Example
Enable loop detection.
[3Com] mpls ldp loop-detect
Disable loop detection.

[3Com] undo mpls ldp loop-detect
mpls ldp password Syntax
mpls ldp password [cipher | simple ] password
undo mpls ldp password
View
Interface view, remote-peer view
Parameter
simple: Transmitted in plain text.
cipher:Transmitted in encrypted text.
password: User password.

Description
Using the mpls ldp password command, you can configure LDP authentication
mode. Using the undo mpls ldp password command, you can remove the
configuration.
Example
Configure the LDP authentication mode to be in plain text, with a password of
123.
[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0.1] mpls ldp password simple 123
mpls ldp path-vectors Syntax

mpls ldp path-vectors pv-number
undo mpls ldp path-vectors
View
System view
Parameter
pv-number: The configured maximum value of path vector, ranging from 1 to 32.
Description
Using the mpls ldp path-vectors command, you can set the maximum value of
path vector. Using the undo mpls ldp path-vectors command, you can restore the
maximum value of path vector.
By default, pv-number is 32.
This command should be configured before enabling LDP on all interface. Its
value, which depends on actual networking situation, decides the loop detection
speed in LSP creation.
For the related commands, see mpls ldp loop-detection and mps ldp hops-count.
Example
Set the maximum value of path vector to be 23
[3Com] mpls ldp path-vectors 23
Restore the maximum value of path vector.

[3Com] undo mpls ldp path-vectors
mpls ldp remote-peer Syntax

mpls ldp remote-peer Index
undo mpls ldp remote-peer Index
View
System view or remote-peer view
Parameter
Index: Index of remote peer, used to identify an entity. It ranges from 0 to 99.
Description
Using the mpls ldp remote-peer command, you can create a remote-peer entity
and enter remote-peer view. Using the undo mpls ldp remote-peer command, you
can delete a remote-peer entity.
This command can create/delete a remote-peer so as to create remote session.
For the related command, see remote-peer.
Example
Create a remote-peer.
[3Com] mpls ldp remote-peer 22
[3Com-mpls-remote22]
Delete a remote-peer.
[3Com-mpls-remote22] undo mpls ldp remote-peer 12
[3Com]
mpls ldp reset-session Syntax

mpls ldp reset-session peer-address
View
Interface view
Parameter
peer-address: Corresponding LDP Peer address (in IP address format).
Description
Using the mpls ldp reset-session command, you can reset a specified session on an
interface.
After LDP is configured on an interface and LDP session is created, this command
can be used to reset a specified session on the interface only by specifying the
address of the peer corresponding to the session to be reset.
For the related commands, see mpls ldp and mpls ldp enable.
Example
Reset the sessions at the interface Ethernet0/0/0.
[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] mpls ldp reset-session 10.1.1.1
mpls ldp timer Syntax

mpls ldp timer { session-hold session-holdtime | hello hello-holdtime }
undo mpls ldp timer { session-hold | hello }

View
Interface view, remote-peer view
Parameter
hello hello-holdtime: Specifies hold time of hello timer, in seconds and the range
of 6 seconds to 65535 seconds.
session-hold session-holdtime: Specifies hold time of session timer, in the range of

1 second to 65535 seconds.
By default,hello secs is 15 seconds, session-hold secs is 5 seconds.
Description
Using the mpls ldp timer command, you can set the duration of a Hello timer.
Using the undo mpls ldp timer command, you can restore the default value.
Timeout of Hello timer means that the adjacency relation with the peer is down,
while timeout of hold timer means that the session relation with the peer is down.
Generally speaking, the default value can be directly adopted. In special cases, it
needs to be modified according to requirements. It should be noted that the
modification of hello parameter may cause the original session to be recreated and
the LSP created on the basis of this session will also be deleted and needs to be
recreated.
In general, the transmission interval of hello/keepalive packets is one-third of the

hold time of hello/session timer.
For the related commands, see mpls ldp and mpls ldp enable.
Example
Modify the duration of a Hello timer.
[3Com-Ethernet3/0/0] mpls ldp timer hello 30
mpls ldp transport-ip Syntax

mpls ldp transport-ip { interface | ip-address }
undo mpls ldp transport-ip
View
Interface view
Parameter
interface: Takes the IP address of the interface as the transport address.
ip-address: Takes the IP address as the transport address.
Description
Using the mpls ldp transport-ip command, you can configure an LDP transport
address. Using the undo mpls ldp transport-ip command, you can restore the
default LDP transport address.
By default, the transport address is the LSR ID of an LSR.
For a remote-peer, the configuration of transport address is not supported and its
transport address is fixed as an LSR ID.
By default, LSR ID is required to be an address of a certain loopback interface and

its peer should have route to the address of the loopback interface. Only in this
way, can the session be successfully created. In the case of local peer, the address
of the local interface or the Router ID of LSR can be adopted as its transport
address.
Example
Take the address of the local interface as a transport address.
[Quidwa-Ethernet3/0/0] mpls ldp transport-ip interface
Take the address of another interface as the transport address.

[3Com-Ethernet3/0/0] mpls ldp transport-ip 10.1.11.2
remote-ip Syntax
remote-ip remoteip
View
Remote-peer view
Parameter
remote-ip: IP address of a remote peer.
Description
Using the remote-ip command, you can configure a remote IP address. The
address should be the LSR ID of the remote LSR. For remote peers, as they adopt
LSR ID as their transport address, two remote peers take their LSR ID as their
transport addresses for creating TCP connection.
For the related command, see mpls ldp remote-peer.
Example
Configure the address of remote-peer.
[3Com] mpls ldp remote-peer 12
[3Com-remote-peer12] remote-ip 192.168.1.
BGP/MPLS VPN
Configuration
Commands
apply access-vpn Syntax

vpn-instance apply access-vpn vpn-instance { vpn-name1 vpn-name2 … }
undo apply access-vpn vpn-instance { vpn-name1 vpn-name2 … }

View
Route-policy view
Parameter
vpn-name: Name of the configured VPN instance. At most, 6 VPN names can be
configured.
Description
Using the apply access-vpn vpn-instance command, you can specify packet to
search private network forwarding route in vpn-name1, vpn-name2, vpn-name3,
vpn-name4, vpn-name5, vpn-name6(if they all exist) and perform the
corresponding forwarding after policy route is enabled. Using the undo apply
access-vpn vpn-instance command, you can remove this function.
Example
Specify the configured VPN instance.
[3Com-route-policy] apply access-vpn vpn-instance vpn1

debugging bgp [ { { keepalive | open | packet | update | route-refresh } [ receive |
send | verbose ] } { all | event | normal }
undo debugging bgp [ { { keepalive | open | packet | update | route-refresh } [

receive | send | verbose ] } { all | event | normal }
View
User view
Parameter
keepalive: Displays BGP keepalives.
open: Displays BGP OPEN packet information.
packet: Displays BGP packets.
update: Displays BGP updates.
route-refresh: Displays BGP route refreshing packets.
receive: Displays received information.
send: Displays sent information.
verbose: Displays detailed information
all: Displays debugging of all levels.
event: Displays BGP event.
normal: Displays BGP normal debugging function.

Description
The debugging bgp command you can display the information concerning BGP
processing. The undo debugging bgp command you can disable debugging
function.
Example
<3Com> debugging bgp vpnv4
description Syntax
description vpn-instance-description
undo description
View
Vpn-instance view
Parameter
vpn-instance-description: Specify the description information of VPN instance.
Description
Using the description command, you can configure description information for
specified VPN instance. Using the undo description command, you can remove the
description of VPN instance.
Example
Display description information of VPN.
[3Com-vpn-vpna] description 3com
display bgp vpnv4 Syntax

display bgp vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher rd-value | vpn-instance
vpn-instance-name } { group | network | peer | routing-table }
View
Any view
Parameter
all: Displays all VPNv4 database.
route-distinguisher: rd-value: Displays matching route distinguisher(RD) and

network layer reachable information(NLRI).
vpn-instance: vpn-instance-name: Displays network layer reachable

information(NLRI) associated with the specified vpn-instance.
group: Displays the information related to peer groups.
network: Displays the networks advertised through BGP.
peer: Displays the information of the connections.

routing-table: Displays BGP routes.
Description
Using the display bgp vpnv4 command, you can display VPNv4 information in BGP
database.
Example
Display the information about all BGP VPNV4 peers.
[3Com] display bgp vpnv4 all
BGP local router ID is 1.1.248.23
Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best, i
internal
Origin codes: i – IGP, e – EGP, ? - incomplete
Network Next Hop Label Metric LocPrf
Path
Route Distinguisher:100:9 (default for vpn-instance
vpn-instance_1)
*> 192.5.1.0 0.0.0.0 16/0

vpn-instance display ip routing-table vpn-instance vpn-instance-name [ ip-address ] [ verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
vpn-instance-name: Name assigned to vpn-instance.
ip-address: Displays information of the specified address.
verbose: Displays the detailed information.
Description
Using the display ip routing-table vpn-instance command, you can view the
specified information in the IP routing table of vpn-instance.
Example
Display the IP routing table associated with the vpn-instance.
[3Com] display ip routing-table vpn-instance vpn-instance1
Routing Table: vpn-instance1 RD: 1233:11
Destination/Mask ProtoPreMetric Nexthop Interface
192.1.1.0/24 Direct0 0192.1.1.1 GigabitEthernet1/0/0
192.1.1.1/32 Direct0 0127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
192.1.1.255/32 Direct0 0127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
display ip vpn-instance Syntax

display ip vpn-instance [ vpn-instance-name | verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
Description
Using the display ip vpn-instance command, you can view such information
associated with vpn-instance as the VPN instance RD, description and associated
interface.
Example
Display the information about vpn-instance 3Com.
[3Com] display ip vpn-instance 3com
VPN-Instance : vpn1
No description
Route-Distinguisher : 100:6
Interfaces :
Ethernet0/0/0.101
display ospf sham-link Syntax

display ospf sham-link
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display ospf sham-link command, you can view the information of sham
links.
For the related command, see sham-link.
Example
Display the information of sham links.
<3Com>display ospf sham-link
Sham Links
Sham-link 3.3.3.3 -> 5.5.5.5, State: Down
Area: 0.0.0.1
Cost: 1 State: Down Type: Sham
display mpls l3vpn-lsp Syntax

display mpls l3vpn-lsp [ verbose] [ include text ]
View
Any view
Parameter
include text: Displays the MPLS L3VPN LSPs with the specified FEC string.
Description
Using the display mpls l3vpn-lsp include command, you can view the information
of MPLS L3VPN LSPs.
Example
Display the label swith path vpn-instance relative information of mpls l3vpn.
<3Com> display mpls l3vpn-lsp transit
--------------------------------------------------------------------
LSP Information: L3vpn Transit Lsp
--------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 0 Record(s) Found.
Display the label swith path relative information of mpls l3vpn.
[3Com] display mpls l3vpn-lsp include 3com
display mpls l3vpn-lsp Syntax

vpn-instance display mpls l3vpn-lsp [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] [ transit | egress | ingress
] [include ip-address length-prefix | verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
transit: LSP of ASBR VPN
egress: LSP of egress VPN
ingress: LSP of ingress VPN
vpn-instance: VPN Routing/Forwarding instance name.
include text: Displays the MPLS L3VPN LSPs with the specified FEC string.
Description
Using the display ip routing-table vpn-instance command, you can view the
vpn-instance information of MPLS L3VPN LSPs.
Example
Display the vpn-instance information of MPLS L3VPN LSPs.
<3Com> display mpls l3vpn-lsp transit
--------------------------------------------------------------------
LSP Information: L3vpn Transit Lsp
--------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 0 Record(s) Found.
domain-id Syntax
domain-id { id-number | id-addr }
undo domain-id
View
OSPF protocol view
Parameter
id-number: Domain ID for a VPN instance, in range of 0~4294967295. By default,
it is 0.
id-addr: IP address format of the domain ID in VPN instance. By default, it is

0.0.0.0.
Description
Using the domain-id command, you can specify domain ID for a VPN instance.
Using the undo domain-id command, you can restore the default domain ID.
For standard BGP/OSPF interoperability, when importing routes to OSPF are

configured at the PE, their original OSPF attributes cannot be restored. If these
BGP VPN IP routes are issued to CE as ASE LSA (type-5 LAS), they cannot be
distinguished from other routes imported from other route domains. In order to
distinguish external routes imported form OSPF internal routes, it is required to
restore their OSPF attributes in importing BGP routes to OSPF, so an OSPF domain
can be configured with a domain ID. The domain-id is attached to the
corresponding BGP/VPN route in importing OSPF route into BGP/VPN for
transmission over BGP/VPN route. Then in importing BGP route into the peer PE,
LAS values are filled in according to the extended community attributes. If the
domain IDs are the same for the BGP VPN IP routes received, they are from the
same VPN instance.
By default, the domain ID is 0.
The specified domain ID will not take effect until the reset ospf command is
executed.
Example
Configure domain ID 100 for OSPF procedure 100.
[3Com-ospf-100]domain-id 100
[3Com-ospf-100]domain-id 0.0.0.100
import-route Syntax
import-route { ospf | ospf-ase | ospf-nssa } [ process-id ] [ med value | route-policy
route-policyname ]
undo import-route { ospf | ospf-ase | ospf-nssa } [ process-id ]

View
BGP unicast/multicast VPN-instance address family view, MBGP Interface
VPN-instance address family view
Parameter
process-id: OSPF procedure ID. By default, it is 1.
ospf: When only OSPF procedure ID is imported, ASE internal route is taken as
external route information.
ospf-ase: When only OSPF procedure ID is imported, OSPF-ASE route is taken as

ospf-nssa: When only OSPF procedure ID is imported, OSPF-NSSA route is taken as

med value: Route cost value
route-policyname: Route policy name
Description
Using the ip binding vpn-instance command, you can enable to import OSPF
route. Using the undo ip binding vpn-instance command, you can disable to
import OSPF route.
CAUTION: By default, the procedure ID IS 1.
Example
Enable to import an OSPF route with procedure ID 100.
[3Com] ip vpn-instance sphinx
[3Com-vpn-sphinx] route-distinuisher 168.168.55.1:85
[3Com-vpn-sphinx] quit
[3Com] bgp 352
[3Com-bgp] ip vpn-instance sphinx
[3Com-bgp-af-vpn-instance] import-route ospf 100
ip binding vpn-instance Syntax

ip binding vpn-instance vpn-instance-name
undo ip binding vpn-instance vpn-instance-name
View
Interface view
Parameter
Description
Using the ip binding vpn-instance command, you can connect an interface or
sububterface with a vpn-instance. Using the undo ip binding vpn-instance
command, you can remove the connection.
By default, global routing table is configured.
The IP address of the interface will be removed if executing this command on it, so
the IP address of the interface needs to be reconfigured.
Example
Bind VPN instance vpn1 to the interface atm0/0/0.
[3Com] interface atm1/0/0
[3Com-Atm1/0/0] ip binding vpn-instance vpn1
ip route-static Syntax
vpn-instance ip route-static vpn-instance { vpn--name1 vpn-name2 …| ip-address1 } { mask |
mask-length } { interface-name | [ vpn-instance vpn-name-nexthop ip-address2 ] } [
public ] [ preference preference-value ] [ reject | blackhole ]
undo ip route-static vpn-instance { vpn-name1 vpn-name2 …| ip-address1 } { mask

| mask-length } { interface-name | [ vpn-instance vpn-name-nexthop ip-address2 ] }
[ preference preference-value ] [ reject | blackhole ]
View
System view
Parameter
vpn-name: Name of VPN instance can be configured 6 names at most.
ip-address: Destination address of the static route.
mask: Address mask.
mask-length: Length of the mask. As "1" in the 32 bit-mask is required to be

consecutive, the mask in dotted decimal format can be substituted by
mask-length. (mask-length is represented by the number of consecutive "1"s in
the mask.)
interface-name: Out-interface name of static route. It can specify the interface of

public network or other vpn-instances as the out-interface of the static route.
vpn-nexthop-name: Next hop vpn-instance of the static route.
ip-address2: Next hop IP address of the static route.
reject: Configures a route as unreachable.
blackhole: Configures a route as blackhole.
Description
Using the ip route-static vpn-instance command, you can configure static route,
specifying an private network interface as the out-interface of this static route. In
the application background of multi-role host, you can configure a static route in a
private network with an interface of another private network or public network as
its out-interface. Using the undo ip route-static vpn-instance command, you can
remove the configuration of this static route.
Example
Configure static route with destination address 100.1.1.1, next hop address
1.1.1.2.
[3Com] ip route-static vpn-instance vpn1 100.1.1.1 16 vpn-instance
vpn1 1.1.1.2
ip vpn-instance Syntax
ip vpn-instance vpn-name
undo ip vpn-instance vpn-name
View
System view, routing protocol view
Parameter
vpn-name: Name assigned to vpn-instance.
Description
Using the ip vpn-instance command, you can create and configure a vpn-instance.
Using the undo ip vpn-instance command, you can delete the specified
vpn-instance.
By default, vpn-instance is not defined. Neither input nor output list is associated
with vpn-instance. no route-map is associated with vpn-instance.
Use the ip vpn-instance command to create a vpn-instance named vpn-name.
Example
Create VPN instance vpn1.
[3Com] ip vpn-instance vpn1
[3Com-vpn-vpn1]
ipv4-family Syntax
ipv4-family [ vpnv4 [ unicast ] | multicast | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]
undo ipv4-family [ vpnv4 [ unicast ] | multicast | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]
View
BGP view
Parameter
multicast: IPv4 multicast address used by the address family. This parameter is used
to enter MBGP multicast address family view.
vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Associates the specified vpn-instance example

with the IPv4 address family. This parameter is used to enter MBGP vpn-instance
address family view.
unicast: IPv4 unicast address used by the address family.

Description
Using the ipv4-family command, you can enter BGP IPv4 address family view or
MBGP VPNv4 address family view. Using the undo ipv4-family command, you can
delete the configuration of specified address family view or MBGP VPNv4 address
family view.
By default, unicast address is used when configuring VPNv4 address family.
By default, unicast address is used when configuring IPv4 address family.
Use this command to enter address family view and configure parameters
associated with address family for BGP in this view.
The ipv4-family vpn-instance command you can enter MBGP vpn-instance address
family view.
The undo ipv4-family vpn-instance vpn-instance-name command you can remove

the association of the specified vpn-instance example with IPv4 address family to
exit to BGP unicast view.
For the related command, see peer enable.
Example
Associate the specified vpn-instance example with IPv4 address family to enter
MBGP vpn-instance address family view, which can be configured only after
vpn-instance has been configured.
[3Com] bgp 100
[3Com–bgp] ipv4 family vpn-instance abc
[3Com-bgp-af-vpn-instance]
Enter VPNv4 address family view.

[3Com] bgp 100
[3Com-bgp] ipv4 family vpnv4 unicast
[3Com-bgp-af-vpn]
ospf Syntax
ospf process-id [ router-id router-id-number ] [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]
undo ospf process-id
View
System view
Parameter
process-id: OSPF procedure ID. By default, it is 1.
router-id-number: Router ID for OSPF procedure, optional
vpn-instance-name: VPN instance bound to the OSPF procedure

Description
Using the ospf command, you can an enable OSPF procedure. Using the undo ospf
command, you can disable an OSPF procedure.
After enabling OSPF procedure, you can perform OSPF configurations in the OSPF
protocol view.
By default, no OSPF protocol is enabled.
VRP supports multiple OSPF procedures, so you can specify different procedure IDs
to enable multiple OSPF procedures on a router.
It is recommended to specify procedure route-id with the router-id parameter in

enabling OSPF procedure. If you want to enable multiple processes on a router,
you are recommended to specify different router IDs for different procedures.
To enable an OSPF procedure belonging to public network without specifying

router ID, the following conditions should be satisfied:
■ RM is configured with router ID.
■ There is an interface which configured with IP address.
If router ID is not specified in enabling OSPF procedure and binding the procedure
with a VPN instance is required, an interface must exist which has been configured
with IP address.
If you want to bind a procedure to a VPN instance, you must specify VPN instance
name.
One VPN instance may include several procedures. For example, for the VPN
instance 1, you can configure it into OSPF procedures 1, 2 and 3 with the
commands ospf 1 vpn-instance vpn1, ospf 2 vpn-instance vpn1, and ospf 3
vpn-instance vpn1.
But one procedure can belong to only one instance. If you have executed ospf 1
vpn-instance vpn1, you cannot configure ospf 1 vpn-instance vpn2. Otherwise,
the system prompts the information “Wrong configuration. Process 1 has been
bound to vpn-instance VRF1”. If you configure ospf 1 first and then execute ospf 1
vpn-instance vpn1, the system prompts the information “Wrong configuration.
Process 1 has been running in public domain”.
If you execute ospf 1 vpn-instance vpn1 first and then configure ospf 1, the system
enters ospf 1 vpn-instance vpn1 view, in which the commands ospf 1 and ospf 1
vpn-instance vpn1 are equivalent.
When an OSPF procedure is bound to a VPN instance, the default OSPF router is PE
router. After executing the display ospf process-id brief command, you will get the
information “PE router, connected to VPN backbone”.
CAUTION:
■ A router can run a maximum of 1024 OSPF procedures, with up to 10
procedures in each VPN instance.
■ If you bind an OSPF procedure to a nonexistent VPN instance, the command

fails in executing and the system prompts the information “Specified vpn
instance not configured”.
■ When a VPN instance is deleted, all OSPF procedures associated to it will be
deleted. For example, suppose VPN instance vpn1 includes OSPF procedures 1,
2 and 3. If VPN instance vpn1 is deleted, the OSPF procedures 1, 2 and 3 will all
be deleted.
For the related command, see network.
Example
Enable the default OSPF procedure 1.
[3Com] ospf
Enable OSPF procedure 120 and run OSPF protocol.

[3Com] ospf 120
[3Com-ospf-120]
Enable OSPF procedure 100, specify its route ID as 2.2.2.2 and bind it to the VPN
instance vpn1.
[3Com] ospf 100 router-id 2.2.2.2 vpn-instance vpn1
[3Com-ospf-100]

peer { group-name | peer-address } allow-as-loop asn-limit
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } allow-as-loop asn-limit
View
BGP view, MBGP IPv4-family view
Parameter
group-name: Name of the peer group
ip-address: specified IP address of peer.
asn-limit: The maximum number allowed in received route updates of the local
autonomous system number AS.
Description
Using the peer allow-as-loop command, you can enable route loop detection in
the received route updates in hub&spoke networking mode. Using the undo peer
allow-as-loop command, you can prohibit loop to occur in the received route
updates.
By default, loop information is prohibited in the received route update

information.
In the case of standard BGP, BGP tests routing loop via AS number. In the case of
Hub&Spoke networking, however, PE carries the AS number of the local
autonomous system when advertising the routing information to CE, if EBGP is
run between PE and CE. Accordingly, the updated routing information will carry
the AS number of the local autonomous system when route update is received
from CE. In this case, PE cannot receive the route update information.
This phenomenon can be avoided by using the peer allow-as-loop command,

which makes PE router allow the route update information received from CE to
contain AS number of itself. The allowed maximum number is controlled by using
the parameter asn-imit.
Example
Enable route loop detection in the received route updates.
[3Com-bgp] ipv4-family vpn-instance one
[3Com-bgp-af-vpn-instance] peer 1.1.1.1 allow-as-loop 1
peer as-number Syntax

peer { group-name | [ peer-address group group-name ] } as-number as-number
undo peer { group-name | [ peer-address group group-name] } as-number

as-number
View
BGP view, MBGP vpn-instance view
Parameter
group-name: Peer group name.
peer-address: IP address of a peer.
as-number: Peer end AS number of a peer (group).
Description
Using the peer as-number command, you can configure the remote AS number of
the specified peer (group). Using the undo peer as-number command, you can
remove the remote AS number of the specified peer (group).
By default, a peer of the peer (group) has no AS number.
Example
Set the remote AS number of the specified peer (group) to 100.
peer enable Syntax

peer group-name enable
undo peer group-name enable
View
BGP view, MBGP VPNv4 view
Parameter
group-name: Peer group name
Description
Using the peer enable command, you can enable the specified peer (group). Using
the undo peer enable command, you can disable the specified peer (group).
For IPv4 address family, address switching is enabled by default.
Example
Enable the peer (group) 168.
[3Com-bgp-af-vpn] peer 168 enable
peer connect-interface Syntax

peer { group-name | ip-address } connect-interface interface-type
interface-number
undo peer { group-name | ip-address } connect-interface interface-type

interface-number
View
BGP view, MBGP vpn-instance view
Parameter
interface-number: Name of the interface.
Description
Using the peer connect-interface command, you can configure to allow the
internal BGP session to use any operable interface that connects with TCP. Using
the undo peer connect-interface command, you can restore to use the best local
address to implement TCP connection.
By default, BGP uses the best local address to implement TCP connection.
Generally, BGP uses the best local address to implement TCP connection. In order
to make the TCP connection valid even when the interface fails, the internal BGP
session can be configures to be allowed to use any operable TCP-connected
interface (For example, Loopback interface).
Example
Allow the internal BGP session to use any operable interface that connects with
TCP.
[3Com-bgp-af-vpn-instance] peer 1.1.1.1 connect-interface loopback 0
peer Syntax
default-route-advertise peer { group-name | peer-address } default-route-advertise
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } default-route-advertise
View
Parameter
Description
Using the peer default-route-advertise command, you can enable a peer (group) to
import a default route. Using the undo peer default-route-advertise command,
you can remove the existing setting.
By default, no default route is redistributed to a peer (group).
This command does not require any default route in the routing table but
transmits a default route whose next hop address is itself to the peer
unconditionally.
Example
Enable the peer (group) test to import a default route.
[3Com–bgp] peer test as-number
[3Com–bgp] peer test default-route-advertise

peer { group-name | peer-address } next-hop-local
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } next-hop-local
View
Parameter
Description
Using the peer next-hop-local command, you can remove the processing of the
next hop in the routes that BGP advertises to a peer (group) and configure to use
its self-address as the next-hop. Using the undo peer next-hop-local command,
you can remove the existing setting.
Example
Specify the local IP address as the next hop in BGP's route advertising to the peer
(group).
[3Com-bgp-af-vpn] peer test next-hop-local

peer { group-name | peer-address } public-as-only
undo peer { group-name | peer-address } public-as-only
View
Parameter
Description
Using the peer public-as-only command, you can configure not to carry private AS
number when transmitting BGP update packets. Using the undo peer
public-as-only command, you can configure to carry private AS number when
By default, private AS number is carried when transmitting BGP update packets.
Generally, BGP carries the AS number (either public or private AS number) when
transmitting BGP update packets. BGP can be configured not to carry the private
AS number so that some output routers may ignore the private AS number when
Example
Send MBGP update packets without bearing private AS number.
[3Com-bgp-af-vpn] peer 168 public-as-only
peer upe Syntax

peer peer-address upe
undo peer peer-address} upe
View
BGP view
Parameter
Description
Using the peer upe command, you can configure BGP peer as the UPE of
hierarchical BGP/MPLS VPN. Using the undo peer upe command, you can remove
this configuration.
Example
Configure BGP peer as the UPE of hierarchical BGP/MPLS VPN.
[3Com-bgp] ipv4-family vpnv4

[3Com-bgp-af-vpn] peer 1.1.1.1 upe
route-distinguisher Syntax
route-distinguisher route-distinguisher
View
vpn-instance view
Parameter
route-distinguisher: Configures a VPN IPv4 prefix by adding an 8-byte value to a
IPv4 prefix.
Description
Using the route-distinguisher command, you can configure RD for an MPLS VPN
instance. A vpn-instance cannot run until it is configured with an RD.
A route distinguisher (RD) creates route and forwarding list for a VPN and specify
default route identifier. Add RD to a specific IPv4 prefix start to make it the only
VPN IPv4 prefix.
If ID is associated with autonomous system number(ASN), it is a combination of an

autonomous system number and an arbitrary number; if RD is associated with IP
address, it is a combination of an IP address and an arbitrary number.
RD has the following formats:
16-bit ASN: 32-bit number defined by user, for example, 101:3.
32-bit IP address: 16-bit number defined by user, for example, 192.168.122.15:1.
Example
Configure RD for the MPLS VPN instance.
[3Com] ip vpn-instance vpn_blue
[3Com-vpn-vpn_blue] route-distinguisher 100:3
[3Com] ip vpn-instance vpn_red
[3Com-vpn-vpn_red] route-distinguisher 173.13.0.12:200
route-tag Syntax
route-tag tag-number
undo route-tag
View
OSPF protocol view
Parameter
tag-number: Tag value to identify VPN import route, in range of 0~4294967295.
By default, its first two fields are fixed to 0xD000, while the last two fields are the
ASN of local BGP. For example, if local BGP ASN is 100, then the default tag value
in decimal is 3489661028.
Description
Using the route-tag command, you can specify a tag value to identify VPN import
route. Using the undo route-tag command, you can restore the default value.
If a VPN site is linked to multiple PEs, when the route learned from MPLS/BGP is
advertised by a PE router via its type-5 or type-7 LSA to the VPN site, the route may
be received by another PE router. This will result in route loop. To avoid route loop,
you should configure route-tag and it is recommended to configure the same
route-tag for the PEs in the same VPN domain. The route-tag is included in the
type-5/-7 LSA. The route-tag is not transmitted in the extended community
attributes of BGP, but can only be configured and function on the PE router which
receives BGP route and generates OSPF LSA.
Configure route-tag in OSPF protocol view. Different processes can be configured

with a same route-tag. You can configure the same route-tag with different
commands, but with different priority levels.
■ Those configured with the import-route command are of highest priority level.
■ Those configured with the route-tag command are in the second place in terms
of priority level.
■ Those configure with the default tag command are of the lowest priority level.
If the route-tag included in the type-5/-7 LSA is identical with its existing tag, the
LSA received will be neglected in route calculation.
CAUTION: The route-tag configured will not take effect until the reset ospf
command is executed.
For the related commands, see import-route and default.
Example
Configure route-tag 100 to OSPF procedure 100.
[3Com-ospf-100] route-tag 100
OSPF: Process 100's route tag has been changed
OSPF: Reload or use 'reset ospf' command for this to take effect
vpn-target Syntax
vpn-target vpn-target-ext-community [ import-extcommunity |
export-extcommunity | both ]
undo vpn-target vpn-target-ext-community [ import-extcommunity |

export-extcommunity | both ]
View
Vpn-instance view
Parameter
import-extcommunity: Ingress route information from the extended community of
target VPN.
export-extcommunity: Egress route information to the extended community of

target VPN.
both: Imports ingress and egress route information to the extended community of
target VPN.
vpn-target-ext-community: Adds vpn-target extended community attribute to the

ingress and egress of vpn-instance or the vpn-target extended community list of
ingress and egress.
Description
Using the vpn-target command, you can create vpn-target extended community
for vpn-instance. Using the undo vpn-target command, you can remove the
vpn-target extended community attribute.
By default, the default value is both.
The vpn-target command you can create ingress and egress route target extended
community list for specified vpn-instance. Execute this command once for each
target community. Import the received route bearing the specific route target
extended community to all vpn-instances, which are configured extended
community as ingress route target. Vpn-target specifies a target VPN extended
community. Same as RD, an extended community is either composed with an
autonomous system number and an arbitrary number or composed with an IP
address and an arbitrary number.
Extended community has the following formats:
16-bit ASN: 32-bit number defined by user, for example, 100:1.
32-bit IP address: 16-bit number defined by user, for example, 172.1.1.1:1.
Example
Create vpn-target extended community for the vpn-instance.
[3Com] ip vpn-instance vpn_red
[3Com-vpn-vpn_red] vpn-target 1000:1 both
[3Com-vpn-vpn_red] vpn-target 1000:2 export-extcommunity
[3Com-vpn-vpn_red] vpn-target 173.27.0.130:2 import-extcommunity
routing-table limit Syntax

routing-table limit { warn threshold | simply-alert }
undo routing-table limit
View
MBGP vpn-instance view
Parameter
limit: Specifies the route maximum allowed in a vpn-instance.
warn threshold: Rejects routes when the threshold value is reached. This threshold
value is the percentage of the specified route maximum from 1 to 100.
simply-alert: When the route maximum specified for a vpn-instance exceeds the
threshold, routes can be added and only a SYSLOG error message is sent out.
Description
Using the routing-table limit command, you can limit the route maximum in a
vpn-instance, to avoid too many routes in the ingress interface of the PE router.
Using the undo routing-table limit command, you can remove the limitation.
It is necessary to enter the vpn-instance sub-view before using the routing-table

command. Create a vpn-instance routing table in this view and allocate a route
distinguisher (RD) in one of the following formats:
16-bit AS number (ASN): 32-bit user-defined number, e.g., 100:1.
32-bit IP address: 16-bit user-defined number, e.g., 172.1.1.1:1.
Create a vpn-target extended community for a vpn-instance and specify ingress or

egress interface or both of them for the vpn-target command. These parameters
can be used to configure input and ingress/egress routing information of the
destination VPN extended community for a router.
Example
[3Com] ip vpn-instance vpn1
[3Com-vpn- vpn1] route-distinguisher 100:1
[3Com-vpn- vpn1] vpn-target 100:1 import-extcommunity
[3Com-vpn- vpn1] routing-table limit 1000 simply-alert
sham-link Syntax
sham-link source-addr destination-addr [ cost cost-value ] [ dead seconds ] [ hello
seconds ] [ md5 keyid key seconds ] [ retransimit seconds ] [ simple password ] [
trans-delay seconds ]
undo sham-link source-addr destination-addr
View
OSPF area view
Parameter
source-addr: Source address of sham-link, a loopback interface address with 32-bit
mask
destination-addr: Destination address of sham-link, a loopback interface address

with 32-bit mask
cost-value: Cost at sham link, in the range of 1~65535. By default, it is 1.
password: Specify authentication string in plain text at the interface, 8 characters

at most. It must be consistent with the authentication string of sham link peer.
keyid: Specifies MD5 authentication string at the interface, in range of 1~255

characters. It must be consistent with the authentication string of sham link peer.
key: Specifies authentication string at the interface, 16 characters at most. It must

be consistent with the authentication string of sham link peer. When the display
current-configuration command is executed, the system displays the 24-character
MD5 authentication string in cipher text. You can also input 24-character
authentication string in cipher text.
dead seconds: Specifies interval for the dead timer, in range of 1~8192 seconds.
By default, it is 40 seconds. It must be consistent with the dead seconds value for
sham link peer.
hello seconds: Specifies interval between Hello message transmission at the

interface, in range of 1~8192 seconds. By default, it is 10 seconds. It must be
consistent with the hello seconds value for sham link peer.
retransmit seconds: Specifies internal for LSA message retransmission at the

interface, in range of 1~8192 seconds. By default, it is 5 seconds.
trans-delay seconds: Specifies delay period for LSA message transmission at the
interface, in range of 1~8192 seconds. By default, it is 1 second.
Description
Using the sham-link command, you can configure a sham link. Using the undo
sham-link command, you can delete a sham link.
In the OSPF PE-CE connection, suppose that in an OSPF area there are two sites
which belong to the same VPN, with each connected to different PE router and an
intra-domain link (backdoor) established between them. Though there may be
other routes connecting the two sites via the PE router, these routes are just
intra-domain routes, so OSPF will select those routes through the backdoor first.
Sometimes, the routes through VPN backbone are desired to be selected first, then
it is required to establish sham link between PE routers. In this case, the routes
through VPN backbone are of the highest priority within the OSPF area.
The sham link between VPN PE routers is taken as a link within the OSPF area. Its
source and destination addresses are both loopback interface addresses with
32-bit mask. This loopback interface must be bound with a VPN instance and
imported into BGP through a direct-connect route. The optional parameters can
be appended in the sham link command and only those appended in the sham
link command can be selected in the undo command.
CAUTION:
■ The source and destination addresses of a sham link are both loopback
interface addresses with 32-bit mask. This loopback interface must be bound
with a VPN instance and imported into BGP through a direct-connect route.
■ The source and destination addresses of a sham link cannot be the same.
■ The same sham link cannot be configured in the different OSPF procedures.
■ A maximum of 50 sham link can be configured in an OSPF procedure.
Example
Configure a sham link, with source address 1.1.1.1 and destination address
2.2.2.2.
[3Com-ospf-100-area-0.0.0.1] sham-link 1.1.1.1 2.2.2.2 cost 100
vpn-instance-capability Syntax
simple vpn-instance-capability simple
undo vpn-instance-capability
View
OSPF protocol view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the routing-table limit command, you can configure a router as
Multi-VPN-Instance CE. Using the undo routing-table limit command, you can
remove the configuration.
OSPF multi-VPN-instance application is often run at the PE router, so the CE router

on which OSPF multi-VPN-instance application runs is called Multi-VPN-Instance
CE. Though they both support multi-VPN-instance application, Multi-VPN-Instance
CE does not necessarily support BGP/OSPF interoperability.
When OSPF procedures are bound with VPN instances, the default OSPF router
serves as PE router. This command will remove the default configuration and
change a router into Multi-VPN-Instance CE. Then OSPF procedure will set up all
peers again. DN bits and route-tag will not be check in routing calculation. To
prevent route loss, loop test function is disabled on PE routes. MGP/OSPF
interoperability is also disabled to save system resources.
After the display ospf brief command is executed successfully, the system prompts
the information “Multi-VPN-Instance enable on CE router”.
CAUTION: OSPF process will set up all peers again after this command is run.
Example
Configure OSPF procedure 100 as Multi-VPN-Instance CE.
[3Com-ospf-100] vpn-instance-capability simple
Restore the OSPF procedure 100 as PE.

[3Com-ospf-100] undo vpn-instance-capability
MPLS L2VPN CCC

Configuration
Commands
ccc interface Syntax

transmit-lsp receive-lsp ccc ccc-connection-name interface interface-type interface-number transmit-lsp
transmit-lsp-name receive-lsp receive-lsp-name
undo ccc ccc-connection-name

View
System view
Parameter
interface-type interface-number: Interface for the remote connection.
ccc-connection-name: CCC connection name of 1 to 20 characters in length,

which uniquely identifies a CCC inside a PE.
transmit-lsp-name: Name of the transmit-LSP.
receive-lsp-name: Name of the receive-LSP.
Description
Using the ccc interface transmit-lsp receive-lsp command, you can create a remote
CCC connection. Using the undo ccc command, you can delete a remote CCC
connection.
You can delete a CCC connection in the interface or system view.
For the related command, see ccc interface out-interface.
Example
Create a remote CCC connection clink, with the transmit-LSP being tlsp and the
receive-LSP being rlsp.
[3Com-Ethernet3/0/0] ccc clink interface serial0/0/0 transmit-lsp
tlsp receive-lsp rlsp
ccc interface Syntax

out-interface ccc ccc-connection-name interface interface-type interface-number out-interface
outinterface-type outinterface-num
undo ccc ccc-connection-name
View
System view
Parameter
ccc-connection-name: CCC connection name of 1 to 20 characters, which is used
for uniquely identifying the CCC inside the PE.
interface-type interface-number: Interface connected to the first CE
outinterface-type outinterface-num: Interface connected to the second CE.
Description
Using the ccc interface out-interface command, you can create a local CCC
connection. Using the undo ccc command, you can delete the local CCC
connection.
The supported interfaces include serial, asynchronous serial, ATM, Ethernet, VE,
and GE interfaces, as well as ATM, Ethernet, and GE sub-interfaces.
For a serial, asynchronous serial, Ethernet, GE, or VE interface, CCC encapsulation

defaults to link layer encapsulation and the command does not have any
parameter in this case. This is also applies to the CCC encapsulation on an
Ethernet sub-interface or GE sub-interface. For an ATM sub-interface, CCC
encapsulation defaults to ATM AAL5. In this case, the command can bring with it
a parameter indicating whether the encapsulation is ATM AAL5 or ATM CELL.
Example
Create a local CCC connection clink, with two CEs connected respectively to
Ethernet0/0/0 and Ethernet2/0/0.
[3Com] ccc clink interface serial0/0/0 out-interface Ethernet 2/0/0
debugging mpls l2vpn Syntax

debugging mpls l2vpn { all | advertisement | error | event | connections [ interface
interface-name | interface-type interface-num ] }
undo debugging mpls l2vpn { all | advertisement | error | event | connections [

interface interface-name | interface-type interface-num ] }
View
User view
Parameter
all: Enables/Disables all L2VPN debugging.
advertisement: Enables/Disables BGP/LDP notify information debugging of L2VPN.
error: Enables/Disables L2VPN error information debugging.
event: Enables/Disables L2VPN event information debugging.
connections: Enables/Disables connection information debugging.
interface-type interface-num: Specifies CE interface for information connection

debugging.
Description
Using the debugging mpls l2vpn command, you can view L2VPN link information.
Using the undo debugging mpls l2vpn command, you can disable the debug
function.
Example
<3Com> debugging mpls l2vpn all
display ccc Syntax

display ccc [ ccc-name | type [ local | remote ] ]
View
Any view
Parameter
ccc-name: Name of the connection to be displayed.
local: Displays local CCC connection only.
remote: Displays remote CCC connection only.
Description
Using the display ccc command, you can view CCC connection information.
Example
Display CCC connection information.
[3Com] display ccc c-link
static-lsp egress l2vpn Syntax

static-lsp egress lsp-name l2vpn incoming-interface interface-type interface-num
in-label in-label
undo static-lsp egress lsp-name l2vpn
View
MPLS view
Parameter
lsp-name: LSP name
interface-type Interface-num: Interface type and interface number
in-label-value: Inbound label value, in range of 16~1024
Description
Using the static-lsp egress l2vpn command, you can configure a static LSP used in
L2VPN for egress LSR. Using the undo static-lsp egress l2vpn command, you can
delete an LSP used in L2VPN of egress LSR.
Two LSPs (one in each direction) should be created in advance before creating
remote CCC connection.
For related commands, see static-lsp ingress l2vpn and debugging mpls.
Example
Add the static LSP bj-sh at egress LSR.
[3Com-mpls] static-lsp egress bj-sh l2vpn incoming-interface
serial8/0/0 in-label 233
static-lsp ingress l2vpn Syntax

static-lsp ingress lsp-name { l2vpn | destination ip_addr } { nexthop next-hop-addr |
outgoing-interface interface-type interface-num } out-label out-label
undo static-lsp ingress lsp-name l2vpn

View
MPLS view
Parameter
lsp-name: LSP name
next-hop-addr: Next hop address
out-label-value: Outbound label value, in range of 16~1024
Description
Using the static-lsp egress l2vpn command, you can configure a static LSP used in
L2VPN for ingress LSR. Using the undo static-lsp egress l2vpn command, you can
delete an LSP used in L2VPN of ingress LSR.
With this command, you can configure a static LSP for ingress LSR, as well as
setting preference and measurement value for it.
Two LSPs (one in each direction) should be created in advance before creating
remote CCC connection.
For related commands, see static-lsp egress lvpn, static-lsp transit, and debugging
mpls.
Example
Add the static LSP with destination address 202.25.38.1 at ingress LSR.
[3Com-mpls] static-lsp ingress bj-sh destination 202.25.38.1 24
nexthop 202.55.25.33 out-label 237
static-lsp transit l2vpn Syntax

static-lsp transit lsp-name l2vpn incoming-interface interface-type interface-num
in-label in-label { nexthop next-hop-addr | outgoing-interface interface-type
interface-num } out-label out-label
undo static-lsp transit lsp-name l2vpn
View
MPLS view
Parameter
lsp-name: LSP name
next-hop-addr: Next hop address
in-label-value: Inbound label value, in range of 16~1024
out-label-value: Outbound label value, in range of 16~1024

SVC MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands 807
Description
Using the static-lsp transit command, you can configure a static LSP used in L2VPN
for transit LSR. Using the undo static-lsp transit command, you can delete an LSP
used in L2VPN of transit LSR.
Two LSPs (one in each direction) should be created in advance and configured to
the transit LSR before creating remote CCC connection.
For related commands, see static-lsp egress l2vpn and static-lsp ingress l2vpn.
Example
Add a static LSP used in 12vpn for the Serial0/0/0 of transit LSR, with inbound
label being 123 and outbound label being 253.
[3Com-mpls] static-lsp transit bj-sh l2vpn incoming-interface
serial0/0/0 in-label 123 nexthop 202.34.114.7 out-label 253
SVC MPLS L2VPN

Configuration
Commands
display mpls static-l2vc Syntax
display mpls static-l2vc [ interface interface-type interface -num ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-type interface -num: Interface type and interface number
Description
Using the display mpls static-l2vc command, you can view the connection
information of static MPLS L2VPN.
Example
Display basic information of static connection.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/1] display mpls static-l2vc
total connections: 1, 0 up, 1 down
ce-intf state destination tr-label rcv-label tnl-type
tnl-index
Ethernet1/0/1 down 192.1.1.1 222 111 --
0
[3Com] display mpls static-l2vc interface ethernet1/0/1

CE-interface: Ethernet1/0/1 is up, VC State: down, Destination:
192.1.1.1,
transmit-vpn-label: 222, receive-vpn-label: 111,
tunnel type: --, tunnel index: 0
mpls static-l2vc Syntax

mpls static-l2vc destination destination-ip-address transmit-vpn-label
transmit-label-value receive-vpn-label receive-label-value
View
Interface view
Parameter
destination-ip-address: ROUTER ID of destination router.
transmit-label-value: Transmit-label value of VPN.
receive-label-value: Receive-label value of VPN.
Description
Using the mpls static-l2vc command, you can create an SVC MPLS L2VPN
connection. Using the undo mpls static-l2vc command, you can delete the
connection.
Example
Create SVC MPLS L2VPN connection.
[3Com-s1/1/0] mpls static-l2vc destination 192.1.1.1
transmit-vpn-label 333 receive-vpn-label 111
Martini MPLS L2VPN

Configuration
Commands
display mpls l2vc Syntax

display mpls l2vc [ interface interface-type interface-num | verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-type interface-num: Name of the interface connected with CE.
Description
Using the display mpls l2vc command, you can view the VC information in LDP
mode.
Example
None
mpls l2vc Syntax

mpls l2vc ip-address vc-id
undo mpls l2vc
View
Interface view
Parameter
ip-address: lsr-id address of peer PE.
vc-id: Connected VC ID.
Description
Using the mpls l2vc command, you can create an LDP connection. Using the undo
mpls l2vc command, you can delete the connection.
Supporting interface types: Serial, Asy Serial, POS, ATM, ATM subinterface,
Ethernet, Ethernet subinterface, VE, GE, GE subinterface.
Enable MPLS L2VPN and encapsulate CCC on the interface before using this
command.
For the related command, see mpls l2vpn and ccc.
Example
Create LDP connection.
[3Com-Ethernet3/0/0] mpls l2vc 10.0.0.11
Kompella MPLS L2VPN

Configuration
Commands
ce Syntax
ce name [ id id range range ] [ default-offset offset ] ]
undo ce name
View
MPLS L2VPN view
Parameter
name: CE name, unique in the current PE VPN.
id: CE ID, unique in VPN, represents a CE, ranging from 1 to 65535.
offset:Specifies default offset value of the original CE.
range: CE range, in other words, the maximum CE number local CE can connect
with, ranging from 1 to 100. Default value is 10.
Description
Using the ce command, you can create CE or modify CE range. Using the undo ce
command, you can delete CE.
After CE is created, system will create a CE mode and all the configurations of CE
will be performed in this mode.
To facilitate VPN expansion, CE range can be configured larger than the real
capacity. But it’s a waste of identifier because system will distribute an identifier
block as large as the CE range.
If the CE range is smaller than need in VPN expansion, for example, the CE range
is 10 while the needed CE number is 20, you can modify the CE range to 20.
For the related command, see mpls l2vpn encapsulation, connection.
Example
Create a CE for vpna, named “Marlborough,” with CEID being 1, range default
value being 10.
[3Com]mpls l2vpn
[3Com] mpls l2vpn vpna encapsulation ppp
[3Com-mpls-l2vpn-vpna] ce marlborough id 1
[3Com-mpls-l2vpn-ce-vpna-marlborough]
connection Syntax
connection [ ce-offset offset ] { interface interface-type interface-num }
undo connection [ ce-offset offset ] { interface interface-type interface-num }
View
MPLS L2VPN CE view
Parameter
offset: Specifies remote CE ID for L2VPN connection in establishing local
connection
interface-type interface-num: Specifies CE interface in establishing remote

connection.
Description
Using the connection command, you can create a CE connection. Using the undo
connection command, you can delete a CE connection.
Configure RD for MPLS L2VPN first before establishing a CE connection.
For related commands, see mpls l2vpn encapsulation and ccc.
Example
Establish a CE connection.
[3Com] mpls l2vpn vpna
[3Com-l2vpn-vpna] ce ce-a id 1 range 4
[3Com-l2vpn-vpna-ce-ce-a] connection s0/0/0 ce-offset 2
display bgp l2vpn Syntax

display bgp l2vpn { all | peer | route-distinguisher }
View
Any view
Parameter
all: All L2VPN information in local address family.
peer: Information of the specified BGP peer.
route-distinguisher: Information of the specified VPN RD.
Description
Using the display bgp l2vpn all command, you can view system operating
information and all L2VPN information.
Example
Display all L2VPN information.
[3Com] display bgp l2vpn all
BGP local router ID is 172.16.1.5 , Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP,

? - incomplete
bgp.l2vpn: 3 destinations
CE ID Label Offset Label Base nexthop pref
as-path
Route Distinguisher: 100:1

2 1 800000
1.1.1.1 100 I 200 600
3 1 500000
1.1.1.1 100 I 200 600
Route Distinguisher: 100:2

1 1 700000
1.1.1.1 100 I 200 600
display mpls l2vpn Syntax

forwarding-info display mpls l2vpn forwarding-info [ vc-label ] interface interface-type
interface-num
View
Any view
Parameter
vclabel: VC label
interface-type interface-num: Interface type and interface number

Description
Using the display mpls l2vpn forwarding-info command, you can view the L2VPN
information under a specific interface.
Example
Display the L2VPN information under a specific interface.
[3Com] display mpls l2vpn forwarding-info interface serial1/0/0
VCLABEL TUNNELTYPE ENTRYTYPE OUTINTERFACE OUTSLOT TOKEN CTRLWORD
102402 LSP SEND Serial1 0 0
FALSE
Record(s) Found.
l2vpn-family Syntax
l2vpn-family
undo l2vpn-family
View
BGP view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the l2vpn-family command, you can create an L2VPN address family view.
Using the undo l2vpn-family command, you can delete the L2VPN address family
view.
By default, it is BGP unicast view.
Using this command, you can enter L2VPN address family view.
Execute the undo l2vpn-family command to exit multicast extended address family
view. Delete all the configurations in this address family and back to BGP unicast
view.
Example
Create L2VPN address family view.
[3Com] bgp 100
[3Com-bgp] l2vpn-family
[3Com-bgp-af-l2vpn]
mpls l2vpn Syntax

mpls l2vpn
undo mpls l2vpn
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the mpls l2vpn command, you can enable L2VPN. Using the undo mpls
l2vpn command, you can disable L2VPN.
Enable MPLS before using this command.
For the related commands, see mpls and mpls lsr-id.
Example
Enter MPLS view, then configure LSR ID and enable MPLS.
[3Com] undo mpls
[3Com-mpls] mpls lsr-id 10.0.0.1
[3Com] mpls
Enable L2VPN.
[3Com] mpls l2vpn
mpls l2vpn Syntax

encapsulation mpls l2vpn vpn-name encapsulation { atm-aal5 | ethernet | fr | vlan | hdlc | ppp }
undo mpls l2vpn vpn-name
View
System view
Parameter
vpn-name: Unique VPN name in PE with 1 to 20 bytes.
atm-aal5 | ethernet | fr | vlan | hdlc | ppp: VPN encapsulation types. The CCC
encapsulation type on CE interface must keep accordance with that of VPN when
creating BGP L2VPN connection. Otherwise, the connection can not be performed
normally.
Description
Using the mpls l2vpn encapsulation command, you can create Kompella MPLS
L2VPN and specify encapsulation mode. Using the undo mpls l2vpn encapsulation
command, you can remove the encapsulation.
Create Kompella MPLS L2VPN after global enable MPLS L2VPN.
After creating Kompella MPLS L2VPN, system will create a L2VPN mode, all the
parameters of which are configured in L2VPN mode.
For related commands, see ce and mtu.
Example
Create a Kompella MPLS L2VPN, named “3Com”, with encapsulation type being
vlan:
[3Com] mpls l2vpn 3Com encapsulation vlan
mtu Syntax
mtu mtu
View
L2VPN view
Parameter
mtu: Layer2 MTU value of VPN. MTU is defaulted as 1500.
Description
Using the mtu command, you can configure MTU of Kompella MPLS L2VPN.
When configuring VPN layer2 mtu, the mtu value of the same VPN on different
PEs must be the consistent in the whole SP network. Otherwise, VPN will not work
normally.
For the related command, see mpls l2vpn encapsulation.
Example
Configure the mtu of VPN “3Com” as 1000.
[3Com-l2vpn-3Com] mtu 1000
peer enable Syntax

View
L2VPN address family view
Parameter
group-name: Peer group name, specifying the whole peer group.
peer-address: IP address of peer, specifying some specified peer.
Description
Using the peer enable command, you can activate specified peer (group) in L2VPN
address family view. Using the undo peer enable command, you can deactivate
specified peer (group) in L2VPN address family view.
By default, unicast peer (group) of IPv4 address family is activated, while other
peer (groups) are deactivated.
Example
Activate the peer (group) 192 in the L2VPN address family view.
[3Com-bgp] l2vpn-family
[3Com-bgp-af-l2vpn] peer 1.1.1.1 enable
MPLS TE
Configuration
Commands
add hop Syntax

add hop ip-address1 [ strict | loose ] [ after ip-address2 ]
View
Explicit path view
Parameter
ip-address1: IP address for the node to be added, which can be the interface
address or the router ID.
ip-address2: IP address before ip-address1.
strict: Next hop and local node must be in direct-connect mode.
loose: Next hop and local node can be in the mode other than direct-connect.
Description
Using the add hop command, you can add a node in the explicit path view.
Example
Add a node into the explicit path.
[3Com] mpls te explicit-path 3Com enable
[3Com-mpls-te-expl-path-3Com] add hop 10.0.0.1 after 10.0.0.2 loose
debugging mpls rsvp-te Syntax

debugging mpls rsvp-te { all | error | path | ptear | resv | rtear | rconf | hello | perr |
rerr | encdec | socket | traffic-control | main | tool }
undo debugging mpls rsvp-te { all | error | path | ptear | resv | rtear | rconf | hello |
perr | rerr | encdec | socket | traffic-control | main | tool }
View
User view
Parameter
all: Enables alarming of all levels.
error: Enables error-level alarming.
path: Enables path-level alarming.
ptear: Enables path tear-level alarming.
resv: Enables resv-level alarming.
rtear: Enables resv tear-level alarming.

rconf: Enables resv conf-level alarming.
hello: Enables hello-level alarming.
perr: Enables path error-level alarming.
rerr: Enables Resv error-level alarming.
encdec: Enables CODEC-level alarming.
socket: Enables socket-level alarming.
traffic-control: Enables traffic control-level alarming.
main: Enables main-level alarming.
tool: Enables alarming for auxiliary modules (for example timers).
Description
Using the debugging mpls rsvp-te command, you can enable alarming for all
RSVP-TE modules. Using the undo debugging mpls rsvp-te command, you can
disable alarming for all RSVP-TE modules.
By default, debugging is disabled.
Example
Enable alarming for all RSVP-TE modules.
<3Com> debugging mpls rsvp-te all
delete hop Syntax

delete hop ip-address
View
Explicit path view
Parameter
ip-address: IP address for the node to be deleted
Description
Using the delete hop command, you can delete a node in the explicit path view.
Example
Delete a node.
[3Com] mpls te explicit-path 3Com enable
[3Com-mpls-te-expl-path-3Com] delete hop 10.0.0.1
display mpls rsvp-te Syntax

display mpls rsvp-te { interface interface-type interface-number }
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-type: Specifies interface type.
interface-number: Specified interface number.
Description
Using the display mpls rsvp-te command, you can view RSVP interface
information.
By default, information of all RSVP interfaces will be displayed.
Example
Display information of all RSVP interfaces.
[3Com-Ethernet0] display mpls rsvp-te
Display MPLS RSVP-TE config information
LSR ID: 1.1.1.1
RSVP-TE is enable
RSVP HELLO is disable
RSVP RCONF is disable
Default RSVP style is SE
HELLO interval is 3 second
HELLO lost times is 3
PATH and RESV message refresh interval is 30 second
PATH and RESV message resent times is 3
Blockade keep times is 4
# Display information of the interface Ethernet0/0/0.
[3Com] display mpls rsvp-te interface e0/0/0
IF Name Status Total-BW Used-BW Hello Nbr
Ethernet0/0/0 DOWN 75000k 0k NO 0

established display mpls rsvp-te established [ interface interface-type interface-number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-number: Specifies interface number.
Description
Using the display mpls rsvp-te established command, you can view LSP and
bandwidth information for RSVP.
By default, the filtering rule and bandwidth of all RSVP interfaces will be displayed.
Example
Display LSP and bandwidth of all RSVP interfaces.
[3Com] display mpls rsvp-te established

peer display mpls rsvp-te peer [ interface interface-type interface-number ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-number: Specifies interface number.
Description
Using the display mpls rsvp-te peer command, you can view peer information for
RSVP.
By default, the peer information of all RSVP interfaces will be displayed.
Example
Display the peer information of all RSVP interfaces.
[3Com] display mpls rsvp-te peer

path display mpls rsvp-te path [ destination ip-address | lsp-id ip-address | source
ip-address | tunnel-id ip-address | verbose]
View
Any view
Parameter
ip-address: Specifies an ip address.
verbose: Detail information to display.
Description
Using the display mpls rsvp-te path command, you can view path information for
RSVP.
Example
Display path information of all RSVP interfaces.
[3Com] display mpls rsvp-te path
display mpls rsvp-te resv Syntax

display mpls rsvp-te resv [ destination ip-address | lsp-id ip-address | source
ip-address | tunnel-id ip-address | verbose]
View
Any view
Parameter
ip-address: Specifies IP address.
Description
Using the display mpls rsvp-te resv command, you can view reserved resources of
RSVP.
By default, the reserved resources of all RSVP interfaces will be displayed.
Example
Display the reserved resources of all RSVP interfaces.
[3Com] display mpls rsvp-te resv
display mpls te Syntax

explicit-path display mpls te explicit-path [ path-name ]
View
Any view
Parameter
path-name: Specifies explicit path name.
Description
Using the display mpls te explicit-path command, you can view explicit path
information.
Example
Display explicit path information of the router.
[3Com] display mpls te explicit-path
ip explicit-path ID : 200, name : test-path-1, status : enable
1: next-address 3.3.28.3 strict
2: next-address 3.3.27.3 strict
Table 2 Display information of display mpls te explicit-path

next-address 3.3.28.3 The first IP address on the explicit path
next-address 3.3.27.3 The second IP address on the explicit path

link-administration display mpls te link-administration admission-control [ interface interface-type
admission-control interface-num ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-num: Specifies interface number.
Description
Using the display mpls te link-administration admission-control command, you can
view local tunnels and their parameters (for example, priority, bandwidth, ingress,
egress and status).
By default, the admission control information of all RSVP interfaces will be

displayed.
For the related command, see display mpls te link-administration

bandwidth-distribution.
Example
Display the admission control information of all RSVP interfaces.
[3Com] display mpls te link-administration admission-control
System Information::
CrLsp Count: 4
CrLsp Selected: 4
CrLsp ID UP IF DOWN IF PRIORITY BW (kbps)
10.106.0.6:1 AT1/0/0.2 - 0/0 0
10.106.0.6:2 Et4/0/1 - 1/1 0
10.106.0.6:3 Et4/0/1 Et4/0/2 1/13000
10.106.0.6:4 AT1/0/0.2 AT0/0/0.2 1/1 3000
Table 3 Display Information of Display mpls te link-administration admission-control

CrLsp Count Total number of tunnels accepted
CrLsp Selected Count of qualified tunnels
CrLsp ID Tunnel ID
UP IF Upstream interface for the tunnel
DOWN IF Downstream interface for the tunnel
PRIORITY Priority for establishing and keeping tunnel
STATE Administrative state
BW (kbps) Bandwidth, in kbps

link-administration display mpls te link-administration bandwidth-distribution [ interface
bandwidth-distribution interface-type interface-num ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-num: Specifies interface number.
Description
Using the display mpls te link-administration bandwidth-distribution command,
you can view the information about the current link.
The displayed information may vary, in comparison with the actual configuration.
It depends on the flooding mode.
By default, the link information of all RSVP interfaces will be displayed.
Example
Display MPLS TE link-administration bandwidth distribution.
[3Com] display mpls te link-administration bandwidth-distribution
Ethernet4/0/1
System Information::
Links Count: 2
Link ID: Et4/0/1 (10.1.0.6)
Physical Bandwidth: 10000 kbits/sec
Max Reservable BW: 5000 kbits/sec (reserved:0% in, 60% out)
Up Thresholds: 15 30 45 60 75 80 85 90 95 96 97 98 99 100 (default)
Down Thresholds: 100 99 98 97 96 95 90 85 80 75 60 45 30 15 (default)
Downstream Bandwidth Information (kbits/sec):
KEEP PRIORITY LOCKED BW TOTAL LOCKED
0 0 0
1 3000 3000
2 0 3000
3 0 3000
4 0 3000
5 0 3000
6 0 3000
7 0 3000
display mpls te tunnel Syntax

display mpls te tunnel [ destination address ] [ up ][ down ] [ lsr-role { all | ingress |
egress | remote | transit } ] [ name tun-name ] [ incoming-interface interface-type
interface-number] [ outgoing-inteface interface-type interface-number ] [ interface
interface-type interface-number ] [ tunnel-identifier tun-id | ip-address ] [verbose]
View
Any view
Parameter
destination address: Displays the tunnels with this specified destination address.
up: Displays the tunnels in UP state.
down: Displays the tunnels in DOWN state.
lsp-role { all | ingress | egress | remote | transit }: Displays the tunnels with specified
role (all, ingress, egress, remote and transmit).
name tun-name: Displays the tunnel information with a specified name. If this
parameter is selected, the tunnel name will be got from the interface description.
Otherwise, tunnel name is contained in signaling messages and will be got by all
hops along the explicit path.
incoming-interface: Displays the tunnels using the specified ingress.
outgoing-interface: Displays the tunnels using the specified egress.
interface: Displays the tunnels using the specified ingress or egress.

tunnel-identifier: Displays the tunnel information with a specified ID.
Description
Using the display mpls te tunnel command, you can view tunnel information.
Example
Display MPLS TE Tunnel.
[3Com] display mpls te tunnel
Total Tunnel Number: 1
TunnelID 10.10.10.10-1,TunnelName test-tunnel-1 on Ingress
10.10.10.10,
Primary 1.1.1.1:1 10.10.10.10 - eth1/1/0down down
Reoptimized 1.1.1.1:10 10.10.10.10 - eth1/2/0up up
backup 1.1.1.1:2 10.10.10.10 - eth1/3/0down down
ordinary 1.1.1.1:3 10.10.10.10 - eth1/2/0down up
Table 4 Display Information of display mpls te tunnel

Total Tunnel Number Count of tunnels selected
Tunnel ID Tunnel ID in the tunnel header
Tunnel Name Tunnel name in the tunnel header
DESTINATION Destination router ID
UP IF Upstream interface for the tunnel
DOWN IF Downstream interface for the tunnel
ADMIN STATE Administrative state
OperStatus Operating state

commit-last display mpls te tunnel commit-last tun-num
View
Any view
Parameter
tun-num: Specifies tunnel number.
Description
Using the display mpls te tunnel commit-last command, you can view the latest
tunnel configuration information.
Example
Display the latest tunnel configuration information.
[3Com] display mpls te tunnel commit-last 0/0/0
Tunnel0
Status: Down
Loop detection: Enable
Record label: Disable
Resv Style: SE
Explicit path: xhy
Tunnel bandwidth: 200(kbps)
Destination: 100.1.1.1

running display mpls te tunnel running tun-num
View
Any view
Parameter
tun-num: Specifies tunnel number.
Description
Using the display mpls te tunnel running command, you can view the information
of active tunnels. Only configuration information of those tunnels where LSP has
been created will be displayed, excluding those for which configuration result has
been submitted, but no LSP has been created.
Example
Display the configuration information of the CR-LSPs created successfully.
[3Com] display mpls te tunnel running 0
Tunnel0
Status: Down
Loop detection: Enable
Record label: Disable
Resv Style: SE
Explicit path: xhy
Tunnel bandwidth: 200(kbps)
Destination: 100.1.1.1

statistics display mpls te tunnel statistics
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the display mpls te tunnel statistics command, you can view tunnel statistics.
Example
Display MPLS TE tunnel statistics.
[3Com] display mpls te tunnel statistics
Ingress: 1 ( 0 ready, 0 modifying, 1 setuping, 0 failed )
Transit: 0
Egress: 0
modify hop Syntax

modify hop ip-address1 ip-address2 [ strict | loose ]
View
Explicit path view
Parameter
ip-address1: Current IP address.
ip-address2: IP address after modification.
strict: Next hop and local node must be in direct-connect mode.
loose: Next hop and local node can be in the mode other than direct-connect.
Description
Using the modify hop command, you can specify or modify the addresses of the
nodes along explicit path in the explicit path view by index.
Example
Modify node information.
[3Com-mpls-te-expl-path-3Com] modify hop 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 loose
mpls rsvp-te Syntax

mpls rsvp-te
undo mpls rsvp-te
View
System view, interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the mpls rsvp-te command, you can enable RSVP-TE feature. Using the undo
mpls rsvp-te command, you can disable RSVP-TE feature.
MPLS feature must be enabled before using the command.
Disabling RSVP-TE feature in the system view will disable the feature at all
interfaces.
By default, RSVP-TE feature is disabled.
Example
Enable globally RSVP-TE feature.
[3Com] mpls rsvp-te
Enable RSVP-TE feature at the interface.

[3Com-Serial6/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te Syntax

blockade-multiplier mpls rsvp-te blockade-multiplier times
undo mpls rsvp-te blockade-multiplier
View
System view
Parameter
times: RSVP refreshing period multiplier for blockaded state timeout, in the range
of 1~255. By default, it is 3.
Description
Using the mpls rsvp-te blockade-multiplier command, you can set the multiplier
for blockaded state timeout. Blockade_Expired_Time = Kb ¥ refresh-time. Using
the undo mpls rsvp-te blockade-multiplier command, you can restore the default
value.
For the related commands, see mpls rsvp-te timer refresh.
Example
Set the multiplier as 5.
[3Com] mpls rsvp-te blockade-multiplier 5
Restore the default multiplier.

[3Com] undo mpls rsvp-te blockade-multiplier
mpls rsvp-te hello Syntax

mpls rsvp-te hello
undo mpls rsvp-te hello
View
System view, interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the mpls rsvp-te hello command, you can enable Hello mechanism to detect
RSVP peer. Using the undo mpls rsvp-te hello command, you can disable Hello
mechanism.
By default, Hello mechanism is disabled.
Example
Enable Hello mechanism.
[3Com] mpls rsvp-te hello
mpls rsvp-te hello-lost Syntax

mpls rsvp-te hello-lost times
undo mpls rsvp-te hello-lost
View
System view
Parameter
times: Times value when no Hello response messages are received consecutively, in
the range of 3~10. By default, it is 3.
Description
Using the mpls rsvp-te hello-lost command, you can the times value when no
Hello response messages are received consecutively. When the times value is
exceeded, the corresponding link is judged as faulty. Using the undo mpls rsvp-te
hello-lost command, you can restore the default value.
For the related command, see mpls rsvp-te timer hello.
Example
Set the times value to 5 when no Hello response messages are received
consecutively.
[3Com] mpls rsvp-te hello-lost 5
mpls rsvp-te Syntax

keep-multiplier mpls rsvp-te keep-multiplier times
undo mpls rsvp-te keep-multiplier
View
System view
Parameter
times: RSVP refreshing period multiplier for PSB and RSB timeout, in the range of
1~255. By default, it is 3.
Description
Using the mpls rsvp-te keep-multiplier command, you can set the multiplier for
PSB and RSB timeout. In calculating timed refreshing of PSB and RSB,
Expired_Time = (keep-multiplier + 0.5) ¥ 1.5 ¥ refresh-time. Using the undo mpls
rsvp-te keep-multiplier command, you can restore the default value.
For the related command, see mpls rsvp-te timer refresh.
Example
Set the multiplier as 5.
[3Com] mpls rsvp-te keep-multiplier 5
Restore the default multiplier.

[3Com] undo mpls rsvp-te keep-multiplier
mpls rsvp-te resvconfirm Syntax

mpls rsvp-te resvconfirm
undo mpls rsvp-te resvconfirm
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the mpls rsvp-te resvconfirm command, you can start the confirmation
mechanism for resource reservation on a node. Using the undo mpls rsvp-te
resvconfirm command, you can close reservation confirmation mechanism.
By default, reservation confirmation mechanism is disabled.
Example
Enable and disable reservation confirmation mechanism.
[3Com] mpls rsvp-te resvconfirm
[3Com] undo mpls rsvp-te resvconfirm
mpls rsvp-te timer hello Syntax

mpls rsvp-te timer hello seconds
undo mpls rsvp-te timer hello
View
System view
Parameter
seconds: Time interval for refreshing Hello messages, in the range of 1 to 60
seconds. By default, it is 3 seconds.
Description
Using the mpls rsvp-te timer hello command, you can define time interval for
refreshing Hello messages. Using the undo mpls rsvp-te timer hello command, you
can restore the default value.
For the related commands, see mpls rsvp-te hello and mpls rsvp-te hello-lost.
Example
Set Hello message refreshing period as 5 seconds.
[3Com] mpls rsvp-te timer hello 5
Restore the default value.

[3Com] undo mpls rsvp-te timer hello
mpls rsvp-te timer Syntax

refresh mpls rsvp-te timer refresh seconds
undo mpls rsvp-te timer refresh
View
System view
Parameter
seconds: Time interval for refreshing Path/Resv messages, in the range of 1~65535
seconds. By default, it is 30 seconds.
Description
Using the mpls rsvp-te timer refresh command, you can define refreshing period
for Path and Resv messages of the node. Using the undo mpls rsvp-te timer refresh
command, you can restore the default values.
For the related command, see mpls rsvp-te keep-multiplier.
Example
Set refreshing period for Path and Resv messages as 60 seconds.
[3Com] mpls rsvp-te timer refresh 60
Restore the default refreshing period.

[3Com] undo mpls rsvp-te timer refresh
mpls-te enable Syntax

mpls-te enable
undo mpls-te
View
Area view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the mpls-te enable command, you can enable TE function in OSPF area.
Using the undo mpls-te command, you can cancel TE function in OSPF area.
CAUTION:
■ By default, TE function is disabled in OSPF area.
■ TE function cannot be enabled until Opaque function is enabled for OSPF
procedure.
For related command, see opaque-capability enable.
Example
Enable TE function in OSPF area.
[3Com-ospf-100-area-0.0.0.1] mpls-te enable
mpls te Syntax
mpls te
undo mpls te
View
MPLS view, interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the mpls te command, you can enable MPLS TE feature. Using the undo
mpls te command, you can disable MPLS TE feature.
You need to enable this feature both globally and on the interface, and then the
interface will flood this resource information to the right IGP link state database
and accept TE tunnel signaling request.
By default, MPLS TE feature is disabled.
Example
Globally enable MPLS TE feature.
[3Com-mpls] mpls te
Enable MPLS TE feature at the interface Ethernet1/0/0.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] mpls te
mpls te bandwidth Syntax

mpls te bandwidth bandwidth
undo mpls te bandwidth
View
Tunnel view
Parameter
bandwidth: Bandwidth for the tunnel, in kbps. By default, it is 0.
Description
Using the mpls te bandwidth command, you can specify bandwidth for MPLS TE
tunnel. Using the undo mpls te bandwidth command, you can restore the default
value.
The maximum reservable bandwidth must be greater than sum of the bandwidth
of all tunnels.
For related commands, see mpls te max-reservable-bandwidth.
Example
Set the tunnel bandwidth as 8kbps.
[3Com-tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth 8
mpls te commit Syntax

mpls te commit
View
Tunnel view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the mpls te commit command, you can submit current configuration result
for the tunnel interface to MPLS.
The configuration will not take effect and no LSP will be set up until the
configured tunnel feature is submitted. If you modify a feature option and submit
the result for several times in one option, only the last modification will take
effect.
You can use the display mpls te commit-last command to view the latest
configuration result.
For the related commands, see display mpls te commit-last.
Example
Submit current configuration result for the tunnel interface to MPLS.
[3Com-tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
mpls te explicit-path Syntax

mpls te explicit-path path-name [ enable | disable ]
undo mpls te explicit-path path-name
View
System view
Parameter
path-name: Path name
enable: Current path is available.
disable: Current path is unavailable. This setting prevents the path from being
used during configuration.
Description
Using the mpls te explicit-path command, you can enter the explicit path view and
create an explicit path or modify a specific path. The explicit is a list of IP
addresses, with each entry representing a node or a link. Using the undo mpls te
explicit-path command, you can delete a specified path.
By default, no explicit is specified.
For related commands, see mpls te path explicit-path.
Example
Enter the explicit path “3Com” view.
[3Com] mpls te explicit-path 3Com
mpls te Syntax
flooding-thresholds mpls te flooding-thresholds { down | up } percent [ percent ] ...
undo mpls te flooding-thresholds [ down | up ]
View
Interface view
Parameter
down: Reservable bandwidth values available in descending order
up: Reservable bandwidth values available in ascending order
percent: Threshold level for flooding, in percentage, in the range of 1~100. For
the up keyword: the values available include 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95,
96, 97, 98, 99 and 100. For the down keyword, the values include 100, 99, 98,
97, 96, 95, 90, 85, 80, 75, 60, 45, 30 and 15.
Description
Using the mpls te flooding-thresholds command, you can define flooding
threshold. Using the undo mpls te flooding-thresholds te loop-detection
If the reservable bandwidth available at the interface exceeds the preset threshold,
it will trigger link state update messages being distributed among the network.
Otherwise, the link state update messages are sent by flooding period.
For related commands, see mpls te timer periodic-flooding.

Example
None
mpls te Syntax
link-administrative- mpls te link-administrative-group attribute
group
undo mpls te link-administrative-group
View
Interface view
Parameter
attribute: Link management group attribute, also called color, which is an integer
in hexadecimal. It can be a constraint in matching physical path.
Description
Using the mpls te link-administrative-group command, you can configure link
management group at the interface. Using the undo mpls te loop-detection
By configuring link management group attribute, you can set up the explicit paths
which match the requirements. For example, you can set the attribute of all
interfaces along the LSP as 20.
By default, link management group is not configured.
Example
Configure link management group at the interface ethernet1/0/0 to 20.
[3Com-ethernet1/0/0] mpls te link-administrative-group 20
mpls te metric Syntax

mpls te metric metric
undo mpls te metric
View
Interface view
Parameter
metric: IGP cost for TE links. By default, it is 1.
Description
Using the mpls te metric command, you can configure IGP cost for TE links. Using
the undo mpls te metric command, you can restore the default cost value.
Example
Configure the IGP cost at the interface tunnel1 as 20.
[3Com-tunnel1] mpls te metric 20
mpls te loop-detection Syntax

mpls te loop-detection
undo mpls te loop-detection
View
Tunnel view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the mpls te loop-detection command, you can indicate to run loop test in
creating tunnels. Using the undo mpls te loop-detection command, you can
remove loop test.
For signaling protocol, loop testing is optional.
By default, loop detection is disabled.
Example
Indicate to run loop test in creating tunnels.
[3Com-tunnel1] mpls te loop-detection
mpls te Syntax
max-link-bandwidth mpls te max-link-bandwidth bandwidth
undo mpls te max-link-bandwidth
View
Interface view
Parameter
bandwidth: Maximum link bandwidth at the interface, in the range of
0~32000000bps. By default, it is the actual bandwidth of the physical interface.
Description
Using the mpls te max-link-bandwidth command, you can configure maximum
link bandwidth at the interface. Using the undo mpls te max-link-bandwidth
Example
Set the maximum bandwidth at the interface as 64kbps.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] mpls te max-link-bandwidth 64
mpls te Syntax
max-reservable-bandwi mpls te max-reservable-bandwidth bandwidth
dth
undo mpls te max-reservable-bandwidth
View
Interface view
Parameter
bandwidth: The maximum link bandwidth at the interface, in the range of
0~32000000bps. By default, it is 75 percentage of the actual bandwidth at the
interface.
Description
Using the mpls te max-reservable-bandwidth command, you can configure the
reservable bandwidth at the interface. Using the undo mpls te
max-reservable-bandwidth command, you can restore the default value.
The maximum reservable bandwidth at an interface should be greater than the

sum of all tunnel bandwidth.
For related commands, see mpls te bandwidth.
Example
Set the maximum reservable bandwidth at an interface as 64kbps.
[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] mpls te max-reservable-bandwidth 64
mpls te path Syntax

explicit-path mpls te path explicit-path pathname
undo mpls te path explicit-path
View
Tunnel view
Parameter
path-name: Explicit path name.
Description
Using the mpls te path explicit-path command, you can configure explicit for a
tunnel. Using the undo mpls te path explicit-path command, you can delete the
route.
For related commands, see mpls te explicit-path.
Example
[3Com-tunnel1] mpls te path explicit-path 3Com
mpls te record-label Syntax

mpls te record-label
undo mpls te record-label
View
Tunnel view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the mpls te record-label command, you can indicate to record actual route
and label in creating tunnels. Using the undo mpls te record-label command, you
can remove the setting.
For signaling protocol, recording actual route is optional. RSVP-TE can also record
route labels.
By default, actual route is not recorded.
Example
Indicate to record actual route and label in creating tunnels.
[3Com-tunnel1] mpls te record-label
mpls te resv-style Syntax

mpls te resv-style [ ff | se ]
undo mpls te resv-style
View
Tunnel view
Parameter
ff: Selects FF (fixed filter) for resource reservation
se: Selects FF (shared explicit) for resource reservation
Description
Using the mpls te resv-style command, you can define resource reservation style in
creating tunnels. Using the undo mpls te resv-style command, you can restore the
default style.
By default, se is selected.
Only RSVP-TE protocol supports both FF and SE modes, so you must first indicate
to run RSVP-TE protocol in creating tunnels before defining resource reservation
style. Each LSP must be configured with a definite reservation style.
The FE type defines a distinct sender list (with IP address and LSP ID defined) and
particular reservation style which is not shared with other senders for each sender.
The FE type is applicable to concurrent but independent services which are from
different senders.
In the SE type, only a single reservation style is defined for an explicit path, which
can be shared by those definitely-listed senders Since the senders are contained in
RESV messages and different labels are allocated with different receiver-sender
pairs, so in this mode separate LSP can be established.
Example
Select SE type in creating CRLSP tunnels.
[3Com-tunnel1] mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te
[3Com-tunnel1] mpls te resv-style se
mpls te signal-protocol Syntax

rsvp-te mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te
View
Tunnel view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te command, you can set signaling protocol
in creating tunnels as RSVP.
Example
Select RSVP in creating RSVP tunnels.
[3Com-tunnel] mpls te signal protocol cpldp
mpls te timer Syntax

periodic-flooding mpls te timer periodic-flooding seconds
undo mpls te timer periodic-flooding
View
MPLS view
Parameter
seconds: Flood period, in the range of 0~3600 seconds. By default, it is 180
seconds.
Description
Using the mpls te timer periodic-flooding command, you can define flooding
period. Using the undo mpls te timer periodic-flooding command, you can restore
the default value.
All interfaces send link state update messages by flooding period.
Example
Set flood period to 2000 seconds.
[3Com-mpls] mpls te timer periodic-flooding 2000
next hop Syntax

next hop ip-address [ strict | loose ]
View
Explicit path view
Parameter
ip-address: Next IP address along the explicit path
strict: The next hop and local node must be in direct-connect mode.
loose: The next hop and local node can be in the mode other than direct-connect.
Description
Using the next hop command, you can specify next IP address on the explicit path.
Using the undo next hop command, you can delete the IP address specified.
By default, strict is selected.
Example
Specify the next IP address as 10.0.0.1.
[3Com-mpls-te-expl-path-3Com]] next hop 10.0.0.1 loose
tunnel-protocol mpls te Syntax

tunnel-protocol mpls te
View
Tunnel view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the tunnel-protocol mpls te command, you can set the Tunnel interface in
CR-LSP tunnel mode.
When TE is disabled, all tunnel interfaces turns into GRE tunnel mode, in which,
only GRE-related commands are visible and executable. While in CR-LSP tunnel
mode, you can only see and execute CR-LSP-related commands.
The tunnel interface can be in multiple encapsulation types. By default, it is in GRE

point-to-point mode.
For the related commands, see interface tunnel.
Example
Set up a tunnel between Routers Quidway1 and Quidway2, with encapsulation
protocol being mpls te.
[3Com1-Tunnel3] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[3Com2-Tunnel2] tunnel-protocol mpls te
view hop Syntax

view hop [ ip-address ]
View
Explicit path view
Parameter
ip-address: IP address of the node
Description
Using the view hop command, you can view node information.
Example
Display node information.
[3Com-mpls-te-expl-path-tandoon] view hop
explicit-path id : 0, name : xhy, status : enable

3 Com Com Ref

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

3 Com Com Ref

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

3Com Router Command

3Com Router 3000 DSL Family

Part No. 10014369

ABOUT THIS GUIDE

2 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE & MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

3 INTERFACE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

4 LINK LAYER PROTOCOL

8 MPLS BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS

ABOUT THIS GUIDE

Table 1 Notice Icons

Icon Notice Type Description

Caution Information that alerts you to potential loss of data

Warning Information that alerts you to potential personal

Table 2 Text Conventions

Screen This typeface represents information as it appears on the screen.

Words in italics Italics are used to:

These documents are available in Adobe Acrobat Reader Portable Document

Basic Configuration Commands

■ Clock Summer Times

Clock Summer Times Syntax

clock summer-time zone_name { absolute | recurring } HH:MM:SS

zone_name: Name of the summer time, which is a character string of 1

For related command, see clock timezone.

<3Com> clock summer-time z2 absolute 06:00:00 2002/06/08 06:00:00

clock datetime Syntax

clock datetime HH:MM:SS YYYY/MM/DD

clock timezone Syntax

For related command, see clock summer-time.

4 Interface view: Include ethernet (FE), gigabitethernet (GE), serial (serial

commandkey: Command to be set.

display clipboard Syntax

display clock Syntax

Display the current time.

<3Com> display clock

For the related command, see history-command size.

Display history commands.

<3Com> display history-command

show interface e 1/0/0

display version Syntax

login: Greeting information when login.

shell: Greeting information of the creation of a user session.

incoming: Greeting information when login to the user view.

text: Content of greeting information.

SHELL : Hello! Welcome use 3Com R1760.

CTRL_G: Specify a command for the hotkey <CTRL+G>.

CTRL_L: Specify a command for the hotkey <CTRL+L>.

CTRL_O: Specify a command for the hotkey <CTRL+O>.

CTRL_T: Specify a command for the hotkey <CTRL+T>.

CTRL_U: Specify a command for the hotkey <CTRL+U>.

command_text: The command line correlated with the hotkey.

By default, CTRL_G, CTRL_L and CTRL_O correspond to the following

display current-configuration (display current configuration);

ESC_< Specify the beginning of clipboard.

By default, the language mode is English.

Views fall into three levels that are, in ascending order:

■ User view (with user level as 0)

For the related command, see return.

Any view, except user view

For the related command, see quit.

Level: User level ranging from 0 to 3.

■ Access: Include the network diagnosis tool commands (ping, tracert),

For the related command, see super password.

super password Syntax